Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAbout066065-V7 - Construction-Related - Contract - Webber Waterworks LLCORT WORTH® CONTRACT FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF CSC No. 66065-V7 Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility City Project No. C01239 Mattie Parker Jesus "Jay" Chapa Mayor City Manager Chris Harder Director, Water Department Prepared for The City of Fort Worth Water Department VOLUME 7 OF 12 APRIL 2026 EXECUTED PLUMMER *�..-•- � ••..ter{� Plummer Associates, Inc j *=• ........... • • • • • • • *�� 1320 S University Drive, Suite 300 JOSHUA P. FRISINGER OFFICIAL RECORD Fort Worth, Texas 76107 it °•97545 ✓ CITY SECRETARY TBPE Firm No. F-13 11N /OHAL �.. FT. WORTH, TX In Association with ��� %�. 6/10/2026 GAILIII:? Gupta & Associates, Inc jL 41IrC CONSULTING ENGINEERING Automation I I Acompanyof of Infrastructure tv% McKIM�CREED Saco s. LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK MARYS CREEK WRY SECTION 00 01 07 ENGINEER'S SEALS PAGE SPECIFICATION PREPARED BY PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. TBPE FIRM NO. F-13 Joshua P. Frisinger, P.E. #97545 Section Number and Title Division 00 Procurement And Contracting Division 01 General Requirements (Except 01 45 33 Special Inspection Observation and Testing and 01 88 15 Anchorage and Bracing) Division 02 Demolition 06 70 00 Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Products & Fabrications 06 74 13 Fiberglass Weirs and Baffles 13 34 23.33 Precast Concrete Buildings 22 14 29 Submersible Sump Pump 32 31 00 Fences and Gates 33 0110.58 Disinfection Potable Water Piping and Tanks 33 05 13 Manholes 33 05 39.41 Reinforced Concrete Pipe 33 32 26 Ejector Pumps 35 20 16.25 Fabricated Slide Gates and Stop Logs 40 01 05 Field Testing of Piping Systems 40 05 05 Piping System, Basic Materials and Methods 40 05 15 Piping Support Systems 40 05 19 Ductile Iron Pipe 40 05 23 Stainless Steel Process Pipe and Tubing 40 05 24 Steel Pipe 40 05 31.13 PVC and CPVC Process Pipe 40 05 33 High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Process Pipe 40 05 36 Piping System, Fiberglass Pressure Pipe 41 22 13.13 Overhead Cranes 41 22 23.16 Portable Davit Crane and Winch 41 22 23.19 Monorail Hoists 43 22 10 Common Requirements for Pumps 43 40 01 Polyethylene Storage Tank rE'�q�ll 43 23 69 44 42 56.16 Chemical Feed Systems Peristaltic Hose Pump * . irtl� I JOSHUA P. FRISINGER r --------------- � 1� O- 97545 3/30/2026 Joshua P. Frisinger, P.E. #97545 ,.-� MARCH 23, 2026 ENGINEER'S SEALS PAGE ©COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 0001 07- 1 MARYS CREEK WRF SPECIFICATION PREPARED BY PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. TBPE FIRM NO. F-13 Paula A. Monaco, PhD, P.E. #132844 Section Number and Title 40 75 00.01 Bioreactor Instrumentation System 40 05 74.13 Diaphragm Valves for Aeration Control 43 11 12 Blower High Speed Turbo 43 21 39 Pumps, Dry -Pit Submersible Centrifugal 43 22 56.01 Submersible Mixers 4442 25.02 Aluminum Flat Panel Cover System 4442 56.04 Submersible Pumps 4445 16.02 Fine Bubble Air Diffuser System 46 25 34 FOG and Scum Mixing Equipment PAULA A. MONACO a# 132844 iQr % 1,1���\ 3/30/2026 Paula A. Monaco, PhD, P.E. #132844 ENGINEER'S SEALS PAGE MARCH 23, 2026 0001 07-2 ©C0PYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRF SPECIFICATION PREPARED BY PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. TBPE FIRM NO. F-13 Jenny Beth Murray, P.E. #142379 Section Number and Title 44 42 19.04 Rotary Positive Displacement Blower 4442 56.13 Progressing Cavity Pumps 46 51 21 Aeration System, Coarse Bubble Membrane Diffusers .�P�E ?L ...t 1 *; ...............................:.... JENNY BETH MURRAY .................................... 142379 : c 3/30/2026 Jenny Beth Murray, P.E. #142379 MARCH 23, 2026 ENGINEER'S SEALS PAGE ©COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 0001 07-3 MARYS CREEK WRF SPECIFICATION PREPARED BY PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. TBPE FIRM NO. F-13 Bradley Deaton, P.E. #133296 Section Number and Title 44 42 56.03 44 42 56.04 �.:�:• .....................*: BRADLEY T. DEATON II �I ...:......133296 ....; .... ENS Vertical Turbine Pumps Submersible Pumps Bradley Deaton, P.E. #133296 ENGINEER'S SEALS PAGE MARCH 23, 2026 0001 07-4 ©COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRF SPECIFICATION PREPARED BY PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. TBPE FIRM NO. F-13 Hannah Salinas Frels, P.E. #130165 Section Number and Title 13 34 23 Prefabricated Fiberglass Shelters 33 21 00 Non -Chlorinated, Non -Potable Plant Water System 40 05 36.13 Foul Air Fiberglass Ductwork 40 05 64.43 Fiberglass Dampers 43 1119 Foul Air Fans 44 3111 Biological Tower Type Odor Control System 44 3116 Carbon Adsorber Odor Control System 44 31 83 Foul Air Collection System Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing HANNAH E. SALINAS FRELS 130165 L ENb'� 03/31/2026 Hannah Salinas Frels, P.E. #130165 MARCH 23, 2026 ENGINEER'S SEALS PAGE ©COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 0001 07-5 MARYS CREEK WRF SPECIFICATION PREPARED BY PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. TBPE FIRM NO. F-13 Raviola Wenno, P.E. #142677 Section Number and Title 46 46 23 Tank Washdown and Booster Pump System NAt '.\' 3/30/2026 Raviola Wenno, P.E. #142677 ENGINEER'S SEALS PAGE MARCH 23, 2026 0001 07-6 ©COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRF SPECIFICATION PREPARED BY GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. TBPE FIRM NO. F-2593 Andrew Reed, P.E. #123384 Section Number and Title Division 26 Electrical 40 41 00 Electrical Heat Tracing �P�E OF r jANDREW A..REED� �9�•.•.123384 ENS �.•� 03/30/2026 Andrew Reed, P.E. #123384 MARCH 23, 2026 ©C0PYRIGHT 2025 PLUMIVR ENGINEER'S SEALS PAGE 000107-7 MARYS CREEK WRF SPECIFICATION PREPARED BY SIGNATURE AUTOMATION TBPE FIRM NO. F-4711 Anthony V. Scudieri, P.E. #89088 Section Number and Title 28 00 05 Electronic Security System 40 61 00 Process Control Systems General Provisions 40 61 21 Process Control System — Testing 40 61 21A Instrument Calibration Certificate 40 61 21B Unwitnessed Factory Test Forms 40 61 21 C Witnessed Factory Test Forms 40 61 21D Operational Readiness Test Forms 40 61 21E Functional Demonstration Test Forms 40 61 21F Site Acceptance Test Forms 40 61 26 Process Control Systems — Training 40 61 93 Process Control Systems Input Output List 40 61 96 Control Descriptions 40 62 00 Computer Hardware and Software 40 63 00 PLC Hardware and Software 40 66 00 Network Equipment 40 66 33 Fiber -Optic Communication Cabling and Connectors 40 6643 Radio Equipment and Systems 40 66 66 Communication Towers 40 67 00 Control Panels and Components 40 67 63 Uninterruptible Power Supplies 40 68 00 Applications Engineering Services 40 71 00 Flow Instruments 40 72 00 Level Instruments 40 73 00 Pressure Instruments 40 74 00 Temperature Instruments 40 75 00 Liquid Analytical Instruments 40 76 00 Gas Analytical Instruments Anthony V. Scudieri, P.E. #89088 /)J? O ANTHONY V. SCUDIERI .............................. -o. 89088 ; � �t��FSS�C E N S NG��AW 6 3�3 ENGINEER'S SEALS PAGE MARCH 23, 2026 0001 07-8 ©COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRY SPECIFICATION PREPARED BY JQ-IMEG LLC TBPE FIRM NO. F-26651 Ovidiu M. Sipos, P.E. #111707 Section Number and Title 31 10 00 Site Clearing 31 23 23.1 Borrow 31 25 00 Erosion and Sediment Control 31 37 00 Riprap 32 13 13 Concrete Paving 32 13 20 Concrete Sidewalks, Driveways, and Barrier Free Ramps 32 13 73 Concrete Paving Joint Sealants 32 17 23 Pavement Markings 33 4110 Reinforced Concrete Storm Drain Pipe Culverts 33 49 10 Storm Drain Manholes and Junction Boxes 33 49 20 Curb and Drop Inlets OF Tf 1�+ J / w : ...........:.... OVIDIU M. SIPOS 111707 !ONA L f Ovidiu M. Sipos, P.E. #111707 MARCH 23, 2026 ENGINEER'S SEALS PAGE ©COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 0001 07-9 MARYS CREEK WRF SPECIFICATION PREPARED BY CCA LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTS, INC. TBAE# 3027 Jaclyn Clark Szafranic, Registered Landscape Architect #3165 Section Number and Title 01 56 39 Tree Protection, Removal, and Pruning 32 84 00 Landscape Irrigation System 32 92 00 Turf and Grasses 32 93 00 Landscaping 03/30/2026 Jaclyn Clark Szafranic, Registered Landscape Architect #3165 ENGINEER'S SEALS PAGE MARCH 23, 2026 0001 07- 10 ©C0PYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRF SPECIFICATION PREPARED BY JACOBS ENGINEERING GROUP TBPE FIRM NO. F-2966 Lei Wei, PE No. 99776 Section Number and Title 31 1000 31 23 13 31 23 16 31 23 19.01 31 2323 31 23 23.15 314100 Site Clearing Subgrade Preparation Excavation Dewatering Fill and Backfill Trench Backfill Shoring MARCH 31, 2026 ENGINEER'S SEALS PAGE ©COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 00 01 07 - 11 MARYS CREEK WRF SPECIFICATION PREPARED BY JACOBS ENGINEERING GROUP TBPE FIRM NO. F-2966 Alex Shefferman, P.E. Section Number and Title 21 13 13 2831 00 ALEX F RMAN j 1, -- 14.:::: 09 i 3/30/26 Alex Shefferman, P.E. Wet -Pipe Sprinkler Systems Fire Detection and Alarm MARCH 31, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER ENGINEER'S SEALS PAGE 00 01 07- 12 MARYS CREEK WRF SPECIFICATION PREPARED BY JACOBS ENGINEERING GROUP TBPE FIRM NO. F-2966 Brian Lee Hendon, Registered Architect No. 25284 Section Number and Title 04 21 13.13 Masonry Veneer 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry 06 16 00 Sheathing 06 41 00 Architectural Wood Casework 06 82 00 Glass Fiber Reinforced Plastic 07 13 53 Elastomeric Sheet Waterproofing 07 21 01 Therman Insulation 07 26 16 Below Grade Vapor Retarders 07 27 26 Fluid -Applied Membrane Air Barriers 07 40 00 Roofing and Siding Panels 07 42 13.23 Metal Composite Material Wall Panels 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07 70 00 Roof Specialties and Accessories 07 84 00 Firestopping 07 92 00 Joint Sealants 07 95 13 Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies 08 11 16 Aluminum Flush Doors 08 12 16 Interior Aluminum Frames and Doors 08 16 13 Fiberglass Doors 08 31 23 Floor Doors 08 33 23 Overhead Coiling Doors 08 41 13 Aluminum -Framed Entrances and Storefronts 08 44 13 Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls 08 71 00 Door Hardware 08 80 00 Glazing 08 90 00 Louvers and Vents 09 22 16 Nonstructural Metal Framing 09 29 00 Gypsum Board 09 30 00 Tiling 09 5113 Acoustical Panel Ceilings 09 65 00 Resilient Flooring 09 67 00 Fluid -Applied Flooring 09 77 01 Fiberglass -Reinforced Plastic (FPR) Panel Walls 09 80 00 Acoustical Wall Panel System 09 90 00 Painting and Coating 10 14 00 Signage 10 21 00 Toilet Compartments 10 28 00 Toilet and Bath Accessories 10 44 00 Fire Protection and Safety Equipment 10 51 00 Lockers 10 73 00 Metal Awnings and Canopies ENGINEER'S SEALS PAGE MARCH 23, 2026 0001 07 - 10 ©COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRF 10 8113 Architectural Bird Control 11 31 00 Appliances 12 35 53.13 Metal Laboratory Casework 12 48 16 Entrance Floor Grilles March 30. Brian Lee Hendon, Registered Architect No. 25284. MARCH 23, 2026 ENGINEER'S SEALS PAGE ©COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 0001 07 - 11 MARYS CREEK WRF SPECIFICATION PREPARED BY JACOBS ENGINEERING GROUP TBPE FIRM NO. F-2966 Phillip K. Dewolfe, P.E. Section Number and Title 23 05 14B HVAC Adjustable Frequency Drives 23 05 48B Vibration Isolation and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment 23 05 93B Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC 23 07 00B HVAC Insulation 23 09 00B Instrumentation and Control Devices for HVAC 23 09 13 HVAC Controls — Field Components and Instruments 23 09 23B Direct Digital Control System for HVAC 23 23 00B Refrigerant Piping 23 31 13B Metal Ducts and Accessories 23 3116.16B Thermoset Fiberglass -Reinforced Plastic Ducts and Accessories 23 34 00B HVAC Fans 23 36 00B Air Terminal Units 23 37 00B Air Outlets and Inlets 23 77 00 Air Handling Units 23 81 00 Unitary Air -Conditioning Equipment 23 82 00 Terminal Heating and Cooling Units ,IIJ PFGILLOP fit_ pEW'OLFE �.. .................. - 3+34,'6 Phillip K. DeWolfe, P.E. No. 102003 MARCH 31, 2026 ENGINEER'S SEALS PAGE ©COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 0001 07- 15 MARYS CREEK WRF Section Number and Title 22 07 00 Plumbing Piping Insulation 22 10 01 Plumbing Piping and Accessories 22 10 01.02 Polyvinyl Chloride Drain Waste and Vent Pipe and Fittings 22 10 01.03 Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings 22 10 01.04 Acid -Resistant Cast Iron Pipe and Fittings 22 10 01.06 Acid -Resistant Polypropylene Waste and Vent Pipe and Fittings 22 10 01.08 High -Density Polyethylene Pipe and Fittings — Water and Sewer Service 22 10 01.12 Polyethylene Pipe and Fittings — Natural Gas Service 22 30 00 Plumbing Equipment 22 40 00 Plumbing Fixtures . .............. � PHILLIP K DEVVOLFE 3/30.2 Phillip K. DeWolfe, P.E. No. 102003 ENGINEER'S SEALS PAGE MARCH 31, 2026 0001 07- 16 ©COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRY SPECIFICATION PREPARED BY JACOBS ENGINEERING GROUP TBPE FIRM NO. F-2966 Alex Bannerot, P.E. No. 91686 Section Number and Title 01 45 33 Special Inspection, Observation, and Testing 01 88 15 Anchorage and Bracing 03 01 32 Repair of Vertical and Overhead Concrete Surfaces 03 01 33 Repair of Horizontal Concrete Surfaces 03 10 00 Concrete Forming and Accessories 03 15 00 Concrete Joints and Accessories 03 21 00 Steel Reinforcing 03 30 00 Cast -In -Place Concrete 03 35 00 Concrete Finishing 03 39 00 Concrete Curing 03 40 00 Precast Concrete 03 62 00 Grouting 03 63 00 Concrete Doweling 03 64 23 Epoxy Injection Grouting Injection Grouting 03 64 24 Polyurethane Injection Grouting 04 22 00 Concrete Unit Masonry 05 05 19 Post -Installed Anchors 05 05 23 Welding 05 12 00 Structural Steel Framing 05 21 19 Open Web Steel Joist Framing 05 31 00 Steel Decking 05 41 00 Structural Metal Stud Framing 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications 05 51 19 Aluminum Stairs and Platforms 05 52 16 Aluminum Guardrails (Railings) 05 53 00 Metal Gratings 06 82 00 Glass -Fiber -Reinforced Plastic 13 34 19 Metal Building Systems 33 16 13.15 Prestressed Concrete Tank with Steel Diaphragm ALEX SANNEROT 916B6 iur,kr 34 Wit 2026 aacbns Enginearirar� Group inc. Alex Bannerot, P.E. No. 91686 Texas Risiration 42966 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER ENGINEER'S SEALS PAGE 00 01 07-17 MARYS CREEK WRF SPECIFICATION PREPARED BY JACOBS ENGINEERING GROUP TBPE FIRM NO. F-2966 Arifur Rahman, PE No. 133452 Section Number and Title 4442 56.13 Progressing Cavity Pumps 4444 63.01 Polymer Feed System, Liquid 4446 13.02 Screw Conveyor System 4446 26.03 Rotary Drum Thickeners .• �.1 ..Ir ••AI•, . •. * . 00 ■.a+.....................i Ar ARIFUR RAHI.IA - I� R� 135 342 .• 30 March 2026 Arifur Rahman, PE No. 133452. MARCH 31, 2026 ©C0PYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER ENGINEER'S SEALS PAGE 0001 07- 18 TABLE OF CONTENTS REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS CITY OF FORT WORTH MARY'S CREEK WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY Volume 1 Section Number and Title DIVISION 00 - CONTINUED 00 00 00 Cover 00 01 07 Engineer's Seals Pages 00 0110 Table of Contents 00 05 10 Mayor and Council Communications (M&C) 00 05 15 Addendum 1, 2 and 3 Volume 2 DIVISION 00 - CONTINUED 0005 15 Addendum 4 Volume 3 DIVISION 00 - CONTINUED 00 05 15 Addendum 5, 6, 7, and 8 Volume 4 DIVISION 00 - CONTINUED 00 1113 Invitation to Offerors 00 2113 Instructions to Offerors 00 35 13 Conflict of Interest Statement 00 41 00 Proposal Form 00 42 43 Offeror's Proposal Form 0043 13 Proposal Security 00 43 37 Vendor Compliance to State Law Non Resident Proposer 00 45 12 Subcontractor and Major Equipment Supplier List 00 45 26 Contractor Compliance with Workers Compensation Law 00 52 43 Agreement 0061 13 Performance Bond 0061 14 Payment Bond 00 6119 Maintenance Bond 00 61 25 Certificate of Insurance 00 72 00 General Conditions 00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions July 30, 2026 TABLE OF CONTENTS COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 00 01 10 - 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS CITY OF FORT WORTH MARY'S CREEK WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY DIVISION 00 - CONTINUED 00 80 00 TWDB Required Documents 00 80 01 TWDB Forms and Templates DIVISION 01 01 11 00 Summary of Work 01 11 17 Installation of Pre -Selected Equipment 01 12 16 Sequence of Construction 01 2110 Unit Bid Items 01 25 00 Substitution Procedures 01 26 00 Contract Modification Procedures 01 26 13 Requests for Information 01 29 00 Payment Procedures 01 31 13 Project Coordination 01 31 19 Preconstruction Meetings 01 31 20 Project Meetings 01 32 16 Construction Progress Schedule 01 32 33 Preconstruction Video 01 32 35 Aerial Photographic Documentation 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures 01 35 13 Special Project Procedures 01 40 00 Quality Requirements 01 42 13 Abbreviations and Acronyms 01 43 33 Manufacturer's Field Services 01 45 16.13 Contractor Quality Control 01 45 23 Testing and Inspection Services 01 45 33 Special Inspection Observation and Testing 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 56 39 Tree Protection, Removal, and Pruning 01 57 13 Storm Water Pollution Prevention 01 58 13 Temporary Project Signage 01 61 00 Common Product Requirements 01 70 00 Mobilization and Remobilization 01 71 23 Construction Staking and Survey 01 73 00 Execution Requirements 01 7423 Cleaning 01 75 01 Equipment Factory Acceptance Testing 01 76 00 Asset Management List 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures 01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data 01 78 36 Warranties 01 78 39 Project Record Documents TABLE OF CONTENTS July 30, 2026 000110-2 © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER TABLE OF CONTENTS REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS CITY OF FORT WORTH MARY'S CREEK WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY DIVISION 01- CONTINUED 01 78 43 Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials 01 88 15 Anchorage and Bracing 01 9114 Equipment Testing and Facility Startup DIVISION 02 02 41 00 Demolition DIVISION 03 03 01 32 Repair of Vertical and Overhead Concrete Surfaces 03 01 33 Repair of Horizontal Concrete Surfaces 03 10 00 Concrete Forming and Accessories 03 15 00 Concrete Joints and Accessories 03 21 00 Steel Reinforcing 03 30 00 Cast -In -Place Concrete 03 35 00 Concrete Finishing 03 39 00 Concrete Curing 03 40 00 Precast Concrete 03 62 00 Grouting 03 63 00 Concrete Doweling 03 64 23 Epoxy Resin Injection Grouting 03 64 24 Polyurethane Injection Grouting Volume 5 DIVISION 04 0421 13.13 Masonry Veneer 04 22 00 Concrete Unit Masonry DIVISION 05 05 05 19 Post -Installed Anchors 05 05 23 Welding 05 12 00 Structural Steel Framing 05 2119 Open Web Steel Joist Framing 05 31 00 Steel Decking 05 41 00 Structural Metal Stud Framing 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications 05 5119 Aluminum Stairs and Platforms July 30, 2026 TABLE OF CONTENTS COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 000110-3 TABLE OF CONTENTS REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS CITY OF FORT WORTH MARY'S CREEK WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY DIVISION 05 - CONTINUED 05 52 16 Aluminum Guardrails Railings 05 53 00 Metal Gratings DIVISION 06 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry 06 16 00 Sheathing 06 41 00 Architectural Wood Casework 06 70 00 Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Products & Fabrications 06 74 13 Fiberglass Weirs and Baffles 06 82 00 Glass -Fiber -Reinforced Plastic DIVISION 07 07 13 53 Elastomeric Sheet Waterproofing 07 21 01 Thermal Insulation 07 26 16 Belowgrade Vapor Retarders 0727 26 Fluid Applied Membrane Air Barriers 07 40 00 Roofing and Siding Panels 07 42 13.23 Metal Composite Material Wall Panels 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07 70 01 Roof Specialties and Accessories 07 84 00 Firestopping 07 92 00 Joint Sealants 07 95 13 Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies DIVISION 08 08 11 16 Aluminum Flush Doors 08 12 16 Interior Aluminum Frames and Doors 08 16 13 Fiberglass Doors 08 31 23 Floor Doors 08 33 23 Overhead Coiling Doors 08 4113 Aluminum -Framed Entrances and Storefronts 08 44 13 Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls 08 71 00 Door Hardware 08 80 00 Glazing 08 90 00 Louvers and Vents TABLE OF CONTENTS July 30, 2026 000110-4 © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER TABLE OF CONTENTS REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS CITY OF FORT WORTH MARY'S CREEK WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY DIVISION 09 09 22 16 Nonstructural Metal Framing 09 29 00 Gypsum Board 09 30 00 Tiling 09 5113 Acoustical Panel Ceilings 09 65 00 Resilient Flooring 09 67 00 Fluid -Applied Flooring 09 77 01 Fiberglas Reinforced Plastic Panel Walls 09 80 00 Acoustic Wall Panel System 09 90 00 Painting and Coating 09 90 01 Paint System Data Sheet (PSDS) 09 90 02 Paint Product Data Sheet (PDS) 09 96 35 Chemical -Resistant Coatings DIVISION 10 10 14 00 Signage 10 21 00 Toilet Compartments 10 28 00 Toilet and Bath Accessories 10 44 00 Fire Projection and Safety Equipment 10 51 00 Lockers 10 73 00 Metal Awnings and Canopies 10 8113 Architectural Bird Control 10 90 00 Identification, Stenciling, and Tagging DIVISION 11 11 31 00 11 53 13 Appliances Laboratory Fume Hoods Related Products and DIVISION 12 12 35 53.13 Metal Laboratory Casework 12 48 16 Entrance Floor Grilles DIVISION 13 13 21 50 Laboratory Environmental Controlled Chambers and Rooms 13 34 19 Metal Building Systems 13 34 23 Prefabricated Fiberglass Shelters 13 34 23.33 Precast Concrete Buildings July 30, 2026 TABLE OF CONTENTS COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 000110-5 TABLE OF CONTENTS REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS CITY OF FORT WORTH MARY'S CREEK WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY DIVISION 21 2113 13 Wet -Pipe Sprinkler Systems DIVISION 22 22 07 00 Plumbing Piping Insulation 22 10 01 Plumbing Piping and Accessories 22 10 01.02 Polyvinyl Chloride Drain Waste and Vent Pipe and Fittings 22 10 01.03 Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings 22 10 01.04 Acid -Resistant Cast Iron Pipe and Fittings 22 10 01.06 Acid -Resistant Polypropylene Waste and Vent Pipe Fittings 22 10 01.08 High -Density Polyethylene Pipe and Fittings 22 10 01.12 Polyethylene Pipe and Fittings for Gas 22 14 29 Submersible Sump Pump 22 30 00 Plumbing Equipment 22 40 00 Plumbing Fixtures Volume 6 DIVISION 23 23 05 14 HVAC Adjustable Frequency Drives 23 05 48 Vibration Isolation and Seismic Control For HVAC Piping And Equipment 23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC 23 07 00 HVAC Insulation 23 09 00 Instrumentation and Control Devices for HVAC 23 09 13 HVAC Controls, Field Components, and Instruments 23 09 23 Direct -Digital Control System for HVAC 23 23 00 Refrigerant Piping 23 3113 Metal Ducts and Accessories 23 3116.16 Thermoset Fiberglass -Reinforced Plastic Ducts and Accessories 23 34 00 HVAC Fans 23 36 00 Air Terminal Units 23 37 00 Air Outlets and Inlets 23 77 00 Air Handling Units 23 81 00 Unitary Air -Conditioning Equipment 23 82 00 Terminal Heating and Cooling Units DIVISION 26 26 00 00 Electrical General Provisions 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical 26 05 13 MV Cables 26 05 19 LV Wires and Cables TABLE OF CONTENTS July 30, 2026 000110-6 © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER TABLE OF CONTENTS REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS CITY OF FORT WORTH MARY'S CREEK WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY DIVISION 26 - CONTINUED 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding System 26 05 29 Electrical Support Hardware 26 05 33 Raceways, Boxes, Enclosures, and Fittings 26 05 36 Cable Trays 26 05 43 Underground System 26 05 73 Power System Study 26 12 19 Pad Mounted Transformers 26 13 13 Medium Voltage Metal Clad Switchgear 26 20 00 Low -Voltage AC Induction Motors 26 22 13 Distribution Dry -Type Transformers 26 24 13 LV Distribution Switchboards 26 24 16 Panelboards 26 24 19 LV Motor Control Centers 26 25 02 MV Metal -Enclosed Bus Duct 26 27 13 Power Metering and Protective Relays 26 27 26 Light Switches and Receptacles 26 28 16 LV Enclosed Circuit Breakers and Safety Switches Vnlnmo 7 DIVISION 26 - CONTINUED 26 29 23 Low Voltage Variable Frequency Drives 26 29 86 Mechanical Equipment Control Panels 26 29 87 Electrical Control Panels 26 32 13 Engine Generator Set 26 33 00 Station Battery System 26 33 54 3 -Phase Uninterruptible Power Supply 26 36 23 LV Enclosed Automatic Transfer Switches 26 41 00 Lightning Protection System 26 43 13 LV AC Surge Protective Devices 26 50 00 Lighting System DIVISION 28 28 00 05 Electronic Security System 28 31 00 Fire Detection and Alarm July 30, 2026 TABLE OF CONTENTS COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 000110-7 TABLE OF CONTENTS REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS CITY OF FORT WORTH MARY'S CREEK WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY DIVISION 31 31 10 00 Site Clearing 31 23 13 Subgrade Preparation 31 23 16 Excavation 31 23 19.01 Dewatering 31 23 23 Fill and Backfill 31 23 23.1 Borrow 31 23 23.15 Trench Backfill 31 25 00 Erosion and Sediment Control 31 3700 Riprap 31 41 00 Shoring DIVISION 32 32 13 13 Concrete Paving 32 13 20 Concrete Sidewalks, Driveways, and Barrier Free Ramps 32 13 73 Concrete Paving Joint Sealants 32 17 23 Pavement markings 32 31 00 Fences and Gates 32 84 00 Landscape Irrigation System 32 92 00 Turf and Grasses 32 93 00 Landscaping DIVISION 33 33 0110.58 Disinfection Potable Water Piping and Tanks 33 05 13 Manholes 33 05 39.41 Reinforced Concrete Pipe 33 16 13.15 Prestressed Concrete Tank with Steel Diaphragm 33 21 00 Non -Chlorinated, Non -Potable Water System 33 32 26 Ejector Pumps 33 4110 Reinforced Concrete Storm Drain Pipe Culverts 33 49 10 Storm Drain Manholes and Junction Boxes 33 49 20 Curb and Drop Inlets DIVISION 35 35 20 16.25 Fabricated Slide Gates and Stop Logs TABLE OF CONTENTS July 30, 2026 00 01 10 - 8 © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER TABLE OF CONTENTS REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS CITY OF FORT WORTH MARY'S CREEK WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY Volume 8 DIVISION 40 40 01 05 Field Testing of Piping Systems 40 05 05 Piping System, Basic Materials and Methods 40 05 15 Piping Support Systems 40 05 19 Ductile Iron Pipe 40 05 23 Stainless Steel Process Pipe and Tubing 40 05 24 Steel Pipe 40 05 31.11 Piping System, Chemical Feed 40 05 31.13 Polyvinyl Chloride and Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride Process Pipe 40 05 33 High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Process Pipe 40 05 36 Piping System, Fiberglass Pressure Pipe 40 05 36.13 Foul Air Fiberglass Ductwork 40 05 64.43 Fiberglass Dampers 40 05 74.13 Diaphragm Valves for Aeration Control 40 27 02 Process Valves and Operators 40 41 00 Electrical Heat Tracing 40 42 13 Process Piping Insulation 40 46 16 Protective Liquid Linings and Coatings for Substrates Exposed to Corrosive Wastewater Environment 40 47 00 Dumpster Conveyor System 40 61 00 Process Control Systems General Provisions 40 61 21 Process Control System — Testing 40 61 21A Instrument Calibration Certificate 40 61 21B Unwitnessed Factory Test Forms 40 61 21C Witnessed Factory Test Forms 40 61 21D Operational Readiness Test Forms 40 61 21E Functional Demonstration Test Forms 40 61 21F Site Acceptance Test Forms 40 61 26 Process Control Systems — Training 40 61 93 Process Control Systems Input Output List 40 61 96 Control Descriptions 40 62 00 Computer Hardware and Software 40 63 00 PLC Hardware and Software July 30, 2026 TABLE OF CONTENTS COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 000110-9 TABLE OF CONTENTS REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS CITY OF FORT WORTH MARY'S CREEK WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY Volume 9 DIVISION 40 - CONTINUED 40 66 00 Network Equipment 40 66 33 Fiber -Optic Communication Cabling and Connectors 40 6643 Radio Equipment and Systems 40 66 66 Communication Towers 40 67 00 Control Panels and Components 40 67 63 Uninterruptible Power Supplies 40 68 00 Applications Engineering Services 40 71 00 Flow Instruments 40 72 00 Level Instruments 40 73 00 Pressure Instruments 40 74 00 Temperature Instruments 40 75 00 Liquid Analytical Instruments 40 75 00.01 Bioreactor Instrumentation System 40 76 00 Gas Analytical Instruments Volume 10 DIVISION 41 41 22 13.13 Overhead Cranes 41 22 23.16 Portable Davit Crane and Winch 41 22 23.19 Monorail Hoists DIVISION 43 43 11 12 Blower High -Speed Turbo 43 11 19 Foul Air Fans 43 21 39 Pumps, Dry -Pit Submersible Centrifugal 43 22 10 Common Requirements for Pumps 43 22 56.01 Submersible Mixers 43 32 69 Chemical Feed Systems 43 40 01 Polyethylene Storage Tank DIVISION 44 44 3111 Biological Tower Type Odor Control System 44 3116 Carbon Adsorber Odor Control System 44 31 83 Foul Air Collection System Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing 44 42 19.04 Rotary Positive Displacement Blower 4442 25.02 Aluminum Flat Panel Cover System 4442 56.03 Vertical Turbine Pumps TABLE OF CONTENTS July 30, 2026 00 01 10 - 10 © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER TABLE OF CONTENTS REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS CITY OF FORT WORTH MARY'S CREEK WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY DIVISION 44 - CONTINUED 4442 56.04 Submersible Pumps 4442 56.13 Progressing Cavity Pumps 44 42 56.16 Peristaltic Hose Pump 4444 63.01 Polymer Feed System, Liquid 4445 16.02 Fine Bubble Air Diffuser System 44 46 13.02 Screw Conveyor System 4446 26.03 Rotary Drum Thickeners DIVISION 46 46 25 34 FOG and Scum Mixing Equipment 46 46 23 Tank Washdown and Booster Pump System 46 51 21 Aeration Systems, Coarse -Bubble Membrane Diffusers July 30, 2026 COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 01 10- 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS CITY OF FORT WORTH MARY'S CREEK WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY The following documents are for information: Volume 11 APPENDIX I — Selection of Membrane Equipment System Supplier for the Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility Appendix 1 1 P,-eselectio., Package 1 Proposal Documents Appendix I.2 Approved Veolia Submittal APPENDIX II — Selection of Preselection Package 2 for the Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility Appendix ff1 Preselection Package 2 Proposal Documents Appendix II.2 Vulcan — Coarse Screens Appendix II.3 Old Castle— Grit Removal Appendix II.4 Saveco — Fine Screens Volume 12 6 APPENDIX H — Continued Appendix II.5 Trojan — UV System Appendix II.6 Vaughan — Submersible Chopper Pump Appendix II.7 Vaughan — Submersible Chopper Pump Appendix II.8 GEA — Dewatering System APPENDIX III — Funding Requirements 00 75 43 Employment Requirements and Wage Rates DB-0 154 Davis Bacon Wage Rate Monthly Compliance — Owner DB-0 155 Davis Bacon Wage Rate Monthly Compliance TWDB-0100 Clean Water State Revolving Fund Loan Program TWDB-0551 Supplemental Construction Contract Conditions for Non -Equivalency Projects under the Clean Water State Revolving Fund Programs TWDB-1106A AIS Monthly Certificate of Compliance — Owner TWDB-1 106B AIS De Minimis Log TWDB-1106C AIS Final Certificate TWDB-1109A Project Signage WIFIA Funding Requirements APPENDIX IV — Geotechnical Report APPENDIX V — City Obtained Permits TABLE OF CONTENTS July 30, 2026 00 01 10 - 12 © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRY SECTION 26 29 23 LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFDS) PARTI GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish and install separately enclosed low voltage adjustable frequency drives, together with appurtenances, complete and operable, as specified herein and as shown on the Contract Drawings. The terms, VFD, ASD, AFD and Inverter are used synonymously. B. This specification is for low voltage variable frequency drives that are separately mounted in their own enclosures and are not an integral part of an MCC. C. The requirements of this specification also applies to equipment that is a part of a vendor's equipment package. See Submittals paragraph below for submittal requirements. D. All equipment supplied under this Section of the Specifications shall be products of the same Manufacturer and shall be contained in one single submittal. Partial submittals will be returned unreviewed. See Submittal paragraph below for VFDs specified as a part of equipment specified under other Sections or Divisions. E. The minimum requirements for functionality, and control and alarm inputs and outputs, are specified herein. Additional requirements shall be as specified in the Process Equipment Division, Instrumentation Division Equipment, Mechanical Division Equipment and the Contract Drawings. F. Coordinate with the manufacturer of each motor and the manufacturer of the equipment driven by each motor and submit a letter or letters of certification verifying each VFD provided is suitable for the application. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Refer to Division 26 00 00 and the Contract Drawings, for related work and electrical coordination requirements. B. Refer to Section 46 76 33 Dewatering Centrifuges for additional requirements for VFDs supplied by the Dewatering Centrifuge manufacturer. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be made in accordance with the requirements of Division 1, Section 26 00 00, the Contract Documents and as specified herein the following: MARCH 27, 2026 LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFDS) ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 26 29 23 - 1 MARYS CREEK WRF The manufacturers' names and product designation or catalog numbers for the types of materials specified or shown on the Drawings. 2. Cut sheets for each individual item shall be submitted. 3. All cut sheets shall be clearly marked to indicate which products are being submitted for use on this project. 4. Unmarked cut sheets will cause the submittal to be rejected and returned for revision. B. All shop drawing submittals and all O&M submittals shall be submitted in accordance with the requirements listed in Division 1. No change in Contract Price or Schedule will be allowed for delays due to unacceptable submittals. C. Submittals shall also contain information on related equipment to be furnished under this Specification. Incomplete submittals not containing the required information on the related equipment will also be returned without review. D. Submit equipment for review under this section that is specified herein which is mounted in their own enclosures and is not a part of a MCC or vendor's equipment package specified under other sections. E. Equipment specified herein that is a part of other equipment specified under other Sections or Divisions: Submittals shall be made in accordance with the requirements of the process equipment division of these Specifications, and as specified herein. 2. Equipment specified herein that is a part of other equipment specified under other Sections or Divisions and supplied as an integral part of a process equipment manufacturer's package, but referred to this Section for component details, shall be submitted with the manufacturer's package submittal under the Process Equipment Sections. 3. Equipment specified herein that is a part of other equipment specified under other Sections or Divisions shall comply with the requirements of this Section. 4. Equipment specified herein that is a part of other equipment specified under other Sections or Divisions shall not be submitted under this section. Submittals under this Section for such equipment will not be accepted and will be returned without review. LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFDS) AUGUST 26, 2025 262923-2 ©COPYRIGHT 2025 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRF F. The original equipment manufacturer (OEM) shall create all equipment shop drawings, including all wiring diagrams, in the manufacturer's Engineering department. 1. All equipment shop drawings shall bear the original equipment manufacturer's logo, drawing file numbers, and shall be maintained on file in the OEM's archive file system. 2. Photocopies of the Engineer's ladder schematics are unacceptable as shop drawings. G. Submittals for equipment and materials, furnished under this Section of the Specifications, will not be accepted prior to approval of the Qualifications of the Study Engineer followed by the submission and approval of the Preliminary Short Circuit Study required in the Power System Study as specified in Section 26 05 73. Submittals for this equipment made prior to the Engineer's approvals will be returned unreviewed. H. Submit for approval the Contractor's certification of extended warranty in the shop drawing submitted to the Engineer for approval. Time -current coordination curves for protective device relays, circuit breakers, and fuses submitted shall be included as a part of these submittals. J. Submit for approval, a manufacturer's conducted training agenda for all training specified herein. Training agenda shall not be submitted until final approval of the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Shop Drawings and Product Data. K. The following information shall be submitted to the Engineer: 1. Submit a letter or letters of certification verifying each VFD provided is suitable for the application and the specific motors being provided for each load on this project. 2. Submit product data sheets and catalog numbers for all components of the drives, including motor contactors, drive components, control relays, control stations, meters, pilot lights, etc. a. The manufacturer's name shall be clearly visible on each cut sheet submitted. b. List all options, trip adjustments and accessories furnished specifically for this project. c. Clearly mark each sheet to indicate which items apply and/or those items that do not apply. MARCH 27, 2026 LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFDS) ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 262923-3 MARYS CREEK WRF d. Missing cut sheets or unmarked cut sheets will cause the submittal to not receive approval and will be returned for revision and resubmittal. 3. Submit drive performance specifications. Submit a manufacturer's harmonics test on each type of drive being furnished. The test may be on a similar unit with identical components. 4. Submit control systems engineering to produce custom unit elementary drawings showing interwiring and interlocking between components and to remotely mounted devices. a. Include and identify all connecting equipment and remote devices on the schematics. The notation b. "Remote Device" will not be acceptable. c. Show wire and terminal numbers. d. Indicate special identifications for electrical devices per the Drawings. 5. Provide plan and elevation drawings of each controller or enclosure, with dimensions, exterior and interior views, showing component layouts, controls, terminal blocks, etc. 6. Schematic diagram, including manufacturer's selections of component ratings, and CT and PT ratios. 7. Nameplate schedule 8. UL Listing of the completed assembly 9. Component list with detailed component information, including original manufacturer's part number. 10. Conduit entry/exit locations 11. Assembly ratings including: a. Short-circuit rating. b. Voltage c. Continuous current d. Trip curves for each specified product 12. Major component ratings including: a. Voltage b. Continuous current C. Interrupting ratings LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFDS) AUGUST 26, 2025 262923-4 ©COPYRIGHT 2025 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY 13. Number and size of cables per phase, neutral if present, ground and all cable terminal sizes. 14. Instruction and renewal parts books. L. Certification that the VFD being supplied is suitable for the application. M. Factory Tests. Submittals shall be made for factory tests specified herein. N. Field Test Reports. Submittals shall be made for field tests specified herein. O. Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 1. Operation and maintenance manuals shall include the following information: a. Manufacturer's contact address and telephone number for parts and service. b. Instruction books and/or leaflets c. Recommended renewal parts list. d. Record Documents for all the information required by the Submittals paragraph above. e. Include the following: 1) Component list / bill of material including part numbers. 2) Marked product data and catalog cut sheets. 3) Performance specifications / equipment ratings. 4) Factory drawings and schematics. 5) Trip curves for breakers and fuses 6) Specified certifications. 7) Factory test reports 8) Field test reports. P. Seismic anchorage and bracing drawings, calculations, and cut sheets, as required by Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing. 8 MARCH 27, 2026 LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFDS) ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 262923-5 MARYS CREEK WRF 1.04 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. All products and components shown on the Drawings and listed in this specification shall be designed and manufactured according to latest revision of the following standards (unless otherwise noted): 1. NEMA Standard ICS 2-2000 Industrial Control and Systems 2. NFPA 70 — National Electrical Code (NEC) 3. NFPA 70E — Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace 4. IEEE 519 (latest revision) - Guide for Harmonic Control and Reactive Compensation of static Power Converters 5. UL 489 — Standard for Safety for Molded -Case Circuit Breakers 6. UL 508C — Power Conversion Equipment 7. NEMA ICS 2 — Starters, Contactors, Overload Relays, Rated Not More Than 200 Volts AC or 750 Volts DC. 8. NEMA ICS 6- Industrial Control and Systems Enclosures 9. NEMA ICS 7.0 - Industrial Controls & Systems for VFD 10. IEC 61200-2 — Vibration Levels 11. IEC 61800-02 and -3 — Adjustable Speed Electrical Power Drive Systems a. Fulfill all EMC immunity requirements 12. EN 50082-1 and -2 — Test Standards B. In the case of conflict between the requirements of this Section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this Section shall prevail. C. All equipment components and completed assemblies specified in this Section of the Specifications shall bear the appropriate label of Underwriters Laboratories. D. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar equipment for a minimum period of ten years. When requested by the Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement. LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFDS) AUGUST 26, 2025 262923-6 ©COPYRIGHT 2025 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY B. The manufacturer of the assembly shall be the manufacturer of the major components within the assembly. All assemblies shall be of the same manufacturer. Equipment that is manufactured by a third party and "brand labeled" will not be acceptable. C. All components and material shall be new and of the latest field proven design and in current production. Obsolete components or components scheduled for immediate discontinuation shall not be used. D. Equipment submitted shall fit within the space shown on the Drawings. Equipment which does not fit within the space is not acceptable. E. For the equipment specified herein, the manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 2000 certified. F. Equipment submitted shall fit within the space shown on the Drawings. Equipment which does not fit within the space is not acceptable. 1.06 JOB SITE DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Prior to jobsite delivery, complete all submittal requirements, and present to the Owner/Engineer upon delivery of the equipment, an approved copy of all such submittals. Delivery of incomplete constructed equipment, onsite factory work, or failed factory tests will not be permitted. B. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Two copies of these instructions shall be included with the equipment at the time of shipment and shall be made available to the Contractor and Owner/Engineer. C. The instructions shall include the following: Detailed assembly instructions including but not limited to wiring interconnection diagrams. 2. Rigging for lifting, skidding, jacking, and moving using rolling equipment to place the equipment. 3. Bolt torquing requirements for bus and all other components which require the installation of bolted connections. 4. Instructions for storing the equipment prior to energizing. D. Shipping groups shall be designed to be shipped by truck, rail, or ship. Indoor groups shall be bolted to skids. Breakers and accessories shall be packaged and shipped separately. MARCH 27, 2026 LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFDS) ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 262923-7 MARYS CREEK WRF E. Equipment shall be equipped to be handled by crane. Where cranes are not available, equipment shall be suitable for skidding in place on rollers using jacks to raise and lower the groups. F. Equipment shall be installed in its permanent finished location shown on the Drawings within seven calendar days of arriving onsite. If the equipment cannot be installed within seven calendar days, the equipment shall not be delivered to the site, but stored offsite until such time that the site is ready for permanent installation of the equipment with no change in the Contract Price or Schedule. Payment will not be approved for equipment stored off site. G. Where space heaters are provided in equipment, provide temporary electrical power and operate space heaters during storage, and after equipment is installed in permanent location, until equipment is placed in service. A. Provide the warranty time specified in Division 1. B. Within such period of warranty, all material and labor necessary to return the equipment to new operating condition shall be provided. Any warranty work requiring shipping or transporting of the equipment shall be provided at no expense to the Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable: 2. Eaton 3. Rockwell Automation/Allen-Bradley 4. Schneider Electric Company 5. No equal B. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. C. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be of the same manufacturer. LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFDS) AUGUST 26, 2025 262923-8 ©COPYRIGHT 2025 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY 2.02 RATINGS A. Service Conditions 1. The Drawings indicate the approximate horsepower and intended control scheme of the motor driven equipment. a. Provide the VFD, auxiliary components and equipment where shown or specified, and matched to the motors and control equipment supplied, in compliance with the NEC. b. Refer to the mechanical specifications and approved shop drawings for actual motor horsepower and rated motor full load current and provide VFDs rated for the driven equipment provided. c. Provide all required changes necessary to accommodate the motors and controls submitted and approved, which may include but not be limited to the following: 1) VFD size 2) Motor Constant/Variable torque requirements 3) Control power transformer 4) Raceway sizes 5) Power conductor sizes 6) Controls including relays, switches, pushbuttons and indicator lights 7) Control conductors 2. Provide the service voltage as shown on the Drawings. 3. The overall short circuit withstand and interrupting rating of the VFD and devices shall be equal to or greater than the overall short circuit withstand and interrupting rating of the feeder device immediately upstream of the adjustable frequency drives. 4. Adjustable frequency drives shall be tested, and UL labeled for the specified short circuit duty in combination with the motor branch circuit protective device. 5. The drive shall be UL tested UL listed and not require external fuses. The drive shall also be CE labeled and comply with standards EN 61800-3 for EMC compliance and EN 61800-2 for low voltage compliance. 6. The drive shall be capable of operating in compliance with IEEE 519-2022. MARCH 27, 2026 LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFDS) ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 262923-9 MARYS CREEK WRF 7. Input power: 480 VAC, 3 -phase power input. 8. Input frequency: 57 to 63 Hz. 9. Ambient temperature: -10°C to 40°C (Enclosed). 10. Elevation: Up to 3300 feet above mean sea level. 11. Relative humidity: Up to 90% non -condensing. B. Coordinate with the mechanical equipment supplier and the approved shop drawings to determine the motor horsepower and rated motor input current to determine the required rating of the VFD provided. C. VFD sizing requirements: 1. Increase the VFD size to the next larger rated output size above that required for the full load input current of the motor provided. 2. Provide VFDs, for both variable torque and constant torque applications as shown on the Drawings or as required by the mechanical equipment supplier. 3. Temperature ratings: a. VFDs installed in air-conditioned spaces: 1) Provide VFDs installed in air-conditioned spaces rated to provide 100 percent of their rated full load output current in a 40 degree C ambient. b. VFD installed in non-airconditioned spaces: 1) Provide VFDs installed in indoor non -air-conditioned spaces or installed outdoors rated to provide 100 percent of their rated full load output current in a 50 degree C ambient. 4. Load ratings: a. Normal Duty/Variable Torque Load: 1) 100% rated current continuous, suitable for operation of the driven equipment over a 30:1 speed range without overloading or low speed cogging. 2) 110% for 1 minute, every 10 minutes. 3) Starting torque shall be matched to the load. b. Heavy Duty/Constant Torque Load LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFDS) AUGUST 26, 2025 262923-10 ©COPYRIGHT 2025 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY 1) 100% rated current continuous, suitable for operation of the driven equipment over a 30:1 speed range without overloading or low speed cogging. 2) Provide the same requirements as specified above for normal load duty and additionally the requirements listed below. 3) 150% for 1 minute, every 10 minutes. 5. Provide rated input current based on the combination of all factors listed above. (i.e., provide rated input current for complete drive assembly based on 100HP, 50°C ambient, CT application) D. Rated output voltage shall be programmable for motor ratings from 180 to 240 volts, or from 320 to 480 volts. E. The Drive shall be able to operate after a voltage dip below 175 VAC on 230 VAC input power and 310 VAC on 460 VAC input power for 15 milliseconds at 85% full load current without any disturbances in output power delivered to the load. F. The VFD output voltage shall vary with frequency to maintain a constant volts/hertz ratio up to base speed (60 hertz) output. Constant or linear voltage output shall be supplied at frequencies greater than base speed (60 hertz). G. The VFD shall have an efficiency at full load and speed that exceeds 95% for VFDs below 15 HP and 97% for drives 15 HP and above. The efficiency shall exceed 90% at 50% speed and load. H. The true power factor shall be 0.95 or better at any speed, measured at drive input terminals. I. The voltage regulation shall be plus or minus 1% of rated value, no load to full load. J. Output Frequency Drift shall be not more than plus or minus 0.5% from setpoint. K. VFDs shall withstand five cycle transient voltage dips of up to 15% of rated voltage without an undervoltage trip or fault shutdown, while operating a variable torque load. L. Line notching, transients, and harmonics on the incoming line shall not affect drive performance. M. The VFDs shall meet IEC 61200-2 for vibration levels. MARCH 27, 2026 LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFDS) ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 26 29 23 - 11 MARYS CREEK WRF N. The VFDs shall be able to withstand voltage variations of -15% to +10% and imbalance up to 3% without tripping or affecting drive performance. O. For additional requirements and construction notes, refer to the Drawings. 2.03 CONSTRUCTION A. General Refer to Drawings for: actual layout and location of equipment and components; current ratings of devices, components; protective relays, voltage ratings of devices, components and assemblies; and other required details. 2. Control units shall be arranged as shown on the Drawings. 3. Surge Protective Devices a. Provide a dedicated Point of Utilization Device (SPD), as specified in Section 26 43 13, Individual Control Panel and Related Equipment Protection (Type 3). b. Equipment containing an uninterruptible power supply (UPS) shall be installed at the factory. The UPS shall meet the requirements of Section 26 33 53 Single Phase Uninterruptible Power Supply System. 4. Kirk keyed interlocks, where utilized, shall be Kirk HD Series (Heavy Duty) 316 Series of 316 stainless steel or approved equal. B. Nameplates General a. Furnish nameplates for each device. b. All nameplates shall be laminated plastic, black lettering on a white background, attached with stainless steel screws. c. Device mounted nameplates are not acceptable. d. The manufacturer shall not remove, reuse, alter, or replace original equipment nameplates or equipment tags associated with equipment or components supplied by the manufacturer's suppliers and sub - suppliers. 2. External a. Furnish nameplates for each device as indicated on the Drawings. LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFDS) AUGUST 26, 2025 262923-12 ©COPYRIGHT 2025 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY 1) Provided laminated impact acrylic engraved nameplates with a matte finish. 2) Provide nameplates not less than 1/16 -inch thick by 3/4 by 2 -1/2 -inches, Rowmark 322402. 3) Mount nameplates with 316 SS screw to all enclosures. 4) Mount nameplates to NEMA 4 and 4X enclosures with attached with double faced adhesive strips, TESA TUFF TAPE 4970, .009 X 1/2", or equal. a) Prior to installing the nameplates, the metal surface shall be thoroughly cleaned with 70% alcohol until all residue has been removed. b) Epoxy adhesive or foam tape is not acceptable. b. Provide nameplates with black lettering on a white background. c. Provide a a master nameplate that indicates equipment ratings, manufacturer's name, shop order number and general information 1) Provide a master nameplate that indicates equipment ratings, manufacturer's name, shop order number and general information. 2) Cubicle nameplates shall be mounted on the front face, on the rear panel and inside the assembly, visible when the rear panel is removed. 3) Provide permanent warning signs as follows: a) "Danger- High Voltage- Keep Out" on all doors. b) "Warning- Hazard of Electric Shock - Disconnect Power Before Opening or Working on This Unit" on main power disconnect. d. Internal 1) Mark for identification control components mounted within the assembly as follows: a) Provide nameplates corresponding to appropriate designations on manufacturer's wiring diagrams including but not limited to fuse blocks, relays, pushbuttons, switches, etc. MARCH 27, 2026 LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFDS) ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 26 29 23 - 13 MARYS CREEK WRF b) Provide identification nameplates with a white background and black letters. c) Attach with stainless steel screws. e. Special f. Provide caution nameplates as follows: 1) Laminated plastic nameplates, yellow background and black letters g. Provide red warning nameplates as follows: 1) Laminated plastic nameplates, red background and white letters C. Control Devices and Indicators 1. Provide controls as specified herein, as shown on the drawings and as required by the detailed mechanical and electrical equipment requirements. 2. Control Devices and Indicators a. Mount all operating control devices, indicators, and instruments on the cubicle door. b. Provide 30 -millimeter, corrosion resistant, NEMA 4X/13, anodized aluminum or reinforced plastic controls and indicators. Booted control devices are not acceptable. 3. Relays a. Provide auxiliary contacts for remote run indication and indication of each status and alarm condition. 4. Indicator lights a. Provide LED push -to -test type indicator lamps. b. Provide lens colors as follows: 1) Red for ON, Valve OPEN, and Breaker CLOSED. 2) Green for OFF, Valve CLOSED and Breaker OPEN. 3) Amber for FAIL. 4) Blue for READY 5) White for POWER ON. 5. Selector Switches LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFDS) AUGUST 26, 2025 262923-14 ©COPYRIGHT 2025 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY a. Provide mode selector switches (HAND -OFF -AUTO, LOCAL -OFF - REMOTE, etc.) as shown on the Drawings. b. Switches shall have the number of positions and contact arrangements, as required. Each switch shall have an extra dry contact for remote monitoring. 6. Pushbuttons a. Provide pushbuttons as follows: 1) Red for STOP, Valve OPEN, Breaker OPEN 2) Red with mushroom head operator for EMERGENCY STOP. 3) START -STOP control station with MAINTAINED LOCKOUT - STOP: Red for STOP and black for reset 4) Green for START, Valve CLOSE and Breaker CLOSE. 5) Black for RESET. 7. Control and Instrument Power Transformers a. Control power transformers shall be provided where shown on the Drawings. b. Transformer shall be sized for the entire load, including space heaters, plus 25% spare capacity. Provide a load calculation showing that the sizing of the control power transformer complies with this requirement. c. Control power transformers shall be 120 volts grounded secondary. d. Primary side of the transformer shall be fused in both legs. One leg of the transformer secondary shall be solidly grounded while the other leg shall be fused. 8. Failure Alarm a. Provide a failure alarm with horn and beacon light with Silence and Reset buttons where shown or specified. Alarm horn and beacon shall be by Federal Signal; Crouse -Hinds, or equal, b. Provide NEMA 4X for all areas except as shown or specified. c. Provide cast aluminum NEMA 7 enclosures in NEMA 7 areas. 9. Elapsed Time Meter MARCH 27, 2026 LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFDS) ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 26 29 23 - 15 MARYS CREEK WRF a. Provide a six -digit, non-resettable elapsed time meter shall be installed on the face of each motor starter where shown or specified. b. Provide meter as specified in Section 26 27 13. 10. Magnetic Circuit Breaker a. Provide an HMCP or thermal magnetic circuit breaker to provide a disconnect means. VFDs above 75HP shall have a solid-state trip unit. b. Disconnecting means shall have a through the door lockable handle, mechanically interlocked with the enclosure door. c. The disconnect shall not be mounted on the door. d. The handle position shall indicate ON, OFF, and TRIPPED condition. e. The handle shall have provisions for padlocking in the OFF position with at least three (3) padlocks. Interlocks shall prevent unauthorized opening or closing of the VFD door with the disconnect handle in the ON position. f. Door handle interlock shall be defeatable only by qualified maintenance personnel. 11. Selector Switches a. Provide an application specific, Hand -Off -Remote and Auto -Manual selector switches for local and remote Auto -Manual operation b. Provide terminals on a terminal block to accept a remote dry contact closure to start and stop the drive with the drive control system in the AUTO mode. c. Provide terminals on a separate terminal block separate from those terminating discrete signals to accept remote terminations to accept a 4-20 mA dc input signal for remote speed control, and remote speed signals back to the plant PLC. d. Provide output, and communications interfaces as shown on the Drawings. e. Inputs shall be isolated at the drive and active with the drive control system in the AUTO mode. 12. Microprocessor Controls a. Provide microprocessor -based controls with an LED and LCD display to monitor operating conditions. LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFDS) AUGUST 26, 2025 262923-16 ©COPYRIGHT 2025 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY b. The display section shall allow for local operation and setting of function codes and display fault indication and reasons associated with the fault. c. The LED display shall offer nine different display settings and the LCD shall have the capacity to display five lines of information at a time. d. The keypad shall be capable of copying, uploading and downloading drive function codes. e. Displays and settings shall be as specified for each of the horsepower ranges of VFDs. D. Enclosures 1. General a. Each enclosure shall incorporate a removable back panel, and side panels, on which control components shall be mounted. Back panel shall be secured to the enclosure with collar studs for wall mounted enclosures, and 316 SS hardware for free standing enclosures. b. All free-standing enclosures shall be provided with feet of the same construction as the enclosure. c. The enclosure door shall be interlocked with the main circuit breaker by a panel mounted cable driven operating mechanism. d. Back panel shall be tapped to accept all mounting screws. Self - tapping screws shall not be used to mount any components. e. All enclosure doors shall have bonding studs. The enclosure interior shall have a bonding stud. f. Each enclosure shall be provided with a documentation pocket on the inner door. g. Enclosures shall not have holes or knockouts. h. Provide manufacturer's window kits where shown on the Drawings. i. All panels installed outdoors shall have a factory applied, suitable primer and final coat of weatherproof white paint. j. All enclosures shall be pad lockable. 2. NEMA 12 (For installation in conditioned electrical rooms) a. NEMA 12 MARCH 27, 2026 LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFDS) ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 26 29 23 - 17 MARYS CREEK WRF 1) Powder coated mild steel, ANSI 61 Gray 2) Stainless steel continuous hinge 3) Foam in -place gasket 4) Single point quarter turn latches (20"x24" and below). All others 3 -point latch 3. Not Defined a. Where an enclosure is not otherwise defined or shown on the Drawing 1) NEMA 4X 316 Stainless Steel 2) Type 316 stainless steel, body, and door 3) Stainless steel continuous hinge 4) Foam in -place gasket 5) Single point quarter turn latches (20"x24" and below). All others 3 -point latch 4. NEMA 1 or NEMA lA boxes shall not be used. 5. Malleable iron boxes shall not be used. E. Cooling Fans 1. Fans a. Provide fans as required to provide air circulation and cooling. b. The fan shall be controlled by a thermostat and shall operate only when the drive is "ON" and for a cool -down period after the drive has stopped. c. The fan shall not run when the drive is "OFF". d. Louvers, if provided, shall have externally removable filters. The filter shall be metallic and washable. 2. Fan motors a. Protect motors with input circuit breaker. b. Provide metal squirrel cage ball bearing, three phase fan motors with 10 -year design life. c. Plastic muffin fans are not acceptable. LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFDS) AUGUST 26, 2025 262923-18 ©COPYRIGHT 2025 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRF d. Fan power shall be obtained from a tap on the main control power transformer. 3. A "loss of cooling" fault alarm a. In the event of clogged filters or fan failure, the drive shall produce an alarm b. After a programmable time delay, a drive shut down will safely stop the drive before electronic component failure occurs. 4. Redundant fans shall be provided in the drive design as backup in the event of fan failure. F. Internal Wiring 1. Wiring: a. Tinned stranded copper b. Minimum size No. 14 AWG c. Provide 600 Volt, 90 -degree C, flame retardant, Type MTW thermoplastic insulation, d. Provide NEMA Class II, Type B wiring. e. Line side power wiring shall be sized for the full rating or frame size of the connected device. 2. Identification: a. Numbered sleeve type wire markers at each termination point, color coding per NEMA standards and the NEC. b. Foreign voltage control wiring shall be yellow. 3. Wire tagging a. Tag and code all wire with an identification number as shown on the Drawings. b. Coding shall be typed on a heat shrinkable tube applied to each end showing origination and destination of each wire. c. The marking shall be permanent, non -smearing, solvent -resistant type like Raychem TMS-SCE, or equal. 4. Wire installation a. All wiring shall be neatly bundled with ty-raps and supported to wire way supports. MARCH 27, 2026 LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFDS) ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 26 29 23 - 19 MARYS CREEK WRF b. Control wiring shall be bundled separately from power wiring. c. Low voltage and low current signal wiring (millivolt and milliamp) shall be bundled separately from the rest of the control wiring. G. Field Installed Internal Wiring 1. Wire installation a. Field installed interior wiring shall be neatly grouped by circuit and bound by plastic tie wraps. b. Circuit groups shall be supported so that circuit terminations are not stressed. c. Low voltage and low current signal wiring (millivolt and milliamp) shall be bundled separately from the rest of the control wiring. 2. Wire tagging a. Tag and code wire with an identification number. b. Coding shall be typed on a heat shrinkable tube applied to each end of the wire. c. The marking shall be a permanent, non -smearing, solvent -resistant type like Raychem TMS-SCE, or equal 3. Conduit installation a. Stub up all conduit entering or leaving variable frequency drive shall be stubbed up into the enclosure directly in line with the vertical section in which the conductors are to be terminated. b. Conduit may enter the top in dry air-conditioned areas only. c. Entering the variable frequency drive enclosure from the side is prohibited unless approved in writing by the Owner/Engineer. H. Control Relays 1. Provide 300 -volt, industrial rated, plug-in socket type, control relays housed in a transparent polycarbonate dust cover, designed in accordance with UL Standard 508 for motor controller duty. 2. Continuous contact rating shall be 10 amperes resistive, 1/4 HP at 120 VAC, operating temperature -10 to +55°C. 3. Provide spare N.O. & N.C. contacts. Relays shall be equipped with neon coil indicator light. LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFDS) AUGUST 26, 2025 262923-20 ©COPYRIGHT 2025 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY 4. Timing relays shall be 300 Volt, solid state type, with rotary switch to select the timing range. All relays provided in the equipment shall be NEMA rated. 5. IEC rated relays are not acceptable. 2.04 ADJUSTABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFDS) FOR MOTORS 60 HP AND SMALLER A. General Provide 6 -pulse, Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) design converting the utility input voltage and frequency to a variable voltage and frequency output via a two-step operation, designed for use with standard induction motors, constant or variable torque as required for the load application, with current limiting input fuses, incoming line reactors, circuit breaker disconnect, control transformer overload relays and process signal follower card. 2. Drives shall be UL listed. 3. Adjustable frequency drives manufactured for HVAC applications are not acceptable. 4. The output devices shall be Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistors (IGBTs). Bipolar Junction Transistors, GTOs or SCR' are not acceptable. 5. The VFD shall have an EMI/RFI filter as standard. 6. Each VFD shall consist of the following general components: a. Full wave diode rectifier to convert supply AC to a fixed DC voltage. b. DC link capacitors c. Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor (IGBT) power section. The power section shall use vector dispersal pulse width modulated (PWM) control and soft switching IGBTs. d. Microprocessor based control and display section. 7. Provide, as a minimum, a 5% input line reactor, as standard. 8. The VFD shall be able to start into a spinning motor. a. The VFD shall be able to determine the motor speed in any direction and resume operation without tripping. b. If the motor is spinning in the reverse direction, the VFD shall start into the motor in the reverse direction, bring the motor to a controlled stop, and then accelerate the motor to the preset speed. MARCH 27, 2026 LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFDS) ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 26 29 23 -21 MARYS CREEK WRF 9. The Drive shall maintain set frequency regardless of load fluctuations. 10. Provide the ability to operate after a voltage dip below 175 VAC on 230 VAC input power and 310 VAC on 460 VAC input power for 15 milliseconds at 85% full load current without any disturbances in output power delivered to the load. a. If power exceeds this level, six (6) different modes or active and inactive restart modes shall be available. b. The decrease in motor speed shall be adjustable in the event of a momentary power outage. 11. Provide a programmable start frequency, adjustable from 0.1 to 60 hertz, with a 1 hertz resolution and with a holding time adjustable from 0.1 to 10 seconds. 12. Provide IGBT soft switching and a low noise control power supply system to reduce the noise from the drive. 13. Provide a frequency bias (starting frequency) function programmable from - 120 to +120 Hz of maximum frequency, with 0.1 Hz resolution. 14. Provide programmable frequency gain from 0-200%, with 0.1% resolution. 15. Provide the capability of motor slowdown or stop by selectable regenerative (to the DC link) dynamic braking while following one of the four selectable deceleration ramps and control the braking torque by setting its value from 0, 20 to 150%, 999 (no limit) of Drive rating. It shall also change the rate of deceleration automatically by stopping the braking action long enough to avoid Drive over -voltage trip. 16. Provide the ability to start into a rotating load (forward or reverse) and smoothly accelerate or decelerate to the set point without experiencing motor or driven damage. 17. Provide the ability to stop by selectable DC injection braking, adjustable from 0 to 100% braking level and have a programmable starting frequency for DC braking (0.2-60 hertz) and programmable braking time (0.1 to 30.0 seconds). 18. Provide a start Frequency Setting that incorporates a Holding Time at the Frequency Setting, adjustable up to 10 seconds in duration. 19. Provide at least three selectable skip frequencies with programmable band widths, adjustable 0 to 30 Hz, which shall not allow operation at or near mechanical resonance speeds. LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFDS) AUGUST 26, 2025 262923-22 ©COPYRIGHT 2025 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY 20. Provide selectable slip compensation, which shall sense output current and adjust output 21. Provide a Droop operation, balancing drooping characteristics to speed and load variations. This function shall be adjustable from —9.9 to 0.0 Hz. 22. Provide a selectable Torque Limiting function for both motoring and braking that shall sense an overload condition and shall reduce frequency and current temporarily until the load reaches acceptable levels. a. If the overload condition is not settled in the proper amount of time, the Drive shall trip on overload. b. The Torque Limiting shall be programmable from 20-150% of Drive rated motor torque (30 HP and below) and from 20-150% of Drive rated motor torque (40 HP and above), with 1% resolution. 23. Provide a selectable electronic inverse time thermal overload function as required by NEC and UL Standard 991 for an AC Induction Motor (Refer to applicable codes for specific installation requirements). The overload shall be programmable from 20 - 135% of Drive rated current. 24. Provide an over -voltage protection function that operates if supply voltage rises above rated value or by motor's regeneration. 25. Treat short circuits in either the output load or the output module as an over - current. 26. Provide a shutdown on over temperature fault If the heat sink temperature exceeds approximately 100o C. 27. Provide output ground fault protection. B. Control and Monitor Interface 1. Provide a graphic back -lit liquid crystal display (LCD) which can be configured to display frequency, current, function code set points, or drive status and fault codes. It shall display lines with characters of text, providing display at a minimum of: a. Monitor b. Operate c. Parameter setup d. Actual parameter values e. Active faults f. Fault history MARCH 27, 2026 LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFDS) ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 26 29 23 -23 MARYS CREEK WRF g. LCD adjustments 2. Setups and Adjustments a. Start command from keypad, remote or communications port b. Speed command from keypad, remote or communications port c. Motor direction selection d. Maximum and minimum speed limits e. Acceleration and deceleration times, two settable ranges f. Critical (skip) frequency avoidance g. Torque limit h. Multiple attempt restart function i. Multiple preset speeds adjustment j. Catch a spinning motor start or normal start selection k. Programmable analog output 1. DC brake current magnitude and time m. PID process controller 3. System Interfaces a. Remote manual/auto b. Remote start/stop c. Remote forward/reverse d. Remote preset speeds e. Remote external trip f. Remote fault reset g. Process control speed reference interface, 4-20mA DC h. Potentiometer and 1-I0VDC speed reference interface i. One USB, One RJ-485 programming and operation interface ports C. Outputs —A minimum of two discrete programmable digital outputs, one programmable open collector output, and one programmable analog output shall be provided, with the following available at minimum: LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFDS) AUGUST 26, 2025 262923-24 ©COPYRIGHT 2025 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY 1. Programmable relay outputs with one set of Form C contacts for each, selectable with the following available at minimum: a. Fault b. Run c. Ready d. Reversed e. Jogging £ At speed g. Torque Limit Supervision h. Motor rotation direction opposite of commanded i. Over -temperature 2. Programmable open collector output with available 24VDC power supply and selectable with the following available at minimum: a. Fault b. Run c. Ready d. Reversed e. Jogging f. At speed g. Torque Limit Supervision h. Motor rotation direction opposite of commanded i. Over -temperature 3. Programmable analog output signal, selectable with the following available at minimum: a. Motor current b. Output frequency c. Frequency reference d. Motor speed e. Motor torque MARCH 27, 2026 LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFDS) ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 26 29 23 -25 MARYS CREEK WRF f. Motor power g. Motor voltage h. DC -bus voltage All (Analog Input 1) Al2 (Analog Input 2) 2.05 ADJUSTABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFDS) FOR MOTORS LARGER THAN 60 HP A. General Provide a minimum 18 -pulse, IGBT based sinusoidal PWM type AC Drive capable of operating a squirrel cage induction motor with a full load current equal to or less than the continuous output of the Drive. a. Incorporate a phase shift transformer and a minimum 18 pulse converter. b. Regulator technology shall be software configurable to either V/Hz (single or multi motor) mode or Sensorless Dynamic Torque Vector mode (single motor). c. Full, closed loop flux vector control shall be available for constant torque applications. In V/Hz mode at base speed (60 hertz) and below, the Drive shall operate in constant volts per hertz mode. d. Above base speed (60 hertz), the Drive may selectively operate in either a constant volt per hertz mode or a constant voltage extended frequency mode. 2. Provide the ability to start into a spinning motor by being able to determine the motor speed in any direction and resume operation without tripping. a. If the motor is spinning in the reverse direction, start into the motor in the reverse direction, bring the motor to a controlled stop, and then accelerate the motor to the preset speed in the correct direction of rotation. 3. Maintain set frequency regardless of load fluctuations. 4. Provide the ability to operate after a voltage dip below 175 VAC on 230 VAC input power and 310 VAC on 460 VAC input power for 15 milliseconds at 85% full load current without any disturbances in output power delivered to the load. LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFDS) AUGUST 26, 2025 262923-26 ©COPYRIGHT 2025 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY a. If power exceeds this level, six different modes or active and inactive restart modes shall be available. The decrease in motor speed shall be adjustable in the event of a momentary power outage. 5. Provide a programmable start frequency, adjustable from 0.1 to 60 hertz, with a 1 hertz resolution and with a holding time adjustable from 0.1 to 10 seconds. 6. Provide IGBT soft switching and a low noise control power supply system to reduce the noise from the drive. 7. Provide a frequency bias (starting frequency) function programmable from - 120 to +120 Hz of maximum frequency, with 0.1 Hz resolution. 8. Provide a programmable frequency gain from 0-200%, with 0.1% resolution. 9. Provide the capability of motor slowdown or stop by selectable regenerative (to the DC link) dynamic braking while following one of the four selectable deceleration ramps and control the braking torque by setting its value from 0, 20 to 150%, 999 (no limit) of the VFD rating. a. It shall also be capable of changing the rate of deceleration automatically by stopping the braking action long enough to avoid Drive over -voltage trip. 10. Provide the capability to start into a rotating load (forward or reverse) and shall smoothly accelerate or decelerate to the set point without experiencing component damage. 11. Provide the capability to stop by selectable DC injection braking. It shall be adjustable from 0 to 100% braking level and have a programmable starting frequency for DC braking (0.2-60 hertz) and programmable braking time (0.1 to 30.0 seconds). 12. Provide a start Frequency Setting that incorporates a Holding Time at the Frequency Setting, adjustable up to 10 seconds in duration. 13. Provide at least three selectable skip frequencies with programmable band widths, adjustable 0 to 30 Hz, which shall not allow operation at or near mechanical resonance speeds. 14. Provide selectable slip compensation, which shall sense output current and adjust output 15. Provide Droop operation, balancing drooping characteristics to speed and load variations. This function shall be adjustable from —9.9 to 0.0 Hz. MARCH 27, 2026 LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFDS) ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 26 29 23 -27 MARYS CREEK WRF 16. Provide a selectable Torque Limiting function for both motoring and braking that shall sense an overload condition and shall reduce frequency and current temporarily until the load reaches acceptable levels. a. If the overload condition is not settled in the proper amount of time, the Drive shall trip on overload. The Torque Limiting shall be programmable from 20-150% of Drive rated motor torque (30 HP and below) b. The Torque Limiting shall be programmable from 20-150% of Drive rated motor torque (40 HP and above), with 1% resolution. 17. Provide a selectable electronic inverse time thermal overload function as required by NEC and UL Standard 991 for an AC Induction Motor (Refer to applicable codes for specific installation requirements). The overload shall be programmable from 20 - 135% of the VFD rated current. 18. Provide an over -voltage protection function that operates if supply voltage rises above rated value or by motor's regeneration. 19. Treat short circuits in either the output load or the output module as an over - current. 20. Provide a shutdown on temperature fault if heat sink temperature exceeds approximately 100°C. 21. Provide output ground fault protection. B. Control and Monitor Interface 1. Provide a graphic back -lit liquid crystal display (LCD) which can be configured to display frequency, current, function code set points, or drive status and fault codes. It shall display lines with characters of text, providing display at a minimum of: a. Monitor b. Operate c. Parameter setup d. Actual parameter values e. Active faults f. Fault history g. LCD adjustments 2. Setups and Adjustments LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFDS) AUGUST 26, 2025 262923-28 ©COPYRIGHT 2025 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY a. Start command from keypad, remote or communications port b. Speed command from keypad, remote or communications port c. Motor direction selection d. Maximum and minimum speed limits e. Acceleration and deceleration times, two settable ranges £ Critical (skip) frequency avoidance g. Torque limit h. Multiple attempt restart function i. Multiple preset speeds adjustment j. Catch a spinning motor start or normal start selection k. Programmable analog output 1. DC brake current magnitude and time m. PID process controller 3. System Interfaces a. Remote manual/auto b. Remote start/stop c. Remote forward/reverse d. Remote preset speeds e. Remote external trip f. Remote fault reset g. Process control speed reference interface, 4-20mA DC h. Potentiometer and 1-10VDC speed reference interface i. Programming interface port. C. Outputs — Provide a minimum of two discrete programmable digital outputs, one programmable open collector output, and one programmable analog output shall be provided, with the following available at minimum: 1. Provide programmable relay outputs with one set of Form C contacts for each, selectable with the following available at minimum: a. Fault MARCH 27, 2026 LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFDS) ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 26 29 23 -29 MARYS CREEK WRF b. Run c. Ready d. Reversed e. Jogging f. At speed g. Torque Limit Supervision h. Motor rotation direction opposite of commanded i. Over -temperature 2. Provide programmable open collector output with available 24VDC power supply and selectable with the following available at minimum: a. Fault b. Run c. Ready d. Reversed e. Jogging f. At speed g. Torque Limit Supervision h. Motor rotation direction opposite of commanded i. Over -temperature 3. Provide programmable analog output signal, selectable with the following available at minimum: a. Motor current b. Output frequency c. Frequency reference d. Motor speed e. f. g. h. LOW VOLTAGE VAR] 262923-30 Motor torque Motor power Motor voltage DC -bus voltage [ABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFDS) AUGUST 26, 2025 ©COPYRIGHT 2025 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY All (Analog Input 1) Al2 (Analog Input 2) 2.06 REMOTE MONITORING INTERFACE A. General: Drive shall incorporate RJ-45 ethernet connection for communication. Refer to Section 40 66 00-PS2 for required communications protocols. Where VFDs are part of a mechanical equipment provided package, coordinate communication protocol with mechanical equipment PLC control panel requirement. 2. Communication card shall be a product of the VFD manufacturer. External protocol converters shall not be required for communication with the drive. 2.07 SPARE PARTS A. Provide the following spare parts: 1. Three — Control fuses of type used. 2. Three — Power fuses of type used. 3. One — Keypad of each type used. B. Spare parts shall be boxed or packaged for long term storage and clearly identified on the exterior of package. Identify each item with manufacturers name, description, and part number 2.08 FACTORY TESTING A. Completely assembled, wired, and adjusted the VFD at the factory and be given the manufacturer's routine shop tests. Provide complete operational testing to insure the workability and reliable operation of the equipment. B. Prior to factory testing, submit confirmation that the manufacturer has checked and verifies that all selections and settings required by the Power System Study Engineer have been performed. C. Factory test equipment and test methods shall conform with the latest applicable requirements of ANSI, IEEE, UL, and NEMA standards. D. The operational test shall include the proper connection of supply and control voltage and, as far as practical, a mockup of simulated control signals and control devices shall be fed into the boards to check for proper operation. MARCH 27, 2026 LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFDS) ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 26 29 23 -31 MARYS CREEK WRF 2.09 WITNESS TESTING A. Refer to Mechanical Sections for Witnesses Factor Testing Requirements for vendor packaged equipment. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE A. Provide the services of a qualified factory -trained manufacturer's field representative to perform the tasks specified under this section for the time required. B. The manufacturer's field representative shall provide technical direction and assistance in general assembly of the equipment, connections, and adjustments, and testing of the assembly and components contained therein. 3.02 INSTALLER'S QUALIFICATIONS A. Provide an installer who shall be specialized in installing low voltage adjustable frequency drives with a minimum of five years documented experience. Experience documentation shall be submitted for approval prior to beginning work on this project. 3.03 EXAMINATION A. Examine installation area to ensure there is enough clearance to install the equipment. B. Housekeeping pads shall be included for the floor mounted motor controllers as detailed on the Drawings except for motor controllers which are to be installed adjacent to an existing unit. Housekeeping pads for these (if used) shall match the existing installation. C. Check concrete pads and baseplates for uniformity and level surface. D. Verify that the equipment is ready to install. E. Verify field measurements are as submitted by the manufacturer. 3.04 INSTALLATION A. Install all equipment per the manufacturer's recommendations and Contract Drawings. B. Install required safety labels. LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFDS) AUGUST 26, 2025 262923-32 ©COPYRIGHT 2025 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY C. Install floor mat as specified in Section 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect installed equipment for anchoring, alignment, grounding and physical damage. B. Check tightness of all accessible electrical connections. Minimum acceptable values shall be specified in manufacturer's instructions. C. Inspect the installation and final adjustments have been made. D. Verify that operational and functional checks of VFD have been made. E. Spare parts are provided. F. Certify that he has read the drive manufacturer's installation instructions and has installed the equipment in accordance with those instructions. G. Provide three copies of the manufacturer's field start-up report. 3.06 FIELD ADJUSTING A. Adjust all circuit breakers, switches, access doors, operating handles for free mechanical and electrical operation as described in manufacturer's instructions. B. The Power Monitoring and Protective Relays shall be set in the field by a qualified representative of the manufacturer, in accordance with settings designated in a coordinated study of the system. Install settings as required in Section 26 05 73 Power System Study 2. All such settings, including the application of arc flash labels, shall have been made and Approved by the Owner/Engineer, prior to energizing of the equipment. C. Return spare Kirk keys to the Owner after final acceptance of the equipment. 3.07 FIELD TESTING A. Provide the services of the VFD manufacturer's field representative to perform all electrical field tests recommended by the manufacturer and make all control adjustments required for the individual application of the drive. B. As a minimum, include the following: MARCH 27, 2026 LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFDS) ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 26 29 23 -33 MARYS CREEK WRF Verify all connections to solid-state equipment are removed prior to testing. 2. Verify all control adjustments required have been made and checked for the individual application of the drive. 3. Perform field measurements, of both the voltage and current harmonic distortion at the point of common coupling with operating conditions to determine compliance with the Specifications. 4. Perform field measurements to confirm that any resonant frequencies are satisfactorily blocked. 5. Test each key interlock system for proper functioning. C. Submit the results of all specified tests to the Engineer/Owner within five business days for approval and for their permanent records. 3.08 CLEANING A. Remove all rubbish and debris from inside and around the motor controllers. Remove dirt, dust, or concrete spatter from the interior and exterior of the equipment using brushes, vacuum cleaner, or clean, lint free rags. Do not use compressed air. 3.09 EQUIPMENT PROTECTION AND RESTORATION A. Touch-up and restore damaged surfaces to factory finish, as approved by the manufacturer. If the damaged surface cannot be returned to factory specification, the surface shall be replaced. 3.10 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATION A. Provide the services of a qualified factory -trained manufacturer's representative who shall certify in writing that the equipment has been installed, adjusted, including all settings designated in the Power System Study, and tested in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Provide three copies of the manufacturer's representative's certification. 3.11 TRAINING A. Provide manufacturer's services for training of plant personnel in operation and maintenance of the adjustable frequency drives furnished under this Section. B. The training for each type of equipment shall be for a period of not less than one eight -hour day. LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFDS) AUGUST 26, 2025 262923-34 ©COPYRIGHT 2025 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY C. The cost of the training program to be conducted with Owner's personnel shall be included in the Contract Price. The training and instruction, insofar as practicable, shall be directly related to the system being supplied. D. Provide detailed O&M manuals to supplement the training course. The manuals shall include specific details of equipment supplied and operations specific to the project. E. The training session shall be conducted by a manufacturer's qualified representative. Training program shall include instructions on the assembly, motor starters, protective devices, metering, and other major components. F. The Owner reserves the right to videotape the training sessions for the Owner's use. G. Training shall include all instructions of all software applications used to configure drive settings. At time training, all associated configuration files and documentation shall also be transferred to the customer for future maintenance and system restoration. END OF SECTION MARCH 27, 2026 LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFDS) ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 26 29 23 -35 MARYS CREEK WRF THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFDS) AUGUST 26, 2025 262923-36 ©COPYRIGHT 2025 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY SECTION 26 29 86 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT CONTROL PANELS (MECPS) PARTI GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish and install functional control panels to operate control systems manually or automatically as specified in the detailed requirements of this Section, and as described in the Mechanical Equipment Division. B. All submittals for, process equipment panels specified under this Section, shall be submitted as a part of the Process Equipment submittal. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Refer to Division 26 00 00 and the Contract Drawings, for related work and electrical coordination requirements. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for equipment specified herein shall be made as a part of equipment furnished under other Sections. Individual submittals for equipment specified herein will not be accepted and will be returned without review. B. Submittals shall be made in accordance with the requirements of Division 1, Section 26 00 00, the Contract Documents and as specified herein the following: 1. The manufacturers' names and product designation or catalog numbers for the types of materials specified or shown on the Drawings. 2. Cut sheets for each individual item shall be submitted. 3. All cut sheets shall be clearly marked to indicate which products are being submitted for use on this project. 4. Unmarked cut sheets will cause the submittal to be rejected and returned for revision. C. All shop drawing submittals and all O&M submittals shall be submitted in accordance with the requirements listed in Division 1. No change in Contract Price or Schedule will be allowed for delays due to unacceptable submittals. MARCH 27, 2026 (MECPS) MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT CONTROL PANELS ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 26 29 86 - 1 MARYS CREEK WRF D. Submittals shall also contain information on related equipment to be furnished under this Specification. Incomplete submittals not containing the required information on the related equipment will also be returned without review E. Submittals shall be made in accordance with the requirements of the process equipment division of these Specifications, and as specified herein. F. The original equipment manufacturer, (OEM) shall create all equipment shop drawings, including all wiring diagrams, in the manufacturer's Engineering department. All equipment shop drawings shall bear the original equipment manufacturer's logo, drawing file numbers, and shall be maintained on file in the OEM's archive file system. Photocopies of the Engineer's ladder schematics are unacceptable as shop drawings. G. Submittals for equipment and materials, furnished under this Section of the Specifications, will not be accepted prior to approval of the Qualifications and Preliminary Study submittals required in the Power System Study specified under Section 26 05 73. Submittals made prior to such approval will be returned unreviewed. H. Time -current coordination curves for protective device relays, circuit breakers, and fuses submitted shall be included as a part of these submittals. I. Submit for approval the Contractor's certification of extended warranty in the shop drawing submitted to the Engineer for approval. J. Submit for approval, a manufacturer's conducted training agenda for all training specified herein. Training agenda shall not be submitted until final approval of the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Shop Drawings and Product Data. K. The following information shall be submitted to the Engineer: The mechanical equipment manufacturer shall use his control systems engineering department to produce custom unit elementary drawings. a. Drawings shall be on the mechanical equipment manufacturer's drawing sheets and shall include all schematics for control logic as described in the Process Equipment Specifications, and any associated control schematics shown on the Engineer's Drawings for this project. b. Show interwiring and interlocking between components and to remotely mounted devices. Include and identify all connecting equipment and remote devices on the schematics. The notation "Remote Device" will not be acceptable. MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT CONTROL PANELS (MECPS) MARCH 27, 2026 262986-2 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTAAND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY c. Show wire and terminal numbers. Indicate special identifications for devices as required by the mechanical equipment manufacturer or as may be shown on the Drawings. d. Photocopies of the Engineer's ladder schematics are unacceptable as shop drawings. 2. Equipment outline drawings shall show elevation, plan and interior views, front panel arrangement, dimensions, weight, shipping splits, conduit entrances and anchor bolt pattern. Indicate all options, special features, ratings and deviations from this Section. 3. Provide power and control schematics which shall include all external connections. Show wire and terminal numbers and color -coding. 4. Provide instruction and replacement parts books, which shall include manufacturer's part numbers, selections of component ratings, and CT and PT ratios. 5. Provide as -built final drawings. 6. Provide documentation that the panel assembly facility is a UL -508 certified facility. 7. Provide a facsimile of the UL label that is to be applied to the completed panel. 8. Furnish complete Bill of Materials indicating manufacturer's name and part numbers. 9. Manufacturer's cut sheets for every component used in the panel assembly adequately marked to show the items being included. The manufacturer's name shall be clearly visible on each cut sheet submitted. Unmarked cut sheets will cause rejection of the submittal and its return for revision. 10. Assembly ratings shall be provided including: a. Short-circuit rating b. Voltage c. Continuous current 11. Major component ratings shall be provided including: a. Voltage b. Continuous current MARCH 27, 2026 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT CONTROL PANELS (MECPS) ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 262986-3 MARYS CREEK WRF C. Interrupting ratings 12. Cable terminal sizes. 13. Instruction and renewal parts books. L. Factory Tests: Submittals shall be made for factory tests specified herein. M. Field Test Reports: Submittals shall be made for field tests specified herein. N. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1. Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be provided which shall include the following information: a. Manufacturer's contact address and telephone number for parts and service. b. Instruction books and/or leaflets c. Recommended renewal parts list d. Record Documents for the information required by the Submittals paragraph above. 1.04 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. All products and components shown on the Drawings and listed in this specification shall be designed and manufactured according to latest revision of the following standards (unless otherwise noted): 1. NEMA Standard ICS 2 - 2000 Industrial Control and Systems 2. NFPA 70 — National Electrical Code (NEC) 3. NFPA 70E — Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace 4. NFPA 79 — Electrical Standard for Industrial Machinery 5. UL 508/508A — Industrial Control Enclosures B. All equipment components and completed assemblies specified in this Section of the Specifications shall bear the appropriate label of Underwriters Laboratories. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The manufacturer of the control panels shall have produced similar equipment for a minimum period of five years. When requested by the Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement. MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT CONTROL PANELS (MECPS) MARCH 27, 2026 262986-4 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTAAND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY B. The control panels shall be assembled in a UL -508 certified facility. A submittal of documentation certifying that the panel fabrication facility is a UL -508 certified facility, is required. A UL label shall be affixed to the inside of the external door by the panel fabrication assembly. Submit a facsimile of the UL label in the submittal information. C. All components and material shall be new and of the latest field proven design and in current production. Obsolete components or components scheduled for immediate discontinuation shall not be used. D. Control panels submitted shall fit within the space shown on the Drawings. Equipment which does not fit within the space is not acceptable. E. For the equipment specified herein, the manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 2000 certified. 1.06 JOBSITE DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Prior to jobsite delivery, complete all submittal requirements, and present to the Owner/Engineer upon delivery of the equipment, an approved copy of all such submittals. Delivery of incomplete constructed equipment, onsite factory work, or failed factory tests will not be permitted. B. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Two copies of these instructions shall be included with the equipment at time of shipment and shall be made available to the Contractor and Owner/Engineer. C. Shipping groups shall be designed to be shipped by truck, rail, or ship. Indoor groups shall be bolted to skids. Breakers and accessories shall be packaged and shipped separately. D. Equipment shall be installed in its permanent finished location shown on the Drawings within seven calendar days of arriving onsite. If the equipment cannot be installed within seven calendar days, the equipment shall not be delivered to the site, but stored offsite, until such time that the site is ready for permanent installation of the equipment with no change in the Contract Price or Schedule. E. Where space heaters are provided in equipment, provide temporary electrical power and operate space heaters during storage, and after equipment is installed in permanent location, until equipment is placed in service. MARCH 27, 2026 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT CONTROL PANELS (MECPS) ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 262986-5 MARYS CREEK WRF 1.07 WARRANTY A. Provide warranty per Division 01, Warranties and Bonds, and as specified herein. B. The Manufacturer shall warrant the equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for two years from the date of final acceptance of the equipment containing the items specified in this Section. Within such a period of warranty, the Manufacturer shall promptly furnish all material and labor necessary to return the equipment to new operating conditions. Any warranty work requiring shipping or transporting of the equipment shall be performed by the CONTRACTOR at no expense to the OWNER PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIAL MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following electrical material manufacturers are acceptable: 2. Eaton 3. Schneider Electric Company 4. Rockwell Automation 5. No equal B. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Materials listed above are not relieved from meeting these Specifications in their entirety. C. Provide control panels supplied by the mechanical equipment manufacturer who shall be responsible for providing all required controls and apparatus as specified utilizing the specified components herein. D. The acceptable electrical material manufactures listed above may not manufacture all materials required in the completed control panels. Other sections list acceptable material manufacturers, which produce those additional required components. Submittals shall include all components required. 2.02 RATINGS A. Voltage Rating: Provide the control panel with the service voltage as specified and/or as shown on the Drawings. MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT CONTROL PANELS (MECPS) MARCH 27, 2026 262986-6 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTAAND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY B. Short Circuit Rating: The overall short circuit withstand, and interrupting rating of the equipment and devices shall be not less than 65,000 amperes RMS symmetrical at 480Y/277 Volts, and equal to or greater than the overall short circuit withstand and interrupting rating of the feeder device immediately upstream of the Control Panel. 2. Provide a disconnect with current limiting fuses to reduce the available fault current at the control panel if required to meet the short circuit withstand and interrupting rating of the feeder device immediately upstream of the control panel. The fused disconnect shall be provided and installed at no additional cost. This includes all circuit breakers and combination motor starters. 3. Systems of motor controllers employing series connected ratings for main and feeder devices shall not be used and are not acceptable. Motor starter units shall be tested and UL 508A labeled for the specified short circuit duty in combination with the motor branch circuit protective device. 4. Provide selective device coordination between the Main Breaker, Feeder Breakers, and control circuit protective devices. a. When using a circuit breaker or fuses as a main protective device, the instantaneous trip levels of the main protective device shall be higher than the available fault current to the control panel. b. If fuses are utilized in the control panel design, the protective devices for three-phase loads shall contain single phase protection of such equipment. c. If a fault occurs in the circuit of one load of a design with a backup load, the feeder protective device shall not remove both loads from the control system. 5. Provide ground fault sensing on grounded wye systems. C. Produce and install on each panel, an Arc Flash Warning Label listing the various Flash Hazard Protection Boundaries, calculated from NFPA 70E, Annexes, as listed below: Flash Hazard Protection Boundary. 2. Limited Approach Boundary. 3. Restricted Boundary. MARCH 27, 2026 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT CONTROL PANELS (MECPS) ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 262986-7 MARYS CREEK WRF 4. Prohibited Boundary. 5. Incident Energy Level. 6. Required Personal Protective Equipment Class. 7. Type of Fire Rated Clothing. D. Provide an Arc Flash Warning Label printed in color and affixed to the front of each panel provided. Secure the required information from the Engineering Firm providing the study. 1. Provide labels with the information printed as required in Section 26 05 73 Power System Study E. Shown below is a typical label. Size of each label shall be not less than 8 inches wide and 6 inches tall. !1IY1i!LC1 Arc Flash and Shock Hazard FWh """d Boundary c.lk ' MM M.z.d N IU ncr... PP[ Lwat. $hock Mnaaw rtrn C.,. lunN�d Approach R.atncl d App,o. h PM*NWad Approach $aWpawwl PI. a' _______ W�_... 2.03 CONSTRUCTION A. General I . Submit actual layout and location of equipment and components; current ratings of devices, bus bars, components; protective relays, voltage ratings of devices, components and assemblies; and other required details. NEMA ratings of all devices shall meet or exceed the rating of each panel. 2. Control units shall be arranged as shown on the Drawings. 3. The complete control panel assembly shall be UL certified and carry a UL listing for "Industrial Control Panels". 4. The control panel shall meet all applicable requirements of the National Electrical Code. 5. The control panel enclosure shall be NEMA rated as specified herein. MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT CONTROL PANELS (MECPS) MARCH 27, 2026 262986-8 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTAAND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY 6. Provide motor controllers, including associated devices, rated for continuous operation at rated current in a 40°C ambient temperature. 7. For additional ratings and construction notes, refer to the mechanical equipment specifications and the Drawings. 8. Provide a factory installed dedicated Point of Utilization Device (SPD), for control panels which contain a programmable logic controller (PLC) or an uninterruptible power supply (UPS). 9. Provide a failure alarm with horn and beacon light when required or specified. a. Provide NEMA 4X enclosures for all areas except for NEMA 7 areas where cast aluminum NEMA 7 enclosures are required. b. Provide Silence and Reset buttons. c. Acceptable manufacturers: 1) Federal Signal 2) Crouse -Hinds 3) Or equal 10. Where Kirk -Key arrangements are required, provide a. Kirk HD (Heavy Duty) 316 Series of 316 stainless steel. b. Or equal B. Nameplates 1. General a. Furnish nameplates for each device. b. Provide engraved laminated impact acrylic nameplates with a matte finish, not less than 1/16 -inch thick by 3/4 -inch by 2 -1/2 -inch, Rowmark 322402 or acceptable equal. c. Provide nameplates with the lamination white on the outside with a black internal layer. Engrave the letting through the white outer layer so the letters appear black. d. Attach nameplates with stainless steel screws unless otherwise specified. e. Device mounted nameplates are not acceptable. MARCH 27, 2026 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT CONTROL PANELS (MECPS) ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 262986-9 MARYS CREEK WRF f. Reuse, alteration, or replacement of original equipment nameplates tags associated with equipment or components supplied by the manufacturer's suppliers and sub -suppliers is prohibited. 2. Exterior a. Furnish nameplates for each device as specified herein and as indicated on the Drawings. b. Provide black lettering on a white background c. Attach nameplates with stainless steel screws on NEMA 1, lA or 12 rated enclosures. d. Attach nameplates for NEMA 4 and 4X enclosures as follows: 1) Provide double faced adhesive strips, TESA TUFF TAPE 4970, 0.009 X 1/2 inch, or acceptable equal. 2) Prior to installing the nameplates, thoroughly clean the metal surface with 70% alcohol until all residue has been removed. 3) Epoxy adhesive or foam tape means of attachment are not acceptable. e. Provide a master nameplate that indicates equipment ratings, manufacturer's name, shop order number and general information. 1) Mount cubicle nameplates on the front face of each cubicle. 2) Provide permanent warning signs as follows: a) "Danger- High Voltage- Keep Out" on all doors. b) "Warning- Hazard of Electric Shock — Disconnect Power Before Opening or Working on This Unit" on Main Power Disconnect or Disconnects. 2. Internal a. Mark for identification control components mounted within the assembly as follows: 1) Provide nameplates corresponding to appropriate designations on manufacturer's wiring diagrams including but not limited to fuse blocks, relays, pushbuttons, switches, etc. 2) Provide identification nameplates with a white background and black letters. MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT CONTROL PANELS (MECPS) MARCH 27, 2026 262986-10 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTAAND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY 3) Attach with stainless steel screws. 4. Special nameplates a. Provide caution nameplates as follows: 1) Laminated plastic nameplates, yellow background and black letters b. Provide red warning nameplates as follows: C. Control Devices and Indicators 1. Securely mount all operating control devices, indicators, and instruments on the panel door. 2. Provide 30mm, corrosion resistant, NEMA 4X/13, anodized aluminum or reinforced plastic controls and indicators. 3. Booted control devices are not acceptable. 4. Provide auxiliary contacts for remote run indication and indication of each status and alarm condition. 5. Provide additional controls as specified herein and as required by the detailed mechanical and electrical equipment requirements. 6. Provide LED type push -to -test Indicator lamps. a. Provide lens colors follows: 1) Red for ON, Valve OPEN, and Breaker CLOSED. 2) Green for OFF, Valve CLOSED and Breaker OPEN. 3) Amber for FAIL. 4) Blue for READY 5) White for POWER ON. 7. Selector Switches a. Provide mode selector switches (HAND -OFF -AUTO, LOCAL -OFF - REMOTE, etc.) as shown on the Drawings. b. Switches shall have the number of positions and contact arrangements, as required. Each switch shall have an extra dry contact for remote monitoring. 8. Pushbuttons MARCH 27, 2026 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT CONTROL PANELS (MECPS) ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 26 29 86 - 11 MARYS CREEK WRF a. Provide pushbuttons as follows: 1) Red for STOP, Valve OPEN, Breaker OPEN 2) Red with mushroom head operator for EMERGENCY STOP. 3) START -STOP control station with MAINTAINED LOCKOUT - STOP: Red for STOP and black for reset 4) Green for START, Valve CLOSE and Breaker CLOSE. 5) Black for RESET. D. Potential voltage transformers (PT) and control power transformers (CPT) 1. Provide primary and secondary voltage ratings as shown on the Drawings. 2. Provide BIL rating equal to the short circuit rating of the main disconnecting device 3. Rated for the full voltage of the control panel 4. Provide current -limiting fuses 5. Provide metering accuracy instrument transformers for power quality meters. 6. Provide vacuum cast transformers using polyurethane resin. 7. Secondary conductors a. #14 AWG minimum, extra flexible, stranded, tin-plated copper control wire, Type SIS cross -linked polyethylene, rated 600 volts, except for specific circuits requiring larger wire. b. Crimp -type, uninsulated spade terminals shall be furnished on all control wire ends. c. Provide non -insulated ring terminals to connect to fuse blocks, and instrument transformer studs. d. Provide secondary control wires with armor where they pass through internal barriers separating compartments if present. e. Provide control wiring UL listed with a VW- 1 flame retardant rating. f. Conductor supports: 1) Provide spot welded cable support studs or other support means from which nylon cable ties and conductors are supported. 2) Adhesive type conductor supports are unacceptable. MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT CONTROL PANELS (MECPS) MARCH 27, 2026 262986-12 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTAAND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY g. Additional CPT requirements: 1) Size CPTs providing power to motor space heaters to accommodate the full load of the motor space heater. 2) Field verify the motor space heater rating on existing motors 3) Coordinate with the motor manufacturer for new motors to provide sufficient capacity in the CPT to power the space heater and all other internal motor control center auxiliary loads. 4) Increase CPT secondary conductors to accommodate the full load output current of the CPT if its full load current exceeds the capacity of the #14 AWG conductors specified herein. E. Current Transformers 1. Provide as indicated on the contract drawings. 2. Provide with the thermal and mechanical ratings of the CTs coordinated with the circuit breakers' current rating. 3. Provide multi -ratio CTs unless specified otherwise. 4. CT used with protective devices for fixed loads or to meter fixed loads (such as a single motor, transformer, or a generator) shall have a ratio which is no more than 150% of the rated full load current of the load. 5. CTs on circuits for variable frequency drives (VFD) shall be rated for 150% of the rated full load input current to the VFD regardless of the size of the motor controlled by the VFD. 6. Provide CTs connected to protective relays with an accuracy rating equal to or higher than ANSI standard requirements. 7. Provide instrument accuracy current transformers used for metering. 8. Provide separate CTs for meters. Do not series meters on the same CT circuit with protective relays. 9. Provide a separate, independent set of CTs for differential protection where shown or specified. 10. Locate current transformers on the bus side and/or line side of the breaker units. a. Terminal blocks: MARCH 27, 2026 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT CONTROL PANELS (MECPS) ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 26 29 86 - 13 MARYS CREEK WRF 1) Provide shorting terminal blocks (SHTB) on the secondary of all the current transformers. 2) Locate SHTB as close to the CT as possible. 3) Connect the secondary leads from the CT to the SHTB before connecting to any other device. b. Secondary Conductors 1) Provide #12 AWG, extra flexible, stranded, tin-plated copper control wire, Type SIS cross -linked polyethylene, rated 600 volts, minimum. 2) Provide larger conductors for circuits requiring larger wire. 3) Provide crimp -type, uninsulated spade terminals on all wire ends except as noted below. 4) Provide non -insulated ring terminals to connect to current transformer studs. 5) Provide armor for secondary control wires where they pass through primary compartments. 6) Provide control wiring UL listed with a VW -1 flame retardant rating. 7) Conductor supports: a) Provide spot welded cable support studs or other support means from which nylon cable ties and conductors are supported. b) Adhesive type conductor supports are unacceptable. F. Enclosures 1. General a. Enclosures shall meet the requirements specified in Section 26 05 33 Raceways, Boxes, Enclosures and Fittings. b. Provide enclosures with a removable back and side panels. Secure the removable panels to the enclosure with collar studs with 316 SS hardware. c. Mount controls components on the front panel. for free standing enclosures. MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT CONTROL PANELS (MECPS) MARCH 27, 2026 262986-14 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTAAND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY d. Provide wall mounted enclosures with welded mounting lugs and free-standing enclosures with welded mounting feet. Bolted on lugs or feet are unacceptable. e. The enclosure door shall be interlocked with the main circuit breaker by a panel mounted cable driven operating mechanism. J . Provide an internal back panel for mounting components tapped to accept all mounting screws. Self -tapping screws shall not be used to mount any components. Provided welded studs inside the enclosure to mount the back panel. Drilling holes in the exterior of the enclosure is prohibited. g. Provide all enclosure doors with ground bonding studs. Provide a ground bonding stud inside the enclosure. h. Provide each enclosure with a documentation pocket on the inner door. i. Enclosures shall not have holes or knockouts. j. Provide manufacturer's window kits where specified, required or shown on the Drawings. k. All panels installed outdoors shall have a factory applied, suitable primer and final coat of weatherproof white paint. 1. All enclosures shall be pad lockable. 2. NEMA 7/4X a. Class 1, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, and D, or as defined in NFPA 70). Boxes shall be constructed as follows: 1) Copper free cast aluminum body and cover 2) Stainless steel hinges 3) Watertight neoprene gasket 4) Stainless steel cover bolts 5) All penetrations shall be factory drilled and tapped. 3. NON-METALLIC a. Chemical Rooms. NEMA 4X constructed as follows: 1) PVC or Fiberglass reinforced polyester body and door. MARCH 27, 2026 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT CONTROL PANELS (MECPS) ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 26 29 86 - 15 MARYS CREEK WRF 2) UV inhibitors 3) Luggage type quick release latches 4) Foam -in -place gasketed doors 4. ALUMINUM a. NEMA 4X Aluminum 1) Type 5052 aluminum, body and door 2) Stainless steel continuous hinge 3) Foam in -place gasket 4) Single point quarter turn latches (20"x24" and below). All others 3 -point latch 5. NEMA 12 a. NEMA 12 Aluminum 1) Type 5052 aluminum, body and door 2) Stainless steel continuous hinge 3) Foam in -place gasket 4) Single point quarter turn latches (20"x24" and below). All others three-point latch 6. Otherwise Not Defined NEMA 4X Stainless Steel a. Where an enclosure is not otherwise defined or shown on the Drawing 1) NEMA 4X 316 Stainless Steel 2) Type 316 stainless steel, body and door 3) Stainless steel continuous hinge 4) Foam in -place gasket 5) Single point quarter turn latches (20"x24" and below). All others 3 -point latch 7. NEMA 1 or NEMA lA boxes shall not be used. 8. Malleable iron boxes shall not be used. G. Environmental Conditioning MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT CONTROL PANELS (MECPS) MARCH 27, 2026 262986-16 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTAAND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY 1. Condensation Control a. A self-contained enclosure condensation heater with thermostat and fan shall be mounted inside the control panel, if panel is mounted outdoors or in a non -air-conditioned space. 1) Enclosure heaters shall be energized from 120 -volt, single- phase power supply and sized to prevent condensation within the enclosure. 2) Locate enclosure heaters to avoid overheating electronic hardware or producing large temperature fluctuations on the hardware. 3) Enclosure heaters shall have an internal fan for heat distribution and shall be controlled with adjustable thermostats. The thermostat shall have an adjustment range of 40°F to 90°F. Provide a circuit breaker or fused disconnect switch within the enclosure. 4) Enclosure heaters shall be Hoffman type DAH or equal. b. Strip heaters may be provided if they are 240 -volt rated, powered at 120 volts AC and do not have a surface temperature higher than 60°C. Strip heaters and thermostats shall be as manufactured by Chromalox or equal. 1) Strip heaters shall be Chromalox, Type OT, 1.5 -in wide, 240 Volts, single phase, 150 watts, energized at 120 volts, with rust resisting iron sheath, Catalog No. OT -715, Product Code No. 129314, or equal. Provide enough wattage in heaters to prevent condensation should the interior temperature of the enclosure drop below the dew point. 2) A control thermostat mounted inside the control Panel shall be Chromalox, Type WR, single stage, Catalog No. WR-80, Product Code No.263177, or equal. 3) The strip heater terminals shall be guarded by a protective terminal cover. 4) High temperature connecting lead wire shall be used between the thermostat and the heater terminals. Wire shall be No. 12 AWG stranded, nickel -plated copper with Teflon glass MARCH 27, 2026 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT CONTROL PANELS (MECPS) ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 26 29 86 - 17 MARYS CREEK WRF insulation and shall be the product of Chromalox, Catalog No. 6 -CFI -12, Product Code No. 263783, or equal. c. Each panel shall have 1/2" stainless steel condensate drains, installed on a stainless -steel conduit hub, HGTZ Series, T&B or equal, in the bottom of the enclosure. Drain shall be O -Z Gedney DBB-50SS, or equal. 2. Corrosion Control a. Provide corrosion protection in each control panel with a corrosion - Inhibiting vapor capsule as manufactured by Northern Instruments; Model Zerust VC, or Hoffman Engineering; Model A-HCI, or equal. 3. Panel Interior Ambient Control a. Provide ambient temperature control within the panel to maintain internal temperatures below the maximum operating temperatures of the panel components. An ambient temperature range of -20°C to 40°C. b. Provide panel internal heat rise calculations to show that the panel internal temperatures will be maintained below the maximum operating temperatures of the panel components. c. Provide calculations to show all the internal and external heat gain loads, the expected internal rise in temperature in degrees C above the specified ambient. d. Panels for which the calculated heat rise exceeds 40°C. shall have an air conditioning system, sized as required to reduce the heat rise to 40°C. or less, without violating the NEMA rating of the enclosure. e. The air conditioner, when required, shall have the following features: 1) Use CFC-free R134a refrigerant. 2) Have fully gasketed flanges on all four mounting edges for a watertight seal that maintains NEMA 4X rating of the panel. 3) Thermostatic low temperature control to provide energy efficient operation and prevents over -cooling. 4) EMI/RFI suppressor to minimize transient spikes during compressor on/off cycling. 5) Separated blower -driven evaporator and condenser air systems for closed loop cooling. MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT CONTROL PANELS (MECPS) MARCH 27, 2026 262986-18 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTAAND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY 6) UL listed. 7) Stainless steel enclosure. 8) Internal corrosion resistant coating. 9) Low ambient kit. 10) Short cycle protector. 11) Manufacturers a) Hoffman b) Thermo Electric c) Approved equal. 4. Enclosure Fans a. Provide fans for soft start starters and VFDs, as required by the manufacturer, to provide air circulation and cooling. 1) Fans shall be controlled by a temperature switch. 2) The fan shall operate only when the drive is "ON" and for a cool -down period after the drive has stopped. 3) The fan shall not run when the drive is "OFF". 4) Louvers, if provided, shall have externally removable filters. The filter shall be metallic and washable. The NEMA rating of the enclosure shall not be violated in any case. b. Fan motors shall be protected by an input circuit breaker. c. Provide metal squirrel cage ball bearing, three phase fan motors with 10 -year design life. d. Plastic muffm fans are not acceptable. e. Fan power shall be obtained from a tap on the main control power transformer. J. Provide a "loss of cooling" fault alarm that identifies clogged filters or fan failure. g. Provide a high temperature shutdown after an adjustable time to safely shut down the control panel without causing electronic component. MARCH 27, 2026 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT CONTROL PANELS (MECPS) ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 26 29 86 - 19 MARYS CREEK WRF h. Provide redundant fans in the control panel design as backup in the event of fan failure. H. Internal Wiring Power and control wiring shall be tinned stranded copper, minimum size #14 AWG, with 600 -volt, 90°C, flame retardant, Type SIS cross -linked polyethylene insulation. 2. Line side power wiring shall be sized for the full rating or frame size of the connected device, and as shown on the Drawings. 3. Analog signal wires shall be 600 Volt Class, insulated stranded tinned copper, twisted shielded #16 AWG pair. 4. All interconnecting wires between panel mounted equipment and external equipment shall be terminated at numbered terminal blocks. Field wiring shall not be terminated directly on any panel -mounted device. 5. All wiring shall be tagged and coded with an identification number as shown on the Drawings. Coding shall be typed on a heat shrinkable tube applied to each end showing origination and destination of each wire. The marking shall be permanent, non -smearing, solvent -resistant type similar to Raychem TMS-SCE, or equal. 6. All wiring shall be enclosed in PVC wire trough with slotted side openings and removable cover. Plan wire routing such that no low twisted shielded pair cable conducting analog 4-20 mA signals or low voltage analog signals are routed in the same wire trough as conductors carrying discrete signals or power. 7. All control panel wiring shall use the following color code. a. Black: AC power at line voltage b. Red: switched AC power c. Orange: May be energized while the main disconnect is in the off position d. White: AC neutral e. Orange/white stripe or white/orange stripe: separate derived neutral J. Red/white stripe or white/red stripe: switched neutral g. Green or green w/ yellow tracer: ground/earth ground h. Blue: Ungrounded DC power MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT CONTROL PANELS (MECPS) MARCH 27, 2026 262986-20 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTAAND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY i. Blue/white stripe or white/blue stripe: DC grounded common j. Brown: 480V AC 3 phase - phase A k. Orange: 480V AC 3 phase - phase B 1. Yellow: 480V AC 3 Phase - phase C m. Purple: common for analog signal wiring n. Brown: positive leg of an analog signal I. Field Installed Internal Wiring 1. Field installed interior wiring shall be neatly grouped by circuit and bound by plastic tie wraps. 2. Circuit groups shall be supported so that circuit terminations are not stressed. 3. Low signal wiring (millivolt and milliamp) shall be bundle separately from the rest of the control wiring. 4. All field wiring shall be tagged and coded with an identification number. Coding shall be typed on a heat shrinkable tube applied to each end of the wire. The marking shall be a permanent, non -smearing, solvent -resistant type like Raychem TMS-SCE, or equal 5. Conduit entry: a. All conduit entering or leaving equipment shall be stubbed up into the bottom of the enclosure directly below the area in which the conductors are to be terminated. b. Conduits shall not enter the side unless approved in writing by the Owner/Engineer. c. Top entry of conduits is prohibited unless approved by the Owner/Engineer on a case -by -case basis. J. Terminal Blocks 1. Terminal blocks shall be DIN -rail -mounted one-piece molded plastic blocks with tubular -clamp -screw type and end barriers. 2. Provide terminal blocks shall be rated for 600 volts to terminate all conductors rated 600 volts. Provide 600 -volt rated terminal blocks for any conductor carrying any voltage over 120 volts to ground. MARCH 27, 2026 (MECPS) MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT CONTROL PANELS ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 262986-21 MARYS CREEK WRF 3. Provide terminal blocks rated for 300 volts to terminate low voltage control and instrumentation circuits or 4-20 mA analog signal conductors if the conductors are rated 300 volts. 4. Provide individual conductor terminals for twisted shielded pair or triad cables including separate terminals for shield drain wires. 5. Use the manufacturer's provided bridge connectors to interconnect terminal blocks terminating the shield drain wire conductors on the panel side of the terminal blocks. 6. Terminate control circuits, 120 -volts and below, and 4-20 mA analog signal conductors with manufacturer's recommended insulated connectors. 7. Provide 600 -volt rated strap screw terminal blocks for any power conductors carrying over 20 amps, at any voltage. Terminals shall be double sided and supplied with removable covers to prevent accidental contact with live circuits. 8. Terminate power conductors carrying over 20 amperes, at any voltage, to strap -screw type terminal blocks with crimp type, pre -insulated, ring -tongue lugs sized for the conductors that they terminate. 9. Provide lugs appropriately sized for the conductors and the terminal block screws. Do not terminate more than one conductor in any lug, and do not land more than two conductors under any strap -screw terminal point. 10. Terminals shall have permanent, legible identification, clearly visible with the protective cover removed. Each terminal block shall have 20% spare terminals, but not less than two spare terminals. 11. Provide an AC ground bar bonded to the panel enclosure (if metal) with 20% spare terminals. 2.04 SERVICE ENTRANCE DEVICE A. Control Panel which are rated or rated and used as a service entrance panel, shall be provided with factory installed dedicated Surge Protective Device (SPD), Type 2, permanently connected, on the load side of the service entrance device. Provided the SPD as specified in Section 26 43 13 Low Voltage AC Surge Protective Devices (SPDs). 2.05 MAIN CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE DEVICE A. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, the main circuit protective device shall be a molded case (MCCB), Three -Pole, 600 -Volt, fixed type, manually operated with stored energy closing mechanism. MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT CONTROL PANELS (MECPS) MARCH 27, 2026 262986-22 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTAAND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY B. Provide a flange mounted main power disconnect operating handle with mechanical interlock that will allow the panel door to open only when the switch is in the OFF position. Where panels are shown or specified with inner and outer doors, disconnecting handles and controls shall be located on the inner door. 2.06 MOTOR CONTROLLERS A. Manufacturers Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable: a. Eaton b. ABB C. Rockwell Automation d. Schneider Electric Company e. No equal 2. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. B. General Magnetic Motor Starter a. Provide the NEMA size starter, circuit breaker trip ratings, control power transformers and thermal overload heater element ratings matched to the motors and control equipment supplied, in compliance with the NEC and the manufacturer's heater selection tables. b. A NEMA rated magnetic motor starter shall be furnished for each motor. Motor starters shall be two or three -pole, single or three-phase as required, 60 Hertz, 600 -volt, magnetically operated, full voltage reversing, or non -reversing as required by the mechanical process design. c. Overload relays shall be adjustable, ambient compensated and manually reset. d. Auxiliary contacts shall be provided as shown on the Drawings. A minimum of one N.O. and one N.C. auxiliary contacts shall be MARCH 27, 2026 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT CONTROL PANELS (MECPS) ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 262986-23 MARYS CREEK WRF provided in addition to the contacts required connected as specified above. e. Each motor starter shall have a 120 -volt operating coil unless otherwise noted. J . Provide each motor starter with a motor circuit protector (MCP), or circuit breaker, and equipped to provide undervoltage release and overload protection on all three phases. g. The short circuit protective device shall have an adjustable magnetic trip range up to 1400 percent of rated continuous current and a trip test feature. h. MCPs shall be labeled in accordance with UL489. i. NEMA starter sizes and breaker trip ratings shall be as required for the horsepower indicated but shall be in no case less than NEMA Size 1. j. A mechanical disconnect mechanism, with bypass, shall be installed on each motor circuit protector, capable of being locked in the "OFF" position to provide a means of disconnecting power to each motor. Disconnects mechanisms shall be located inside the enclosure such that the main circuit breaker handle is the only device interlocked with the panel door. k. Overload relays shall be standard Class 20, ambient compensated, manually reset by pushbutton located on front of the starter door. A normally closed contact shall be directly connected in series with the starter circuit to shut off the starter and a normally open contact from the overload relay shall be wired to a terminal block for an overload alarm. If the manufacturer of the equipment utilizing the motor, supplies a motor horsepower larger than that shown on the Drawings, provide a motor starter sized to control the motor supplied. No change in the Contract Price or Schedule will be allowed for such changes. m. All variations necessary to accommodate the motors and controls as actually furnished shall be made without extra cost to the Owner. n. IEC rated starters are not acceptable. 2. All incoming power and control wiring leaving or entering the control panel shall be terminated with the lugs specified for the size and type of wire required. Furnish terminals appropriately sized to terminate the specified MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT CONTROL PANELS (MECPS) MARCH 27, 2026 262986-24 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTAAND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY wire lugs. Allow adequate clearance for bending and terminating of wire and cables which are the size and type specified, shown or required. 3. All interfaces between control panel and remote devices shall be isolated via an interposing relay. Interposing relays shall have contacts rated for 250 VAC and 10 Amperes continuous. Relays shall be Control Relays as specified herein. 4. Built in control stations and indicating lights shall be furnished where shown on the Drawings. 5. Provide as -built wiring diagrams mounted in a protective cover inside the panel. C. Contactors Contactors shall be a circuit breaker and contactor, 600 -Volt, three -pole, 60 Hz, magnetically operated. NEMA size shall be as required for the kilowatt ratings required for the equipment provided but shall be not less than NEMA size 1. 2. Contactors shall have a 120 -Volt operating coil and control power transformer. Furnish the control power transformer with extra capacity for the unit heater fan. D. Control Relays 1. Control relays shall be 300 -volt, industrial rated, plug-in socket type, housed in a transparent polycarbonate dust cover, designed in accordance with UL Standard 508 for motor controller duty. 2. Continuous contact rating shall be 10 amperes resistive, 1/4 HP at 120 VAC, operating temperature minus 10°C to plus 55°C. 3. Provide spare N.O. & N.C. contacts. Relays shall be Potter & Brumfield KRP Series or equal with neon coil indicator light. 4. Timing relays shall be 300 -Volt, solid state type, with rotary switch to select the timing range. E. Elapsed Time Meter A six -digit, non-resettable elapsed time meter shall be installed on the face of each motor starter. Meter shall be as specified in Section 26 27 13. MARCH 27, 2026 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT CONTROL PANELS (MECPS) ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 262986-25 MARYS CREEK WRF 2.07 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER (PLC) A. Where the control panel contains a programmable logic controller (PLC) for programming of the control logic, as shown on the Drawings, the PLC shall be as specified in Section 40 63 00 PLC Hardware and Software. The manufacturer shall provide the address list, and the interface to connect to the Owner's plant monitoring system for monitoring of the PLC's operation. B. Provide a scripted program file for all PLCs. C. The equipment manufacturer shall furnish factory installed, a dedicated Point of Utilization Device (SPD). D. The manufacturer shall provide the address list and an Ethernet interface to connect to the Owner's plant monitoring system for monitoring of the PLC's operation. 2.08 OPERATION INTERFACE TERMINAL (OIT) A. Where the control panel contains an Operation Interface Terminal as shown on the Drawings, for interfacing to the control logic, the manufacturer shall provide the address list, and an Ethernet interface, to connect to the related PLC for monitoring and control of the PLC's operation. The OIT shall be as specified in Section 40 62 63 Operator Interface Terminals (OIT). B. Provide a scripted application and fully documented setup for all OITs. C. The equipment manufacturer shall furnish factory installed, a dedicated Point of Utilization Device (SPD). D. The manufacturer shall provide the address list and an Ethernet interface to connect to the Owner's plant monitoring system for monitoring of the PLC's OIT interface. 2.09 REMOTE MONITORING INTERFACE A. General: 1. See Section 40 66 00 Network Equipment paragraph MEDIA CONVERTERS for communications protocol requirements. 2.10 SPARE PARTS A. Provide the following spare parts for each control panel in the quantities specified: 1. Six replacement fuses, all types and sizes MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT CONTROL PANELS (MECPS) MARCH 27, 2026 262986-26 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTAAND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY 2. One replacement lamp, of each color, for pilot lights 3. One of each color replacement lens caps for pilot lights 4. One starter coil for each NEMA size furnished 5. One, three -pole set of replacement overload heaters of each size range used 6. One, three -pole set of starter contacts of each NEMA size used. 7. One can of aerosol touch-up paint. 8. One PLC CPU and power supply. 9. One module of each type utilize for the PLC. B. Spare parts shall be boxed or packaged for long term storage. Identify each item with manufacturer's name, description and part number on the exterior of the package. 2.11 FACTORY TESTING A. The entire control panel shall be completely assembled, wired, and adjusted at the factory and shall be given the manufacturer's routine shop tests and any other additional operational test to insure the workability and reliable operation of the equipment. B. Factory test equipment and test methods shall conform with the latest applicable requirements of ANSI, IEEE, UL, and NEMA standards. C. The operational test shall include the proper connection of supply and control voltage and, as far as practical, a mockup of simulated control signals and control devices shall be fed into the boards to check for proper operation. D. Factory test equipment and test methods shall conform to the latest applicable requirements of ANSI, IEEE, UL, and NEMA standards, and shall be subject to the Owner/Engineer's approval. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE A. Provide the services of a qualified factory -trained manufacturer's field representative to perform the tasks specified under this section for the time required. MARCH 27, 2026 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT CONTROL PANELS (MECPS) ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 262986-27 MARYS CREEK WRF B. The manufacturer's representative shall provide technical direction and assistance in the general assembly of the equipment, connections, and adjustments, and testing of the assembly and components contained therein. C. Provide three copies of the manufacturer's field start-up report. 3.02 INSTALLER'S QUALIFICATIONS A. Provide an installer who shall be specialized in installing this type of equipment, with a minimum of 5 years documented experience. B. Experience documentation shall be submitted for approval prior to beginning work on this project. 3.03 EXAMINATION A. Examine installation area to assure there is enough clearance to install the equipment. B. Housekeeping pads shall be included for the floor mounted motor controllers as detailed on the Drawings except for motor controllers which are to be installed adjacent to an existing unit. Housekeeping pads for these (if used) should match the existing installation. C. Check concrete pads and baseplates for uniformity and level surface. D. Verify that the equipment is ready to install. E. Verify field measurements are as submitted by the manufacturer. 3.04 INSTALLATION A. Install all equipment per the manufacturer's recommendations and Contract Drawings. B. Conduit hubs for use on raceway system pull and junction boxes shall be watertight, threaded aluminum, insulated throat, stainless steel grounding screw, as manufactured by T&B H150GRA Series, or equal. C. Conduits entering a Control Panel shall not enter the enclosure through the top. D. Install required safety labels. MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT CONTROL PANELS (MECPS) MARCH 27, 2026 262986-28 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTAAND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY 3.05 RACEWAY SEALING A. Raceways entering junction boxes containing terminal blocks or control panels containing electrical or instrumentation equipment shall be sealed with 3M 1000NS Watertight Sealant or approved equal. B. This requirement applies to all raceways in the conduit system. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect installed equipment for anchoring, alignment, grounding and physical damage. B. Check tightness of all accessible electrical connections. Minimum acceptable values are specified in manufacturer's instructions. C. Provide one set of as -built panel drawings, laminated, in each panel pocket. 3.07 FIELD ADJUSTING A. Adjust all circuit breakers, switches, access doors, operating handles for free mechanical and electrical operation as described in manufacturer's instructions. B. The adjustable breakers shall be set in the field by a qualified representative of the manufacturer, in accordance with settings designated in a coordinated study of the system Provide settings as required in Section 26 05 73 Power System Study 2. All such settings, including the application of arc flash labels, shall have been made and Approved by the Owner/Engineer, prior to energizing of the equipment. 3.08 FIELD TESTING A. Perform all electrical field tests recommended by the manufacturer. Disconnect all connections to solid-state equipment prior to testing. All field testing shall be witnessed by the Owner. B. Megger and record phase to phase and phase to ground insulation resistance. Megger, for one minute, at minimum voltage of 1000 VDC. Measured Insulation resistance shall be at least 100 megohms. In no case shall the manufacturer's maximum test voltages be exceeded. C. Test each key interlock system for proper functioning. MARCH 27, 2026 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT CONTROL PANELS (MECPS) ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 262986-29 MARYS CREEK WRF D. Test all control logic before energizing the motor or equipment. 3.09 CLEANING A. Remove all rubbish and debris from inside and around the motor controllers. Remove dirt, dust, or concrete spatter from the interior and exterior of the equipment using brushes, vacuum cleaner, or clean, lint free rags. Do not use compressed air. 3.10 EQUIPMENT PROTECTION AND RESTORATION A. Touch-up and restore damaged surfaces to factory finish, as approved by the manufacturer. If the damaged surface cannot be returned to factory specification, the surface shall be replaced. 3.11 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATION A. Provide a qualified factory -trained manufacturer's representative who shall certify in writing that the equipment has been installed, adjusted, including all settings designated in the Power System Study, and tested in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Provide three copies of the manufacturer's representative's certification. 3.12 TRAINING A. Provide manufacturer's services for training of plant personnel in operation and maintenance of the soft start starters furnished under this Section. B. The training for each type of equipment shall be for a period of not less than (2) four-hour days. C. The cost of training program to be conducted with Owner's personnel shall be included in the Contract Price. The training and instruction, insofar as practicable, shall be directly related to the system being supplied. D. Provide detailed O&M manuals to supplement the training course. The manuals shall include specific details of equipment supplied and operations specific to the project. E. The training session shall be conducted by a manufacturer's qualified representative. Training program shall include instructions on the assembly, motor starters, protective devices, metering, and other major components. F. The Owner reserves the right to videotape the training sessions for the Owner's use. MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT CONTROL PANELS (MECPS) MARCH 27, 2026 262986-30 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTAAND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY END OF SECTION MARCH 27, 2026 (MECPS) MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT CONTROL PANELS ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 262986-31 MARYS CREEK WRF THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT CONTROL PANELS (MECPS) MARCH 27, 2026 262986-32 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTAAND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY SECTION 26 29 87 ELECTRICAL CONTROL PANELS (ECPS) PARTI GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish and install functional control panels to operate control systems manually or automatically as specified in the detailed requirements of this Section, and logic and schematics as shown on the Electrical Drawings. B. Submittals for Electrical Control Panels, not clearly specified as Control Panels furnished under Division 26, shall be submitted under the Section of the Specifications specified in the Mechanical Equipment Division. Control Panels for Mechanical Equipment Division shall meet the requirements of Section 26 29 86 Mechanical Equipment Control Panels and shall be submitted as a part of the Mechanical Equipment manufacturer's submittals. 2. Control panels specified within the Instrumentation Sections of Division 40 shall be submitted as a part of the Instrumentation submittals. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Refer to Division 26 00 00 and the Contract Drawings, for related work and electrical coordination requirements. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be made in accordance with the requirements of Division 1, Section 26 00 00, the Contract Documents and as specified herein the following: 1. The manufacturers' names and product designation or catalog numbers for the types of materials specified or shown on the Drawings. 2. Cut sheets for each individual item shall be submitted. 3. All cut sheets shall be clearly marked to indicate which products are being submitted for use on this project. 4. Unmarked cut sheets will cause the submittal to be rejected and returned for revision. B. All shop drawing submittals and all O&M submittals shall be submitted in accordance with the requirements listed in Division 1. No change in Contract Price or Schedule will be allowed for delays due to unacceptable submittals. MARCH 27, 2026 ELECTRICAL CONTROL PANELS (ECPS) ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 26 29 87 - 1 MARYS CREEK WRF C. Submittals shall also contain information on related equipment to be furnished under this Specification. Incomplete submittals not containing the required information on the related equipment will also be returned without review D. Submittals shall be made in accordance with the requirements of the process equipment division of these Specifications, and as specified herein. E. The original equipment manufacturer, (OEM) shall create all equipment shop drawings, including all wiring diagrams, in the manufacturer's Engineering department. All equipment shop drawings shall bear the original equipment manufacturer's logo, drawing file numbers, and shall be maintained on file in the OEM's archive file system. Photocopies of the Engineer's ladder schematics are unacceptable as shop drawings. F. Submittals for equipment and materials, furnished under this Section of the Specifications, will not be accepted prior to approval of the Qualifications of the Study Engineer followed by the submission and approval of the Preliminary Short Circuit Study required in the Power System Study as specified in Section 26 05 73. Submittals for this equipment made prior to the Engineer's approvals will be returned unreviewed. G. Time -current coordination curves for protective device relays, circuit breakers, and fuses submitted shall be included as a part of these submittals. H. Submit for approval, a manufacturer's conducted training agenda for all training specified herein. Training agenda shall not be submitted until final approval of the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Shop Drawings and Product Data. The following information shall be submitted to the Engineer: Product data sheets and catalog numbers for overcurrent protective devices, motor starters, control relays, control stations, meters, pilot lights, etc. The manufacturer's name shall be clearly visible on each cut sheet submitted. List all options, trip adjustments and accessories furnished specifically for this project. Clearly mark each sheet to indicate which items apply and/or those items that do not apply. 2. Provide control systems engineering to produce custom unit elementary drawings showing inter -wiring and interlocking between components and to remotely mounted devices. Include and identify all connecting equipment and remote devices on the schematics. The notation "Remote Device" will not be acceptable. Show wire and terminal numbers. Indicate special identifications for electrical devices per the Drawings. ELECTRICAL CONTROL PANELS (ECPS) MARCH 27, 2026 262987-2 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY 3. Equipment outline drawings showing elevation, plan and interior views, front panel arrangement, dimensions, weight, shipping splits, conduit entrances and anchor bolt pattern. Indicate all options, special features, ratings, and deviations from this Section. 4. Schematic diagram, including manufacturer's selections of component ratings, and CT and PT ratios. 5. Power and control schematics including external connections. Show wire and terminal numbers, and color -coding. 6. Instruction and replacement parts books. 7. As -built final drawings. 8. Documentation that the panel assembly facility is a UL -508 certified panel shop. 9. Facsimile of the UL label that is to be applied to the completed panel. 10. Furnish complete Bill of Materials indicating manufacturer's name and part numbers. 11. Manufacturer's cut sheets for every component used in the panel assembly adequately marked to show the items being included. The manufacturer's name shall be clearly visible on each cut sheet submitted. 12. Assembly ratings including: a. Short-circuit rating b. Voltage c. Continuous current 13. Major component ratings including: a. Voltage b. Continuous current c. Interrupting ratings 14. Cable terminal sizes. 15. Instruction and renewal parts books. J. Factory Tests. Submittals shall be made for factory tests specified herein. K. Field Test Reports. Submittals shall be made for field tests specified herein. L. Operation and Maintenance Manuals. MARCH 27, 2026 ELECTRICAL CONTROL PANELS (ECPS) ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 262987-3 MARYS CREEK WRF 1. Operation and maintenance manuals shall include the following information: a. Manufacturer's contact address and telephone number for parts and service. b. Instruction books and/or leaflets c. Recommended renewal parts list d. Record Documents for the information required by the Submittals paragraph above. 1.04 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. All products and components shown on the Drawings and listed in this specification shall be designed and manufactured according to latest revision of the following standards (unless otherwise noted): NEMA Standard ICS 2 - 2000 Industrial Control and Systems 2. NFPA 70 — National Electrical Code (NEC) 3. NFPA 70E — Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace 4. NFPA 79 — Electrical Standard for Industrial Machinery 5. UL 508/508A — Industrial Control Enclosures B. All equipment specified in this Section of the Specifications shall bear the appropriate label of Underwriters Laboratories. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar equipment for a minimum period of five years. When requested by the Owner/Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement. B. The control panels shall be assembled in a UL -508 certified facility. A submittal of documentation certifying that the panel fabrication facility is a UL -508 certified facility, is required. A UL label shall be affixed to the inside of the external door by the panel fabrication assembly. Submit a facsimile of the UL label in the submittal information. C. All components and material shall be new and of the latest field proven design and in current production. Obsolete components or components scheduled for immediate discontinuation shall not be used. ELECTRICAL CONTROL PANELS (ECPS) MARCH 27, 2026 262987-4 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY D. Control Panels submitted shall fit within the space shown on the Drawings. Equipment which does not fit within the space is not acceptable. E. For the equipment specified herein, the manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 2000 certified. F. Equipment components and devices shall be UL labeled wherever UL standards exist for such equipment. The completed control panel shall be UL Labeled in accordance with UL 508 and 508A and other applicable UL standards. The panel shall also be UL labeled for the environment in which it is to be placed. A UL label shall be affixed to the inside of the external door by the panel fabrication assembly. Submit a facsimile of the UL label in the submittal information. 1.06 JOBSITE DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Prior to jobsite delivery, complete all submittal requirements, and present to the Owner/Engineer upon delivery of the equipment, an approved copy of all such submittals. Delivery of incomplete constructed equipment, onsite factory work, or failed factory tests will not be permitted. B. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Two copies of these instructions shall be included with the equipment at time of shipment, and shall be made available to the Contractor and Owner/Engineer. C. Shipping groups shall be designed to be shipped by truck, rail, or ship. Indoor groups shall be bolted to skids. Breakers and accessories shall be packaged and shipped separately. D. Equipment shall be installed in its permanent finished location shown on the Drawings within seven calendar days of arriving onsite. If the equipment cannot be installed within seven calendar days, the equipment shall not be delivered to the site, but stored off site until such time that the site is ready for permanent installation of the equipment. No change in the Contract Price will be allowed for storage or transportation. E. Provide temporary electrical power and operate space heaters during storage, and after equipment is installed in permanent location, until equipment is placed in service. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Provide the warranty time specified in Division 1. MARCH 27, 2026 ELECTRICAL CONTROL PANELS (ECPS) ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 262987-5 MARYS CREEK WRF B. Within such period of warranty, all material and labor necessary to return the equipment to new operating condition shall be provided. Any warranty work requiring shipping or transporting of the equipment shall be provided at no expense to the Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIAL MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following material Manufacturers are acceptable for items not specifically specified elsewhere: 2. Eaton 3. Schneider Electric Company 4. Rockwell Automation 5. Approved equal B. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Materials listed above are not relieved from meeting these Specifications in their entirety. 2.02 RATINGS A. Voltage Rating: Provide the control panel with the service voltage as specified and/or as shown on the Drawings. B. Short Circuit Rating: The overall short circuit withstand, and interrupting rating of the equipment and devices shall be not less than 22,000 amperes RMS symmetrical at 480Y/277 Volts, and equal to or greater than the overall short circuit withstand and interrupting rating of the feeder device immediately upstream of the Control Panel. 2. Provide a disconnect with current limiting fuses to reduce the available fault current at the control panel if required to meet the short circuit withstand and interrupting rating of the feeder device immediately upstream of the control panel. The fused disconnect shall be provided and installed at no additional cost. This includes all circuit breakers and combination motor starters. ELECTRICAL CONTROL PANELS (ECPS) MARCH 27, 2026 262987-6 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY 3. Systems of motor controllers employing series connected ratings for main and feeder devices shall not be used and are not acceptable. Motor starter units shall be tested and UL 508A labeled for the specified short circuit duty in combination with the motor branch circuit protective device. 4. Provide selective device coordination between the Main Breaker, Feeder Breakers, and control circuit protective devices. a. When using a circuit breaker or fuses as a main protective device, the instantaneous trip levels of the main protective device shall be higher than the available fault current to the control panel. b. If fuses are utilized in the control panel design, the protective devices for three-phase loads shall contain single phase protection of such equipment. c. If a fault occurs in the circuit of one load of a design with a backup load, the feeder protective device shall not remove both loads from the control system. C. Provide ground fault sensing on grounded wye systems. D. The Manufacturer shall produce and install on each panel, an Arc Flash Warning Label listing the various Flash Hazard Protection Boundaries, calculated from NFPA 70E, Annexes, as listed below: Flash Hazard Protection Boundary. 2. Limited Approach Boundary. 3. Restricted Boundary. 4. Incident Energy Level. 5. Required Personal Protective Equipment Class. 6. Type of Fire Rated Clothing. E. Provide an Arc Flash Warning Label printed in color and affixed to the front of each panel provided. Secure the required information from the Engineering Firm providing the study. Provide labels with the information printed as required in Section26 05 73 Power System Study F. Shown below is a typical label. Size of each label shall be not less than 6 inches wide and 4 inches tall. MARCH 27, 2026 ELECTRICAL CONTROL PANELS (ECPS) ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 262987-7 MARYS CREEK WRF Arc Flash and Shock Hazard Flaah Naea,d Boundary wlIcm• FYM Masard N 16 InaMa PP[ L-1. Shock Nasrd wI-. Co,.., ti Lfmnad ApproacI _ R.atnoMd Approkch . P,ohUI.II.d App,oaoh 2.03 CONSTRUCTION A. General Submit actual layout and location of equipment and components; current ratings of devices, bus bars, components; protective relays, voltage ratings of devices, components and assemblies; and other required details. NEMA ratings of all devices shall meet or exceed the rating of each panel. 2. Control units shall be arranged as shown on the Drawings. 3. The complete control panel assembly shall be UL certified and carry a UL listing for "Industrial Control Panels". 4. The control panel shall meet all applicable requirements of the National Electrical Code. 5. The control panel enclosure shall be NEMA rated as specified herein. 6. Provide motor controllers, including associated devices, rated for continuous operation at rated current in a 40°C ambient temperature. 7. For additional ratings and construction notes, refer to the mechanical equipment specifications and the Drawings. 8. Provide a factory installed dedicated Point of Utilization Device (SPD), as specified in Section26 43 13, Individual Control Panel and Related Equipment Protection (Type 3) for control panels which contain a programmable logic controller (PLC) or an uninterruptible power supply (UPS). 9. Provide a failure alarm with horn and beacon light when required or specified. ELECTRICAL CONTROL PANELS (ECPS) MARCH 27, 2026 262987-8 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY a. Provide NEMA 4X enclosures for all areas except for NEMA 7 areas where cast aluminum NEMA 7 enclosures are required. b. Provide Silence and Reset buttons. c. Acceptable manufacturers: 1) Alarm horn and beacon: Federal Signal 2) Crouse -Hinds 3) Approved equal 10. Where Kirk -Key arrangements are required, provide a. Kirk HD (Heavy Duty) 316 Series of 316 stainless steel. b. Approved equal B. Nameplates 1. General a. Furnish nameplates for each device. b. Provide engraved laminated impact acrylic nameplates with a matte finish, not less than 1/16 -inch thick by 3/4 -inch by 2 -1/2 -inch, Rowmark 322402 acceptable equal. c. Provide nameplates with the lamination white on the outside with a black internal layer. Engrave the letting through the white outer layer so the letters appear black. d. Attach nameplates with stainless steel screws unless otherwise specified. e. Device mounted nameplates are not acceptable. f. Reuse, alteration, or replacement of original equipment nameplates tags associated with equipment or components supplied by the manufacturer's suppliers and sub -suppliers is prohibited. 2. Exterior a. Furnish nameplates for each device as specified herein and as indicated on the Drawings. b. Provide black lettering on a white background c. Attach nameplates with stainless steel screws on NEMA 1, 1A or 12 rated enclosures. MARCH 27, 2026 ELECTRICAL CONTROL PANELS (ECPS) ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 262987-9 MARYS CREEK WRF d. Attach nameplates for NEMA 4 and 4X enclosures as follows: 1) Provide double faced adhesive strips, TESA TUFF TAPE 4970, 0.009 X 1/2 inch, or acceptable equal. 2) Prior to installing the nameplates, thoroughly clean the metal surface with 70% alcohol until all residue has been removed. 3) Epoxy adhesive or foam tape means of attachment are not acceptable. e. Provide a master nameplate that indicates equipment ratings, manufacturer's name, shop order number and general information. 1) Mount cubicle nameplates on the front face of each cubicle. 2) Provide permanent warning signs as follows: a) "Danger- High Voltage- Keep Out" on all doors. b) "Warning- Hazard of Electric Shock — Disconnect Power Before Opening or Working on This Unit" on Main Power Disconnect or Disconnects. 2. Internal a. Mark for identification control components mounted within the assembly as follows: 1) Provide nameplates corresponding to appropriate designations on manufacturer's wiring diagrams including but not limited to fuse blocks, relays, pushbuttons, switches, etc. 2) Provide identification nameplates with a white background and black letters. 3) Attach with stainless steel screws. 4. Special nameplates a. Provide caution nameplates as follows: 1) Laminated plastic nameplates, yellow background and black letters b. Provide red warning nameplates as follows: C. Control Devices and Indicators ELECTRICAL CONTROL PANELS (ECPS) MARCH 27, 2026 262987-10 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY 1. Securely mount all operating control devices, indicators, and instruments on the panel door. 2. Provide 30mm, corrosion resistant, NEMA 4X/13, anodized aluminum or reinforced plastic controls and indicators. 3. Booted control devices are not acceptable. 4. Provide auxiliary contacts for remote run indication and indication of each status and alarm condition. 5. Provide additional controls as specified herein and as required by the detailed mechanical and electrical equipment requirements. 6. Provide LED type push -to -test Indicator lamps. a. Provide lens colors follows: 1) Red for ON, Valve OPEN, and Breaker CLOSED. 2) Green for OFF, Valve CLOSED and Breaker OPEN. 3) Amber for FAIL. 4) Blue for READY 5) White for POWER ON. 7. Selector Switches a. Provide mode selector switches (HAND -OFF -AUTO, LOCAL -OFF - REMOTE, etc.) as shown on the Drawings. b. Switches shall have the number of positions and contact arrangements, as required. Each switch shall have an extra dry contact for remote monitoring. 8. Pushbuttons a. Provide pushbuttons as follows: 1) Red for STOP, Valve OPEN, Breaker OPEN 2) Red with mushroom head operator for EMERGENCY STOP. 3) START -STOP control station with MAINTAINED LOCKOUT - STOP: Red for STOP and black for reset 4) Green for START, Valve CLOSE and Breaker CLOSE. 5) Black for RESET. MARCH 27, 2026 ELECTRICAL CONTROL PANELS (ECPS) ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 26 29 87 - 11 MARYS CREEK WRF D. Potential voltage transformers (PT) and control power transformers (CPT) 1. Provide primary and secondary voltage ratings as shown on the Drawings. 2. Provide BIL rating equal to the short circuit rating of the main disconnecting device 3. Rated for the full voltage of the control panel 4. Provide current -limiting fuses 5. Provide metering accuracy instrument transformers for power quality meters. 6. Provide vacuum cast transformers using polyurethane resin. 7. Secondary conductors a. #14 AWG minimum, extra flexible, stranded, tin-plated copper control wire, Type SIS cross -linked polyethylene rated 600 volts, except for specific circuits requiring larger wire. b. Crimp -type, uninsulated spade terminals shall be furnished on all control wire ends. c. Provide non -insulated ring terminals to connect to fuse blocks, and instrument transformer studs. d. Provide secondary control wires with armor where they pass through internal barriers separating compartments if present. e. Provide control wiring UL listed with a VW- 1 flame retardant rating. f. Conductor supports: 1) Provide spot welded cable support studs or other support means from which nylon cable ties and conductors are supported. 2) Adhesive type conductor supports are unacceptable. 8. Additional CPT requirements: a. Size CPTs providing power to motor space heaters to accommodate the full load of the motor space heater. b. Field verify the motor space heater rating on existing motors c. Coordinate with the motor manufacturer for new motors to provide sufficient capacity in the CPT to power the space heater and all other internal motor control center auxiliary loads. ELECTRICAL CONTROL PANELS (ECPS) MARCH 27, 2026 262987-12 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY d. Increase CPT secondary conductors to accommodate the full load output current of the CPT if its full load current exceeds the capacity of the #14 AWG conductors specified herein. 9. Current Transformers a. Provide as indicated on the contract drawings. b. Provide with the thermal and mechanical ratings of the CTs coordinated with the circuit breakers' current rating. c. Provide multi -ratio CTs unless specified otherwise. d. CT used with protective devices for fixed loads or to meter fixed loads (such as a single motor, transformer, or a generator) shall have a ratio which is no more than 150% of the rated full load current of the load. e. CTs on circuits for variable frequency drives (VFD) shall be rated for 150% of the rated full load input current to the VFD regardless of the size of the motor controlled by the VFD. £ Provide CTs connected to protective relays with an accuracy rating equal to or higher than ANSI standard requirements. g. Provide instrument accuracy current transformers used for metering. h. Provide separate CTs for meters. Do not series meters on the same CT circuit with protective relays. i. Provide a separate, independent set of CTs for differential protection where shown or specified. j. Locate current transformers on the bus side and/or line side of the breaker units. k. Terminal blocks: 1) Provide shorting terminal blocks (SHTB) on the secondary of all the current transformers. 2) Locate SHTB as close to the CT as possible. 3) Connect the secondary leads from the CT to the SHTB before connecting to any other device. 1. Secondary Conductors MARCH 27, 2026 ELECTRICAL CONTROL PANELS (ECPS) ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 26 29 87 - 13 MARYS CREEK WRF 1) Provide #12 AWG, extra flexible, stranded, tin-plated copper control wire, Type SIS cross -linked polyethylene rated 600 volts, minimum. 2) Provide larger conductors for circuits requiring larger wire. 3) Provide crimp -type, uninsulated spade terminals on all wire ends except as noted below. 4) Provide non -insulated ring terminals to connect to current transformer studs. 5) Provide armor for secondary control wires where they pass through primary compartments. 6) Provide control wiring UL listed with a VW- 1 flame retardant rating. 7) Conductor supports: a) Provide spot welded cable support studs or other support means from which nylon cable ties and conductors are supported. b) Adhesive type conductor supports are unacceptable. F. Enclosures 1. General a. Enclosures shall meet the requirements specified in Section 26 05 33 Raceways, Boxes, Enclosures and Fittings. b. Provide enclosures with a removable back and side panels. Secure the removable panels to the enclosure with collar studs with 316 SS hardware. c. Mount controls components on the front panel, for free standing enclosures. d. Provide wall mounted enclosures with welded mounting lugs and free-standing enclosures with welded mounting feet. Bolted on lugs or feet are unacceptable. e. The enclosure door shall be interlocked with the main circuit breaker by a panel mounted cable driven operating mechanism. f. Provide an internal back panel for mounting components tapped to accept all mounting screws. Self -tapping screws shall not be used to ELECTRICAL CONTROL PANELS (ECPS) MARCH 27, 2026 262987-14 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY mount any components. Provided welded studs inside the enclosure to mount the back panel. Drilling holes in the exterior of the enclosure is prohibited. g. Provide all enclosure doors with ground bonding studs. Provide a ground bonding stud inside the enclosure. h. Provide each enclosure with a documentation pocket on the inner door. i. Enclosures shall not have holes or knockouts. j. Provide manufacturer's window kits where specified, required or shown on the Drawings. k. All panels installed outdoors shall have a factory applied, suitable primer and final coat of weatherproof white paint. 1. All enclosures shall be pad lockable. 2. NEMA 7/4X a. Class 1, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, and D, or as defined in NFPA 70). Boxes shall be constructed as follows: 1) Copper free cast aluminum body and cover 2) Stainless steel hinges 3) Watertight neoprene gasket 4) Stainless steel cover bolts 5) All penetrations shall be factory drilled and tapped. 3. NON-METALLIC a. Chemical Rooms. NEMA 4X constructed as follows: 1) PVC or Fiberglass reinforced polyester body and door. 2) UV inhibitors 3) Luggage type quick release latches 4) Foam -in -place gasketed doors 4. ALUMINUM a. NEMA 4X Aluminum 1) Type 5052 aluminum, body and door MARCH 27, 2026 ELECTRICAL CONTROL PANELS (ECPS) ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 26 29 87 - 15 MARYS CREEK WRF 2) Stainless steel continuous hinge 3) Foam in -place gasket 4) Single point quarter turn latches (20"x24" and below). All others 3 -point latch 5. NEMA 12 a. NEMA 12 Aluminum 1) Type 5052 aluminum, body and door 2) Stainless steel continuous hinge 3) Foam in -place gasket 4) Single point quarter turn latches (20"x24" and below). All others three-point latch 6. Otherwise Not Defined NEMA 4X Stainless Steel a. Where an enclosure is not otherwise defined or shown on the Drawing 1) NEMA 4X 316 Stainless Steel 2) Type 316 stainless steel, body and door 3) Stainless steel continuous hinge 4) Foam in -place gasket 5) Single point quarter turn latches (20"x24" and below). All others 3 -point latch 7. NEMA 1 or NEMA lA boxes shall not be used. 8. Malleable iron boxes shall not be used. G. Environmental Conditioning 1. Condensation Control a. A self-contained enclosure condensation heater with thermostat and fan shall be mounted inside the control panel, if panel is mounted outdoors or in a non -air-conditioned space. 1) Enclosure heaters shall be energized from 120 -volt, single- phase power supply and sized to prevent condensation within the enclosure. ELECTRICAL CONTROL PANELS (ECPS) MARCH 27, 2026 262987-16 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY 2) Locate enclosure heaters to avoid overheating electronic hardware or producing large temperature fluctuations on the hardware. 3) Enclosure heaters shall have an internal fan for heat distribution and shall be controlled with adjustable thermostats. The thermostat shall have an adjustment range of 40°F to 90°F. Provide a circuit breaker or fused disconnect switch within the enclosure. 4) Enclosure heaters shall be Hoffman type DAH or equal. b. Strip heaters may be provided if they are 240 -volt rated, powered at 120 volts AC and do not have a surface temperature higher than 60°C. Strip heaters and thermostats shall be as manufactured by Chromalox or equal. 1) Strip heaters shall be Chromalox, Type OT, 1.5 -inches wide, 240 volts, single phase, 150 watts, energized at 120 volts, with rust resisting iron sheath, Catalog No. OT -715, Product Code No. 129314, or equal. Provide sufficient wattage in heaters to prevent condensation should the interior temperature of the enclosure drop below the dew point. 2) A control thermostat mounted inside the control Panel shall be Chromalox, Type WR, single stage, Catalog No. WR-80, Product Code No.263177, or equal. 3) The strip heater terminals shall be guarded by a protective terminal cover. 4) High temperature connecting lead wire shall be used between the thermostat and the heater terminals. Wire shall be #12 AWG stranded, nickel -plated copper with Teflon glass insulation and shall be the product of Chromalox, Catalog No. 6 -CFI -12, Product Code No. 263783, or equal. c. Each panel shall have a 1/2 -inch stainless steel condensate drain, installed on a stainless -steel conduit hub, HGTZ Series, T&B or equal, in the bottom of the enclosure. Drain shall be O -Z GedneyDBB-50SS, or equal. 2. Corrosion Control a. Provide corrosion protection in each control panel with a corrosion - inhibiting vapor capsule MARCH 27, 2026 ELECTRICAL CONTROL PANELS (ECPS) ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 26 29 87 - 17 MARYS CREEK WRF b. Manufacturers 1) Northern Instruments; Model Zerust VC 2) Hoffman Engineering; Model A-HCI 3) Approved equal. 3. Panel Interior Ambient Control a. Provide ambient temperature control within the panel to maintain internal temperatures below the maximum operating temperatures of the panel components. An ambient temperature range of -20°C to 40°C. b. Provide panel internal heat rise calculations to show that the panel internal temperatures will be maintained below the maximum operating temperatures of the panel components. c. Provide calculations to show all the internal and external heat gain loads, the expected internal rise in temperature in degrees C above the specified ambient. d. Panels for which the calculated heat rise exceeds 40°C. shall have an air conditioning system, sized as required to reduce the heat rise to 40°C. or less, without violating the NEMA rating of the enclosure. e. The air conditioner shall have the following features: 1) Use CFC-free R134a refrigerant. 2) Have fully gasketed flanges on all four mounting edges for a watertight seal that maintains NEMA 4X rating of the panel. 3) Thermostatic low temperature control to provide energy efficient operation and prevents over -cooling. 4) EMI/RFI suppressor to minimize transient spikes during compressor on/off cycling. 5) Separated blower -driven evaporator and condenser air systems for closed loop cooling. 6) UL listed. 7) Stainless steel enclosure. 8) Internal corrosion resistant coating. 9) Low ambient kit. ELECTRICAL CONTROL PANELS (ECPS) MARCH 27, 2026 262987-18 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY 10) Short cycle protector. 11) Manufacturers a) Hoffman b) Thermo Electric c) Approved equal. 4. Enclosure Fans a. Provide fans for soft start starters and VFDs, as required by the manufacturer, to provide air circulation and cooling. 1) Fans shall be controlled by a temperature switch. 2) The fan shall operate only when the drive is "ON" and for a cool -down period after the drive has stopped. 3) The fan shall not run when the drive is "OFF". 4) Louvers, if provided, shall have externally removable filters. The filter shall be metallic and washable. The NEMA rating of the enclosure shall not be violated in any case. b. Fan motors shall be protected by an input circuit breaker. c. Provide metal squirrel cage ball bearing, three phase fan motors with 10 -year design life. d. Plastic muffin fans are not acceptable. e. Fan power shall be obtained from a tap on the main control power transformer. f. Provide a "loss of cooling" fault alarm that identifies clogged filters or fan failure. g. Provide a high temperature shutdown after an adjustable time to safely shut down the control panel without causing electronic component. h. Provide redundant fans in the control panel design as backup in the event of fan failure. H. Internal Wiring 1. Power and control wiring shall be tinned stranded copper, minimum size #14AWG, with 600 -volt, 90°C, flame retardant, Type SIS cross -linked polyethylene insulation. MARCH 27, 2026 ELECTRICAL CONTROL PANELS (ECPS) ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 26 29 87 - 19 MARYS CREEK WRF 2. Line side power wiring shall be sized for the full rating or frame size of the connected device, and as shown on the Drawings. 3. Analog signal wires shall be 600 Volt Class, insulated stranded tinned copper, twisted shielded #16 AWG pair. 4. All interconnecting wires between panel mounted equipment and external equipment shall be terminated at numbered terminal blocks. Field wiring shall not be terminated directly on any panel -mounted device. 5. All wiring shall be tagged and coded with an identification number as shown on the Drawings. Coding shall be typed on a heat shrinkable tube applied to each end showing origination and destination of each wire. The marking shall be permanent, non -smearing, solvent -resistant type similar to Raychem TMS-SCE, or equal. 6. All wiring shall be enclosed in PVC wire trough with slotted side openings and removable cover. Plan wire routing such that no low twisted shielded pair cable conducting analog 4-20 mA signals or low voltage analog signals are routed in the same wire trough as conductors carrying discrete signals or power. 7. All control panel wiring shall use the following color code. a. Black: AC power at line voltage b. Red: switched AC power c. Orange: May be energized while the main disconnect is in the off position d. White: AC neutral e. Orange/white stripe or white/orange stripe: separate derived neutral f. Red/white stripe or white/red stripe: switched neutral g. Green or green w/ yellow tracer: ground/earth ground h. Blue: Ungrounded DC power Blue/white stripe or white/blue stripe: DC grounded common j. Brown: 480V AC 3 phase - phase A k. Orange: 480V AC 3 phase - phase B 1. Yellow: 480V AC 3 Phase - phase C m. Purple: common for analog signal wiring n. Brown: positive leg of an analog signal ELECTRICAL CONTROL PANELS (ECPS) MARCH 27, 2026 262987-20 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRF I. Field Installed Internal Wiring Field installed interior wiring shall be neatly grouped by circuit and bound by plastic tie wraps. 2. Circuit groups shall be supported so that circuit terminations are not stressed. 3. Low signal wiring (millivolt and milliamp) shall be bundle separately from the rest of the control wiring. 4. All field wiring shall be tagged and coded with an identification number. Coding shall be typed on a heat shrinkable tube applied to each end of the wire. The marking shall be a permanent, non -smearing, solvent -resistant type like Raychem TMS-SCE, or equal 5. Conduit entry: a. All conduit entering or leaving equipment shall be stubbed up into the bottom of the enclosure directly below the area in which the conductors are to be terminated. b. Conduits shall not enter the side unless approved in writing by the Owner/Engineer. 6. Top entry of conduits is prohibited unless approved by the Owner/Engineer on a case -by -case basis. J. Terminal Blocks 1. Terminal blocks shall be DIN -rail -mounted one-piece molded plastic blocks with tubular -clamp -screw type and end barriers. 2. Provide terminal blocks shall be rated for 600 volts to terminate all conductors rated 600 volts. Provide 600 -volt rated terminal blocks for any conductor carrying any voltage over 120 volts to ground. 3. Provide terminal blocks rated for 300 volts to terminate low voltage control and instrumentation circuits or 4-20 mA analog signal conductors if the conductors are rated 300 volts. 4. Provide individual conductor terminals for twisted shielded pair or triad cables including separate terminals for shield drain wires. 5. Use the manufacturer's provided bridge connectors to interconnect terminal blocks terminating the shield drain wire conductors on the panel side of the terminal blocks. MARCH 27, 2026 ELECTRICAL CONTROL PANELS (ECPS) ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 262987-21 MARYS CREEK WRF 6. Terminate control circuits, 120 -volts and below, and 4-20 mA analog signal conductors with manufacturer's recommended insulated connectors. 7. Provide 600 -volt rated strap screw terminal blocks for any power conductors carrying over 20 amps, at any voltage. Terminals shall be double sided and supplied with removable covers to prevent accidental contact with live circuits. 8. Terminate power conductors carrying over 20 amperes, at any voltage, to strap -screw type terminal blocks with crimp type, pre -insulated, ring -tongue lugs sized for the conductors that they terminate. 9. Provide lugs appropriately sized for the conductors and the terminal block screws. Do not terminate more than one conductor in any lug, and do not land more than two conductors under any strap -screw terminal point. 10. Terminals shall have permanent, legible identification, clearly visible with the protective cover removed. Each terminal block shall have 20% spare terminals, but not less than two spare terminals. 11. Provide an AC ground bar bonded to the panel enclosure (if metal) with 20% spare terminals. 2.04 SERVICE ENTRANCE DEVICE A. Where the Control Panel is rated and used as a service entrance panel, the manufacturer shall furnish factory installed in the Control Panel, a dedicated (SPD) (Type 2), permanently connected, Surge Protective Device on the load side of the service entrance panel, as specified in Section26 43 13 Low Voltage AC Surge Protective Devices (SPDs). 2.05 MAIN CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE DEVICE A. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, the main circuit protective device shall be a molded case (MCCB), three Pole, 600 -volt, fixed type, manually operated with stored energy closing mechanism. Trip device shall be solid state with adjustable long time pickup, and delay; adjustable short time pickup and delay; short time i2t switch; adjustable ground fault pickup and delay, and ground fault delay and pickup trips for selective tripping. B. Provide a flange mounted main power disconnect operating handle with mechanical interlock having a bypass that will allow the panel door to open only when the switch is in the OFF position. Where panels are shown or specified with inner and outer doors, disconnecting handles and controls shall be located on the inner door. ELECTRICAL CONTROL PANELS (ECPS) MARCH 27, 2026 262987-22 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY 2.06 MOTOR CONTROLLERS A. Manufacturers 1. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable: a. Eaton b. ABB c. Rockwell Automation d. Schneider Electric Company e. Approved equal 2. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. B. General 1. Magnetic Motor Starter a. Provide the NEMA size starter, circuit breaker trip ratings, control power transformers and thermal overload heater element ratings matched to the motors and control equipment supplied, in compliance with the NEC and the manufacturer's heater selection tables. b. A NEMA rated magnetic motor starter shall be furnished for each motor. Motor starters shall be two or three -pole, single or three-phase as required, 60 Hertz, 600 -volt, magnetically operated, full voltage reversing, or non -reversing as required by the mechanical process design. c. Overload relays shall be adjustable, ambient compensated and manually reset. d. Auxiliary contacts shall be provided as shown on the Drawings. A minimum of one N.O. and one N.C. auxiliary contacts shall be provided in addition to the contacts required connected as specified above. e. Each motor starter shall have a 120 -volt operating coil unless otherwise noted. MARCH 27, 2026 ELECTRICAL CONTROL PANELS (ECPS) ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 262987-23 MARYS CREEK WRF f. Provide each motor starter with a motor circuit protector (MCP), or circuit breaker, and equipped to provide undervoltage release and overload protection on all three phases. g. The short circuit protective device shall have an adjustable magnetic trip range up to 1400 percent of rated continuous current and a trip test feature. h. MCPs shall be labeled in accordance with UL489. i. NEMA starter sizes and breaker trip ratings shall be as required for the horsepower indicated but shall be in no case less than NEMA Size 1. A mechanical disconnect mechanism, with bypass, shall be installed on each motor circuit protector, capable of being locked in the "OFF" position to provide a means of disconnecting power to each motor. Disconnects mechanisms shall be located inside the enclosure such that the main circuit breaker handle is the only device interlocked with the panel door. k. Overload relays shall be standard Class 20, ambient compensated, manually reset by pushbutton located on front of the starter door. A normally closed contact shall be directly connected in series with the starter circuit to shut off the starter and a normally open contact from the overload relay shall be wired to a terminal block for an overload alarm. 1. If the manufacturer of the equipment utilizing the motor, supplies a motor horsepower larger than that shown on the Drawings, provide a motor starter sized to control the motor supplied. No change in the Contract Price or Schedule will be allowed for such changes. m. All variations necessary to accommodate the motors and controls as actually furnished shall be made without extra cost to the Owner. n. IEC rated starters are not acceptable. 2. All incoming power and control wiring leaving or entering the control panel shall be terminated with the lugs specified for the size and type of wire required. Furnish terminals appropriately sized to terminate the specified wire lugs. Allow adequate clearance for bending and terminating of wire and cables which are the size and type specified, shown or required. 3. All interfaces between control panel and remote devices shall be isolated via an interposing relay. Interposing relays shall have contacts rated for 250 VAC and 10 Amperes continuous. Relays shall be Control Relays as specified herein. ELECTRICAL CONTROL PANELS (ECPS) MARCH 27, 2026 262987-24 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY 4. Built in control stations and indicating lights shall be furnished where shown on the Drawings. 5. Provide as -built wiring diagrams mounted in a protective cover inside the panel. C. Contactors Contactors shall be a circuit breaker and contactor, 600 -Volt, three -pole, 60 Hz, magnetically operated. NEMA size shall be as required for the kilowatt ratings required for the equipment provided but shall be not less than NEMA size 1. 2. Contactors shall have a 120 -Volt operating coil and control power transformer. Furnish the control power transformer with extra capacity for the unit heater fan. D. Control Relays Control relays shall be 300 -volt, industrial rated, plug-in socket type, housed in a transparent polycarbonate dust cover, designed in accordance with UL Standard 508 for motor controller duty. 2. Continuous contact rating shall be 10 amperes resistive, 1/4 HP at 120 VAC, operating temperature minus 10°C to plus 55°C. 3. Provide spare N.O. & N.C. contacts. Relays shall be Potter & Brumfield KRP Series or equal with neon coil indicator light. 4. Timing relays shall be 300 -Volt, solid state type, with rotary switch to select the timing range. E. Elapsed Time Meter 1. A six -digit, non-resettable elapsed time meter shall be installed on the face of each motor starter. Meter shall be as specified in Section26 27 13. 2.07 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER (PLC) A. Where the control panel contains a programmable logic controller (PLC) for programming of the control logic, as shown on the Drawings, the PLC shall be as specified in Section 40 63 00 Programmable Logic Controllers. The manufacturer shall provide the address list, and the interface to connect to the Owner's plant monitoring system for monitoring of the PLC's operation. B. Provide a scripted program file for all PLCs. MARCH 27, 2026 ELECTRICAL CONTROL PANELS (ECPS) ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 262987-25 MARYS CREEK WRF C. The equipment manufacturer shall furnish factory installed, a dedicated Point of Utilization Device (SPD), as specified in Section 26 43 13 Individual Control Panel and Related Equipment Protection (Type 3). D. The manufacturer shall provide the address list and an Ethernet interface to connect to the Owner's plant monitoring system for monitoring of the PLC's operation. 2.08 OPERATION INTERFACE TERMINAL (OIT) A. Where the control panel contains an Operation Interface Terminal as shown on the Drawings, for interfacing to the control logic, the manufacturer shall provide the address list, and an Ethernet and serial interface, to connect to the related PLC for monitoring and control of the PLC's operation. The OIT shall be as specified in Section 40 62 63 Operations Interface Terminal. B. Provide a scripted application and fully documented setup for all OITs. C. The equipment manufacturer shall furnish factory installed, a dedicated Point of Utilization Device (SPD), as specified in Section 26 43 13 Individual Control Panel and Related Equipment Protection (Type 3). D. The manufacturer shall provide the address list and an Ethernet interface to connect to the Owner's plant monitoring system for monitoring of the PLC's OIT interface. 2.09 REMOTE MONITORING INTERFACE A. General: See Section 26 27 13 Power Metering and Protective Relays paragraph PROTOCOL CONVERTER for communications protocol requirements. 2.10 SPARE PARTS A. Provide the following spare parts for each control panel in the quantities specified: 1. One box- replacement fuses, all types and sizes used 2. One replacement lamp of each color, for pilot lights 3. One of each color replacement lens caps for pilot lights 4. One starter coil for each NEMA size furnished 5. One, Three -pole set of replacement overload heaters of each size range used ELECTRICAL CONTROL PANELS (ECPS) MARCH 27, 2026 262987-26 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY 6. One, Three -pole set of starter contacts of each NEMA size used. 7. One can of aerosol touch-up paint. 8. One of each type of PLC module, OIT, and media converters, where applicable. B. Spare parts shall be boxed or packaged for long term storage. Identify each item with manufacturer's name, description and part number on the exterior of the package. 2.11 FACTORY TESTING A. The entire control panel shall be completely assembled, wired, and adjusted at the factory and shall be given the manufacturer's routine shop tests and any other additional operational test to insure the workability and reliable operation of the equipment. B. Factory test equipment and test methods shall conform with the latest applicable requirements of ANSI, IEEE, UL, and NEMA standards. C. The operational test shall include the proper connection of supply and control voltage and, as far as practical, a mockup of simulated control signals and control devices shall be fed into the boards to check for proper operation. D. Factory test equipment and test methods shall conform to the latest applicable requirements of ANSI, IEEE, UL, and NEMA standards, and shall be subject to the Owner/Engineer's approval. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE A. Provide the services of a qualified factory -trained manufacturer's field representative to perform the tasks specified under this section for the time required. B. The manufacturer's representative shall provide technical direction and assistance in the general assembly of the equipment, connections, and adjustments, and testing of the assembly and components contained therein. C. Provide three copies of the manufacturer's field start-up report. 3.02 INSTALLER'S QUALIFICATIONS A. Provide an installer who shall be specialized in installing this type of equipment, with a minimum of 5 years documented experience. MARCH 27, 2026 ELECTRICAL CONTROL PANELS (ECPS) ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 262987-27 MARYS CREEK WRF B. Experience documentation shall be submitted for approval prior to beginning work on this project. 3.03 EXAMINATION A. Examine installation area to assure there is enough clearance to install the equipment. B. Housekeeping pads shall be included for the floor mounted motor controllers as detailed on the Drawings except for motor controllers which are to be installed adjacent to an existing unit. Housekeeping pads for these (if used) should match the existing installation. C. Check concrete pads and baseplates for uniformity and level surface. D. Verify that the equipment is ready to install. E. Verify field measurements are as submitted by manufacturer. 3.04 INSTALLATION A. Install all equipment per the manufacturer's recommendations and Contract Drawings. B. Conduit hubs for use on raceway system pull and junction boxes shall be watertight, threaded aluminum, insulated throat, stainless steel grounding screw, as manufactured by T&B H150GRA Series, or equal. C. Conduits entering a control Panel or box containing electrical equipment, shall not enter the enclosure through the top. D. Install required safety labels. 3.05 RACEWAY SEALING A. Where raceways enter junction boxes or control panels containing electrical or instrumentation equipment, all entrances shall be sealed with 3M 1000NS Watertight Sealant, or approved equal. B. This requirement shall be strictly adhered to for all raceways in the conduit system. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect installed equipment for anchoring, alignment, grounding and physical damage. ELECTRICAL CONTROL PANELS (ECPS) MARCH 27, 2026 262987-28 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY B. Check tightness of all accessible electrical connections. Minimum acceptable values are specified in manufacturer's instructions. C. Provide one set of as -built panel drawings laminated, in each panel pocket. 3.07 FIELD ADJUSTING A. Adjust all circuit breakers, switches, access doors, operating handles for free mechanical and electrical operation as described in manufacturer's instructions. B. The adjustable breakers shall be set in the field by a qualified representative of the manufacturer, in accordance with settings designated in a coordinated study of the system Provide settings as required in Section26 05 73 Power System Study. 2. All such settings, including the application of arc flash labels, shall have been made and Approved by the Owner/Engineer, prior to energizing of the equipment. 3.08 FIELD TESTING A. Perform all electrical field tests recommended by the manufacturer. Disconnect all connections to solid-state equipment prior to testing. B. Megger and record phase to phase and phase to ground insulation resistance. Megger, for one minute, at minimum voltage of 1000 volts DC. Measured Insulation resistance shall be at least 100 megohms. In no case shall the manufacturer's maximum test voltages be exceeded. C. Test each key interlock system for proper functioning. D. Test all control logic before energizing the motor or equipment. 3.09 CLEANING A. Remove all rubbish and debris from inside and around the motor controllers. Remove dirt, dust, or concrete spatter from the interior and exterior of the equipment using brushes, vacuum cleaner, or clean, lint free rags. Do not use compressed air. 3.10 EQUIPMENT PROTECTION AND RESTORATION A. Touch-up and restore damaged surfaces to factory finish, as approved by the manufacturer. If the damaged surface cannot be returned to factory specification, the surface shall be replaced. MARCH 27, 2026 ELECTRICAL CONTROL PANELS (ECPS) ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 262987-29 MARYS CREEK WRF 3.11 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATION A. A qualified factory -trained manufacturer's representative shall personally inspect the equipment at the jobsite and shall certify in writing that the equipment has been installed, adjusted, and tested, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, including all settings designated in the Power System Study. B. Provide three copies of the manufacturer's representative's certification. 3.12 TRAINING A. Provide manufacturer's services for training of plant personnel in operation and maintenance of the soft start starters furnished under this Section. B. The training for each type of equipment shall be for a period of not less than one eight -hour day. C. The cost of training program to be conducted with Owner's personnel shall be included in the Contract Price. The training and instruction, insofar as practicable, shall be directly related to the system being supplied. D. Provide detailed O&M manuals to supplement the training course. The manuals shall include specific details of equipment supplied and operations specific to the project. E. The training session shall be conducted by a manufacturer's qualified representative. Training program shall include instructions on the assembly, motor starters, protective devices, metering, and other major components. F. The Owner reserves the right to videotape the training sessions for the Owner's use. END OF SECTION ELECTRICAL CONTROL PANELS (ECPS) MARCH 27, 2026 262987-30 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY SECTION 26 32 13 ENGINE GENERATOR SET PARTI GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish and install diesel -fueled engine generator sets with all appurtenances as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. B. Provide each engine generator set as follows: 1. Each generator kW size shown on the drawings is a minimum size acceptable size with the kVA rating calculated at 0.8 power factor, even if the combined power factor of the loads shown on the drawings are calculated to be greater than 0.8. 2. The electrical system which includes the conductors, raceways, circuit breakers, switchgear bus and automatic transfer switch amperage have been sized based on the kW and kVA (based on 0.8 power factor) of the generator shown on the drawings. 3. No decrease in the kw/kVA or power factor of an engine generator set based on the loads shown or decrease of the size of engine generator set manufactured by a particular vendor will be allowed regardless of the calculated connected loads shown. 4. Provide each engine generator set that meets all the specified performance criteria. Increase the size of the engine generator set as required to meet the specified performance criteria. 5. If the engine generator size increases to supply current greater than the conductors, breakers or bus sizes shown, increase the conductors, raceways, breakers, bus and automatic transfer switch amperage, and all other associated equipment, to accommodate the larger generator size. All sizing of associated equipment shall be in accordance with the NEC. Submit all required changes specified above to the Engineer/Owner. 6. No changes will be allowed for any increase of the size of any power system component without approval. 7. No changes in the Contract Price will be allowed for the increase of size of any power system component to accommodate an increase in size of the engine generator set. MARCH 27, 2026 ENGINE GENERATOR SET ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 2632 13- 1 MARYS CREEK WRF C. Provide fuel for startup and testing. At the completion of startup and testing, fill the respective generator tank. D. Provide each engine generator set with a free-standing load bank, as specified herein. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Refer to Division 26 00 00 for related work and electrical coordination requirements. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be made in accordance with the requirements of Division 1, Section 26 00 00, the Contract Documents and as specified herein the following: 1. The manufacturers' names and product designation or catalog numbers for the types of materials specified or shown on the Drawings. 2. Cut sheets for each individual item shall be submitted. 3. All cut sheets shall be clearly marked to indicate which products are being submitted for use on this project. 4. Unmarked cut sheets will cause the submittal to be rejected and returned for revision. B. All shop drawing submittals and all O&M submittals shall be submitted in accordance with the requirements listed in Division 1. No change in Contract Price or Schedule will be allowed for delays due to unacceptable submittals. C. Submittals shall also contain information on related equipment to be furnished under this Specification. Incomplete submittals not containing the required information on the related equipment will also be returned without review. D. The original equipment manufacturer (OEM) shall create all equipment shop drawings, including all wiring diagrams, in the manufacturer's Engineering department. All equipment shop drawings shall bear the original equipment manufacturer's logo, drawing file numbers, and shall be maintained on file in the OEM's archive file system. Photocopies of the Engineer's ladder schematics are unacceptable as shop drawings. E. Submittals for equipment and materials, furnished under this Section of the Specifications, will not be accepted prior to approval of the Qualifications of the Study Engineer followed by the submission and approval of the Preliminary Short Circuit Study required in the Power System Study as specified in Section 26 05 ENGINE GENERATOR SET MARCH 27, 2026 2632 13-2 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRF 73. Submittals for this equipment made prior to the Engineer's approvals will be returned unreviewed. F. Time -current coordination curves for protective device relays, circuit breakers, and fuses submitted shall be included as a part of these submittals. G. Submit for approval the Contractor's certification of extended warranty in the shop drawing submitted to the Engineer for approval. H. The original equipment manufacturer shall create all equipment shop drawings, including all wiring diagrams, in the manufacturer's Engineering Department. All equipment shop drawings shall bear the original equipment manufacturer's logo, drawing file numbers, and shall be maintained on file in the original equipment manufacturer's archive file system. 2. Photocopies of the Engineer's ladder schematics are unacceptable as shop drawings. Submit to the Owner/Engineer, complete shop drawings and product data for all components in one package in a single submittal. 1. Submitting the engine -generator, fuel tank, sound enclosure and access platforms in separate packages will not be acceptable and will be returned without review. 2. Failure to submit all components at once may cause a delay in the construction schedule because of a delay in receiving approval to release the equipment manufacture. 3. Delays caused by incomplete submittals, incorrect submittals, submittals not meeting these specifications causing excessive resubmittals will not be an acceptable reason for extending the Contract Time or increasing the Contract Price. J. Submit to the Owner/Engineer, shop drawings and product data, for the following: Equipment outline drawings showing elevation and plan views, dimensions, weight, anchor details, and required operating clearances. 2. Conduit entrance drawings. 3. Product data sheets and catalog numbers for the engine, AC generator, battery charger, engine generator set control system, electronic governor system, control stations, meters, relays, pilot lights, circuit breaker, etc. List all options and accessories furnished specifically for this project. Clearly MARCH 27, 2026 ENGINE GENERATOR SET ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 2632 13-3 MARYS CREEK WRF mark each sheet to indicate which items apply and/or those items that do not apply. 4. Provide control systems engineering to produce custom unit elementary drawings showing interconnecting wiring and interlocking between components and to remotely mounted devices. Include and identify all connecting equipment and remote devices on the schematics. The notation "Remote Device" will not be acceptable. Show wire and terminal numbers. Indicate special identifications for electrical devices per the Drawings. 5. Provide plan and elevation drawings of each engine generator set, with dimensions, exterior and interior views, showing component layouts, controls, terminal blocks, etc. 6. Schematic diagram 7. Nameplate schedule 8. UL Listing of the completed assembly. 9. Component list with detailed component information, including original manufacturer's part number. 10. Conduit entry/exit locations 11. Assembly ratings including: a. Short-circuit rating b. Voltage c. Continuous current d. Alternator construction details including: 1) Stator winding construction, conductor materials, temperature rating, verify VPI insulation. 2) Rotor construction details including conductor materials. 3) Failure to provide sufficient details to verify the specifications for the construction of the stator and rotor will result in the submittal being rejected and returned for resubmittal. Generic catalog data for generator set alternators is not acceptable. 12. Major component ratings including: a. Voltage b. Continuous current ENGINE GENERATOR SET MARCH 27, 2026 2632 13-4 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY c. Interrupting ratings 13. Number and size of cables per phase, neutral if present, ground and all cable terminal sizes. Verify the generator termination can terminate the conductors shown on the drawings. 14. Service and feeder connectors. 15. Submit step by step load calculations showing that the generator sizing is correct for the voltage and frequency variations specified. 16. Instruction and renewal parts books. 17. Sound enclosure and all items mounted to the sound enclosure (including lighting, electrical panels, and raceway). a. The sound enclosure drawings shall clearly show all access doors and hatches which shall determine the width of the access platform. b. Provide construction drawings showing structural features including materials of construction, insulation, attachment methods to the generator, etc. c. Provide cut sheets on all materials associated with the generator, generator enclosure and access platform. Cut sheets shall demonstrate that the sections specifying materials incorporated in the enclosure referenced herein have been met. Fully mark each cut sheet to indicate the materials provided. Unmarked cut sheets will cause the submittal to be rejected and returned for revision. d. Provide sound enclosure sound ratings showing the calculated decrease in dB ratings for the proposed enclosure. Provide the sound rating at the distances specified. Other sound ratings at other distances or locations are not acceptable for review. 18. Provide structural drawings on the access platform including all specified details. a. Show that the width of the platform allows the sound enclosure doors to open a minimum of 90 degrees. See structural specifications and drawings for more information. b. Show the location of the specified grounding pads. c. If a sound enclosure are provided with doors which are wider than shown on the drawings, the width of the access platform and the structural slab supporting the platform shall be modified with no increase in the Contract Price or Schedule allowed. Submit details of all required changes to the Engineer for review and approval. MARCH 27, 2026 ENGINE GENERATOR SET ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 2632 13-5 MARYS CREEK WRF 19. Submit fuel tank and all associated instrumentation including engineering drawings showing dimensions, weights, capacity, materials of construction, finishes for steel components and cut sheets for all instrumentation components provided. 20. Submit cut sheets on all conductors provided showing that they are tinned and meet the requirements of Section 26 05 19 Low Voltage Wires and Cables. 21. Provide cut sheets on all electronic components and certify that all circuit boards are conformal coated. K. Factory Test Reports. Submittals shall be made for factory tests specified herein. L. Field Test Reports. Submittals shall be made for field tests specified herein. M. Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 1. Operation and maintenance manuals shall include the following information: a. Manufacturer's contact address and telephone number for parts and service. b. Instruction books and/or leaflets c. Recommended renewal parts list d. Record Documents for the information required by the Submittals above. e. Operating instructions, including periodic g engine generator set operational testing. f. Automatic and manual startup and shutdown sequences. g. Record Documents for all the information required by the Submittals paragraph above. h. Include the following: 1) Component list / bill of material including part numbers. 2) Marked product data and catalog cut sheets. 3) Performance specifications / equipment ratings and step load calculations. 4) Factory drawings and schematics. 5) Trip curves for breakers and fuses ENGINE GENERATOR SET MARCH 27, 2026 2632 13-6 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY 6) Specified certifications. 7) Factory test reports 8) Field test reports. N. The manufacturer shall submit for approval, a training agenda for all training specified herein. Training agenda shall not be submitted until final approval of the Operation and Maintenance Manual. O. If the generator size must be increased to meet the specified performance criteria, and the supporting components of the power system must be changed to support the increase in the generator size, submit a list of all changes required along with supporting calculations. Submittal of any required changes shall be made to the Engineer/Owner prior to proceeding with the changes. P. Seismic anchorage and bracing drawings, calculations, and cut sheets, as required by Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing. 8 1.04 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. All products and components shown on the Drawings and listed in this specification shall be designed and manufactured according to latest revision of the following standards (unless otherwise noted): 1. NEMA Standard ICS 2 - 2000 Industrial Control and Systems 2. NFPA 70 — National Electrical Code (NEC) 3. NFPA 70E — Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace 4. NFPA 110 for Level 1 Systems. 5. OSHA for rotating parts. 6. NEMA MG1 temperature limits. 7. UL508A 8. CSA282-M1989 9. IEC 8528 part4 10. Mil — Std 461 C part9 11. IEC Std 801.2, 801.3, 801.5 12. IEEE587 13. ASTM D2794-93 MARCH 27, 2026 ENGINE GENERATOR SET ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 2632 13-7 MARYS CREEK WRF 14. ASTM D2247-92 15. UL 142 — Standard for Steel Aboveground Tanks for Flammable and Combustible Liquids B. All equipment components and completed assemblies specified in this Section of the Specifications shall bear the appropriate label of Underwriters Laboratories. C. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar equipment for a minimum period of ten years. When requested by the Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement. B. The manufacturer of the assembly shall be the manufacturer of the major components within the assembly. All assemblies shall be of the same manufacturer. Equipment that is manufactured by a third party and "brand labeled" shall not be acceptable. C. All components and material shall be new and of the latest field proven design and in current production. Obsolete components or components scheduled for immediate discontinuation shall not be used. D. For the equipment specified herein, the manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 2000 certified. E. Equipment submitted shall fit within the space shown on the Drawings. Equipment which does not fit within the space is not acceptable. The space required for the engine -generator shall include that shown for the access platform complete with stairs. 1.06 JOBSITE DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Prior to jobsite delivery, complete all submittal requirements, and present to the Owner/Engineer upon delivery of the equipment, an approved copy of all such submittals. Delivery of incomplete constructed equipment, or equipment which failed any factory tests, will not be permitted. B. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Two copies of these instructions shall be included with the equipment at the time of shipment and shall be made available to the Contractor and Owner. ENGINE GENERATOR SET MARCH 27, 2026 2632 13-8 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY C. The instructions shall include the following: Detailed assembly instructions including but not limited to wiring interconnection diagrams. 2. Rigging for lifting, skidding, jacking, and moving using rolling equipment to place the equipment. 3. Bolt torquing requirements for bus and all other components which require the installation of bolted connections. 4. Instructions for storing the equipment prior to energizing. D. Protect equipment during shipment, handling, and storage by suitable complete enclosures. Protect equipment from exposure to the elements and keep thoroughly dry. E. Protect painted surfaces against impact, abrasion, discoloration, and other damage. Repaint damaged painted surfaces to the satisfaction of the Owner/Engineer. F. Equipment shall be immediately installed in its permanent finished location shown on the Drawings, upon delivery to the jobsite. If the equipment cannot be immediately installed, the equipment shall not be delivered to the site, but stored offsite, until such time that the site is ready for permanent installation of the equipment with no change in the Contract Price allowed for transportation or storage. G. Shipping groups shall be designed to be shipped by truck, rail, or ship. Indoor groups shall be bolted to skids. Breakers and accessories shall be packaged and shipped separately. H. Where space heaters are provided in equipment, provide temporary electrical power and operate space heaters during storage, and after equipment is installed in permanent location, until equipment is placed in service. A. Provide warranties, including the manufacturer's warranty to be free from defects in material and workmanship from date of delivery, for the equipment specified. Provide additional warranty time to extend the manufacturer's warranty from the date of delivery for the proper installation thereof, to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a total time of two years from date of fmal acceptance of the equipment and its installation. MARCH 27, 2026 ENGINE GENERATOR SET ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 2632 13-9 MARYS CREEK WRF B. Include the Contractor's certification of extended warranty in the shop drawing submitted to the Engineer for approval. Omission of the Contractor's certification will cause the submittal to be rejected and returned for revision. C. Within such period of warranty, all material and labor necessary to return the equipment to new operating condition shall be provided. Any warranty work requiring shipping or transporting of the equipment shall be provided at no expense to the Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Caterpillar 2. Cummins 3. Rehlko (formerly Kohler) 4. No equal. B. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. 2.02 RATINGS A. Provide generator output voltage as shown on the Drawings. B. Power rating: 1. Standby 2. Provide the minimum kW rating at 0.8 power factor shown on the Drawings. a. Increase the kW/kVA rating if the selected vendor does not provide the exact kW rating shown. b. Generator rating less than the rating shown is not acceptable regardless of the connected load shown on the drawings. 3. Calculate the kVA rating at 0.8 power factor regardless of the power factor of the connected load shown on the drawings. ENGINE GENERATOR SET MARCH 27, 2026 2632 13-10 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY 4. Rating based on the elevation of site altitude where engine generator is installed of 800 feet. 5. Rating based on 50°C minimum ambient temperature. C. For additional ratings and construction notes, refer to the Drawings. 2.03 PERFORMANCE A. Voltage Regulation: Voltage regulation shall be plus or minus 0.5% for any constant load between no load and rated load for both parallel and non -parallel applications. 2. Random voltage variation with any steady load from no load to full load shall not exceed plus or minus 0.5%. B. Frequency Regulation: Frequency regulation shall be isochronous from steady state no load to steady state rated load. 2. Random frequency variation with any steady load from no load to full load shall not exceed plus or minus 0.5%. 3. The AC voltage waveform shall have not more than 5% total harmonic distortion at full linear load and with not more than 3% in any single harmonic. 4. Telephone influence factor shall be less than 50. C. Load Pick Up: 1. The engine generator set shall be capable of picking up the loads indicated on each step, in order, with starting and running voltage dips not exceeding 15% and frequency variation not more than plus or minus 5%. 2. Submit calculations showing that the generator sizing is correct for the voltage and frequency variations specified. Submittals without generator sizing calculations included will be rejected and returned without review. 3. If the minimum specified generator size is unable to start the loads in the sequence specified, the manufacturer shall increase the size of the engine generator set until the loads start in the load sequence specified with the specified voltage and frequency limits specified. D. The engine generator set shall be capable of operating up to 30 minutes monthly at no load, for up to 12 months, without damage to the unit. MARCH 27, 2026 ENGINE GENERATOR SET ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTAAND ASSOCIATES, INC. 2632 13- 11 MARYS CREEK WRF E. Load steps Step Step Name of Equipment Load Description Number kVA/Hp 100 PTU Miscelaneous Loads Energized at Generator 1 KVA Start 150 Main Operations Loads Energized at Generator 2 KVA Building Miscellaneous Start 31.7 UV PDC 1 Non -motor 3 kVA 31.7 UV PDC 1 Non -motor 4 kVA 31.7 UV PDC 1 Non -motor 5 kVA 105 HP Bioreactor 1 VFD / ATL 6 Pumps/Mixers 105 HP Bioreactor 2 VFD / ATL 7 Pumps/Mixers 105 HP Bioreactor 2 VFD / ATL 8 Pumps/Mixers 105 HP Bioreactor 2 VFD / ATL 9 Pumps/Mixers 10 60 HP Return Flow Pump VFD 11 60 HP Return Flow Pump VFD 12 75 HP Service Water Pump VFD 13 75 HP Service Water Pump VFD 14 75 HP EQ Mixing Pump Across the Line 15 75 HP EQ Mixing Pump Across the Line 16 75 HP EQ Mixing Pump Across the Line ENGINE GENERATOR SET MARCH 27, 2026 2632 13-12 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRF 17 75 HP PFS Mixing Pump Across the Line 18 75 HP PFS Mixing Pump Across the Line 19 75 HP PFS Mixing Pump Across the Line 20 100 HP Filtrate Pump VFD 21 100 HP Filtrate Pump VFD 22 100 HP Filtrate Pump VFD 23 100 HP Filtrate Pump VFD 24 125 HP RSPump VFD 25 125 HP RSPump VFD 26 125 HP RSPump VFD 27 125 HP RSPump VFD 28 150 HP Scour Blower VFD 29 150 HP Scour Blower VFD 30 150 HP Scour Blower VFD 31 400 HP Process Blower VFD 32 400 HP Process Blower VFD 33 400 HP Process Blower VFD 34 400 HP Process Blower VFD 2.04 ENGINE A. Each engine shall be diesel, four-stroke, water-cooled, with a minimum of four cylinders. The horsepower rating of the engine at its minimum tolerance level shall be sufficient to drive the alternator and all connected accessories. B. Engine shall be certified by the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) to conform to tier level 2 in effect at the time of manufacture. C. Two stroke engines are not acceptable. D. Engine shall be manufactured by one of the following: MARCH 27, 2026 ENGINE GENERATOR SET ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 2632 13- 13 MARYS CREEK WRF 1. Caterpillar 2. Cummins 3. Detroit Diesel 4. Mitsubishi 5. No equal. E. Engine accessories and features shall include: 1. Governor System: An electronic governor system shall provide automatic isochronous frequency regulation. 2. Radiator and Cooling System: Skid mounted radiator and cooling system rated for full load operation in 122°F (50°C) ambient as measured at the engine generator set air inlet. Radiator shall be provided with a duct adapter flange. 3. The equipment supplier shall fill the cooling system with 50/50 -ethylene glycol/water mixture. Rotating parts shall be guarded against accidental contact per OSHA requirements. 4. Electric System: An electric starter capable of three complete cranking cycles without overheating. 5. Lubrication Oil Pump: Positive displacement, mechanical, full pressure, lubrication oil pump. 6. Oil Filters: a. Full flow lubrication oil filters with replaceable spin on canister elements and dipstick oil level indicator. b. Oil filters shall be accessible from the side of the engine easily reached through one of the enclosure access doors. c. Provide drip pan below oil filter to catch oil leaks during filter change. 7. Air cleaner: a. Replaceable dry element air cleaner with restriction indicator. b. The air cleaner shall be easily accessible from the side of the engine generator set without climbing on top of the engine. 8. Fuel Lines and Fuel Filter: a. Provide flexible fuel lines. ENGINE GENERATOR SET MARCH 27, 2026 2632 13-14 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRF b. Fuel filter shall be water separator type and shall be located on the side of the engine for easy access and maintenance. c. Filters shall not be located on top of the engine. 9. Battery Charging Alternator: a. Engine mounted battery charging alternator, 45 -ampere minimum, and solid-state voltage regulator. 2.05 AC GENERATOR A. General: 1. Submit generator construction details of the stator and rotor to verify the specified construction. Failure to provide the required information will result in rejection of the submittal and its return for resubmittal. 2. Provide generator with voltage shown on the drawings. 3. Provide an AC generator with the following features: a. Two pre -lubricated sealed bearing b. Synchronous, brushless, permanent magnet Generator (PMG), c. Four -pole, 2/3 pitch, revolving field, d. Drip -proof construction, e. Air cooled by a direct drive centrifugal blower fan f. Directly connected to the engine with flexible drive disc to the engine. g. Insulation system: 1) Provide insulation system components meeting NEMA MG1 temperature limits for Class H insulation system. 2) Actual temperature rise measured by resistance method at full load shall not exceed 125°C standby, over a 50°C ambient. h. 40°C ambient rating is not acceptable. B. Generator Stator 1. Provide a form wound, two bearing, epoxy vacuum pressure impregnated alternator with non -hygroscopic epoxy, wound and insulated for an output rating of 4,160V. 2. Stator Core: MARCH 27, 2026 ENGINE GENERATOR SET ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 2632 13- 15 MARYS CREEK WRF a. Provide the stator core built up with high grade, non -aging laminated silicon steel, C5 or better. b. Place each lamination core to minimize eddy current losses. c. Secure each lamination to the stator frame and securely held in place at each end. d. Provide slot wedges for rigidity. e. Stator that present any perceptible buzzing of laminations during operation will be rejected. 3. Generator stator windings a. The generator stator winding shall be provided with premium grade full Class H insulation. Silicone rubber insulation is not acceptable b. Provide a VPI insulation system which provides high resistance to moisture and other contaminates. c. Form wound stator requirements" 1) Provide copper windings for the windings assembled using form wound coils of the same size and shape. 2) Construct the stator to accept VPI insulation. Cover the coils with Dacron polyester glass fiber film strand insulation or equal other high temperature insulating film. 3) Provide full length slot liners rated 5000 volts minimum which extend beyond the stator core iron to reduce the possibility of tracking to ground. 4) Tightly apply coil insulation to eliminate all air voids. 5) Tightly insert coils into the stator slots without damage. Secure coils to a surge ring or treated rope and securely lace them to one another as necessary to prevent distortion and expansion. 6) Block the end turns on their top, sides and bottom. Design and install the surge ring to prevent movement during starting and short circuit conditions. 7) Oven cure the entire stator to provide a completely sealed insulation system. 4. Rotor: a. Provide a steel rotor shaft as follows: ENGINE GENERATOR SET MARCH 27, 2026 2632 13-16 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY 1) Accurately machined 2) Smoothly finished 3) Provide sufficient strength to withstand all stresses resulting from normal operation at any speed up to and including a 25% over -speed condition. b. Provide the rotor core as follows: 1) Built up with high-grade non -aging silicon steel 2) Plate each single piece of core lamination to minimize eddy current losses. 3) Core mechanical integrity shall not rely on any electrically active component c. Provide rotor bars as follows: 1) Provide copper or copper alloy bars and end rings 2) Provide bars and end rings with uniform resistance characteristics to equalize thermal stresses. 3) Provide rectangular or shaped bars to meet motor starting and running torque requirements. 4) Mechanically lock or secure each copper rotor bar in the rotor pole slots to minimize movement and vibration. 5) Provide rotor end rings free of circumferential joints 6) Provide rotor bars in tension and 100% swaged to the rotor bars by an induction or torch brazing process. 7) Statically and dynamically balance rotors prior to assembly. 8) Check balancing after assembly with the generator running at rated speed. 9) ALUMINUM ROTOR BARS ARE NOT ACCEPTABLE. Fabricated aluminum rotors are unacceptable. C. Power: Provide each generator capable of delivering rated output power (kW) at rated frequency and 0.8 power factor, at any voltage not more than 5% above or below rated voltage. MARCH 27, 2026 ENGINE GENERATOR SET ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 2632 13- 17 MARYS CREEK WRF D. Excitation: Provide a permanent magnet generator (PMG) to provide a reliable source of excitation power for optimum motor starting and short circuit performance. The PMG and controls shall be capable of sustaining and regulating current supplied to a single phase or three phase fault at approximately 300% of rated current for not more than ten seconds. E. Provide 120 -volt, single phase anti -condensation heater for each engine generator set. F. Control and Instrument Power Transformers Control power transformers shall be furnished as shown on the Drawings. Transformer mechanical ratings shall equal the BIL and momentary rating of the circuit breakers. 2. Transformers, when mounted in switchgear assemblies, shall be rated for the full voltage of the switchgear. 3. Transformer shall be sized for the entire load, including space heaters, plus 25% spare capacity, and shall be not less than 100 VA. 4. Submit a load calculation showing that the sizing of the control power transformer complies with this requirement. G. Current Transformers Provide current transformers (CT) as required and/or as shown on the contract drawings as follows: a. Coordinate the thermal and mechanical ratings of the current transformers with the circuit breakers. b. Provide accuracy rating equal to or higher than ANSI standard requirements. c. Mount the CTs in a front accessible location to permit adding or changing current transformers without removing high -voltage insulation connections. d. Provide instrument accuracy CTs for power quality meters. e. Connecting both meters and relays on the same current transformer circuit is not acceptable. Provide separate current transformers for relays and for meters. f. Provide separate current transformers for differential relays shown on the drawings. ENGINE GENERATOR SET MARCH 27, 2026 2632 13-18 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY g. Provide shorting terminal blocks on the secondary of all the current transformers before the secondary conductors are connected to any other devices. H. Impedance Grounding: Provide an impedance grounding system for the generator to limit the ground fault current. The system shall include a grounding resistor, and neutral CT sized as shown on the drawings to detect ground fault current.. 2.06 CONTROL A. General: 1. Provide an engine generator set with a microprocessor -based control system that is designed to provide automatic starting, monitoring, and control functions for the engine generator set. 2. Design the control system to allow local and remote monitoring and control of the engine generator set as described in this specification. B. Mounting: 1. Mount the control on the engine generator set. 2. Provide vibration isolated mounting. Prototype test the control system and mounting to verify the durability of all components in the system under the vibration conditions encountered. Submit documentation of the prototype testing. C. Standards: 1. Provide the control panel with the following listings: a. UL508 listing, b. CSA282 M1989 certified, c. Meeting IEC8528 part 4. 2. Additional Control requirements: a. Provide oil and dust tight switches lamps and meters. b. Provide the control system enclosure with a gasketed door. There shall be no exposed points in the control panel (with the door open) that operate more than 50 volts. c. Provide controls meeting or exceeding the requirements of Mil Std 461C part 9, and IEC Std 801.2, 801.3, and 801.5 for susceptibility, conducted, and radiated electromagnetic emissions. MARCH 27, 2026 ENGINE GENERATOR SET ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 2632 13- 19 MARYS CREEK WRF d. Test the entire control system to certify it meets the requirements of IEEE587 for voltage surge resistance. D. Provide the following control features: 1. Mode Select Switch: a. The AUTO -RUN-OFF Mode Selector Switch shall initiate the following control modes. 1) When in the OFF position, the engine generator set is disabled, and cannot be started locally or from remote commands. If the engine generator set is running in the RUN or AUTO positions, turning the selector switch to OFF will cause the engine generator set to go into the cool down mode, and stop after cool -down. 2) When the selector switch is in the RUN position, the engine generator set shall start, and remain running until turned to OFF. 3) When the selector switch is placed in AUTO, the engine generator set shall start upon a dry contact request from a remote device and remain running until the selector switch is placed in the OFF position or the remote dry contact request is removed, causing a normal cool down and shutoff. 2. Emergency Stop Switch: a. Provide a Red "mushroom head," push to operate, pull to reset EMERGENCY STOP switch. Provide a protective cover shall be provided to prevent accidental operation. Depressing the emergency stop switch shall cause the engine generator set to immediately shut down, and be locked out until reset, 3. Reset Switch: a. The RESET switch shall be used to clear a fault and allow restarting the engine generator set after it has shut down for any fault condition. 4. Panel Lamp Switch: a. Depressing the panel lamp switch shall cause the entire panel to be lighted with DC control power. b. The panel lamps shall automatically be switched off ten minutes after the switch is depressed, or after the switch is depressed a second time. 5. Digital Metering Set: ENGINE GENERATOR SET MARCH 27, 2026 2632 13-20 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY a. Digital metering set, 0.5% accuracy, to indicate generator RMS voltage and current, frequency, output current, output kW, kW hours, and power factor. b. Generator output voltage shall be available in line to line and line to neutral voltages and shall display all three-phase voltages (line -to - neutral or line -to -line) simultaneously. 6. Engine Generator Set Alarm Display: a. The engine generator set shall be provided with alarm and status indicating lamps to indicate non automatic generator status, and existing alarm and shutdown conditions. The lamps shall be high intensity LED type. b. The lamp condition shall be clearly apparent under bright room lighting conditions. c. The engine generator set control shall indicate the existence of the following alarm and shutdown conditions on a digital display panel: d. Low oil pressure (alarm) e. Low oil pressure (shutdown) f. Oil pressure sender failure (alarm) g. Low coolant temperature (alarm) h. High coolant temperature (alarm) i. High coolant temperature (shutdown) j. Engine temperature sender failure (alarm) k. Low coolant level (alarm or shutdown selectable) 1. Fail to crank (shutdown) m. Over crank (shutdown) n. Over speed (shutdown) o. Low DC voltage (alarm) p. High DC voltage (alarm) q. Weak battery (alarm) r. Low fuel day tank (alarm) s. High AC voltage (shutdown) MARCH 27, 2026 ENGINE GENERATOR SET ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 2632 13-21 MARYS CREEK WRF t. Low AC voltage (shutdown) u. Under frequency (shutdown) v. Over current (warning) w. Over current (shutdown) x. Short circuit (shutdown) y. Overload (alarm) z. Emergency stop (shutdown) aa. Fuel leak (alarm) bb. Ground fault trip (shutdown) 7. Special Alarm or Shutdown Conditions: a. Provide spare indication points for two additional alarm or shutdown conditions. Labeling of the alarm or shutdown conditions shall be of the same type and quality as the above -specified conditions 8. Engine Status Monitoring: The following information shall be available from a digital status panel on the engine generator set control: a. Engine oil pressure (psi. or kPA.) b. Engine coolant temperature (degrees F or C) c. Engine oil temperature (degrees F or C) d. Engine speed (rpm) e. Fuel level (gallons or percentage) f. Number of hours of operation (hours) g. Number of start attempts h. Battery voltage (DC volts) 9. Electromechanical Hour meter as specified in Section 26 27 13. 10. Data logging: a. The control system shall also incorporate a data logging and display provision to allow logging of the last ten warning or shutdown indications on the engine generator set, as well as total time of operation at various loads, as a percent of the rating of the engine generator set. ENGINE GENERATOR SET MARCH 27, 2026 2632 13-22 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY 11. A set of Form C dry contacts shall be provided for each genset remote condition specified herein. 2.07 ENGINE CONTROL FUNCTIONS A. Cycle Cranking System: 1. The control system provided shall include a cycle cranking system, which allows for user selected crank time, rest time, and # of cycles. 2. Initial settings shall be for three cranking periods of 15 seconds each, with 15 -second rest period between cranking periods. B. Idle Mode Control: 1. The control system shall include an idle mode control, which allows the engine to run in idle mode in the RUN position only. 2. In this mode, the alternator excitation system shall be disabled. C. Engine Governor Control: 1. The control system shall include an engine governor control, which functions to provide steady state frequency regulation as noted elsewhere in this specification. 2. The governor control shall include adjustments for gain, damping, and a ramping function to control engine speed and limit exhaust smoke while the unit is starting. 3. The governor control shall be suitable for use in paralleling applications without component changes. D. Time Delay Start: 1. The control system shall include time delay start (adjustable 0 - 300 seconds) and time delay stop (adjustable 0 - 600 seconds) functions. E. Sender Failure Monitoring: 1. The control system shall include sender failure monitoring logic for speed sensing, oil pressure, and engine temperature which is capable of discriminating between failed sender or wiring components, and an actual failure conditions. MARCH 27, 2026 ENGINE GENERATOR SET ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 2632 13-23 MARYS CREEK WRF 2.08 ALTERNATOR CONTROL FUNCTIONS A. Alternator Control Functions shall include an I/O module for remote trip of a down -stream protective relay activated by any of the protective devices listed below. B. The alternator protective devices shall include the following protective devices: 1. Generator phase sequence, 2. Over/under voltage (27/59), 3. Over/under frequency (81 O/U) 4. Reverse power (kW)(32RP) 5. Reverse reactive power (kVAR)(32RV) 6. Overcurrent protection (50/51) C. Digital voltage Regulation: The engine generator set shall include an automatic digital voltage regulation system that is matched, and prototype tested with the governing system provided. 2. Provide immunity from incorrect operation due to load induced voltage waveform distortion and provide a pulse width modulated output to the alternator exciter. 3. Equip the voltage regulation system with three phase RMS sensing and shall control buildup of AC generator voltage to provide a linear rise and limit overshoot. 4. Include a torque matching characteristic, which shall reduce output voltage in proportion to frequency below a threshold of 59 HZ. 5. Provide the voltage regulator with adjustments for gain, damping, and frequency roll off. Adjustments shall be broad range, and made via digital raise -lower switches, with alpha -numeric LED readout to indicate setting level. D. Output Current: Provide controls to monitor the output current of the engine generator set and initiate an alarm when load current exceeds 110% of the rated current of the engine generator set on any phase for more than 60 seconds. 2. The controls shall shut down and lock out the engine generator set when output current level approaches the thermal damage point of the alternator. ENGINE GENERATOR SET MARCH 27, 2026 2632 13-24 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY E. Output Power: 1. Provide controls to monitor the kW load on the engine generator set and initiate an alarm condition when total load on the engine generator set exceeds the engine generator set rating for in excess of five seconds. 2. Include load -shed controls to operate a set of dry contacts (for use in shedding customer load devices) when the engine generator set is overloaded. F. Over/under Voltage Monitor: 1. Provide an AC over/under voltage monitoring system that responds only to true RMS voltage conditions. 2. When alternator output voltage exceeds 110% of the operator -set voltage level for more than ten seconds, or with no intentional delay when voltage exceeds 130% system shutdown is initiated. 3. When the output voltage of the alternator is less than 85% for more than ten seconds. under voltage shutdown is initiated. G. Battery Monitoring System: 1. Provide a battery monitoring system which initiates alarms when the DC control and starting voltage is less than 25 volts DC or more than 32 volts DC. 2. During engine starting, the low voltage limit shall be disabled, and if DC voltage drops to less than 24 volts for more than two seconds a "weak battery" alarm shall be initiated. 2.09 REMOTE MONITORING AND CONTROL INTERFACE A. General: 1. Connect all control and interconnection points from the equipment to the plant control and monitoring system to a separate connection box. 2. Provide terminal blocks with terminals for each outgoing conductor. 3. Double connections to a single terminal are not permitted. 4. No field connections shall be made directly to the equipment control devices. 5. All software tools necessary for programming or adjusting setpoints within the engine generator controller shall be turned over to the owner, including configuration files. MARCH 27, 2026 ENGINE GENERATOR SET ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 2632 13-25 MARYS CREEK WRF B. The following functions are required: The manufacturer's standard in addition to the features specified herein. 2. As described in the Control Strategies in Section 40 96 30 and/or as shown on the drawings. C. Discrete control signals: Provide discrete control or status functions from form C relays with contacts rated at 10 amps, minimum and120 volts AC / 24 vols DC inductive. 2. Isolate analog signals from each other and from discrete controls that are powered by AC current. 3. Design directly interfaced equipment functions and alarms to the Plant Control and Monitoring System for operation with an Ethernet Connection. 4. The equipment manufacturer shall factory enter the proper IP Address for such connection. Upon request, the Owner/Engineer will provide the proper Internet Protocol Address (IP Address), to be configured by the equipment manufacturer. 5. Refer to Section contract drawings and specification section 40 96 15 Instrumentation Input Output List for monitored parameters. D. Communication For remote monitoring, one of the following communication capabilities shall be provided at a minimum: a. One integral 10/100BaseT Ethernet port supporting Modbus TCP and Ethernet/IP protocols. b. One media protocol converter, interfacing the provided equipment to a 10/100BaseT Ethernet port supporting Modbus TCP and Ethernet/IP protocols. 2. The protocol interface shall implement ModbusTCP Protocol with the following as minimum capabilities: a. All data shall be available and/or mirrored within the Modbus 4x or "Holding Register" memory area. b. Register 4x00001 shall exist and be readable to allow simple, predictable "comm tests". ENGINE GENERATOR SET MARCH 27, 2026 2632 13-26 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY c. Software tools shall function properly with slaves' only supporting Modbus functions 3, 4 and 16. Requiring support of diagnostic function 8 is not acceptable. d. Software tools shall be configurable to write a single register as either function 6 or 16. e. Software tools shall allow setting the Modbus/TCP "Unit Id" to be a value other than zero. This is required for Ethernet -to -Serial bridging. 3. The media protocol converter shall provide the following functionality at a minimum: a. Support for two independent 10/100 Base -T full duplex Ethernet interfaces. Protocols supported on these ports to be EtherNet/IP, EtherNet/IP-PCCC and ModbusTCP. b. Two serial ports configurable as RS -232 or RS -485 interfaces with max speed (baud rate) support of 115.2 kbps. The protocol supported shall include DF 1-CIP, DF 1-PCCC, DirectNET, Modbus RTU and Modbus ASCII. c. Protocol configuration shall be Web Browser configurable. d. Support for up to 12 protocols in simultaneous use. e. Operating limits shall be 0-55°C, Power requirements shall be 10-24 volts DC at 0.5 amperes minimum. f. The converter shall have LED status for serial, signals, power, and Ethernet. g. The converter housing shall be UL 1604, Class 1 Div 2 Groups ABCD, DIN Rail mountable. h. Converter shall be Moxa or Red Lion or approved equal for conversion to Modbus TCP. 2.10 BASE A. Mount the engine generator set on a heavy-duty steel base to maintain alignment between components. The base shall incorporate a battery tray with hold-down clamps within the rails. B. Provide the generator base with at least three locations on each side where the generator platforms, (specified herein), will be bolted to prevent the movement of the platform away from engine generator. MARCH 27, 2026 ENGINE GENERATOR SET ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 2632 13-27 MARYS CREEK WRF C. The side of the platform closest to the generator shall not relay on the bolts to support the platform. The platform shall be entirely self-supporting. 2.11 AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT AND ACCESSORIES A. Coolant Heater: 1. Provide an engine mounted, thermostatically controlled, coolant heater(s) for each engine. 2. Provide power for the coolant heaters from the internal power panelboard (specified herein). 3. Install the coolant heater on the engine with silicone hose connections. Provide steel tubing for connections into the engine coolant system wherever the length of pipe run exceeds 12 inches. 4. Design the coolant heater installation to provide proper venting of the system. 5. Install the coolant heaters using quick disconnect couplers to isolate the heater for replacement of the heater element. The quick disconnect/automatic sealing couplers shall allow the heater element to be replaced without draining the engine cooling system or significant coolant loss. 6. Provide a thermostat located at the engine thermostat housing to control the coolant heater. 7. Provide an AC power connection box for a single AC power connection to the coolant heater system from the Panelboard. 8. Size the coolant heater(s) as recommended by the engine manufacturer to warm the engine to a minimum of 100°F (40°C) in a 40oF ambient, in compliance with NFPA110 requirements. B. Lube oil heaters: 1. Where required for the operation of the engine, furnish and install lube oil heaters. 2. Power to the heater shall be from the Panelboard. C. Vibration Isolators: 1. Provide spring/pad type vibration isolators as recommended by the engine generator set manufacturer. D. Starting and Control Batteries: ENGINE GENERATOR SET MARCH 27, 2026 2632 13-28 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY 1. Provide a starting battery bank, calcium/lead antimony type, 24 -volt DC, sized as recommended by the engine generator set manufacturer 2. Provide a separate battery bank for each engine generator set 3. Provide each battery set with battery cables and connectors E. Exhaust Silencer: 1. Provide exhaust muffler(s) for each engine, size and type as recommended by the engine generator set manufacturer. 2. Provide critical grade mufflers. 3. Install the exhaust system according to the engine generator set manufacturers recommendations and applicable codes and standards. 4. Fully insulate and provide lagging for the portion of exhaust pipe which inside the sound enclosure. 5. Provide 316 stainless steel fasteners to secure the lagging. 2.12 BATTERY CHARGER A. Provide a UL listed/CSA certified 20 ampere (minimum) voltage regulated battery charger (or larger as required) as follows: 1. Locate the battery charger in the engine generator set enclosure. 2. Provide input AC voltage and DC output voltage as required. 3. Equip chargers with float, taper and equalize charge settings. 4. Provide operational lights to monitor functions as specified below. 5. Provide form C contacts for remote indication of: a. Loss of AC power (red light) b. Low battery voltage (red light) c. High battery voltage (red light) 6. Provide an analog DC voltmeter and ammeter, 12 -hour equalize charge timer, AC and DC fuses shall also be provided on the charger. 2.13 OUTDOOR WEATHER -PROTECTIVE HOUSING A. Provide an outdoor enclosure as follows: 1. Engine generator set housing shall be provided factory assembled to engine generator set base and radiator cowling and shall be of the sound -attenuated type. MARCH 27, 2026 ENGINE GENERATOR SET ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 2632 13-29 MARYS CREEK WRF 2. Housing shall provide ample airflow for engine generator set operation at rated load in the ambient conditions previously specified. 3. The housing shall have hinged side access doors and rear control door. 4. All doors shall be lockable. 5. All sheet metal shall be primed for corrosion protection and finish painted with the manufacturer's standard color using a two-step electro-coating paint process, or equal meeting the performance requirements specified below. 6. All surfaces of all metal parts shall be primed and painted. 7. The painting process shall result in a coating, which meets the following requirements: a. Primer thickness: 0.5-2.0 mils. Topcoat thickness, 0.8-1.2 mils. b. Gloss, per ASTM D523-89, 80% plus or minus 5%. Gloss retention after one year shall exceed 50%. c. Crosshatch adhesion, per ASTM D3359-93, 4B -5B. d. Impact resistance, per ASTM D2794-93, 120-160 inch -pounds. 1) Salt Spray: per ASTM B 117-90, 1000+ hours. 8. Humidity: per ASTM D2247-92, 1000+ hours. a. Water Soak: per ASTM D2247-92, 1000+ hours. 9. Painting of hoses, hose clamps, wiring harnesses, and other non-metallic service parts shall not be acceptable. Fasteners used shall be corrosion resistant and designed to minimize marring of the painted surface when removed for normal installation or service work. B. The materials which are incorporated in the engine -generator enclosure shall comply with the following sections: 1. Section 26 05 19 Low -Voltage Wires and Cables 2. Section 26 05 13 Medium Voltage Cables Ver.13 3. Section 26 05 33 Raceways, Boxes, Enclosures and Fittings 4. Section 26 05 29 Electrical Support Hardware 5. Section 26 24 16 Panelboards 6. Section 26 22 13 Distribution Dry -Type Transformers ENGINE GENERATOR SET MARCH 27, 2026 2632 13-30 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY 7. Section 26 50 00 Lighting System 8. Section 26 27 26 Light Switches and Receptacles Ver.7 9. Section 26 28 16 Low Voltage Enclosed Circuit Breakers and Safety Switches 10. Section 26 43 13 Low Voltage AC Surge Protective Devices (SPDs) C. Sound Attenuation 1. Housing shall be sound attenuating type, producing a noise level not greater than 75 dBa at 7 meters. 2. Enclosure sound ratings shall be submitted. Submit the sound attenuation at the distances specified. Sound rating submitted at other distances are not acceptable. 2.14 FUEL STORAGE TANK A. Provide a dual wall subbase fuel storage tank as follows: 1. Size the tank to provide 24 hours usable capacity at 100% load. 2. Construct the tank of corrosion resistant steel 3. Provide a UL 20085 listed double wall enclosure. 4. The equipment, as installed, shall meet all local and regional requirements for above ground tanks. 5. Provide the fuel tank with a continuous level transmitter with 4-20mA output for Owner's SCADA system, and a leak detector. 6. The fuel tank shall be constructed to place the fill spout on the generator end so to facilitate access from the generator enclosure entry door on the side of the generator closest to the access road as shown on the Drawings. 2.15 VIBRATION ISOLATOR A. Furnish and install spring type vibration -isolators between the sub -base tank and the engine generator set. A minimum of six isolators shall be used, properly sized for the engine generator set supplied. B. Submit vibration isolator cut sheets. MARCH 27, 2026 ENGINE GENERATOR SET ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 2632 13-31 MARYS CREEK WRF 2.16 SERVICE AND FEEDER LUGS AND CONNECTORS A. Preparation for and connections to the incoming and outgoing cables, to be connected to the generator and auxiliary components including all lugs, terminators, etc., shall be in accordance with the following: 1. Section 26 05 13 for medium voltage conductors. B. Provide compression lugs for all terminations. Mechanical connections are not acceptable. C. Submit generator termination compartment drawings to verify the termination complement(s) will accept the generator power cables shown on the drawings. 2.17 MINI POWER CENTER A. Furnish and install a generator mounted mini -power center, of a voltage, size, rating and capacity, as shown on the Drawings. B. Manufacturers 1. Eaton 2. Square D 3. Hammond Power Systems C. Each mini -power center shall include a primary main breaker, an encapsulated dry -type transformer and a panelboard with secondary main breaker. D. Core and Coil Assemblies Transformer core shall be constructed with high-grade, non -aging, silicon steel with high magnetic permeability, and low hysteresis and eddy current losses. Maximum magnetic flux densities shall be substantially below the saturation point. The transformer core volume shall allow efficient transformer operation at 10% above the nominal tap voltage. The core laminations shall be tightly clamped and compressed. Coils shall be wound of electrical grade copper with continuous wound construction. 2. The core and coil assembly shall be completely encapsulated in a proportioned mixture of resin and aggregate to provide a moisture proof, shock -resistant seal. The core and coil encapsulation system shall minimize the sound level. 3. The core of the transformer shall be grounded to the enclosure 4. Provide two (2) 5% FCBN taps ENGINE GENERATOR SET MARCH 27, 2026 2632 13-32 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY E. BUS 1. Secondary bus shall be copper. F. MAIN DEVICES 1. Each mini -power center shall include a primary main breaker with an interrupting rating of 65kA at 277/480 volts; and a secondary main breaker with an interrupting rating of l 0kA at 120/240 volts, and a panelboard. G. FEEDER DEVICES 1. The secondary distribution section shall accommodate one -inch bolt -on breakers with 10 kA interrupting capacity. H. ENCLOSURE 1. The enclosure shall be totally enclosed, nonventilated, NEMA 3R 316 Stainless Steel, with lifting provisions. 2.18 GENERATOR ACCESS PLATFORM A. Provide with the engine generator set, a set of platforms as follows: 1. Provide the platform constructed of aluminum to serve as access into the enclosure via any of the engine generator set enclosure doors which are provided. 2. Size the width of the platform to include frontage for any double door or single personnel door. 3. Provide platforms on both sides of the enclosure. 4. Provide platforms which meet all OSHA Code requirements for access, egress, and safety. Provide certifications that the platforms meet OSHA. 5. Include hand railings around the entire perimeter of the platforms and stairs and support weight of any personnel who may lean up against or fall into the railings. Handrails shall have openings where the sound enclosure doors are required to have full opening for access to the interior of the sound enclosure. a. Platform width shall allow for full 90 -degree opening of all generator enclosure doors. Platform approval drawings shall illustrate door openings to show adequate clearance is being provided so the doors open 90 degrees without touching the handrails. b. Stairs shall be included on both platforms and steps are to be as OSHA prescribed for riser distances. MARCH 27, 2026 ENGINE GENERATOR SET ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 2632 13-33 MARYS CREEK WRF 6. The platforms shall be designed such that all rain snow or sleet will easily pass through the aluminum grates on all horizontal surfaces. 7. The platforms shall be provided by the same vendor as the engine generator set. 8. Platforms shall have lifting means permanently and shall be constructed with support legs on all sides so that no support is from the generator frame or sound enclosure, however they shall be bolted to the generator frame so that no movement away from the generator is possible without disconnecting the bolted connections. 9. The platforms shall not be bolted to the sound enclosure, which shall be removable without unbolting the platforms from the generator frame. 10. The platforms shall be installed and leveled as necessary to provide a safe and level surface for all personnel. 11. The platforms shall be anchored in such as way so that there is not a chance of swaying or other movement of the platforms while in use. 12. Provide two ground pads, one on each side of the platform. The grounding pads shall accommodate NEMA 2 -hole lugs for minimum 4/0 size cables. The platform drawings shall show the location of the ground pads. 13. All platform fastener materials shall be 316 stainless steel. 2.19 LOAD BANK A. Furnish and install a UL listed, air-cooled, outdoor, free-standing, weatherproof resistive generator load bank at the location shown on the Drawings, for each engine generator set supplied. The load bank shall connect directly to the 4.16 kV switchgear voltage. B. The load bank shall be designed for periodic exercising and testing of the corresponding engine generator set. C. The load bank shall be as manufactured by Avtron Manufacturing, Simplex, or approved equal. D. Ratings 1. The load bank rating, in KVA, shall be not less than 100 percent of the KVA rating of the largest associated engine generator set. 2. The load bank shall operate in an ambient temperature of -20°F to 120°F. 3. Housing for the load bank shall be of the sound attenuating type, producing a noise level not greater than 75 dBa at 7 meters. Submit the sound ENGINE GENERATOR SET MARCH 27, 2026 2632 13-34 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY attenuation at the distances specified. Sound rating submitted at other distances are not acceptable. E. Construction 1. Provide the load bank housed in an outdoor weatherproof enclosure, suitable for installation on a concrete pad or structural base. All exterior fasteners shall be stainless steel. The load bank shall include forklift channels in the base for lifting. 2. The load bank shall be constructed of heavy gauge aluminized steel per ASTM A463. 3. Locate the main input load bus, load step relays, fuses and blower/control relays located within the load bank enclosure. 4. Provide a thermostatically controlled heater within the control section to provide protection to the control devices from the effects of moisture and condensation. 5. Airflow requirements: a. Airflow throughout the load bank shall be vertical. b. Ambient intake cooling air shall be drawn in at the base of the unit and heated air exhausted out the top. c. Intake openings shall be designed to prevent objects greater than 1/2 - inch diameter from entering the unit. d. The load bank exhaust hood shall be angled and include interior baffle plates to direct falling rain from the interior of the load bank. e. The load bank exhaust hood shall be constructed of non -corrosive aluminum. 6. The exterior of the load bank shall be painted with baked polyester powder coating at a minimum 2 mils dry film thickness. 7. Load elements shall be contained in multiple resistor cases or trays. Each shall be capable of being removed, in its entirety as a unit, for inspection or service. F. Resistive Load Elements 1. Load elements shall be helically wound chromium alloy rated to operate at approximately one-half of maximum continuous rating of wire. 2. Elements shall be fully supported across the entire length within the air stream by segmented ceramic insulators on a stainless -steel rod. MARCH 27, 2026 ENGINE GENERATOR SET ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 2632 13-35 MARYS CREEK WRF 3. Element supports shall be designed to prevent a short circuit to adjacent elements or ground in the event of a wire break. G. Cooling The load bank shall be cooled by integral TEFC or TEAO motor(s), direct coupled to the cooling fan blade. 2. The fan motor shall be electrically protected against overload using a motor overload device and short circuit protected using three current limiting fuses with an interrupting rating of 200 kA. H. Protective Devices A differential pressure switch(s) shall be provided to detect air loss (one for each stack). The switch(s) shall be electrically interlocked with the load application controls to prevent load from being applied if cooling air is not present. 2. An overtemperature switch shall be provided to sense the load bank exhaust in each vertical heater case assembly. The switch shall be electrically interlocked with the load application controls to remove load from being applied in the event of an over temperature condition. 3. Branch fuses shall be provided on all three phases of the switched load steps above 50 kW. Branch fuses shall be current limiting type with an interrupting rating of 200 kA. 4. The exterior of the load bank shall have appropriate warning/caution statements on access panels. Control Panel The control panel shall be a remote mounted in a NEMA 4X free-standing enclosure. 2. The panel shall contain a control power ON/OFF switch, a power ON indication light, blower START/STOP pushbuttons, Blower ON light, blower FAILURE light and OVERTEMP light. 3. Load selection shall include a master load ON/OFF switch and individual load step switches, where required. J. Auto Load Dump Circuit A standard remote load dump circuit shall be provided as part of the load bank control circuit. ENGINE GENERATOR SET MARCH 27, 2026 2632 13-36 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY 2. Provide for the remote removal of the load bank by the opening of a remote normally closed set of auxiliary contacts from a transfer switch or other device. In the event of the remote contact opening, all load is removed. K. Automatic Load Controller 1. Provide an Automatic Load Step Controller shall be provided for maintaining a minimum load on the engine generator set as follows: a. The controller shall monitor the connected downstream loads and shall automatically add or subtract load steps in response to building load changes to maintain a minimum load level on the engine generator set. b. The controller shall include an initial time -delay circuit, and automatic time delayed load step application circuit. c. A remote contact closure shall be provided for activation and transfer of control. A separate current transformer shall be supplied for mounting and sensing of downstream loads. 2.20 SPARE PARTS A. Provide the following spare parts in the quantities specified: 1. Two air cleaner elements of each type. 2. Two Fuses of each type. 3. One Radiator hoses of each type. 4. Two Fuel filters of each type. 5. Two Oil filters of each type. 6. One Belt of each type. 2.21 FACTORY TESTING A. Provide the generator completely assembled, wired, and adjusted at the factory and be given the manufacturer's routine shop tests and any other additional operational test to insure the workability and reliable operation of the equipment. B. The engine -generator shall be tested in its enclosure and sound measurements shall be included prove compliance with specified sound ratings as a part of the testing procedure. C. Factory test equipment and test methods shall conform with the latest applicable requirements of ANSI, IEEE, UL, and NEMA standards. MARCH 27, 2026 ENGINE GENERATOR SET ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 2632 13-37 MARYS CREEK WRF D. Submit the test record forms which shall be used to record the test results to the Engineer/Owner for approval prior to performing any factory testing. The form shall include the engine and alternator operating perimeters specified to be met in this specification. The form shall be used during the factor test and certified by the manufacturer and submitted to the Engineer/Owner approval. The engine - generator shall be tested in its enclosure and sound measurements shall be included prove compliance with specified sound ratings as a part of the report. 2. The from shall be used during the field acceptance tests and shall be signed by the representatives from the manufacturer and Contractor and submitted to the Engineer/Owner for approval. Sound measurements to prove compliance with specified sound ratings shall be included as a part of the report. 2.22 WITNESS TESTING A. The Owner/Engineer will witness the Factory Tests for each of the following Equipment Units: 1. Equipment Unit I.D. GEN-1 2. Equipment Unit I.D. GEN-2 B. The number of Owner/Engineer persons witnessing the tests will be 4 persons. C. Refer to Section 26 00 00 or specific requirements for witnessed testing. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE A. Provide the services of a qualified factory -trained manufacturer's field representative to assist in installation and start-up of each type of the equipment specified below for the time required to perform the services specified. B. The manufacturer's field representative shall provide technical direction and assistance in general assembly of the equipment, connections, and adjustments, and testing of the assembly and components contained therein. 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Examine installation area to ensure there is enough clearance to install the equipment. ENGINE GENERATOR SET MARCH 27, 2026 2632 13-38 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY B. Concrete pads shall be installed as shown on the Structural Drawings. C. Check concrete foundations pads and baseplates for uniformity and level surface. D. Verify that the equipment is ready to install. E. Verify field measurements are as submitted by the manufacturer. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install all equipment per the manufacturer's recommendations and Contract Drawings. B. Install the engine generator set with sub — base fuel tank on the concrete pad as shown on the drawings. Install the vibro-isolators between the sub — base fuel tank and the engine generator set. Installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. C. Install required safety labels. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect installed equipment for anchoring, alignment, grounding and physical damage. B. Check tightness of all accessible electrical connections. Minimum acceptable values are specified in manufacturer's instructions. 3.05 FIELD ADJUSTING A. Adjust all circuit breakers, switches, access doors, operating handles for free mechanical and electrical operation as described in manufacturer's instructions. B. The Power Monitoring and Protective Relays shall be set in the field by a qualified representative of the manufacturer, in accordance with settings designated in a coordinated study of the system as required in Section 26 05 73 Power System Study. C. All such settings, including the application of arc flash labels, shall have been made and Approved by the Owner/Engineer, prior to energizing of the equipment. 3.06 EQUIPMENT START-UP A. Operate unit to demonstrate ability to operate continuously without vibration, jamming, leakage or overheating and to perform specified functions, after installation and after manufacturer's Engineer's check of installed equipment. MARCH 27, 2026 ENGINE GENERATOR SET ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 2632 13-39 MARYS CREEK WRF B. Comply with manufacturer's operating and maintenance instructions during start up and operation. C. Promptly correct improper installation of equipment. D. Cooperate with supplier of equipment at time of startup and in making of all final adjustments necessary to place equipment in satisfactory working order. Startup shall not commence without the presence of the manufacturer's representative. 3.07 FIELD TEST A. Upon completion of the installation and as soon as conditions permit, the emergency power supply system including the engine driven generator, electrical circuits, controls, transfer switch and other devices shall be tested in the presence of the Owner/Engineer and the service representative for the manufacturer of the engine driven generator unit to assure that the system functions as specified. Prior to scheduling the test, notify the Owner/Engineer in writing that all requirements and provisions of the Contract Documents have been fulfilled, that all apparatus shall be clean, properly adjusted, and ready for operation and that the Instruction Manuals, parts lists, and record drawings have been submitted. 2. The tests shall be conducted using load banks provided under this Contract, or existing load banks if present, or load banks shall be provided with no change in the Contract Price to conduct the following tests: a. 25% load for 2 hours b. 50% load for 2 hours c. 100% load for 4 hours 3. Additional tests shall be conducted as follows: a. The test shall be conducted in accordance with the Owner's process needs at a time of day or day of the week as directed by the Owner to manually load the generator with actual plant loads. The time may be any time of the day or night and the day of the week may be any day as selected by the Owner. No increase in Contract Price will be accepted for after-hours testing. b. The field test using plant loads shall be done with the Utility service feed opened at the upstream utility disconnect switch. Coordinate with Oncor to operate switches to simulate loss of power to the plant for transfer testing. Pulling of control fuses or software "test" modes will not be acceptable for transfer testing. ENGINE GENERATOR SET MARCH 27, 2026 2632 13-40 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY B. The field testing shall include the following: Demonstrate the generator tripping due to an engine or generator fault condition initiated by the package engine- generator controls 2. The test shall include a trip of the generator differential relay if present. 3. Automatic shutdown devices shall be tested, and the respective values recorded at which the devices will stop the engine. Any adjustments required shall be made in the devices to make the operating values correspond to those recommended by the engine manufacturer and as recorded during the stop test. 4. Additional testing shall be performed to demonstrate the emergency power supply system's ability to meet the automatic starting, load transfer and motor starting requirements. C. If the emergency power supply system fails to fulfill the performance requirements of this specification, corrective action shall be taken, and the system retested to assure full compliance. All expenses associated with the field tests, and required resisting, including any corrective action, shall be provided. 2. Should any part of the testing not pass the specified requirements, provide any necessary changes to bring the generator system into full compliance. 3. Provide certifications in writing from the manufacturers' representative for any changes including but not limited to connections, adjustments, repairs, component replacements necessary to make the circuit, device, or control system function as specified and otherwise comply with the Contract Documents. D. Provide all fuel and all engine fluids to perform all required testing. All fluid levels and fuel shall be filled to full following testing and shall be turned over to the Owner filled when the project has been completed and the unit is turned over to the Owner for their use. If the Owner experiences an emergency condition and causes the engine generator to run prior to final competition, then the fuel and engine fluids used will be the responsibility of the Owner to replenish. 3.08 CLEANING A. Remove all rubbish and debris from inside and around the motor controllers. Remove dirt, dust, or concrete spatter from the interior and exterior of the equipment using brushes, vacuum cleaner, or clean, lint free rags. Do not use compressed air. MARCH 27, 2026 ENGINE GENERATOR SET ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 2632 13-41 MARYS CREEK WRF 3.09 EQUIPMENT PROTECTION AND RESTORATION A. Touch-up and restore damaged surfaces to factory finish, as approved by the manufacturer. If the damaged surface cannot be returned to factory specification, the surface shall be replaced. 3.10 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATION A. A qualified factory -trained manufacturer's representative shall personally inspect the equipment at the jobsite and shall certify in writing that the equipment has been installed, adjusted, and tested, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, including all settings designated in the Power System Study. B. Provide three copies of the manufacturer's representative's certification. 3.11 TRAINING A. Provide manufacturer's services for training of plant personnel in operation and maintenance of the engine generator sets furnished under this Section. B. The training for each type of equipment shall be for a period of not less than two four-hour days. C. The cost of training program to be conducted with Owner's personnel shall be included in the Contract Price. The training and instruction, insofar as practicable, shall be directly related to the system being supplied. D. Provide detailed O&M manuals to supplement the training course. The manuals shall include specific details of equipment supplied and operations specific to the project. E. The training session shall be conducted by a manufacturer's qualified representative. Training program shall include instructions on the assembly, circuit breaker, engine, alternator, protective devices, metering, and other major components. F. The Owner reserves the right to videotape the training session for the Owner's use. END OF SECTION ENGINE GENERATOR SET MARCH 27, 2026 2632 13-42 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY SECTION 26 33 00 STATION BATTERY SYSTEM PARTI GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish and install 125 VDC station battery system for switchgear control power, together with appurtenances, complete and operable, as specified herein and as shown on the Contract Drawings. B. The 125VDC station battery system consists of battery charger, VRLA batteries, DC panelboard, and accessories contained within an overall factory assembled enclosure. C. The DC control power system specified herein shall be coordinated by and provided by the switchgear manufacturer. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Refer to Division 26 00 00 and the Contract Drawings, for related work and electrical coordination requirements. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be made in accordance with the requirements of Division 1, Section 26 00 00, the Contract Documents and as specified herein the following: 1. The manufacturers' names and product designation or catalog numbers for the types of materials specified or shown on the Drawings. 2. Cut sheets for each individual item shall be submitted. 3. All cut sheets shall be clearly marked to indicate which products are being submitted for use on this project. 4. Unmarked cut sheets will cause the submittal to be rejected and returned for revision. B. All shop drawing submittals and all O&M submittals shall be submitted in accordance with the requirements listed in Division 1. No change in Contract Price or Schedule will be allowed for delays due to unacceptable submittals. C. Submittals shall also contain information on related equipment to be furnished under this Specification. Incomplete submittals not containing the required information on the related equipment will also be returned without review. MARCH 27, 2026 STATION BATTERY SYSTEM ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 26 33 00 - 1 MARYS CREEK WRF D. Submittals shall be made in accordance with the requirements of the process equipment division of these Specifications, and as specified herein. E. The original equipment manufacturer, (OEM) shall create all equipment shop drawings, including all wiring diagrams, in the manufacturer's Engineering department. All equipment shop drawings shall bear the original equipment manufacturer's logo, drawing file numbers, and shall be maintained on file in the OEM's archive file system. Photocopies of the Engineer's ladder schematics are unacceptable as shop drawings. F. Submit for approval the Contractor's certification of extended warranty in the shop drawing submitted to the Engineer for approval. G. Submit for approval, a manufacturer's conducted training agenda for all training specified herein. Training agenda shall not be submitted until final approval of the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Shop Drawings and Product Data. H. The following information shall be submitted to the Engineer: Product data sheets and catalog numbers for overcurrent protective devices, motor starters, control relays, control stations, meters, pilot lights, etc. The manufacturer's name shall be clearly visible on each cut sheet submitted. List all options, trip adjustments and accessories furnished specifically for this project. Clearly mark each sheet to indicate which items apply and/or those items that do not apply. 2. Provide control systems engineering to produce custom unit elementary drawings showing inter -wiring and interlocking between components and to remotely mounted devices. Include and identify all connecting equipment and remote devices on the schematics. The notation "Remote Device" will not be acceptable. Show wire and terminal numbers. Indicate special identifications for electrical devices per the Drawings. 3. Equipment outline drawings showing elevation, plan and interior views, front panel arrangement, dimensions, weight, shipping splits, conduit entrances and anchor bolt pattern. Indicate all options, special features, ratings, and deviations from this Section. 4. Power and control schematics including external connections. Show wire and terminal numbers, and color -coding. 5. Instruction and replacement parts books. 6. As -built final drawings. 7. Documentation that the panel assembly facility is a UL -508 certified panel shop. STATION BATTERY SYSTEM MARCH 27, 2026 263300-2 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTAAND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRF 8. Facsimile of the UL label that is to be applied to the completed panel. 9. Furnish complete Bill of Materials indicating manufacturer's name and part numbers. 10. Manufacturer's cut sheets for every component used in the panel assembly adequately marked to show the items being included. The manufacturer's name shall be clearly visible on each cut sheet submitted. 11. Assembly ratings including: a. Short-circuit rating of the incoming AC breaker. b. Voltage c. Continuous current 12. Major component ratings including: a. Voltage b. Continuous current c. Interrupting ratings 13. Cable terminal sizes. 14. Instruction and renewal parts books. 15. Provide calculations showing the circuit power requirements for trip and close and calculations that show the battery size is sufficient to provide power to the circuit breakers to facilitate their operation. Provide calculations showing the battery charger sizing and the time to recharge the battery. I. Factory Tests. Submittals shall be made for factory tests specified herein. J. Field Test Reports. Submittals shall be made for field tests specified herein. K. Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 1. Operation and maintenance manuals shall include the following information: a. Manufacturer's contact address and telephone number for parts and service. b. Instruction books and/or leaflets c. Recommended renewal parts list MARCH 27, 2026 STATION BATTERY SYSTEM ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 263300-3 MARYS CREEK WRF d. Record Documents for the information required by the Submittals paragraph above. e. Include the following: 1) Component list / bill of material including part numbers. 2) Marked product data and catalog cut sheets. 3) Performance specifications / equipment ratings. 4) Factory drawings and schematics. 5) Trip curves for breakers and fuses 6) Specified certifications. 7) Factory test reports 8) Field test reports. 1.04 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. All products and components shown on the Drawings and listed in this specification shall be designed and manufactured according to latest revision of the following standards (unless otherwise noted): 1. NEMA Standard ICS 2 - 2000 Industrial Control and Systems 2. NFPA 70 — National Electrical Code (NEC) 3. NFPA 70E — Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace 4. NFPA 79 — Electrical Standard for Industrial Machinery 5. UL 508/508A — Industrial Control Enclosures 6. NEMA ICS 6 — Industrial Control and Systems Enclosures 7. IEEE 485 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Sizing Lead -Acid Batteries for Stationary Applications 8. IEEE 1188-2005 - Recommended Practice for Maintenance, Testing, and Replacement of Valve -Regulated Lead -Acid (VRLA) Batteries for Stationary Applications 9. IEEE 946 DC System Design 10. ANSI C37.90a 11. ISO 9001 12. OSHA STATION BATTERY SYSTEM MARCH 27, 2026 263300-4 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTAAND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY 13. UL Standard 1012 14. FCC Standards Emissions a. 47-CFR-15 (FCC Part 15) Class B b. EN 61000-6-4 and EN 55022, Class A 15. Batteries shall pass UL 9540A fire test. B. All equipment specified in this Section of the Specifications shall bear the appropriate label of Underwriters Laboratories. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar equipment for a minimum period of five years. When requested by the Owner/Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement. B. All components and material shall be new and of the latest field proven design and in current production. Obsolete components or components scheduled for immediate discontinuation shall not be used. C. The battery, battery system charger and associated control panels submitted shall fit within the space shown on the Drawings. Equipment which does not fit within the space is not acceptable. D. For the equipment specified herein, the manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 2000 certified. E. Equipment components and devices shall be UL labeled wherever UL standards exist for such equipment. The completed battery charger and associated control panel shall be UL Labeled in accordance with UL 508 and 508A and other applicable UL standards. The panel shall also be UL labeled for the environment in which it is to be placed. A UL label shall be affixed to the inside of the external door by the panel fabrication assembly. Submit a facsimile of the UL label in the submittal information. 1.06 JOBSITE DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Prior to jobsite delivery, complete all submittal requirements, and present to the Owner/Engineer upon delivery of the equipment, an approved copy of all such submittals. Delivery of incomplete constructed equipment, onsite factory work, or failed factory tests will not be permitted. MARCH 27, 2026 STATION BATTERY SYSTEM ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 263300-5 MARYS CREEK WRF B. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Two copies of these instructions shall be included with the equipment at the time of shipment and shall be made available to the Contractor and Owner/Engineer. C. The instructions shall include the following: Detailed assembly instructions including but not limited to wiring interconnection diagrams. 2. Rigging for lifting, skidding, jacking, and moving using rolling equipment to place the equipment. 3. Bolt torquing requirements for bus and all other components which require the installation of bolted connections. 4. Instructions for storing the equipment prior to energizing. D. Shipping groups shall be designed to be shipped by truck, rail, or ship. Indoor groups shall be bolted to skids. Breakers and accessories shall be packaged and shipped separately. E. Equipment shall be installed in its permanent finished location shown on the Drawings within seven calendar days of arriving onsite. If the equipment cannot be installed within seven calendar days, the equipment shall not be delivered to the site, but stored off site until such time that the site is ready for permanent installation of the equipment. No change in the Contract Price will be allowed for storage or transportation. F. Provide temporary electrical power and operate space heaters during storage, and after equipment is installed in permanent location, until equipment is placed in service. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Provide warranties, including the manufacturer's warranty to be free from defects in material and workmanship from date of delivery, for the equipment specified. Provide additional warranty time to extend the manufacturer's warranty from the date of delivery for the proper installation thereof, to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a total time of two years from date of fmal acceptance of the equipment and its installation. B. Include the Contractor's certification of extended warranty in the shop drawing submitted to the Engineer for approval. Omission of the Contractor's certification will cause the submittal to be rejected and returned for revision. STATION BATTERY SYSTEM MARCH 27, 2026 263300-6 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTAAND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY C. Within such period of warranty, all material and labor necessary to return the equipment to new operating condition shall be provided. Any warranty work requiring shipping or transporting of the equipment shall be provided at no expense to the Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIAL MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following material Manufacturers are acceptable for items not specifically specified else are: SENS (Stored Energy Systems) 2. Approved equal B. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Materials listed above are not relieved from meeting these Specifications in their entirety. 2.02 RATINGS A. Voltage Rating: 1. Provide the battery, battery charger and associated control panel with the service voltage as specified and/or as shown on the Drawings. 2. The Battery and Battery Charging System shall provide 125 VDC control power for the following: a. Medium Voltage Metal -Clad Switchgear, MVSWGR-1A b. Medium Voltage Metal -Clad Switchgear, MVSWGR-1B c. Medium Voltage Metal -Clad Paralleling Switchgear, PSG. 3. Provide battery sizing calculations that include each circuit breaker requiring DC power to trip and close. Provide calculations that show the time to recharge the battery after the operation of the circuit breakers. A detailed calculations including a breakdown of the continuous and momentary loads shall be included for review. B. Short Circuit Rating: 1. The interrupting rating of the AC input circuit breaker for the Battery Charger shall be not less than 65,000 amperes RMS symmetrical at the voltage shown on the drawings, and equal to or greater than the overall MARCH 27, 2026 STATION BATTERY SYSTEM ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 263300-7 MARYS CREEK WRF short circuit withstand and interrupting rating of the feeder device immediately upstream of the Battery Charger. 2.03 CONSTRUCTION A. General DC power system with integrated battery charger, batteries, and distribution panel. The only field wiring required shall be the AC input to charger, the DC load connections at panel, and the communication wiring at the charger. 2. The switchgear manufacturer and battery supplier shall coordinate to calculate the required size/ratings of the system. The system shall be capable of providing power for all control devices (relays, time delay control switches, indicating lamps, etc.) breaker trip and close functions and have the sufficient capacity to close the breakers and charge the springs after 8 hours of both Utility and Generator power outage. 3. The switchgear manufacturer shall furnish the complete 125 VDC system ensuring all equipment are suitably rated for application specified, based on the final battery capacity determined by the latest version of standards IEEE 485. 4. System design shall be such that a separate battery room is not required. 2.04 CHARGER A. Provide a battery charging system to convert AC to DC sufficient to support continuous loads and battery changing. B. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following material Manufacturers are acceptable for items not specifically specified else are: SENS (Stored Energy Systems) PowerCab 2. Approved equal. C. Input Supply The AC input voltage to the charges shall be as shown on the drawings. 2. The AC input frequency range is 47-63Hz or 57-63Hz. 3. All AC breakers shall be UL489 compliant and rated for the voltage applied. D. The AC input voltage tolerance is +10% or +12%/-6% E. DC Output STATION BATTERY SYSTEM MARCH 27, 2026 263300-8 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTAAND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY 1. The DC output voltage shall be 125 VDC. 2. The DC output shall be sized to power the continuous loads and to recharge a fully discharged battery within a given time period. 3. Combined line and load regulation is +.25% or better. 4. Charging control includes float charge mode, manual and automatic equalize charge modes and battery temperature compensation. 5. Output is electronically current limited and protected. 6. UL489 2 -pole DC output breaker 7. Charger shall include output ripple filter to maintain 30mV maximum ripple. 8. Charger shall include battery eliminator function to support continuous DC load during replacement of battery system. F. Ground Fault Detection 1. Provide the charger with ground fault detection between DC positive (+) or DC negative (-) and ground with an adjustable trigger current level of 1.5 to 5.5 milliamps. 2.05 BATTERIES A. AGM Type VRLA (Valve Regulated Lead Acid) batteries. B. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following material Manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Deka Unigy 2. MESA Technical Associates 3. East Penn Manufacturing Company 4. Approved equal. C. 10 years in float service at 77°F D. Battery Design Margin: 10% Minimum E. Battery Aging Factor: 25% Minimum F. Battery case is reinforced and meets safety requirements of UL94 V-0 G. Batteries shall be recombinant type to minimize gassing. MARCH 27, 2026 STATION BATTERY SYSTEM ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 263300-9 MARYS CREEK WRF H. Meets capacity requirements of IEEE485 for application load profile. The system shall be 150AH minimum. I. Load profile (to be used for IEEE 485 calculation): 1. Time Period 1 (1st minute): a. Trip 3 breakers b. Close 6 breakers c. Charge 6 breakers. 2. Time Period 2 (8 hours): a. All continuous loads (lights, relays, meters, etc) 3. Time Period 3 (Last minute): a. Trip 6 breakers b. Close 2 breakers c. Charge 2 breakers. J. The breaker trip, close, and charging currents for the specific breakers supplied on this project, along with a detailed tabulation of the continuous switchgear loads shall be included with the IEEE 485 calculations in the shop drawing submittal. 2.06 DC LOAD PANEL A. Charger and battery feed distribution panel through bolt -on 2 -pole branch rated breakers. B. Provide 2 -pole bolt -on type with UL489 rated distribution breakers rated for the maximum DC voltage of the system. C. Provide distribution breakers rated for a minimum of 14 kAIC minimum interrupt capacity. D. Coordinate with switchgear supplier for number and amperage of distribution breakers required to feed the switchgear loads. A project specific panelboard schedule shall be included with the shop drawing submittal. E. Provide spare breaker for connection of temporary battery bank during battery replacement. 2.07 LOW VOLTAGE DC OUTPUT DISCONNECTS A. Provide low voltage DC load output disconnect as follows: STATION BATTERY SYSTEM MARCH 27, 2026 263300-10 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTAAND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY 1. Disconnects battery discharge at an adjustable setpoint protecting battery from critical discharge levels. 2. Automatically reconnects battery to the loads when the DC system voltage can support the loads. 2.08 USER INTERFACE A. Provide a user interface consisting of the following: 1. LCD displaying plain language text. 2. LED panel showing system status. 3. A user control panel. B. Provide a 2% accuracy meter for indicating DC output voltage and 5% accuracy meter for indicating DC output current. C. Provide the charger with a data -logging function to regularly record alarms, input and output voltages, user adjustments, and all internal charger parameters. D. Battery Check 1. Provide a function in the remote interface which periodically and automatically validates the battery's ability to power the connected system load at user -specified intervals. 2. Include manual control for the battery validation function on the front of the battery charger control panel. 2.09 REMOTE MONITORING AND CONTROL INTERFACE A. General: 1. See Section 26 27 13 Power Metering and Protective Relays paragraph PROTOCOL CONVERTER for communications protocol requirements if specified protocol is not available natively for the device.. 2. The protocol interface shall implement ModbusTCP Protocol. 3. System shall be equipped with a 2% accuracy meter for indicating DC output voltage and 5% accuracy meter for indicating DC output current. 4. Charger shall include a data -logging function to regularly records alarms, input and output voltages, user adjustments, and all internal charger parameters. 5. Battery Check MARCH 27, 2026 STATION BATTERY SYSTEM ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 263300- 11 MARYS CREEK WRF a. Periodically and automatically validate the battery's ability to power the connected system load at user -specified intervals and includes manual control on the front panel. 6. Provide terminal blocks to terminate each control conductor. Provide terminals to terminate analog conductor shield conductors. Double lugging of field conductors is not acceptable. 7. No field connections shall be made directly to the equipment control devices. 8. Functions to be brought out shall be as described in the Control Strategies in Section 40 96 30 B. Alarm Indication 1. Any alarm indication shall cause plain language text to appear on the LCD and changes the appropriate LED. 2. Alarm status shall also be available via Modus TCP/IP. 3. Alarms must be available on up to 13 Form -C contacts. a. Discrete control or status functions shall be form C relays with contacts rated at 5 amps, 120 volts AC. b. Analog signals shall be isolated from each other. C. Available alarms shall include: 1. AC Line Failure 2. High DC Voltage 3. Battery on Discharge 4. Low DC 5. Battery End Discharge 6. Charger Fail 7. Overvoltage Shutdown 8. Reverse Polarity 9. Invalid Settings 10. Incompatible Battery 11. Current Limiting 12. Low Current STATION BATTERY SYSTEM MARCH 27, 2026 26 33 00 - 12 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTAAND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY 13. Battery Check 14. Thermal Foldback 15. AC Breaker Open 16. DC Breaker Open 17. Ground Fault Positive 18. Ground Fault Negative 19. Temperature Probe Fault 20. DC Below Startup Voltage 21. Summary Alarms, user configurable to sum various alarms to given Form -C contact. 2.10 ENVIRONMENTAL A. Charger Operating temperature: -40°C to +50°C at full rated output, with overtemperature protection B. Humidity: 5% to 95%, non -condensing C. All circuit boards are conformal coated to resist the effect of extreme humidity and corrosive environments. D. Altitude: 0-2000 meters; without derating 2.11 MECHANICAL A. Enclosure Material and Finish 1. Stainless Steel 2. Provide NEMA 1 enclosure. 2.12 NAMEPLATES A. General 1. Furnish nameplates for each device. 2. Provide engraved laminated impact acrylic nameplates with a matte finish, not less than 1/16 -inch thick by 3/4 -inch by 2 -1/2 -inch. 3. Acceptable Manufacturers a. Rowmark 322402 MARCH 27, 2026 STATION BATTERY SYSTEM ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 26 33 00 - 13 MARYS CREEK WRF b. Acceptable equal. 4. Provide nameplates white on the outside with letters that appear black. 5. Attach nameplates with stainless steel screws unless otherwise specified. 6. Reuse, alteration, or replacement of original equipment nameplates tags associated with equipment or components supplied by the manufacturer's suppliers and sub -suppliers is prohibited. 7. Exterior a. Furnish nameplates for each device as specified herein and as indicated on the Drawings. b. Provide black lettering on a white background. c. Attach nameplates with stainless steel screws on NEMA 1, 1 A or 12 rated enclosures. d. Provide a master nameplate that indicates equipment ratings, manufacturer's name, shop order number and general information. 1) Mount cubicle nameplates on the front face of each cubicle. 2) Provide permanent warning signs as follows: a) "Danger- High Voltage- Keep Out" on all doors. b) "Warning- Hazard of Electric Shock — Disconnect Power Before Opening or Working on This Unit" on Main Power Disconnect or Disconnects. 8. Internal a. Mark for identification control components mounted within the assembly as follows: 1) Provide nameplates corresponding to appropriate designations on manufacturer's wiring diagrams including but not limited to fuse blocks, relays, pushbuttons, switches, etc. 2) Provide identification nameplates with a white background and black letters. 3) Attach with stainless steel screws. B. Standard Nameplate Data 1. Provide a nameplate containing the following data: STATION BATTERY SYSTEM MARCH 27, 2026 26 33 00 - 14 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTAAND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY a. Manufacturer's name, address and web site address b. Product description c. Model number. d. Serial number e. Date of manufacture f. Input voltage rating. g. Input frequency rating. h. Input current rating. i. Nominal output voltage rating j. Output current rating. k. Applicable safety and EMC agency marks 1. Applicable IBC seismic certification 2.13 DRAWINGS AND DOCUMENTS A. Provide a user manual containing the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 2.14 FACTOR Safety instructions Model number breakout. Performance specifications System overview Mounting instructions Wiring details Operation procedures Troubleshooting table Detailed dimensional drawing. Wiring diagram Y TESTING A. The DC power assembly, including charger, batteries, and panelboard, shall be completely assembled, wired, and adjusted at the factory and shall be given the manufacturer's routine shop tests and any other additional operational test to insure the workability and reliable operation of the equipment. MARCH 27, 2026 STATION BATTERY SYSTEM ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 26 33 00 - 15 MARYS CREEK WRF B. Factory test equipment and test methods shall conform with the latest applicable requirements of ANSI, IEEE, UL, and NEMA standards. C. Factory test shall include, at minimum: 1. Insulation breakdown test using a high potential testing (hipot) device to the standards prescribed in UL standards. 2. Performance testing to insure that the product meets its critical performance specifications. 3. Calibration to the correct output, alarm and shutdown voltages 4. Correct function of alarms D. The operational test shall include the following: 1. Proper connection of supply and control voltage 2. A mockup of simulated control signals and control devices shall be fed into the boards to check for proper operation. E. Factory test equipment and test methods shall conform to the latest applicable requirements of ANSI, IEEE, UL, and NEMA standards, and shall be subject to the Owner/Engineer's approval. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE A. Provide the services of a qualified factory -trained manufacturer's field representative to perform the tasks specified under this section for the time required. B. The manufacturer's representative shall provide technical direction and assistance in the general assembly of the equipment, connections, and adjustments, and testing of the assembly and components contained therein. C. Provide three copies of the manufacturer's field start-up report. 3.02 INSTALLER'S QUALIFICATIONS A. Provide an installer specialized in installing DC power supply systems with a minimum of five years documented experience. B. Submit experience documentation for approval prior to beginning work on this project. STATION BATTERY SYSTEM MARCH 27, 2026 26 33 00 - 16 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTAAND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY 3.03 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Examine installation area to ensure there is enough clearance to install the equipment. B. Housekeeping pads shall be included for the floor mounted equipment as detailed on the Drawings. C. Check concrete pads and baseplates for uniformity and level surface. D. Verify that the equipment is ready to install. E. Verify field measurements are as submitted by manufacturer. 3.04 INSTALLATION A. Install all equipment per the manufacturer's recommendations and Contract Drawings. B. Install required safety labels. C. Visual Inspection 1. Inspect equipment for signs of damage. 2. Verify installation per drawings supplied with installation manuals or submittal package. 3. Inspect cabinets for foreign objects. 4. Inspect each battery jar for proper polarity. 5. Verify that all printed circuit boards are configured properly. D. Mechanical Inspection 1. Check all control wiring connections for tightness. 2. Check all power wiring connections for tightness. 3. Check all terminal screws, nuts and/or spade lugs for tightness. 4. Electrical Inspection 5. Check all fuses for continuity. 6. Confirm input and bypass voltage and phase rotation are MARCH 27, 2026 STATION BATTERY SYSTEM ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 26 33 00 - 17 MARYS CREEK WRF 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect installed equipment for anchoring, alignment, grounding and physical damage. B. Check tightness of all accessible electrical connections. Minimum acceptable values are specified in manufacturer's instructions. C. Provide one set of as -built panel drawings laminated, in the DC panelboard pocket. 3.06 FIELD TESTING A. The DC control power system manufacturer's field representative shall perform all electrical field tests recommended by the manufacturer and make all control adjustments required for the individual application of the battery system. B. Perform all electrical field tests recommended by the manufacturer. Disconnect all connections to solid-state equipment prior to testing. C. Submit the results of all specified tests to the Engineer/Owner within five business days for approval and for their permanent records. D. Test reports showing unsatisfactory results may require the removal of all defective or suspected materials, equipment and/or apparatus, and their replacement with new items as determined by the Owner/Engineer. No change in the Contract Price or Schedule allowed. E. Retesting, if required by the Owner/Engineer shall be done with no change in Contract Price or Schedule. 3.07 CLEANING A. Remove all rubbish and debris from inside and around the enclosure. Remove dirt, dust, or concrete spatter from the interior and exterior of the equipment using brushes, vacuum cleaner, or clean, lint free rags. Do not use compressed air. 3.08 EQUIPMENT PROTECTION AND RESTORATION A. Touch-up and restore damaged surfaces to factory finish, as approved by the manufacturer. If the damaged surface cannot be returned to factory specification, the surface shall be replaced. STATION BATTERY SYSTEM MARCH 27, 2026 26 33 00 - 18 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTAAND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY 3.09 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATION A. A qualified factory -trained manufacturer's representative shall personally inspect the equipment at the jobsite and shall certify in writing that the equipment has been installed, adjusted, and tested, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, including all settings designated in the Power System Study. B. Provide three copies of the manufacturer's representative's certification. 3.10 TRAINING A. Provide manufacturer's services for training of plant personnel in operation and maintenance of the soft start starters furnished under this Section. B. The training for each type of equipment shall be for a period of not less than one eight -hour day. C. The cost of training program to be conducted with Owner's personnel shall be included in the Contract Price. The training and instruction, insofar as practicable, shall be directly related to the system being supplied. D. Provide detailed O&M manuals to supplement the training course. The manuals shall include specific details of equipment supplied and operations specific to the project. E. The training session shall be conducted by a manufacturer's qualified representative. Training program shall include instructions on the assembly, motor starters, protective devices, metering, and other major components. F. The Owner reserves the right to videotape the training sessions for the Owner's use. MARCH 27, 2026 STATION BATTERY SYSTEM ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 26 33 00 - 19 MARYS CREEK WRF END OF SECTION STATION BATTERY SYSTEM MARCH 27, 2026 263300-20 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTAAND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRF SECTION 26 33 54 THREE-PHASE UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS) PARTI GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish and install continuous -duty three-phase, solid-state, uninterruptible power systems (UPS). The UPS shall provide high -quality AC power for sensitive electronic equipment loads, together with appurtenances, complete and operable, as specified herein and as shown on the Contract Drawings. 1. UPS -300: 10 KVA. 2. UPS -700: 30 KVA 8 3. UPS -1200: 10 KVA B. The UPS system shall consist of an IGBT power factor -corrected rectifier, DC -DC converter and three-phase, transformer -free inverter, bypass static transfer switch, bypass synchronizing circuitry, protective devices and accessories as specified. The specified system shall also include a battery disconnect breaker and battery system. C. The UPS shall be protected against sudden changes in output load and short circuits at the output terminals. The UPS shall have built-in protection against permanent damage to itself and the connected load for all predictable types of malfunctions. Fast -acting, current -limiting devices shall be used to protect against cascading failure of solid-state devices. Internal UPS malfunctions shall cause the module to trip off- line with minimum damage to the module and provide maximum information to maintenance personnel regarding the reason for tripping off-line. The load shall be automatically transferred to the bypass line uninterrupted for an internal UPS malfunction. The status of protective devices shall be indicated on a graphic display screen on the front of the unit. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Refer to Division 26 00 00 for related work and electrical coordination requirements. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be made in accordance with the requirements of Division 1, Section 26 00 00, the Contract Documents and as specified herein submit the following: MARCH 27, 2026 THREE-PHASE UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS) ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 2633 54- 1 MARYS CREEK WRF The manufacturers' names and product designation or catalog numbers for the types of materials specified or shown on the Drawings. B. All shop drawing submittals and all O&M submittals shall be submitted in accordance with the requirements listed in Division 1. No change in Contract Price or Schedule will be allowed for delays due to unacceptable submittals. C. Each Section submittal shall be complete, containing all the items listed in the Specification Section. Submittal shall include materials to which references are made in this section. 2. Submittals shall be made in accordance with the requirements of the process equipment division of these Specifications, and as specified herein. 3. Each submittal must stand alone and be complete containing all the items specified in this section. Referring to other sections alone is not acceptable. 4. Each submittal shall be fully bookmarked. Include each section and subsection in all descriptive literature submitted. a. Bookmarks shall be descriptive to enable the user to easily identify each section and subsection. b. Bookmark descriptive literature to facilitate navigation within descriptive literature. Bookmarking the title of descriptive literature alone is not acceptable. c. Check bookmarking to verify they are fully functional. Submittals missing bookmarking or having non-functional bookmarks are not acceptable. d. Submittals not bookmarked as specified are not acceptable. 5. All components cut sheets, descriptive literature and instruction manuals are required to be clearly marked. a. Tables and descriptive text in sales literature or technical descriptive literature, text and tables in instruction manuals describing applicable features shall be clearly marked to indicate which items are applicable on each page. b. Cut sheets, descriptive literature and instruction manuals without marking both tables and text listing features are not acceptable. c. Placing the component stock number at the top of the page does not relieve the requirement to mark each table, descriptive text or lists. THREE-PHASE UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS) MARCH 27, 2026 263354-2 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTAAND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY d. Mark out larger sections to indicate they are not included. 6. Submittals shall be checked, list any exceptions to the Specifications and/or Drawings, and shall include the reason for the exception. Shop drawings, not noted, are not acceptable. 7. All items listed in a specification section may not be provided by the subcontractor, (which includes a supplier, manufacturer, vendor, distributor, company or firm) the Contractor has selected to provide the equipment or work specified. Items specified in other sections to which the section refers shall be included. Referring to the items specified in this section stating they are submitted under another section is not acceptable. 8. When items are specified come from different sources, the following shall apply: a. If the item appears in a specification section it shall be included in the submittal regardless of who supplies the item or work. This included items specified in other sections to which the specification section refers. b. Items not supplied by the subcontractor responding to a specification section shall be added to the submittal by the Contactor prior to sending it to the Engineer for approval. c. Omitting a specified item from a submittal because a subcontractor does not provide it will be not acceptable. d. Submittals not containing all items specified in that section are partial submittals and are not acceptable. D. Resubmittals shall comply with the following requirements: Include a copy of the Engineer's comments with the Contractor's written response to each comment. 2. The resubmittal shall list any exceptions to the Engineer's comments, and the reason for such deviation. Shop drawings, not so checked, are not acceptable. 3. Each Section required to be resubmitted shall be complete, contain all the items listed in the Specification Section, and shall be clearly marked to indicate which items are applicable on each cut sheet page. 4. Resubmitted Sections shall contain all the pages previously submitted with additions, deletions or corrections as required by the Engineer. 5. Partial resubmittals responding only to the Engineer's comments are not acceptable. MARCH 27, 2026 THREE-PHASE UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS) ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 263354-3 MARYS CREEK WRF E. All items listed in the Specification Section may not be provided by the supplier, manufacturer or vendor of the equipment specified. The additional items listed shall be added to the submittal regardless of who supplies them. 2. The Contractor shall add the missing information regardless of the supplier, manufacturer or vendor stating that they do not manufacture or provide such items. Failure to add the missing items is a partial submittal which is not acceptable. 3. Submittals not containing all listed items will not be acceptable. F. Check shop drawings for accuracy and contract requirements prior to submittal to the Owner/Engineer. Errors and omissions on approved shop drawings shall not provide relief from the responsibility of providing materials and workmanship required by the Specifications and Drawings. 2. Shop drawings shall be stamped with the date checked and a statement indicating that the shop drawings conform to Specifications and Drawings. 3. Only one Specification Section may be made per transmittal. Submitting multiple specification sections in a single submittal will be rejected and returned without review. G. The original equipment manufacturer, (OEM) shall create all equipment shop drawings, including all wiring diagrams, in the manufacturer's Engineering department. All equipment shop drawings shall bear the original equipment manufacturers logo, drawing file numbers, and shall be maintained on file in the OEM's archive file system. Photocopies of the Engineer's ladder schematics are unacceptable as shop drawings. H. Submittals for equipment and materials, furnished under this Section of the Specifications, will not be accepted prior to approval of the Qualifications of the Study Engineer followed by the submission and approval of the Preliminary Short Circuit Study required in the Power System Study as specified in Section 26 05 73. Submittals for this equipment made prior to the Engineer's approvals are not acceptable. I. Time -current coordination curves for protective device relays, circuit breakers, and fuses submitted shall be included as a part of these submittals. J. Submit for approval the Contractor's certification of extended warranty in the shop drawing submitted to the Engineer for approval. THREE-PHASE UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS) MARCH 27, 2026 2633 54-4 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTAAND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRF K. The original equipment manufacturer (OEM) shall create all equipment shop drawings, including all wiring diagrams, in the manufacturer's Engineering department. All equipment shop drawings shall bear the original equipment manufacturers logo, drawing file numbers, and shall be maintained on file in the OEM's archive file system. Photocopies of the Engineer's ladder schematics are unacceptable as shop drawings. L. Submit for approval, a manufacturer's conducted training agenda for all training specified herein. Training agenda shall not be submitted until final approval of the Operation and Maintenance Manual. M. Submit to the Owner/Engineer, shop drawings and product data, for the following: 1. Descriptions of equipment, including deviations from these specifications. 2. Document stating compliance with FCC requirements. 3. Document stating listing to UL, including edition used for listing. 4. Document showing compliance with required SCCR and labeling. 5. System configuration with single -line diagrams. 6. Detailed layouts of customer power and control connections. 7. Functional relationship of equipment, including weights, dimensions, and heat dissipation. 8. Information to allow distribution system coordination. 9. Size and weight of shipping units. 10. Master drawing index 11. Front view elevation 12. Floor plan 13. Top view 14. Detailed installation drawings including all terminal locations. 15. Interconnect wiring diagrams showing conduit wiring with terminal numbers for each wire. 16. Schematic diagram 17. Nameplate schedule 18. Component list with detailed component information, including original manufacturer's part number. MARCH 27, 2026 THREE-PHASE UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS) ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 2633 54-5 MARYS CREEK WRF 19. Conduit entry/exit locations 20. Assembly ratings including: a. Short-circuit rating b. Voltage c. Continuous current 21. Major component ratings including: a. Voltage b. Continuous current c. Interrupting ratings 22. Descriptive bulletins 23. Product data sheets. 24. Number and size of cables per phase, neutral if present, ground and all cable terminal sizes. 25. Key interlock scheme drawing and sequence of operations N. Factory Tests. Submittals shall be made for factory tests specified herein. O. Field Test Reports. Submittals shall be made for field tests specified herein. P. Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 1. Two (2) sets of instruction manuals. Manuals shall include a functional description of the equipment, safety precautions, instructions, step-by-step operating procedures, and routine maintenance guidelines, including illustrations. 2. Operation and maintenance manuals shall also include the following information: a. Manufacturer's contact address and telephone number for parts and service. b. Recommended renewal parts list c. Record Documents for the information required by the Submittals paragraph above. d. Include the following: 1) Component list / bill of material including part numbers. THREE-PHASE UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS) MARCH 27, 2026 263354-6 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTAAND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY 2) Marked product data and catalog cut sheets. 3) Performance specifications / equipment ratings. 4) Factory drawings and schematics. 5) Trip curves for breakers and fuses 6) Specified certifications. 7) Factory test reports 8) Field test reports. 1.04 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. The UPS assembly and all components in this specification shall be designed and manufactured according to latest revision of the following standards (unless otherwise noted): 1. NFPA 70 — National Electrical Code (NEC) 2. NFPA 70E — Standard For Electrical Safety in the Workplace 3. ASME 4. CSA 22.2, No. 107.1 5. FCC Part 15, Class A 6. IEC 1000-4-5 7. ISO 9001 8. NEMA PE -1 9. OSHA 10. UL Standard 1778 11. Batteries shall pass UL 9540A fire test 12. NEMA ICS 6 - Industrial Control and Systems Enclosures 13. The UPS shall comply with FCC Rules and Regulations, Part 15, Subclass B, Class A. This compliance is legally required to prevent interference with adjacent equipment. The UPS shall have a label stating FCC compliance. The manufacturer shall provide evidence and test data of compliance upon request. 14. The UPS classification shall be VFI-SS-111 per the criteria in IEC EN62040-3. MARCH 27, 2026 THREE-PHASE UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS) ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 263354-7 MARYS CREEK WRF 15. The UPS shall comply with the Energy Star® program requirements for Uninterruptible Power Supplies (UPSs) — eligibility criteria, version 2.0. 16. The UPS and matching Battery Cabinets shall be seismically certified in accordance with the 2015 International Building Code (IBC), 2016 California Building Code (CBC), and American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) Minimum Design Loads, with seismic performance of Sds=1.93, Ip=1.5 and z/h=1.0. Optional seismic brackets shall be available from the UPS manufacturer for use in compliance with this certification. B. All equipment components and completed assemblies specified in this Section of the Specifications shall bear the appropriate label of Underwriters Laboratories. C. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar equipment for a minimum period of five years. When requested by the Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement. B. The manufacturer of the assembly shall be the manufacturer of the major components within the assembly. All assemblies shall be of the same manufacturer. Equipment that is manufactured by a third party and "brand labeled" shall not be acceptable. C. All components and material shall be new and of the latest field proven design and in current production. Obsolete components or components scheduled for immediate discontinuation shall not be used. D. Equipment submitted shall fit within the space shown on the Drawings. Equipment which does not fit within the space is not acceptable. E. For the equipment specified herein, the manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 2000 certified. F. Equipment submitted shall fit within the space shown on the Drawings. Equipment which does not fit within the space is not acceptable. 1.06 JOBSITE DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Prior to jobsite delivery, complete all submittal requirements, and present to the Owner/Engineer upon delivery of the equipment, an approved copy of all such THREE-PHASE UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS) MARCH 27, 2026 2633 54-8 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTAAND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRF submittals. Delivery of incomplete constructed equipment, or equipment which failed any factory tests, will not be permitted. B. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Two copies of these instructions shall be included with the equipment at the time of shipment and shall be made available to the Contractor and Owner. C. The instructions shall include the following: Detailed assembly instructions include but not limited to wiring interconnection diagrams. 2. Rigging for lifting, skidding, jacking, and moving using rolling equipment to place the equipment. 3. Bolt torquing requirements for bus and all other components which require the installation of bolted connections. 4. Instructions for storing the equipment prior to energizing. D. Shipping groups shall be designed to be shipped by truck, rail, or ship. Indoor groups shall be bolted to skids. Breakers and accessories shall be packaged and shipped separately. E. Equipment shall be equipped to be handled by crane. Where cranes are not available, equipment shall be suitable for skidding in place on rollers using jacks to raise and lower the groups. F. Equipment must be installed in its permanent finished location shown on the Drawings within seven calendar days of arriving onsite. If the equipment cannot be installed within seven calendar days, the equipment shall not be delivered to the site, but stored offsite, until such time that the site is ready for permanent installation of the equipment with no change in the Contract Price or Schedule. Payment will not be approved for equipment stored off site. G. Where space heaters are provided in equipment, provide temporary electrical power and operate space heaters during jobsite storage, and after equipment is installed in permanent location, until equipment is placed in service. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Provide warranties, including the manufacturer's warranty, to be free from defects in material and workmanship from date of delivery, for the equipment specified. Provide additional warranty time to extend the manufacturer's warranty from the date of delivery for the proper installation thereof, to be free from defects in MARCH 27, 2026 THREE-PHASE UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS) ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 2633 54-9 MARYS CREEK WRF material and workmanship for a total time of two years from date of final acceptance of the equipment and its installation. B. Include the Contractor's certification of extended warranty in the shop drawing submitted to the Engineer for approval. Omission of the Contractor's certification will cause the submittal to be rejected and returned for revision. C. There shall be 365/24 support available via a toll -free phone number, with 20 -minute response on all issues. D. Within such period of warranty, all material and labor necessary to return the equipment to new operating condition shall be provided. Any warranty work requiring shipping or transporting of the equipment shall be provided at no expense to the Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable: 1. APC by Schneider Electric 2. Eaton 3. Liebert 4. Approved equal. B. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. 2.02 RATINGS A. General 1. The UPSs described in this specification shall be designed for operation on the voltage systems as shown on the Drawings. 2. The equipment and protective devices shall be fully rated for a short circuit current of 22,000 rms symmetrical amperes (minimum) or greater if shown on the Drawings. Systems employing series connected ratings shall not be used. THREE-PHASE UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS) MARCH 27, 2026 2633 54- 10 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTAAND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY 3. The solid-state power components, magnetics, electronic devices and overcurrent protection devices shall operate within the manufacturer's recommended temperature when the UPS is operating at 100% critical load and maintain battery charging under the following conditions: B. Environmental 1. The UPS shall be able to withstand the following environmental conditions without damage or degradation of operating characteristics: a. Operating Ambient Temperature 1) UPS Module: 32°F to 104°F (0°C to 40°C). 2) Battery: 77°F ±9°F (25°C ±5°C). b. Storage/Transport Ambient Temperature 1) UPS Module: -4°F to 158°F (-20°C to 70°C) 2) Battery: -4°F to 92°F (-20°C to 33°C). c. Relative Humidity 1) 0 to 95%, non -condensing. d. Altitude 1) Operating: to 3300 feet (1000 meters) above Mean Sea Level. Derated for higher altitude applications. 2) Storage/Transport: to 40,000 feet (12,200 meters) above Mean Sea Level. C. Noise generated by the UPS under any condition of normal operation shall not exceed the following: Audible Noise Level Unit Size Noise/Load, dB 100% Load 50% Load 30-50kVA 63.2 60.5 75-100kVA 66.1 62 125- 150kVA 67.1 62.9 MARCH 27, 2026 THREE-PHASE UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS) ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 26 33 54 - 11 MARYS CREEK WRF 175- 68.5 63.4 200kVA 225- 68.7 63.8 250kVA Measured 4.6 ft. (1.4m) from the surface of the unit. D. Input I. Voltage: Input/outputvoltage specifications of the UPS shalccll eVoltage: Input/Output voltage specifications of the UPS shall be; a. Rectifier AC Input! 480V,three phase,threeplus ground Rectifier AC Input: 208V, three-phase, four -wire -plus -ground b. n C Input: > reo Bypass �--put�480V�t��-p three wire eunaa Bypass AC Input: 208V, three-phase, four -wire -plus -ground AC C Output: 480V, t� v three a C. z-r�vucp'u�three phase, wire plus ground AC Output: 208V, three-phase, four -wire -plus -ground 2. Voltage Configuration, as shown on the Drawings. 3. Voltage Range: +20%, -15% at full load; -40% at half load 4. Frequency range: 40 - 70Hz 5. Power Factor: Up to 0.99 lagging at nominal input voltage and full rated UPS output load. 6. Inrush Current: UPS inrush current not to exceed 1.5 times rated input current 7. Current Limit: 125% of nominal AC input current maximum. 8. Input Current Walk -In: The UPS shall contain a controlled module walk-in to minimize inrush current upon auto -restart. The module walk-in is programmable for a 1 to 5 second delay. 9. Current Distortion: Less than or equal to 5% input current THDi at full load input current in double -conversion mode (nominal input voltage, <1% input voltage THDv, and <1% input voltage imbalance) 10. Surge Protection: Withstands input surges of 4kV (Line to ground) without damage as per criteria listed in EN 61000-4-5: 1995 E. Output THREE-PHASE UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS) MARCH 27, 2026 263354-12 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTAAND ASSOCIATES, INC. 0 MARYS CREEK WRY 1. Load Rating: 100% of load rating at 104°F (40°C) for any load from 0.5 lagging to 0.9 leading 2. Voltage Configuration: As shown on the Drawings. 3. Voltage Regulation: a. ±l% three-phase RMS average for a balanced three-phase load for the combined variation effects of input voltage, connected load, battery voltage, ambient temperature, and load power factor. b. ±2% three-phase RMS average for a 100% unbalanced load for the combined variation effects of input voltage, connected load, battery voltage, ambient temperature, and load power factor. 4. Voltage Adjustment Range: ±5% for line drop compensation adjustable by factory service personnel 5. Frequency: Nominal frequency ±0.1%. 6. Frequency Regulation: Synchronized to bypass: ±2.0Hz default setting, (adjustable by factory service personnel) 7. Bypass Frequency Synchronization Range: ±0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 3.0 Hz, adjustable by factory service personnel, ±2.0 Hz default setting 8. Frequency Slew Rate: 1.0 Hertz per second maximum. Field selectable from 0.1 to 1.0 Hz per second. 9. Phase Displacement: a. ±0.5 degree for balanced load, b. ±1.0 degrees for 100% unbalanced load. 10. Bypass Line Sync Range: a. ±0.5 Hertz, b. Field selectable ±0.5 to 5.0 Hz. 11. Voltage Distortion: a. 1% total harmonic distortion (THD) for linear loads. b. <4% THD for 100% nonlinear loads (3:1 crest factor) without kVA/kW derating. 12. Load Power Factor Range: 0.7 lagging to 0.95 leading without derating. 13. Output Power Rating: Rated kVA at 0.8 lagging power factor. 14. Overload Capability: MARCH 27, 2026 THREE-PHASE UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS) ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 263354-13 MARYS CREEK WRF a. 125% for ten minutes (without bypass source). b. 150% for one minute (without bypass source). 15. Inverter Output Voltage Adjustment: ±5% manual adjustment. 16. Voltage Transient Response: a. 100% load step ±4.0%. b. Loss or return of AC input power ±1.0%. c. Manual transfer of 100% load ±3.0%. 17. Transient Recovery Time: to within 1% of output voltage within one cycle. 18. Voltage Unbalance: 100% unbalanced load ±1%. 19. Battery a. Battery Cells: Sealed, lead -acid, valve -regulated. b. Reserve Time: 30 minutes at full load, 0.8 power factor, with ambient temperature of 25°C. 20. Recharge Time: to 95% capacity within ten times discharge time. F. System Efficiency (defined as output kW/input kW at rated lagging load power factor; and up to values listed below 30kVA ): kVA Rating Maximum Efficiency 30 96.6% 2.03 MODES OF OPERATION A. The UPS shall be designed to operate as an on-line, double -conversion, reverse - transfer system in the following modes: 1. Normal - The critical AC load is continuously supplied by the UPS inverter. The rectifier/charger derives power from a utility AC source and supplies DC power to the inverter while simultaneously float -charging the reserve battery. 2. Emergency - Upon failure of utility AC power, the critical AC load is supplied by the inverter, which, without any switching, obtains power from the battery. There shall be no interruption in power to the critical load upon failure or restoration of the utility AC source. THREE-PHASE UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS) MARCH 27, 2026 263354-14 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTAAND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY 3. Recharge - Upon restoration of utility AC power, after a utility AC power outage, the rectifier/charger shall automatically restart, walk-in, and gradually assume the inverter and battery recharge loads. 4. Bypass - If the UPS must be taken out of service for maintenance or repair, or should the inverter overload capacity be exceeded, the static transfer switch shall perform a reverse transfer of the load from the inverter to the bypass source with no interruption in power to the critical AC load. 2.04 CONSTRUCTION A. General 1. Refer to Drawings for actual layout and location of equipment and components. 2. Furnish nameplates for each device as indicated on the Drawings. All nameplates shall be laminated plastic, black lettering on a white background, attached with stainless steel screws. There shall be a master nameplate that indicates equipment ratings, manufacturer's name, shop order number and general information. 3. The UPS unit, comprised of an input circuit breaker, rectifier/charger, inverter, static transfer switch and maintenance bypass switch, shall be housed in a single free-standing NEMA type 12 enclosure. Cabinet doors/covers shall require a tool for gaining access. Casters and stops shall be provided for ease of installation. Front access only shall be required for expedient servicing and adjustments. The UPS cabinet shall be structurally adequate and have structural points labeled to indicate the intended points for hoisting, jacking, and forklift handling. 4. The UPS shall be furnished with a sign marked "DANGER (XXX) VOLTS KEEP OUT". Letters shall be not less than 1 inch high, 1/4 -inch stroke. Sign shall be laminated plastic with black letters on a white background, fastened by 316 stainless steel screws and OSHA approved. 5. The UPS shall consist of the required number of vertical sections bolted together to form a rigid assembly. The sides and rear shall be covered with removable bolt -on covers. All edges of front covers or hinged front panels shall be formed. Provide adequate ventilation within the enclosure. 6. All sections of the UPS shall be front, and rear aligned with depth as shown on the Drawings. Devices shall be front removable only. and load connections shall be front and rear accessible. 7. Where UPSs are shown installed against a wall or other location where the UPS does not have rear access, all sections of the UPS shall be rear aligned MARCH 27, 2026 THREE-PHASE UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS) ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTAAND ASSOCIATES, INC. 26 33 54 - 15 MARYS CREEK WRF with depth as shown on the Drawings. Devices shall be front removable and load connections front accessible. 8. The assembly shall be provided with adequate lifting means. 9. The UPS shall be arranged so that the uppermost operating handle shall not exceed 6 -feet -6 -inches from the floor when the unit is mounted on a 4 -inch high equipment pad. B. Enclosures Indoor enclosures shall be indoor NEMA 12, freestanding, metal enclosed assemblies, consisting of dead front, completely metal enclosed vertical sections. 2. The UPS cabinet shall be cleaned, primed, and painted with the manufacturer's standard color. The UPS shall be constructed of replaceable subassemblies. Printed circuit assemblies shall be plug connections. Like assemblies and like components shall be interchangeable. 3. Cooling of the UPS shall be by forced air. Low -velocity fans shall be used to minimize audible noise output. Fan power shall be provided by the UPS output. There shall be redundant fans. 4. The thermal design, along with all thermal and ambient sensors, shall be coordinated with the protective devices before excessive component or internal cabinet temperatures are exceeded. 5. Where UPSs are shown outdoors, enclosure shall be NEMA 12, enclosed in a non -walk-in outer enclosure, meeting applicable NEMA 3R requirements of UL. a. End sections shall be the same widths as other sections, except each end of the outer section shall have an end trim. b. The enclosure shall be provided with bolt -on rear covers for each section. c. Doors shall be pad lockable. d. Each cubicle bay shall be supported on a heavy gauge, welded steel channel base extending around all four sides, constructed to exclude rodents, vermin, and dust. Apply a non-flammable undercoating to the base and to the underside of the cubicle floor plates. e. Roof structure shall be watertight with a continuous drip edge channel on the front. Roof shall slope to the rear for water drainage. Apply a non-flammable, non -disintegrating, insulating compound to the THREE-PHASE UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS) MARCH 27, 2026 263354-16 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTAAND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY underside of the roof to prevent moisture condensation. Holes for lifting eyes shall be blind tapped. f. Provide tamper resistant, pad lockable, weathertight, gasketed cubicle doors and switch handle covers, with stainless steel hinge pins. g. Raintight, corrosion resistant ventilation louvers shall provide air circulation within the structure, while excluding insects, vermin, dust and sand. h. Each cubicle shall have heavy duty, 240 VAC, space heaters, thermostat controlled, of sufficient capacity to prevent condensation with the equipment de -energized, while operating at half their rated voltage. Heaters shall be provided with perforated metal guards and a circuit breaker disconnect. Provision shall be made for a externally powered 120 Volt circuit. i. Each cubicle shall have an exhaust fan, thermostatically controlled, for heat dissipation. j. The switch compartment shall contain barriered compartments for incoming and outgoing cables, All cables shall enter and exit underground from the bottom of the cubicle as shown on the Drawings. k. Ventilating openings shall be provided, complete with replaceable fiber glass air filters. 2.05 COMPONENTS A. Rectifier/Charger 1. General a. The term rectifier/charger shall denote the solid-state equipment and controls necessary to convert incoming AC power to regulated DC power for input to the inverter and for battery charging. b. The rectifier/charger shall be a solid-state SCR/IGBT type with constant voltage/current limiting control circuitry. c. The DC output of the rectifier shall meet the input requirements of the inverter without the battery being connected. 2. AC Input Current Limiting a. The rectifier/charger unit shall be provided with AC input current limiting whereby the maximum input current shall be limited to 125% of the full input current rating. MARCH 27, 2026 THREE-PHASE UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS) ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 263354-17 MARYS CREEK WRF b. The rectifier/charger shall operate at a reduced current limit mode whenever the critical load is powered from the UPS static bypass circuit such that the maximum UPS input current will not exceed 125% of full load input current. c. The rectifier/charger shall have a battery current limit, adjustable from 0 to 25% of the full load input current. d. Input Current Harmonic Distortion: 1) Actively control and reduce input current distortion over the full operating range of the UPS without the need for an additional passive input filter. 2) Input current THD shall be less than 5% at rated load and nominal voltage in double -conversion mode. e. Dynamic Current Input Limit Reduction: 1) Adjust the current demanded for battery charging as a function of UPS wattage load and input voltage level. 3. DC -DC Converter a. The term DC -DC converter includes the equipment and controls to regulate the output of the rectifier to the levels appropriate for charging the battery and to boost the battery voltage to the level required to operate the inverter. b. Provide a solid-state DC -DC converter, capable of providing rated output power and, for increased performance. c. Provide a pulse width -modulated design and shall utilize insulated gate bipolar transistors (IGBTs). d. The DC -DC converter shall control charging of the battery. e. The AC ripple voltage of the charger DC shall not exceed 1% RMS of the float voltage. f. Battery Equalize Charge: 1) A manually initiated equalize charge feature shall be provided to apply an equalize voltage to the battery. 2) The duration of equalize charge time shall be adjustable from 8 to 30 hours. A method shall be available to deactivate this feature for valve regulated battery systems. g. Stop Battery Charging Function THREE-PHASE UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS) MARCH 27, 2026 263354-18 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTAAND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY 1) Battery charging maybe stopped by a shunt trip of the battery cabinet breaker when overtemperature is sensed in the battery cabinet, on generator or when environmental contact is closed. h. Overvoltage Protection 1) Provide a DC overvoltage protection so that if the DC voltage rises to the pre-set limit, the UPS shall shut down automatically and initiate an uninterrupted load transfer to bypass or shall disconnect the battery via the DC breaker(s) in the battery string. i. Temperature -Compensated Charging 1) The UPS shall adjust the battery charging voltage based on the battery temperature reported from external battery temperature sensors. 2) When multiple sensors are used, the voltage shall be based on the average temperature measured. 3) Excessive difference in the temperature measurements shall be reported and the charging voltage adjusted to protect the batteries from excessive current. j. Battery Load Testing 1) The UPS shall be capable of performing battery load testing under operator supervision. 2) To accomplish this, the rectifier shall reduce charging voltage to force the batteries to carry the load for a short time. 3) If the curve of battery voltage drop indicates diminished battery capacity, the UPS shall display an alarm message. 4) If the voltage drop indicates battery failure, the UPS shall terminate the test immediately and annunciate the appropriate alarms. 4. Input Current Walk -In a. The rectifier/charger shall contain a timed walk-in circuit that causes the unit to gradually assume the load over a 20 -second time interval after input voltage is applied. Walk-in time shall be field selectable for 5 through 20 seconds 5. DC Filter MARCH 27, 2026 THREE-PHASE UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS) ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 263354-19 MARYS CREEK WRF a. The rectifier/charger shall have a filter to minimize ripple voltage into the battery. Under no conditions shall ripple voltage into the battery exceed 1% RMS. b. The filter shall be adequate to ensure that the DC output of the rectifier/charger will meet the input requirements of the inverter. c. The inverter shall be able to operate from the rectifier/charger with the battery disconnected. 6. Automatic Rectifier Restart a. Upon restoration of utility AC power, after a utility AC power outage and prior to a UPS automatic end -of -discharge shutdown, the rectifier/charger shall automatically restart, walk-in, and gradually assume the inverter and battery recharge loads. 7. Battery Recharge a. In addition to supplying power for the inverter load, the rectifier/charger shall be capable of producing battery charging current sufficient to replace 95% of the battery discharge power within ten times the discharge time. b. After the battery is recharged, the rectifier/charger shall maintain the battery at full charge until the next emergency operation. 8. Overvoltage Protection a. There shall be DC over -voltage protection so that if the DC voltage rises to the pre-set limit, the UPS is to shut down automatically and initiate an uninterrupted load transfer to the static bypass line. B. Inverter General a. The term inverter shall denote the equipment and controls to convert direct current from the rectifier or battery via the DC -DC converter to precise alternating current to power the load. b. The inverter shall be solid-state, capable of providing rated output power and, for increased performance, the inverter shall be a pulse - width -modulated design and shall utilize insulated gate bipolar transistors (IGBTs). c. To further enhance reliable performance and efficiency, the inverter shall not require an inverter output series static switch/isolator for the purposes of overload or fault isolation or transfers to bypass. THREE-PHASE UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS) MARCH 27, 2026 263354-20 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTAAND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY 2. Overload Capability a. Overload Capability - 1) The inverter shall be able to withstand an overload across its output terminals while supplying full rated voltage of up to 150% for 60 seconds. 2) The inverter shall be capable of at least 170% current for short- circuit conditions including phase -to -phase, phase -to -ground, and three-phase faults. 3) After the fault is removed, the UPS shall return to normal operation without damage. 4) If the short circuit is sustained, the load shall be transferred to the bypass source and the inverter shall disconnect automatically from the critical load bus. b. Output Frequency 1) The inverter shall track the bypass continuously, providing the bypass source maintains a frequency of 60Hz +1% (0.6 Hz). c. Phase -to -Phase Balance 1) The inverter shall provide a phase -to -phase voltage displacement of no worse than ±3% with a 100% unbalanced load. d. Inverter Fault Sensing and Isolation 1) The UPS shall be provided with a means to detect a malfunctioning inverter and isolate it from the critical load bus to prevent disturbance of the critical load voltage beyond the specified limits. e. Battery Protection 1) The inverter shall be provided with monitoring and control circuits to protect the battery system from damage due to excessive discharge. Inverter shutdown shall be initiated when the battery voltage has reached the end of discharge voltage. 2) The battery end -of -discharge voltage shall be calculated and automatically adjusted for partial load conditions to allow extended operation without damaging the battery. MARCH 27, 2026 THREE-PHASE UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS) ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 263354-21 MARYS CREEK WRF 3) Automatic shutdown based on discharge time shall not be acceptable. 3. Fault Clearing and Current Limit a. The inverter shall be capable of supplying an overload current of 150% of its full -load rating for one minute. b. For greater currents or longer time duration, the inverter shall have electronic current -limiting protection to prevent damage to components. c. The critical load will be transferred to the static bypass automatically and uninterrupted. d. The inverter shall be self -protecting against any magnitude of connected output overload. Inverter control logic shall sense and disconnect the inverter from the critical AC load without the requirement to clear protective fuses. 4. Step Load Response a. The output voltage shall be maintained to within ±4% with a 0 -to - 100% step load change or a 100% -to -0 step load change. b. The output voltage shall recover to within 1% of nominal voltage within one cycle. 5. Voltage Distortion a. For linear loads, the output voltage total harmonic distortion (THD) shall not be greater than 1%. b. For 100% rated load of 3:1 crest factor nonlinear load, the output voltage total harmonic distortion shall not be greater than 4%. c. The output rating is not to be derated in kVA nor kW due to the 100% nonlinear load with 3:1 crest factor. 6. Phase Balance a. Electronic controls shall be provided to regulate each phase so that an unbalanced loading will not cause the output voltage to go outside the specified voltage unbalance or phase displacement. b. With 100% load on one phase and 0% load on the other two phases or 100% load on two phases and 0% load on the other phase, the voltage balance is to be within 2% and the phase displacement is to be 120 degrees within +-1 degree. THREE-PHASE UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS) MARCH 27, 2026 263354-22 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTAAND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRF 7. Fuse Failure Protection a. Power semiconductors in the inverter unit shall be fused with fast - acting fuses, so that loss of any one power semiconductor will not cause cascading failures. 8. Inverter Shutdown a. For rapid removal of the inverter from the critical load, the inverter control electronics shall instantaneously turn off the inverter transistors. Simultaneously, the static transfer switch shall be turned on to maintain continuous power to the critical load. 9. Inverter DC Protection a. The inverter shall be protected by the following disconnect levels: 1) DC Overvoltage Shutdown 2) DC Undervoltage Warning (Low Battery Reserve), adjustable 3) DC Undervoltage Shutdown (End of Discharge) 10. Inverter Output Voltage Adjustment a. The inverter shall use a software control to adjust the output voltage within 5% of the nominal value. 11. Output Frequency a. The output frequency of the inverter shall be controlled by an oscillator. b. The oscillator shall be temperature compensated and hold the inverter output frequency to within 0.1% for steady state and transient conditions. c. Drift shall not exceed 0.1% during a 24 -hour period. d. Total frequency deviation, including short time fluctuations and drift, shall not exceed 0.1% from the rated frequency. C. Inverter Bypass Operation 1. When maintenance is required or when the inverter cannot maintain voltage to the load due to sustained overload or malfunction, a bypass circuit shall be provided to isolate the inverter output from the load and provide a path for power directly from an alternate AC (bypass) source. a. The UPS control system shall constantly monitor the availability of the inverter bypass circuit to perform a transfer. MARCH 27, 2026 THREE-PHASE UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS) ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 263354-23 MARYS CREEK WRF b. The inverter bypass circuit shall consist of a continuous duty bypass static switch and an overcurrent protection device to isolate the static bypass switch from the bypass utility source. c. The bypass static switch shall denote the solid-state device incorporating SCRs (silicon -controlled rectifiers) that can automatically and instantaneously connect the alternate AC source to the load. 2. Static Bypass Switch Rating a. The static bypass switch shall be rated for continuous duty operation at full rated load for highest reliability without the use of mechanical devices, such as those used with a momentary rated device. 3. Manual Load Transfers a. A manual load transfer between the inverter output and the alternate AC source shall be initiated from the control panel. b. Manually initiated transfers shall be make -before -break, utilizing the inverter and the bypass static switch. 4. Automatic Load Transfers a. An automatic load transfer between the inverter output and the alternate AC source shall be initiated if an overload condition is sustained for a period more than the inverter output capability or due to a malfunction that would affect the output voltage. b. Transfers caused by overloads shall initiate an automatic retransfer of the load to the inverter only after the load has returned to a level within the rating of the inverter source and the alarm has been acknowledged. 5. Back -Feed Protection a. As required by UL1778 and CSA, the static transfer switch shall not back -feed UPS power to the bypass distribution system while the UPS is operating on battery during a bypass power outage. b. The purpose of this requirement is to prevent the risk of electrical shock on the distribution system when the normal source of power is disconnected or has failed. c. If a shorted SCR is detected, the static transfer switch shall be isolated by automatically tripping the upstream bypass circuit breaker and an alarm message shall be annunciated at the UPS control panel. THREE-PHASE UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS) MARCH 27, 2026 263354-24 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTAAND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY d. The load shall remain on conditioned and protected power after detection of a shorted SCR and isolation of the bypass static switch. 6. Active ECO-Mode a. When selected, this mode of operation shall transfer the load to the bypass source and maintain it there if the bypass source frequency, slew rate and voltage are within the adjusted operating parameters. b. While in this mode, the inverter shall remain operating to be able to instantaneously assume the load without interrupting the output voltage. c. Should the bypass source go outside the adjusted limits, the bypass static switch shall turn Off, isolating the load from the bypass while the inverter assumes the full critical load. d. The load shall be transferred from the bypass source to the inverter while maintaining the output voltage within the ITIC and CBEMA curves. D. Maintenance Bypass Cabinet The UPS system shall incorporate a matching cabinet to house a wraparound maintenance bypass with the following features: a. 3 breakers for complete electrical isolation of the UPS with system voltage of 208Y/120VAC, 3W+Gnd input/output only, no integral output distribution b. Kirk Key Interlock interface with Solenoid Key Release Unit (SKRU) E. Battery System The battery system shall consist of lithium -ion batteries, circuit breaker for isolating the battery rack from the UPS and control interface to the UPS module. 2. Circuit breaker: a. The circuit breaker shall be sized to allow discharge at the maximum published rating of the battery. b. A single interface between the lithium -ion battery racks and the UPS module shall provide status and control of the battery cabinet's internal breaker. 3. Battery MARCH 27, 2026 THREE-PHASE UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS) ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 263354-25 MARYS CREEK WRF a. The UPS system shall be provided with the Samsung SDI UL 9540A version of lithium -ion battery cabinets or equal. The battery shall be Samsung 67Ah 8SIP (lithium magnesium oxide/lithium nickel manganese cobalt oxide) or equal with a ten (10) - year warranty for battery capacity under full float operation and a three (3) - year warranty to be free from defects in design, materials & workmanship. b. The lithium -ion battery systems shall have successfully completed a UL 9540A fire test. c. The battery shall be fully charged per the manufacturer's instructions during startup and shall demonstrate the specified operating time. 4. Battery rack a. The battery rack shall be rated NEMA 2 with front door, side covers and rear cover and shall be suitable for installation in a limited -access area. b. Overhead -installed cabling shall be accommodated. c. Provide the battery rack with a conduit box sized to accommodate terminals sufficient for two -hole, long -barrel compression lugs. d. Provide lugs, terminators, etc. in accordance with Section 26 05. e. Cable installation shall not require removal of batteries or any other battery rack assemblies. f. Provide all cabling necessary to interconnect the UPS and the battery cabinets. g. Size to support a kW lead for minutes Size to support the rated kW load for 30 minutes. 8 h. Provide 100% initial capacity upon delivery. 5. Battery System Monitor: a. Provide an integrated battery monitoring system that provides battery safety and on-line remote monitoring. The system shall include system, rack and battery module monitoring of these battery parameters: 1) Individual cell voltage 2) Individual cell temperature 3) Cell balance per battery module 4) Rack voltage THREE-PHASE UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS) MARCH 27, 2026 263354-26 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTAAND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY 5) Rack average cell voltage 6) Rack current Rack average cell temperature 7) Rack state of health Rack state of charge 8) Rack major and minor alarms 9) Rack disconnect position 10) System average state of charge 11) System major and minor alarms (also reported to the UPS) 12) Data from the battery system monitor shall be viewed through an Ethernet port with TCP/P/Modbus. F. Display and Controls 1. Monitoring and Control a. Provide a microprocessor -based unit status display and controls section designed for convenient and reliable user operation. 1) A graphical display shall be used to show a single -line diagram of the UPS and shall be provided as part of the monitoring and controls sections of the UPS. 2) All the operator controls and monitors shall be located on the front of the UPS cabinet where it can be operated without opening the hinged front door. 3) A backlit, menu -driven, full -graphics, color touchscreen liquid crystal display shall be used to display system information, metering information, a one -line diagram of the UPS and battery, active events, and event history. 4) No mechanical push buttons shall be used. b. Logic 1) UPS system logic and control programming shall reside in a microprocessor -based control system with nonvolatile flash memory. 2) Rectifier, inverter and system control logic shall utilize high- speed digital signal processors (DSPs). MARCH 27, 2026 THREE-PHASE UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS) ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 263354-27 MARYS CREEK WRF 3) CAN bus shall be used to communicate between the logic and the User Interface as well as the options. 4) Switches, contacts and relays shall be used only to signal the logic system as to the status of mechanical devices or to signal user control inputs. 5) Customer external signals shall be isolated from the UPS logic by relays or optical isolation. c. Additional features of the monitoring system shall include: 1) Communication Card a) A communication card shall provide Web -based UPS monitoring and management capabilities and one or two of the following remote monitoring protocols: SNMP (vi, v2, v3), Modbus or OPC for remote monitoring. b) Relay Contact Card c) A relay contact card shall provide output dry contact signals communicating the following UPS states: Summary Alarm, Bypass Active (On Bypass), Low Battery, AC Input Failure (UPS Fault) and On UPS. d. The following monitoring functions shall be displayed: 1) Menu -driven display with pushbutton navigation 2) Real time clock (time and date) 3) Alarm history with time and date stamp 4) Battery backed -up memory 5) Power Flow Indications a) A power flow diagram shall graphically depict whether the load is being supplied from the inverter, bypass or battery and shall provide, on the same screen, the status of the following components: b) AC Input Circuit Breaker status c) Battery Circuit Breaker status THREE-PHASE UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS) MARCH 27, 2026 263354-28 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTAAND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY (1) Each breaker connection of complete battery complement, complete disconnection, and partial connection (one or more, but not all breakers open.) d) Maintenance Bypass Status 2. Metering a. The following parameters shall be displayed: 1) Input AC voltage line -to -line 2) Input AC current for each phase 3) Input frequency 4) Battery voltage 5) Battery charge/discharge current 6) Output AC voltage line -to -line and line -to -neutral for each phase 7) Output AC current for each phase 8) Output frequency 9) Apparent power 10) Active power 11) Battery time left during battery operation 3. Alarm Messages a. The following alarm messages shall be displayed: 1) Input power out of tolerance 2) Battery charger problem 3) Battery failed test 4) Low battery warning 5) Low battery shutdown 6) DC bus overvoltage 7) Bypass frequency out of range 8) Load transferred to bypass MARCH 27, 2026 THREE-PHASE UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS) ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 263354-29 MARYS CREEK WRF 9) Excessive retransfers attempted 10) Static switch failure 11) UPS output not synchronized to bypass power 12) Output undervoltage 13) Output overvoltage 14) Output overcurrent 15) System output overloaded 16) Load transferred to bypass due to overload 17) Overload shutdown 18) Control error 19) Critical power supply failure 20) Load transferred due to internal protection 21) External shutdown (remote EPO activated) 22) Fan failure 23) Overtemperature shutdown impending 24) Overtemperature shutdown b. An audible alarm shall be provided and activated by any of the above alarm conditions. 4. Status Messages a. The following UPS status messages shall be displayed: 1) Normal operation 2) Load on maintenance bypass 3) Load on UPS 4) Load on static bypass 5) System shutdown 6) UPS on battery 5. Controls a. Pushbuttons: THREE-PHASE UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS) MARCH 27, 2026 263354-30 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTAAND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY 1) Provide front panel pushbuttons for UPS start-up, shutdown, and maintenance bypass operations. 2) Provide pushbuttons for test and reset of visual and audible alarms. b. Indicating lights: 1) Provide indicating to display the status of the UPS (On, Off, Fail, Bypass, etc). c. HMI display 1) Menu driven to guide operators without needing additional manual. 2) Mimic screen displaying a one -line diagram that shows switch positions and power flow. 3) Status displays 4) Alarm displays 5) Battery status 6) Voltage, current and power 6. On -Line Battery Test a. Provide a menu -driven On -Line Battery Test feature. b. The test shall ensure the capability of the battery to supply power to the inverter while the load is supplied power in the normal mode. G. Static Transfer Switch 1. General a. Provide a static transfer switch and bypass circuit integral to the UPS. b. The static switch shall be a naturally commutated high-speed static (SCR -type) device rated to conduct full load current continuously. c. The switch shall have an overload rating to clear a 20 -ampere load branch circuit breaker. 2. Automatic transfer controls a. Provide an automatic transfer control circuit that senses the status of the inverter logic signals and operating and alarm conditions. MARCH 27, 2026 THREE-PHASE UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS) ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTAAND ASSOCIATES, INC. 263354-31 MARYS CREEK WRF b. The control circuit shall provide an uninterrupted transfer of the load to an alternate bypass source, without exceeding the transient limits specified herein, when an overload or malfunction occurs within the UPS, or for bypassing the UPS for maintenance. 3. Uninterrupted Transfer a. The transfer control logic shall automatically turn on the static transfer switch, transferring the critical AC load to the bypass source, after the transfer logic senses any of the following conditions: 1) Inverter overload capacity exceeded 2) Critical AC load overvoltage or undervoltage 3) Battery protection period expired 4) UPS fault condition b. The transfer control logic shall inhibit an automatic transfer of the critical load to the bypass source if any of the following conditions are present: 1) Inverter/bypass voltage difference exceeding preset limits 2) Bypass frequency out of limits 3) Bypass out -of -synchronization range with inverter output 4. Uninterrupted Retransfer a. Retransfer of the critical AC load from the bypass source to the inverter output shall be automatically initiated unless inhibited by manual control. The transfer control logic shall inhibit an automatic retransfer of the critical load to the inverter if one of the following conditions exists: 1) Bypass out of synchronization range with inverter output 2) Inverter/bypass voltage difference exceeding preset limits 3) Overload condition exists in excess of inverter full load rating 4) UPS fault condition present H. Maintenance Bypass Switch 1. General a. A manually operated maintenance bypass switch shall be incorporated into the UPS cabinet to directly connect the critical load to the bypass THREE-PHASE UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS) MARCH 27, 2026 263354-32 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTAAND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY AC input power source, bypassing the rectifier/charger, inverter, and static transfer switch. 2. Isolation a. All energized terminals shall be shielded to ensure that maintenance personnel do not inadvertently encounter energized parts or terminals. b. A means to de -energize the static switch shall be provided when the UPS is in the maintenance bypass mode of operation. 3. Maintenance Capability a. With the critical load powered from the maintenance bypass circuit, it shall be possible to check out the operation of the rectifier/charger, inverter, battery, and static transfer switch. b. When the application calls for the Maintenance Bypass Switch to be bolted to the UPS cabinet, the interconnecting cables are to be provided, precut and pre -lugged. Battery Power Pack Provide a sealed, lead -acid valve regulated battery cells housed in a separate cabinet that matches the UPS cabinet styling to form an integral system line-up. 2. Battery cells shall be mounted on slide -out trays for ease of maintenance. 3. A battery disconnect circuit breaker shall be included for isolation of the battery pack from the UPS module. 4. The UPS shall automatically be disconnected from the battery when the battery reaches the minimum discharge voltage level. 5. Provide casters and leveling feet with the battery power pack cabinet for ease of installation. 6. When the application calls for the battery cabinet to be bolted to the UPS cabinet, provide the interconnecting cables, precut with lugs attached. J. Accessories External Maintenance Bypass a. Provide a matching external maintenance bypass to enable the UPS module to be completely isolated from the electrical system while the critical load is powered through the external maintenance bypass line. MARCH 27, 2026 THREE-PHASE UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS) ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 263354-33 MARYS CREEK WRF L C. Provide make -before -break operation for transfers to and from the external maintenance bypass line with a single rotary switch. The following components shall be standard: 1) Input and output circuit breakers, 2) Single rotary switch with auxiliary contacts, 3) Inter -cabinet wiring, 4) Casters, and leveling feet. 5) Provide voltage matching transformers and isolation transformers. 6) The matching cabinet shall bolt to the side of the UPS module with a barrier shield to separate the two cabinets. 7) Provide front access only for installation and service. 2. Relay Board a. Five sets of isolated contacts shall be provided to indicate a change of status of the UPS. Contacts are provided for: 1) On UPS 2) On Battery 3) Low Battery 4) On Bypass 5) Summary 2.06 REMOTE MONITORING INTERFACE A. General: 1. See Section 26 27 13 Power Metering and Protective Relays paragraph PROTOCOL CONVERTER for communications protocol requirements. 2.07 SPARE PARTS A. Provide the following spare parts: 1. Three — Control fuses of type used. 2. Three — Power fuses of type used. THREE-PHASE UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS) MARCH 27, 2026 263354-34 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTAAND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRF B. Spare parts shall be boxed or packaged for long term storage, vacuum sealed, and clearly identified on the exterior of package. Identify each item with manufacturers name, description and part number 2.08 FACTORY TESTING A. The UPS shall be completely assembled, wired, and adjusted at the factory and shall be given the manufacturer's routine shop tests and any other additional operational test to insure the workability and reliable operation of the equipment. B. Prior to factory testing, the manufacturer shall check to see that all selections and settings required by the Power System Study Engineer have been performed. C. Factory test equipment and test methods shall conform with the latest applicable requirements of ANSI, IEEE, UL, and NEMA standards. D. The operational test shall include the proper connection of supply and control voltage and, as far as practical, a mockup of simulated control signals and control devices shall be fed into the boards to check for proper operation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE A. Provide the services of a qualified factory -trained manufacturer's field representative for the time required to perform the following work: Assist in installation and start-up of each type of equipment specified below for the time required to perform the services specified herein. 2. The manufacturer's field representative shall provide technical direction and assistance in general assembly of the equipment, connections and adjustments, and testing of the assembly and components contained therein. 3.02 INSTALLER'S QUALIFICATIONS A. Provide an installer specialized in installing UPSs with a minimum of five years documented experience. B. Submit experience documentation for approval prior to beginning work on this project. MARCH 27, 2026 THREE-PHASE UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS) ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 2633 54-35 MARYS CREEK WRF 3.03 EXAMINATION A. Examine installation area to assure there is enough clearance to install the equipment. B. Verify that the equipment is ready to install. C. Verify field measurements are as submitted by the manufacturer. 3.04 INSTALLATION A. Install all equipment per the manufacturer's recommendations and Contract Drawings. B. Install required safety labels. C. Visual Inspection I. Inspect equipment for signs of damage. 2. Verify installation per drawings supplied with installation manuals or submittal package. 3. Inspect cabinets for foreign objects. 4. Verify that neutral and ground conductors are properly sized and configured per VertivTM requirements as noted in VertivTM drawings supplied with installation manuals or submittal package. 5. Inspect each battery jar for proper polarity. 6. Verify that all printed circuit boards are configured properly. D. Mechanical Inspection 1. Check all control wiring connections for tightness. 2. Check all power wiring connections for tightness. 3. Check all terminal screws, nuts and/or spade lugs for tightness. 4. Electrical Inspection 5. Check all fuses for continuity. 6. Confirm input and bypass voltage and phase rotation are correct. 7. Verify control transformer connections are correct for voltages being used. 8. Ensure connection and voltage of the battery string(s). THREE-PHASE UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS) MARCH 27, 2026 263354-36 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTAAND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRF 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect installed equipment for anchoring, alignment, grounding and physical damage. B. Check tightness of all accessible electrical connections. Minimum acceptable values are specified in manufacturer's instructions. 3.06 FIELD ADJUSTING A. Adjust all circuit breakers, switches, access doors, operating handles for free mechanical and electrical operation as described in manufacturer's instructions. B. The Power Monitoring and Protective Relays shall be set in the field by a qualified representative of the manufacturer, in accordance with settings designated in a coordinated study of the system as required in Section 26 05 73 Power System Study. All such settings, including the application of arc flash labels, shall have been provided, installed and shall be Approved by the Owner/Engineer, prior to energizing of the equipment. 3.07 FIELD TESTING A. The UPS manufacturer's field representative shall perform all electrical field tests recommended by the manufacturer and make all control adjustments required for the individual application of the drive. B. Submit the results of all specified tests to the Engineer/Owner within five business days for approval and for their permanent records. C. Test reports showing unsatisfactory results may require the removal of all defective or suspected materials, equipment and/or apparatus, and their replacement with new items as determined by the Owner/Engineer. No change in the Contract Price or Schedule allowed. D. Retesting, if required by the Owner/Engineer shall be done with no change in Contract Price or Schedule. 3.08 CLEANING A. Remove all rubbish and debris from inside and around the UPS. Remove dirt, dust, or concrete spatter from the interior and exterior of the equipment using brushes, vacuum cleaner, or clean, lint free rags. Do not use compressed air. MARCH 27, 2026 THREE-PHASE UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS) ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 2633 54-37 MARYS CREEK WRF 3.09 EQUIPMENT PROTECTION AND RESTORATION A. Touch-up and restore damaged surfaces to factory finish, as approved by the manufacturer. If the damaged surface cannot be returned to factory specification, the surface shall be replaced. 3.10 UNIT STARTUP A. Energize control power. B. Perform control/logic checks and adjust to meet VertivTM specification. C. Verify DC float and equalize voltage levels. D. Verify DC voltage clamp and overvoltage shutdown levels. E. Verify battery discharge, low battery warning and low battery shutdown levels. F. Verify fuse monitor alarms and system shutdown. G. Verify inverter voltages and regulation circuits. H. Verify inverter/bypass sync circuits and set overlap time. I. Perform manual transfers and returns. J. Simulate utility outage at no load. K. Verify proper recharge. 3.11 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATION A. A qualified factory -trained manufacturer's representative shall perform the following: 1. Personally inspect the equipment at the jobsite. 2. Certify in writing that the equipment has been installed, adjusted, and tested, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, including all settings designated in the Power System Study. 3. Submit three copies of the manufacturer's representative's certification. 3.12 TRAINING A. Provide manufacturer's services for training of plant personnel in operation and maintenance of the UPSs furnished under this Section. THREE-PHASE UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS) MARCH 27, 2026 2633 54-38 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTAAND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRF B. The training for each type of equipment shall be for a period of not less than one eight -hour day. C. The cost of training program to be conducted with Owner's personnel shall be included in the Contract Price. The training and instruction, insofar as practicable, shall be directly related to the system being supplied. D. Provide detailed O&M manuals to supplement the training course. The manuals shall include specific details of equipment supplied and operations specific to the project. E. The training session shall be conducted by a manufacturer's qualified representative. Training program shall include instructions on the assembly, protective devices, metering, and other major components. F. The Owner reserves the right to videotape the training sessions for the Owner's use. 3.13 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICE A. Service Personnel —The UPS manufacturer shall directly employ a nationwide service organization, consisting of factory -trained field service personnel dedicated to the startup and maintenance of UPS and power equipment. B. The manufacturer shall provide a national dispatch center to coordinate field service personnel schedules. One toll -free number shall reach a qualified support person 24 hours a day, 7 days a week and 365 days a year. If emergency service is required, on - site response time shall be 4 hours or less within 150 miles of a VertivTM Services center. C. Two local customer engineers shall be assigned to the site with a regional office as a backup. Escalation procedures shall be in place to notify Power Technical Support if a site is not functioning within 24 hours. D. Automated Site Monitoring —The UPS manufacturer shall provide as an option an automated site monitoring service. This service shall be staffed by a qualified support person 24 hours a day, 7 days a week and 365 days a year. At the detection of an alarm within the UPS, the controls shall initiate communication with the monitoring service. The monitoring service shall be capable of interpreting the communicated alarms to allow dispatch of a service engineer. E. Replacement Parts Stocking —Parts shall be available through an extensive network to ensure round-the-clock parts availability throughout the country. MARCH 27, 2026 THREE-PHASE UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS) ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 2633 54-39 MARYS CREEK WRF F. Spare parts shall be stocked by local field service personnel with backup available from national parts centers and the manufacturing location. A Customer Support Parts Coordinator shall be on call 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, 365 days a year for immediate parts availability. G. Maintenance Contracts —A complete offering of preventive and full -service maintenance contracts for both the UPS system and battery system shall be available. END OF SECTION THREE-PHASE UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS) MARCH 27, 2026 2633 54-40 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTAAND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY SECTION 26 36 23 LOW VOLTAGE ENCLOSED AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES (ATS) PARTI GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish and install low voltage enclosed automatic and manual transfer switches (ATS), together with appurtenances, complete and operable as specified herein and as shown on the Contract Drawings. B. The items of equipment are for individual applications as separately enclosed items. Submittals made under this Section, for components and electrical items specified under other Sections, will be returned unreviewed. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Refer to Division 26 00 00 and the Contract Drawings, for related work and electrical coordination requirements. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be made in accordance with the requirements of Division 1, Section 26 00 00, the Contract Documents and as specified herein the following: The manufacturers' names and product designation or catalog numbers for the types of materials specified or shown on the Drawings. 2. Cut sheets for each individual item shall be submitted. 3. All cut sheets shall be clearly marked to indicate which products are being submitted for use on this project. 4. Unmarked cut sheets will cause the submittal to be rejected and returned for revision. B. All shop drawing submittals and all O&M submittals shall be submitted in accordance with the requirements listed in Division 1. No change in Contract Price or Schedule will be allowed for delays due to unacceptable submittals. C. Submittals shall also contain information on related equipment to be furnished under this Specification. Incomplete submittals not containing the required information on the related equipment will also be returned without review D. Submittals shall be made in accordance with the requirements of the process equipment division of these Specifications, and as specified herein. MARCH 27, 2026 LOW VOLTAGE ENCLOSED AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 26 36 23 - 1 MARYS CREEK WRF E. The original equipment manufacturer, (OEM) shall create all equipment shop drawings, including all wiring diagrams, in the manufacturer's Engineering department. All equipment shop drawings shall bear the original equipment manufacturer's logo, drawing file numbers, and shall be maintained on file in the OEM's archive file system. Photocopies of the Engineer's ladder schematics are unacceptable as shop drawings. F. Submittals for equipment and materials, furnished under this Section of the Specifications, will not be accepted prior to approval of the Qualifications of the Study Engineer followed by the submission and approval of the Preliminary Short Circuit Study required in the Power System Study as specified in Section26 05 73. Submittals for this equipment made prior to the Engineer's approvals will be returned unreviewed. G. Time -current coordination curves for protective device relays, circuit breakers, and fuses submitted shall be included as a part of these submittals. H. Submit for approval, a manufacturer's conducted training agenda for all training specified herein. Training agenda shall not be submitted until final approval of the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Shop Drawings and Product Data. The following information shall be submitted to the Engineer: 1. Product data sheets and catalog numbers for overcurrent protective trip devices on circuit breakers and switches, relaying, meters, pilot lights, etc. The manufacturer's name shall be clearly visible on each cut sheet submitted. List all options, trip adjustments and accessories furnished specifically for this project. Clearly mark each sheet to indicate which items apply and/or those items that do not apply. 2. Provide control systems engineering to produce custom unit elementary drawings showing interwiring and interlocking between components and to remotely mounted devices. Include and identify all connecting equipment and remote devices on the schematics. The notation "Remote Device" will not be acceptable. Show wire and terminal numbers. Indicate special identifications for electrical devices per the Drawings. 3. Provide plan and elevation drawings of each controller or enclosure, with dimensions, exterior and interior views, showing component layouts, controls, terminal blocks, etc.. 4. Schematic diagram 5. Nameplate schedule LOW VOLTAGE ENCLOSED AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES MARCH 27, 2026 263623-2 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY 6. UL Listing of the completed assembly. 7. Component list with detailed component information, including original manufacturer's part number. 8. Conduit entry/exit locations 9. Assembly ratings including: a. Short-circuit rating (1) Shop drawings shall include table indicating the model number of the upstream breaker provided under this project and the associated transfer switch withstand closing rating (WCR) b. Voltage c. Continuous current 10. Major component ratings including: a. Voltage b. Continuous current c. Interrupting ratings 11. Number and size of cables per phase, neutral if present, ground and all cable terminal sizes. 12. Key interlock scheme drawing and sequence of operations 13. Busway connection and amperage rating. 14. Instruction and renewal parts books. J. Factory Tests. Submittals shall be made for factory tests specified herein. K. Field Test Reports. Submittals shall be made for field tests specified herein. L. Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 1. Operation and maintenance manuals shall include the following information: a. Manufacturer's contact address and telephone number for parts and service. b. Instruction books and/or leaflets c. Recommended renewal parts list MARCH 27, 2026 LOW VOLTAGE ENCLOSED AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 263623-3 MARYS CREEK WRF d. Record Documents for the information required by the Submittals paragraph above. M. Seismic anchorage and bracing drawings, calculations, and cut sheets, as required by Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing. 8 1.04 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. All products and components shown on the Drawings and listed in this specification shall be designed and manufactured according to latest revision of the following standards (unless otherwise noted): 1. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) 2. NFPA 70E Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace 3. UL 1008 Underwriters Laboratories standard for automatic transfer switches 4. CSA: C22.2 No. 178 certified at 600 VAC 5. NFPA 101: Life safety code 6. NFPA 110: Standard for emergency and standby power systems 7. IEEE 446: I.E.E.E. recommended practice for emergency and standby power systems 8. NEMA ICS 10: AC automatic transfer switch equipment (supersedes ICS2-447) 9. UL 50/508: Enclosures 10. ANSI C33.76: Enclosures 11. NEMA 250: Enclosures 12. IEEE 472: (ANSI C37.90A): Ringing wave immunity 13. EN55022 (CISPRI 1): Conducted and radiated emissions 14. IEEE 242 — Protection and Coordination of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems 15. IEEE 399 — Power Systems Analysis 16. UL 489 — Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit Breaker Enclosures 17. UL 1066 — Low -Voltage AC and DC Power Circuit Breakers Used in Enclosures. LOW VOLTAGE ENCLOSED AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES MARCH 27, 2026 263623-4 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY B. All equipment components and completed assemblies specified in this Section of the Specifications shall bear the appropriate label of Underwriters Laboratories. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar equipment for a minimum period of ten years. When requested by the Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement. B. The manufacturer of the assembly shall be the manufacturer of the major components within the assembly. All assemblies shall be of the same manufacturer. Equipment that is manufactured by a third party and "brand labeled" shall not be acceptable. C. All components and material shall be new and of the latest field proven design and in current production. Obsolete components or components scheduled for immediate discontinuation shall not be used. D. Equipment submitted shall fit within the space shown on the Drawings. Equipment which does not fit within the space is not acceptable. E. For the equipment specified herein, the manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 2000 certified. F. Equipment submitted shall fit within the space shown on the Drawings. Equipment which does not fit within the space is not acceptable. 1.06 JOBSITE DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Prior to jobsite delivery, complete all submittal requirements, and present to the Owner/Engineer upon delivery of the equipment, an approved copy of all such submittals. Delivery of incomplete constructed equipment, or equipment which failed any factory tests, will not be permitted., B. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Equipment shall be stored indoors and protected from moisture, dust and other contaminants. D. Equipment shall not be installed until the location is finished and protected from the elements. MARCH 27, 2026 LOW VOLTAGE ENCLOSED AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 263623-5 MARYS CREEK WRF 1.07 WARRANTY A. Provide the warranty time specified in Division 1. B. Within such period of warranty, all material and labor necessary to return the equipment to new operating condition shall be provided. Any warranty work requiring shipping or transporting of the equipment shall be provided at no expense to the Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable: 1. ABB (Zenith) 2. ASCO 3. Caterpillar 4. Cummins (Onan) 5. Eaton 6. No Equal B. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. C. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be of the same manufacturer. 2.02 RATINGS A. The service voltage shall be as shown on the Drawings. 1. The overall short circuit withstand, and interrupting rating of the equipment and devices shall be equal to or greater than the overall short circuit withstand and interrupting rating of the feeder device immediately upstream of the automatic transfer switch or the available short circuit current at the point of installation of the ATS whichever is greater. B. The withstand current capacity of the main contacts shall not be less than 20 times the continuous duty rating when coordinated with any molded case circuit breaker LOW VOLTAGE ENCLOSED AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES MARCH 27, 2026 263623-6 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY established by certified test data. Refer to required withstand and close ratings as detailed in this specification. C. Temperature rise tests in accordance with UL 1008 shall have been conducted after the overload and endurance tests to confirm the ability of the units to carry their rated currents within the allowable temperature limits. D. For additional ratings and construction notes, refer to the Drawings. 2.03 CONSTRUCTION A. General The equipment described in this specification shall contain factory assembled and operational tested circuit breakers and accessories and be self-supporting in a manner to be installed on a level concrete pad. 2. Refer to Drawings for actual layout and location of equipment and components; current ratings of devices, bus bars, components; protective relays, voltage ratings of devices, components and assemblies; and other required details. 3. Units shall be arranged as shown on the Drawings. B. Nameplates General a. Furnish nameplates for each device. b. Provide engraved laminated impact acrylic nameplates with a matte finish, not less than 1/16 -inch thick by 3/4 -inch by 2 -1/2 -inch, Rowmark 322402acceptable equal. c. Provide nameplates with the lamination white on the outside with a black internal layer. Engrave the letting through the white outer layer so the letters appear black. d. Attach nameplates with stainless steel screws unless otherwise specified. e. Device mounted nameplates are not acceptable. f. Reuse, alteration, or replacement of original equipment nameplates tags associated with equipment or components supplied by the manufacturer's suppliers and sub -suppliers is prohibited. 2. Exterior MARCH 27, 2026 LOW VOLTAGE ENCLOSED AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 263623-7 MARYS CREEK WRF a. Furnish nameplates for each device as specified herein and as indicated on the Drawings. b. Provide black lettering on a white background c. Attach nameplates with stainless steel screws on NEMA 1, 1A or 12 rated enclosures. d. Attach nameplates for NEMA 4 and 4X enclosures as follows: 1) Provide double faced adhesive strips, TESA TUFF TAPE 4970, 0.009 X 1/2 inch, or acceptable equal. 2) Prior to installing the nameplates, thoroughly clean the metal surface with 70% alcohol until all residue has been removed. 3) Epoxy adhesive or foam tape means of attachment are not acceptable. e. Provide a master nameplate that indicates equipment ratings, manufacturer's name, shop order number and general information. C. Controls 1. Provide controls as specified herein, as shown on the drawings and as required by the detailed mechanical and electrical equipment requirements. D. Relays 1. Provide auxiliary contacts for remote run indication and indication of each status and alarm condition. E. Control Devices and Indicators 1. Mount all operating control devices, indicators, and instruments on the enclosure door. 2. Provide 30 -millimeter, corrosion resistant, NEMA 4X/13, anodized aluminum or reinforced plastic controls and indicators. 3. Booted control devices are not acceptable. 4. Indicator lights a. Provide LED push -to -test type indicator lamps. b. Provide lens colors as follows: 1) Red for ON, Valve OPEN, and Breaker CLOSED. LOW VOLTAGE ENCLOSED AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES MARCH 27, 2026 263623-8 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY 2) Green for OFF, Valve CLOSED and Breaker OPEN. 3) Amber for FAIL. 4) Blue for READY 5) White for POWER ON. 5. Selector Switches a. Provide mode selector switches for preferred source selection (SOURCE 1 -NONE -SOURCE 2) b. Switches shall have the number of positions and contact arrangements, as required. Each switch shall have an extra dry contact for remote monitoring. 6. Pushbuttons a. Provide pushbuttons as follows: None F. Enclosures 1. General a. Enclosures shall meet all the requirements listed here in and those requirements of Section 26 05 33 Raceways Boxes Enclosures and Fittings. b. Provide 316 SS hardware for all enclosures. c. All enclosure doors shall have bonding studs. The enclosure interior shall have a bonding stud. d. Each enclosure shall be provided with a documentation pocket on the inner door. e. Enclosures shall not have holes or knockouts. f. All panels installed outdoors shall have a factory applied, suitable primer and final coat of weatherproof white paint. g. All enclosures shall be pad lockable. h. All wall -mounted enclosures shall be provided with welded on integral mounting lugs of the same material as the enclosure. Bolted on mounting lugs are unacceptable. i. All free-standing enclosures shall be provided with integral welded on feet of the same construction as the enclosure. Bolted on mounting feet are unacceptable. MARCH 27, 2026 LOW VOLTAGE ENCLOSED AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 263623-9 MARYS CREEK WRF 2. ALUMINUM a. NEMA 4X Aluminum 1) Type 5052 aluminum, body and door 2) Stainless steel continuous hinge 3) Foam in -place gasket 4) Single point quarter turn latches (20"x24" and below). All others 3 -point latch 3. NEMA 12 a. NEMA 12 Aluminum 1) Type 5052 aluminum, body and door 2) Stainless steel continuous hinge 3) Foam in -place gasket 4) Single point quarter turn latches (20"x24" and below). All others 3 -point latch 4. Not Defined a. Where an enclosure is not otherwise defined or shown on the Drawing 1) NEMA 4X 316 Stainless Steel 2) Type 316 stainless steel, body and door 3) Stainless steel continuous hinge 4) Foam in -place gasket 5) Single point quarter turn latches (20"x24" and below). All others 3 -point latch 5. NEMA 1 or NEMA lA boxes shall not be used. 6. Malleable iron boxes shall not be used. G. Internal Wiring 1. Wiring: LOW VOLTAGE ENCLOSED AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES MARCH 27, 2026 263623-10 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY a. Stranded tinned copper, minimum size #14 AWG, with 600 -volt, 90°C, flame retardant, Type SIS thermoplastic insulation, NEMA Class II, Type B wiring. b. Line side power wiring shall be sized for the full rating or frame size of the connected device. 2. Tagging and Coding a. All wiring shall be tagged and coded with an identification number as shown on the Drawings. b. Coding shall be typed on a heat shrinkable tube applied to each end showing origination and destination of each wire. c. The marking shall be permanent, non -smearing, solvent -resistant type like Raychem TMS-SCE, or equal. 3. Installation a. All wiring shall be neatly bundled with ty-raps and supported to wire way supports. b. Control wiring shall be bundled separately from power wiring. In addition, low signal wiring (millivolt and milliamp) shall be bundle separately from the rest of the control wiring. H. Field Installed Internal Wiring Field installed interior wiring shall be neatly grouped by circuit and bound by plastic tie wraps. 2. Circuit groups shall be supported so that circuit terminations are not stressed. In addition, low signal wiring (millivolt and milliamp) shall be bundle separately from the rest of the control wiring. 3. All field wiring shall be tagged and coded with an identification number. 4. Coding shall be typed on a heat shrinkable tube applied to each end of the wire. 5. The marking shall be a permanent, non -smearing, solvent -resistant type, like Raychem TMS-SCE, or equal 6. All conduit entering or leaving equipment shall be stubbed up into the bottom of the enclosure directly below the area in which the conductors are to be terminated MARCH 27, 2026 LOW VOLTAGE ENCLOSED AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 26 36 23 - 11 MARYS CREEK WRF 7. Top entry is permitted only in dry air-condition areas. Top entry is prohibited in non -air-condition areas, damp, wet or process areas or into any NEMA 3R, 4 or 4X enclosure. 8. Conduits shall not enter the side unless approved in writing by the Owner/Engineer. Control Power Transformers. Control power transformers shall be provided where shown on the Drawings. Transformer shall be sized for the entire load, including space heaters, plus 25% spare capacity. 2. Control power transformers shall be 120 -volt grounded secondary. Primary side of the transformer shall be fused in both legs. One leg of the transformer secondary shall be solidly grounded while the other leg shall be fused. 2.04 EQUIPMENT A. General Automatic transfer switches shall be designed for an emergency and normal source voltage and current ratings as shown on the Drawings. Switches shall be listed under UL 1008. 2. The switches shall initiate transfer of the load to the emergency source when any phase of the normal source drops below 90 percent of normal voltages. 3. The transfer switches shall be adequately constructed to carry full rated current on a continuous 24 -hour basis in all approved enclosures and shall not show excessive heating or be subject to de rating. 4. The transfer switches shall be capable of withstanding inrush current values to 20 times full load current rating without mechanical distortion of main contact poles or supports. 5. The transfer switches shall be capable of withstanding all available system fault currents without parting of or damage to contacts during the fault clearing time of the system over current device. 6. The transfer switches shall be of inherently three -pole double throw construction and shall have three position operation: closed to normal source, open, closed to emergency source. LOW VOLTAGE ENCLOSED AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES MARCH 27, 2026 263623-12 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY 7. Time delay between opening of the closed contacts and closing of the open contacts shall be a minimum of 400 milliseconds to allow for voltage decay before transfer is complete. 8. The following accessories shall be furnished: a. Adjustable 0 to 30 second time delay to override normal source power outages. b. Adjustable 1 to 300 second time delay before retransfer. 9. A maintained contact test auto switch and normal/emergency pilot lights shall be mounted on the enclosure door. 10. Automatic transfer or automatic transfer with non -automatic re -transfer operation. 11. Provide a field selectable programmable set point that permits the transfer switch to operate in either of two modes: a. Fully automatic mode (auto re -transfer). b. Automatic transfer from Source 1 to Source 2 with manually initiated re -transfer operation. B. Automatic Transfer Switch Transfer switches shall be rated for the voltage and ampacity as shown on the plans and shall have 600 -volt insulation on all parts in accordance with NEMA standards. 2. The unit shall be rated based on all classes of loads, i.e., resistive, tungsten, ballast and inductive loads. Switches rated 400 amperes or less shall be UL listed for 100% tungsten lamp load. 3. Switches composed of molded case breakers, contactors or components thereof not specifically designed as an automatic transfer switch will not be acceptable. 4. The automatic transfer switch shall be equipped with a solenoid protection scheme that removes any attempts of operating the solenoids after three consecutive trials until manual intervention by an operator. 5. The withstand current capacity of the main contacts shall not be less than 20 times the continuous duty rating when coordinated with any molded case circuit breaker established by certified test data. 6. The transfer switch manufacturer shall submit test data for each size switch, showing it can withstand fault currents of the magnitude and the duration necessary to maintain the system integrity. MARCH 27, 2026 LOW VOLTAGE ENCLOSED AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 26 36 23 - 13 MARYS CREEK WRF 7. Minimum UL listed withstand and close into fault ratings shall be as follows: (All values 480 volt, RMS symmetrical, less than 20% power factor) Molded Case Breaker Size (Amps) Fault Current (RMS Symmetrical) U to 150 30,000 151-260 42,000 261 - 400 50,000 401 - 800 65,000 801 - 1200 85,000 1201-4000 100,000 Current Limiting Fuse Size (Amps) Up to 4000 200,000 C. Generator Controls Where the emergency source is a standby generator, the following additional functions shall be provided: a. The ATS shall incorporate adjustable three phase under and over - voltage and three phase under and over -frequency sensing on the normal source. b. When the voltage of any phase of the normal source is reduced to 80% or exceeds 110% nominal voltage, or frequency is displaced 2 Hertz from nominal, for a period of 0-10 seconds (programmable) a pilot contact shall close to initiate starting of the engine generator. c. The ATS shall incorporate adjustable three phase under and over - voltage and three phase under and over -frequency sensing on the emergency source. d. When the emergency source has reached a voltage value within +/- 10% of nominal and achieved frequency within +/- 5% of the rated value, the load shall be transferred to the emergency source after a programmable time delay. e. When the normal source has been restored to not less than 90% of rated voltage on all phases, the load shall be re -transferred to the normal source after a time delay of 0 to 30 minutes (programmable). f. If the engine generator should fail while carrying the load, retransfer to the normal source shall be made instantaneously upon restoration of proper voltage (90%) on the normal source. LOW VOLTAGE ENCLOSED AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES MARCH 27, 2026 263623-14 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY D. Control Panel The transfer switch shall be equipped with a microprocessor -based control panel. The control panel shall perform the operational and display functions of the transfer switch. The display functions of the control panel shall include ATS position and source availability. 2. The equipment manufacturer shall furnish factory installed, a dedicated Point of Utilization Device (SPD), as specified in Section 26 43 13, Individual Control Panel and Related Equipment Protection (Type 3). 3. The digital display shall be accessible without opening the enclosure door and shall be provided with an LCD display screen with touch pad function and display menus. The programming functions shall be pass code protected. 4. The control panel shall be provided with menu driven display screens for transfer switch monitoring, control and field changeable functions and settings. 5. The control panel shall be opto-isolated from electrical noise and provided with the following inherent control functions and capabilities: a. Multipurpose display for continuous monitoring and control of the ATS functions and settings. All field changeable functions shall be pass code protected and accessible through the keypad. b. Built-in diagnostic display that includes the capturing of historical data, such as number of transfers and time on emergency power source, for ease of troubleshooting. c. Touch pad test switch with Fast Test/Load/No Load positions to simulate a normal source failure. d. Time delay to override momentary normal source failure prior to engine start. Field programmable 0-10 seconds (adjustable by increments of 0.1 second) factory set at three seconds. e. Time delay on retransfer to normal source, programmable 0-60 minutes (adjustable by increments of 0.1 minute) factory set at 30 minutes. If the emergency source fails during the retransfer time delay, the transfer switch controls shall automatically bypass the time delay and immediately retransfer to the normal position. f. Time delay on transfer to emergency, programmable 0-5 minutes, factory set at one second. MARCH 27, 2026 LOW VOLTAGE ENCLOSED AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTAAND ASSOCIATES, INC. 26 36 23 - 15 MARYS CREEK WRF g. Terminals for remote test/peak shave operation and transfer inhibit to the emergency source. h. An in -phase monitor shall be provided. The monitor shall compare the phase angle difference between the normal and emergency sources and be programmed to anticipate the zero -crossing point to minimize switching transients. i. Auxiliary contacts (one normally open each) shall be provided to indicate normal and emergency source availability. Auxiliary contacts (one normally open each) shall be provided to indicate normal, open, and emergency position of the switch. k. A load/no load clock exerciser shall be incorporated within the microprocessor and shall be programmable to start the engine generator set and transfer the load (when selected) for exercise purposes on a weekly basis. The exerciser shall contain a lithium battery for memory retention during an outage. 1. A timed auxiliary contact (one normally closed) adjustable 0-60 seconds shall be provided to allow motor loads to be disconnected prior to transfer in either direction. m. Provide a momentary pushbutton to bypass the time delays on transfer and retransfer and programmable commit/no commit control logic. 2.05 REMOTE MONITORING INTERFACE A. General: See Section 26 27 13 Power Metering and Protective Relays paragraph PROTOCOL CONVERTER for communications protocol requirements. 2.06 SPARE PARTS A. Provide the following spare parts: Three — Fuses of each type used. B. Spare parts shall be boxed or packaged for long term storage and clearly identified on the exterior of package. Identify each item with manufacturers name, description and part number. 2.07 ACCESSORIES A. Provide the following accessories: LOW VOLTAGE ENCLOSED AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES MARCH 27, 2026 263623-16 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY 1. Selector and Disconnect Switches. a. Three -position selector switch; Stop/ Test/Automatic. b. Disconnect selector switch to disconnect engine starting circuit. c. Combination auto/manual retransfer selector switch. d. Automatic/manual operation for ATS. e. Maintained Auto - Maintained Test. f. Where neither source is a standby generator, provide a 3 position Source selector switch circuit to select either source as primary. The center position shall designate neither source as preferred, and the switch shall remain the source presently connected to the load until the source is lost. 2.08 FACTORY TESTING A. The ATS shall be completely assembled, wired, and adjusted at the factory and shall be given the manufacturer's routine shop tests and any other additional operational test to insure the workability and reliable operation of the equipment. B. Factory test equipment and test methods shall conform with the latest applicable requirements of ANSI, IEEE, UL, and NEMA standards, and shall be subject to the Owner/Engineer's approval. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE A. Provide the services of a qualified factory -trained manufacturer's field representative to perform the tasks specified under this section for the time required. B. The manufacturer's representative shall provide technical direction and assistance in the general assembly of the equipment, connections, and adjustments, and testing of the assembly and components contained therein. C. Provide three copies of the manufacturer's field start-up report. 3.02 INSTALLER'S QUALIFICATIONS A. Installer shall be specialized in installing ATS with minimum five years documented experience. MARCH 27, 2026 LOW VOLTAGE ENCLOSED AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 26 36 23 - 17 MARYS CREEK WRF B. Experience documentation shall be submitted for approval prior to beginning work on this project. 3.03 EXAMINATION A. Examine installation area to assure there is enough clearance to install the equipment. B. Verify that the equipment is ready to install. C. Verify field measurements are as submitted by the manufacturer. 3.04 INSTALLATION A. Install all equipment per the manufacturer's recommendations and Contract Drawings. B. Install required safety labels. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect installed equipment for anchoring, alignment, grounding and physical damage. B. Check tightness of all accessible electrical connections. Minimum acceptable values are specified in manufacturer's instructions. 3.06 FIELD ADJUSTING A. Adjust all ATS for free mechanical and electrical operation as described in manufacturer's instructions. B. Adjust all circuit breakers, switches, access doors, operating handles for free mechanical and electrical operation as described in manufacturer's instructions. C. Protective devices shall be set in the field by a qualified representative of the manufacturer, in accordance with settings designated in a coordinated study of the system. 1. Provide settings as required in Section 26 05 73 Power System Study 2. All such settings, including the application of arc flash labels, shall have been made and Approved by the Owner/Engineer, prior to energizing of the equipment. LOW VOLTAGE ENCLOSED AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES MARCH 27, 2026 263623-18 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRF 3.07 FIELD TESTING A. Perform all electrical field tests recommended by the manufacturer. Disconnect all connections to solid-state equipment prior to testing. B. Megger and record phase to phase and phase to ground insulation resistance. Megger, for 1 minute, at minimum voltage of 1000 volts DC. Measured Insulation resistance shall be at least 100 megohms. In no case shall the manufacturer's maximum test voltages be exceeded. 3.08 CLEANING A. Remove all rubbish and debris from inside and around the equipment. Remove dirt, dust, or concrete spatter from the interior and exterior of the equipment using brushes, vacuum cleaner, or clean, lint free rags. Do not use compressed air. 3.09 EQUIPMENT PROTECTION AND RESTORATION A. Touch-up and restore damaged surfaces to factory finish, as approved by the manufacturer. If the damaged surface cannot be returned to factory specification, the surface shall be replaced. 3.10 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATION A. A qualified factory -trained manufacturer's representative shall certify in writing that the equipment has been installed, adjusted and tested in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Provide three copies of the manufacturer's representative's certification. END OF SECTION MARCH 27, 2026 LOW VOLTAGE ENCLOSED AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 26 36 23 - 19 MARYS CREEK WRF THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK LOW VOLTAGE ENCLOSED AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES MARCH 27, 2026 263623-20 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY SECTION 26 41 00 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified, and required to furnish and install a lightning protection system that fully meets the UL Standards listed herein. B. Provide an inspection of each new structure, or modified existing structure, by Underwriters Laboratories and shall obtain a Master Label for each new or modified structure C. Employ the services of a licensed lightning protection systems engineering company to design and install the lightning protection system and prepare detailed installation drawings and material specifications. The system shall include ground wires, ground rods, exothermic connections, mechanical connectors, structural steel connections, all as shown on the Drawings, and as specified herein, to provide a bonding to earth ground of all metallic materials likely to become energized. 2. Compliance with all provisions of Section 26 05 26 shall be included under this specification. D. Use only the Franklin Rod system shall be used. Other systems such as the early streamer emission (ESE) are not acceptable E. The Bid Price shall be in complete compliance with the Contact Documents. Any exceptions shall be included in the bid with a detailed explanation that clearly indicates the paragraph of this Specification and / or the item in the Drawings to which the exception applies. 2. Submit in detail the reasons for the exception. The inclusion of an exception and its explanation as specified shall not constitute any obligation on the part of the Engineer / Owner to accept the Bid Price with the exception. F. This Specification shall have precedence over any conflict in the bidder's submittals and / or descriptive information and the Contract Documents unless an exception is made at the time of bidding as specified herein, and the bid price is accepted with the bidder's exception by the Engineer / Owner. MARCH 27, 2026 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 2641 00- 1 MARYS CREEK WRF G. Provide all tools, equipment, supplies, and shall perform all labor required to install the equipment specified in the Contract Documents to install, test, and place into satisfactory operation in the time specified for completion in the Contract Documents. H. Failure to perform the work as specified shall not constitute an acceptable reason for the Owner to grant any change in the Contract Price or additions to the Contract Time. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Refer to Division 26 00 00 and the Contract Drawings, for related work and electrical coordination requirements. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be made in accordance with the requirements of Division 1, Section 26 00 00, the Contract Documents and as specified herein the following: The manufacturers' names and product designation or catalog numbers for the types of materials specified or shown on the Drawings. 2. Cut sheets for each individual item shall be submitted. 3. All cut sheets shall be clearly marked to indicate which products are being submitted for use on this project. 4. Unmarked cut sheets will cause the submittal to be rejected and returned for revision. B. All shop drawing submittals and all O&M submittals shall be submitted in accordance with the requirements listed in Division 1. No change in Contract Price or Schedule will be allowed for delays due to unacceptable submittals. C. Submittals shall also contain information on related equipment to be furnished under this Specification. Incomplete submittals not containing the required information on the related equipment will also be returned without review D. Submittals shall be made in accordance with the requirements of the process equipment division of these Specifications, and as specified herein. E. The original equipment manufacturer, (OEM) shall create all equipment shop drawings, including all wiring diagrams, in the manufacturer's Engineering department. LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM MARCH 27, 2026 2641 00-2 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY All equipment shop drawings shall bear the original equipment manufacturer's logo, drawing file numbers, and shall be maintained on file in the OEM's archive file system. 2. Photocopies of the Engineer's ladder schematics are unacceptable as shop drawings. F. Submit for approval, a manufacturer's conducted training agenda for all training specified herein. Training agenda shall not be submitted until final approval of the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Shop Drawings and Product Data. G. The following information shall be submitted to the Engineer: 1. Complete design drawings, for each structure and the site, showing the type, size, and locations of all grounding, down conductors, through roof/through wall assemblies, roof conductors and air terminals, shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. 2. Submit copy of UL Application for inspection for the Engineer/Owner within 5 days after application is submitted. Submit copies of the Master Label for each structure to the Engineer/Owner for record. 4. Submit copies of the original handwritten and final typed certified field inspections to the Engineer/Owner for record. O&M Manuals 1.04 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. All products and components shown on the Drawings and listed in this specification shall be designed, manufactured, and installed according to latest revision of the following standards (unless otherwise noted): NFPA 70 — National Electrical Code (NEC) 2. NFPA 780 — Lightning Protection Code LPI 175 - Lightning Protection Institute Installation Standard 4. UL 96A — Installation Requirements for Lightning Protection Systems B. All equipment specified in this Section of the Specifications shall bear the appropriate label of Underwriters Laboratories. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The manufacturer of the lightning protection system equipment shall have produced similar equipment for a minimum period of five years and the lightning protection engineering company shall have been designing and installing lighting MARCH 27, 2026 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 2641 00-3 MARYS CREEK WRF protection systems for at least five years. When requested by the Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement. B. The lightning protection system shall conform to the requirements and standards for lightning protection system of the LPI, UL and NFPA. Standard requirements C. All components and material shall be new and of the latest field proven design and in current production. Obsolete components or components scheduled for immediate discontinuation shall not be used. 1.06 JOBSITE DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Prior to jobsite delivery, complete all submittal requirements, and present to the Owner/Engineer prior to delivery of the equipment and materials, an approved copy of all such submittals. B. Protect equipment and materials during shipment, handling, and storage by suitable complete enclosures. Protect equipment from exposure to the elements and keep thoroughly dry. C. Protect painted surfaces against impact, abrasion, discoloration, and other damage. Repaint damaged painted surfaces to the satisfaction of the Owner/Engineer. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Provide the warranty time specified in Division 1. B. Within such period of warranty, all material and labor necessary to return the equipment to new operating condition shall be provided. Any warranty work requiring shipping or transporting of the equipment shall be provided at no expense to the Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SUPPLIERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Suppliers are acceptable: Bonded Lightning / Advanced Lightning Technology, Argyle, Texas 2. Hicks Lightning Protection, Ponder, Texas LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM MARCH 27, 2026 2641 00-4 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY VFC, Inc. Grapevine, Texas 4. Approved Equal B. The listing of specific suppliers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. 2.02 GENERAL A. The system to be furnished under this specification shall be the standard product of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of lightning protection equipment and shall be the manufacturer's latest approved design. Lightning protection system installers / designers shall be certified by the Lightning Protection Institute for the work. 2. Submit LPI training and qualifications for each designer and installer. The installation shall be in full compliance with UL 96A and NFPA 780. Should conflict between the two standards be discovered and at issue for the project, submit the issue to the Engineer for resolution. B. All equipment shall be new and of a design and construction to suit the application where it is used in accordance with accepted industry standards and LPI, UL, and NFPA standard requirements. C. At the point where an electrical service of 1000 Volts or less is generated, a surge protection device shall be provided and installed, Provide a surge device which complies with UL96A, for a UL Master Label Certificate of Inspection. 2. Provide a surge protection device which complies with UL Standard 1449 Third Edition, as a Type 1 or Type 2 lightning rated unit of 20ka or more, as specified in Section26 43 13. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Class I or Class II materials may be utilized for Class I structures, not exceeding 75 feet above grade. All other structures shall utilize Class II materials. B. Unless otherwise specified herein, all materials shall be tin plated copper with 316 stainless steel fasteners (nuts, bolts, washers and anchors) , and used in accordance with LPI, UL and NFPA code requirements. C. Aluminum materials, with 316 stainless steel fasteners (nuts, bolts, washers and anchors), shall be used only on aluminum, galvalume or galvanized metal structures. MARCH 27, 2026 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 2641 00-5 MARYS CREEK WRF Where aluminum, galvalume or galvanized metal parapet caps are used, the entire roof lightning protection equipment shall utilize aluminum components. 2. Approved transitional components shall be used for transitions to aluminum materials. Down leads and grounding shall utilize tinned copper with the bimetal transition occurring at the bimetal through roof assembly. D. Provide adhesive type air terminal bases for flat roof areas. E. Provide tin plated conductors, except provide aluminum where lightning protection is installed on aluminum roofs. Provide conductors with their wire size, stranding, and weight in accordance with NFPA 780. F. Conductor fasteners shall be an approved type of non -corrosive metal, and have ample strength to support conductors. Cable fasteners shall be of the adhesive type. G. All cable connecters shall be tin coated copper cast bronze with screw pressure type 316 stainless steel bolts, washers and nuts. H. Where any part of a protection system is exposed to potential mechanical injury, protect it by covering it with PVC conduit. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. All materials shall be installed by experienced workmen that specialize in this type of work. B. The lightning protection system shall be installed per approved shop drawings and UL and NFPA recommended practices. C. Install air terminals on structure steel framework bonded to the down coming cables. Unless otherwise specified herein, all materials shall be tin plated copper with 316 stainless steel fasteners (bolts, nuts, washers and anchors) , and used in accordance with LPI, UL and NFPA code requirements. 2. Provide conduit as specified under Section 26 05 33. D. Bond structure steel framework as required by NFPA 780 and UL 96A. E. Bond all metal pipes and metal structures as required by NFPA 780 and UL 96A.. LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM MARCH 27, 2026 2641 00-6 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRF F. All concealed conductors shall be installed in Schedule 40 PVC conduit. G. Provide a dedicated lightning protection system ground rod at the ground end of each down lead in accordance with NFPA 780 4.13.1.1(1). If a grounding counterpoise loop is present, bond each lightning protection system down lead to the nearest power system grounding electrode (ground rod) which is a part of the counterpoise in accordance with NFPA 780 4.13.1.1(2). 2. Exothermically weld each down lead to the ground rod. Install all down lead conductors without splice from the roof lightning protection conductors to the dedicated lightning protection system ground rod. H. Exothermically weld all concealed lightning protection system connections. The only exception shall be for lightning protection systems installed in NEC Classified areas as determined by NFPA 820, the Engineer or the NEC Authority Having Jurisdiction. I. Connect all components of the system, on or above the roof, to the system ground. 3.02 TESTING A. Employ the services of a UL field inspector, for inspection of the system upon completion of the installation. Make all corrections and additions deemed necessary by the UL inspector. 2. No increase in the Contract Price or Schedule will be allowed for the UL inspection and any subsequent re -inspections as required. B. Inspection and testing to be performed by personnel regularly engaged in the installation and testing of Master Labeled lightning protection systems. C. Inspect the system for proper installation. D. Test the complete system for continuity to the electrical grounding system. E. An application shall be made to the Underwriters Laboratories Inc. for inspection and certification and shall be delivered to the Engineer within 5 days of the application being submitted, confirming that all concealed components have been monitored during job construction. F. A UL Certification shall be provided for every new structure, including all parts of existing structures that are expanded, as defined by NFPA 780 and UL 96A. A Master Label shall be obtained for all structures where the service voltage is less than 1000 VAC. Submit copies of the Master Labels for each structure to the Engineer/Owner for record. MARCH 27, 2026 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 2641 00-7 MARYS CREEK WRF G. All inspections shall be done by a third -party inspector in person on site by a UL or LPI certified inspector. 1. Self -inspection by the lightning protection system designer or installer is not acceptable. Photographic inspection is not acceptable. 2. All lightning protection system inspections shall be witnessed by the Engineer / Owner. 3. Unwitnessed inspections are not acceptable and shall be re -done if not witnessed with no change in the Contract Price or Contract Time. 4. Submit original handwritten and final typed and certified inspection reports to the Engineer/Owner for record. END OF SECTION LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM MARCH 27, 2026 2641 00-8 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY SECTION 26 43 13 LOW VOLTAGE AC SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES (SPDS) PARTI GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. This Section of the Specifications describes the requirements for low voltage AC surge protective devices (SPDs 1Kv and less), to be furnished under other Sections of the Specifications. B. All equipment described herein shall be submitted, and factory installed, as an integral part of equipment specified elsewhere in these Specifications. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Refer to Division 26 00 00 for related work and electrical coordination requirements. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for equipment specified herein shall be made as a part of equipment furnished under other Sections. Individual submittals for equipment specified herein will not be accepted and will be returned unreviewed. B. Submittals shall be made in accordance with the requirements of Division 1, Section26 00 00, the Contract Documents and as specified herein the following: 1. The manufacturers' names and product designation or catalog numbers for the types of materials specified or shown on the Drawings. 2. Cut sheets for each individual item shall be submitted. 3. All cut sheets shall be clearly marked to indicate which products are being submitted for use on this project. 4. Unmarked cut sheets will cause the submittal to be rejected and returned for revision. C. All shop drawing submittals and all O&M submittals shall be submitted in accordance with the requirements listed in Division 1. No change in Contract Price or Schedule will be allowed for delays due to unacceptable submittals. D. Submittals shall also contain information on related equipment to be furnished under this Specification. Incomplete submittals not containing the required information on the related equipment will also be returned without review. MARCH 27, 2026 LOW VOLTAGE AC SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES SPDS) ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 2643 13- 1 MARYS CREEK WRF E. Submit to the Owner/Engineer, shop drawings and product data, for the following: Submit catalog data for all items supplied from this specification Section as applicable. Submittal shall include catalog data, functions, ratings, inputs, outputs, displays, etc., enough to confirm that the SPD provides every specified requirement. Any options or exceptions shall be clearly indicated, with the reason for such deviations. Acceptance of any deviation will be at the sole discretion of the Owner/Engineer. Shop drawings, not so checked and noted, will be returned unreviewed. 2. Dimensional drawing of each SPD type. 3. UL 1449 Third Edition Listing, Standard for Safety, Surge Protective Devices, documentation. Provide verification that the SPD complies with the required ANSI/UL 1449 3rd Edition listing by Underwriters Laboratories (UL) or other Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL). 4. UL 1283 Listing, Electromagnetic Interference Filters, documentation. 5. ANSI/IEEE C6241 and C6245, Category C3 (20kV-1.2/50, 10kA-8/20µs waveform) clamping voltage test results. F. Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 1. Operation and Maintenance manuals shall include the following information: a. Manufacturer's contact address and telephone number for parts and service. b. Instruction books and/or leaflets c. Recommended renewal parts list d. Record Documents for the information required by the Submittals above. 1.04 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. The equipment in this specification shall be designed and manufactured according to latest revision of the following standards (unless otherwise noted): UL 1449 Third Edition — Surge Protective Devices 2. UL 1283 Electromagnetic Interference Filters LOW VOLTAGE AC SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES (SPDS) MARCH 27, 2026 2643 13-2 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY 3. ANSI/IEEE C62.41.2-2002 - IEEE Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surge Voltages in Low Voltage AC Power Circuits 4. ANSI/IEEE C62.45-2002 — IEEE Recommended Practice on Surge Testing for Equipment Connected to Low -Voltage AC Power Circuits. 5. NEC Article 285 - Surge Protective Devices 6. NEMA/ISCI — 109 Transient Overvoltage Withstand Test 7. IEEE Std. 472/ANSI C37.90A Surge Withstand Capability Tests 8. IEC 255.4 Surge Withstand Capability Tests B. All SPDs and their installation shall comply with the requirements of the National Electric Code and Underwriters Laboratories (UL) where applicable. C. Each specified device shall also conform to the standards and codes listed in the individual device paragraphs. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar electrical equipment for a minimum period of five years. When requested by the Owner/Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement. B. The manufacturer of the SPD shall be the same as the manufacturer of the service entrance and distribution equipment in which the devices are installed and shipped. The protected electrical equipment, after installation of the SPD, shall be fully tested and certified to the following UL standards: 1. UL 67 - Panelboards. 2. UL 845 - Motor Control Centers. 3. UL 891 - Switchboards. 4. UL 1558 - Low Voltage Switchgear. C. For the equipment specified herein, the manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 or 9002 certified. 1.06 WARRANTY Provide the warranty time specified in Division 1. PART 2 PRODUCTS MARCH 27, 2026 LOW VOLTAGE AC SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES SPDS) ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 2643 13-3 MARYS CREEK WRF 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable (Type 1 and Type 2): 1. Eaton 2. ABB 3. Schneider Electric Company 4. Rockwell Automation 5. Approved equal. B. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable (Type 3): 1. Edco SLAC Series 2. Phoenix Contact 3. Brick Wall Model PWOM20 4. Approved equal. 2.02 SERVICE ENTRANCE AND DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT A. General 1. Install SPDs internal to the equipment being protected. Externally housed SPDs will not be acceptable. 2. Provide all SPDs marked with a short-circuit current rating equal to or exceeding the available fault current at the connection point. 3. SPD shall provide suppression for all modes of protection: L -N, L -G, and N -G in WYE systems (7 Mode). 4. UL 1449 Usage Classifications. a. Type 1: 1) Permanently connected SPDs 2) Install between the secondary of the service transformer and the line side of the service equipment overcurrent device 3) Install without an external overcurrent protective device. b. Type 2: LOW VOLTAGE AC SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES (SPDS) MARCH 27, 2026 2643 13-4 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRF 1) Permanently connected SPDs 2) Install on the load side of service equipment overcurrent device 3) Install on branch panels. c. Type 3 1) Point of utilization SPDs 2) Install at the point of utilization with a minimum conductor length of 10 meters (30 feet) from the electrical service panel 3) For cord connected, direct plug-in, receptacle type SPDs installed at the utilization equipment being protected, the distance (10 meters) is exclusive of conductors provided with or used to attach the SPDs. 5. Construction of Type 1 and Type 2. a. Fully Integrated Component Design: 1) All the SPD's components and diagnostics shall be contained within one discrete assembly. 2) SPDs or individual SPD modules that must be ganged together to achieve higher surge current ratings or other functionality will not be accepted. b. Overcurrent Protection: 1) Thermally protected MOVs that include a thermal protection element packaged together with the MOV to achieve overcurrent protection of the MOV. 2) The thermal protection element shall disconnect the MOV(s) from the system in a fail-safe manner should a condition occur, that would cause them to enter a thermal runaway condition. c. Maintenance Free Design: 1) Maintenance free and not requiring any user intervention throughout its life. 2) SPDs containing items such as replaceable modules, replaceable fuses, or replaceable batteries are not acceptable. 3) SPDs requiring any maintenance of any sort such as periodic tightening of connections are not acceptable. MARCH 27, 2026 LOW VOLTAGE AC SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES SPDS) ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 2643 13-5 MARYS CREEK WRF d. Balanced Suppression Platform: 1) Surge current equally distributed to all MOV components to ensure equal stressing and maximum performance. 2) Surge suppression platform must provide equal impedance paths to each matched MOV. 3) Designs incorporating replaceable SPD modules are not acceptable. e. Electrical Noise Filter: 1) Include a high-performance EMI/RFI noise rejection filter. 2) Noise attenuation for electric line noise shall be up to 50 dB from 10 kHz to 100 MHz using the MIL -STD -220A insertion loss test method. f. Internal Connections: 1) Plug-in component modules or printed circuit boards used as surge current conductors are unacceptable. 2) Provide all internal components soldered or hardwired with low impedance connections and conductors. 3) Prewire power and ground connections within the protected equipment. g. Local Monitoring: 1) Provide visible indication of proper SPD connection and operation. 2) Provide indicator lights that indicate which phase as well as which module is fully operable. 3) Mount status of each SPD module on the front cover of the enclosure as well as on the module. 4) Provide a push -to -test button to test each phase indicator which causes a state change of dry contacts for testing purposes when the button is pressed. h. Surge Counter: LOW VOLTAGE AC SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES (SPDS) MARCH 27, 2026 2643 13-6 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY 1) Provide an indicator showing how many surges have occurred at the location which counts each time a surge event with a peak current magnitude of a minimum of 50 ± 20A occurs. 2) Provide a reset pushbutton which allows the surge counter to be zeroed. 3) Provide a timed reset button to prevent accidental resetting of the counter. A single, short -duration button press cannot reset the counter. Provide a minimum reset time delay of two seconds to reset the counter. 4) Store the ongoing surge count in non-volatile memory or memory backed up by a UPS. Remote Monitoring: 1) Provide the same discrete and analog signal and control functions as specified for local monitoring and the surge counter. 2) Wire the signal to a terminal strip for outgoing connection to a PLC as specified and/or as shown on the Drawings. 3) Convert the functions as specified for interface to the monitored equipment. j. Voltage suppression system 1) Provide a voltage surge suppression system incorporating thermally protected metal -oxide varistors (MOVs) as the core surge suppression component for the service entrance and all other distribution levels. 2) The system shall not utilize silicon avalanche diodes, selenium cells, air gaps, or other components that may crowbar the system voltage leading to system upset or create any environmental hazards. k. SPD Standards: I) Provide SPDs Listed in accordance with UL 1449 Third Edition and UL 1283, Electromagnetic Interference Filters. 2) Integrated surge protective devices (SPD) shall be Component Recognized in accordance with UL 1449 Third Edition, Section 37.3.2 and 37.4 at the standard's highest short circuit current MARCH 27, 2026 LOW VOLTAGE AC SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES SPDS) ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 2643 13-7 MARYS CREEK WRF rating (SCCR) of 200 kA, including intermediate level of fault current testing. 3) SPD shall be tested with the ANSI/IEEE Category C High exposure waveform (20kV-1.2/50µs, l0kA-8/20µs). 6. Construction of Type 3. a. Fully Integrated Component Design: 1) Provide all SPD's components and diagnostics contained within one discrete assembly. 2) SPDs or individual SPD modules that must be ganged together to achieve higher surge current ratings or other functionality will not be accepted. b. Maintenance Free Design: 1) Provide maintenance free SPDs that do not require any user intervention throughout its life. 2) SPDs containing items such as replaceable modules, replaceable fuses, or replaceable batteries are not acceptable. 3) SPDs requiring any maintenance of any sort such as periodic tightening of connections are not acceptable. c. Electrical Noise Filter: 1) Include a high-performance EMI/RFI noise rejection filter. 2) Provide electric line noise attenuation up to 50 dB from 10 kHz to 100 MHz using the MIL -STD -220A insertion loss test method. d. Internal Connections: 1) No plug-in component modules or printed circuit boards used as surge current conductors are acceptable. 2) Solder all internal components or hardwired with low impedance connections and conductors. 3) Prewire power and ground connections within the protected equipment. e. Local Monitoring: LOW VOLTAGE AC SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES (SPDS) MARCH 27, 2026 2643 13-8 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY 1) Visible indication of proper SPD connection and operation shall be provided. 2) The indicator light shall indicate that the module is fully operable. The status of each SPD module shall be monitored on the front cover of the module. f. SPD Standards: 1) Listed in accordance with UL 1449 Third Edition and UL 1283, Electromagnetic Interference Filters. 2) Test with the ANSI/IEEE Category C High exposure waveform (20kV 1.2/50µs, I0kA-8/20µs). B. Applications. 1. Service Entrance Rated Equipment (Type 1). a. Install in switchgear, switchboards, panelboards, motor control centers, and other devices installed as service entrance equipment. b. Permanently install the SPD with its connection between the secondary of the service transformer and the line side of the service equipment overcurrent device. c. Provide service entrance located SPDs with tested and demonstrated suitability for application within ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Category C environments. d. Provide SPDs manufactured by the same manufacturer as the equipment in which it is installed. e. Factory install the SPD inside the equipment by the original equipment manufacturer. f. Locate the SPD on the load side of the main disconnect device, as close as possible to the phase conductors and the ground/neutral bars. g. Connect the SPD through a UL approved disconnecting means. Locate the disconnect shall in the immediate proximity of the SPD. h. Provide SPD connections using approved means that keep the connection as short as possible. i. Provide SPDs integral to the equipment as a factory standardized design. j. Mount SPDs such that all monitoring and diagnostic features are visible from the front of the equipment. MARCH 27, 2026 LOW VOLTAGE AC SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES SPDS) ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 2643 13-9 MARYS CREEK WRF 2. Distribution Equipment Applications (Type 2). a. Install in switchgear, switchboards, panelboards, motor control centers, and other non -service entrance equipment. Permanently install the SPD connected on the load side of the equipment overcurrent device. b. Provide SPDs manufactured by the same manufacturer as the equipment in which it is installed. c. Factory install the SPD inside the equipment by the original equipment manufacturer. d. Size and provide the overcurrent and disconnecting means for the SPD by the manufacturer. e. Provide SPDs with tested and demonstrated suitability for application within ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Category B environments. f. Locate the SPD within the panelboard. Install SPDs immediately following the load side of the main breaker. Install SPDs in main lug only panelboards immediately following the incoming main lugs. g. The SPD installation shall not limit the use of through -feed lugs, sub - feed lugs, and sub -feed breaker options. h. Mount SPDs such that all monitoring and diagnostic features are visible from the front of the equipment. 3. Individual Control Panel and Related Equipment Protection (Type 3). a. Locate the SPD on the load side of the ground and neutral connections. b. Connect the SPD through a disconnect circuit breaker or fuse as shown on the drawings. c. Locate the disconnecting means in the immediate proximity of the SPD. Provide SPD connections using approved means that keep the connection as short as possible. d. All monitoring and diagnostic features shall be visible from the front of the equipment. 4. Mechanical Equipment Manufacturer's Provided Control Panels (MEMs) and Electrical Manufacturer's Provided Control Panels (OEMs) Applications (Type 1, Type 2, and Type 3) LOW VOLTAGE AC SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES (SPDS) MARCH 27, 2026 2643 13-10 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY a. Provide a Type 1 SPD in any Control Panel installed as service entrance equipment. 1) The same requirements for other service entrance equipment listed above apply to this application. 2) The Type 1 SPD is required to be of the same manufacturer as the Control Panel manufacturer. 3) Provide a Type 1 SPD where a Control Panel is installed as non - service entrance equipment, but is connected with the incoming power feed of 50' or less from an transformer fed from an overhead power line. 4) The same requirements for other non -service entrance equipment listed above apply to this application except for the requirement that the Type 2 SPD shall not be required to be of the same manufacturer as the panel. 5) Where a Type 1 SPD is installed, a Type 2 SPD is not required on the same panel unless otherwise specifically shown on the drawings. b. Provide a Type 3 SPD in any Control Panel that contains a PLC. 1) The same requirements for other individual control panel and related equipment listed above apply to this application. 2) The SPD shall be integral to the MEM or OEM panel, as a factory standardized design. C. Ratings 1. Unit Operating Voltage: Refer to drawings for operating voltage and unit configuration. 2. SPD shall be designed to withstand a maximum continuous operating voltage (MCOV) of not less than 115% of nominal RMS voltage. 3. Minimum surge current rating shall be 240 kA per phase (120 kA per mode) for service entrance and 120 kA per phase (60 kA per mode) for distribution applications. 4. UL 1449 clamping voltage must not exceed the following: Voltage Protection Rating (VPR) Voltage L -N L -G N -G MARCH 27, 2026 LOW VOLTAGE AC SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES SPDS) ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTAAND ASSOCIATES, INC. 2643 13- 11 MARYS CREEK WRF 240/120 1200/800V 800V 800V 208Y/120 800V 800V 800V 480Y.277 1200V 1200V 1200V 600Y/347 1500V 1500V 1500V 5. Pulse life test: Capable of protecting against and surviving 5000 ANSI/IEEE Category C High transients without failure or degradation of clamping voltage by more than 10%. 6. Minimum UL 1449 3rd edition withstand Nominal Discharge Current (In) rating to be 20kA per mode 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Furnish nameplates for each device as indicated on drawings. Color schemes shall be as indicated on Drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. All equipment specified herein shall be factory installed, field adjusted, tested and cleaned as an integral part of equipment specified elsewhere in the individual equipment Specification. B. Types 1 and 2 shall be grounded and bonded as a part of the individual equipment as specified in the individual equipment Section. Type 3 shall be grounded and bonded in accordance with the SPD manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION LOW VOLTAGE AC SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES (SPDS) MARCH 27, 2026 2643 13-12 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY SECTION 26 50 00 LIGHTING SYSTEM PARTI GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required and install a complete lighting system ready for operation as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Refer to Division 26 00 00 and the Contract Drawings, for related work and electrical coordination requirements. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be made in accordance with the requirements of Division 1, Section26 00 00, the Contract Documents and as specified herein the following: The manufacturers' names and product designation or catalog numbers for the types of materials specified or shown on the Drawings. 2. Cut sheets for each individual item shall be submitted. 3. All cut sheets shall be clearly marked to indicate which products are being submitted for use on this project. 4. Unmarked cut sheets will cause the submittal to be rejected and returned for revision. B. All shop drawing submittals and all O&M submittals shall be submitted in accordance with the requirements listed in Division 1. No change in Contract Price or Schedule will be allowed for delays due to unacceptable submittals. C. Submittals shall also contain information on related equipment to be furnished under this Specification. Incomplete submittals not containing the required information on the related equipment will also be returned without review D. Submittals shall be made in accordance with the requirements of the process equipment division of these Specifications, and as specified herein. E. Submit for approval, a manufacturer's conducted training agenda for all training specified herein. Training agenda shall not be submitted until final approval of the Operation and Maintenance Manual. MARCH 27, 2026 LIGHTING SYSTEM ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 26 50 00 - 1 MARYS CREEK WRF F. Submit to the Owner/Engineer, shop drawings and product data, for the following: Manufacturer's technical information for the materials proposed for use in the systems. 2. Submit the following details: a. Manufacturer's name and catalog data for all lighting equipment specified in this Section and/or for those specified on the lighting fixture schedule. b. Indicate on the cut sheets for each luminaire the luminaire designation given to each on the lighting schedule and shown on the plans. Submit all fixture, drivers and control shop drawings at one time, in one package. Include all luminaire, driver and integral controls previously rejected or requiring further information in each resubmittal. Specialty SSL, custom, or modified fixtures may be submitted as a separate package. d. Reproductions of the Contract Drawings are not acceptable as shop drawings. Provide dimensions, ratings and specific catalog number and identification of items and accessories and performance data. f. Provide dimensions and a complete list and cut sheets for all components for each luminaire that are not a standard product of the manufacturer. Provide engineered schematics and wiring diagrams as required for special operation or interaction with other system(s). Reproducing the Engineer's schematics or wiring diagrams is not acceptable 4. Photometric Data: a. Where indicated below or for substitutions, supply complete photometric data for the fixture, including optical performance, rendered by NVLAP approved laboratory developed according to the methods of the Illuminating Engineering Society of North America. Submit electronically, in IESNA LM -63 standard format. Types XX and YY. b. Submit photometric data for all substitute luminaries. Photometric reports are not required from specified manufacturer unless otherwise specified herein. If lacking sufficient detail to indicate compliance with Contract Documents, standard specification sheets will not be accepted. This includes, but is not limited to, luminaire type designation, manufacturer's complete catalog number, voltage, LED type, CCT, CRI, specific driver information, system efficacy, L70 life rating, and any modifications necessary to meet the requirements of the Contract Documents. 6. Substitutions shall include the following: LIGHTING SYSTEM MARCH 27, 2026 265000-2 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTAAND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY a. Provide the layout of the substituted fixtures if different from those shown on the drawings. b. Provide complete photometric data and point -by -point calculations for each area substitute fixtures are submitted on the project to demonstrate that the substituted fixtures provide the same lighting level as the original design. c. Samples shall be required for consideration of any substitutions and must be submitted in accordance with the terms specified herein. Provide working Samples of all substitutions as follows: 1) Modify, if necessary, to operate on 120 VAC. 2) Provide each sample with a 120 -volt with cord and plug attached. 3) Include specified LEDs and all modifications necessary to meet the requirements specified in the Contract Documents. G. Energy Efficiency: 1. Submit documentation for Energy Star qualifications for equipment provided under work of this Section. 2. Submit data indicating luminaire efficiency. 3. Submit data indicating Ballast Efficacy Factor (BEF). 4. Submit data indicating Luminaire Efficacy rating (LER). 5. Submit data indicating color rendition index of light source. H. Submit environmental data in accordance with Table 1 ofASTM E2129 for products provided under work of this Section. I. Manufacturer's technical information for the materials proposed for use in the systems. 1.04 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. All lighting fixtures shall be in accordance with the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code" (NEC), and shall be constructed in accordance with the latest edition of the Underwriters Laboratories (UL) "Standards for Safety, Electric Lighting Fixtures". B. National Energy Policy Act of 2005, Public Law No. 109-58. C. IESNA LM -63 - ANSI Approved Standard File Format for Electronic Transfer of Photometric Data and Related Information; 2002. MARCH 27, 2026 LIGHTING SYSTEM ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 265000-3 MARYS CREEK WRF D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2008. E. IESNA LM -79-08 IESNA - Approved Method for Electrical and Photometric. F. Measurements of Solid State Lighting Products; 2008. G. IESNA LM -80-08 IESNA - Approved Method for Measuring Lumen Maintenance of LED Light Sources. H. IESNA LM -80-08 IESNA - Approved Method for Measuring Lumen Maintenance of LED Light Sources. IESNA TM -21-2011 — Projecting Long Term Lumen Maintenance of LED Light Sources. J. UL 8750 — Light Emitting Diode (LED) Equipment for Use in Lighting Products. K. OSHA 29CFR1910.7 — Fixture shall be listed by national recognized testing laboratory approved by United Stated Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide energy -efficient type fixtures. B. The manufacturer of these materials shall have produced similar lighting fixtures for a minimum period of five years. When requested by the Owner/Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with similar systems shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement. C. Manufacture fixture in accordance with a manufacturer quality assurance (QA) program. 1. The QA program shall include two types of quality assurance: (1) design quality assurance and (2) production quality assurance. 2. The production quality assurance shall include statistically controlled routine tests to ensure minimum performance levels of the modules built to meet this specification. These tests shall include: CCT, CRI, Lumen output and wattage. 3. Tests shall be recorded, analyzed and maintained for future reference. 4. QA process and test results documentation shall be kept on file for a minimum period of seven years. D. LED fixture designs not satisfying design qualification testing and the production quality assurance testing performance requirements described below shall not be labeled, advertised, or sold as conforming to this specification. LIGHTING SYSTEM MARCH 27, 2026 265000-4 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTAAND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY E. Equipment submitted shall fit within the space shown on the Drawings. Equipment which does not fit within the space is not acceptable. 1.06 JOBSITE DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Prior to jobsite delivery, complete all submittal requirements, and present to the Owner/Engineer upon delivery of the equipment, an approved copy of all such submittals. Delivery of incomplete constructed equipment, onsite factory work, or failed factory tests will not be permitted. B. Protect equipment during shipment, handling, and storage by suitable complete enclosures. Protect equipment from exposure to the elements and keep thoroughly dry. C. Protect painted surfaces against impact, abrasion, discoloration, and other damage. Repaint damaged painted surfaces to the satisfaction of the Owner/Engineer. D. Equipment shall be installed in its permanent location shown on the Drawings within seven calendar days of arriving onsite. If the equipment cannot be installed within seven calendar days, the equipment shall be stored on site in a dry heated and air-conditioned space. If there is no such storage space on site, the equipment shall not be delivered to the site, but stored offsite, until such time that the site is ready for permanent installation of the equipment. No change in the Contract Price will be allowed for storage or transportation. 1.07 WARRANTY Provide the warranty time specified in Division 1. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable: Lighting fixture manufacturers and types as required by the "Lighting Fixture Schedule" on the Drawings. 2. The catalog numbers are given as a guide to the design and quality of fixture desired. Equivalent designs and equal quality fixtures of other manufacturers will be acceptable only upon approval by the Owner/Engineer. B. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. MARCH 27, 2026 LIGHTING SYSTEM ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 265000-5 MARYS CREEK WRF Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. 2.02 LIGHTING FIXTURES A. General 1. All lamps shall be of one manufacturer. 2. All ballasts shall be UL listed, ETL certified, Class "P", high power factor (minimum 0.90). 3. Ballasts shall have an "A" sound rating or better. 4. All ballasts used in exterior applications shall have a minimum starting temperature of 0°F unless otherwise specified. 5. All interior ballasts shall have a minimum starting temperature of 50°F. 6. Ballasts shall be parallel wired type and designed to operate the number and length of lamps specified. 7. The total harmonic distortion (THD) of each ballast shall be 10% or less. 8. Ballasts shall have a minimum ballast factor of 0.88 = N and as specified in the fixture schedule. 9. Ballasts shall have nominal power factor 0.90 or higher. 10. Ballasts shall have a maximum lamp current crest factor of 1.4. 11. Ballast shall provide normal rated life for the lamp specified. 12. All electronic ballasts shall be warranted for parts and replacement for five full years from the date of installation. 13. All ballasts shall be as manufactured by G.E., Advance, Model Mark V, similar by Osram/Sylvania, MagneTek or equal. B. Fixed Mount 1. Fluorescent Fixtures a. Lamps 1) Furnish high lumen fluorescent lamps where listed. 2) Linear fluorescent lamps shall be T8 or T5 as required by the fixture, rapid/instant start, tri-phosphor, minimum CRI 86, and compact types all as shown on the Fixture Schedule. b. Ballasts LIGHTING SYSTEM MARCH 27, 2026 265000-6 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTAAND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY 1) All linear fluorescent light fixtures shall have an electronic ballast unless otherwise noted on the Lighting Fixture Schedule. 2. High Pressure Sodium Fixtures a. Lamps 1) Dual arc tube HPS as shown on the "Lighting Fixture Schedule." 2) High pressure sodium lamps shall be clear, non -cycling, and of the size and type as shown on the Lighting Fixture Schedule. b. Ballasts 1) High pressure sodium ballasts shall be of the constant wattage type, with multi -tap windings, of the correct size and voltage for the fixture it is to serve as shown on the Lighting Fixture Schedule. 3. Metal Halide Fixtures a. Lamps 1) Metal halide lamps shall be clear pulse -start, and of the size and type as shown on the Lighting Fixture Schedule. b. Ballasts 1) Pulse -start metal halide ballasts shall be of the constant wattage auto -transformer type, with a minimum efficiency of 88%, for lamp wattages from 150 watts to 500 watts. 2) Non -pulse start electronic ballasts shall have an efficiency of 92% for wattages greater than 250 watts and a minimum efficiency of 90% for wattages less than or equal to 250 watts. 4. Incandescent Fixtures a. Lamps 1) Incandescent lamps shall be compact fluorescent self -ballasted, minimum 1000 hours. C. LED Fixture 1. Each luminaire shall consist of an assembly that utilizes LEDs as the light source. In addition, a complete luminaire shall consist of a housing, LED array, and electronic driver (power supply) and integral controls as per this specification. MARCH 27, 2026 LIGHTING SYSTEM ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 265000-7 MARYS CREEK WRF 2. Each luminaire shall be designed to operate at an average operating temperature of 25°C. 3. The operating temperature range shall be 0°C to +25°C. Each luminaire shall meet all parameters of this specification throughout the minimum operational life when operated at the average operating temperature. 4. Nominal luminaire dimensions: refer to light fixture schedules. D. Luminaire Construction: 1. Luminaire housing to have no visible welding, screws, springs, hooks, rivets, bare LEDs or plastic supports. 2. The luminaire shall be a single, self-contained device, not requiring onsite assembly for installation. The power supply and circuit board for the luminaire shall be integral to the unit. 3. Fixture shall be fabricated from post painted cold rolled steel and shall be a rigid structure with integral T -bar clips. 4. Finish: Polyester powder coat painted with 92% high -reflective paint after fabrication. 5. Reflector: rugged one-piece cold rolled steel with embossed multi -facets, echoing the frequency of the refractor prisms to distribute soft light at multiple angles, without flashing thus reducing high luminance contrast. 6. End caps shall be sloped at 70 degrees to create depth. 7. Luminaire to have smooth transition between T -bar and reflector arch. No doorframe or exposed hardware. 8. Polymeric materials (if used) of enclosures containing either the power supply or electronic components of the luminaire shall be made of UL94VO flame retardant materials. Luminaire lenses are excluded from this requirement. 9. Integral Grid Clips required on recessed mounted fixture along with integral tie wire mounting points. 10. Luminaire to have air removal capability as specified. 11. The assembly and manufacturing process for the SSL luminaire shall be designed to assure all internal components are adequately supported to withstand mechanical shock and vibration. E. LED Sources LEDs shall be manufactured by: a. Nichia b. Samsung LIGHTING SYSTEM MARCH 27, 2026 265000-8 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTAAND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY Osram 2. Lumen Output — minimum initial lumen output of the luminaire shall be as follows for the lumens exiting the luminaire in the 0 -90 -degree zone - as measured by IESNA Standard LM -79-08 in an accredited lab. Exact tested lumen output shall be clearly noted on the shop drawings. Lumen output shall not decrease by more than 20% over the minimum operational life of 50,000 hours. 4. Individual LEDs shall be connected such that a catastrophic loss or the failure of one LED will not result in the loss of the entire luminaire. LED Boards shall be suitable for field maintenance or service from below the ceiling with plug-in connectors. LED boards shall be upgradable. 6. Light Color/Quality a. Correlated Color temperature (CCT) range as per specification, between 3500K, 4100K and 5 000K shall be correlated to chromaticity as defined by the absolute (X,Y) coordinates on the 2-D CIE chromaticity chart. b. The color rendition index (CRI) shall be 80 or greater. Color shift over 6,000 hours shall be <0.007 change in u' v' as demonstrated in IES LM80 report. F. Power Supply and Driver Driver: AccuDrive, 120-277 Volt, UL Listed, CSA Certified, Sound Rated A+. Driver shall be greater than 80% efficient at full load across all input voltages. Input wires shall be #18 AWG solid copper minimum. 2. Driver shall be suitable for full -range dimming. The luminaire shall be capable of continuous dimming without perceivable flicker over a range of 100% to 5% of rated lumen output with a smooth shutoff function. Dimming shall be controlled by a 0-10 volt signal. Driver shall be UL listed. 4. Maximum stand-by power shall be one watt. Driver disconnect shall be provided where required to comply with codes. 6. The electronics/power supply enclosure shall be internal to the SSL luminaire and be accessible per UL requirements. 7. The surge protection which resides within the driver shall protect the luminaire from damage and failure for transient voltages and currents as defined in ANSI/IEEE C64.41 2002 for Location Category A, where failure does not mean a momentary loss of light during the transient event. G. Electrical MARCH 27, 2026 LIGHTING SYSTEM ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 265000-9 MARYS CREEK WRF Operation Voltage - The luminaire shall operate from a 50 or 60 Hertz 13 Hertz AC line over a voltage ranging from 120 volts AC to 277 volts AC. The fluctuations of line voltage shall have no visible effect on the luminous output. The standard operating voltages are 120 volts AC, 277 volts AC, 347 volts AC. 2. Power Factor: The luminaire shall have a power factor of 90% or greater at all standard operating voltages and full luminaire output. THD: Total harmonic distortion (current and voltage) induced into an AC power line by a luminaire shall not exceed 20% at any standard input voltage. 4. Surge Suppression: The luminaire shall include surge protection to withstand high repetition noise and other interference. RF Interference: The luminaire and associated onboard circuitry must meet Class A emission limits referred in Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Title 47, Subpart B, Section 15 Non -Consumer requirements for EMURFI emissions. 6. Electrical connections between normal power and driver must be modular utilizing a snap fit connector. All electrical components must be easily accessible after installation and be replaceable without removing the fixture from the ceiling. 7. All electrical components shall be RoHS compliant. H. Exit Sign: UL listed. 2. Provide with automatic power failure device with integral self -testing module and fully automatic high/low trickle charger in a self-contained power pack. Battery shall be sealed electrolyte type; shall operate unattended; and require no maintenance, including no additional water, for a period of not less than five years. LED exit sign shall have emergency run time of 1-1/2 hours (minimum). 4. The light emitting diodes shall have rated lamp life of 70,000 hours (minimum). All exit sign fixtures shall be rated maximum of five watts per fixture. Photometric Requirements Luminaire performance shall be tested as described herein. 2. Luminaire performance shall be judged against the specified minimum illuminance in the specified pattern for a particular application. Luminaire lighting performance shall be adjusted (depreciated) for the minimum life expectancy (Section 2.2.5). 4. The performance shall be adjusted (depreciated) by using the LED manufacturer's data or the data from the IESNA Standard TM -21 test report, which ever one results in a higher level of lumen depreciation. 5. The luminaire may be determined to be compliant photometrically, if: LIGHTING SYSTEM MARCH 27, 2026 265000-10 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTAAND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY a. The initial minimum illuminance level is achieved in 100% of the area of the specified lighting pattern. b. The measurements shall be calibrated to standard photopic calibrations. Add specific project requirements. J. Thermal Management The thermal management (of the heat generated by the LEDs) shall be of sufficient capacity to assure proper operation of the luminaire over the expected useful life (Section 1.2.9 c). 2. The LED manufacturer's maximum junction temperature for the expected life (Section 1.2.9 c) shall not be exceeded at the average operating ambient (Section 1.2.4). The LED manufacturer's maximum junction temperature for the catastrophic failure shall not be exceeded at the maximum operating ambient (Section 1.2.5). 4. The luminaire shall have an UL IC rating. The Driver manufacturer's maximum case temperature shall not be exceeded at the maximum operating ambient. Thermal management shall be passive by design. The use of fans or other mechanical devices shall not be allowed. K. Emergency Lighting Battery Units Emergency lighting units shall be as specified in the Lighting Fixture Schedule shown on the Drawings. 2. Battery units shall be of the self-contained, fully automatic type with sealed lead acid batteries, voltmeters. Unit enclosures shall be compatible to their environment and units shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 70 (NEC). 4. Provide all necessary mounting hardware. Shall be factory installed and provide a range of 800 to 1400 lumens of light for 90 minutes. Output is based on the size and wattage of the luminaire. 6. Integral or remote test switch shall be provided as per specification. L. Flexible Fixture Hangers Flexible fixture hangers used in non -hazardous areas shall be type ARB and flexible fixture supports used in hazardous areas shall be Type EFH as manufactured by the Crouse -Hinds Co., similar by Appleton Electric Co; Killark a Division of Hubbell Inc.; or equal. MARCH 27, 2026 LIGHTING SYSTEM ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 26 50 00 - 11 MARYS CREEK WRF 2. All pendent -mounted and recessed in suspended ceilings, recessed lighting fixtures shall be provided with four anti -sway supports to meet Type II seismic requirements. M. Portable Fixtures Explosion -proof Portable Handlamp a. An explosion -proof handlamp complete with heavy duty, Type SO, 50 -foot cord and plug shall be furnished. The handlamp shall be manufactured by Appleton Electric Co.; the plug shall be manufactured by Appleton Electric Co., like Daniel Woodhead Co. or equal. 2. Vapor -tight Portable Handlamp a. A vapor -tight handlamp with reflector shall be furnished complete with 50 - foot cord and grounding plug. The handlamp shall be manufactured by Daniel Woodhead Co., similar by Appleton Electric Co. or equal. N. Emergency Lighting Battery Units Emergency lighting units and remote lighting heads shall be as specified in the Lighting Fixture Schedule shown on the Drawings. 2. Battery units shall be of the self-contained, fully automatic type with sealed lead acid batteries, voltmeters and time delay relays where used in H.I.D. lighted areas. Unit enclosures shall be compatible to their environment and units shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 70 (NEC). 4. All necessary mounting hardware shall be provided. O. Flexible Fixture Hangers Flexible fixture hangers used in non -hazardous areas shall be type ARB and flexible fixture supports used in hazardous areas shall be Type ECHF as manufactured by the Crouse -Hinds Co., similar by Appleton Electric Co.; Killark Electrical Mfg. Co. or equal. P. Lamp Changing Equipment Lamp changing equipment shall be able to handle BT -37, ED -18, ED -23-1/2 and ED -28 type H.I.D. lamps in open luminaries. 2. Equipment shall consist of three five-foot steel poles each similar and equal to McGill Catalog No. 160-P and two lamp holders similar and equal to McGill Catalog Nos. 158C and 161C. PART 3 EXECUTION LIGHTING SYSTEM MARCH 27, 2026 26 50 00 - 12 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTAAND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRY 3.01 INSTALLATION A. The location of lighting fixtures shown on the Drawings is approximate. Install the lighting fixtures after major ducts and piping are installed, to avoid conflicts. Install the fixtures to avoid shadows and blocking of light, relocating the fixtures as necessary, at no cost to the Owner. B. Each fixture shall be a finished unit with all components, mounting and/or hanging devices necessary, for the proper installation of the particular fixture in its designated location and shall be completely wired ready for connection to the branch circuit wires at the outlet. C. All flush mounted fixtures shall be supported from the structure and shall not be dependent on the hung ceilings for their support. D. Fixtures noted to be installed flush in suspended ceilings shall be of mounting types suited for the type ceiling involved. Troffers (2 X 4), provided in suspended ceiling grids, shall be installed with safety clips to hold the fixture securely in the ceiling grid. Verify the ceiling types prior to ordering fixtures. E. Flexible fixture hangers shall be used for all pendant mounted fixtures. Fixtures two feet long and larger shall be supported with a minimum of two fixture hangers. F. Install conduits in areas employing hung ceilings in the space above the hung ceiling. Install the conduits as close to the structure as possible. Conduits shall be supported from the structure. G. Exterior lighting poles shall be mounted plumb. H. Fixture locations are shown on the Drawings in approximate locations; however exact locations shall be coordinated to avoid conflicts with HVAC ducts, equipment and other obstacles. 3.02 REPLACEMENT A. Lamps (except for H.I.D.) used during the building construction, prior to two weeks from completion of the work, shall be removed and replaced with new lamps. 3.03 CLEANING UP A. Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and deleterious materials. B. Remove dirt and debris from lens enclosures. MARCH 27, 2026 LIGHTING SYSTEM ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 26 50 00 - 13 MARYS CREEK WRF For cleaning acrylic lenses or diffusers, use a feather duster or dry cotton cheesecloth to rid the lens/diffuser of any minor dust. For fingerprints, smudges, or other dirt present, use an ammonia -based cleaner (such as Windex) and wipe carefully with cotton cheesecloth (so as to avoid injury from any prismatic texture of the lens). 2. Job site contamination may not necessarily be removed using the above recommendations. In that case the lens would need to be replaced. C. Clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. D. Plastic dust cover bags to be provided with new parabolic reflector lighting fixtures shall be removed after all construction activity that may cause dust formation on reflector surfaces has been completed. E. All fixtures shall be left in a clean condition, free of dirt and defects, before acceptance by the Owner/Engineer. END OF SECTION LIGHTING SYSTEM MARCH 27, 2026 26 50 00 - 14 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 GUPTAAND ASSOCIATES, INC. MARYS CREEK WRF SECTION 28 00 05 ELECTRONIC SECURITY SYSTEM PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide, through the services of a single Security System Integrator (SSI), all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals as shown, specified and required to furnish, install, calibrate, test, start-up and place in satisfactory operation an Access Control and Security System (ACSS) and Network Camera Surveillance System (NCSS). B. Provide all labor, material, equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified, and required to design, furnish, install, test, and place into a satisfactory operation for the Security System, as specified herein and as indicated on the Drawings. Also provide all user licenses for the Security System including, but not limited to, operating systems, application programs, and databases, as required. 1. The SSI shall assign network addresses, network policies, computer usernames and passwords in cooperation with OWNER. C. The security system's major components shall consist of electrical cable, network cable, relay boxes, conduits, CCTV cameras, connectors, digital video recorder system, power supplies, Ethernet switch, and access control system. All require mounting hardware, and other appurtenant items shall be furnished as specified herein or recommended by the equipment manufacturer to make a complete system. 1. The SSI shall furnish and install the incidental items not actually shown or specified, which are required by good practice to provide a complete and functional ACSS and NCSS. 2. Reference the General Electrical and I&C Drawings for specific notes regarding security equipment installation requirements. 3. Drawings show general locations of equipment, devices, and raceways unless specifically shown on the Drawings. 4. Drawings do not depict all the required security/access control components, field devices, cabling, jumper cables, interconnects, materials and services. CONTRACTOR is responsible for a complete design and installation of the ACSS and NCSS. D. The security system as described herein shall be compatible with the existing ACSS and NCSS at the plant. E. The SSI shall provide all required software and configuration required for the ACSS and NCSS. MARCH 30, 2026 ELECTRONIC SECURITY SYSTEM ©COPYRIGHT 2026 MCKIM & CREED 28 00 05 - 1 MARYS CREEK WRF F. The SSI may choose to hire a Systems Integrator (SI) to design, build, test and install control panels, network equipment, network cabling, and other associated work. G. Areas of Work 1. Operations Building a. ACSS Main Server, Workstation, and Door Access Systems. b. NCSS Main Server, Workstations, and Cameras. 2. Main Gate, Secondary Gate and Site Perimeter. a. Install Main Security Gate Access Control and Video System. b. Provide Hirschmann RSP30, RSP35 series Security Spur Network Switch and 24VDC UPS unit. c. Install Perimeter intrusion detection system (PIDS) on perimeter fence tied to the perimeter cameras as shown on Contract Drawings. 3. Chemical, Process, Electrical Service and Backup Generators Buildings. a. ACSS Door Systems and NCSS Cameras. b. Provide Hirschmann RSP30, RSP35 Series Security Spur Network Switch and 24VDC UPS Unit. 4. Plant Security Network a. Provide Extreme Networks ISW-24W-4X Security Backbone Network Switches and 24VDC UPS units in the following locations. Backbone switches shall reside in new ACSS/NCSS enclosures and utilize the Security Fiber Optic System Backbone Network cabling (Refer to Sheet I-051 in the Contract Documents) to connect into the access control and video surveillance servers. Provide one 120VAC, 20A power circuit to the security panels from the local 120VAC power panel. 1) Operations Building — Within Server Room Security Network Rack. 2) Solids Building Electrical Room — Within the PCS Network Backbone Enclosure. 3) UV Electrical Room — Within the PCS Network Backbone Enclosure. 4) PTU Building Electrical Room — Within the PCS Network Backbone Enclosure. 5) Communication Building Electrical Room — Within the PCS Network Backbone Enclosure. 6) Electrical Room — Within Standalone NEMA12 Enclosure. H. Due to rapidly evolving technology of the equipment specified herein, the requirements are specified to establish a baseline for the type of equipment required. Provide new hardware and software of the latest and similar specification at the time of purchase equivalent in cost to that which is specified. Refurbished or used equipment will not be accepted. The procedure for submitting and releasing the equipment shall be as follows: ELECTRONIC SECURITY SYSTEM MARCH 30, 2026 280005-2 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 MCKIM & CREED MARYS CREEK WRF 1. The CONTRACTOR shall submit for approval the required data for the equipment as part of the Hardware Submittal. 2. The equipment shall be ordered as late as possible, dependent on the construction schedule to ensure the latest equipment available is provided. Prior to ordering, resubmit for approval the required data of the latest available hardware and software equivalent in cost to that which is specified. No equipment shall be ordered for delivery onsite no more than three months prior to when it is needed to be continuously used on the project. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Equipment, hardware, and installation provided by the SSI shall meet requirements from the following sections: 1. Refer to Division 01 for General Submittal Requirements. 2. Refer to Section 40 61 21 — Process Control System — Testing. 3. Refer to Section 40 62 00 — Computer Hardware and Software. 4. Refer to Section 40 66 00 — Network Equipment. 5. Refer to Section 40 66 33 — Fiber Optic Communication Cabling and Connectors. 6. Refer to Section 40 67 00 — Control Panels and Components. 7. Refer to Section 40 67 63 — Uninterruptible Power Supplies. B. Electrical equipment, conduit, cabling, and other requirements of the electrical CONTRACTOR are included in Division 26 — Electrical Specifications. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. General 1. Provide new ACSS components, configuration, testing, training, and spare parts. This includes new ACSS server(s), software, workstation(s), switches, and hardware as specified herein and shown on the Drawings. 2. Provide new NCSS components, configuration, testing, training, and spare parts. This includes new NCSS server(s), software, workstation(s), switches, and hardware as specified herein and shown on the Drawings. 3. Provide security network components, configuration, testing, training, and spare parts. B. ACSS 1. The function of the ACSS is to ensure that only authorized personnel are permitted ingress and egress to controlled areas of the OWNER's property. 2. System Operation: a. The remote access control panels shall be capable of being programmed from a central programming station or locally at each access controller. MARCH 30, 2026 ELECTRONIC SECURITY SYSTEM ©COPYRIGHT 2026 MCKIM & CREED 280005-3 MARYS CREEK WRF b. The ACSS shall grant access at doors with card readers by comparing the time and location of any attempted entry with information stored in memory. c. Access shall be granted only when the security card used has a valid entry code at the card reader/terminal for a designated time frame. d. The central controller shall constantly poll all panels for status. If a panel is disabled, an alarm condition shall be reported audibly and visually. Alarm conditions from the reader/terminal monitoring points shall be instantly reported audibly and visually at the central controller. e. As part of the ACSS, certain intrusion detection and access control components are connected into the ACSS such as microwave sensors, passive infrared interior motion sensors, electrical door strikes, electro-magnetic locks, and vehicle gate controller. f. The ACSS shall provide bi-directional communications via Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) allowing information such as doors status, card reader status, and alarms to be read by the Network Camera Surveillance System (NCSS). g. The ACSS shall be housed inside the Access Control Panel and separate Network Cabinets per Contract drawing design. h. The Access Control Panel shall have an intrusion panel door switch that alert the operators should an intrusion occur. i. IP addresses and subnet masks for the security system devices shall be coordinated with the NCS and OWNER ITs to ensure that all devices on the security network have a unique IP address. The CONTRACTOR shall provide an IP address list for OWNER approval. The CONTRACTOR shall assign IP addresses to IP enabled devices, which include but is not limited to, the NCS, any Industrial Managed Switches, Access Control Panels, Intercom Servers, and Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) units. j. The Access Control Workstations shall be integrated with the gates control screens to allow operators in the guardhouse to open the gates from an existing pushbutton console. The access control workstations shall be configured to automatically log the user out after a 15 -minute period of no activity on the workstation. k. System Operator Interface: 1) System activity messages to the operator shall be in plain language (English) text displayed on a Graphical User Interface (GUI). 2) Operator commands shall be accomplished by selecting from a menu on the terminal. Command descriptions in the menu shall be such that an operator will generally not require an instruction manual to execute authorized system commands. However, a complete operator's manual shall also be supplied. 3) System command access requires Operator to enter a password. Each Password shall be assigned to a command ELECTRONIC SECURITY SYSTEM MARCH 30, 2026 280005-4 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 MCKIM & CREED MARYS CREEK WRF level. A command level is a set or subset of system commands. 1. Minimum System Reporting Capabilities: 1) Alarm History Report - On Line, Off Line Suppressed and Active. 2) Alarm Parameters. 3) Card Reader Terminal Parameters. 4) Holiday Report. 5) Card Holder Identification Report. 6) Card Holder Status Report - Trace, Valid, Void, In, Out, Anti - Pass Back. 7) Card Holder Access Permission Report - Valid/Invalid Access, Expiration. 8) Card Holder Access History Report. 9) Access Level/Group Report. 10) Card Reader Transaction Report. 11) Card Reader Location Report. 12) Time Zone Identification Report. 13) Programming History Report. 14) Operator Sign On/Off Report. m. Minimum System Operating Capabilities: 1) The security panels shall be capable of being programmed from a central programming station or locally at each security panel. 2) Add cards to memory, with individually programmable valid access times and days. 3) Group loading of access cards having the same access control. 4) Deleting access cards from memory. 5) Modifying the access control privileges of individual cards. 6) Define which cards are selected for tracing. 7) Define when doors will have a request -to -exit (alarm shunt) implemented. 8) Software shall provide selectable shunt and unlock and shunt only functions. 9) Define which monitored doors will alarm when forced open and during what time such alarms will take place. 10) Select card -controlled areas that are to operate in an antipassback mode and whether contact closure is required to change antipassback status. 11) Manually unlock doors from the reader/terminal via an emergency door release button. 12) Define access codes (groups of doors having time/day codes associated with each door). 13) Define holidays. Automatically unlock and relock selected locks by time/day code. 14) Define which card sensors may enable or disable the alarm system. MARCH 30, 2026 ELECTRONIC SECURITY SYSTEM ©COPYRIGHT 2026 MCKIM & CREED 280005-5 MARYS CREEK WRF 15) Select card sensors that will generate an alert message when card codes selected for trace are used. 16) Obtain hard copy listings of card codes by any combination of access code, location (in or out), privileged (night mode), and trace status. 17) Obtain hard copy listings of the definitions of door (sensor) and/or monitor point. 18) Obtain hard copy listings of each report type. 19) Obtain hard copy report of current system status. 20) Select access and monitor point activity messages that are output to the system printer(s). 21) Determine if valid access report is required only at certain hours of the day and week for selected sensors. 22) Acknowledge alarm conditions. 23) Select which monitor points are to be monitored at all times and which are monitored only during selected time periods. 24) Select which door(s) and monitor point(s) will actuate output contact(s) on the central controller. 25) Select which monitor points are to generate a latched alarm and which are to report for information purposes only. 26) Define 35 -character point and sensor names. 27) Define 35 -character operator names. 28) Search by operator selectable criteria shall be provided, including — search by card reader or multiple readers, search by card(s), and search by time period. C. NCSS 1. The NCSS system consists of network IP cameras, security Fiber sensors, monitors, digital control equipment, transmitters, receivers, digital video storage, switching equipment, enclosures and cabinets, wiring, raceways, and all other components needed for a fully operational remotely controllable and selectable NCSS system. 2. The NCSS surveillance system shall integrate with Security Camera Application Server, Video Control/Workstations, fiber optic transceivers, industrial managed Ethernet switches, and access control panels. 3. The NCSS surveillance system shall integrate with the ACS S. 4. The NCSS system is specifically intended to detect, alarm, and record activity in the plant. 5. Video Servers a. Provide one or more distributed servers to connect to IP-based video inputs. Each distributed server shall be responsible for recording of the connected video inputs. Each distributed server shall be responsible for controlling any connected cameras. b. Provide one or more central servers. All requests for viewing live video, recorded video, and camera control from operator workstations, handheld devices, or third -party systems connected to the network shall be proxied to and from the distributed servers through the central server(s). ELECTRONIC SECURITY SYSTEM MARCH 30, 2026 280005-6 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 MCKIM & CREED MARYS CREEK WRF c. Authentication of any requests for viewing live video, recorded video, and camera control against a Windows Server domain controller. d. Access management to all system functions, such that types of actions performed by a user are limited by the user's access level. 6. Cameras interfaced to system shall support either National Television System Committee (NTSC) or Phase Alternating Line (PAL) analog video over Ethernet cable or fiber media, or shall support digital Motion Joint Photographic Experts Group (MJPEG), Moving Pictures Expert group (MPEG)2, MPEG4, or H.264 compressed video over an Internet Protocol (IP) network. In the case of digital video streams, the CONTRACTOR shall ensure a Software Development Kit (SDK) shall be made available that allows interfacing of the video stream into NCSS system via TCP and/or UDP protocols. D. Plant Security Network 1. The SSI shall furnish and install the necessary Ethernet network components per Specification 40 66 00 — Network Equipment and as shown on the Drawings. 2. The SSI shall furnish and install the necessary fiber optic network components per Specification 40 66 33 — Fiber Optic Communication Cabling and Connectors and as shown on the Drawings. 1.04 SUPPLIER QUALIFICATIONS A. The SSI shall be a "security integrator" regularly engaged in the design and the installation of industrial security systems and their associated subsystems. For the purposes of this Specification Section, a "security integrator" shall be interpreted to mean an organization that complies with all of the following criteria: 1. Employs personnel on this project who have successfully completed industry certification courses and/or manufacturer's training courses on security equipment, networks, software, installation and configuration and implementation of the specific equipment and software proposed for this project. Key personnel shall hold certifications and have a minimum of 5 years of verifiable security system experience. Key personnel shall include, as a minimum, the lead field technician. 2. Has successfully completed work of similar or greater complexity on at least three previous projects within the last five years. Successful completion shall be defined as a finished project completed on time, without any outstanding claims or litigation involving the SSI. Potential references shall be for projects where the SSI's Contract was of similar size to this Project. 3. Has been performing the type of work specified in this specification section for a minimum of five continuous years. MARCH 30, 2026 ELECTRONIC SECURITY SYSTEM ©COPYRIGHT 2026 MCKIM & CREED 280005-7 MARYS CREEK WRF B. The SSI shall maintain a permanent, fully staffed and equipped service facility within 200 miles of the project site with full-time employees capable of designing, fabricating, configuring, installing, calibrating, and testing the systems specified herein. At a minimum, the SSI shall be capable of responding to on -site problems within 12 hours of notice. Provide an on -site response within four hours of notification starting at two months before scheduled start- up to two months after start-up completion. .n Prime Controls Contact: Brian Poarch Lain Cloy 1725 Lakepointe Dr. Lewisville, TX 75057 Phone: (972) 221-4849 2. RLC Contact: Michael Cunningham 8115 Hicks Hollow McKinney, TX 75071 7 Phone: (972) 542-7375 3. Red Group Contact: Haven Alford 9500 Ray White Road Suite 200 Fort Worth, TX 76244 Phone: (225) 347-9032 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Standards referenced in this Section are listed below: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). a. ASTM D8205-20, Standard Guide for Video Surveillance System. 3. Factory Mutual (FM). 4. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE). 5. International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC). a. IEC 60839-11-1 and -11-2, Electronic Access Control Systems and Application Guidelines. b. IEC 62676.3, Video Surveillance Systems for use in security applications. 6. National Electrical Code (NEC). 7. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). ELECTRONIC SECURITY SYSTEM MARCH 30, 2026 280005-8 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 MCKIM & CREED MARYS CREEK WRF 8. National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST). a. NIST 800-171, Protecting Controlled Unclassified Information in Nonfederal Systems and Organizations. 9. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL). a. UL 294 — Access Control Systems and Units. b. UL 305 — Standard for Panic Hardware. c. UL 1034 — Standard for Burglary -Resistant Electric Locking Mechanisms. d. UL 634 — Standard for Connectors and Switches for Use with Burglar -Alarm Systems. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. In order to ensure standardization, proper interfacing, and compatibility, it is required that all equipment offered under this Section be furnished by a single SSI who shall provide all equipment required for a proper installation and coordinate all Shop Drawings. B. The SSI shall be responsible for providing all components and software for the surveillance and access control systems. C. All items of equipment, including wire and cable, shall be compatible. D. The SSI shall provide on -site manufacturer's representatives to oversee installation and to verify that installation of all equipment is in compliance with manufacturer requirements. Supplier shall provide a written report verifying that the installation is complete, fully functional, and in compliance with all manufacturer requirements. 1.07 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Project Plan. 1. Approach to work description summarizing project and SSI approach to work. 2. Site Plan showing locations of equipment about the plant and within buildings. 3. Site plan indicating placement of cameras, mounting methods and proposed coverage area of each camera. 4. Overall system interconnection diagram. 5. An equipment list, and data sheet, system description and block diagrams on equipment to be furnished. 6. IP Address List for access control, security cameras, intercoms, and computers. 7. Written determination of the following at each camera location. a. Intended camera coverage area. b. Camera field of view. MARCH 30, 2026 ELECTRONIC SECURITY SYSTEM ©COPYRIGHT 2026 MCKIM & CREED 280005-9 MARYS CREEK WRF c. Ambient lighting levels. d. Serviceability. e. Lens type and focal length. f. Mounting and housing recommendations. g. UPS loading information for the Access Control Panel and Network Cabinets. B. Product Data: 1. Manufacturer's literature, illustrations, specifications, and engineering data including: general arrangement, outline drawings, dimensions, materials, size, weight, and performance data. 2. Product data for panels and cabinets in accordance with requirements for Shop Drawings in this Section. 3. Product data for field wiring provided for access control and security equipment and not included under other Sections or Contracts. 4. Product data for access controller, including software and hardware. C. Shop Drawings. 1. Panels and Cabinets: a. Layout Drawings, including: 1) Front, rear, and internal panel views to scale. 2) Tag number and functional name of components mounted in and on panel or cabinet, as applicable. 3) Nameplate location and legend including text, letter size and colors to be used. 4) Location of anchorage connections. 5) Location of external wiring and piping connections. 6) Mounting and installation details, coordinated with actual application. 7) Calculations substantiating panel heating and cooling provisions proposed. 8) Subpanel layouts and mounting details for items located inside access control panels. b. Product Information on Panel Components including: 1) Manufacturer's product name and complete model number of devices being provided, including manufacturer's name and address. 2) Data sheets and catalog literature. 3) Installation and mounting details; instructions and recommendations. 4) Service requirements. c. Wiring Diagrams, including the following: 1) Name of each panel or cabinet. 2) Wire sizes and types. 3) Terminal strip and terminal numbers. 4) Wire color coding. ELECTRONIC SECURITY SYSTEM MARCH 30, 2026 28 00 05 - 10 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 MCKIM & CREED MARYS CREEK WRF 5) Functional name and manufacturer's designation for components to which wiring are connected. 6) Lightning and surge protection grounding. d. Electrical control schematics in accordance with NFPA 79. Control schematics shall be in accordance with convention indicated in Annex D of NFPA 79. Standardized wiring diagrams that do not accurately reflect actual wiring to be furnished are unacceptable. e. Bill of Materials for each panel including tag number, functional name, manufacturer's name, model number, and quantity for components mounted in or on the panel or enclosure. f. Detail showing anchorage plan of wire bundles between subpanels and front panel mounted devices. 2. Complete riser diagrams clearly labeling all conduit and wire. 3. Layout Drawings with camera locations, conduit, and equipment numbers. Layout Drawings shall include camera viewing fields. Take photos of the view targets from the perspective of the proposed camera location. Where required, use drones to take photos from the perspective of proposed cameras to be installed on camera poles. D. After approval of shop Drawings, the CONTRACTOR shall provide the following within 8 weeks: 1. Graphic hierarchical organization tree showing all graphics and all points. 2. Detailed color conventions proposed for graphics and graphic element states. 3. Proposed text for point descriptions, alarms and status messages. Text and graphics shall be approved prior to data entry. E. Submit Test Procedures for Unwitnessed and Witnessed Field Testing. F. Certificates: 1. Certificates of Compliance/Manufacture. 2. Unwitnessed Operational Readiness Testing Documentation. 3. Final Acceptance Testing Documentation. G. Supplier Instructions. H. Source Quality Control Submittals: 1. Submit reports for all required shop tests. I. Site Quality Control Submittals: 1. Submit reports for all required field-tests. 2. Submit reports for all manufacturer's site visits. J. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: MARCH 30, 2026 ELECTRONIC SECURITY SYSTEM ©COPYRIGHT 2026 MCKIM & CREED 28 00 05 - 11 MARYS CREEK WRF 1. Submit complete installation, operation, and maintenance manuals including test reports, maintenance data and schedules, description of operation, and spare parts information. 2. Furnish Operation and Maintenance Manuals in conformance with the requirements of Section 01 78 23 — Operation and Maintenance Data. K. Software Manuals. L. Spare Parts: Manufacturer recommended spare parts and maintenance materials. M. Tools: List of all special tools required for routine maintenance. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery, storage, and handling shall be in accordance with Division 01 — General Requirements, and the following. 1. Security, process monitoring, and access control equipment shall be inspected by CONTRACTOR for shipping damage or loose parts when received. Evidence of water, which may have entered equipment during transit, shall be checked. 2. Equipment shall be stored in a clean, dry location in which a uniform temperature is maintained. Equipment shall be protected with coverings and maintain air circulation. 3. Where dampness or condensation may be encountered, heaters shall be provided for equipment to prevent moisture damage. B. Equipment shall be installed in its permanent, finished location shown on the Drawings within seven calendar days of arriving onsite. If the equipment cannot be installed within seven calendar days, the equipment shall not be delivered to the site, but stored offsite, at the CONTRACTOR's expense, until such time that the site is ready for permanent installation of the equipment. C. Shipping Precautions 1. After completion of shop assembly, factory test, and approval of all equipment, cabinets, panels, and consoles shall be packed in protective crates and enclosed in heavy duty (5 mil) polyethylene envelopes or secured sheeting to provide protection from damage, dust, and moisture. Dehumidifiers shall be placed inside the polyethylene coverings. The equipment shall then be skid -mounted for final transport. Lifting rings shall be provided for moving without removing protective covering. Boxed weights shall be shown on shipping tags together with instructions for unloading, transporting, storing, and handling at the job Site. 2. Manufacturer's special instructions for field handling, storage, and installation required for protection shall be securely attached to the packaging for each piece of equipment prior to shipment. The instructions ELECTRONIC SECURITY SYSTEM MARCH 30, 2026 28 00 05 - 12 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 MCKIM & CREED MARYS CREEK WRF shall be stored in resealable plastic bags or other means of protection. Two copies of these instructions shall be included with the equipment at time of shipment and shall be made available to the CONTRACTOR and OWNER. 3. If any apparatus has been damaged, such damage shall be repaired at no additional cost to the OWNER. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. The hardware and software shall be installed to provide the ability to control, monitor and record multiple cameras, intrusion detection devices, access control readers, intercoms and control outputs from a central control location or from multiple control locations via a Local Area Network (LAN) or Wide Area Network (WAN). Provide components (computers and ancillaries) with the proven technology and that are the manufacturer's latest featured products at time of purchase. Proven technology is defined as technology currently in use for similar applications. The CONTRACTOR shall provide any additional hardware equipment necessary to meet the specified functional requirements. All systems shall be integrated together. B. The CONTRACTOR shall provide and install a computerized ACSS to communicate with, program, monitor and control devices including but not limited to cameras, intrusion detection devices, access control readers, intercoms and control points. The system shall have the capability to support remote workstations both on -site and offsite. Offsite access to be activated and coordinated by OWNER ITs in the future. C. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install hardware and software to comprise an independent local area network (LAN) for use by the security/surveillance system. This system shall be capable of two-way video transmission, voice and data. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all devices and labor for cabling, mounting hardware and conduit where necessary. D. The ACSS shall be able to make access granted or denied decisions, define access privileges, and to set schedules and holiday groups. Through the use of application programming, these inputs and outputs shall be capable of being linked at all field controllers for purposes of implementing system -wide control strategies. The system shall support features such as area control, anti -pass back, threat level conditioning, extended shunt time, and multiple -man rule. The ACSS shall be capable of executing all these functions in a stand-alone condition, not connected to the network or PC workstations. E. Due to rapidly evolving technology of the equipment specified herein, the requirements are specified to establish a baseline for the type of equipment required. Provide new hardware and software of the latest and similar MARCH 30, 2026 ELECTRONIC SECURITY SYSTEM ©COPYRIGHT 2026 MCKIM & CREED 28 00 05 - 13 MARYS CREEK WRF specification at the time of purchase equivalent in cost to that which is specified. Refurbished or used equipment will not be accepted. The procedure for submitting and releasing the equipment shall be as follows: 1. The CONTRACTOR shall submit for approval the required data for the equipment as part of the Hardware Submittal. 2. The equipment shall be ordered as late as possible dependent on the construction schedule to ensure the latest equipment available is provided. Just prior to ordering, resubmit for approval the required data of the latest available hardware and software equivalent in cost to that which is specified. No equipment shall be ordered for delivery onsite no more than three months prior to when it is needed to be continuously used on the project. 2.02 CENTRAL SERVERS, WORKSTATIONS, AND MONITORS A. Reference Section 40 62 00 — Computer Hardware and Software. B. CONTRACTOR shall provide all necessary software licenses needed to run the system and register software licenses to the OWNER. 2.03 ACCESS CONTROL SERVER (Furnished by OWNER) A. Software: Security Expert software from Schneider Electric shall be furnished by the contractor installed and configured by the OWNER. 2.04 VIDEO MANAGEMENT SERVER (Furnished by OWNER) A. Software: V deoXport Enterprh e Avigilon Video Management System software provided by the contractor and installed and configured by the OWNER. 2.05 ACCESS CONTROL AND VIDEO MONITORING NON -PROCESS AREA WORKSTATION (Provided by OWNER) A. Control room and non -process area operator workstation clients shall be equipped with all required client software for view/control access, and client software for access to the video surveillance or access control applications. The software shall be provided by the contractor, installed and configured by the OWNER. 2.06 ACCESS CONTROL A. Card Access Controller ELECTRONIC SECURITY SYSTEM MARCH 30, 2026 28 00 05 - 14 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 MCKIM & CREED MARYS CREEK WRF 1. The controller shall use a multi -tasking, microprocessor -based platform capable of hosting multiple access control and security functions. The controller must have the following characteristics: a. Support minimum 2 and be expandable up to 4 doors with each controller using manufacturer's door expansion module. b. Support for iClass, proximity, magnetic stripe, Wiegand, RS -485 and keypad readers. c. Storage: 6MB memory and storage up to 240,000 cardholders and 50,000 transactions. d. Communications: standard 10/100 Ethernet connection to communicate with DNA Fusion access control software. 2. Power Input: POE, 12.95W, compliant to IEEE 802.3af, or 12VDC, 900mA. 3. Inputs: 2 programmable inputs a. The controller shall be capable of accepting up to 4 additional supervised alarm inputs. B. Products and Manufacturers: 1. Schneider Security Expert Web. 2. No Others Approved. C. Sub -Controller: 1. Provide sub -controllers as required to support card readers and door equipment as shown in the Drawings: a. Schneider Security Expert Door Expansion. D. Accessories 1. Provide Ethernet network converters for connectivity. 2. Provide power supplies and ethernet switches for connectivity. 3. Provide exit switches, panic bars, electric door strikes, and surge protectors as necessary for full functionality and compliance with OWNER security standards. 4. Provide NEMA enclosures compliant with Section 40 67 00 requirements for each installation area. 5. Provide Knox box and other accessories required to meet local codes and ordinances. 6. Provide network, power and controls cables and conduits as necessary for a fully functional system. 7. Provide dual vehicle pedestal, Talkaphone VOIP-500C3 video intercom, and card readers for entry gate locations. Entry gate pedestal equipment shall be provided with bollards for protection on each side of pedestal. E. General Construction Requirements: 1. Access control panel construction shall comply with the requirements of Section 40 67 00 — Control Panels and Components. MARCH 30, 2026 ELECTRONIC SECURITY SYSTEM ©COPYRIGHT 2026 MCKIM & CREED 28 00 05 - 15 MARYS CREEK WRF 2.07 PROXIMITY CARD READER A. General 1. Provide contactless proximity card readers, surge protectors, and access cards as shown on the Drawings. 2. Provide Schneider Electric HID Signo Readers. 2.08 NETWORK CAMERAS A. Camera Features: 1. Lens — Must be varifocal, remote focus and zoom, P -Iris Control, IR corrected, and megapixel resolution. System supplier to determine lens focal lengths for proper viewing. Lens shall be 6mm or 122mm depending on camera location and view. Final lens configuration shall be coordinated with OWNER security. 2. Removable automatic IR-cut filter for day and night. 3. Minimum illumination (HDTV 1080p) - 0.3 Lux (Color) and 0.06 Lux (B/W). 4. Shutter time — Minimum 1/66500 s to 1 s. 5. Camera angle adjustment — pan 360 degrees, tilt 160 degrees, rotation 340 degrees. B. Video Features: 1. Video Compression — H.264 Baseline and Main Profile (MPEG-4 Part 10/AVC) Motion JPEG 2. Resolution —1920x1080 (2MP) to 800x600 (SVGA). 3. Frame Rate — up to 25/30 fps at H.264. 4. The image capture device shall be 1/3 inch interline progressive scan RGB CMOS. 5. Streaming — Multiple, individually configurable streams in H.264 and Motion JPEG with controllable fame rate and bandwidth. 6. Pan/Tilt/Zoom — Digital PTZ. 7. Image settings include: Compression, color, brightness, sharpness, contrast, white balance, exposure control, exposure zones, automatic backlight compensation and suppression, WDR-dynamic contrast, fine tuning of behavior at low light. C. Network Features: 1. Security —Password protected, IP address filtering, IEEE 802.1X network access control, HTTPS encryption. 2. Supported protocols — Ipv4/v6, HTTP, HTTPS, SSL/TLS, WoS Layer 3 Diffserv, FTP, CIFS/SMB, Bonjour, UPnP, SNMPv1/v2c/v3 (MIB-II), DNS, TCP, UDP, IP, RTP, RTCP, ICMP, DHCP, ARP, and RTSP. D. System Integration: ELECTRONIC SECURITY SYSTEM MARCH 30, 2026 28 00 05 - 16 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 MCKIM & CREED MARYS CREEK WRF 1. Open API for Software Integration — ONVIF Specification. 2. Analytics: Video Motion Detection, Active Tampering Alarm. 3. Event Triggers: Analytics, Edge Storage Events, External Input. E. General: 1. Edge Storage — SD/SDHC/SDXC slot supporting memory cards up to 64 GB. 2. Housing — Polycarbonate transparent dome, Aluminum inner camera module with encapsulated electronics, Color -White, IP66 and NEMA 4x rated. 3. Memory — 256 MB RAM, 128 MB Flash. 4. Power — Power over Ethernet IEEE 802.3af. 5. Connectors — RJ-45 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX PoE. 6. Operating Temperature Minimum Range — 40°F - 131°F. 7. The housing shall be vandal resistant and shall include weather shield. 8. The camera shall be suitable for day and night operation. 9. Compatible with Wall Mount, Pole Mount, Corner Mount, and Pendant Adapter Kit. 10. Provide necessary accessories including, but not limited to, Universal Wall/pole mounting Brackets, cables and conduits and etc. as required to complete the installation of the security cameras. 11. Must be compatible with OWNER'S existing Camera Management Software. F. Surge Protection: Each camera shall be protected with lightning arrestor. Surge protectors shall be installed in rugged and corrosion resistant enclosures. G. Products and Manufacturers: Exterior Vandal Resistant Fixed Dome IP Camera shall be: 1. Pelco. 2. No Others Approved. 3. Mounts shall be from the same manufacturer and shall be specifically designed for the model used. 2.09 VIDEO MONITORING SYSTEM A. Unit shall provide record, live view, playback, and archive video. 1. 250 GB OS Drive. 2. Raid 5 Video Storage. 3. 3 Year YUP. 4. Server sized for 60 days of Video Storage. 2.10 POWER SUPPLIES AND TRANSFORMERS A. Power supplies and transformers shall be provided as required for proper distribution of power to the CCTV equipment. The licensed security CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for power supply or transformer MARCH 30, 2026 ELECTRONIC SECURITY SYSTEM ©COPYRIGHT 2026 MCKIM & CREED 28 00 05 - 17 MARYS CREEK WRF connections and cable routing. All equipment shall be designed to operate from an external power source rated 120 VAC. The licensed security CONTRACTOR is responsible for providing all transformers and power supplies needed for other operating voltages. 2.11 SURGE ARRESTOR A. Description: POE cable lightning protection unit / surge arrestor that meets the following minimum requirements: 1. Data Rate: 1 Gb/s. 2. Protocols: GbE, PoE+, PoE++ 3. Maximum PoE Power: 100 W. 4. Connectors: RJ45 Cat5e Shielded. 5. Dimensions: 4.5" H x 4" W x 1.7" D. 6. Enclosure Protection: IP65. 7. Operating Temperature: -40° C to +65° C. 8. UV Resistance. B. Acceptable Products 1. Transtector System, Inc. Model ALPU Fit (1 port), part number ALPU- F140. 2. No Others Approved. 2.12 INDUSTRIAL POE INJECTORS A. Interface: 1. 10/100/1000BaseT(X) Ports: RJ45 connector. 2. PoE Ports: 10/100/1000BaseT(X), RJ45 connector. 3. PoE Pinout: V+, V+, V-, V-, for pins 4, 5, 7, 8 (Midspan, MDI, Mode B). B. Power 1. Input Voltage: 24/48 VDC. 2. Operating Voltage: 22 to 57 VDC. 3. Input Current: 1.42 A @ 24 VDC. 4. Power Consumption (Max.): Max. 4.08 W full loading without PDs' consumption. 5. Power Budget: Max. 30 W for total PD consumption; Max. 30 W for each PoE port. 6. Overload Current Protection. 7. Reverse Polarity Protection. C. Physical 1. DIN rail mountable. 2. Operating Temperature: -40 to 75°C (-40 to 167°F). 3. Storage Temperature: -40 to 85°C (-40 to 185°F). 4. Ambient Relative Humidity: 5 to 95% (non -condensing). ELECTRONIC SECURITY SYSTEM MARCH 30, 2026 28 00 05 - 18 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 MCKIM & CREED MARYS CREEK WRF 5. MTBF: 2,525,278 hrs. 6. Warranty: 5 years. D. Certifications 1. Safety: UL 508, EN 60950-1. 2. EMC: EN 55032/24. 3. EMI: CISPR 32, FCC Part 15B Class A. 4. EMS: a. IEC 61000-4-2 ESD: Contact: 6 kV; Air: 8 kV. b. IEC 61000-4-3 RS: 80 MHz to 1 GHz: 10 V/m. c. IEC 61000-4-4 EFT: Power: 2 kV; Signal: 1 kV. d. IEC 61000-4-5 Surge: Power: 2 kV; Signal: 2 kV. e. IEC 61000-4-6 CS: 10 V. f. IEC 61000-4-8 PFMF. 5. Freefall: IEC 60068-2-31. 6. Shock: IEC 60068-2-27. 7. Vibration: IEC 60068-2-6. E. Manufacturer: 1. Moxa. 2. No Others Approved. 2.13 PERIMTER INTRUSION DETECTION SYSTEM (PIDS) A. General. 1. Shall detect and locate intrusion detection attempt along a fence line using Coherent Optical Time Domain Reflectometry (COTDR) technology. 2. Controlled pulses of light are transmitted into a single mode -mode fiber optic cable installed along the site fence fabric. Disturbances affecting the fiber cause measurable phase changes in the backscattered signal, which shall be processed to detect intrusion events along the protected perimeter 3. Must be able to distinguish between humans, animals and vehicles to reduce false alarms. 4. Must be able to identify activities like climbing or any attempted breach at any point in the site perimeter fence 5. The system shall provide real time alarm for any intrusion along the perimeter fence. 6. The system shall be capable of integrating with the site Video Management system (VMS) for tracking within the site perimeter. 7. Shall provide not less than two sensor input ports. Each sensing cable shall operate independently and be configurable on a per zone basis. 8. Shall be able to maintain a high probability of detection while ensuring a low nuisance alarm rate. 9. The Fiber sensors shall be installed along the perimeter fence as shown on the Contract Drawings. B. Qualifications. MARCH 30, 2026 ELECTRONIC SECURITY SYSTEM ©COPYRIGHT 2026 MCKIM & CREED 28 00 05 - 19 MARYS CREEK WRF 1. The manufacturer of the system shall have a minimum of five (5) years of experience in the last 10 years of the manufacture and successful implementation of perimeter systems. C. Performance Requirements 1. Detection type: Climb, cut, lean. 2. Detection location accuracy : +/-6m 3. Detection range: 10 m-100 km 4. Detection Sensor Length : >80Km max per processor for fence applications. 5. Nuisance alarm rate : < 1 per km per month (adjustable) 6. Sensitivity Adjustment: software configurable per zone. 7. The system shall be capable of real time and continuous self calibration 8. The sensor cable shall be completely immune to all forms of electromagnetic energy from radio communications, radar, electric - power transmission equipment and lightning. D. Mechanical Requirements 1. The system shall utilize single mode fiber optic cable. 2. The sensor cable shall be capable of being mounted on a fence, wall or in the ground. 3. The sensor cable shall have a minimum bend radius no greater than 15cm (6.0 inches). 4. The sensor cable shall not require a cable conduit to be installed along the fence perimeter to protect the cable. 5. Refer to specification section 40 66 33 — Fiber -Optic Communication Cabling and Connector for cable requirements. E. Power Requirements 1. Power Supply: 120/240AC, 50-60Hz 2. Power Consumption: 120W F. Operating Temperature -40°C to 75°C. G. Weather Protection — IP67. H. Acceptable Products and Manufacturers. 1. Fibersensys 2. Fibersonics 3. City approved equal. 2.14 SECURITY PANEL A. Provide security panel with minimum size of 36" x 36" x 6" to house access control and security network equipment at building locations as indicated in the Drawings and specified herein. Enclosure NEMA rating shall be NEMA4X 316SS for outdoor locations, and NEMA12 painted steel for indoor locations. ELECTRONIC SECURITY SYSTEM MARCH 30, 2026 280005-20 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 MCKIM & CREED MARYS CREEK WRF 1. TIA-607 Style Telecommunications Grounding Busbars a. Required to meet BICSI and TIA-607 standards. b. BICSI pattern tinned copper with insulators. c. Manufacturer - Harger or Engineer -approved equal. d. 1/4" x 4" x 12" with 6 pair 5/16" and 3 pair. e. Harger — TGBI14212TGB. 2.15 SECURITY BADGE PRINTER A. Provide one badge printer to be used to create plastic photo ID badges at the facility. B. A Badge Printer is an ID card printer used primarily for the use of creating ID badge credentials that are worn, such as employee ID badges. C. Badge Printers shall be compatible for printing on credit card -sized badges (3.370"x 2.125") D. Print Method: Single sided; direct to card or reverse transfer E. Manufacturer 1. HID. 2. Approved Equal. 2.16 SPARE PARTS A. Provide one of each type of equipment provided in the Security Control Panel. B. Provide any recommended spare part by the equipment manufacturer. C. Submit a spare parts list for ENGINEER approval. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. SSI shall examine the conditions under which the Work is to be installed and notify the ENGINEER, in writing, of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. Install in conformance with the requirements of National Electrical Code (NEC). MARCH 30, 2026 ELECTRONIC SECURITY SYSTEM ©COPYRIGHT 2026 MCKIM & CREED 280005-21 MARYS CREEK WRF B. Install network camera and card -access system, including conduit and cable, in accordance with approved Shop Drawings and the manufacturer's recommendations. C. Install all conduit and cable required for the complete system. Provide pull and junction boxes as required. D. Bond metallic conduits entering non-metallic enclosures to a ground terminal within the enclosure. E. The SSI shall provide rigid structural support for the panels into which these units are to be mounted for the unit and shall allow all necessary access and working space to permit maintenance of the units while installed. All strengthening and/or bracing required for a satisfactory installation shall be provided as part of the Contract. The SSI shall provide all supports, bracing, wiring, and incidental hardware required for a complete installation. F. The enclosures in which these units are installed shall provide adequate cooling and ventilation for operation at full load for extended periods per the manufacturer's recommendations. G. The CONTRACTOR shall install all door hardware and wire the door strikes, door position switches, and any other electronic door accessories to the subcontroller. H. ACSS 1. Mount card reader sensors 36 inches above finished floor (or grade, if outside). 2. Card readers, contact modules, terminal cabinets, and Security Control Panel (SCP) locations shown are approximate. Coordinate final locations with the OWNER. 3. Coordinate the mounting of status switches, card readers, proximity switches, status switches, and request -to -exit devices with the OWNER. 4. Electrical Requirements: electrical wiring and conduit connections to security devices shall be made in accordance with and using components meeting the requirements of Section 26 00 00 Electrical General Provisions. 5. Cabling: Cabling and interconnecting wiring shall be as indicated on the Drawings and as required to provide a complete and functional system. Wiring shall use a consistent color code throughout the systems. 6. Electrical identification: a. Cabling shall be permanently labeled at each end and in every panel, junction box, and field device termination. b. Field devices shall be labeled with the ACSS device tag. 7. Field devices shall include surge suppression as recommended by the system manufacturer. 8. Field devices shall be mounted to back boxes. ELECTRONIC SECURITY SYSTEM MARCH 30, 2026 280005-22 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 MCKIM & CREED MARYS CREEK WRF 9. Connections to all external wiring between the security panel and the card reader shall be made on terminal strips. Connections may be made either with terminal spade lugs set on the conductors with a special setting tool or with approved pressure type terminal blocks. 10. System Conduit and Raceways: System cables shall be installed in conduit raceway systems. 11. No 120 VAC or higher rated equipment shall be directly connected to the security system. Interposing relays shall be used where 120VAC or higher energy equipment or circuits interface with the ACSS. 12. Provide electric locking mechanisms for all doors associated with the card readers. Lock mechanisms shall be an electric mortise type unless otherwise noted. Panic bars with retractable locking mechanisms shall be used for double door and emergency exit locations. Magnetic locks are only permitted for use with glass doors. 13. All locks shall allow for a configurable fail safe or fail secure options and shall be equipped with a manual key bypass. I. NCSS 1. Camera locations shown are approximate. Locate the cameras to yield optimum coverage as approved by the OWNER and ENGINEER. 2. ADJUSTING AND CLEANING a. Clean and touch up components to the satisfaction of ENGINEER b. Lenses, equipment enclosures, windows, and monitors shall be clean and free from scratches, mars, etc. J. PIDS 1. Verify that fence installation is complete, rigid and free of defects prior to installation of fiber sensing cables. 2. Do not proceed with any installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3. Clean fiber of debris, loose wires or sharp projections that may damage sensing cables. 4. Install fiber sensing cables in strict accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 5. The sensing cables shall be installed horizontally along the fence fabric at approximately mid height of the total fence height from above finished grade. 6. The sensing cable shall be installed on the secure side of the fence fabric. 7. The fencing cable shall be routed over and around each post while maintaining continuous mechanical coupling with the fence fabric. 8. Service loops shall be installed at fixed intervals to allow for future repair of the cable in the case of any cut or damage. 9. The installation contractor shall caliberate the system in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended procedures defined in the manufacturer's product guide. 10. The installation contractor shall submit to the owner the caliberation and configuration settings for the system. MARCH 30, 2026 ELECTRONIC SECURITY SYSTEM ©COPYRIGHT 2026 MCKIM & CREED 280005-23 MARYS CREEK WRF 11. Refer to specification section 40 66 33 for other fiber optic installation requirements. 3.03 FIELD TESTING A. After installation of the equipment, controls and all appurtenances, SSI shall field test the equipment for system operation and conformance to the specified performance parameters. B. SSI shall provide the services of factory -trained technicians to perform the following: 1. Check and approve the installation of all components of the CCTV monitoring system and all cable connections between various components prior to placing the components into operation. 2. Conduct a complete system checkout and adjust cameras, check operational functions of all the equipment supplied under this Contract. All problems encountered shall be promptly corrected to prevent any delays in start-up. a. Check full range of travel for camera pan and tilt as well as speed of travel. Check shall be executed from system controller and shall include tilt up and down, pan right and left and preset. b. Check full range of lens function, including iris open, close, focus far, near, zoom telephoto and wide angle. 3. SSI shall provide all test equipment necessary to perform the testing during system checkout and testing. 4. SSI shall be responsible for initial system operation and shall make any changes, adjustments, or replacements of any or all components, within the warranty period, if required, until the equipment supplied performs satisfactorily as intended. 5. SSI shall furnish to the OWNER and ENGINEER certified copies of set- up and adjustment reports for all specified devices. 3.04 FINAL ACCEPTANCE TESTING A. Demonstrate to the OWNER and ENGINEER each camera's field of view. B. Test programs and procedures shall be created by the CONTRACTOR. Test procedures shall have signoff spaces for the ENGINEER, the OWNER, and the CONTRACTOR. Where OWNER furnished test procedures exist, they shall be used in place of CONTRACTOR test procedures. C. The organizing, coordination of personnel, and scheduling of all tests shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR. Notification of testing shall be submitted to all testing participants a minimum of 1 week prior to the requested testing date. D. Final Acceptance Testing — At the completion of installation of panels and field devices, each system shall be tested by the CONTRACTOR with a factory - ELECTRONIC SECURITY SYSTEM MARCH 30, 2026 280005-24 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 MCKIM & CREED MARYS CREEK WRF trained field technician. The Factory -trained field technician shall have a manufacturer certification dated within the last five years. 3.05 SYSTEM TRAINING A. Upon completion of training, the OWNER shall be able to add/delete camera preset positions, add/delete cameras, enable alarms, disable alarms, and make routine minor adjustments without equipment supplier's assistance. B. Provide two eight -hour training class to OWNER general users after installation of system. C. Provide sixteen hours training class to OWNER and ENGINEER for in-depth system configurations. D. Training classes shall be conducted at the OWNER facility or within a 20 miles radius of the DFW area. If classes are only available beyond these locations, the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all travel expense for up to five personnel. 3.06 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. Arrange with the equipment manufacturer to provide direct supervision of all final connections between equipment and the wiring system. B. Furnish the services of a qualified manufacturer's service representative to assist in the installation of security system equipment, check the installation before it is placed into operation, assist in the performance of field tests, observe and assist initial operations and train the plant operations and maintenance staff in the care, operation, and maintenance of the equipment. END OF SECTION MARCH 30, 2026 ELECTRONIC SECURITY SYSTEM ©COPYRIGHT 2026 MCKIM & CREED 280005-25 PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 28 3100 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): C62.41, Surge Voltages in Low -Voltage AC Power Circuits. 2. International Fire Code (IFC). 3. International Building Code (IBC). 4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). b. 72, National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code. c. 90A, Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. d. 101, Life Safety Code. e. 820, Fire Protection in Wastewater Treatment and Collection Facilities. f. 1221 Standard for the Installation, Maintenance and Use of Emergency Services Communications Systems. 5. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). 6. National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies (NICET). 7. Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA): a. 232, Interface Between Data Terminal Equipment and Data Circuit Terminating Equipment Employing Serial Binary Data Interchange. b. 485, Electrical Characteristics of Generators and Receivers for Use in Balanced Digital Multipoint Systems. 8. UL: a. 268, Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. b. 286A, Smoke Detectors for Duct Application. c. 464, Audible Signal Appliances. d. 497B, Protectors for Data Communication and Fire Alarm Circuits. e. 864, Control Units for Fire -Protective Signaling Systems. f. 1449, Standard for Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors. g. 1480, Speakers for Fire -Protective Signaling Systems. h. 1638, Visual Signaling Appliances — Private Mode Emergency and General Utility Signaling. i. 1971, Signaling Devices for the Hearing Impaired. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM MARCH 31, 2026 283100-1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Addressable: A fire alarm system component with a unique identification that can have its status individually identified or that is used to individually control other functions. B. AHJ: Authority Having Jurisdiction. C. CAD: Computer -Aided Design. D. Coded: Audible or visible signal that conveys information about alarm event. Examples are, number of rings of a bell or flashes of a strobe. This could be used to convey location or type of alarm. E. dB: Decibels. F. DXF: Drawing Interchange Format. G. ECP: Environmental Control Panel. H. FACP: Fire Alarm Control Panel. I. HVAC: Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning. J. I/O: Input/Output. K. IDC: Initiating Device Circuit. L. LCD: Liquid Crystal Display. M. LED: Light -Emitting Diode. N. MOV: Metal Oxide Varistor. O. NAC: Notification Appliance Circuit. P. RAM: Random Access Memory. Q. SLC: Signaling Line Circuit. R. SOM: Sequence of Operations Matrix. S. Zone: A defined area within the protected premises. A zone can define an area from which an alarm signal can be received or an area to which a signal can be sent. The term zone is typically used when describing conventional, nonaddressable systems. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 283100-2 MARCH 31, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Requirements: 1. Contract Drawings show location of fire alarm panel(s) annunciator panel(s), duct detectors, fan monitoring components required by NFPA 820, and fire suppression system switches. a. Other Component Locations and Quantities: Determined by fire alarm system installer and included as part of installer's design. b. Other components include, but are not limited to, smoke detectors, heat detectors, manual pull stations, and notification appliances. c. Design and Installation: Meet requirements of local AHJ. 2. Contract Drawings show location of fire alarm system components. 3. Design, coordinate, and provide system in accordance with building codes. 4. Design conduit layout and wiring interconnection of devices specified herein and for interconnection of flow and supervisory switches and alarm bells specified in Section 21 13 00, Wet -Pipe Sprinkler Systems. 5. Coordinate, and include in design, requirements for interfacing with HVAC system. 6. Equipment suitable for addressable fire alarm system. B. Performance Requirements: 1. Actuation of alarm (smoke or heat detector, flow switch, or other normally open initiating device contact) or trouble (trouble or supervisory switch) shall cause the following operations: a. Audible and visual indications of alarmed devices on fire alarm control panel display, and on remote annunciator. b. For remote buildings with subpanels, transmit common alarm or trouble signal to light appropriate zone lamp at master fire alarm control panel. c. Master fire alarm control panel shall transmit common alarm or trouble signal to plant control panel. 2. Actuation of duct smoke detectors shall, send signal (contact closure) to shut off HVAC equipment and send a Supervisory Alarm to the fire control panel. 3. Actuation of sprinkler flow switch shall alarm at panel. 4. Sequence of Operations Matrix at the End of Section describes functions of fire alarm system. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM MARCH 31, 2026 283100-3 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Descriptive product information for each individual system component. 2. Dimensional drawings of panels and associated equipment. 3. Itemized bill of material. 4. Operating and programming instructions. 5. Control panel configuration and module data. 6. Complete point to point wiring diagrams of system and device interconnection. Identify spare connection points. 7. Alarm initiating, indicating, and supervisory device electrical data. 8. Annunciator configuration and module data. 9. Plans showing device and panel locations as well as conduit and cable sizes. Prepare drawings and diagrams on drawing sheets of uniform size without extraneous information. Marked up electrical, HVAC, lighting or similar drawings or copies of catalog data sheets are not acceptable in lieu of required drawings or diagrams. 10. Sequence of Operation Matrix. 11. Battery sizing calculations. 12. Supervisory power requirements for equipment. 13. Alarm power requirements for equipment. 14. Power supply rating justification showing power requirements for system power supplies. 15. Voltage drop calculations for wiring runs, demonstrating worst case condition. 16. Conduit fill calculations. 17. Sample warranty. 18. Recommended types and quantities for spare parts. B. Informational Submittals: I. Experience and qualifications of firm(s) proposed to design and install system. 2. Certifications documenting service technician's training. Certification shall indicate name of individual, training, dates, systems qualified, and current status. 3. Component and attachment testing seismic certificate of compliance as required by Section 01 45 33, Special Inspection, Observation, and Testing. 4. Copy of design documents, Shop Drawings, and calculations submitted to code -enforcement authorities. 5. Code -enforcement authority approval letter. 6. Factory test reports. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 283100-4 MARCH 31, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 7. Detailed program and schedule for testing, inspection, and maintenance of fire alarm system that satisfies requirements of NFPA 72, manufacturer's recommendations, and local authority having jurisdiction. 8. Written documentation for logic modules as programmed, for system operation, with matrix showing interaction of input signals with output commands. 9. System program hard copy and electronic file in format acceptable to Engineer showing system functions, controls, and labeling of equipment and devices. 10. Documentation of system voltage, current, and resistance readings taken during installation, testing, and ATP phases of system installation. 11. System record drawings and wiring details including one set of reproducible masters and drawings in electronic file in a DXF format suitable for use in a CAD drafting program. 12. NFPA 72, Record of Completion: Submit to Owner and code - enforcement authorities. 13. NFPA 72, Inspection and Testing Form: Submit to Owner and code enforcement authorities. 14. Operation and Maintenance Data as specified in Section 01 78 23, Operation and Maintenance Data. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Provide names of projects, locations, and telephone numbers of persons to contact for at least two installations where Contractor or Subcontractor has installed detection and alarm systems that are similar in size and scope to the Work. 2. Licensed Firm Responsible for System Design, Installation and Testing: Document established reputation in fire alarm system industry having10 years' experience in design, installation, and testing of fire alarm systems. 3. System Shop Drawings for code enforcement authority approval shall be prepared by a technician with minimum of NICET Level IV Certification for fire alarm systems, or a professional engineer registered in State of Texas. 4. Technician with minimum of NICET Level III Certification for fire alarm systems shall provide general supervision of project execution and shall perform final testing and certification of the system. 5. Technician with minimum of NICET Level II Certification for fire alarm systems shall directly supervise all onsite installation activities. 6. Service technician shall be formally trained by manufacturer. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM MARCH 31, 2026 283100-5 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF B. Regulatory Requirements: Submit Shop Drawings and system design calculations for approval to the following code enforcement authorities. 1. AHJ. 2. Client. 1.06 SPECIAL GUARANTEE A. Provide manufacturer's extended guarantee or warranty, with Owner named as beneficiary, in writing, as special guarantee. Special guarantee shall provide for correction, or at the option of the Owner, removal and replacement of Work specified in this Specification section found defective during a period of 1 year after date of Substantial Completion. Duties and obligations for correction or removal and replacement of defective Work shall be as specified in the General Conditions. 1.07 MAINTENANCE A. Maintenance Service: For 2 years after Correction Period, provide maximum of two service calls, at Owner's request, to make adjustments or repairs required to keep system in satisfactory, full operation. 1.08 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish, tag, and box for shipment and storage the following spare parts, special tools, and material: Item Special tools required to maintain or dismantle PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS Quantity One complete set for each different size unit A. Materials, equipment, and accessories specified in this section shall be products of: 1. Siemens Building Technologies. 2. Johnson Controls. 3. Gamewell-FCI. 4. Honeywell. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 283100-6 MARCH 31, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF B. Notification appliances, initiating devices, and accessories of fire alarm systems specified in this section shall be products of: 1. Siemens Building Technologies. 2. Johnson Controls. 3. Gamewell-FCI. 4. Honeywell. 2.02 GENERAL A. Material and Equipment: 1. Standard products of their respective manufacturers. 2. Models produced for not less than 3 years. 3. Equipment: Supported by a service organization that is, in the opinion of Owner, reasonably convenient to Site. B. Review details of Project prior to start of the Work, verify dimensions in field, and revise conduit and equipment locations to avoid obstructions and allow installation of new equipment. C. Do not begin system installation prior to receiving written approval of Shop Drawings from Engineer. 2.03 UL COMPLIANCE A. Products manufactured within scope of UL: Conform to UL Standards and have an applied UL listing mark. B. Provide equipment UL listed in accordance with requirements of NFPA. 2.04 SERVICE CONDITIONS A. Altitude: Not greater than 3,300 feet above sea level. B. Provide equipment fully rated without derating for these conditions. 2.05 POSTED OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS (POI) A. Prepare POIs on full size drawing sheets. B. Provide POIs framed in extruded metal frames, mounted under glass, water- resistant, and weather -resistant. Permanently mount instructions on reserved wall area in space shown on Drawings. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM MARCH31,2026 283100-7 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF C. POIs Include: 1. Facility floor plans showing location of fire equipment and devices with coordinated identification. Show items such as firewalls, fire dampers, and fire alarm devices. 2. Fire alarm wiring diagrams and schematics, with zone identification with transmitter zone lists and device address list. 2.06 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANELS A. General: 1. Control panel circuit for 24V dc, power limited, initiating circuits in accordance with NFPA 70, Article 760. 2. Assembled panel UL 864 listed Product Category UOJ2, as an integrated control system. 3. Enclosure: a. NEMA 250 Type suitable for location installed. b. Color: Red. 4. Mounted Module with: a. Transformer with 120V ac input and 21.5V ac output. b. Solid state rectifier for 21.5V ac input and fuse protected, filtered, and regulated 26V dc no-load output. c. Solid state transfer switch, minimum 8 amp -hours. d. Standby sealed, gelled electrolyte (lead acid) batteries sized for system operating period of 24 hours of standby mode operation. e. Solid state battery charger. f. Over/under voltage monitor supervisory circuit. g. LEDs for status of normal power, battery trouble, and power supply module trouble. h. Alarm mode of 5 minutes after standby operation. 5. Local differentiating audible sound device for alarm, trouble, and supervisory conditions. 6. Full digital transmission protocol. 7. Addressable signal transmission protocol to be either digital pole/response protocol or proprietary communication protocol, with all antilog sensing device signals digitally transmitted to control panel. 8. MOV/gas discharge transient protection for power supply module B: , plus initiating and indicating alarm devices. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 283100-8 MARCH 31, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 9. Primary FACP and sub -panels interconnected via supervised fiber optic communication pathways. Class A or N requirements as applicable under NFPA 72. 10. Provide a listed cellular alarm communicator for supervising station service, connected to the Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP). The communicator shall transmit alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals to a supervising station via a cellular communication pathway in accordance with NFPA 72 requirements. The communication pathway shall be fully supervised for integrity, including loss of signal, communication failure, and power loss, and shall initiate a trouble signal at the FACP upon any fault condition. The cellular communicator shall be listed for fire alarm use, compatible with the FACP, and installed in accordance with manufacturer requirements and applicable codes. B. Three -Mode Control Panel: 1. Alarm, supervisory, and trouble modes of operation. 2. Modular construction with solid state microprocessor -based components and central processing unit, continuously scanning each module for status change. 3. Noncoded, fire alarm system with Class B initiating device circuits and Class B notification appliance circuits. 4. Operator Interface Panel: a. Indicators, control switches, and tone device. b. LCD or digital display to indicate event type and zone location or LEDs with differentiating color lenses for: 1) AC power on. 2) Power trouble. 3) System trouble. 4) Supervisory alarm. 5) Earth -ground trouble. 6) Alarm for each zone. 7) Trouble for each zone. 8) Alarm signaling circuit trouble. 9) Annunciator circuit trouble. c. Control Switches for: 1) Alarm silence. 2) System reset. 3) Trouble signal silence and ring -back feature. 4) Municipal connection circuit disconnect. 5) Manual evacuation drill. 6) Auxiliary one bypass. 7) Auxiliary two bypass. d. Piezo-electric tone device with pulsed march time rate for alarm and continuous for trouble conditions. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM MARCH 31, 2026 283100-9 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 5. Separate annunciator outputs rated 2 -milliamperes supervisory and 120 -milliamperes alarm. 6. Smoke Detector Output: a. Two- or four -wire as required, rated 2 amperes, 24V dc. b. Interrupted when system is reset. 7. Supervised remote inputs for alarm silence and system reset. 8. Switch Selectable: a. System diagnostic tests. b. Alarm verification. c. Alarm silence inhibit. d. March time alarm code at cadence of 120 beats per minute. e. Temporal alarm code repeated at 1/2 -second on and off intervals. f. Signal alarm circuit cutout. g. Water flow and sprinkler supervisory. h. Sprinkler supervisory. i. Manual evacuation. j. Selective signaling. 9. Two alarm and one trouble, Form C auxiliary/output relays rated 2 amperes, 30V dc, 0.5 ampere, 120V ac each. 10. Minimum of 4 input zones. 11. Quantity of SUPERVISORY and TROUBLE Alarms Outputs: Not less than that indicated in Sequence of Operations Matrix. See Supplement at End of Section. C. Addressable Control Panel: 1. Modular construction with solid state, microprocessor -based components, programmable central processor unit, back lighted display of primary control status and essential alarm operating conditions, and concealed, maintenance, purpose operator's keypad. 2. With Class A Signaling Line Circuits and Class B Notification Appliance Circuits. 3. Main control module consisting of operator's keyboard/keypad, local and remote communications and supervision capabilities, system control memory, and programming interface. a. Two-line, back lighted, 80 alphanumerical LCD characters with: 1) Visible cursor for entering data information. 2) Displayable when cabinet door is open. b. Primary operators keypad with: 1) Acknowledge keys and LEDs for system alarm, supervisory service, and system trouble conditions. 2) Power on LED. 3) Alarm silence reset keys. 4) Displayable when cabinet door is closed. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 2831 00- 10 MARCH 31, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF c. Pass code protected action display keypad for: 1) Circuit/device enable or disable. 2) Control on/off. 3) Test/status. 4) Auto or manual. 5) Activate/reset. 6) Display historical logs/real time. 7) Function/menu. 8) Program. 9) Delete. 10) Displayable when cabinet door is open. d. Numerical entry and selection keypad, used in conjunction with action display keypad, to perform control function on system zones, initiating circuits, or auxiliary relays, and to gain access to system information. Displayable when cabinet door is closed. e. Programmable control keypad with five pass code keys, associated LEDs, and identification labels for: 1) Manual evacuation. 2) HVAC shutdown disable. 3) Displayable when door is open. f. Four function keys for control of variable functions related to primary operations keypad, displayable when door is open. 4. TIA 485, NFPA 72, Class A, Class B, Class C, or Class X data circuit capability for remote annunciators. 5. Form C relay contacts rated 2 amperes, 24V dc. 6. Down loader port for connection to microprocessor -based transponder. 7. Power supply interface module generating digital voltage and current data to LCD with: a. DC power conversion and output terminals. b. Supervision and control of power supply. 8. Modules with coded input on first alarm, local trouble LED, and in/out capabilities for: a. 120 addressable initiating alarm sensors consisting of analog/addressable or traditional detector methods. b. Four hardwired I/O points, field selectable in any combination to be either NFPA 72, Class A or Class B, initiating device circuits or NFPA 72, Class A or Class B, indicating appliance circuits or auxiliary control circuits. c. Auxiliary Control Circuit Contacts: Single -pole, double -throw, rated 2 amperes at 24V do and 0.5 ampere at 120V ac. 9. Auxiliary Control Circuit Contacts: Single -pole, double -throw rated, 2 amperes at 24V dc and 0.5 ampere at 120V ac. 10. Two isolated TIA 232 communication port modules. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM MARCH 31, 2026 283100-11 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 2.07 CENTRAL PROCESSING CONTROL PANEL A. Modular construction with solid state, microprocessor -based programmable control processor, printer, two-way master telephone, operator console, and 10 levels of priorities for staging of system events. B. Single -channel voice communication circuits. C. Operator Panel: 1. 80 -character, two-line, LCD display. 2. Individual keys for location information, silence signal, and detector reset. 3. Lamp test pushbutton with associated LED. 4. Priority and trouble alarm light -emitting diode and associated acknowledge pushbuttons. D. Examine pushbuttons for "Monitor On" and activating control points. E. Printer with thermal print head for 20 -column record system events produced in 80 -column format. F. Input/output ports as required for TIA 232 communication to local UL listed printer. G. Selectable alarm verification and distribution processing. H. Capable of interfacing with remote panels connected to hardwire circuits with: 1. Analog/addressable or traditional detectors. 2. Either normally open or normally closed contacts. 3. Supervised and 24V dc operated fire alarm signaling circuits. 4. Supervised and operated speakers and telephone circuits. 5. Capable of interfacing with NFPA 72, hard -wired, and Class B, initiating device circuits and NFPA 72, hard -wired, and Class B, indicating appliance circuits. 6. Network capability. 2.08 INITIATING DEVICE A. Pull Station, Fire: 1. Double -action station for general alarm. 2. Constructed of red molded polycarbonate material, and raised white letters stating "FIRE." 3. Surface Semiflush Flush -mounted with hinged front cover having keyed or allen-wrench reset lock. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 283100-12 MARCH 31, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 4. Where required, rated for use in hazardous environments. 5. Recessed pull handle lift door and pull handle for double action operating station with plastic break rod. 6. Activated station pull handle, latched in protruding position until reset by key. 7. Stations keyed alike with fire alarm control panel. 8. Screw terminal for field connections. 9. Normally open, Double -pole contacts rated 3 amperes, 30V dc for resistive loads. 10. Manual Pull Station: Microprocessor -based communication circuit address, and compatible with fire alarm control panel. B. Smoke Detector: 1. Or Photoelectric type with plug-in, twist -lock addressable base in accordance with UL 268. 2. Solid state circuitry, Nonradioactive photo -optic sensing chamber, suitable for device releasing service. 3. Concealed, field adjustable, sensitivity test switch. 4. LED; pulsed indication for power availability and steady indication for activated detectors. 5. Self -Compensating Circuitry: a. Voltage Range: 15V dc to 30V dc, 24V dc nominal. b. Temperature Range: 0 degree C to 38 degrees C. c. Operating Temperature Range: Minus 10 degrees C to 50 degrees C. d. Humidity Range: 0 percent to 95 percent relative humidity. 6. Normally open, double -pole contacts, rated 3 amperes, 30V dc for resistive loads. 7. Auxiliary relay for fan shutdown. 8. Provide remote LED alarm indicators for above ceiling mounted detectors. 9. Detectors equipped with insect screen. 10. Photoelectric sensors adjusted to within 3 percent of UL 217 window obturation sensitivity value. C. Air Duct Smoke Detector: 1. Duct mounted housing with prealigned sampling and exhaust tubes, analog sensing, solid state circuitry, and plug-in, twist -lock addressable base for photoelectric detector in accordance with UL 286A, NFPA 72, NFPA 90A, and NFPA 101. 2. Sampling tubes to extend full width of branch air return duct. 3. Self -Compensating Circuitry: a. Voltage Range: 15V dc to 30V dc, 24V dc nominal. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM MARCH 31, 2026 283100-13 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF b. Temperature Range: 0 degrees C to 38 degrees C. c. Humidity Range: 10 percent to 90 percent relative humidity. d. Velocity Range: 400 feet to 4,000 feet per minute. 4. Front mounted LED with pulsed indication for alarm condition. 5. Normally open, single -pole, double -throw auxiliary relay with 2 amperes, 28V dc rated contacts for resistive loads. 2.09 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES A. Audible Alarm: 1. General: a. Polarized, 24V dc device with sound power measured dB in accordance with UL 464. b. Separate in/out wire leads for field connections. c. Baked red enamel finish. d. Audibility: In accordance with NFPA 72 and local requirements. 2. Modular Horn: a. Surface or Semiflush basic unit, complete with single projector, designed for mounting on 4 -inch square weatherproof or standard electrical box as required for specific location elements. b. Manufacturer supplied box with flush grille plate and basic surface unit for recessed horns. 3. Modular Bell: Vibrating basic unit complete with 4 -inch gong designed for mounting on 4 -inch weatherproof or standard electrical box as required for specific location elements. 4. Multiple -Tone Horn: a. Microprocessor -based, field programmable tone selection and volume control, suitable for installation indoors and outdoors. b. Program by setting miniature switches to obtain siren whoop horn tone as directed by client. 5. Single protection type bell with weatherproof housing, rated for 120V ac motor, adjustable mounting bracket, and audible output of 115 dB. B. Visual Alarm, Fire: 1. Polarized, 24V dc, multi -candela indicating output in accordance with UL 1638. 2. Solid state circuitry for high and low intensity control of xenon flashtube. 3. Tamper -proof, translucent molded, polycarbonate, pyramidal shaped lens with "FIRE" in red lettering visible from 180 -degree viewing field; red enclosure. 4. Polarized in/out wiring. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 283100-14 MARCH 31, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 5. Designed for mounting on wall and ceiling, single -gang electrical box, or as part of audible/visible base housing. 6. Synchronized unit. C. Combination Audible and Visual Alarm: 1. Audible/visible base housing with visual alarm and front mounted horn speaker as specified. 2. Semi -flush mounting on recessed 4 -gauge square electrical box or surface mounted on backbox with adapter. 3. Audibility: In accordance with NFPA 72 and local requirements. 4. Synchronous audible/visible output. 2.10 PRINTER A. Features: 1. Automatic type; printing code, time, date, location, category, and condition. 2. Provide hard -copy printout of changes in status of system. 3. Time -stamp printouts with the current time -of -day and date. 4. Standard carriage with 80 -characters per line. 5. Use standard pin -feed paper. 6. Enclosed in a separate cabinet suitable for placement on a desktop or table. 7. Able to communicate with control using an interface complying with TIA 232. 8. Power: 120V ac, 60 -Hz. 9. Thermal printers are not acceptable. 2.11 WIRING A. AC power wiring shall meet requirements of Section 26 05 05, Conductors. B. Low voltage wiring shall be solid copper or bunch tinned (bonded) stranded copper, minimum 14 AWG, and shall meet NEC Article 760 for nonpower limited service. C. Fiber -Optic cabling shall be used to connect the Main FACP to the supporting sub panels in other buildings. D. Provide Class A Signaling Line Circuits (SLC) and Class B Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC) and initiating device. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM MARCH 31, 2026 283100-15 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF E. Provide Class A for signalling line circuit. Provide Class B for all. F. Network or addressable loop cables shall be as recommended by manufacturer for installation of their system and UL Listed for Fire Alarm Systems. 2.12 RACEWAYS A. Conduit used for installation of Fire Alarm system shall follow requirements as identified in Section 26 05 33, Raceway and Boxes. 2.13 END -OF -LINE RESISTORS A. Ohmic value and power rating as determined by manufacturer based upon number of circuit devices supplied and circuit configuration as installed. B. Single -gang, mounted in recessed box. 2.14 INTRINSICALLY SAFE MODULE A. Fused, resistor/zener diode barrier module with output currents limited for NFPA 70, Class I, Class II, Class III, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, D, E, F, and G atmospheres. B. Surface -mounted backbox with secured, full -hinged access door and baked red enamel finish. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Coordinate with other trades for mounting and interfacing with fire alarm system related devices. B. Install control panels, initiating and alarm devices, conduit, and wiring for interconnection of devices specified herein and for interconnection of flow and supervisory switches and alarm bells specified in Section 21 13 13, Wet -Pipe Sprinkler Systems for complete and operable system. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install and connect fire detection and alarm equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, and in accordance with applicable codes and standards. B. Mount devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Provide outlet and junction boxes that are compatible with raceway system. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 2831 00- 16 MARCH 31, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF D. Mount detector LEDs so they are readily visible from floor. E. Program or configure panels and devices, as required to operate as defined by Sequence of Operations Matrix. F. Install conductors in accordance with NFPA 70 and Article 760. G. Install initiating alarm, signal, and communication conductors in separate and independent raceway system. H. Circuit wiring color -code, as established by installer, to be maintained throughout installation. I. Size conductors in accordance with device manufacturer's recommendations. Increase AWG size of alarm conductors, if necessary, to maintain terminal voltage drop within acceptable level required by NEC and NFPA. Do not install detectors until after construction cleanup is complete, in accordance with requirements of NFPA. If earlier installation is required by AHJ for protection during construction, clean or replace detectors installed prior to fmal clean-up. K. Duct Smoke Detector: Furnish, wire, and connect to fire alarm system in accordance with this Specification. Install in accordance with Section 23 09 13, HVAC Controls, Field Components, and Instruments. L. HVAC Equipment: Wire and connect fire alarm system to air handling system, smoke exhaust fan and smoke damper control circuits, and fan status contacts. Coordinate work with Section 23 09 OOB, Instrumentation and Control Devices for HVAC. M. Suppression Sprinkler System: Wire and connect to fire alarm system to suppression sprinkler system. Coordinate work with Section 21 13 13, Wet -Pipe Sprinkler Systems. 3.03 CONDUIT, ELECTRICAL ENCLOSURES, TERMINAL CABINETS, PULL BOXES, AND BACKPLATES A. Conduit Systems: Dedicated to fire alarm system and containing no unrelated conductors. B. Fire Alarm System Conduits: Size and type specified under Section 26 05 33, Raceway and Boxes. 1. Conduit: As specified in Section 26 05 33, Raceway and Boxes. a. Flexible Metallic Conduit: Allowable for whips to devices only. 1) Maximum Length: 6 feet. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM MARCH 31, 2026 283100-17 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 2) Minimum Diameter: 3/4 -inch. 3) Set screw type couplings or connectors are specifically prohibited. 2. Size conduits according to conductors contained therein. 3. Maximum Cross Sectional Area Percentage Fill for Fire Alarm System Conduits: 40 percent. C. Route and install conduit to minimize potential for physical damage, either mechanical or by fire; avoid interference with existing building systems, facilities or equipment; and to facilitate service and minimize maintenance. Coordinate installation between different trades to avoid conflicts. 1. Solidly attach conduit to building structural members or permanent walls, except flexible conduit whips to devices. Do not attach conduit to existing conduit, ductwork, cable trays, other ceiling equipment, drop ceiling hangers/grids or partition walls, except where necessary to connect to initiating, evacuation signaling, or auxiliary function devices. 2. Route conduit either parallel or perpendicular to building structural members. 3. Install conduit at a height to avoid obstructing any portion of a window, doorway cable tray, stairway, or passageway. Do not interfere with operation of existing mechanical or electrical equipment. 4. Locate conduit, junction boxes, pull boxes, terminal cabinets, electrical enclosures, and device backboxes to be readily accessible for inspection, testing, service, and maintenance. 5. Arrange conduit to minimize possibility of water in those conduits draining through control panels. a. Arrange conduit, except nipples between control panels, to enter control cabinets from below. b. Provide three 1/4 -inch drain holes in conduit at horizontal low point beneath each control cabinet. 6. Provide bushings at termination of conduit, prior to wire installation. 7. Install junction boxes as necessary. Pull conductors through junction boxes, without splices. 8. Install pullboxes in each conduit at intervals not to exceed 100 feet. 9. Minimum Pullbox Size: 4 -inch square, minimum. 10. Size device backboxes and junction boxes to accommodate number of conductors contained. Extension rings or extension boxes are prohibited. 11. Provide junction boxes, pull boxes, terminal cabinets, device backboxes, and raceways gasketed and weather -tight in accordance with requirements of Section 26 05 33, Raceway and Boxes. D. Installation Requirements: FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 2831 00- 18 MARCH 31, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 1. Conduit, Junction Boxes, Panels, Electrical Enclosures, Relays and Device Backboxes in Unfinished Areas: Exposed. 2. Conduit and Device Backboxes in Finished Areas: Concealed in walls, ceiling spaces, electrical shafts or closets, in finished areas, except as noted on Drawings. 3. Provide escutcheon plates on either side of the wall at exposed conduit wall penetrations. E. Seal penetrations of walls, floors, and ceilings around conduit(s) in accordance with Section 07 92 00, Joint Sealants, restoring walls, floors, and ceilings to their original condition, fire resistance, and integrity. F. Paint pull boxes, junction boxes, conduit bodies, and terminal cabinets "fire engine red" prior to installation. Provide touch-up painting, of normally visible pull boxes, junction boxes, and terminal cabinets prior to final acceptance testing. G. Ground conduit by approved ground clamps, and in accordance with NEC requirements. H. Mount end -of -line resistors on terminal blocks. I. Install detection and alarm wire in separate conduits. Route outgoing and return conductors for each supervised circuit separately as required by NFPA 72. Minimum Separation of Outgoing and Return Conduits: 1 foot vertically and 4 feet horizontally. 3.04 IDENTIFICATION A. Paint junction, terminal, and pulling box covers red and identify with engraved labels by loop number and circuit that it contains. B. Provide engraved alphanumeric identification for detection and terminal devices keyed to posted operations and maintenance instructions. 3.05 CONDUCTORS A. Requirements apply to fire alarm system conductors, including all signaling line, initiating device, indicating appliance, releasing function, remote signaling, ac and dc power and grounding/shield drain circuits. B. Conductors: 1. New; do not use wire that has scrapes, nicks, gouges or crushed insulation. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM MARCH 31, 2026 283100-19 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 2. Install in conduit. 3. Continuous between devices and between devices and intermediary terminal cabinets. 4. Low voltage conductors shall be minimum size 14 AWG. 5. In accordance with requirements of NEC, Article 760 for power limited service. C. Splices in conductors are specifically prohibited. D. Types: 1. Conductors, Except AC Power Conductors and Grounding Conductors: Solid copper or bunch tinned (bonded) stranded copper. 2. Stranded copper conductors are acceptable for ac power conductors and grounding conductors only. E. Terminations, including field connections to supervisory resistors, diodes, relays or other devices shall be to numbered terminals or terminal strips and readily accessible for inspection, service, testing and maintenance. 1. Terminations shall be within junction boxes, device backboxes, terminal cabinets, control panels or other suitable metal enclosures. 2. Terminals and terminal strips shall be suitable for the size and number of conductors connected to them. 3. Uniquely number each conductor termination with durable plastic tags or uniquely identifiable by a combination of numbers and color codes. Show conductor numbers on Contractor's Record Drawings (floor plans and detailed wiring diagrams) in a manner allowing ready identification of conductor terminations. 4. Wire nuts are prohibited. 5. Where pigtail devices are factory provided with wires too short to be connected to terminal strips (such as, solenoids), provide soldered and taped connections. F. Control Panel Wiring: 1. Fully dressed and bundled with nylon tie wraps at 3 -inch intervals. 2. Route bundled wiring parallel to terminal strips within control panels, with individual conductors turned out at 90 degree angles to their associated terminal connections. 3. Bundle AC power conductors and route separately from low voltage conductors. Maintain a minimum 2 -inch separation between AC power conductors and low voltage conductors wherever possible. 4. Size control cabinets to accommodate the requirements of this section. 5. Do not use control panels as raceways. Do not route conductors that do not terminate within a control panel through that control panel. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 2831 00-20 MARCH 31, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF G. Separate conductors into the following categories: 1. Low voltage circuits that serve devices. 2. AC power circuits. H. Install each category of conductors in physically separated, dedicated conduits, and isolate each category except at common associated control equipment. Further segregate conductors as necessary to conform to fire alarm system manufacturer's recommendations and as necessary to prevent electrical crosstalk between conductors installed in common conduits. I. Wiring: THHN or TFFN stranded. Use of multi -conductor twisted pair or similar wiring is not permitted. J. Install as power limited circuits in accordance with NFPA 72, and NEC, Article 760. K. Conductors looped around terminals are prohibited. L. Wire nut splices are prohibited. M. T -tapping of circuits is prohibited. N. Circuits shall be megger tested to voltage rating of their insulation before final terminations are made. 3.06 OVERVOLTAGE AND SURGE PROTECTION A. Install TVSS for fire alarm control panel in accordance with manufacturer's requirements. 3.07 REPAIR/RESTORATION A. Touch up scratches, mars, and dents, incurred during shipment or installation of equipment. B. If required because of extensive damage, as determined by Engineer, refinish entire assembly. C. Keep covers on smoke detectors until areas have been thoroughly cleaned. 3.08 TESTS AND INSPECTION A. In accordance with Section 01 9114, 01 75 01, Equipment Factory Acceptance Testing, and NFPA 72. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM MARCH 31, 2026 283100-21 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF B. Demonstrate entire system meets performance requirements specified in Article System Description. C. Perform tests in presence of code -enforcement authorities and Owner's Representative. Engineer upon Owner or AHJ request. D. Individually field test each smoke detector prior to installing device at its designated location to confirm operating condition after shipping and storage. Maintain a dated log indicating system address, type of device, sensitivity and initials of technician performing test, using test equipment specifically designed for that purpose, and submit as part of final acceptance documentation. After testing detection devices, base shall be labeled withdate, and initials of installing technician. Labeling shall not be visible after installation is complete. E. Test wiring runs for continuity, short circuits, and grounds before system is energized. Take resistance, current, and voltage readings as work progresses and document results. 1. Maintain a systematic record of all readings using schedules or charts of tests and measurements. Include readings, dates, and witnesses on the logging form. 2. Notify Fire Marshal and Owner before start of any required tests. Correct items found at variance with Drawings or Specification during testing or inspection. 3. Deliver test reports to Fire Marshal and Owner as completed. F. Prepare final as -built Sequence of Operations Matrix (See Supplement at End of Section) referencing each alarm input to every output function affected as a result of an alarm, trouble, or supervisory condition on that. For outputs programmed using more complex logic functions involving "any", "or", "not", "count", "time", and "timer" statements; reflect complete output equation in matrix. G. Prepare complete listing of device labels for alphanumeric annunciator displays and logging printers prior to acceptance test. 1. Test system wiring to demonstrate correct system response and correct subsequent system operation in event of: a. Open, shorted, and grounded intelligent analog signaling line circuit. b. Open, shorted, and grounded network signaling line circuit. c. Open, shorted, and grounded conventional initiating device circuits. d. Primary power or battery disconnected. e. Intelligent device removal. f. Incorrect device address. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 2831 00-22 MARCH 31, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF g. Printer trouble, off line or out of paper. h. Loss of data communications between system control panels. i. Loss of data communications between system annunciators. 2. Demonstrate system evacuation alarm indicating appliances as follows: a. Alarm notification appliances actuate as programmed. b. Audibility and visibility at required levels. 3. System indications shall be demonstrated as follows: a. F: Correct message display for each alarm input, at control panel, each remote alphanumeric LCD display. b. G: Correct annunciator light for each alarm input, at each annunciator and color graphic terminal. c. H: Correct printer logging for system activity. 4. Demonstrate system onsite and offsite reporting functions as follows: a. Correct alarm custom message display, address, device type, date and time transmitted, for each alarm input. b. Correct trouble custom message display, address, device type, date and time transmitted, for each alarm input. c. Trouble signals received for disconnect. 5. Demonstrate secondary power capabilities as follows: a. Disconnect system primary power for a period of time as specified herein; at end of period, confirm alarm condition shall be created and system performance as specified for required duration. b. Restore system primary power for 48 hours and confirm that system -charging current is normal trickle charge for fully charged battery bank. c. Check system battery voltages and charging currents at fire alarm control panel using test codes and LCD displays. H. If system fails to perform as specified and programmed during acceptance test, test will be terminated at discretion of acceptance inspector. 1. Retest system, correcting deficiencies and providing test documentation to acceptance inspector. 2. If software changes are required during acceptance test, provide a utility program to compare edited program with original and furnish a printed list of changes and the system functions, inputs, and outputs affected by changes. Retest items listed as changed before resuming acceptance test. Submit printed list and log of successful retesting of changed elements before scheduling completion of acceptance test. 3. Acceptance inspector may elect to require complete acceptance test to be performed again if, in their opinion, modifications to system hardware or software warrant complete retesting. I. Upon completion of tests, complete and provide the following: 1. NFPA 72, Record of Completion, and Inspection and Testing Form. 2. Certification that final system meets UL. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM MARCH 31, 2026 283100-23 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 3.09 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES A. Furnish manufacturer's representative for the following services at site or classroom as designated by Owner, for minimum person -days listed below, travel time excluded: 1. 10 person -days for installation assistance and inspection. 2. 5 person -days for functional and performance testing. 3. 2 person -days for prestartup classroom or site training. 3.10 SUPPLEMENTS A. The supplement listed below, following "End of Section," is a part of this Specification. Sequence of Operations Matrix. END OF SECTION FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 2831 00-24 MARCH 31, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF SYSTEM OUTPUTS 4 E C 1C 11 12 1E 14 1 1E 17 1E 1€ SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS MATRIX SYSTEM INPUTS CONTROL UNIT ANNUNCIATION NOTIFICATION CONTROL FUNCTIONS FACP FUNCTION S 0 Z W W W J z a m O uiUi co 0 z ~ J m a OH O c7 0 J m 0 Z (7 C) ~ cn z z O < < < > z a 0 a- HO U) 0 Z z O _j U) _0 C7 — (I)� J a Z C7 cn — O Z H p O H J Z U) Z 0 U } o Z5 F-< �m v 0- °m o o) co a U- a0 ZZ > W O U) Ho ZO U W �O aW U)} >U W O JW J W Hm ZW U o O-- W D ZW 0-U)0a 2D 0 `c > w > 0a 20 m QH U) 0-(D W Z OH OW 0 W d= 0 H co a� J> JZ W O¢ 0- W W - OZ 0<0 D W} stn d— �� O} X n H a 0o U) < W F Z zz zz a U0- ¢ U) 00- H W z U) a H Z > 00 z s 0� � co F O } F W }LUO } H h H W H H Z F U` 0 O W U) O as 00 < J aJ �m < J as 00 a J U)0- ZO (n0- zw (/)0- zO U)0 ZH QU DO H OJ 0- za H H- U� a H❑ U� d H C) U) Q d Z W <U) Z< < c- 0-W << ZH HZ U2 0 S U)0 ZO JU) oa < 0 as 0 < 0 HZ HO HZ HU) aH U) U)> A BC D E F G H I J K L MN 0 P Q R ST U V W X Y Z ALARM DEIVCES MANUAL FIRE ALARM PULL STATION X X X X SMOKE DETECTOR ACTIVATION X X X SPRINKLER WATER -FLOW SWITCH X X SUPERVISORY DEVICES DUCT SMOKE DETECTORS (SUPPLY SIDE) X X X X DUCT SMOKE DETECTORS (RETURN SIDE) X X X VALVE TAMPER SWITCH ACTIVATED X X X TROUBLE FUNCTIONS FIRE ALARM AC POWER FAILURE X X X FIRE ALARM SYSTEM LOW BATTERY X X X OPEN CIRCUIT X X X GROUND FAULT X X X NOTIFICAITON APPLIANCE CIRCUIT SHORT X X X PANEL FUNCTIONS SYSTEM SILENCE X X X X SYSTEM RESET X PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM MARCH 31, 2026 28 31 00 SUPPLEMENT 1 -2 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF MARY'S CREEK WRF r --------------------------- I OPERATIONS BUILDING I ++ I I I I O I I = I I 4O O ® FAIN v `I I 10 SCADA O9 P 13 -, I OO I I I L NaOCI BUILDING I 11 I I © I = I = I FACP 2 1 lO i2 ---J LT;i---------J r--------------------------Ir-------------------------- I SOLIDS BUILDING I I CHEMICAL BUILDING I I II „ I I ®11 I Z I FAC 1 0 SCADA 3_ I I I 1 L -------------------------J 11 I I © I = I FACP 2 lO 10 SCADA P I I I I r----------------1 r ------ -------------- I PTU BUILDING I I BIOREACTOR BUILDING I II I I ++ I I I I © I I r I = I FACP O 1 lO I 10 SCADA P I I I I I 0� II I L -------------------------J NOTE:NOTE: THE DIAGRAM ABOVE IS A SCHEMATIC FIRE ALARM DIAGRAM. PANELS CAN BE CONNECTED TO THE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM FIBER OPTIC LOOP IN ANY ORDER. 1+ I I I © I = I I (� I OS i I FACP g I 10 SCADA 12 2 O I I I OO I L-------------------------J PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM MARCH 31, 2026 28 31 00 SUPPLEMENT 1 -2 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF FIRE ALARM RISER DIAGRAM KEYNOTES 1. CONNECT TO 120 VAC, 20 AMP DEDICATED CIRCUIT NUMBER DP -2. 2. PROVIDE PULL STATION 3. PROVIDE ADDITIONAL SIGNALING LINE CIRCUITS AS REQUIRED FOR THE QUANTITY OF DEVICES SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS. 4. PROVIDE CLASS A, STYLE Z NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE CIRCUITS. PROVIDE SEPARATE AUDIBLE AND VISUAL CIRCUITS FOR SILENCE FEATURE. 5. PROVIDE ADDITIONAL NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE CIRCUITS AS REQUIRED SUCH THAT VOLTAGE DROP DOES NOT EXCEED THE MAXIMUM ALLOWED BY THE MANUFACTURER PER CIRCUIT. ADDITIONAL NOTIFICATION CIRCUITS AND ADDITIONAL POWER SUPPLIES MAY BE REQUIRED DEPENDING ON EQUIPMENT PROVIDED 6. PROVIDE SMOKE DETECTOR TO PROTECT FIRE ALARM PANEL AND ANY REMOTE NOTIFICATION POWER SUPPLY. 7. PROVIDE GROUND PER NEC-NFPA 72. 8. PROVIDE TAMPER SWITCH AND WATERFLOW SWITCH.. 9. PROVIDE MAIN FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL IN SCADA ROOM 222 LOCATED IN OPERATIONS BUILDING. PROVIDE FIBER OPTIC CONNECTION FROM MAIN FACP TO LOCAL FACPS IN SOLIDS AND CHEMICAL BUILDINGS. LOCAL FACPS WILL REPORT BACK TO MAIN FACP UPON ACTIVATION OF ANY FIRE ALARM SYSTEM ELEMENTS. 10. PROVIDE HARD -WIRE TO SCADA FROM FIRE ALARM PANEL. 11. FIBER OPTIC CONNECTION FOR FIRE ALARM SYSTEM CONTROL PANELS. 12. LOCAL FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL LOCATED WITHIN THE BUILDING IT MONITORS. LOCAL FACP TO CONNECT BACK TO MAIN FACP LOCATED IN OPERATIONS BUILDING. 13. PROVIDE TAMPER SWITCH AND WATERFLOW SWITCH ON EXTERIOR POST INDICATOR VALVE. MARY'S CREEK WRF SYSTEM OUTPUTS SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FACPOOX FIRE AID EMERGENCY ALARM SYSTEM FACR ANNUNCIATION NOTIFICATION L w �a C] c 2 {'I ca ca {i] lil eu UL (cl r� W LhJ {l7 F zi 3 fl 4 0 c 0 m V] 1—j 0t°7 w Ill w U J y, LL 43 U J �4 L� 8 d d d ¢ 7Q 4 um J VS J tco [ia A R3 C 0 E F G H I J K L M L FULL STATION ,{ X X X RET E( ECT ICAL ROOM x x x X DETECTO CHEMICAL STORAGE x x x x X FLL?W 51NITI19 X X wKLER CONTROL VALVE A X X x ENI^Y MANUAL PULL STATION X X X X CAL CONTAINMENT FLOL (LS) FFACPS'YSTEM X x x XC POWER FAILURE X x X YSTEM SILENCE c X SYSTEM LOW UATTEFR1f X X xCIRCLJIT x XXND FAULT X K xICATION APPLIANCE SHORT CIRCUIT x X X PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 MARCH 31, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 31 00 SUPPLEMENT - 1 31 10 00 -1 SITE CLEARING Page 1 of 6 SECTION 31 10 00 SITE CLEARING GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Preparation of right-of-way and other designated areas for construction operations by removing and disposing of all obstructions including clearing and grubbing and trees, when removal of such obstructions is not specifically shown on the Drawings to be paid by other Sections. B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification 1. None. C. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to 1. Division 0— Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract 2. Division 1— General Requirements 3. Section 02 41 13 — Selective Site Demolition 4. Section 02 41 14 — Utility Removal/Abandonment 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. Site Clearing a. Measurement 1) Measurement for this Item shall be by lump sum, square yard, or per acre. b. Payment 1) The work performed and the materials furnished in accordance with this Item shall be paid for at the lump sum, square yard, or per acre price bid for "Site Clearing". c. The price bid shall include: 1) Pruning of designated trees and shrubs 2) Removal and disposal of structures and obstructions (unless separate bid item is provided under 02 41 13 "Selective Site Demolition or 02 4114 "Utility Removal/Abandonment"). 3) Removal and disposal of trees under 6 -inch in diameter when bidding by lump sum or square yard 4) Removal of ALL trees when bidding by acre. 5) Backfilling of holes 6) Clean-up 2. Tree Removal (for trees 6 -inch or larger in diameter when Site Clearing is bid by lump sum or square yard) a. Measurement 1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each. 2) Measurement of diameter for tree removal shall be at standard "Diameter at Breast Height" or DBH, where Breast Height shall be 54" above grade. CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised March 22, 2021 31 1000 -2 SITE CLEARING Page 2 of 6 3) b. Payment 1) The work performed and the materials furnished in accordance with this Item shall be paid for at the unit price bid per each "Tree Removal" for: a) Various diameter ranges c. The price bid shall include: 1) Removal and disposal of tree, including removal of root to a depth at least 2 foot below grade 2) Grading and backfilling of holes 3) Excavation 4) Clean-up Tree Removal and Transplantation a. Measurement 1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each. b. Payment 1) The work performed and the materials furnished in accordance with this Item shall be paid for at the unit price bid per each "Tree Transplant" for: a) Various diameter ranges c. The price bid shall include: 1) Pruning of designated trees and shrubs 2) Moving tree with truck mounted tree spade 3) Grading and backfilling of holes 4) Replanting tree at temporary location (determined by Contractor) 5) Maintaining tree until Work is completed 6) Replanting tree into original or designated location 7) Excavation 8) Fertilization 9) Mulching 10) Watering 11) Clean-up 12) Warranty period 4. Tree Protection a. Measurement 1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each as designated on Construction Drawings for protection b. Payment 1) The work performed and the materials furnished in accordance with this Item shall be paid for at the unit price bid per each "Tree Protection" for: a) Various caliper ranges c. The price bid shall include: 1) Protection of tree utilizing measures designated on Construction Drawings 2) Installation of work of barriers as designated on Construction Drawings 3) Maintenance of protection measures throughout construction completed 4) Replanting tree into original or designated location 5) Excavation 6) Fertilization 7) Mulching 8) Clean-up including removal on constriction completion of protection measures CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised March 22, 2021 31 1000 -3 SITE CLEARING Page 3 of 6 5. 1.3 REFERENCES [NOT USED] 1.4 ADMINSTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Permits 1. Contractor shall obtain Tree Removal Permits and Urban Forestry Permits as required by the City's Tree Ordinance. PARD-Forestry details can be found here: Forestry — Welcome to the City of Fort Worth (fortworthtexas.gov).Urban Forestry Compliance's ordinance and requirements are within Zoning and can be found here: Zoning — Welcome to the City of Fort Worth (fortworthtexas.gov). B. Preinstallation Meetings 1. Hold a preliminary site clearing meeting and include the Contractor, City Forester (if City owned tree) or representative of Urban Forestry if privately owned trees), City Inspector, and the Project Manager for the purpose of reviewing the Contractor's tree removal plan. Clearly mark all trees to remain on the project site prior to the meeting. 2. The Contractor will provide the City with a Disposal Letter in accordance to Division 01. 1.5 SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED] 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED] 1.11 FIELD CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] PART 2- PRODUCTS [NOT USED] PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED] 3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED] 3.3 PREPARATION A. All trees identified to be protected and/or preserved should be clearly flagged with survey tape as per Construction Drawings. CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised March 22, 2021 31 1000 -4 SITE CLEARING Page 4 of 6 B. Following taping and prior to any removals or site clearing, the Contractor shall meet with the City, the Engineer and the Landowner, if necessary, to confirm trees to be saved. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Protection of Trees 1. Protect designated trees and prune trees and shrubs as shown on the Drawings. Refer to the Drawings for tree protection details. 2. If the Drawings do not provide tree protection details, protected trees shall be fenced by placing 6 -foot tall metal T -posts in a square around the tree trunk with the corners located on the canopy drip line, unless instructed otherwise. 3. When site conditions do not allow for the T -posts to be installed at the drip line, the T -posts may be installed no less than 8 feet from the tree trunk. 4 -foot high 12 %2 gauge stock fencing or orange plastic snow fence shall be attached to the T -posts to form the enclosure. 4. For city -owned trees, PARD-Forestry permission required to install protective fencing inside of canopy dripline (Critical Root Zone). 5. Additional trunk protection (cladding) is required when protective fencing is approved within the Critical Root Zone. 6. Do not park equipment, service equipment, store materials, or disturb the root area under the branches of trees designated for preservation. 7. When shown on the Drawings, treat cuts on trees with an approved tree wound dressing within 30 minutes of making a pruning cut or otherwise causing damage to the tree. 8. Trees and brush shall be mulched on -site. a. Burning as a method of disposal is not allowed. B. Hazardous Materials 1. The Contractor will notify the Engineer immediately if any hazardous or questionable materials not shown on the Drawings are encountered. This includes; but not limited to: a. Floor tiles b. Roof tiles c. Shingles d. Siding e. Utility piping 2. The testing, removal, and disposal of hazardous materials will be in accordance with Division 1. C. Site Clearing Clear areas shown on the Drawings of all obstructions, except those landscape features that are to be preserved. Such obstructions include, but are not limited to: a. Remains of buildings and other structures b. Foundations c. Floor slabs d. Concrete e. Brick f. Lumber CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised March 22, 2021 31 1000-5 SITE CLEARING Page 5 of 6 g. Plaster h. Septic tank drain fields i. Abandoned utility pipes or conduits j. Equipment k. Trees 1. Fences m. Retaining walls n. Other items as specified on the Drawings 2. Remove vegetation and other landscape features not designated for preservation, whether above or below ground, including, but not limited to: a. Curb and gutter b. Driveways c. Paved parking areas d. Miscellaneous stone e. Sidewalks fDrainage structures g. Manholes h. Inlets i. Abandoned railroad tracks j. Scrap iron k. Other debris 3. Remove culverts, storm sewers, manholes, and inlets in proper sequence to maintain traffic and drainage in accordance with Section 02 41 14. 4. In areas receiving embankment, remove obstructions not designated for preservation to 2 feet below natural ground. 5. In areas to be excavated, remove obstructions to 2 feet below the excavation level. 6. In all other areas, remove obstructions to 1 foot below natural ground. 7. When allowed by the Drawings or directed by the Engineer, cut trees and stumps off to ground level. a. Removal of existing structures shall be as per Section 02 41 13. D. Disposal 1. Dispose of all trees within 24 hours of removal at an approved off -site facility. 2. All materials and debris removed becomes the property of the Contractor, unless otherwise stated on the Drawings. 3. The Contractor will dispose of material and debris off -site in accordance with local, state, and federal laws and regulations. 3.5 REPAIR [NOT USED] 3.6 RE -INSTALLATION [NOT USED] 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] 3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED] 3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED] 3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED] 3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED] CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised March 22, 2021 31 1000-6 SITE CLEARING Page 6 of 6 3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED] 3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED] 3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED] END OF SECTION Revision Log DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE 12/20/2012 D. Johnson 1.4.A Permits: Removed ordinance number and added City's website address 3/22/2021 M Owen 1.2 Clarified measurement and payment. 1.4. Clarified administrative requirements. 3.4 Clarified additional installation requirements for tree protection and disposal. CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised March 22, 2021 MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 3123 13 SUBGRADE PREPARATION PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: ASTM International (ASTM): a. D698, Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lb/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)). b. D1556/D1556M, 1556M, Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand -Cone Method. c. D1557, Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2,700 kN-m/m3)). d. D6938, Standard Test Method for In -Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil -Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Optimum Moisture Content: As defined in Section 31 23 23, Fill and Backfill. B. Prepared Ground Surface: Ground surface after completion of clearing and grubbing, scalping of sod, stripping of topsoil, dewatering, excavation to grade, and scarification and compaction of subgrade. A. Proof -Rolling: Test rolling of subgrade by heavily load vehicle or roller to identify areas that will not support the future loading without excessive settlement or rutting. B. Relative Compaction: As defined in Section 31 23 23, Fill and Backfill. C. Subgrade: Layer of existing soil after completion of clearing, grubbing, scalping of topsoil prior to placement of fill, roadway structure or base for floor slab. D. Unsuitable Material: Subgrade material unsuitable for the project consisting of rubble, debris, vegetation, and undocumented fill. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 MARCH 23, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS SUBGRADE PREPARATION 31 23 13- 1 MARY'S CREEK WRF 1.03 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Complete applicable Work specified in Section 02 41 00, Demolition; Section 31 10 00, Site Clearing; Section 31 23 19.01, Dewatering; and Section 31 23 16, Excavation, prior to subgrade preparation. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Notify Owner's Representative when subgrade is ready for compaction or proof -rolling or whenever compaction or proof -rolling is resumed after a period of extended inactivity. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Prepare subgrade when unfrozen and free of ice and snow. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Keep subgrade free of water, debris, and foreign matter during compaction or proof -rolling. B. Bring subgrade to proper grade and cross-section and uniformly compact surface. C. Do not use sections of prepared ground surface as haul roads. Protect prepared subgrade from traffic. D. Maintain prepared ground surface in finished condition until next course is placed. 3.02 PROOF ROLLING A. Under Earthfill: Three passes with a loaded dump truck having a single -axle weight of at least 10 tons. Proof rolling is not required on top of tan limestone or marl if exposed during excavation. B. Soft or pumping areas shall be excavated to a firm subgrade and properly backfilled with onsite soils or select fill in accordance with Section 31 23 23, Fill and Backfill. SUBGRADE PREPARATION PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 31 23 13 - 2 MARCH 23, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 3.03 MOISTURE CONDITIONING A. Dry Subgrade: Add water, then mix to make moisture content uniform throughout. B. Wet Subgrade: Aerate material by blading, discing, harrowing, or other methods, to hasten drying process. 3.04 TESTING A. In -place density test in accordance with ASTM D1556/D1556M or ASTM D6938. Test as follows: One test every 1,000 square feet of subgrade where compaction is required. 3.05 CORRECTION A. Soft or Loose Subgrade: 1. Adjust moisture content and recompact. 2. Overexcavate as specified in Section 31 23 16, Excavation, and replace with onsite soils or select fill as specified in Section 31 23 23, Fill and Backfill. B. Unsuitable Material: Overexcavate as specified in Section 31 23 16, Excavation, and replace with suitable material from the excavation, as specified in Section 31 23 23, Fill and Backfill. 3.06 BEDROCK SURFACE PREPARATION A. Remove loose and/or weather rock and pockets of fines, sand, rock rubble or gravel and other objectionable material from the in -situ rock surface including areas of depression, large crevices, and open rock joints. The loose material need not be removed where the width of the opening is less than 2 inches. B. Mechanical equipment may be used but such equipment will be rubber tired only. Picking, barring, and hand excavation may be necessary to obtain a foundation surface free from loose, drummy, or shattered materials. Overhangs are not permitted at any location. Excavate and backfill overhangs with compacted granular materials. Vertical surfaces are not permitted. C. Thoroughly clean the fmal rock surface using air/water jets or other approved method and maintain in a clean condition until the placement of approved fill or concrete thereon. END OF SECTION PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 SUBGRADE PREPARATION MARCH 23, 2026 31 23 13 - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 3123 16 EXCAVATION PART1 GENERAL 1.01 DEFINITIONS A. Common Excavation: Removal of material not classified as rock excavation. B. Rock Excavation: 1. Excavation (Excluding Trench Excavation): Excavation of solid material which by demonstration cannot, in Engineer's opinion, be reasonably loosened or ripped by single -tooth, hydraulically operated ripper mounted on crawler tractor in good condition and rated at minimum 300 flywheel horsepower; and which must be systematically drilled and blasted or broken by power -operated hammer, hydraulic rock breaker, expansive compounds, or other similar means prior to removal. 2. Trench Excavation: Excavation of solid material which by demonstration cannot, in Engineer's opinion, be reasonably excavated with minimum 135 -horsepower backhoe in good condition and equipped with manufacturer's standard boom, two rippers, and rock points or similar approved equipment; and which must be and is systematically drilled and blasted or broken by power -operated hammer, hydraulic rock breaker, expansive compounds, or other similar means prior to excavation. 3. Term "rock" as used in this section is defined as being such by required means of excavation as specified above and does not necessarily correspond to "rock" as implied by names of geologic formations. 4. Excavation of boulders larger than 1/2 cubic yard will be classified as rock excavation, if drilling and blasting or breaking them apart with power -operated hammer, hydraulic rock breaker, expansive compounds, or other similar means is both necessary and used for their removal. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: Excavation Plan, Detailing: a. Methods and sequencing of excavation. b. Proposed locations of stockpiled excavated material. c. Proposed onsite and offsite spoil disposal sites. d. If less than 1 acre is disturbed at any one time, submit construction stormwater permit. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 EXCAVATION APRIL 6, 2026 312316-1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 2. Required excavation permits from applicable governing agencies. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide adequate survey control to avoid unauthorized overexcavation. 1.04 WEATHER LIMITATIONS A. Material excavated when frozen or when air temperature is less than 32 degrees F shall not be used as fill or backfill until material completely thaws. B. Material excavated during inclement weather shall not be used as fill or backfill until after material drains and dries sufficiently for proper compaction. 1.05 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Demolition: Complete applicable Work specified in Section 02 41 00, Demolition, prior to excavating. B. Clearing, Grubbing, and Stripping: Complete applicable Work specified in Section 31 10 00, Site Clearing, prior to excavating. C. Dewatering: Conform to applicable requirements of Section 31 23 19.01, Dewatering, prior to initiating excavation. D. Excavation Support: Install and maintain, as specified in Section 31 41 00, Shoring, as necessary to support sides of excavations and prevent detrimental settlement and lateral movement of existing facilities, adjacent property, and completed Work. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Excavate to lines, grades, and dimensions shown and as necessary to accomplish Work. Excavate to within tolerance of plus or minus 0.1 foot, except where dimensions or grades are shown or specified as maximum or minimum. Allow for forms, working space, granular base, topsoil, and similar items, wherever applicable. Trim to neat lines where concrete is to be deposited against earth. B. Do not overexcavate without written authorization of Engineer. EXCAVATION PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 31 23 16 -2 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF C. Remove or protect obstructions as shown and as specified in Section 01 50 00, Temporary Facilities and Controls, Article Protection of Work and Property. D. Use of explosives is prohibited. 3.02 UNCLASSIFIED EXCAVATION A. Excavation is unclassified. Complete all excavation regardless of the type, nature, or condition of the materials encountered. 3.03 CLASSIFIED EXCAVATION A. Excavation is classified; see Article Definitions for classifications of common excavation and rock excavation. Notify Engineer whenever that may be classified as rock is encountered. B. Before beginning rock excavation, comply with following requirements: 1. Remove overlying material as common excavation and expose rock surface for examination by Engineer. 2. Demonstrate that removal of remaining material classifies as rock excavation unless waived by Engineer. 3. Assist Engineer with measurement and documentation of rock excavation. Volume of rock excavation shall be determined by estimated quantity of in -place, undisturbed rock, and based on required subgrade elevation. 4. Assist Engineer with measurement and documentation of quantity of rock hauled offsite. Quantity of rock hauled offsite shall not be considered for measurement or documentation for efforts related to rock excavation. 3.04 TRENCH WIDTH A. Minimum Width of Trenches: 1. Single Pipes, Conduits, Direct -Buried Cables, and Duct Banks: a. Less than 4 -inch Outside Diameter or Width: 12 inches. b. Greater than 4 -inch Outside Diameter or Width: 12 inches greater than outside diameter or width of pipe, conduit, direct -buried cable, or duct bank. 2. Multiple Pipes, Conduits, Cables, or Duct Banks in Single Trench: 12 inches greater than aggregate width of pipes, conduits, cables, duct banks, plus space between. 3. Increase trench widths by thicknesses of sheeting. B. Maximum Trench Width: 24 inches greater than outside diameter or width of pipe, conduit, direct -buried cable, or duct bank. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 EXCAVATION APRIL 6, 2026 312316-3 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 3.05 PIPE BEDDING GROOVES FOR NONPERFORATED DRAIN LINES A. Semicircular, trapezoidal, or 90 -degree -V. B. Excavated or plowed into trench bottom. Forming groove by compaction will not be acceptable. 3.06 EMBANKMENT AND CUT SLOPES A. Remove loose stones and rock that exceed 3 -inch diameter. Remove exposed roots from cut slopes. B. Round tops of cut slopes in soil to not less than a 6 -foot radius, provided such rounding does not extend offsite or outside easements and rights -of -way, or adversely impacts existing facilities, adjacent property, or completed Work. 3.07 STOCKPILING EXCAVATED MATERIAL A. Stockpile excavated material that is suitable for use as fill or backfill until material is needed. B. Post signs indicating proposed use of material stockpiled. Post signs that are readable from all directions of approach to each stockpile. Signs should be clearly worded and readable by equipment operators from their normal seated position. C. Confine stockpiles to within easements, rights -of -way, and approved work areas. Do not obstruct roads or streets. D. Do not stockpile excavated material adjacent to trenches and other excavations, unless excavation side slopes and excavation support systems are designed, constructed, and maintained for stockpile loads. E. Do not stockpile excavated materials near or over existing facilities, adjacent property, or completed Work, if weight of stockpiled material could cause damage by structural failure or settlement. 3.08 DISPOSAL OF SPOIL A. Dispose of excavated materials, which are unsuitable or exceed quantity needed for fill or backfill, offsite. B. Dispose of debris resulting from removal of underground facilities as specified in Section 02 41 00, Demolition, for demolition debris. END OF SECTION EXCAVATION PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 31 23 16 -4 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRY SECTION 3123 19.01 DEWATERING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Dewatering Performance: Design, furnish, install, test, operate, monitor, and maintain dewatering system of sufficient scope, size, and capacity to control hydrostatic pressures and to lower, control, remove, and dispose of ground water and permit excavation and construction to proceed on dry, stable subgrades. 1. Delegated Design: Design dewatering system, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer in the state where the Project is to be constructed, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. 2. Continuously monitor and maintain dewatering operations to ensure erosion control, stability of excavations and constructed slopes, that excavation does not flood, and that damage to subgrades and permanent structures is prevented. 3. Prevent surface water from entering excavations by grading, dikes, or other means. 4. Accomplish dewatering without damaging existing buildings, structures, and site improvements adjacent to excavation. 5. Remove dewatering system when no longer required for construction. B. Contractor is responsible for obtaining a groundwater removal permit from the Northern Trinity Groundwater Conservation District. Contractor shall pay for all permit fees and water removal/consumption fees as part of the Base Bid. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: 1. Water control plan. 2. Well permits. 3. Groundwater removal and Discharge permits. 4. Water Level Elevations Observed in Observation Wells: Submit same day measured. 5. Settlement Benchmark Elevations: Submit weekly record. 6. Inflow Measurements: Submit weekly record. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 DEWATERING APRIL 6, 2026 31 23 19.01 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF 1.03 WATER CONTROL PLAN A. As a minimum, include: 1. Descriptions of proposed groundwater and surface water control facilities including, but not limited to, equipment; methods; standby equipment and power supply, pollution control facilities, discharge locations to be utilized, and provisions for immediate temporary water supply as required by this section. 2. Drawings showing locations, dimensions, and relationships of elements of each system, including extraction wells, piezometers and observation wells, conveyance piping, pumps, sedimentation control facilities, discharge locations, and other components necessary to facilitate sufficient dewatering. 3. Design calculations demonstrating adequacy of proposed dewatering systems and components. 4. Water control plan and design calculations shall be stamped by professional engineer, licensed in the State of Texas. B. If system is modified during installation or operation, revise or amend and resubmit Water Control Plan. Do not commence excavation until revised and amended Water Control Plan has been received and approved. C. Review of Contractor's Water Control Plan (original and any subsequent revisions) shall be only for compliance with specific stated requirements for its content and that it is stamped by a licensed engineer as specified and not for accuracy of content or for adequacy of the Plan, both of which shall be solely the responsibility of Contractor. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Continuously control water during course of construction, including weekends and holidays and during periods of work stoppages, and provide adequate backup systems to maintain control of water. B. Remove and control water during periods when necessary to properly accomplish Work. 3.02 SURFACE WATER CONTROL A. See Section 01 50 00, Temporary Facilities and Controls, Article Temporary Controls. DEWATERING PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 31 23 19.01 -2 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRY B. Remove surface runoff controls when no longer needed. 3.03 DEWATERING SYSTEMS A. Provide, operate, and maintain dewatering systems of sufficient size and capacity to permit excavation and subsequent construction in dry and to lower and maintain groundwater level a minimum of 2 feet below the lowest point of excavation. Continuously maintain excavations free of water, regardless of source, including artesian and perched groundwater and until backfilled to final grade. B. Design and Operate Dewatering Systems: 1. To prevent loss of ground as water is removed. 2. To allow required compaction of subgrade. 3. To avoid inducing settlement or damage to existing facilities, completed Work, or adjacent property. 4. To relieve artesian pressures and resultant uplift of excavation bottom. 5. To allow excavation and construction of structures free of water. 6. To prevent instability of faces of excavation. C. Provide sufficient redundancy in each system to keep excavation free of water in event of component failure. D. Provide 100 percent emergency power backup with automatic startup and switchover in event of electrical power failure. E. Provide supplemental ditches and sumps only as necessary to collect water from local seeps. Do not use ditches and sumps as primary means of dewatering. 3.04 DISPOSAL OF WATER A. Obtain discharge permit for water disposal from authorities having jurisdiction. B. Treat water collected by dewatering operations, as required by regulatory agencies, prior to discharge. C. Discharge water as required by discharge permit and in manner that will not cause erosion or flooding, or otherwise damage existing facilities, completed Work, or adjacent property. D. Remove and dispose of solids from treatment facilities per federal, state, and local regulations and perform other maintenance of treatment facilities as necessary to maintain their efficiency. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 DEWATERING APRIL 6, 2026 31 23 19.01 -3 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF 3.05 PROTECTION OF PROPERTY A. Make assessment of potential for dewatering induced settlement. Provide and operate devices or systems, including but not limited to reinjection wells, infiltration trenches and cutoff walls, necessary to prevent damage to existing facilities, completed Work, and adjacent property. B. Securely support existing facilities, completed Work, and adjacent property vulnerable to settlement due to dewatering operations. Support shall include, but not be limited to, bracing, underpinning, or compaction grouting. 3.06 REMEDIATION OF GROUNDWATER DEPLETION A. If dewatering reduces quantity or quality of water produced by existing wells, temporarily supply water to affected well owners from other sources. Furnish water of a quality and quantity equal to or exceeding the quality and quantity available to well owner prior to beginning the Work or as satisfactory to each well owner. END OF SECTION DEWATERING PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 3123 19.01-4 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 3123 23 FILL AND BACKFILL PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. ASTM International (ASTM): a. C117, Standard Test Method for Materials Finer Than 75 -Micrometers (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing. b. C136, Standard Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates. c. D75, Standard Practice for Sampling Aggregates. d. D698, Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)). e. D 1556, Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand -Cone Method. f. D1557, Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2,700 kN-m/m3)). g. D4253, Standard Test Methods for Maximum Index Density and Unit Weight of Soils Using a Vibratory Table. h. D4254, Standard Test Method for Minimum Index Density and Unit Weight of Soils and Calculation of Relative Density. i. D6938, Standard Test Methods for In -Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil -Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Relative Compaction: 1. Ratio, in percent, of as -compacted field dry density to laboratory maximum dry density as determined in accordance with ASTM D698. 2. Apply corrections for oversize material to either as -compacted field dry density or maximum dry density, as determined by Engineer. B. Optimum Moisture Content: 1. Determined in accordance with ASTM Standard specified to determine maximum dry density for relative compaction. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 FILL AND BACKFILL APRIL 23, 2026 31 23 23 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 2. Determine field moisture content on basis of fraction passing 3/4 -inch sieve. C. Relative Density: Calculated in accordance with ASTM D4254 based on maximum index density determined in accordance with ASTM D4253 and minimum index density determined in accordance with ASTM D4254. D. Prepared Ground Surface: Ground surface after completion of required demolition, clearing and grubbing, scalping of sod, stripping of topsoil, excavation to grade, and subgrade preparation. E. Completed Course: A course or layer that is ready for next layer or next phase of Work. F. Lift: Loose (uncompacted) layer of material. G. Geosynthetics: Geotextiles, geogrids, or geomembranes. H. Well -Graded: 1. A mixture of particle sizes with no specific concentration or lack thereof of one or more sizes. 2. Does not define numerical value that must be placed on coefficient of uniformity, coefficient of curvature, or other specific grain size distribution parameters. 3. Used to define material type that, when compacted, produces a strong and relatively incompressible soil mass free from detrimental voids. I. Influence Area: Area within planes sloped downward and outward at 60 -degree angle from horizontal measured from: 1. 1 foot outside outermost edge at base of foundations or slabs. 2. 1 foot outside outermost edge at surface of roadways or shoulder. 3. 0.5 foot outside exterior at spring line of pipes or culverts. J. Borrow Material: Material from required excavations or from designated borrow areas on or near Site. K. Selected Backfill Material: Materials available onsite that Engineer determines to be suitable for specific use. L. Imported Material: Materials obtained from sources offsite, suitable for specified use. M. Structural Fill: Fill materials as required under structures, pavements, and other facilities. FILL AND BACKFILL PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 31 23 23 - 2 APRIL 23, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF N. Embankment Material: Fill materials required to raise existing grade in areas other than under structures. O. Standard Specifications: When referenced in this section, shall mean [A: ]. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: Tank manufacturer's recommendations for backfill around each buried tank. 2. Samples: a. Imported material taken at source. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Manufacturer's data sheets for compaction equipment. 2. Certified test results from independent testing agency. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Notify Engineer when: 1. Structure or tank is ready for backfilling, and whenever backfilling operations are resumed after a period of inactivity. 2. Soft or loose subgrade materials are encountered wherever embankment or site fill is to be placed. 3. Fill material appears to be deviating from Specifications. 1.05 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Complete applicable Work specified in Section 02 41 00, Demolition; Section 31 10 00, Site Clearing; Section 31 23 16, Excavation; and Section 31 23 13, Subgrade Preparation, prior to placing fill or backfill. B. Backfill against concrete structures only after concrete has attained compressive strength, specified in Section 03 30 00, Cast -in -Place Concrete.. Obtain Engineer's acceptance of concrete work and attained strength prior to placing backfill. C. Backfill around water -holding structures only after completion of satisfactory leakage tests as specified in Section 03 30 00, Cast -in -Place Concrete. D. Backfill around buried tanks only after tank is set in position, securely anchored, and ready to be backfilled. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 FILL AND BACKFILL APRIL 23, 2026 31 23 23 - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF E. Do not place granular base, subbase, or surfacing until after subgrade has been prepared as specified in Section 31 23 13, Subgrade Preparation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 EARTHFILL A. Excavated material from required excavations free from rocks larger than 3 inches, from roots and other organic matter, ashes, cinders, trash, debris, and other deleterious materials, with a liquid limit of less than 60 and a plasticity index of less than 40. 2.02 GRANULAR FILL A. 1 -inch minus crushed gravel or crushed rock. B. Free from dirt, clay balls, and organic material. C. Well -graded from coarse to fine and containing sufficient fines to bind material when compacted, but with maximum 3 percent by weight passing No. 200 sieve and less than 30% passing No. 40 sieve. 2.03 SAND A. Free from clay, organic matter, or other deleterious material. B. Gradation as determined in accordance with ASTM C117 and ASTM C136: Sieve Size 1/4 -inch No. 4 No. 200 Percent Passing by Weight 100 95-100 0-8 2.04 BACKFILL AROUND BURIED TANKS A. As recommended by tank manufacturer. 2.05 GRANULAR DRAIN MATERIAL A. As specified in Section 31 23 23.15, Trench Backfill. FILL AND BACKFILL PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 31 23 23 - 4 APRIL 23, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 2.06 GRANULAR FILTER MATERIAL A. Narrowly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, or crushed stone and natural sand; ASTM D448; coarse -aggregate grading Size 67; with 100 percent passing a 1 -inch sieve and 0-5 percent passing a No. 4 sieve. 2.07 2.07 2.08 2.09 2.10 WATER FOR MOISTURE CONDITIONING A. Free of hazardous or toxic contaminates, or contaminants deleterious to proper compaction. BASE COURSE ROCK A. As specified in Section 32 11 23, Aggregate Base Courses. FOUNDATION STABILIZATION ROCK A. Crushed rock or pit run rock. B. Uniformly graded from coarse to fine. C. Free from excessive dirt and other organic material. D. Maximum 2 -1/2 -inch particle size. CRUSHED ROCK FOR SUBSTATIONS A. Clean, hard, durable crushed rock, free from foreign materials and washed. B. Gradation as determined in accordance with ASTM C117 and ASTM C136. C. Base Course: Sieve Size 2 inches 1-1/2 inches 3/4 inch 1/4 inch No. 10 D. Finish Grade Rock: PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 APRIL 23, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS Percent Passing by Weinht -100 95 - 100 55-75 35-50 4-60 FILL AND BACKFILL 31 2323 -5 MARY'S CREEK WRF Sieve Size 2 inches 1-1/2 inches 1 inch 3/4 inch Percent Passing by Weight -100 90 - 100 30-65 0-15 E. Access Road Surfacing: Gradation same as for base course. 2.11 SOIL COVER OVER GEOTEXTILES A. Particle Size: Maximum linch. B. Free of sharp angular pieces that may damage geotextile. 2.12 SOIL COVER OVER GEOMEMBRANES A. Granular material. B. Particle Size: Maximum 1/4 inch. C. Particle Shape: Rounded. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Keep placement surfaces free of water, debris, and foreign material during placement and compaction of fill and backfill materials. B. Place and spread fill and backfill materials in horizontal lifts of uniform thickness, in a manner that avoids segregation, and compact each lift to specified densities prior to placing succeeding lifts. Slope lifts only where necessary to conform to final grades or as necessary to keep placement surfaces drained of water. C. During filling and backfilling, keep level of fill and backfill around each structure and buried tank even. D. Do not place fill or backfill, if fill or backfill material is frozen, or if surface upon which fill or backfill is to be placed is frozen. E. If pipe, conduit, duct bank, or cable is to be laid within fill or backfill: 1. Fill or backfill to an elevation 2 feet above top of item to be laid. 2. Excavate trench for installation of item. FILL AND BACKFILL PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 31 23 23 - 6 APRIL 23, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 3. Install bedding, if applicable, as specified in Section 31 23 23.15, Trench Backfill. 4. Install item. 5. Backfill envelope zone and remaining trench, as specified in Section 31 23 23.15, Trench Backfill, before resuming filling or backfilling specified in this section. F. Tolerances: 1. Final Lines and Grades: Within a tolerance of 0.1 foot unless dimensions or grades are shown or specified otherwise. 2. Grade to establish and maintain slopes and drainage as shown. Reverse slopes are not permitted. G. Settlement: Correct and repair any subsequent damage to structures, pavements, curbs, slabs, piping, and other facilities, caused by settlement of fill or backfill material. 3.02 BACKFILL UNDER AND AROUND STRUCTURES A. Under Facilities: Within influence area beneath structures, slabs, pavements, curbs, piping, conduits, duct banks, and other facilities, backfill with granular fill, unless otherwise shown. Place granular fill in lifts of 6 -inch maximum thickness and compact each lift to minimum of 95 percent relative compaction as determined in accordance with ASTM D698,. B. Subsurface Drainage: Backfill with granular drain material, where shown. Place granular drain material in lifts of 6 -inch maximum thickness and compact each lift to minimum of 90 percent relative density. C. Other Areas: Backfill with earthfill to lines and grades shown, with proper allowance for topsoil thickness where shown. Place in lifts of 6 -inch maximum thickness and compact each lift to minimum95 percent relative compaction as determined in accordance with ASTM D698. 3.03 BACKFILL AROUND TANKS A. Backfill to top of tank, unless otherwise shown, with granular fill and thoroughly water settle by saturating backfill and vibrating saturated backfill with a concrete vibrator inserted through full depth of backfill on 1 -foot maximum centers. B. Backfill above top of tank with earthfill placed in 6 -inch lifts. Compact each lift to minimum 95 percent relative compaction as determined in accordance with ASTM D698. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 FILL AND BACKFILL APRIL 23, 2026 31 23 23 - 7 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 3.04 FILL A. Outside Influence Areas beneath Structures, Tanks, Pavements, Curbs, Slabs, Piping, and Other Facilities: Unless otherwise shown, place earthfill as follows: 1. Allow for 6 -inch thickness of topsoil where required. 2. Maximum 8 -inch thick lifts. 3. Place and compact fill across full width of embankment. 4. Compact to minimum95 percent relative compaction as determined in accordance with ASTM D698. 96 percent relative compaction as determined in accordance with ASTM D698 based on average of most recent four tests on like material. If any two of the four most recent tests falls below 94 percent or any one of the four preceding tests falls below 92 percent, additional compactive effort will be required. 5. Dress completed embankment with allowance for topsoil, crest surfacing, and slope protection, where applicable. 3.05 SITE TESTING A. Gradation: 1. One sample from each 1,500 tons of finished product or more often as determined by Engineer, if variation in gradation is occurring, or if material appears to depart from Specifications. 2. If test results indicate material does not meet Specification requirements, terminate material placement until corrective measures are taken. 3. Remove material placed in Work that does not meet Specification requirements. B. In -Place Density Tests: In accordance with ASTM D6938. During placement of materials, test as follows: Granular Fill: Minimum of 70% relative density in accordance with ASTM D4253. 2. Sand: 95% - 100% MDD. 3. Backfill Around Buried Tanks: >95% MDD, >OMC. 4. Granular Drain Material: Minimum of 70% relative density in accordance with ASTM D4253. 5. Granular Filter Material: Minimum of 70% relative density in accordance with ASTM D4253. 6. Base Course Rock: Minimum of 70% relative density in accordance with ASTM D4253. 7. Foundation Stabilization Rock: Minimum of 70% relative density in accordance with ASTM D4253. FILL AND BACKFILL PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 31 23 23 - 8 APRIL 23, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 8. Crushed Rock for Substations: a. Base Course: Minimum of 70% relative density in accordance with ASTM D4253. b. Finish Grade Rock: Minimum of 70% relative density in accordance with ASTM D4253. c. Access Road Surfacing: >95% MDD, >OMC. 9. Soil Cover Over Geotextiles: >95% MDD, >OMC. 10. Soil Cover Over Geomembranes: >95% MDD, >OMC. MDD: Maximum dry density as determined from ASTM D698 OMC: Optimum moisture content as determined from ASTM D698 3.06 SAND BLANKET OVER VAPOR RETARDER A. Place sand in manner that avoids damage to underlying vapor retarder. B. Moisten sand and thoroughly compact it with a vibratory plate compactor. 3.07 GRANULAR BASE, SUBBASE, AND SURFACING A. Place and Compact as specified in Section 32 11 23, Aggregate Base Courses. 3.08 REPLACING OVEREXCAVATED MATERIAL A. Replace excavation carried below grade lines shown or established by Engineer as follows: 1. Beneath Footings: Concrete of strength equal to that of respective footing, as specified in Section 03 30 00, Cast -in -Place Concrete. 2. Beneath Fill or Backfill: Same material as specified for overlying fill or backfill. 3. Beneath Slabs -On -Grade: Granular fill. 4. Trenches: a. Unauthorized Overexcavation: Either trench stabilization material or granular pipe base material, as specified in Section 31 23 23.15, Trench Backfill. b. Authorized Overexcavation: Trench stabilization material, as specified in Section 31 23 23.15, Trench Backfill. 5. Permanent Cut Slopes (Where Overlying Area is Not to Receive Fill or Backfill): a. Flat to Moderate Steep Slopes (3:1, Horizontal Run: Vertical Rise or Flatter): Earthfill. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 FILL AND BACKFILL APRIL 23, 2026 31 23 23 - 9 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF b. Steep Slopes (Steeper than 3:1): 1) Correct overexcavation by transitioning between overcut areas and designed slope adjoining areas, provided such cutting does not extend offsite or outside easements and right-of-ways, or adversely impacts existing facilities, adjacent property, or completed Work. 2) Backfilling overexcavated areas is prohibited, unless in Engineer's opinion, backfill will remain stable, and overexcavated material is replaced as compacted earthfill. 3.09 SUBSTATION SITE SURFACING A. Base Course: 1. 6 -inch layer. 2. Installed after Site grading and substation construction is complete. 3. Compact to at least 95 percent of maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D698, Method [C: ]. B. Finish Grade: 1. 3 -inch layer. 2. Installed over base course. 3. Finish grade layer shall not be compacted. 3.10 PLACING FILL OVER GEOSYNTHETICS A. General: 1. Place fill over geosynthetics with sufficient care so as not to damage them. 2. Place fill only by back dumping and spreading only. 3. Dump fill only on previously placed fill. 4. While operating equipment, avoid sharp turns, sudden starts or stops that could damage geosynthetics. B. Hauling: Operate hauling equipment on minimum of 3 feet of covering. C. Spreading: 1. Spreading equipment shall be track mounted. 2. Operate spreading equipment on minimum of 12 inches of fill over geosynthetics. 3. Spread fill in same direction as unseamed overlaps to avoid separation of seams and joints. FILL AND BACKFILL PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 31 23 23 - 10 APRIL 23, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 4. Never push fill downslope. Spread fill over sideslopes by pushing up from slope bottom. 5. Flatten wrinkles of geosynthetics, geotextiles, geomembranes, and geogrids in direction of spreading. Correct wrinkles in geotextiles as specified in Section 31 32 19.16, Geotextile. 6. Maintain proper overlap of unseamed geosynthetics. 7. Avoid overstressing geosynthetics and seams. D. Compaction: Compact fill only after uniformly spread to full thickness shown. E. Geosynthetic Damage: 1. Mark punctures, tears, or other damage to geosynthetics, so repairs may be made. 2. Clear overlying fill as necessary to repair damage. 3. Repairs to geosynthetics shall be made by respective installers as specified in respective specification section for each geosynthetic. 3.11 ACCESS ROAD SURFACING A. Place and compact as specified in Section 32 11 23, Aggregate Base Courses. END OF SECTION PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 FILL AND BACKFILL APRIL 23, 2026 312323-11 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK FILL AND BACKFILL PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 31 23 23 - 12 APRIL 23, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS 312323.1-1 BORROW Page 1 of 6 SECTION 31 23 23.1 BORROW PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Furnish, place and compact Borrow material for grading. B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification 1. None. C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0— Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract 2. Division 1— General Requirements 3. Section 31 23 16 — Excavation 4. Section 31 24 00 — Embankments 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. Borrow by Plan Quantity a. Measurement 1) Measurement for this Item shall be by the cubic yard in its final position using the average end area method. Limits of measurement are shown on the Drawings. 2) When measured by the cubic yard in its fmal position, this is a plans quantity measurement Item. The quantity to be paid is the quantity shown in the proposal, unless modified by Article 11.04 of the General Conditions. Additional measurements or calculations will be made if adjustments of quantities are required. b. Payment 1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under "Measurement" will be paid for at the unit price bid per cubic yard of "Borrow by Plan" for the various borrow materials. No additional compensation will be allowed for rock or shrinkage/swell factors, as these are the Contractor's responsibility. c. The price bid shall include: 1) Transporting or hauling material 2) Furnishing, placing, compacting and finishing Borrow 3) Construction Water 4) Dust Control 5) Clean-up 6) Proof Rolling 7) Disposal of excess or waste material 8) Reworking or replacement of undercut material 2. Borrow by Surveyed Quantity a. Measurement CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised January 28, 2013 31 2323.1 -2 BORROW Page 2 of 6 1) Measurement for this Item shall be by the cubic yard in its final position calculated using the average end area or composite method. a) The City will perform a reference survey once the Site has been cleared to obtain existing ground conditions. b) The City will perform a final post -construction survey. c) The Contractor will be paid for the cubic yardage of Borrow material calculated as the difference between the two surveys. d) Partial payments will be based on estimated plan quantity measurements calculated by the Engineer. b. Payment 1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under "Measurement" will be paid for at the unit price bid per cubic yard of "Borrow by Survey" for: a) Various Borrow materials c. The price bid shall include: 1) Transporting or hauling material 2) Furnishing, placing, compacting and finishing Borrow 3) Construction Water 4) Clean-up 5) Dust Control 6) Proof Rolling 7) Disposal of excess or waste material 8) Reworking or replacement of undercut material Borrow by Delivered Quantity a. Measurement 1) Measurement for this Item shall be by the cubic yard of loose Borrow material as delivered to the Site and recorded by truck ticket provided to the City. b. Payment 1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under "Measurement" will be paid for at the unit price bid per cubic yard of "Borrow by Delivery" delivered to the Site and recorded by truck ticket for: a) Various Borrow materials c. The price bid shall include: 1) Transporting or hauling material 2) Furnishing, placing, compacting and finishing Borrow 3) Construction Water 4) Clean-up 5) Dust Control 6) Proof Rolling 7) Disposal of excess or waste material 8) Reworking or replacement of undercut material 1.3 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards 1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this Specification, unless a date is specifically cited. CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised January 28, 2013 31 2323.1 -3 BORROW Page 3 of 6 ASTM Standards a. ASTM D2487, Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System) b. ASTM D4318-10, Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils c. ASTM D6913, Standard Test Methods for Particle -Size Distribution (Gradation) of Soils Using Sieve Analysis d. ASTM D698, Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3) 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED] 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00. B. All submittals shall be approved by the City prior to construction. C. Submit laboratory tests reports for each soil borrow source used to supply general borrow and select fill materials. 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings Stockpiled Borrow material a. Provide a description of the storage of the delivered Borrow material only if the Contract Documents do not allow storage of materials in the right-of-way of the easement. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Borrow material shall be tested prior to delivery to the Site. 1. Provide Proctor Test results, Gradation and Atterberg Limits for Borrow material from each source. a. All testing listed above shall be performed in terms of ASTM D698, ASTM D6913 and ASTM D4318-10 respectively. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery 1. Coordinate all deliveries and haul -off. B. Storage 1. Within Existing Rights -of -Way (ROW) a. Borrow materials may be stored within existing ROW, easements or temporary construction easements, unless specifically disallowed in the Contract Documents. b. Do not block drainage ways, inlets or driveways. c. Provide erosion control in accordance with Section 31 25 00. d. Store materials only in areas barricaded as provided in the traffic control plans. CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised January 28, 2013 312323.1-4 BORROW Page 4 of 6 e. In non -paved areas, do not store material on the root zone of any trees or in landscaped areas. 2. Designated Storage Areas a. If the Contract Documents do not allow the storage of Borrow materials within the ROW, easement or temporary construction easement, then secure and maintain an adequate storage location. b. Provide an affidavit that rights have been secured to store the materials on private property. c. Provide erosion control in accordance with Section 31 25 00. d. Do not block drainage ways. e. Only materials used for 1 working day will be allowed to be stored in the work zone. 1.11 FIELD CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 OWNER -FURNISHED [NOT USED] 2.2 PRODUCT TYPES AND MATERIALS A. Borrow 1. Additional soil beneath pavements, roadways, foundations and other structures required to achieve the elevations shown on the Drawings. 2. Acceptable Fill Material a. In -situ or imported soils classified as CL, CH, SC or GC in accordance with ASTM D2487 b. Free from deleterious materials, boulders over 6 inches in size and organics c. Can be placed free from voids d. Must have 20 percent passing the number 200 sieve 3. Blended Fill Material a. In -situ soils classified as SP, SM, GP or GM in accordance with ASTM D2487 b. Blended with in -situ or imported Acceptable Fill material to meet the requirements of an Acceptable Fill Material c. Free from deleterious materials, boulders over 6 inches in size and organics d. Must have 20 percent passing the number 200 sieve 4. Select Fill a. Classified as SC or CL in accordance with ASTM D2487 b. Liquid limit less than 35 c. Plasticity index between 8 and 20 Cement Stabilized Sand (CSS) a. Sand or silty sand b. Free of clay or plastic material c. Minimum of 4 percent cement content of Type 1111 portland cement d. 100 to 150 psi compressive strength at 2 days in accordance with ASTM D1633, Method A CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised January 28, 2013 31 2323.1 -5 BORROW Page 5 of 6 e. 200 to 250 psi compressive strength at 23 days in accordance with ASTM D1633, Method A f. Mix in a stationary pug mill, weigh -batch or continuous mixing plant 2.3 ASSEMBLY OR FABRICATION TOLERANCES [NOT USED] 2.4 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED] 2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED] 3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED] 3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED] 3.4 INSTALLATION A. All Borrow placement shall be performed in accordance to Section 31 24 00. 3.5 REPAIR [NOT USED] 3.6 RE -INSTALLATION [NOT USED] 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field quality control will be performed in accordance to Section 31 24 00. 3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED] 3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED] 3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED] 3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED] 3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED] 3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED] 3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED] END OF SECTION Revision Log DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE 12/20/2012 D. Johnson 1.2 - Measurement and Payment Section modified; Blue Text added for clarification 1/28/13 D. Johnson 1.2 — Modified Bid Item names in payment section to differentiate between Payment Methods on bid list. CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised January 28, 2013 31 2323.1 -6 BORROW Page 6 of 6 PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised January 28, 2013 MARYS CREEK WRF SECTION 3123 23.15 TRENCH BACKFILL PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. American Public Works Association (APWA): Uniform Color Code. 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. C33/C33M, Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. b. C94/C94M, Standard Specification for Ready -Mixed Concrete. c. C 117, Standard Test Method for Materials Finer than 75 Micrometer (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing. d. C136, Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates. e. C 150/C 150M, Standard Specification for Portland Cement. f. C618, Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete. g. C 1012/Cl 012M, Standard Test Method for Length Change of Hydraulic -Cement Mortars Exposed to a Sulfate Solution. h. D698, Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)). i. D1140, Standard Test Methods for Amount of Material in Soils Finer than No. 200 (75 micrometer) Sieve. j. D1557, Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2,700 kN-m/m3)). k. D2487, Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System). 1. D4253, Standard Test Methods for Maximum Index Density and Unit Weight of Soils Using a Vibratory Table. m. D4254, Standard Test Methods for Minimum Index Density and Unit Weight of Soils and Calculation of Relative Density. n. D4318, Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils. o. D4832, Standard Test Method for Preparation and Testing of Controlled Low Strength Material (CLSM) Test Cylinders. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): Z535.1, Safety Colors. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS TRENCH BACKFILL 312323.15- 1 MARYS CREEK WRF 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Base Rock: Granular material upon which manhole bases and other structures are placed. B. Bedding Material: Granular material upon which pipes, conduits, cables, or duct banks are placed. C. Imported Material: Material obtained by Contractor from source(s) offsite. D. Lift: Loose (uncompacted) layer of material. E. Pipe Zone: Backfill zone that includes full trench width and extends from prepared trench bottom to an upper limit above top outside surface of pipe, conduit, cable or duct bank. F. Prepared Trench Bottom: Graded trench bottom after excavation and installation of stabilization material, if required, but before installation of bedding material. G. Relative Compaction: The ratio, in percent, of the as -compacted field dry density to the laboratory maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D698. Corrections for oversize material may be applied to either as - compacted field dry density or maximum dry density, as determined by Engineer. H. Relative Density: As defined by ASTM D4253 and ASTM D4254. I. Selected Backfill Material: Material available onsite that Engineer determines to be suitable for a specific use. J. Well -Graded: A mixture of particle sizes that has no specific concentration or lack thereof of one or more sizes producing a material type that, when compacted, produces a strong and relatively incompressible soil mass free from detrimental voids. Satisfying both of the following requirements, as defined in ASTM D2487: 1. Coefficient of Curvature: Greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to 3. 2. Coefficient of Uniformity: Greater than or equal to 4 for materials classified as gravel, and greater than or equal to 6 for materials classified as sand. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: TRENCH BACKFILL 312323.15-2 PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF 1. Shop Drawings: Manufacturer's descriptive literature for marking tapes. 2. Samples: a. Trench stabilization material. b. Bedding and pipe zone material. c. Granular drain. d. Granular backfill. e. Earth backfill. f. Sand(s). B. Informational Submittals: 1. Catalog and manufacturer's data sheets for compaction equipment. 2. Certified Gradation Analysis: Submit not less than 30 days prior to delivery for imported materials or anticipated use for excavated materials, except for trench stabilization material that will be submitted prior to material delivery to Site. 3. Controlled Low Strength Material: Certified mix design and test results. Include material types and weight per cubic yard for each component of mix. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MARKING TAPE A. Nondetectable: 1. Inert polyethylene, impervious to known alkalis, acids, chemical reagents, and solvents likely to be encountered in soil. 2. Thickness: Minimum 5 mils. 3. Width: 6 inches. 4. Identifying Lettering: Minimum 1 -inch high, permanent black lettering imprinted continuously over entire length. 5. Manufacturers and Products: a. Reef Industries; Terra Tape. b. Mutual Industries; Non -detectable Tape. c. Presco; Non -detectable Tape. B. Detectable: 1. Solid aluminum foil, visible on unprinted side, encased in protective high visibility, inert polyethylene plastic jacket. 2. Foil Thickness: Minimum 0.35 mils. 3. Laminate Thickness: Minimum 5 mils. 4. Width: 6 inches. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 TRENCH BACKFILL APRIL 6, 2026 312323.15-3 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF 5. Identifying Lettering: Minimum 1 -inch high, permanent black lettering imprinted continuously over entire length. 6. Joining Clips: Tin or nickel -coated furnished by tape manufacturer. 7. Manufacturers and Products: a. Reef Industries; Terra Tape, Sentry Line Detectable. b. Mutual Industries; Detectable Tape. c. Presco; Detectable Tape. C. Color: In accordance with APWA Uniform Color Code. Color* Facility Red Electric power lines, cables, conduit, and lightning cables Orange Communicating alarm or signal lines, cables, or conduit Yellow Gas, oil, steam, petroleum, or gaseous materials Green Sewers and drain lines Blue Potable water Purple Reclaimed water, irrigation, and slurry lines *As specified in NEMA Z535.1, Safety Color Code. 2.02 2.03 TRACER WIRE A. Material: Minimum 12 -gauge solid copper or copper jacket with a steel core, with high -density polyethylene (HDPE) or high -molecular weight polyethylene (HMWPE) insulation suitable for direct bury. B. Splices: Use wire nut or lug suitable for direct burial as recommended by tracer wire manufacturer. C. Manufacturers: 1. Copperhead Industries, LLC. 2. Performance Wire & Cable Inc. 3. Pro -line Safety Products Company. TRENCH STABILIZATION MATERIAL A. Base Rock: 1. Clean, hard, durable 3 -inch minus crushed rock or gravel, or pit run, free from clay balls, other organic materials, or debris. 2. Uniformly graded from coarse to fine, less than 8 percent by weight passing the 1/4 -inch sieve. TRENCH BACKFILL 312323.15-4 PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF B. Granular Backfill: 1. Clean gravel or crushed rock, reasonably well -graded from coarse to fine. 2. Maximum Particle Size: 1 -inch. 2.04 BEDDING MATERIAL AND PIPE ZONE MATERIAL A. Unfrozen, friable, and no clay balls, roots, or other organic material. B. Clean or gravelly sand with less than 5percent passing No. 200 sieve, as determined in accordance with ASTM Dl 140, or gravel or crushed rock within maximum particle size and other requirements as follows unless otherwise specified. 1. Duct Banks: 3/4 -inch maximum particle size. 2. PVC Irrigation System Piping and Ductile Iron Pipe with Polyethylene Wrap: 3/8 -inch maximum particle size. 3. Pipe Under 18 -Inch Diameter: 3/4 -inch maximum particle size, except 1/4 inch for stainless steel pipe, copper pipe, tubing, and plastic pipe under 3 -inch diameter. 4. Pipe 18 -Inch Diameter and Greater: 1 -1/2 -inch maximum particle size for ductile iron pipe, concrete pipe, welded steel pipe, and pretensioned or prestressed concrete cylinder pipe. 5. Perforated Pipe: Granular drain material. 6. Conduit and Direct -Buried Cable: a. Sand, clean or clean to silty, less than 12 percent passing No. 200 sieve. b. Individual Particles: Free of sharp edges. c. Maximum Size Particle: Pass a No. 4 sieve. d. If more than 5 percent passes No. 200 sieve, the fraction that passes No. 40 sieve shall be nonplastic as determined in accordance with ASTM D4318. 2.05 2.05 EARTH BACKFILL A. Soil, loam, or other excavated material suitable for use as backfill. B. Free from roots or organic matter, refuse, boulders and material larger than 1/2 cubic foot, or other deleterious materials. 2.06 PROCESSED EARTH BACKFILL A. Class A Backfill: Earth backfill, meeting the following additional requirement. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 TRENCH BACKFILL APRIL 6, 2026 312323.15-5 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF 1. Free of boulders and cobbles that would be retained on a 3 -inch sieve. 2. Cohesionless, free -draining material with 100 percent passing 3 -inch sieve, at least 70 percent passing 1 -1/2 -inch sieve, and less than 15 percent passing No. 200 sieve. 2.07 CONTROLLED LOW STRENGTH MATERIAL (CLSM) A. Select and proportion ingredients to obtain compressive strength between 50 psi and 150 psi at 28 days in accordance with ASTM D4832. B. Materials: 1. Cement: ASTM C150/C150M, Type I or Type II. 2. Aggregate: ASTM C33/C33M, Size 7. 3. Fly Ash (Pozzolan): Class F or Class C fly ash in accordance with ASTM C618, except as modified herein: a. ASTM C618, Table 1, Loss on Ignition: Unless permitted otherwise, maximum 3 percent. 4. Water: Clean, potable, containing less than 500 ppm of chlorides. 2.08 CONCRETE BACKFILL A. Provide as specified in Section 03 30 00, Cast -in -Place Concrete. B. Mix: ASTM C94/C94M, Option A. 1. Cement: ASTM C150/C150M, Type I or Type II. 2. Coarse Aggregate Size: 3/4inch(es). 3. Design for Minimum Compressive Strength at 28 Days: 3,000psi. 2.09 GRAVEL SURFACING ROCK A. As specified in Section 32 11 23, Aggregate Base Courses. 2.10 TOPSOIL A. As specified in Section 32 91 13, Soil Preparation. 2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform gradation analysis in accordance with ASTM C136 for: 1. Earth backfill, including specified class. 2. Trench stabilization material. 3. Bedding and pipe zone material. B. Certify Laboratory Performance of Mix Designs: TRENCH BACKFILL PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 31 23 23.15 - 6 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF 1. Controlled low strength material. 2. Concrete. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 TRENCH PREPARATION A. Water Control: 1. Promptly remove and dispose of water entering trench as necessary to grade trench bottom and to compact backfill and install manholes, pipe, conduit, direct -buried cable, or duct bank. Do not place concrete, lay pipe, conduit, direct -buried cable, or duct bank in water. 2. Remove water in a manner that minimizes soil erosion from trench sides and bottom. 3. Provide continuous water control until trench backfill is complete. B. Remove foreign material and backfill contaminated with foreign material that falls into trench. 3.02 TRENCH BOTTOM A. Firm Subgrade: Grade with hand tools, remove loose and disturbed material, and trim off high areas and ridges left by excavating bucket teeth. Allow space for bedding material if shown or specified. B. Soft Subgrade: If subgrade is encountered that may require removal to prevent pipe settlement, notify Engineer. Engineer will determine depth of overexcavation, if any required. 3.03 GEOTEXTILE INSTALLATION A. Where shown and as specified in Section 31 32 19.16, Geotextile, except as follows: 1. Extend geotextile for full width of trench bottom and up the trench wall to the top of the pipe zone, or base material for manholes and miscellaneous structures. 2. Anchor geotextile trench walls prior to placing trench stabilization or bedding material. 3. Provide 24 -inch minimum overlap at joints. 3.04 TRENCH STABILIZATION MATERIAL INSTALLATION A. Rebuild trench bottom with trench stabilization material. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS TRENCH BACKFILL 312323.15-7 MARYS CREEK WRF B. Place material over full width of trench in 6 -inch lifts to required grade, providing allowance for bedding thickness. C. Compact each lift so as to provide a firm, unyielding support for the bedding material prior to placing succeeding lifts. 3.05 BEDDING A. Furnish imported bedding material where, in the opinion of Engineer, excavated material is unsuitable for bedding or insufficient in quantity. B. Place over full width of prepared trench bottom in two equal lifts when required depth exceeds 8 inches. C. Hand grade and compact each lift to provide a firm, unyielding surface. D. Minimum Thickness: As follows, except increase depths listed by 2 inches in areas of rock excavation: 1. Pipe 15 Inches and Smaller: 4 inches. 2. Pipe 18 Inches to 36 Inches: 6 inches. 3. Pipe 42 Inches and Larger: 8 inches. E. Check grade and correct irregularities in bedding material. Loosen top 1 inch to 2 inches of compacted bedding material with a rake or by other means to provide a cushion before laying each section of pipe, conduit, direct -buried cable, or duct bank. F. Install to form continuous and uniform support except at bell holes, if applicable, or minor disturbances resulting from removal of lifting tackle. G. Bell or Coupling Holes: Excavate in bedding at each joint to permit proper assembly and inspection of joint and to provide uniform bearing along barrel of pipe or conduit. 3.06 BACKFILL PIPE ZONE A. Upper limit of pipe zone shall not be less than following: Pipe: 12 inches, unless shown otherwise. B. Restrain pipe, conduit, cables, and duct banks as necessary to prevent their movement during backfill operations. C. Place material simultaneously in lifts on both sides of pipe and, if applicable, between pipes, conduit, cables, and duct banks installed in same trench. TRENCH BACKFILL PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 31 23 23.15 - 8 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF 1. Pipe 10 -Inch and Smaller Diameter: First lift less than or equal to 1/2 pipe diameter. 2. Pipe Over 10 -Inch Diameter: Maximum 6 -inch lifts. D. Thoroughly tamp each lift, including area under haunches, with handheld tamping bars supplemented by "walking in" and slicing material under haunches with a shovel to ensure voids are completely filled before placing each succeeding lift. 3.07 MARKING TAPE INSTALLATION A. Continuously install marking tape along centerline of buried piping, on top of last lift of pipe zone material. Coordinate with piping installation drawings. 1. Detectable Marking Tape: Install with nonmetallic piping and waterlines. 2. Nondetectable Marking Tape: Install with metallic piping. 3.08 TRACER WIRE INSTALLATION AND TESTING A. Install tracer wire continuously along centerline of nonmetallic buried piping. B. Attach wire to top of pipe using tape at maximum of 10 -foot intervals. In areas where depth of cover is excessive for allowing detection of tracer wire with electronic pipe locator, install tracer wire within pipe backfill directly above pipe centerline at a minimum depth of 3 feet. C. Install splices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for direct bury applications. Tie ends of wire to be joined in a knot as required to reduce tension on splice. D. Bring tracer wire to surface at each valve box, curb box, vault, air valve, blowoff valve, hydrant, and pipeline marker. Tracer wire shall be brought to surface at least every 1,000 feet. If distance between pipe appurtenances exceeds 1,000 feet, install valve box to allow access to tracer wire. Coil enough excess tracer wire at each appurtenance to extend wire 12 inches above ground. E. Test continuity of tracer wire using electronic pipe locator in presence of Engineer. 3.09 BACKFILL ABOVE PIPE ZONE A. General: Process excavated material to meet specified gradation requirements. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS TRENCH BACKFILL 312323.15-9 MARYS CREEK WRF 2. Adjust moisture content as necessary to obtain specified compaction. 3. Do not allow backfill to free fall into trench or allow heavy, sharp pieces of material to be placed as backfill until after at least 2 feet of backfill has been provided over top of pipe. 4. Do not use power driven impact type compactors for compaction until at least 4 feet of backfill is placed over top of pipe. 5. Backfill to grade with proper allowances for topsoil, crushed rock surfacing, and pavement thicknesses, wherever applicable. 6. Backfill around structures with same class backfill as specified for adjacent trench, unless otherwise shown or specified. B. Class A Backfill: 1. Place in lifts not exceeding thickness of 9 inches. 2. Mechanically compact each lift to a minimum of 95 percent relative compactionprior to placing succeeding lifts. C. Class C Backfill: 1. Backfill with earth backfill. 2. Leave trench with backfill material neatly mounded across the entire trench width, but not more than 6 inches above the adjacent ground surface. 3. In lawn, garden, or similar type areas, maintain trench level with the existing adjacent grade. 4. At Other Locations: a. Estimate and provide amount of backfill material required so that after normal settlement, settled surface will match adjacent ground surface. b. Neatly windrow material over trench, and remove excess. c. Correct excess or deficiency of backfill material apparent after settlement and within correction period by regrading, and disposing of excess material or adding additional material where deficient. 5. Compact Class C backfill as a substitute for Class D backfill under the following conditions: a. In cases where 2 feet or less of nongranular overburden exists, and where balance of material for full depth of trench is, in Engineer's opinion, suitable for backfill under improved streets and where Class D backfill is shown or indicated. b. Compact as specified for Class D backfill. D. Class D Backfill: Backfill trench above pipe zone with granular backfill in lifts not exceeding 8 inches. Compact each lift to a minimum of 95 percent relative compaction prior to placing succeeding lifts. TRENCH BACKFILL 31 23 23.15 - 10 PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF E. Class E Backfill: 1. Backfill trench above pipe zone with earth backfill to a depth of 9inches below original ground surface. 2. Fill remainder of trench with gravel surfacing rock over entire trench width. 3. Compact gravel surfacing rock by at least five passes with the wheels of a loaded 10 -yard dump truck or other approved equipment over entire trench surface as necessary to prevent settlement. 4. Finish completed backfilled surface at same level as original surface. F. Concrete Backfill: 1. Place above bedding. 2. Minimum Concrete Thickness: 6 inches on top and sides of pipe. 3. Do not allow dirt or foreign material to become mixed with concrete during placement. 4. Allow sufficient time for concrete to reach initial set before additional backfill material is placed in trench. 5. Prevent flotation of pipe. 6. Begin and end concrete backfill within 4 inches of a pipe joint on each end. 7. Do not encase pipe joints except within the limits of the concrete backfill. G. Controlled Low Strength Material: 1. Discharge from truck mounted drum type mixer into trench. 2. Place in lifts as necessary to prevent uplift (flotation) of new and existing facilities. 3.10 REPLACEMENT OF TOPSOIL A. Replace topsoil in top 12inches of backfilled trench. B. Maintain finished grade of topsoil even with adjacent area and grade as necessary to restore drainage. 3.11 MAINTENANCE OF TRENCH BACKFILL A. After each section of trench is backfilled, maintain surface of backfilled trench even with adjacent ground surface until final surface restoration is completed. B. Gravel Surfacing Rock: Add gravel surfacing rock where applicable and as necessary to keep surface of backfilled trench even with adjacent ground surface, and grade and compact as necessary to keep surface of backfilled PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 TRENCH BACKFILL APRIL 6, 2026 31 23 23.15 - 11 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF trenches smooth, free from ruts and potholes, and suitable for normal traffic flow. C. Topsoil: Add topsoil where applicable and as necessary to maintain surface of backfilled trench level with adjacent ground surface. D. Concrete Pavement: Replace settled slabs as specified in Section 32 12 16, Asphalt Paving. E. Asphaltic Pavement: Replace settled areas or fill with asphalt as specified in Section 32 12 16, Asphalt Paving. F. Other Areas: Add excavated material where applicable and keep surface of backfilled trench level with adjacent ground surface. 3.12 SETTLEMENT OF BACKFILL A. Settlement of trench backfill, or of fill, or facilities constructed over trench backfill will be considered a result of defective compaction of trench backfill. END OF SECTION TRENCH BACKFILL 31 23 23.15 - 12 PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS 31 2500 -1 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL Page! of 10 SECTION 31 25 00 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Implementation of the project's Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) and installation, maintenance, removal of erosion and sediment controls devices, and establishment of final stabilization. B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification 1. None. C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 —Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract 2. Division 1— General Requirements 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan <1 acre a. Measurement 1) This Item is considered subsidiary to the various Items bid. b. Payment 1) The work performed and the materials furnished in accordance with this Item are subsidiary to the structure or Items being bid and no other compensation will be allowed. 2. Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan > 1 acre a. Measurement for this Item shall be by lump sum. b. Payment 1) The work performed and the materials furnished in accordance with this Item shall be paid for at the lump sum price bid for "SWPPP > 1 acre". c. The price bid shall include: 1) Preparation of SWPPP 2) Implementation 3) Permitting fees 4) Installation 5) Maintenance 6) Removal 7) Obtaining and/or complying with grading and/or fill permits, if required 8) Final stabilization 1.3 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards 1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this Specification, unless a date is specifically cited. CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised April 29, 2021 31 2500 - 2 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL Page 2 of 10 2. ASTM Standard: a. ASTM D3786, Standard Test Method for Bursting Strength of Textile Fabrics —Diaphragm Bursting Strength Tester Method b. ASTM D4632, Standard Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of Geotextiles c. ASTM D4751, Standard Test Method for Determining Apparent Opening Size of a Geotextile d. ASTM D4833, Standard Test Method for Index Puncture Resistance of Geomembranes and Related Products 3. Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ) TPDES General Permit No. TXR150000 4. TxDOT Departmental Material Specifications (DMS) a. DMS-6230 "Temporary Sediment Control Fence Fabric" 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED] 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) B. TCEQ Notice of Intent (NOI) for Storm Water Discharges Associated with Construction Activity under the TPDES General Permit C. Construction Site Notice D. TCEQ Notice of Termination (NOT) for Storm Water Discharges Associated with Construction Activity under the TPDES General Permit E. Notice of Change (if applicable) F. Grading and/or fill permit, if required 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED] 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING [NOT USED] 1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 OWNER -FURNISHED [OR] OWNER -SUPPLIED PRODUCTS [NOT USED] 2.2 PRODUCT TYPES AND MATERIALS A. Rock Filter Dams 1. Aggregate CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised April 29, 2021 31 2500-3 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL Page 3 of 10 a. Furnish aggregate with hardness, durability, cleanliness and resistance to crumbling, flaking and eroding acceptable to the Engineer. b. Provide the following: 1) Types 1, 2 and 4 Rock Filter Dams a) Use 3 to 6 inch aggregate. 2) Type 3 Rock Filter Dams a) Use 4 to 8 inch aggregate. 2. Wire a. Provide minimum 20 gauge galvanized wire for the steel wire mesh and tie wires for Types 2 and 3 rock filter dams b. Type 4 dams require: 1) Double -twisted, hexagonal weave with a nominal mesh opening of 2'/2 inches x 3 '/4 inches 2) Minimum 0.0866 inch steel wire for netting 3) Minimum 0.1063 inch steel wire for selvages and corners 4) Minimum 0.0866 inch for binding or tie wire B. Geotextile Fabric 1. Place the aggregate over geotextile fabric meeting the following criteria: a. Tensile Strength of 250 pounds, per ASTM D4632 b. Puncture Strength of 135 pounds, per ASTM D4833 c. Mullen Burst Rate of 420 psi, per ASTM D3786 d. Apparent Opening Size of No. 20 (max), per ASTM D4751 C. Stabilized Construction Entrances Provide materials that meet the details shown on the Drawings and this Section. a. Provide crushed aggregate for long and short-term construction exits. b. Furnish aggregates that are clean, hard, durable and free from adherent coatings such as salt, alkali, dirt, clay, loam, shale, soft or flaky materials and organic and injurious matter. c. Use 3 to 5 inch coarse aggregate with a minimum thickness of 12 inches. d. The aggregate shall be placed over a geotextile fabric meeting the following criteria: 1) Tensile Strength of 300 pounds, per ASTM D4632 2) Puncture Strength of 120 pounds, per ASTM D4833 3) Mullen Burst Rate of 600 psi, per ASTM D3786 4) Apparent Opening Size of No. 40 (max), per ASTM D4751 D. Embankment for Erosion Control 1. Provide rock, loam, clay, topsoil or other earth materials that will form a stable embankment to meet the intended use. E. Sandbags 1. Provide sandbag material of polypropylene, polyethylene or polyamide woven fabric with a minimum unit weight of 4 ounces per square yard, a Mullen burst - strength exceeding 300 psi, and an ultraviolet stability exceeding 70 percent. 2. Use natural coarse sand or manufactured sand meeting the gradation given in Table 1 to fill sandbags. 3. Filled sandbags must be 24 to 30 inches long, 16 to 18 inches wide, and 6 to 8 inches thick. CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised April 29, 2021 31 25 00 -4 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL Page 4 of 10 Table 1 Sand Gradation Sieve # Maximum Retained (% by Weight) 4 3 percent 100 80 percent 200 95 percent F. Temporary Sediment Control Fence 1. Provide a net -reinforced fence using woven geo-textile fabric. 2. Logos visible to the traveling public will not be allowed. a. Fabric 1) Provide fabric materials in accordance with DMS-6230, "Temporary Sediment Control Fence Fabric." b. Posts 1) Provide essentially straight wood or steel posts with a minimum length of 48 inches, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. 2) Soft wood posts must be at least 3 inches in diameter or nominal 2 x 4 inch 3) Hardwood posts must have a minimum cross-section of 1-1/2 x 1-1/2 inch 4) T- or L-shaped steel posts must have a minimum weight of 1.3 pounds per foot. c. Net Reinforcement 1) Provide net reinforcement of at least 12-1/2 gauge galvanized welded wire mesh, with a maximum opening size of 2 x 4 inch, at least 24 inches wide, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. d. Staples 1) Provide staples with a crown at least 3/4 inch wide and legs 1/2 inch long. 2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED] 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED] 3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED] 3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED] 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan 1. Develop and implement the project's Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) in accordance with the TPDES Construction General Permit TXR1 50000 requirements. Prevent water pollution from storm water runoff by using and maintaining appropriate structural and nonstructural BMPs to reduce pollutants discharges to the MS4 from the construction site. B. Control Measures CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised April 29, 2021 31 2500 - 5 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL Page 5 of 10 1. Implement control measures in the area to be disturbed before beginning construction, or as directed. Limit the disturbance to the area shown on the Drawings or as directed. 2. Control site waste such as discarded building materials, concrete truck washout water, chemicals, litter and sanitary waste at the construction site. 3. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the Contractor cannot control soil erosion and sedimentation resulting from construction operations, the Engineer will limit the disturbed area to that which the Contractor is able to control. 4. Immediately correct ineffective control measures. Implement additional controls as directed. Remove excavated material within the time requirements specified in the applicable storm water permit. 5. Upon acceptance of vegetative cover by the City, remove and dispose of all temporary control measures, temporary embankments, bridges, matting, falsework, piling, debris, or other obstructions placed during construction that are not a part of the finished work, or as directed. C. Do not locate disposal areas, stockpiles, or haul roads in any wetland, water body, or streambed. D. Do not install temporary construction crossings in or across any water body without the prior approval of the appropriate resource agency and the Engineer. E. Provide protected storage area for paints, chemicals, solvents, and fertilizers at an approved location. Keep paints, chemicals, solvents, and fertilizers off bare ground and provide shelter for stored chemicals. F. Installation and Maintenance 1. Perform work in accordance with the TPDES Construction General Permit TXR150000. 2. When approved, sediments may be disposed of within embankments, or in areas where the material will not contribute to further siltation and when appropriate stabilization is provided. 3. Dispose of removed material in accordance with federal, state, and local regulations. 4. Remove devices upon approval or when directed. a. Upon removal, finish -grade and dress the area. b. Stabilize disturbed areas in accordance with the permit, and as shown on the Drawings or directed. 5. The Contractor retains ownership of stockpiled material and must remove it from the project when new installations or replacements are no longer required. G. Rock Filter Dams for Erosion Control 1. Remove trees, brush, stumps and other objectionable material that may interfere with the construction of rock filter dams. 2. Place sandbags as a foundation when required or at the Contractor's option. 3. For Types 1, 2, 3, and 5, place the aggregate to the lines, height, and slopes specified, without undue voids. CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised April 29, 2021 31 2500-6 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL Page 6 of 10 4. For Types 2 and 3, place the aggregate on the mesh and then fold the mesh at the upstream side over the aggregate and secure it to itself on the downstream side with wire ties, or hog rings, or as directed. 5. Place rock filter dams perpendicular to the flow of the stream or channel unless otherwise directed. 6. Construct filter dams according to the following criteria, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings: a. Type 1 (Non -reinforced) 1) Height - At least 18 inches measured vertically from existing ground to top of filter dam 2) Top Width - At least 2 feet 3) Slopes - At most 2:1 b. Type 2 (Reinforced) 1) Height - At least 18 inches measured vertically from existing ground to top of filter dam 2) Top Width - At least 2 feet 3) Slopes - At most 2:1 c. Type 3 (Reinforced) 1) Height - At least 36 inches measured vertically from existing ground to top of filter dam 2) Top Width - At least 2 feet 3) Slopes - At most 2:1 d. Type 4 (Sack Gabions) 1) Unfold sack gabions and smooth out kinks and bends. 2) For vertical filling, connect the sides by lacing in a single loop —double loop pattern on 4- to 5 -inches spacing. At 1 end, pull the end lacing rod until tight, wrap around the end, and twist 4 times. At the filling end, fill with stone, pull the rod tight, cut the wire with approximately 6 inches remaining, and twist wires 4 times. 3) For horizontal filling, place sack flat in a filling trough, fill with stone, and connect sides and secure ends as described above. 4) Lift and place without damaging the gabion. 5) Shape sack gabions to existing contours. e. Type 5 1) Provide rock filter dams as shown on the Drawings. H. Construction Entrances 1. When tracking conditions exist, prevent traffic from crossing or exiting the construction site or moving directly onto a public roadway, alley, sidewalk, parking area, or other right of way areas other than at the location of construction entrances. 2. Place the exit over a foundation course, if necessary. a. Grade the foundation course or compacted subgrade to direct runoff from the construction exits to a sediment trap as shown on the Drawings or as directed. 3. At drive approaches, make sure the construction entrance is the full width of the drive and meets the length shown on the Drawings. a. The width shall be at least 14 feet for 1 -way and 24 feet for 2 -way traffic for all other points of ingress or egress or as directed by the Engineer. I. Earthwork for Erosion Control CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised April 29, 2021 31 2500-7 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL Page 7 of 10 1. Perform excavation and embankment operations to minimize erosion and to remove collected sediments from other erosion control devices. a. Excavation and Embankment for Erosion Control Measures 1) Place earth dikes, swales or combinations of both along the low crown of daily lift placement, or as directed, to prevent runoff spillover. 2) Place swales and dikes at other locations as shown on the Drawings or as directed to prevent runoff spillover or to divert runoff. 3) Construct cuts with the low end blocked with undisturbed earth to prevent erosion of hillsides. 4) Construct sediment traps at drainage structures in conjunction with other erosion control measures as shown on the Drawings or as directed. 5) Where required, create a sediment basin providing 3,600 cubic feet of storage per acre drained, or equivalent control measures for drainage locations that serve an area with 10 or more disturbed acres at 1 time, not including offsite areas. b. Excavation of Sediment and Debris 1) Remove sediment and debris when accumulation affects the performance of the devices, after a rain, and when directed. 2) Remove sediment from sediment traps and sedimentation ponds no later than the time that design capacity has been reduced by 50%. J. Sandbags for Erosion Control 1. Construct a berm or dam of sandbags that will intercept sediment -laden storm water runoff from disturbed areas, create a retention pond, detain sediment and release water in sheet flow. 2. Fill each bag with sand so that at least the top 6 inches of the bag is unfilled to allow for proper tying of the open end. 3. Place the sandbags with their tied ends in the same direction. 4. Offset subsequent rows of sandbags 1/2 the length of the preceding row. 5. Place a single layer of sandbags downstream as a secondary debris trap. 6. Place additional sandbags as necessary or as directed for supplementary support to berms or dams of sandbags or earth. K. Temporary Sediment -Control Fence 1. Provide temporary sediment -control fence near the downstream perimeter of a disturbed area to intercept sediment from sheet flow. 2. Incorporate the fence into erosion -control measures used to control sediment in areas of higher flow. Install the fence as shown on the Drawings, as specified in this Section, or as directed by the Engineer or City representative. a. Post Installation 1) Embed posts at least 18 inches deep, or adequately anchor, if in rock, with a spacing of 6 to 8 feet and install on a slight angle toward the run-off source. b. Fabric Anchoring 1) Dig trenches along the uphill side of the fence to anchor 6 to 8 inches of fabric. 2) Provide a minimum trench cross-section of 6 x 6 inches 3) Place the fabric against the side of the trench and align approximately 2 inches of fabric along the bottom in the upstream direction. 4) Backfill the trench, then hand -tamp. CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised April 29, 2021 312500-8 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL Page 8 of 10 c. Fabric and Net Reinforcement Attachment 1) Unless otherwise shown under the Drawings, attach the reinforcement to wooden posts with staples, or to steel posts with T -clips, in at least 4 places equally spaced. 2) Sewn vertical pockets may be used to attach reinforcement to end posts. 3) Fasten the fabric to the top strand of reinforcement by hog rings or cord every 15 inches or less. d. Fabric and Net Splices 1) Locate splices at a fence post with a minimum lap of 6 inches attached in at least 6 places equally spaced, unless otherwise shown under the Drawings. a) Do not locate splices in concentrated flow areas. 2) Requirements for installation of used temporary sediment -control fence include the following: a) Fabric with minimal or no visible signs of biodegradation (weak fibers) b) Fabric without excessive patching (more than 1 patch every 15 to 20 feet) c) Posts without bends d) Backing without holes 3.5 REPAIR/RESTORATION [NOT USED] 3.6 RE -INSTALLATION [NOT USED] 3.7 FIELD [oR] SITE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] 3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED] 3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED] 3.10 CLEANING A. Waste Management 1. Remove sediment, debris and litter as needed. 3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Erosion control measures remain in place and are maintained until all soil disturbing activities at the project site have been completed. B. Establish a uniform vegetative cover with a density of 70 percent on all unpaved areas, on areas not covered by permanent structures, or in areas where permanent erosion control measures (i.e. riprap, gabions, or geotextiles) have been employed. C. Once vegetative cover is achieved, the contractor shall remove all temporary control measures, before final project acceptance. It is the contractor's responsibility to remove all temporary control measures, unless transfer of maintenance and subsequent removal is transferred to another entity in writing. D. Upon achievement of fmal stabilization, submit NOT to TCEQ, and provide a copy of the NOT to the City of Fort Worth"s Environmental Quality Division, if required. E. Complete and submit a Final Grading Certificate to Development Services, if required. CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised April 29, 2021 31 2500 - 9 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL Page 9 of 10 3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED] 3.13 MAINTENANCE A. Install and maintain the integrity of temporary erosion and sedimentation control devices to accumulate silt and debris until earthwork construction and permanent erosion control features are in place or the disturbed area has been adequately stabilized as determined by the Engineer. B. If a device ceases to function as intended, repair or replace the device or portions thereof as necessary. C. Perform inspections of the construction site as prescribed in the Construction General Permit TXR150000. D. Records of inspections and modifications based on the results of inspections must be maintained and available in accordance with the permit. 3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED] END OF SECTION Revision Log DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE 1.1 A. 1. Revised language re: what section includes, 1.2 A. 2. c. Clarified items included in price, 1.5 Added items to list of submittals, 2.2Revised language under April 29, 2021 M Owenproduct types/materials, 3.4 Revised language under "Installation", and 3.11 C. Added language to clarify responsibility to remove temporary protection device and emphasize clearing of ROW CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised April 29, 2021 31 2500-10 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL Page 10 of PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised April 29, 2021 313700-1 RIPRAP Page 1 of 10 SECTION 31 37 00 PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Furnishing and installing concrete, stone, cement -stabilized, or special riprap. B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification 1. None. C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0— Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract 2. Division 1— General Requirements 3. Section 03 30 00 — Cast -In -Place Concrete 4. Section 31 25 00 — Erosion and Sediment Control 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. Measurement a. Measurement for this Item shall be by the face square yard to the depth specified of material complete in place. Volume will be computed on the basis of the measured area and type, verified by field measurements. 2. Payment a. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under "Measurement" will be paid for at the unit price bid per square yard of "Riprap" installed for: 1) Various types 2) Various thicknesses 3) Various void -filling techniques 3. The price bid shall include: a. Furnishing, hauling, and placing riprap b. Filter fabric c. Expansion joint material d. Concrete and reinforcing steel e. Excavation of toe wall trenches, as applicable f. Excavation below natural ground or bottom of excavated channel, as applicable g. Shaping of slopes, as applicable h. Bedding i. Grout and mortar j. Scales k. Test weights 1. Clean-up 1.3 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised December 20, 2012 313700-2 RIPRAP Page 2 of 10 1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this Specification, unless a date is specifically cited. 2. ASTM Standards a. ASTM C136-06, Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates b. ASTM D7370-09, Standard Test Method for Determination of Relative Density and Absorption of Fine, Coarse, and Blended Aggregate Using Combined Vacuum Saturation and Rapid Submersion c. ASTM C5240-04, Standard Test Method for, Testing Rock Slabs to Evaluate the Soundness of Riprap by Use of Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate d. ASTM D4632-08, Standard Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of Geotextiles e. ASTM D4533-04, Standard Test Method for Trapezoid Tearing Strength of Geotextiles f. ASTM D751-06, Standard Test Methods for Coated Fabrics g. ASTM D4751-04, Standard Test Method for Determining Apparent Opening Size of a Geotextile h. ASTM D4491 -99a, Standard Test Methods for Water Permeability of Geotextiles by Permittivity 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED] 1.5 SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED] 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED] 1.11 FIELD CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 OWNER -FURNISHED [NOT USED] 2.2 PRODUCT TYPES AND MATERIALS A. Concrete Riprap 1. Use concrete with a compressive strength of 4,000 psi at 28 -days, according to Section 03 30 00, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. B. Stone Riprap 1. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, use durable natural stone with a minimum bulk specific gravity of 2. Provide stone that has a maximum weight loss of 18 percent after 5 cycles of magnesium sulfate solution and 14 percent after 5 cycles of sodium sulfate solution. CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised December 20, 2012 313700-3 RIPRAP Page 3 of 10 2. For all types of stone riprap perform a size verification test on the first 5,000 square yards of finished riprap stone at a location determined by the Engineer. Weigh each stone in a square test area with the length of each side of the square equal to 3 times the specified riprap thickness. The weight of the stones, excluding spalls, should be as specified below. Additional tests may be required. Do not place additional riprap until the initial 5,000 square yards of riprap has been approved. 3. When specified, provide grout and mortar as defined as 1 part Portland cement to 3 parts sand and mixed with water until it achieves a consistency that will flow into and completely fill all voids. 4. Provide filter fabric in accordance with Section 3125 00. For slab riprap, provide the filter fabric type shown on the Drawings a. Large 1) Use stones between 50 and 250 pounds with a minimum of 50 percent of the stones heavier than 100 pounds b. Medium 1) Use stones between 50 and 250 pounds with a minimum of 40 percent of the stones heavier than 100 pounds Use stones with at least 1 broad flat surface. c. Block 1) Use stones between 50 and 250 pounds. Use stones that are at least 3 inches in their least dimension. Use stones that are at least twice as wide as they are thick. When shown on the Drawings or approved, material may consist of broken concrete removed under the Contract or from other approved sources. Before placement of each piece of broken concrete, cut exposed reinforcement flush with all surfaces. d. Slab 1) Use boulders or quarried rock that meets the gradation requirements of Table 1. Both the width and the thickness of each piece of riprap must be a least 1/3 of the length. When shown on the Drawings or as approved, material may consist of broken concrete removed under the Contract or from other approved sources. Before placement of each piece of broken concrete, cut exposed reinforcement flush with all surfaces. 2) Provide bedding stone that in -place meets the gradation requirements shown in Table 2 or as otherwise shown on the Drawings. Table 1 Riprap Gradation Requirements Thickness Maximum Size (lb.) 90 percent Size' (lb.) 50& Size' (lb.) 8 percent Size, Minimum (lb.) 12 in. 200 80-180 30-75 3 15in. 320 170-300 60-165 20 18in. 530 290-475 105-220 22 21 in. 800 460-720 175-300 25 24in. 1,000 550-850 200-325 30 30in. 2,600 1,150-2.50 400-900 40 CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised December 20, 2012 313700-4 RIPRAP Page 4 of 10 Table 2 Bedding Stone Gradation Sieve Size (Square Mesh) Percent by Weight Passing 3 inches 100 1-1/2 inches 50-80 3/4 inches 20-60 No. 4 0-15 No. 10 0-5 C. Special Riprap Furnish materials for special riprap according to the Drawings. 2.3 ASSEMBLY OR FABRICATION TOLERANCES [NOT USED] 2.4 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED] 2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED] 3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED] 3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED] 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Dress slopes and protected areas to the line and grade shown on the Drawings before the placement of riprap. Place riprap and toe walls according to details and dimensions shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. B. Concrete Riprap 1. Reinforce concrete riprap with No. 3 reinforcing bars spaced at a maximum of 18 inches in each direction unless otherwise shown. Provide a minimum 6 -inch lap at all splices. At the edge of the riprap, provide a minimum horizontal cover of 1 inch and a maximum cover of 3 inches. Place the first parallel bar at most 6 inches from the edge of concrete. Use approved supports to hold the reinforcement approximately equidistant from the top and bottom surface of the slab. Adjust reinforcement during concrete placement to maintain correct position. 2. As directed, sprinkle or sprinkle and consolidate the subgrade before the concrete is placed. All surfaces must be moist when concrete is placed. 3. Compact each layer to a minimum of 95 percent standard proctor density with a moisture content not to exceed +4 percent or -2 percent of optimum moisture or as indicated on the Drawings. 4. After placing the concrete, compact and shape it to conform to the dimensions shown on Drawings. After it has set sufficiently to avoid slumping, finish the surface with a wood float to secure a smooth surface or broom finish as approved. 5. Immediately after the finishing operation, cure the riprap according to Section 03 30 00. CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised December 20, 2012 313700-5 RIPRAP Page 5 of 10 C. Stone Riprap Provide the following types of stone riprap when shown on the Drawings. a. Dry Riprap 1) Dry riprap is stone riprap with voids filled with only spalls or small stones. b. Grouted Riprap 1) Grouted riprap is Type Large, Medium, or Block stone riprap with voids grouted after all the stones are in place. c. Mortared Riprap 1) Mortared riprap is Medium stone riprap laid and mortared as each stone is placed. Use spalls and small stones lighter than 25 pounds to fill open joints and voids in stone riprap, and place to a tight fit. 3. Do not place mortar or grout when the air temperature is below 35 degrees Fahrenheit. 4. Protect work from rapid drying for at least 3 days after placement. Unless otherwise approved, place filter fabric with the length running up and down the slope. Ensure fabric has a minimum overlap of 2 feet. 5. Secure fabric with nails or pins. Use nails at least 2 inches long with washers or U- shaped pins with legs at least 9 inches long. Space nails or pins at a maximum of 10 feet in each direction and 5 feet along the seams. Alternative anchorage and spacing may be used when approved. 6. Large a. Construct riprap as shown in Figure 1 and as shown on the Drawings. Place stones in a single layer with close joints so that most of their weight is carried by the earth and not by the adjacent stones. b. Place the upright axis of the stones at an angle of approximately 90 degrees to the embankment slope. c. Place each course from the bottom of the embankment upward with the larger stones in the lower courses. d. Fill open joints between stones with spalls. e. Place stones to create a uniform finished top surface. Do not exceed a 6 -inch variation between the tops of adjacent stones. Replace, embed deeper, or chip away stones that project more than the allowable amount above the finished surface. f. When the Drawings require Large stone riprap to be grouted, prevent earth, sand, or foreign material from filling the spaces between the stones. After the stones are in place, thoroughly wet the stones, fill the spaces between the stones with grout, and pack. Sweep the surface of the riprap with a stiff broom after grouting. 7. Medium a. Dry Placement 1) Construct riprap as shown in Figure 2. Set the flat surface on a prepared horizontal earth bed, and overlap the underlying course to secure a lapped surface. 2) Place the large stones first, roughly arranged in close contact. Fill the spaces between the large stones with suitably sized stones placed to leave the surface evenly stepped and conforming to the contour required. 3) Place stone to drain water down the face of the slope. CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised December 20, 2012 313700-6 RIPRAP Page 6of10 b. Grouting 1) Construct riprap as shown in Figure 3. Size, shape, and lay large flat - surfaced stones to produce an even surface with minimal voids. 2) Place stones with the flat surface facing upward parallel to the slope. Place the largest stones near the base of the slope. 3) Fill spaces between the larger stones with stones of suitable size, leaving the surface smooth, tight, and conforming to the contour required. 4) Place the stones to create a plane surface with a maximum variation of 6 inches in 10 feet from true plane. Provide the same degree of accuracy for warped and curved surfaces. 5) Prevent earth, sand or foreign material from filling the spaces between the stones. After the stones are in place, thoroughly wet them, fill the spaces between them with grout, and pack. Sweep the surface with a stiff broom after grouting. c. Mortaring 1) Construct riprap as shown in Figure 2. Lap courses as described for dry placement. Before placing mortar, wet the stones thoroughly. 2) As the larger stones are placed, bed them in fresh mortar and shove adjacent stones into contact with one another. 3) After completing the work, spread all excess mortar forced out during placement of the stones uniformly over them to fill all voids completely. Point up all joints roughly either with flush joints or with shallow, smooth - raked joints as directed. D. Block 1. Construct riprap as shown in Figure 4. Place stones on a bed excavated for the base course. Bed the base course of stone well into the ground with the edges in contact. Bed and place each succeeding course in even contact with the preceding course. 2. Use spalls and small stones to fill any open joints and voids in the riprap. Ensure the finished surface presents an even, tight surface, true to the line and grades of the typical sections. 3. When the Drawings require grouting Block stone riprap, prevent earth, sand, or foreign material from filling the spaces between the stones. After the stones are in place, wet them thoroughly, fill the spaces between them with grout, and pack. Sweep the surface with a stiff broom after grouting. E. Slab 1. Construct riprap as shown in Figure 5. Place riprap stone on the slopes within the limits shown on the Drawings. Place stone for riprap on the bedding material to produce a reasonably well -graded mass of riprap with the minimum practicable percentage of voids. 2. Construct the riprap to the lines and grades shown on the Drawings or staked in the field. A tolerance of +6 inches and -0 inch from the slope line and grades shown on the Drawings is allowed in the finished surface of the riprap. 3. Place riprap to its full thickness in a single operation. Avoid displacing the bedding material. Ensure that the entire mass of stones in their final position is free from objectionable pockets of small stones and clusters of larger stones. CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised December 20, 2012 313700-7 RIPRAP Page 7of10 4. Do not place riprap in layers, and do not place it by dumping it into chutes, dumping it from the top of the slope, pushing it from the top of the slope, or any method likely to cause segregation of the various sizes. 5. Obtain the desired distribution of the various sizes of stones throughout the mass by selective loading of material at the quarry or other source or by other methods of placement that will produce the specified results. 6. Rearrange individual stones by mechanical equipment or by hand if necessary to obtain a reasonably well -graded distribution of stone sizes. F. Special Riprap 1. Construct special riprap according to the Drawings. 3.5 REPAIR [NOT USED] 3.6 RE -INSTALLATION [NOT USED] 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] 3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED] 3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED] 3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED] 3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED] 3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED] 3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED] 3.14 ATTACHMENTS Grout when specified 9" Slope of embankment Upright axes of stone perpendicular to slope Figure 1 - Large stone riprap, dry or grouted. CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised December 20, 2012 313700-8 RIPRAP Page 8 of 10 Grout when specified Flat side up Slope of embankment 1'-6" min Figure 2 - Medium stone riprap, dry or grouted. Mortar when specified �. \ Slope of 1'-6" min Figure 3 - Medium stone riprap, mortared. CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised December 20, 2012 313700-9 RIPRAP Page 9of10 Grout when specified Multiple layers (more than one rock depth) in N E N Slope of embankment T -b" min Figure 4— Block stone riprap, dry or grouted. Figure 5 — Slab stone riprap END OF SECTION )e of ankment fabric CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised December 20, 2012 31 37 00 - 10 RIPRAP Page 10 of 10 Revision Log DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE 12/20/2012 D. Johnson 3.4.B. — defined compaction requirements beneath concrete rip rap CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised December 20, 2012 MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 31 41 00 SHORING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: 1. Excavation support plan. 2. Movement monitoring plan. 3. Trench excavation plan. 4. Movement measurement and data and reduced results indicating movement trends. 5. Review of excavation support plan, movement monitoring plan, and trench excavation plan shall be only for compliance with topics included, preparation or performance by a registered professional, and similar specified requirements, and not for the accuracy or the adequacy of the plans or facilities, which together with all other matters of health and safety shall be solely the responsibility of Contractor. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform surveys to monitor movements of critical facilities, existing structures and facilities located within 100 feet of excavation. B. Perform surveys by professional land surveyor licensed in the State of Texas. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Design, provide, and maintain shoring, sheeting, and bracing as necessary to support the sides of excavations and to prevent detrimental settlement and lateral movement of existing facilities, adjacent property, and completed the Work. 3.02 EXCAVATION SUPPORT PLAN AND TRENCH EXCAVATION PLAN A. Prepare excavation support and trench excavation plan addressing following topics: 1. Details of shoring, bracing, sloping, or other provisions for protection of existing facilities, finished products, and worker protection from hazards of caving ground. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 SHORING MARCH 20, 2026 31 41 00 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 2. Design assumptions and calculations. 3. Methods and sequencing of installing excavation support. 4. Proposed locations of stockpiled excavated material. 5. Minimum lateral distance from the crest of slopes for vehicles and stockpiled excavated materials. 6. Anticipated difficulties and proposed resolutions. 7. Excavation support plan and trench excavation plan shall be stamped and signed by a professional engineer licensed in the State of Texas. 3.03 MOVEMENT MONITORING PLAN A. Prepare movement monitoring plan addressing following topics: I. Survey control. 2. Location of monitoring points. 3. Plots of data trends. 4. Interval between surveys. 5. Stamped and signed movement monitoring plan by a professional engineer licensed in the State of Texas. 3.04 REMOVAL OF EXCAVATION SUPPORT A. Remove excavation support in a manner that will maintain support as excavation is backfilled. B. Do not begin to remove excavation support until support can be removed without damage to existing facilities, completed Work, or adjacent property. C. Remove excavation support in a manner that does not leave voids in the backfill. 3.05 TRENCHES A. For trench excavation exceeding 5 feet in depth, provide adequate safety system meeting requirements of applicable state and local construction safety orders, and federal requirements. END OF SECTION SHORING PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 31 41 00 - 2 MARCH 20, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS 321313-I CONCRETE PAVING Page 1 of 22 SECTION 32 13 13 CONCRETE PAVING PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Finished pavement constructed of Portland cement or Blended Hydraulic Cements concrete including monolithically poured curb on the prepared subgrade or other base course. B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification 1. None. C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements 2. Division 1 - General Requirements 3. Section 32 01 29 - Concrete Paving Repair 4. Section 32 13 73 - Concrete Paving Joint Sealants 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement 1. Measurement a. Measurement for this Item shall be by the square yard of completed and accepted Concrete Pavement in its final position as measured from back of curb for various: 1) Classes 2) Thicknesses 2. Payment a. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item will be paid for at the unit price bid per square yard of Concrete Pavement. 3. The price bid shall include: a. Shaping and fine grading the placement area b. Furnishing and applying all water required c. Furnishing, loading and unloading, storing, hauling and handling all concrete ingredients including all freight and royalty involved d. Mixing, placing, finishing and curing all concrete e. Furnishing and installing all reinforcing steel f. Formworks, braces and supports g. Furnishing all materials and placing longitudinal, warping, expansion, and contraction joints, including all steel dowels, dowel caps and load transmission units required, wire and devices for placing, holding and supporting the steel bar, load transmission units, and joint filler material in the proper position; for coating steel bars where required by the Drawings h. Sealing joints i. Monolithically poured curb and gutter if needed CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised June 13, 2025 321313-2 CONCRETE PAVING Page 2 of 22 j. Cleanup 1.3 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards 1. Reference standards cited in this specification refer to the current reference standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this specification, unless a date is specifically cited. 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A615/A615M, Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon -Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement b. C3 1/C3 1M, Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field c. C33/C33M, Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates d. C39/C39M, Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens e. C42/C42M, Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete f. C94/C94M, Standard Specifications for Ready -Mixed Concrete g. C 150/Cl 50M, Standard Specification for Portland Cement h. C156, Standard Test Method for Water Loss (from a mortar specimen) Through Liquid Membrane -Forming Curing Compounds for Concrete i. C 172/Cl 72M, Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete j. C260/C260M, Air Entraining Admixtures for Concrete k. C309, Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane -Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete, Type 2 1. C494/C494M, Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete, Types "A", "D", "F" and m. C595/C595M, Standard Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements n. C618, Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for use as a Mineral Admixture in Concrete o. C881/C881M, Standard Specification for Epoxy -Resin -Base Bonding Systems for Concrete p. C 1064/Cl 064M, Standard Test Method for Temperature of Freshly Mixed Hydraulic -Cement Concrete q. C1602/C1602M, Standard Specification for Mixing Water Used in the Production of Hydraulic Cement Concrete. r. D698, Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3) 3. American Concrete Institute (ACI): a. ACI 305.1-14 Specification for Hot Weather Concreting b. ACI 306.1-90, Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting c. ACI 318, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED] 1.5 SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.Mix Design: submit for approval. See Item 2.4.A. CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised June 13, 2025 321313-3 CONCRETE PAVING Page 3 of 22 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED] 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED] 1.11 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Weather Conditions 1. Place concrete when concrete temperature is between 40°F and 95°F when measured in accordance with ASTM Cl 064 at point of placement. 2. Hot Weather Concreting a. When first concrete temperature reading is over 95°F (but under 100°F), no more trucks shall be loaded at the plant. Truck already in transit can place concrete. b. Contractor, at his or her option and expense, may continue to load trucks if ice or other effective cooling methods are used to lower temperatures. The resultant temperatures shall be in the acceptable range. c. Concrete shall not be placed when concrete temperature is above 100°F under any circumstances. 3. Cold Weather Concreting a. No concrete shall be placed when ambient temp in shade and away from artificial heat is below 40°F and falling. Concrete may be placed when ambient temp is above 35°F and rising. Unless the City Project Manager or designee approves paving to continue, suspend concreting operations if a descending air temperature in the shade and away from artificial heat falls below 40°F. Do not resume concreting operations until an ascending air temperature in the shade and away from artificial heat reaches 35°F and rising. Contractor should take all the precautions necessary to prevent freezing of concrete. Frozen concrete must be removed and replaced. 4. It is to be distinctly understood that the Contractor is responsible for the quality and strength of the concrete placed under any weather conditions. B. Time: Place concrete after sunrise and no later than sunset shall permit the finishing of the pavement in natural light, or as directed by the City. 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 OWNER -FURNISHED PRODUCTS [NOT USED] 2.2 MATERIALS A. Cementitious Material: ASTM C150, ASTM C595 Type IL Cement. B. Aggregates: ASTM C33. C. Water: ASTM C1602. D. Admixtures: When admixtures are used, conform to the appropriate specification: CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised June 13, 2025 321313-4 CONCRETE PAVING Page 4 of 22 1. Air -Entraining Admixtures for Concrete: ASTM C260. 2. Chemical Admixtures for Concrete: ASTM C494, Types "A", "D", "F" and "G." 3. Fly Ash a. Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete: ASTM C618. b. Fly ash maybe substituted at one pound per pound of cement up to 25% of the specified cement content when such batch design is approved by the Engineer. E. Steel Reinforcement: ASTM A615. F. Steel Wire Reinforcement: Not used for concrete pavement. G. Dowels and Tie Bars 1. Dowel and tie bars: ASTM A615. 2. Dowel Caps a. Provide and install dowel caps with enough range of movement to allow complete closure of the expansion joint. b. Caps for dowel bars shall be of the length shown on the Drawings and shall have an internal diameter sufficient to permit the cap to freely slip over the bar. c. In no case shall the internal diameter exceed the bar diameter by more 1/8 inch, and one end of the cap shall be tightly closed. 3. Epoxy for Dowel and Tie Bars: ASTM C881. a. See the following table for approved producers of epoxies and adhesives Table 1: Pre -Qualified Producers of Epoxies and Adhesives Product Name Producer Concresive 1420 BASF HTE-50 Hilti T 308 + Powers Fasteners P E 1000+ Powers Fasteners C-6 Ramset-Redhead Epcon G-5 Ramset-Redhead Pro-Poxy-300 Fast Tube Unitex Shep-Poxy Tx1H CMC Construction Services Ultrabond 1300 Tubes Adhesives Technology Ultrabone 2300 N. S. A-22-2300 Slow Set Adhesives Technology Dynapoxy EP -430 Pecora Corp. EDOT Simpson Strong Tie ET22 Simpson Strong Tie SET 22 Simpson Strong Tie SpecPoxy 3000FS SpecChem b. Epoxy Use, Storage and Handling CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised June 13, 2025 321313-5 CONCRETE PAVING Page 5 of 22 1) Package components in airtight containers and protect from light and moisture. 2) Include detailed instructions for the application of the material and all safety information and warnings regarding contact with the components. 3) Epoxy label requirements a) Resin or hardener components b) Brand name c) Name of manufacturer d) Lot or batch number e) Temperature range for storage f) Date of manufacture g) Expiration date h) Quantity contained 4) Store epoxy and adhesive components at temperatures recommended by the manufacturer. 5) Do not use damaged or previously opened containers and any material that shows evidence of crystallization, lumps skinning, extreme thickening, or settling of pigments that cannot be readily dispersed with normal agitation. 6) Follow sound environmental practices when disposing of epoxy and adhesive wastes. 7) Dispose of all empty containers separately. 8) Dispose of epoxy by completely emptying and mixing the epoxy before disposal H. Reinforcement Bar Chairs 1. Reinforcement bar chairs or supports shall be of adequate strength to support the reinforcement bars and shall not bend or break under the weight of the reinforcement bars or Contractor's personnel walking on the reinforcing bars. 2. Bar chairs may be made of metal (free of rust), precast mortar or concrete blocks or plastic. 3. For approval of plastic chairs, representative samples of the plastic shall show no visible indications of deterioration after immersion in a 5 -percent solution of sodium hydroxide for 120 -hours. 4. Bar chairs may be rejected for failure to meet any of the requirements of this specification. I. Joint Filler 1. Joint filler is the material placed in concrete pavement and concrete structures to allow for the expansion and contraction of the concrete. 2. Wood Boards: Used as joint filler for concrete paving. a. Boards for expansion joint filler shall be of the required size, shape and type indicated on the Drawings or required in the specifications. 1) Boards shall be of selected stock of redwood or cypress. The boards shall be sound heartwood and shall be free from sapwood, knots, clustered birdseyes, checks and splits. 2) Joint filler, boards, shall be smooth, flat and straight throughout, and shall be sufficiently rigid to permit ease of installation. 3) Boards shall be furnished in lengths equal to the width between longitudinal joints, and may be furnished in strips or scored sheet of the required shape. CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised June 13, 2025 321313-6 CONCRETE PAVING Page 6 of 22 3. Dimensions. a. The thickness of the expansion joint filler shall be shown on the Drawings; the width shall be not less than that shown on the Drawings, providing for the top seal space. 4. Rejection. a. Expansion joint filler maybe rejected for failure to meet any of the requirements of this specification. J. Joint Sealants. a. Provide Joint Sealants in accordance with Section 32 13 73. K. Curing Materials Membrane -Forming Compounds. a. Conform to the requirements of ASTM C309, Type 2, white pigmented compound and be of such nature that it shall not produce permanent discoloration of concrete surfaces nor react deleteriously with the concrete. b. The compound shall produce a firm, continuous uniform moisture -impermeable film free from pinholes and shall adhere satisfactorily to the surfaces of damp concrete. c. It shall, when applied to the damp concrete surface at the specified rate of coverage, dry to touch in 1 hour and dry through in not more than 4 hours under normal conditions suitable for concrete operations. d. It shall adhere in a tenacious film without running off or appreciably sagging. e. It shall not disintegrate, check, peel or crack during the required curing period. f. The compound shall not peel or pick up under traffic and shall disappear from the surface of the concrete by gradual disintegration. g. The compound shall be delivered to the job site in the manufacturer's original containers only, which shall be clearly labeled with the manufacturer's name, the trade name of the material and a batch number or symbol with which test samples maybe correlated. h. When tested in accordance with ASTM C156 Standard Test Method for Water Loss (from a mortar specimen) Through Liquid Membrane -Forming Curing Compounds for Concrete, the liquid membrane -forming compound shall restrict the loss of water present in the test specimen at the time of application of the curing compound to not more than 0.01 -oz. -per -2 inches of surface. 2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED] 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Mix Design Concrete Mix Design and Control a. The City has a pre -approved list of concrete mix designs. The pre -approved list can be found on e -Builder under 000000 "Project Resources". These mix designs meet the requirements of applicable City specifications, and the Contractor may use mix designs from the list without the need for review and approval. The Contractor shall notify the City in writing which mix in the pre - approved list the Contractor uses for a project. CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised June 13, 2025 321313-7 CONCRETE PAVING Page 7 of 22 b. For a mix design not included in the pre -approved list, the Contractor shall submit a design of the concrete mix it proposes to use and a full description of the source of supply of each material component at least 10 calendar days prior to the start of concrete paving operations. c. The design of the concrete mix shall produce a quality concrete complying with these specifications and shall include the following information: 1) Design Requirements and Design Summary 2) Material source 3) Dry weight of cement/cubic yard and type 4) Dry weight of fly ash/cubic yard and type, if used 5) Saturated surface dry weight of fine and coarse aggregates/cubic yard 6) Design water/cubic yard 7) Quantities, type, and name of admixtures with manufacturer's data sheets 8) Current strength tests or strength tests in accordance with ACI 318 9) Current Sieve Analysis and -200 Decantation of fine and coarse aggregates and date of tests 10) Fineness modulus of fine aggregate 11) Specific Gravity and Absorption Values of fine and coarse aggregates 12) L.A. Abrasion of coarse aggregates d. Once mix design approved by City, maintain intent of mix design and maximum water to cement ratio. e. No concrete may be placed on the job site until the mix design has been approved by the City. 2. Quality of Concrete a. Consistency 1) In general, the consistency of concrete mixtures shall be such that: a) Mortar shall cling to the coarse aggregate b) Aggregate shall not segregate in concrete when it is transported to the place of deposit c) Concrete, when dropped directly from the discharge chute of the mixer, shall flatten out at the center of the pile, but the edges of the pile shall stand and not flow d) Concrete and mortar shall show no free water when removed from the mixer e) Concrete shall slide and not flow into place when transported in metal chutes at an angle of 30 degrees with the horizontal f) Surface of the finished concrete shall be free from a surface film or laitance 2) When field conditions are such that additional moisture is needed for the final concrete surface finishing operation, the required water shall be applied to the surface by hand sprayer only and be held to a minimum amount. 3) The concrete shall be workable, cohesive, possess satisfactory finishing qualities and be of the stiffest consistency that can be placed and vibrated into a homogeneous mass. 4) Excessive bleeding shall be avoided. CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised June 13, 2025 321313-8 CONCRETE PAVING Page 8 of 22 5) If the strength or consistency required for the class of concrete being produced is not secured with the minimum cement specified or without exceeding the maximum water/cement ratio, the Contractor may use, or the City may require, an approved cement dispersing agent (water reducer); or the Contractor shall furnish additional aggregates, or aggregates with different characteristics, or the Contractor may use additional cement in order to produce the required results. 6) The additional cement may be permitted as a temporary measure, until aggregates are changed and designs checked with the different aggregates or cement dispersing agent. 7) The Contractor is solely responsible for the quality of the concrete produced. 8) The City reserves the right to independently verify the quality of the concrete through inspection of the batch plant, testing of the various materials used in the concrete and by casting and testing concrete cylinders or beams on the concrete actually incorporated in the pavement. b. Standard Class 1) Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or detailed specifications, the standard class for pavement and related concrete for streets and alleys is shown in the following table: Table 2: Standard Classes of Pavement and Related Concrete 28 Day Min. Coarse Class of Minimum Compressive Max. Aggregate Concrete' Cementitious Strength w/c Maximum General Usage (Informational Only) (Lb. ICY) (Psi) Ratio Size (Inch) Sidewalks and ADA ramps, A 470 3,000 0.58 1-1/2 driveways, curb & gutter, median pavement Inlets, manholes, junction boxes, CIP 470 3.000 0.50 1-1/2 encasement, blocking, collars, footing light pole foundations C 517 3,600 0.45 1-1/2 Headwalls, wing walls, culverts, drilled shaft light -pole foundations P 517 3,600 0.45 1-1/2 Machine -Placed Paving H 564 4,500 0.45 1-1/2 Hand -Placed Paving HES 564 4,500 0.45 1-1/2 HES Paving S 564 4,000 0.45 1-1/2 Bridge slabs, top slabs of direct traffic culverts, approach slabs 1. All exposed horizontal concrete shall have a minimum of 3% entrained -air. a) Concrete Sidewalks and Curb & Gutter: Class A b) Cast -In -Place Concrete Structures: Class CIP and Class C c) Machine -Laid concrete: Class P d) Hand -Laid concrete: Class H e) Structural Concrete: Class S I) High Early Strength Concrete: Class HES (1) When shown on the Drawings or allowed, provide Class HES concrete for very early opening of pavements area or leave outs to traffic. CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised June 13, 2025 321313-9 CONCRETE PAVING Page 9 of 22 (2) Design class HES to meet the requirements of class specified for concrete pavement and a minimum compressive strength of 2,600 psi in 24 hours, or 3000 psi in 72 hours unless other early strength and time requirements are shown on the Drawings allowed. c. Slump 1) Slump requirements for pavement and related concrete shall be as specified in the following table: Table 3: Concrete Pavement and Related Concrete Slump Requirements Add classes of concrete Recommended Design Acceptable Concrete Use and Placement Slump Placement Slump (Inch) (Inch) Slip-Form/Form-Riding Paving 1-1/2 1 —3 Hand Formed Paving 4 3 —5 Headwalls, wing walls, culverts, inlets, manholes, junction boxes, encasement, blocking, collars, light pole 4 3 — 5 Footing Foundations, slabs, sidewalk, curb and gutter, concrete valley utter and other miscellaneous concrete Drilled shaft Foundations 6'/2 51/2 - 71/2 2) No concrete shall be permitted with slump in excess of the maximums shown. 3) Any concrete mix failing to meet the above consistency requirements, although meeting the slump requirements, shall be considered unsatisfactory, and the mix shall be changed to correct such unsatisfactory conditions. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED] 3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED] 3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED] 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Equipment 1. All equipment necessary for the construction of this item shall be on the project. 2. The equipment shall include spreading devices (augers), internal vibration, tamping, and surface floating necessary to finish the freshly placed concrete in such a manner as to provide a dense and homogeneous pavement. 3. Machine -Laid Concrete Pavement a. Fixed -Form Paver. Fixed -form paving equipment shall be provided with forms that are uniformly supported on a sufficiently firm subbase to prevent sagging under the weight of machine. b. Slip -Form Paver 1) Slip -form paving equipment shall be provided with traveling side forms of sufficient dimensions, shape and strength so as to support the concrete laterally for a sufficient length of time during placement. CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised June 13, 2025 32 13 13 -10 CONCRETE PAVING Page 10 of 22 2) City may reject use of Slip -Form Paver if paver requires over -digging and impacts trees, mailboxes or other improvements. 4. Hand -Laid Concrete Pavement a. Machines that do not incorporate these features, such as roller screeds or vibrating screeds, shall be considered tools to be used in hand -laid concrete construction, as slumps, spreading methods, vibration, and other procedures are more common to hand methods than to machine methods. 5. City may reject equipment and stop operation if equipment does not meet requirements. B. Concrete Mixing and Delivery 1. Transit Batching: shall not be used — onsite mixing not permitted 2. Ready Mixed Concrete a. The concrete shall be produced in an approved method conforming to the requirements of this specification and ASTM C94/C94M. b. City shall have access to ready mix plant to obtain material samples. c. When ready -mix concrete is used, sample concrete per ASTM C 172 1) As the mixer is being emptied, individual samples shall be taken between the discharge of approximately 10 percent and 90 percent of the load. 2) The method of sampling shall provide that the samples are representative of widely separated portions, but not from the very ends of the batch. d. The mixing of each batch, after all materials are in the drum, shall continue until it produces a thoroughly mixed concrete of uniform mass as determined by established mixer performance ratings and inspection, or appropriate uniformity tests as described in ASTM C94. e. The entire contents of the drum shall be discharged before any materials are placed therein for the succeeding batch. f. Retempering or remixing shall not be permitted. 3. Delivery a. Deliver concrete at an interval not exceeding 30 minutes or as determined by City to prevent cold joint. 4. Delivery Tickets (Batch Tickets) a. For all operations, the Contractor shall, before unloading, furnish to the City Project Manager with each batch of concrete at the site a copy of delivery ticket/ batch ticket on which is printed, stamped, or written, the following information to determine that the concrete was proportioned in accordance with the approved mix design. Concrete delivered without a delivery ticket/ batch ticket containing complete information as specified herein may be rejected: 1) Name of concrete supplier 2) Serial number of ticket 3) Date 4) Truck number 5) Name of purchaser 6) Specific designation of job (name and location) 7) Concrete Class designation 8) Approved Mix Design number 9) Amount of concrete in cubic yards 10) Time loaded or of first mixing of cement and aggregates 11) Water added by receiver of concrete CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised June 13, 2025 32 13 13-11 CONCRETE PAVING Page 11 of 22 12) Type, brand, and amount of admixtures b. Electronic tickets (e -tickets) are allowed as long as the City will get access to the delivery ticket/ batch ticket and if the ticket is downloadable and saved by the Project Manager in PDF format for future reference. The Project Manager may discontinue use of the e -ticketing and require printed tickets as needed if the e - ticketing system fails to meet the above requirements. C. Subgrade 1. When manipulation or treatment of subgrade is required on the Drawings, the work shall be performed in proper sequence with the preparation of the subgrade for pavement. 2. The roadbed shall be excavated and shaped in conformity with the typical sections and to the lines and grades shown on the Drawings or established by the City. 3. All holes, ruts and depressions shall be filled and compacted with suitable material and, if required, the subgrade shall be thoroughly wetted and reshaped. 4. Irregularities of more than 1!2 inch, as shown by straightedge or template, shall be corrected. 5. The subgrade shall be uniformly compacted to at least 95 percent of the maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D698. 6. Moisture content shall be within minus 2 percent to plus 4 percent of optimum. 7. The prepared subgrade shall be wetted down sufficiently in advance of placing the pavement to ensure its being in a firm and moist condition. 8. Sufficient subgrade shall be prepared in advance to ensure satisfactory prosecution of the work. 9. The Contractor shall notify the City/ Testing Lab at least 24 hours in advance of its intention to place concrete pavement. 10. After the specified moisture and density are achieved, the Contractor shall maintain the subgrade moisture and density in accordance with this Section. 11. In the event that rain or other conditions may have adversely affected the condition of the subgrade or base, additional tests may be required as directed by the City. D. Placing and Removing Forms Placing Forms a. Forms for machine -laid concrete (Fixed -Form Paver) 1) The side forms shall be metal, of approved cross section and bracing, of a height no less than the prescribed edge thickness of the concrete section, and a minimum of 10 feet in length for each individual form. 2) Forms shall be of ample strength and staked with adequate number of pins capable of resisting the pressure of concrete placed against them and the thrust and the vibration of the construction equipment operating upon them without appreciable springing, settling or deflection. 3) The forms shall be free from warps, bends or kinks and shall show no variation from the true plane for face or top. 4) Forms shall be jointed neatly and tightly and set with exactness to the established grade and alignment. 5) Forms shall be set to line and grade at least 200 feet, where practicable, in advance of the paving operations. CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised June 13, 2025 32 13 13 -12 CONCRETE PAVING Page 12 of 22 6) In no case shall the base width be less than 8 inches for a form 8 inches or more in height. 7) Forms must be in firm contact with the subgrade throughout their length and base width. 8) If the subgrade becomes unstable, forms shall be reset, using heavy stakes or other additional supports may be necessary to provide the required stability. b. Forms for hand -laid concrete 1) Forms shall extend the full depth of concrete and be a minimum of 1-1/2 inches in thickness or equivalent when wooden forms are used, or be of a gauge that shall provide equivalent rigidity and strength when metal forms are used. 2) For curves with a radius of less than 250 feet, acceptable flexible metal or wood forms shall be used. 3) All forms showing a deviation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet from a straight line shall be rejected. Form -Release Agent a. Shall not bond with, stain or adversely affect concrete surfaces and reinforcement bars. b. For steel form -facing materials, formulate with rust inhibitor 3. Settling. When forms settle over 1/8 inch under finishing operations, paving operations shall be stopped, the forms reset to line and grade and the pavement then brought to the required section and thickness. 4. Cleaning. Forms shall be thoroughly cleaned of all debris before each use.Removal. a. Forms shall remain in place until the concrete has taken its final set. b. Avoid damage to the edge of the pavement when removing forms. c. Repair damage resulting from form removal and honeycombed areas with a mortar mix within 24 hours after form removal unless otherwise approved. d. Clean joint face and repair honeycombed or damaged areas within 24 hours after a bulkhead for a transverse constructionjoint oint has been removed unless otherwise approved. e. When forms are removed before 72 hours after concrete placement, promptly apply membrane curing compound to the edge of the concrete pavement. E. Placing Reinforcing Steel, Tie, and Dowel Bars General a. When reinforcing steel tie bars, dowels, etc., are required, they shall be placed as shown on the Drawings. All reinforcement bars shall have a clear cover as shown on the Drawings. b. All reinforcing steel shall be clean, free from rust in the form of loose or objectionable scale, and of the type, size and dimensions shown on the Drawings. c. Reinforcing bars shall be securely wired together at all intersections except where spacing is less than 1 foot in each direction, in which case, alternative intersections shall be tied, and all splices shall be securely tied at each intersection dowel and load -transmission unit intersected. CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised June 13, 2025 32 13 13 -13 CONCRETE PAVING Page 13 of 22 d. All reinforcement bars shall be installed in their required position as shown on the Drawings. e. The storing of reinforcing or structural steel on completed roadway slabs generally shall be avoided and, where permitted, such storage shall be limited to quantities and distribution that shall not induce excessive stresses. 2. Splices a. Provide standard reinforcement splices by lapping and tying ends. b. Comply with ACT 318 for minimum lap of spliced bars where not specified on the Drawings. 3. Installation of Reinforcing Steel a. All reinforcing bars and bar mats shall be installed in the slab at the required depth below the finished surface and supported by and securely attached to bar chairs installed on prescribed longitudinal and transverse centers as shown by sectional and detailed drawings on the Drawings. b. The chair assembly shall be similar and equal to that shown on the Drawings and shall be approved by the City prior to extensive fabrication. c. After the reinforcing steel is securely installed above the subgrade as specified in Drawings and as herein prescribed, no loading shall be imposed upon the bar mats or individual bars before or during the placing or finishing of the concrete. 4. Installation of Dowel Bars a. Install through the predrilled joint filler and rigidly support in true horizontal and vertical positions by an assembly of bar chairs and dowel baskets. b. Dowel Baskets 1) The dowels shall be held in position exactly parallel to surface and centerline of the slab, by a dowel basket that is left in the pavement. 2) The dowel basket shall hold each dowel in exactly the correct position so firmly that the dowel's position cannot be altered by concreting operations. c. Dowel Caps 1) Install cap to allow the bar to move not less than 1-1/4 inch in either direction. Apply grease coat on the bar before adding cap to prevent bonding with the concrete. 5. Tie Bar and Dowel Placement a. Place at mid -depth of the pavement slab, parallel to the surface. b. Place as shown on the Drawings. Epoxy for Tie and Dowel Bar Installation 1) Epoxy bars as shown on the Drawings. 2) Use only drilling operations that do not damage the surrounding structures. 3) Blow out drilled holes with compressed air. 4) Completely fill the drilled hole with approved epoxy before inserting the tie bar into the hole. 5) Install epoxy grout and bar at least 6 inches embedded into concrete. F. Joints 1. Joints shall be placed where shown on the Drawings or where directed by the City. 2. The plane of all joints shall make a right angle with the surface of the pavement. 3. No joints shall have an error in alignment of more than 1/2 inch at any point. 4. Joint Dimensions CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised June 13, 2025 32 13 13 -14 CONCRETE PAVING Page 14 of 22 a. The width of the joint shall be shown on the Drawings, creating the joint sealant reservoir. b. The depth of the joint shall be shown on the Drawings. c. Dimensions of the sealant reservoir shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. d. After curing, the joint sealant shall be 1/8 inch to 1/4 inch below the pavement surface at the center of the joint. 5. Transverse Expansion Joints a. Expansion joints shall be installed perpendicularly to the surface and to the centerline of the pavement at the locations shown on the Drawings, or as approved by the City. Expansion joints shall continue to the farthest outside edge of paving and adjacent slabs, and should extend through monolithic or attached curbs so that there is no restriction to the movement of the joint at any point. b. Joints shall be of the design width, and spacing shown on the Drawings, or as approved by the City. c. Dowel bars, shall be of the size and type shown on the Drawings, or as approved by the City, and shall be installed at the specified spacing. d. Support dowel bars with dowel baskets. e. Dowels shall not restrict the free opening and closing of the expansion join and shall not make planes of weaknesses in the pavement. f. Greased Dowels for Expansion Joints. 1) Coat dowels with a thin film of grease or other approved de -bonding material. 2) Provide dowel caps on the lubricated end of each dowel bar. g. Proximity to Existing Structures. When the pavement is adjacent to or around existing structures, expansions joints shall be constructed in accordance with the details shown on the Drawings. Transverse Contraction Joints a. Contraction or dummy joints shall be installed at the locations and at the intervals shown on the Drawings. b. Joints shall be of the design width, and spacing shown on the Drawings, or as approved by the City. c. Dowel bars shall be of the size and type shown on the Drawings, or as approved by the City, and shall be installed at the specified spacing. d. Saw joints in a single cut to the width and depth the plans show. Begin sawing as soon as the concrete hardens sufficiently to prevent excessive raveling along the saw cut and fmish before conditions induce uncontrolled cracking. e. The joints shall be constructed by sawing to a 1/4 - inch width and to a depth of 1/4 of the actual pavement thickness, or deeper if so indicated on the Drawings. f. Complete sawing as soon as possible in hot weather conditions and within a maximum of 24 hours after saw cutting begins under cool weather conditions. g. If sharp edge joints are being obtained, the sawing process shall be sped up to the point where some raveling is observed. h. Damage by blade action to the slab surface and to the concrete immediately adjacent to the joint shall be minimized. i. Any portion of the curing membrane which has been disturbed by sawing operations shall be restored by spraying the areas with additional curing compound. CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised June 13, 2025 32 13 13 -15 CONCRETE PAVING Page 15 of 22 Transverse Construction Joints a. Construction joints formed at the close of each day's work or when the placing of concrete has been interrupted for 30 -minutes or longer shall be constructed by use of metal or wooden bulkheads cut true to the section of the finished pavement and cleaned. b. Wooden bulkheads shall be constructed using material of a thickness not less than nominal 2" lumber. c. Longitudinal bars shall be held securely in place in a plane perpendicular to the surface and at right angles to the centerline of the pavement. d. Edges shall be rounded to 1/4 -inch radius. e. Any surplus concrete on the subgrade shall be removed upon the resumption of the work. 8. Longitudinal Construction Joints a. Longitudinal construction joints shall be of the type shown on the Drawings. 9. Joint Filler a. Joint filler shall be as specified in 2.2.I of the size and shape shown on the Drawings. b. Redwood Board joints shall be used for all pavement joints except for expansion joints that are coincident with a butt joint against existing pavements. c. Boards with less than 25 -percent of moisture at the time of installation shall be thoroughly wetted on the job. d. Green lumber of much higher moisture content is desirable and acceptable. e. The joint filler shall be appropriately drilled to admit the dowel bars when required. f. The bottom edge of the filler shall extend to or slightly below the bottom of the slab. The top edge shall be held not less than 1/2 inch below the finished surface of the pavement in order to allow the finishing operations to be continuous. g. The joint filler may be composed of more than one length of board in the length of joint, but no board of a length less than 6 foot may be used unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. h. After the removal of the side forms, the ends of the joints at the edges of the slab shall be carefully opened for the entire depth of the slab. 10. Joint Sealing. Routine pavement joints shall be filled consistent with paving details and as specified in Section 32 13 73. Materials shall generally be handled and applied according to the manufacturer's recommendations as specified in Section 32 13 73. G. Placing Concrete 1. Unless otherwise specified in the Drawings, the finished pavement shall be constructed monolithically and all concrete lane paving within the ROW greater than 150 LF will require the use of a slipform or form riding paving machine by a prequalified paving contractor. 2. The concrete shall be rapidly deposited on the subgrade in successive batches and shall be distributed to the required depth and for the entire width of the pavement by approved methods. 3. Any concrete not placed as herein prescribed within the time limits in the following table will be rejected. Time begins when the water is added to the mixer. CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised June 13, 2025 32 13 13 -16 CONCRETE PAVING Page 16 of 22 Temperature — Time Requirements Concrete Temperature (at point of placement) Max Time — minutes (no retarding agent) Max Time — minutes (with retarding agent)' Non -Agitated Concrete All temperatures 45 45 Agitated Concrete Above 90°F 45 75 Above 75°F thru 90°F 60 90 75°F and Below 60 120 1 Normal dosage of retarder. 4. Rakes shall not be used in handling concrete. 5. At the end of the day, or in case of unavoidable interruption or delay of more than 30 minutes or longer to prevent cold joints, a transverse construction joint shall be placed in accordance with 3.4.F.7 of this Section. 6. Honeycombing a. Special care shall be taken in placing and vibrating the concrete against the forms and at all joints and assemblies so as to prevent honeycombing Concrete shall be uniformly consolidated throughout its width and depth, free from honey combed areas, and has a consistent void -free closed surface. b. Excessive voids and honeycombing in the edge of the pavement, revealed by the removal of the side forms, may be cause for rejection of the section of slab in which the defect occurs. H. Finishing 1. Machine a. Tolerance Limits 1) While the concrete is still workable, it shall be tested for irregularities with a 10 -foot straightedge placed parallel to the centerline of the pavement so as to bridge depressions and to touch all high spots. 2) Ordinates measured from the face of the straightedge to the surface of the pavement shall at no place exceed 1/16 inch -per -foot from the nearest point of contact. 3) In no case shall the maximum ordinate to a 10 -foot straightedge be greater than 1/8 inch. 4) Any surface not within the tolerance limits shall be reworked and refinished. b. Edging 1) The edges of slabs and all joints requiring edging shall be carefully tooled with an edger of the radius required by the Drawings at the time the concrete begins to take its "set" and becomes non -workable. 2) All such work shall be left smooth and true to lines. 2. Hand CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised June 13, 2025 32 13 13 -17 CONCRETE PAVING Page 17 of 22 a. Hand finishing permitted only in intersections and areas inaccessible to a finishing machine. b. When the hand method of striking off and consolidating is permitted, the concrete, as soon as placed, shall be approximately leveled and then struck off with screed bar to such elevation above grade that, when consolidated and finished, the surface of the pavement shall be at the grade elevation shown on the Drawings. c. The straightedge and joint finishing shall be as prescribed herein. I. Curing 1. The curing of concrete pavement shall be thorough and continuous throughout the entire curing period. a. The minimum curing period shall be the time from placing of concrete until the concrete attains 80% of the required strength. b. When ambient temperature is below 35 °F, the Contractor shall maintain the concrete temperature above 50 °F during the curing period using approved heating methods. 2. Failure to provide proper curing as herein prescribed shall be considered as sufficient cause for immediate suspension of the paving operations. 3. The curing method as herein specified does not preclude the use of any of the other commonly used methods of curing, and the City may approve another method of curing if so requested by the Contractor. 4. If any selected method of curing does not afford the desired results, the City shall have the right to order that another method of curing be instituted. 5. After removal of the side forms, the sides of the slab shall receive a like coating before earth is banked against them. 6. The solution shall be applied, under pressure with a spray nozzle, in such a manner as to cover the entire surfaces thoroughly and completely with a uniform film. 7. The rate of application shall be such as to ensure complete coverage and shall not exceed 20 -square -yards -per -gallon of curing compound. 8. When thoroughly dry, it shall provide a continuous and flexible membrane, free from cracks or pinholes, and shall not disintegrate, check, peel or crack during the curing period. 9. If for any reason the seal is broken during the curing period, it shall be immediately repaired with additional sealing solution. 10. When tested in accordance with ASTM C 156 Standard Test Method for Water Loss (from a mortar specimen) Through Liquid Membrane -Forming Curing Compounds for Concrete, the curing compound shall provide a film which shall have retained within the test specimen a percentage of the moisture present in the specimen when the curing compound was applied according to the following. 11. Contractor shall maintain and properly repair damage to curing materials on exposed surfaces of concrete pavement continuously for a least 72 hours. J. Monolithic Curbs 1. Concrete for monolithic curb shall be the same as for the pavement and shall be placed within 20 minutes of the placement of the slab concrete. CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised June 13, 2025 32 13 13 -18 CONCRETE PAVING Page 18 of 22 2. After the concrete has been struck off and sufficiently set, the exposed surfaces shall be thoroughly worked to achieve an acceptable surface finish. 3. The exposed edges shall be rounded by the use of an edging tool to the radius indicated on the Drawings. 4. All exposed surfaces of curb shall be brushed to a smooth and uniform surface. K. Pavement Leaveouts 1. Pavement leaveouts as necessary to maintain and provide for local traffic shall be provided at location indicated on the Drawings or as directed by the City. 2. The extent and location of each leaveout required and a suitable crossover connection to provide for traffic movements shall be determined in the field by the City. 3.5 REPAIR A.Repair of concrete pavement concrete shall be consistent with the Drawings and as specified in Section 32 01 29. 3.6 RE -INSTALLATION [NOT USED] 3.7 SITE QUALITY CONTROL A. Concrete Placement Place concrete using a fully automated paving machine. Hand paving is only permitted in areas such as intersections where use of paving machine is not practical. a. All concrete pavement not placed by hand shall be placed using a fully automated paving machine as approved by the City. b. Screeds are considered hand placement paving method. B. Testing of Materials 1. Samples of all materials for testing shall be provided by the Contractor at no expense to the City, unless otherwise specified in the special provisions or in the Drawings. 2. In the event the initial sampling and testing does not comply with the specifications, all subsequent testing of the material in order to determine if the material is acceptable shall be at the Contractor's expense at the same rate charged by the commercial laboratories. 3. All testing shall be in accordance with applicable ASTM Standards and concrete testing technician must be ACI certified or equivalent. C. Pavement Thickness Test 1. Pavement thickness test shall be performed by a commercial testing laboratory approved by the City every 100 feet or fraction thereof in accordance with TxDOT Designation: Tex -423-A, unless otherwise shown on the plans. Test locations shall be at the discretion of the City. 2. In the event a deficiency in the thickness of pavement is revealed during normal testing operations, core samples shall be taken at the Contractor's expense to verify deficiency of more than 0.2 in. from plan thickness and to isolate the deficient area. CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised June 13, 2025 32 13 13 -19 CONCRETE PAVING Page 19 of 22 3. Where the average thickness of pavement in the area found to be deficient in thickness by more than 0.20 inch, but not more than 0.50 -inch, payment shall be made at an adjusted price as specified in the following table. Deficiency in Thickness Determined by Cores [Inches] Proportional Part Of Contract Price [Allowed] 0.00 - 0.20 100 percent 0.21 - 0.30 80 percent 0.31 -0.40 70 percent 0.41 -0.50 60 percent 4. Any area of pavement found deficient in thickness by more than 0.50 inch but not more than 0.75 inch or 1/10 of the thickness specified on the Drawings, whichever is greater, shall be evaluated by the City. 5. If, in the judgment of the City the area of such deficiency should not be removed and replaced, there shall be no payment for the area retained. 6. If, in the judgment of the City, the area of such deficiency warrants removal, the area shall be removed and replaced, at the Contractor's entire expense, with concrete of the thickness shown on the Drawings. 7. Any area of pavement found deficient in thickness by more than 0.75 inch or more than 1/10 of the plan thickness, whichever is greater, shall be removed and replaced with concrete of the thickness shown on the Drawings at the Contractor's sole expense. 8. No additional payment over the contract unit price shall be made for any pavement of a thickness exceeding that required by the Drawings. D. Pavement Strength Test 1. During the progress of the work the commercial testing laboratory casts test cylinders for conforming to ASTM C3 1, to maintain a check on the compressive strengths of the concrete being placed. 2. Test cylinders shall be taken from a representative portion of concrete being placed for every 150 -cubic yards of concrete pavement placed, but in no case shall fewer than 1 set of cylinders be taken per day of placement. The first three trucks of, every 150 -cubic yards of concrete shall be sampled and tested for air content, slump and temperature. After the cylinders have been cast, they shall remain on the job site and then transported, moist cured, and tested in accordance with ASTM C31 and ASTM C39. 3. A set of four (4) cylinders of 6" by 12" or a set of five (5) cylinders of 4" by 8" will be prepared on site per ASTM C3 1. In each set, one of the cylinders shall be tested at 7 days (3 days for HES concrete), two cylinders for 6" by 12" cylinders and three for 4" by 8" cylinders shall be tested at the 28`h day (), and the remaining cylinder shall be retained for testing at the 56"' day, if necessary. Concrete must attain its design strength within 56 days. The compressive strength of concrete is considered satisfactory if both the following criteria are met: CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised June 13, 2025 32 13 13-20 CONCRETE PAVING Page 20 of 22 a. No single strength test falls below the specified compressive strength, f',, by more than 500 psi (3.45 MPa) whenf is 5000 psi (34.5 MPa) or less; b. The average of every three consecutive strength tests equals or exceeds the specified compressive strength. The 4" by 8" cylinders are acceptable only when the nominal maximum aggregate size of the mix is less than 1-1/4 inch. 4. If the average 28 -day and/ or the 56th day break, from the hold, test results indicate deficient strength, the Contractor may, at its option and expense, core the pavement in question and have the cores tested by an approved laboratory in accordance with ASTM C42 and ACT 318 protocol. The average of all cores must meet 100 percent of the minimum specified strength, with no individual core resulting in less than 90 percent of design strength, in order to override the results of the cylinder tests. 5. In the event cylinders and/or cores do not meet minimum specified strength, additional cores may be taken to identify the limits of deficient concrete pavement at the expense of the Contractor. 6. Cylinders and/or cores must meet minimum specified strength. Pavement not meeting the minimum specified strength shall be subject to the money penalties or removal and placement at the Contractor's expense as shown in the following table. Percent Deficient I Percent of Contract Price Allowed Greater Than 0 percent - Not More Than 10 percent 90 -percent Greater Than 10 percent - Not More Than 15 percent I 80 -percent Greater Than 15 percent 0 -percent or removed and replaced at the entire cost and expense of Contractor as directed by City 7. Deficiency shall be determined on a panel by panel basis. 8. The amount of penalty shall be deducted from payment due to Contractor 9. No additional payment over the contract unit price shall be made for any pavement with a strength exceeding that required by the Drawings and/or specifications. E. Cracked Concrete Acceptance Policy 1. If cracks exist in concrete pavement upon completion of the project, the Project Inspector shall decide as to the need for action to address the cracking as to its cause and recommended remedial work. 2. If the recommended remedial work is routing and sealing of the cracks to protect the subgrade, the Inspector shall make the determination as to whether to rout and seal the cracks at the time of final inspection and acceptance or at any time prior to the end of the project maintenance period. The Contractor shall perform the routing and sealing work as directed by the Project Inspector, at no cost to the City, regardless of the cause of the cracking. 3. If remedial work beyond routing and sealing is determined to be necessary, the Inspector and the Contractor shall meet to determine the cause of the cracking. a. If agreement is reached that the cracking is due to deficient materials or workmanship, the Contractor shall perform the remedial work at no cost to the City. Remedial work in this case shall be limited to removing and replacing the deficient work with new material and workmanship that meets the requirements of the contract. CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised June 13, 2025 32 13 13-21 CONCRETE PAVING Page 21 of 22 b. If the Inspector and the Contractor agree that the cause of the cracking is not deficient materials or workmanship, the City may request the Contractor to provide an estimate of the cost of the necessary remedial work and/or additional work to address the cause of the cracking, and the Contractor will perform that work at the agreed -upon price if the City elects to do so. 4. If the Inspector and the Contractor cannot agree on the cause of the cracking, the City may hire an independent geotechnical engineer, acceptable to the Contractor, to perform testing and analysis to determine the cause of the cracking. The Contractor shall pay 50 percent of the costs of the independent testing. Contractor shall provide one half of the estimated costs of the independent testing to be held by the City. 5. If the independent geotechnical engineer determines that the primary cause of the cracking is the Contractor's deficient material or workmanship, the remedial work will be performed at the Contractor's entire expense and the Contractor will also reimburse the City for the City's portion of cost of the geotechnical investigation. Remedial work in this case shall be limited to removing and replacing the deficient work with new material and workmanship that meets the requirements of the contract. 6. If the geotechnical engineer determines that the primary cause of the cracking is not the Contractor's deficient material or workmanship, the City will return the held funds to the Contractor. The Contractor, on request, will provide the City an estimate of the costs of the necessary remedial work and/or additional work and will perform the work at the agreed -upon price as directed by the City. 3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED] 3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED] 3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED] A.No concrete washout, mix, slurry, cuts, mud or solids etc., may enter the storm water system including curb lines. Equipment washout allowed only in areas shown on drawings and test materials or slag must be removed from site prior to final acceptance. 3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED] 3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED] 3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED] 3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED] CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised June 13, 2025 32 13 13-22 CONCRETE PAVING Page 22 of 22 END OF SECTION Revision Log DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE 12/20/2012 1.2.A — Modified items to be included in price bid 05/21/2014 Doug Rademaker 2.2.D — Modified to clarify acceptable fly ash substitution in concrete paving 1.11 .A — modified to clarify concrete placement temperature restrictions Zelalem 2.4.A, B, D — to clarify concrete quality control process and requirements 03/19/2021 Arega/Doug 3.7. C & D - to modify and clarify the pavement strength test and change in Black pavement thickness measurement methodology 3.7.E — Modified to clarify cracked concrete acceptance policy 3/11/2022 Zelalem Arega 1.3.A.h, 2.2 — Added ASTM C595, Type IL cement 6/10/2022 M Owen 3.4 G. 1.— Clarified language re: machine laid vs. hand poured Updated references throughout related to blended hydraulic cement Updated references throughout related to lab not agency 1.11 A. Clarified weather conditions/hot weather concreting section 1.2 A. 3. Provided clarifications re: what is included in bid item 1.3 A. Updated references 6/13/25 M Owen Table 2 and 3 — Clarified between footings and drilled shafts 3.4 B. 4. — Provided additional clarification re: delivery tickets 3.4 E. Provided additional clarification re: reinforcement 3.4 G. Provided minimum length of paving where machine paving is required 3.4 I. Provided clarification related to curing CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised June 13, 2025 32 13 20- 1 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS, DRIVEWAYS AND BARRIER FREE RAMPS Page 1 of 6 SECTION 32 13 20 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS, DRIVEWAYS AND BARRIER FREE RAMPS PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1. Concrete sidewalks 2. Driveways 3. Barrier free ramps B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification 1. None. C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract 2. Division 1 - General Requirements 3. Section 02 41 13 - Selective Site Demolition 4. Section 32 13 13 - Concrete Paving 5. Section 32 13 73 - Concrete Paving Joint Sealants 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A.Measurement and Payment Concrete Sidewalk a. Measurement 1) Measurement for this Item shall be by the square foot of completed and accepted Concrete Sidewalk in its final position for various: a) Thicknesses b) Types b. Payment 1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under "Measurement" will be paid for at the unit price bid per square foot of Concrete Sidewalk. c. The price bid shall include: 1) Excavating and preparing the subgrade 2) Furnishing and placing all materials 3) Thickened edge under sidewalk limits, if adjacent to curb or retaining wall Concrete Curb at Back of Sidewalk (6 to 12 -inch max) a. Measurement 1) Measurement for this Item shall be by the linear foot of completed and accepted Concrete Curb at the Back of Sidewalk within the 6 to 12 -inch curb height at back of walk in its final position. b. Payment 1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under "Measurement" will be paid for at the unit price bid per linear foot of Concrete Curb at the Back of Sidewalk. CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised December 9, 2022 32 13 20- 2 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS, DRIVEWAYS AND BARRIER FREE RAMPS Page 2 of 6 c. The price bid shall include: 1) Excavating and preparing the subgrade 2) Furnishing and placing all materials, including concrete and reinforcing steel 3) Excavation in back of "retaining" curb 4) Furnishing, placing, and compacting backfill Concrete Driveway a. Measurement 1) Measurement for this Item shall be by the square foot of completed and accepted Concrete Driveway in its final position for various: a) Thicknesses b) Types 2) Dimensions will be taken from the back of the projected curb, including the area of the curb radii and will extend to the limits specified in the Drawings. 3) Sidewalk portion of drive will be included in driveway measurement. 4) Curb on drive will be included in the driveway measurement. b. Payment 1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under "Measurement" will be paid for at the unit price bid per square foot of Concrete Driveway. c. The price bid shall include: 1) Excavating and preparing the subgrade 2) Furnishing and placing all materials 3) Temporary asphalt transition at width shown on plans (typically 9 inches) when the pavement adjacent to the driveway will be improved Barrier Free Ramps a. Measurement 1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each Barrier Free Ramp completed and accepted for various: a) Types b. Payment 1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under "Measurement" will be paid for at the unit price bid per each "Barrier Free Ramp" installed. c. The price bid shall include: 1) Excavating and preparing the subgrade 2) Furnishing and placing all materials 3) Curb Ramp 4) Landing and detectable warning surface as shown on the Drawings 5) Adjacent flares or side curb 6) Concrete gutter width along ramp opening 7) Doweling into adjacent concrete pavement, if applicable 1.3 REFERENCES A.Abbreviations and Acronyms 1. TAS — Texas Accessibility Standards 2. TDLR — Texas Department of Licensing and Regulation B. Reference Standards CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised December 9, 2022 32 13 20- 3 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS, DRIVEWAYS AND BARRIER FREE RAMPS Page 3 of 6 1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this Specification, unless a date is specifically cited. 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. D545, Test Methods for Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Construction (Non -extruding and Resilient Types) b. D698, Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3) 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED] 1.5 SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.Mix Design: submit for approval. Section 32 13 13. B. Product Data: submit product data and sample for pre -cast detectable warning for barrier free ramp. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED] 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED] 1.11 FIELD CONDITIONS A.Weather Conditions: Placement of concrete shall be as specified in Section 32 13 13. 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 OWNER -FURNISHED PRODUCTS [NOT USED] 2.2 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS A.Forms: wood or metal straight, free from warp and of a depth equal to the thickness of the finished work. B. Concrete: see Section 32 13 13. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or detailed specifications, the standard class for concrete sidewalks, driveways and barrier free ramps is shown in the following table: Standard Classes of Pavement Concrete Class of Minimum 28 Day Min. Maximum Course Concrete' Cementitious, Compressive Water/ Aggregate Lb./CY Strength2 Cementitious Maximum psi Ratio Size, inch A 470 3000 0.58 1-1/2 C. Reinforcement: see Section 32 13 13. CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised December 9, 2022 32 13 20- 4 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS, DRIVEWAYS AND BARRIER FREE RAMPS Page 4 of 6 1. Sidewalk, driveway and barrier free ramp reinforcing steel shall be #3 deformed bars at 18 inches on -center -both -ways at the center plane of all slabs, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or detailed specifications. D.Joint Filler 1. Wood Filler: see Section 32 13 13. Pre -Molded Asphalt Board Filler a. Use only in areas where not practical for wood boards. b. Pre -molded asphalt board filler: ASTM D545. c. Install the required size and uniform thickness and as specified in Drawings. d. Include 2 liners of 0.016 asphalt impregnated kraft paper filled with a mastic mixture of asphalt and vegetable fiber and/or mineral filler. E. Expansion Joint Sealant: see Section 32 13 73 where shown on the Drawings. 2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED] 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED] 3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED] 3.3 PREPARATION A.Surface Preparation 1. Excavation: Excavation required for the construction of sidewalks, driveways and barrier free ramps shall be to the lines and grades as shown on the Drawings or as established by the City. 2. Fine Grading a. The Contractor shall do all necessary filling, leveling and fine grading required to bring the subgrade to the exact grades specified and compacted to at least 90 percent of maximum density as determined by ASTM D698. b. Moisture content shall be within minus 2 to plus 4 of optimum. c. Any over -excavation shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the City. B. Demolition / Removal 1. Sidewalk, Driveway and/or Barrier Free Ramp Removal: see Section 02 41 13. 3.4 INSTALLATION A.General 1. Concrete sidewalks shall have a minimum thickness of 4 inches. 2. Sidewalks constructed in driveway approach sections shall have a minimum thickness equal to that of driveway approach or as called for by Drawings and specifications within the limits of the driveway approach. 3. Driveways shall have a minimum thickness of 6 inches. Standard cross -slopes for walks shall be 2 percent max in accordance with current TAS/TDLR guidelines. The construction of the driveway approach shall include the variable height radius curb or a pan driveway approach in accordance with the Drawings. CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised December 9, 2022 32 13 20- 5 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS, DRIVEWAYS AND BARRIER FREE RAMPS Page 5 of 6 4. All pedestrian facilities shall comply with provisions of TAS including location, slope, width, shapes, texture and coloring. Pedestrian facilities installed by the Contractor and not meeting TAS must be removed and replaced to meet TAS (no separate pay). B.Forms: Forms shall be securely staked to line and grade and maintained in a true position during the depositing of concrete. C. Reinforcement: see Section 32 13 13. D.Concrete Placement: see Section 32 13 13. E. Finishing 1. Concrete sidewalks, driveways and barrier free ramps shall be finished to a true, even surface. 2. Trowel and then brush transversely to obtain a smooth uniform brush finish. 3. Provide exposed aggregate finish for driveways and sidewalks if specified. 4. Edge joints and sides shall with suitable tools. F. Joints 1. Expansion joints for sidewalks, driveways and barrier free ramps shall be formed using redwood. 2. Expansionjoints oints shall be placed at intervals ten times the width of the sidewalk. 3. Expansion joints shall also be placed at all intersections, sidewalks with concrete driveways, curbs, formations, other sidewalks and other adjacent old concrete work. Similar material shall be placed around all obstructions protruding into or through sidewalks or driveways. 4. All expansion joints shall be 1/2 inch in thickness. 5. Edges of all construction and expansion joints and outer edges of all sidewalks shall be finished to approximately a 1/2 inch radius with a suitable finishing tool. 6. Sidewalks shall be marked at intervals equal to the width of the walk with a marking tool. Saw cutting of joints to the required depth may be desirable on wider sidewalks and is acceptable if approved by the City 7. When sidewalk is against the curb, expansion joints shall be spaced to match those in the curb, possibly in addition to the required spacing above. G.Barrier Free Ramp 1. Furnish and install red color detectable warning surface included in Standard Product List, or approved equal. 2. Detectable warning surface shall be a minimum of 24 -inch in depth in the direction of pedestrian travel, and extend to the limit of the width of the curb ramp (exclusive of flares), the landing or the blended transition. 3. Locate detectable warning surface so that the edge nearest the curb line is at the extension of the back of the curb. 4. Detectable warning surface may be curved along the corner radius. 5. Install detectable warning surface according to manufacturer's instructions. CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised December 9, 2022 32 13 20- 6 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS, DRIVEWAYS AND BARRIER FREE RAMPS Page 6 of 6 3.5 REPAIR/RESTORATION [NOT USED] 3.6 RE -INSTALLATION [NOT USED] 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] 3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED] 3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED] 3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED] 3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED] 3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED] 3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED] 3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED] END OF SECTION Revision Log DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE 12/20/2012 D. Johnson 1.2.A.3 — Measurement and Payment for Barrier Free Ramps modified to match updated City Details 4/30/2013 F. Griffin Corrected Part 1, 1.2, A, 3, b, 1 to read; from ... square foot of Concrete Sidewalk. to ...each "Barrier Free Ramp" installed. June 5, 2018 M Owen Revised Measurement and Payment. section. April 29, 2021 M Owen 1.2 A. 4. c. Revise Barrier Free Ramp — Payment Section December 9, M Owen 1.2 A. l.c. and 1.2 A. 3. c. Clarified what is included in bid items for sidewalk and 2021 driveway, respectively December 9, M Owen 3.4 G. Remove reference to specific DWS and referred to SPL, revised to clarify 2022 limit of DWS, and revised reference to back of curb for placement of DWS. CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised December 9, 2022 32 13 73- 1 CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS Page 1 of4 SECTION 32 13 73 CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Specification for silicone joint sealing for concrete pavement and curbs. B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification 1. None. C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract 2. Division 1 - General Requirements 3. Section 32 13 13 - Concrete Paving 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. Measurement a. Measurement for this Item shall be by the linear foot of Joint Sealant completed and accepted only when specified in the Drawings to be a pay item. 2. Payment a. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item are subsidiary to the various items bid and no other compensation will be allowed, unless specifically specified on Drawings. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards 1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this Specification, unless a date is specifically cited. 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. D5893, Standard Specification for Cold Applied, Single Component, Chemically Curing Silicone Joint Sealant for Portland Cement Concrete Pavements 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED] 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Test and Evaluation Reports 1. Prior to installation, furnish certification by an independent testing laboratory that the silicone joint sealant meets the requirements of this Section. CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised December 20, 2012 321373-2 CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS Page 2 of 4 2. Submit verifiable documentation that the manufacturer of the silicone joint sealant has a minimum 2 -year demonstrated, documented successful field performance with concrete pavement silicone joint sealant systems. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED] 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED] 1.11 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not apply joint sealant when the air and pavement temperature is less than 35 degrees F B. Concrete surface must be clean, dry and frost free. C. Do not place sealant in an expansion -type joint if surface temperature is below 35 degrees F or above 90 degrees F. 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS [NOT USED] 2.2 MATERIALS & EQUIPMENT A. Materials 1. Joint Sealant: ASTM D5893. 2. Joint Filler, Backer Rod and Breaker Tape a. The joint filler sop shall be of a closed cell expanded polyethylene foam backer rod and polyethylene bond breaker tape of sufficient size to provide a tight seal. b. The back rod and breaker tape shall be installed in the saw -cut joint to prevent the joint sealant from flowing to the bottom of the joint. c. The backer rod and breaker tape shall be compatible with the silicone joint sealant and no bond or reaction shall occur between them. 2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED] 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED] 3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED] 3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED] CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised December 20, 2012 321373-3 CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS Page 3 of 4 3.4 INSTALLATION A. General 1. The silicone sealant shall be cold applied. 2. Allow concrete to cure for a minimum of 7 days to ensure it has sufficient strength prior to sealing joints. 3. Perform joint reservoir saw cutting, cleaning, bond breaker installation, and joint sealant placement in a continuous sequence of operations. 4. See Drawings for the various joint details with their respective dimensions. B. Equipment 1. Provide all necessary equipment and keep equipment in a satisfactory working condition. 2. Equipment shall be inspected by the City prior to the beginning of the work. 3. The minimum requirements for construction equipment shall be as follows: a. Concrete Saw. The sawing equipment shall be adequate in size and power to complete the joint sawing to the required dimensions. b. Air Compressors. The delivered compressed air shall have a pressure in excess of 90 psi and shall be suitable for the removal of all free water and oil from the compressed air. c. Extrusion Pump. The output shall be capable of supplying a sufficient volume of sealant to the joint. d. Injection Tool. This mechanical device shall apply the sealant uniformly into the joint. e. Sandblaster. The design shall be for commercial use with air compressors as specified in this Section. f. Backer Rod Roller and Tooling Instrument. These devices shall be clean and free of contamination. They shall be compatible with the joint depth and width requirements. C. Sawing Joints: see Section 32 13 13. D. Cleaning joints 1. Dry saw in 1 direction with reverse cutting blade then sand blast. 2. Use compressed air to remove the resulting dust from the joint. Sandblast joints after complete drying. a. Attach nozzle to a mechanical aiming device so that the sand blast will be directed at an angle of 45 degrees and at a distance of 1 to 2 inches from the face of the joint. b. Sandblast both joint faces sandblasted in separate, 1 directional passes. c. When sandblasting is complete, blow-out using compressed air. d. The blow tube shall fit into the joints. 4. Check the blown joint for residual dust or other contamination. a. If any dust or contamination is found, repeat sandblasting and blowing until the joint is cleaned. b. Do not use solvents to remove stains and contamination. 5. Place the bond breaker and sealant in the joint immediately upon cleaning. 6. Bond Breaker Rod and Tape: install in the cleaned joint prior to the application of the joint sealant. CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised December 20, 2012 321373-4 CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS Page 4 of 4 7. Do not leave open, cleaned joints unsealed overnight. E. Joint Sealant 1. Apply the joint sealant upon placement of the bond breaker rod and tape, using the mechanical injection tool. 2. Do not seal joints unless they are clean and dry. 3. Remove and discard excess sealant left on the pavement surface. a. Do not excess use to seal the joints. 4. The pavement surface shall present a clean final condition as determined by City. 5. Do not allow traffic on the fresh sealant until it becomes tack -free. F. Approval of Joints 1. The City may request a representative of the sealant manufacturer to be present at the job site at the beginning of the final cleaning and sealing of joints. a. The representative shall demonstrate to the Contractor and the City the acceptable method for sealant installation. b. The representative shall approve the clean, dry joints before the sealing operation commences. 3.5 REPAIR/RESTORATION [NOT USED] 3.6 RE -INSTALLATION [NOT USED] 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] 3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED] 3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED] 3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED] 3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED] 3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED] 3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED] 3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED] END OF SECTION Revision Log DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised December 20, 2012 321723-1 PAVEMENT MARKINGS Page 1 of 12 1 2 3 PART1- GENERAL 4 1.1 SUMMARY SECTION 32 17 23 PAVEMENT MARKINGS 5 A.Section Includes: 6 1. Pavement Markings 7 a. Thermoplastic, hot -applied, spray (HAS) pavement markings 8 b. Thermoplastic, hot -applied, extruded (HAE) pavement markings 9 c. Preformed polymer tape 10 d. Preformed heat -activated thermoplastic tape 11 e. Preformed Contrast Markings 12 2. Raised markers 13 3. Work zone markings 14 4. Removal of pavement markings and markers 15 B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification 16 1. None. 17 C.Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 18 1. Division 0 —Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract 19 2. Division 1 — General Requirements 20 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 21 A.Measurement and Payment 22 1. Pavement Markings 23 a. Measurement 24 1) Measurement for this Item shall be per linear foot of material placed. 25 b. Payment 26 1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item 27 and measured as provided under "Measurement" shall be paid for at the unit 28 price bid per linear foot of "Pvmt Marking" installed for: 29 a) Various Widths 30 b) Various Types 31 c) Various Materials 32 d) Various Colors 33 c. The price bid shall include: 34 1) Installation of Pavement Marking 35 2) Glass beads, when required 36 3) Surface preparation 37 4) Clean-up 38 5) Testing (when required) 39 2. Legends 40 a. Measurement 41 1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each Legend installed. CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised June 10, 2022 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 321723-2 PAVEMENT MARKINGS Page 2 of 12 b. Payment 1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item shall be paid for at the unit price bid per each "Legend" installed for: a) Various types b) Various applications c. The price bid shall include: 1) Installation of Pavement Marking 2) Glass beads, when required 3) Surface preparation 4) Clean-up 5) Testing 3. Preformed Thermoplastic — Contrast Markings a. Measurement 1) Measurement for this Item shall be per linear foot of material placed or per each for legend items b. Payment 1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item shall be paid for at the unit price bid per linear foot or per each for legends for "Preformed Thermoplastic — Contract Markings" installed for: a) Various Widths b) Various Types c) Various Applications c. The price bid shall include: 1) Installation of Contrast Markings, including solid black and solid white or yellow material as preformed 2) Railroad Legend shall include X and RR legend markings and three 24" stop bars 3) Surface preparation 4) Clean-up 5) Testing 4. Raised Markers a. Measurement 1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each Raised Marker installed. b. Payment 1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item shall be paid for at the unit price bid per each "Raised Marker" installed for: a) Various types c. The price bid shall include: 1) Installation of Raised Markers 2) Surface preparation 3) Clean-up 4) Testing 5. Work Zone Tab Markers a. Measurement 1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each Tab Marker installed. b. Payment 1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item shall be paid for at the unit price bid per each "Tab Marker" installed for: a) Various types CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised June 10, 2022 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 321723-3 PAVEMENT MARKINGS Page 3 of 12 c. The price bid shall include: 1) Installation of Tab Work Zone Markers 6. Fire Lane Markings a. Measurement 1) Measurement for this Item shall be per the linear foot. b. Payment 1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under "Measurement" shall be paid for at the unit price bid per linear foot of "Fire Lane Marking" installed. c. The price bid shall include: 1) Surface preparation 2) Clean-up 3) Testing 7. Pavement Marking Removal a. Measurement 1) Measure for this Item shall be per linear foot. b. Payment 1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under "Measurement" shall be paid for at the unit price bid per linear foot of "Remove Pvmt Marking" performed for: a) Various widths c. The price bid shall include: 1) Removal of Pavement Markings 2) Clean-up 8. Raised Marker Removal a. Measurement 1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each Pavement Marker removed. b. Payment 1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item shall be paid for at the unit price bid per each "Remove Raised Marker" performed. c. The price bid shall include: 1) Removal of each Marker 2) Disposal of removed materials 3) Clean-up 9. Legend Removal a. Measurement 1) Measure for this Item shall be per each Legend removed. b. Payment 1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under "Measurement" shall be paid for at the unit price bid per linear foot of "Remove Legend" performed for: a) Various types b) Various applications c. The price bid shall include: 1) Removal of Pavement Markings 2) Clean-up CITY OF FORT WORTH STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised June 10, 2022 Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility C01239 321723-4 PAVEMENT MARKINGS Page 4 of 12 1 1.3 REFERENCES 2 3 4 5 6 A.Reference Standards 1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this Specification, unless a date is specifically cited. 2. Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD), 2011 Edition 7 a. Part 3, Markings 8 3. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) 9 a. Standard Specification for Glass Beads Used in Pavement Markings, M 247-09 10 4. Federal Highway Administration (FHWA) 11 a. 23 CFR Part 655, FHWA Docket No. FHWA-2009-0139 12 5. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) 13 a. DMS-4200, Pavement Markers (Reflectorized) 14 b. DMS-4300, Traffic Buttons 15 c. DMS-8220, Hot Applied Thermoplastic 16 d. DMS-8240, Permanent Prefabricated Pavement Markings 17 e. DMS-824 1, Removable Prefabricated Pavement Markings 18 f. DMS-8242, Temporary Flexible -Reflective Road Marker Tabs 19 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED] 20 1.5 SUBMITTALS 21 A.Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00. 22 B. All submittals shall be approved by the City prior to delivery and/or fabrication for 23 specials. 24 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 25 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 26 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 27 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED] 28 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 29 A. Storage and Handling Requirements 30 1. The Contractor shall secure and maintain a location to store the material in 31 accordance with Section 01 50 00. 32 1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 33 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] 34 PART 2- PRODUCTS 35 2.1 OWNER -SUPPLIED PRODUCTS 36 A.New Products 37 1. Refer to Drawings to determine if there are owner -supplied products for the Project. CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised June 10, 2022 321723-5 PAVEMENT MARKINGS Page 5 of 12 1 2.2 MATERIALS 2 A.Manufacturers 3 1. Only the manufacturers as listed in the City's Standard Products List will be 4 considered as shown in Section 01 60 00 01 61 00. 6 5 a. The manufacturer must comply with this Specification and related Sections. 6 2. Any product that is not listed on the Standard Products List is considered a 7 substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00. 8 B.Materials 9 1. Pavement Markings 10 a. Thermoplastic, hot applied, spray 11 1) Refer to Drawings and City Standard Detail Drawings for width of 12 longitudinal lines. 13 2) Product shall be especially compounded for traffic markings. 14 3) When placed on the roadway, the markings shall not be slippery when wet, 15 lift from pavement under normal weather conditions nor exhibit a tacky 16 exposed surface. 17 4) Cold ductility of the material shall permit normal road surface expansion 18 and contraction without chipping or cracking. 19 5) The markings shall retain their original color, dimensions and placement 20 under normal traffic conditions at road surface temperatures of 158 degrees 21 Fahrenheit and below. 22 6) Markings shall have uniform cross-section, clean edges, square ends and no 23 evidence of tracking. 24 7) The density and quality of the material shall be uniform throughout the 25 markings. 26 8) The thickness shall be uniform throughout the length and width of the 27 markings. 28 9) The markings shall be 95 percent free of holes and voids, and free of 29 blisters for a minimum of 60 days after application. 30 10) The material shall not deteriorate by contact with sodium chloride, calcium 31 chloride or other chemicals used to prevent roadway ice or because of the oil 32 content of pavement markings or from oil droppings or other effects of traffic. 33 11) The material shall not prohibit adhesion of other thermoplastic markings if, 34 at some future time, new markings are placed over existing material. 35 a) New material shall bond itself to the old line in such a manner that no 36 splitting or separation takes place. 37 12) The markings placed on the roadway shall be completely retroreflective 38 both internally and externally with traffic beads and shall exhibit uniform 39 retro-directive reflectance. 40 13) Traffic beads 41 a) Manufactured from glass 42 b) Spherical in shape 43 c) Essentially free of sharp angular particles 44 d) Essentially free of particles showing cloudiness, surface scoring or 45 surface scratching 46 e) Water white in color 47 f) Applied at a uniform rate CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised June 10, 2022 321723-6 PAVEMENT MARKINGS Page 6 of 12 1 g) Meet or exceed Specifications shown in AASHTO Standard 2 Specification for Glass Beads Used in Pavement Markings, AASHTO 3 Designation: M 247-09. 4 b. Thermoplastic, hot applied, extruded 5 1) Product shall be especially compounded for traffic markings 6 2) When placed on the roadway, the markings shall not be slippery when wet, 7 lift from pavement under normal weather conditions nor exhibit a tacky 8 exposed surface. 9 3) Cold ductility of the material shall permit normal road surface expansion 10 and contraction without chipping or cracking. 11 4) The markings shall retain their original color, dimensions and placement 12 under normal traffic conditions at road surface temperatures of 158 degrees 13 Fahrenheit and below. 14 5) Markings shall have uniform cross-section, clean edges, square ends and no 15 evidence of tracking. 16 6) The density and quality of the material shall be uniform throughout the 17 markings. 18 7) The thickness shall be uniform throughout the length and width of the 19 markings. 20 8) The markings shall be 95 percent free of holes and voids, and free of 21 blisters for a minimum of 60 days after application. 22 9) The minimum thickness of the marking, as measured above the plane 23 formed by the pavement surface, shall not be less than 1/8 inch in the center 24 of the marking and 3/32 inch at a distance of %2 inch from the edge. 25 10) Maximum thickness shall be 3/16 inch. 26 11) The material shall not deteriorate by contact with sodium chloride, calcium 27 chloride or other chemicals used to prevent roadway ice or because of the oil 28 content of pavement markings or from oil droppings or other effects of traffic. 29 12) The material shall not prohibit adhesion of other thermoplastic markings if, 30 at some future time, new markings are placed over existing material. New 31 material shall bond itself to the old line in such a manner that no splitting or 32 separation takes place. 33 13) The markings placed on the roadway shall be completely retroreflective 34 both internally and externally with traffic beads and shall exhibit uniform 35 retro-directive reflectance. 36 14) Traffic beads 37 a) Manufactured from glass 38 b) Spherical in shape 39 c) Essentially free of sharp angular particles 40 d) Essentially free of particles showing cloudiness, surface scoring or 41 surface scratching 42 e) Water white in color 43 f) Applied at a uniform rate 44 g) Meet or exceed Specifications shown in AASHTO Standard 45 Specification for Glass Beads Used in Pavement Markings, AASHTO 46 Designation: M 247-09. 47 c. Preformed Polymer Tape 48 1) Material shall meet or exceed the Specifications for SWARCO Director 35, 49 3M High Performance Tape Series 3801 ES, or approved equal. 50 d. Preformed Heat -Activated Thermoplastic Tape CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised June 10, 2022 321723-7 PAVEMENT MARKINGS Page 7 of 12 1 1) Material shall meet or exceed the Specifications for HOT Tape Brand 0.125 2 mil preformed thermoplastic or approved equal. 3 2. Raised Markers 4 a. Markers shall meet the requirements of the Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic 5 Control Devices. 6 b. Non -reflective markers shall be Type Y (yellow body) and Type W (white body) 7 round ceramic markers and shall meet or exceed the TxDOT Specification 8 DMS-4300. 9 c. The reflective markers shall be plastic, meet or exceed the TxDOT Specification 10 DMS-4200 for high -volume retroreflective raised markers and be available in 11 the following types: 12 1) Type I -C, white body, 1 face reflects white 13 2) Type II -A -A, yellow body, 2 faces reflect amber 14 3) Type II -C -R, white body, 1 face reflects white, the other red 15 16 3. Work Zone Markings 17 a. Tabs 18 1) Temporary flexible -reflective roadway marker tabs shall meet requirements 19 of TxDOT DMS-8242, "Temporary Flexible -Reflective Road Marker Tabs." 20 2) Removable markings shall not be used to simulate edge lines. 21 3) No segment of roadway open to traffic shall remain without permanent 22 pavement markings for a period greater than 14 calendar days. 23 b. Raised Markers 24 1) All raised pavement markers shall meet the requirements of DMS-4200. 25 c. Striping 26 1) Work Zone striping shall meet or exceed the TxDOT Specification DMS- 27 8200. 28 2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED] 29 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL 30 A.Performance 31 1. Minimum maintained retroreflectivity levels for longitudinal markings shall meet 32 the requirements detailed in the table below for a minimum of 30 calendar days. Posted Speed (mph) < 30 35-50 255 2 -lane roads with centerline markings only (1) n/a 100 250 All other roads (2) n/a 50 100 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 (1) Measured at standard 30-m geometry in units of mcd/m`/lux. (2) Exceptions: A. When raised reflective pavement markings (RRPMs) supplement or substitute for a longitudinal line, minimum pavement marking retroreflectivity levels are not applicable as long as the RRPMs are maintained so that at least 3 are visible from any position along that line during nighttime conditions. B. When continuous roadway lighting assures that the markings are visible, minimum pavement marking retroreflectivity levels are not applicable. CITY OF FORT WORTH STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised June 10, 2022 Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility C01239 321723-8 PAVEMENT MARKINGS Page 8 of 12 PART 3- EXECUTION 2 3.1 EXAMINATION [NOT USED] 3 3.2 PREPARATION 4 A.Pavement Conditions 5 1. Roadway surfaces shall be free of dirt, grease, loose and/or flaking existing 6 markings and other forms of contamination. 7 2. New Portland cement concrete surfaces shall be cleaned sufficiently to remove the 8 curing membrane. 9 3. Pavement to which material is to be applied shall be completely dry. 10 4. Pavement shall be considered dry, if, on a sunny day after observation for 15 11 minutes, no condensation develops on the underside of a 1 square foot piece of 12 clear plastic that has been placed on the pavement and weighted on the edges. 13 5. Equipment and methods used for surface preparation shall not damage the 14 pavement or present a hazard to motorists or pedestrians. 15 3.3 INSTALLATION 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 A.General 1. The materials shall be applied according to the manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Markings and markers shall be applied within temperature limits recommended by the material manufacturer, and shall be applied on clean, dry pavement having a surface temperature above 50 degrees Fahrenheit. 3. Markings that are not properly applied due to faulty application methods or being placed in the wrong position or alignment shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at the Contractor's expense. If the mistake is such that it would be confusing or hazardous to motorists, it shall be remedied the same day of notification. Notification will be made by phone and confirmed by fax. Other mistakes shall be remedied within 5 days of written notification. 4. When markings are applied on roadways open to traffic, care will be taken to ensure that proper safety precautions are followed, including the use of signs, cones, barricades, flaggers, etc. 5. Freshly applied markings shall be protected from traffic damage and disfigurement. 6. Temperature of the material must be equal to the temperature of the road surface before allowing traffic to travel on it. B. Pavement Markings 1. Thermoplastic, hot applied, spray a. This method shall be used to install and replace long lines — centerlines, lane lines, edge lines, turn lanes, and dots. b. Markings shall be applied at a 110 -mil thickness. c. Markings shall be applied at a 90 -mil thickness when placed over existing markings. d. A sealer shall be used if concrete or asphalt is older than three (3) years. e. Typical setting time shall be between 4 minutes and 10 minutes depending upon the roadway surface temperature and the humidity factor. CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised June 10, 2022 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 321723-9 PAVEMENT MARKINGS Page 9 of 12 f. Retroreflective raised markers shall be used to supplement the centerlines, lane lines, and turn lanes. Refer to City Standard Detail Drawings for placement. g. Minimum retroreflectivity of markings shall meet or exceed values shown in subparagraph 2.4.A.1 of this Specification. 2. Thermoplastic, hot applied, extruded a. This method shall be used to install and replace crosswalks and stop -lines. b. Markings shall be applied at a 125 -mil thickness. c. Minimum retroreflectivity of markings shall meet or exceed values shown in this Specification. 3. Preformed Polymer Tape a. This method shall be used to install and replace crosswalks, stop -lines, and legends. b. The applied marking shall adhere to the pavement surface with no slippage or lifting and have square ends, straight lines and clean edges. c. Minimum retroreflectivity of markings shall meet or exceed values shown in this Specification. 4. Preformed Heat -Activated Thermoplastic Tape a. This method shall be used to install and replace crosswalks, stop -lines, and legends. b. The applied marking shall adhere to the pavement surface with no slippage or lifting and have square ends, straight lines and clean edges. c. Minimum retroreflectivity of markings shall meet or exceed values shown in this Specification. C.Raised Markers 1. All permanent raised pavement markers on Portland Cement roadways shall be installed with epoxy adhesive. Bituminous adhesive is not acceptable. 2. All permanent raised pavement markers on new asphalt roadways may be installed with epoxy or bituminous adhesive. 3. A chalk line, chain or equivalent shall be used during layout to ensure that individual markers are properly aligned. All markers shall be placed uniformly along the line to achieve a smooth continuous appearance. D.Work Zone Markings 1. Work shall be performed with as little disruption to traffic as possible. 2. Install longitudinal markings on pavement surfaces before opening to traffic. 3. Maintain lane alignment traffic control devices and operations until markings are installed. 4. Install markings in proper alignment in accordance with the Texas MUTCD and as shown on the Drawings. 5. Place standard longitudinal lines no sooner than 3 calendar days after the placement of a surface treatment, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. 6. Place markings in proper alignment with the location of the final pavement markings. 7. Do not use raised pavement markers for words, symbols, shapes, or diagonal or transverse lines. CITY OF FORT WORTH STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised June 10, 2022 Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility C01239 321723-10 PAVEMENT MARKINGS Page 10 of 12 1 8. All markings shall be visible from a distance of 300 feet in daylight conditions and 2 from a distance of at least 160 feet in nighttime conditions, illuminated by low - 3 beam automobile headlight. 4 9. The daytime and nighttime reflected color of the markings must be distinctly white 5 or yellow. 6 10. The markings must exhibit uniform retroreflective characteristics. 7 11. Epoxy adhesives shall not be used to work zone markings. 8 3.4 REMOVALS 9 1. Pavement Marking and Marker Removal 10 a. The industry's best practice shall be used to remove existing pavement markings 11 and markers. 12 b. If the roadway is being damaged during the marker removal, Work shall be 13 halted until consultation with the City. 14 c. Removals shall be done in such a matter that color and texture contrast of the 15 pavement surface will be held to a minimum. 16 d. Repair damage to asphaltic surfaces, such as spalling, shelling, etc., greater than 17 '/4 inch in depth resulting from the removal of pavement markings and markers. 18 Driveway patch asphalt emulsion may be broom applied to reseal damage to 19 asphaltic surfaces. 20 e. Dispose of markers in accordance with federal, state, and local regulations. 21 f. Use any of the following methods unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. 22 1) Surface Treatment Method 23 a) Apply surface treatment at rates shown on the Drawings or as directed. 24 Place a surface treatment a minimum of 2 feet wide to cover the existing 25 marking. 26 b) Place a surface treatment, thin overlay, or microsurfacing a minimum 27 of 1 lane in width in areas where directional changes of traffic are 28 involved or in other areas as directed by the City. 29 2) Burn Method 30 a) Use an approved burning method. 31 b) For thermoplastic pavement markings or prefabricated pavement 32 markings, heat may be applied to remove the bulk of the marking material 33 prior to blast cleaning. 34 c) When using heat, avoid spalling pavement surfaces. 35 d) Sweeping or light blast cleaning may be used to remove minor residue. 36 3) Blasting Method 37 a) Use a blasting method such as water blasting, abrasive blasting, water 38 abrasive blasting, shot blasting, slurry blasting, water -injected abrasive 39 blasting, or brush blasting as approved. 40 b) Remove pavement markings on concrete surfaces by a blasting method 41 only. 42 4) Mechanical Method 43 a) Use any mechanical method except grinding. 44 b) Flail milling is acceptable in the removal of markings on asphalt and 45 concrete surfaces. 46 2. If a location is to be paved over, no additional compensation will be allowed for 47 marking or marker removal. CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised June 10, 2022 321723-11 PAVEMENT MARKINGS Page 11 of 12 1 3.5 REPAIR / RESTORATION [NOT USED] 2 3.6 RE -INSTALLATION [NOT USED] 3 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 4 A.All lines must have clean edges, square ends, and be uniform cross-section. 5 B. The density and quality of markings shall be uniform throughout their thickness. 6 C.The applied markings shall have no more than 5 percent, by area, of holes or voids and 7 shall be free of blisters. 8 3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED] 9 3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED 10 3.10 CLEANING 11 A.Contractor shall clean up and remove all loose material resulting from construction 12 operations. 13 3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED] 14 3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED] 15 3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED] 16 3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED] 17 18 19 END OF SECTION Revision Log DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE 11/22/13 S. Arnold Removed paint type marking, updated references, added sealer language 6/10/22 M Owen 1.1 A and 1.2 A — Revised to address preformed "contrast" pavement markings CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised June 10, 2022 321723-12 PAVEMENT MARKINGS Page 12 of 12 PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised June 10, 2022 MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 32 31 00 FENCES AND GATES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide all labor, materials and incidental items required to install ornamental aluminum fencing, ornamental cantilevered gates, gate operator systems, chain link fences and gates, and gate control systems at the plant perimeter and at the plant entry and exit, complete as specified herein and as indicated on the Plans. 1.02 RELATED WORK AND SPECIFICATIONS A. Section 03 30 00 — Cast -in -Place Concrete B. Division 26 — Electrical C. Division 40 - Instrumentation 1.03 REFERENCED STANDARDS A. Operator shall be UL/CSA listed. B. ASTM F 1184 - Standard Specification for Industrial and Commercial Horizontal Slide Gates. C. ASTM A513 - Standard Specification for Electric Resistance Welded Carbon and Alloy Steel Mechanical Tubing. D. ASTM A787 - Standard Specification for Electric Resistance Welded Metallic Coated Carbon Steel Mechanical Tubing. E. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. F. ASTM A500 - Standard Specification for Cold -Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. G. ASTM A392 — Zinc -Coated Steel Chain -Link Fence Fabric. H. ASTM F567 — Practice for Installation of Chain -Link Fence. I. ASTM F668 — Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) and other Organic Polymer -Coated Steel Chain -Link Fence Fabric J. ASTM F900 — Specification for Industrial and Commercial Swing gates K. ASTM F1043 — Specification for Strength and protective Coatings on Steel Industrial Chain -Link Fence Framework L. ASTM F1083- Specification for Pipe, Steel, Hot -Dipped, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) Welded, for Fence Structures M. ASTM F 1184 — Specification for Industrial and Commercial Horizontal Slide Gates APRIL 24, 2026 FENCES AND GATES COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER 3231 00- 1 MARY'S CREEK WRF 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings shall be submitted under the provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Product data in the form of Manufacturer's technical data, specifications, and installation instructions for fencing, gates, gate operators, gate operator electrical accessories, and general accessories. C. Shop drawings shall include location of fencing, gates, gate operators, loop detectors, guide rails, gate travel distance, hardware, accessories, finishes, and details. D. Wiring diagrams from Manufacturer for electrically operated gates including tie- in to gate remote control. E. Operator submittal shall contain all conduit runs, controls, and similar drawings. F. Submit a list of product installations comparable to the subject job. Include a date of product installation, installer, and owner's name and location of project. G. Submit affidavits from the manufacturer demonstrating that the gate mechanism has been tested to 200,000 cycles without breakdown. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide laborers and supervisors who are familiar with the type of construction involved and the material and techniques specified. B. Equipment shall be the product of a manufacturer having at least twenty U.S. installations of the type being proposed each with a minimum of five years of satisfactory service. C. Each operator shall bear a 316 stainless steel manufacturer's nameplate indicating the operating characteristics of the gate. D. Each operator shall bear a label indication that the operator mechanism has been tested for full power, full stress tests of all mechanical components, and electrical tests of all overload devices. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery, storage, and handling shall be in full accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1.07 EQUIPMENT WARRANTY A. Aluminum ornamental fencing under this section shall have a warranty, in accordance with the Contract Documents, for a period of ten (10) years. B. Ornamental cantilevered gates under this section shall have a warranty, in accordance with the Contract Documents, for a period of seven (7) years. C. Gate operator systems under this section shall have a warranty, in accordance with the Contract Documents, for a period of five (5) years. D. All warranty periods shall start at the date of project final completion. The costs of removal, shipment, repair, and installation by CONTACTOR shall all be FENCES AND GATES APRIL 24, 2026 3231 00-2 © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARY'S CREEK WRF included in the warranty and correction of defective work for the ornamental cantilevered gates and gate operator systems. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DECORATIVE METAL SECURITY GATE A. Materials 1. Materials shall be new and products of recognized, reputable manufacturers. Like items of materials provided hereunder shall be the end product of one manufacturer in order to achieve standardization for appearance, maintenance, and replacement. 2. Fencing and gate pickets, rails, and posts shall be manufactured from steel tubing, meeting the requirements of ASTM A500 with an in line hot dipped galvanized exterior zinc coating. 3. Gate framework shall be manufactured from Aluminum Alloy 6063-T6 or approved equal. 4. Coating system shall consist of: a. Zinc enriched epoxy primer powder coat with a thickness of 2 —4 mils and baked. All welds shall receive an additional treatment of zinc enriched epoxy primer powder coat of a thickness of 2 —4 mils. b. Polyester finish powder coat with a thickness of 2 —4 mils and baked. Finish coating shall be black in color. 5. Fence and gate posts shall be 4 -inch x 4 -inch 11 -gauge steel. All posts shall be capped with a 4 -inch squared -domed cap. 6. Fence and gate rails shall be 2 -inch x 2 -inch 14 -gauge steel. Fencing shall be constructed using two rails. 7. Fence and fence pickets shall be 3/4 -inch x 3/4 -inch 16 -gauge steel with a press point spear fmial. Pickets and fmials shall be of such construction as to prevent separation. 8. Gate frame shall be 2 -inch square aluminum alloy 6063-T6 tubing. For gates with an opening of 23'-0" to 30'-0", an additional horizontal rail shall be welded adjacent to the top member of the gate and a 2 -inch x 4 -inch bottom rail shall be used. Gates with an opening of 31'-0" and larger shall have dual top tracks welded together to form a single top member and the bottom rail shall be 2 -inch x 4 -inch. 9. Gates shall be equipped with diagonal and adjustable 3/8 -inch galvanized steel truss rods inside each panel of the gate. A single rod shall be in the first 8'-0" panel and in the last overhang panel of the gate. All intermediate 8'-0" sections shall have a diagonal rod in each direction. All splice and splice plates shall be welded. 10. Gate trucks shall be swivel -type self -aligning with 4 factory sealed lubricated bearing rollers. APRIL 24, 2026 FENCES AND GATES COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER 3231 00-3 MARY'S CREEK WRF B. Gate Schedule Gate Gate Style Gate Minimum Gate Gate Nominal Gate Quantity Location Opening Support Height' Operation Overhang Main Entry 2 Cantilevered 21'-0" 10'-0" l0'-0" Automatic and Main Exit Slide Gate Notes: 1) Exact gate height shall be adjusted for cantilevered operator so top of gate matches top of adjacent wall. C. Acceptable Manufactures: Secure -Weld Plus Ornamental Iron Fence and Secure-Trac Internal Roller Cantilever Slide Gates by Merchant Metals, Inc. 2. Approved equivalent. D. The use of a manufacturer's name and model number is for the purpose of establishing the standard of quality and general configuration desired. All listed manufacturers must meet the requirements set forth in these specifications. 2.02 GATE OPERATOR SYSTEMS A. MANUFACTURER'S standard design and construction, suitable for gates specified. Select operator size and features according to MANUFACTURER'S published data, taking into consideration size, type, weight, and construction of gates specified, as well as Project conditions and specified requirements. B. Slide Gate Operators 1. The gate operator shall be a standard slide gate operator with soft stop feature, maximum 1.5 feet per second rate of travel, 400 lbs. draw bar pull rated for gates up to 4000 lbs. The operator shall have a minimum motor of 2 horsepower. 2. Operation shall be by means of a metal rail passing between a pair of solid aluminum wheels with polyurethane treads. Operator motors shall be hydraulic and system shall not include belts, gears, pulleys, roller chains or sprockets, to transfer power from operator to gate panel. The operator shall generate a minimum horizontal pull of 400 pounds without drive wheels slipping and without distortion of strut arms. Gate panel velocity shall be a minimum of one (1) foot per second and a maximum of one -and -a -half (1- 1/2) feet per second and shall be stopped gradually to prevent shock loads to gate and operator assembly. FENCES AND GATES APRIL 24, 2026 3231 00-4 © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARY'S CREEK WRF 3. AC Power Systems a. The motor shall be continuous duty rated, totally enclosed and fan cooled. b. The motor shall be construction with open override circuitry. c. Limit switches shall be NEMA 4 capacitive proximity limit switches rated for harsh duty. Switch housing shall be one-piece and shall be of corrosion resistant thermoplastic polyester. d. Each limit switch shall contain one (1) set of single pole, double throw (SPDT) contacts. e. There shall be a flexible coupling between the motor and the hydraulic pump. f. The standard power unit shall be capable of producing a minimum of 2 peak horsepower. g. The unit shall be 480 VAC three phase voltage. h. The motor shall be of the high starting torque, continuous duty, and industrial type, protected against overload by either a thermal or current sensing overload device. 4. Hydraulic System a. Hydraulic motors shall be self-adjusting for wear compensation. b. Pump shall have full roller bearing construction. c. Hydraulic pump and drive motor shall be equipped with thrust bearings. d. The hydraulic motors shall withstand sustained pressure of 1,750 psi and continuous torque of 3,350 psi. e. One (1) disconnect means shall be provide. 1) Primary drive wheel separator. f. Hydraulic fluid shall be per MANUFACTURER'S recommendation. g. The hydraulic system shall be self-contained and shall consist of the electric motor, pump, reservoir, 2 -position 4 -way control valve, hydraulic plumbing, and two (2) hydraulic drive motor. h. The hydraulic motors shall be plumbed in a series configuration to accomplish a minimum draw force of 400 pounds, applied to the dive rail by the clamping force of the upper and lower hydraulic motor support arm spring assemblies. i. An inherent soft start / soft stop hydraulic system shall be standard. 5. Actuation and Drive Design a. The gate panel shall have a drive rigidly attached. The drive rail shall be constructed of high strength 6061-T6 aluminum extrusion. APRIL 24, 2026 FENCES AND GATES COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER 3231 00-5 MARY'S CREEK WRF b. The rail shall be friction fed through the spring -loaded, hydraulically driven wheels. c. The gate panel travel shall be controlled by travel limit switches. Remote sensing devices shall not be required to limit the travel of the gate. d. The circuit design shall provide for a 1.5 -second delay reversal of the gate panel without the reversal of the electric motor rotation. e. Change of left or right hand directional operation of the operator shall not be accomplished by reversing switches, limit switch connectors or hydraulic hose assemblies from the pump. f. The drive mechanism shall be designed and tested so as to equalize the vertical forces imposed on the drive rail during operations of the gate. g. The drive mechanism shall be designed and tested so each drive motor shaft centerline and the corresponding hydraulic motor mounting arm pivot centerline shall be in the same horizontal plane and shall be parallel to the drive rail. h. The drive motor wheels shall have a polyurethane tread and shall have a durometer hardness of 88. 6. Controller a. The gate controller shall be of rugged solid-state design. b. The MANUFACTURER shall supply two (2) sets of infrared beams, per unit supplied, designed to be interconnected with the controller and function as the primary safety device. c. The controller shall not utilize plug-in type timers and/or relays to accomplish control of the gate system. d. The gate controller shall provide the following features: 1) Auto -close timer: 0 - 600 seconds (field adjustable) 2) Maximum run timer: 0 -600 seconds (field adjustable) 3) Intermediate -open operation. 4) Right-hand or left-hand operation. 5) Single or master/slave operation. 6) Light over keypad. 7) Integral modem. e. An onboard LED shall be provided to indicate the presence of signal and shall light all inputs and outputs. Input and output terminal blocks shall be screw -type pressure lugs and shall be removable for ease of connection. All output relays shall be rated for 12 amps at 120 VAC, minimum. f. An external reset input terminal shall be provided to allow restart of the control via a remote link with the gate operator. FENCES AND GATES APRIL 24, 2026 3231 00-6 © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARY'S CREEK WRF g. The gate controller shall provide the following outputs: 1) Normally open and normally closed contacts. 2) Full -open and full -closed indication output. 3) Motor running indication output. 4) AC power failure indication output. 5) General fail indication output. h. The gate controller shall provide the following inputs: 1) 3 -button push-button operation. 2) Single button operation. 3) Infrared safety beams. 4) External voltage shutdown. 5) External reset for safety related "hard shut -downs." 6) Intermediate gate partial open. i. Input and output terminal blocks shall be isolated in separate, discreet locations. j. The gate controller shall be capable of accepting input from a wide range of additional accessories, including but not limited to: obstruction detectors, tape switches, radio controls, loop detectors, PLC's or other system controllers. k. Console shall include built-in video camera. 7. Operator Chassis/Housing a. The chassis and housing shall be fabricated from stainless steel. b. The housing shall be tested under a 1,200 -pound draw load with no deformation. All drilling and welding shall be completed prior to painting. The finish shall conform to Section PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS. 8. Emergency Operation a. Operator shall have a manual toggle -style disconnect to instantly disengage the drive wheels for manual operation. The operator shall function properly when returned to normal operating conditions without regard to the gate position. Each gate operator system shall be equipped with fire department access key boxes. Access key boxes shall be red in color, identified as fire department access box, and located in a convenient and easily noticeable location. b. Operator shall include a Siren -Operated Sensor (SOS) that detects emergency vehicle "YELP" sirens and automatically triggers gate to open. SOS shall be enclosed in a NEMA 4X housing and installed 2- 4 feet above the ground with no interference or obstacle of any kind between the sensor and approaching vehicles. 9. Acceptable Manufactures a. B & B Electromatic model XLH-20vp. APRIL 24, 2026 FENCES AND GATES COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER 3231 00-7 MARY'S CREEK WRF b. Chamberlain Sentex model HS670. c. HySecurity - SlideDriver. C. Loop Detectors 1. CONTRACTOR shall supply and install, at the location shown on the plans, multiple strands of wire embedded in the pavement on the plant side of each gate, allowing free and automatic egress from the plant when vehicles pull up to the gate. D. Keypad and Intercom System: 1. Master Access Controller a. Furnished with gooseneck post for mounting 2 keypads as specified for outdoor mounting, approximately 40 -inches and 72 -inches AFG. b. Stand alone, non -PC type controller. c. Furnished with keypad. d. Accept up to 100 entry codes (expandable to 500 with extra memory), 4 or 5 digits each, which causes output relay to command (separate) gate controller to open gate. e. Programmable delay on output to gate operator. f. Furnished with stainless steel rain -tight enclosure and stainless steel keys. g. Intercom speaker/microphone and CALL button included. h. Furnished with illumination on face of enclosure. i. Support slave keypad/access controller for nearby but unrelated gate. j. Transaction buffer for last 500 transactions, min. with RS -232 serial port for portable battery operated printer (furnished with controller) to download at the master controller location. (Both master and slave transactions available at the master.) k. Non-volatile memory. 2. Master Station Intercom/Remote Gate Controller a. Hard wired between remote stations and master station. b. Wall or desk mounted master. c. Speaker/microphone in enclosure with volume control. d. One of two LEDs at the master station flashes and an audible tone sounds when a CALL from either one of the two remote outside gate intercom stations is received; then by depressing the related acknowledge pushbutton at the master station, the talk back path is established, the LED changes from flash to steady lighted, and the audio tone ceases. Full duplex communication ensures, until the acknowledge pushbutton is depressed again to release the circuit. FENCES AND GATES APRIL 24, 2026 3231 00-8 © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARY'S CREEK WRF e. Gate OPEN momentary pushbutton for remote actuation of either one or two remote motorized gates, furnished with adjustable time delay relay, if required, to support remote gate opening and closing. f. A/C transformer and power supply furnished with unit, sufficient to power master and two remotes. E. Miscellaneous Electrical The electrical work shall consist of providing a complete and operational electrical installation as shown on the Plans and provided for in this Specification. The work includes the furnishing of materials, equipment, and all labor to provide a complete and workable electrical system. The electrical work, under this Section, includes the following: a. The installation of entry and exit gate operators. b. The installation of underground control loop detectors (in concrete pavement) with wiring to the gate operators. c. The installation of control/instrumentation wiring from junction boxes adjacent to gate operators, including conduit system, automatic control system and remote control system. The CONTRACTOR shall test gate operators using all control systems. d. The power wiring from the circuit breakers in designated power panel to the gate operators, including all conduit. 2. The drawings may not show all equipment such as junction boxes, conduit fittings, and the like. Even though such items may not be specifically mentioned or shown on the drawings, they are necessary and shall be included in the work required under these specifications. 3. The drawings show the appropriate location of equipment. The most suitable location shall be determined by actual measurement during construction. Final location shall be proposed by the CONTRACTOR and approved by the ENGINEER. 2.03 AUTOMATED BARRICADE VERTICAL GATE SYSTEM A. General Furnish and install automated barricade vertical gate system in designated field locations shown on the plans as detailed in the drawings. Furnish pair for each location such that one part of the pair services half the road width. B. Function 1. Gate must be a vertical drop type, operated by an electrical gate mechanism. The gate must meet the following requirements: a. Must withstand a wind speed of 80 mph b. Gate cannot deploy outside of the designated range and limit switches indicate at which end of travel the gate is positioned APRIL 24, 2026 FENCES AND GATES COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER 3231 00-9 MARY'S CREEK WRF c. Must have a travel range enough to provide proper positioning. The entire travel range of the gate must be accomplished in less than 30 sec. d. Mechanical and electrical burn -out protections must be provided to protect the gate mechanism when the gate meets an obstruction or power is not shut-off at the end of travel. e. Operations mode selector switches must be provided for field personnel to override the remote -control function and to operate the gates with push buttons. Manual operation of the gates must be possible at any time at by handcrank or local control panel located at the gate. The operator that performs manual override must be able to do so without changing the mechanical or electronic configuration of the modules. f. Gate local control panels must be protected by an enclosure that is intended for outdoor use. It must be constructed to provide access to limited personnel only. Enclosure of choice must also be resistant to corrosion and protect the electrical equipment against windblown dust and hazardous weather conditions. C. Materials All materials furnished, assembled, fabricated, or installed must be new, corrosion resistant, weatherproof, and in strict accordance with the details shown on the plans in the drawings. 2. Gate must be driven by an electrical motor, coupled with a two V -belts to a speed reducer gear box. The electrical motor and gear box ratio must be selected to meet project electrical voltage and phase specification, as well as opening and closing speed of operation. The gear box must be connected to the swing arm shaft through mechanical overload protection. 3. A compression system made of three of four sets of heavy-duty springs must counterweight the gate arm by pushing on two levers fixed to the spring arm shaft 4. Steel mechanical parts must be protected from corrosion by yellow dichromate electro zinc process 5. The gear box must be self-locking to provide integrated brake. Each gear box must have a hand -crank manual override to operate the gate during emergencies. 6. Lubrication will not be required at any point more often than once every 12 months. All gears, actuators pinions, and similar mechanical parts must be enclosed and running in grease. D. Gate Support Frames and Swing Arms The gate housing must be painted steel structure 3/8 -inch thick, protected against corrosion by electrophoretic-coating process. The housing must include a painted black top cover and aluminum lateral doors with locks. FENCES AND GATES APRIL 24, 2026 3231 00 - 10 © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARY'S CREEK WRF Cover and doors must be removable for maintenance. The gate housing must include a built-in anchoring plate. The dimensions of that anchoring plate must be within 26 -inch wide per 30 -inch long and be pre -drilled for four 7/8 -inch anchoring bolts. Mounting structure must be suitable, as specified by the ENGINEER. 2. All external fasteners must be stainless steel 3. All bolts, nuts, washers, braces, rivets, and brackets must be stainless steel or aluminum. Nails will not be permitted. The gate arm must consist of easily replacement modular sections of double 3 -inch aluminum rails. Truss cables must be provided based on gate length. 4. The length of the swing gate shall be no more than half of the road width on which it is installed. 5. The gate arm must provide maximum visibility and reflectivity. The gate arm must be covered on the front side (facing traffic) with high intensity reflected sheeting such as Type 3, Type 4, or equivalent. The minimum reflective sheeting surface must be 60 square inches per foot. 6. The reflective sheeting color must be alternating red and white at 13 — 14 inch intervals measured horizontally and angled at 45 -degrees or as specified by the project requirements. 7. When required, a red flashing gate LED lighting strip must be mounted on gate arm for increased visibility. The gate LED lighting must be battery powered and must continue working for a few days if main power is lost. E. Gate Communication Must be compatible with standard control units for communication and control of access control system 2. Equipped with a battery charger module, an actuator controller, a light control device, and a communication port specifically designed for the communication with the main gate system. Provide gate communication hardwater with serial converter, fiber RS -485 converter, and 902-928 MHz wireless as needed to meet the intended functionality. 3. The gate system shall be integrated into and be operable by the access control system F. Control Unit with Electrical Components The gate control box must include the following electrical components and functionalities: a. Circuit breaker and gate power control circuit for electrical motor operation b. Gate LED power management and flashing logic c. Communication interface APRIL 24, 2026 FENCES AND GATES COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER 3231 00- 11 MARY'S CREEK WRF d. Valve -regulated lead -acid battery (sealed and maintenance -free battery) with adequate charger e. DC power supply G. Miscellaneous Electrical The electrical work shall consist of providing a complete and operational electrical installation as shown on the Plans and provided for in this Specification. The work includes the furnishing of materials, equipment, and all labor to provide a complete and workable electrical system. The electrical work, under this Section, includes the following: a. The installation of entry and exit gate operators. b. The installation of underground control loop detectors (in concrete pavement) with wiring to the gate operators. c. The installation of control/instrumentation wiring from junction boxes adjacent to gate operators, including conduit system, automatic control system and remote control system. The CONTRACTOR shall test gate operators using all control systems. d. The power wiring from the circuit breakers in designated power panel to the gate operators, including all conduit. 2. The drawings may not show all equipment such as junction boxes, conduit fittings, and the like. Even though such items may not be specifically mentioned or shown on the drawings, they are necessary and shall be included in the work required under these specifications. 3. The drawings show the appropriate location of equipment. The most suitable location shall be determined by actual measurement during construction. Final location shall be proposed by the CONTRACTOR and approved by the ENGINEER. 2.04 CHAIN -LINK FENCES AND GATES A. Chain -link Fence Fabric General: Height indicated on Drawings. Comply with ASTM A 392, CLFMI CLF 2445, and requirements indicated below: a. Steel Wire Fabric: Metallic coated wire with a diameter of 0.148 inch (9 gauge). 1) Mesh Size: 2 inches. 2) Metallic (Zinc) Coating: ASTM A 392, Class II. b. Selvage: Knuckled at both selvages for fabrics less than 6 -feet high. Twisted top and knuckled bottom for fabrics 6 -feet and higher. B. Industrial Fence Framing Posts and Rails: Comply with ASTM F 1043 for framing, ASTM F 1083 for Group IC round pipe, and the following: a. Group: IA, round steel pipe, Schedule 40. FENCES AND GATES APRIL 24, 2026 3231 00 - 12 © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARY'S CREEK WRF b. Fence Height: 6 feet. c. Strength Requirement: Heavy industrial according to ASTM F 1043. d. Horizontal -Slide Gate Post: According to ASTM F 1184. e. Coating for Steel Framing: 1) Metallic coating. C. Tension Wire 1. General: Provide horizontal tension wire at top and bottom of fence fabric. If fence has a top rail, top tension wire not required. 2. Metallic -Coated Steel Wire: 0.177 -inch- diameter, marcelled tension wire complying with ASTM A 817 and ASTM A 824. D. Industrial Swing Gates 1. General: Comply with ASTM F 900 for single or double swing gate types as indicated on Drawings. a. Metal Pipe and Tubing: Galvanized steel. Comply with ASTM F 1083 and ASTM F 1043 for materials and protective coatings. 2. Frames and Bracing: Fabricate members from round, galvanized steel tubing with outside dimension and weight according to ASTM F 900 and the following: a. Gate Fabric Height: 2 inches less than adjacent fence height. b. Leaf Width: As shown on Drawings. c. Frame Members: 1) Tubular Steel: 1.90 inches round. 3. Frame Corner Construction: a. Welded or assembled with corner fittings and 5/16 -inch- diameter, adjustable truss rods for panels 5 feet wide or wider. 4. Extended Gate Posts and Frame Members: Extend gate posts and frame end members above top of chain -link fabric at both ends of gate frame 12 inches as required to attach barbed wire assemblies. 5. Hardware: Latches permitting operation from both sides of gate, two 180° hinges per leaf, center gate stop and drop rod for double gates, mechanical keepers for each gate leaf more than 5 feet wide, and hardware for padlock. E. Fittings 1. General: Comply with ASTM F 626. 2. Finish: a. Metallic Coating for Pressed Steel or Cast Iron: Not less than 2.0 oz. /sq. ft. zinc. APRIL 24, 2026 FENCES AND GATES COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER 3231 00- 13 MARY'S CREEK WRF b. Aluminum: Mill finish. F. Barbed Wire Zinc -Coated Steel Barbed Wire: Comply with ASTM A 121; 2 -point round barbs spaced not more than 5 inches o.c. G. Cast -in -Place Concrete Materials: Portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I aggregates complying with ASTM C 33, and potable water. a. Concrete Mixes: Normal -weight concrete with not less than 3000 -psi compressive strength (28 days), 3 -inch slump, and 1 -inch maximum size aggregate. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF SECURITY GATE A. Submit two copies of manufacturer's installation instructions for this specific project. B. Install gate operator in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions, current at the time of installation. Coordinate locations of operators with contract drawings; other trades and shop drawings. C. Space posts at dimensions indicated in the shop drawings. Attach gate to concrete posts using bolt on panel hangers/brackets supplied by the manufacturer. D. Avoid unnecessary cutting, drilling, and welding of prefinished fence panels. If necessary to cut, drill, weld, or otherwise modify panels due to field conditions, repair factory finish as outlined below. Touch-up paint any necessary areas. The manufacturer shall provide touch-up paint and primer. E. Make sure that gate is operating smoothly under manual conditions before installation of gate operators. Do not proceed if gate is binding or not properly aligned. Test gate operator through ten full cycles and adjust for operation without binding, scraping, or uneven motion. Test limit switches for proper gate alignment. F. Contractor shall remove unused material, level uneven areas due to excavations created by fence installations. G. Set gate posts plumb, in concrete footings with top of footing 2 inches above finished grade. Slope top for water runoff. Footings are to be 36 inches deep minimum unless otherwise indicated on the drawings and are to be 18 inches in diameter minimum. H. Test that gate is operating smoothly under manual conditions before installation of gate operators. Do not proceed if gate is binding or not properly aligned. I. Test gate operator through ten full cycles and adjust for operation without binding, scraping, or uneven motion. Test limit switches for proper gate position. FENCES AND GATES APRIL 24, 2026 3231 00 - 14 © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARY'S CREEK WRF J. Leave systems complete, smoothly operating, fully adjusted, and ready for OWNER's use. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF CHAIN LINK FENCE AND GATES A. General: Install chain -link fencing to comply with ASTM F 567 and more stringent requirements specified. B. Post Excavation: Drill or hand -excavate holes for posts to diameters and spacing's indicated, in firm, undisturbed soil. C. Post Setting: Set posts in concrete at indicated spacing into firm, undisturbed soil. D. Concrete Fill: Place concrete around posts to dimensions indicated and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Protect aboveground portion of posts from concrete splatter. E. Terminal Posts: Locate terminal end, corner, and gate posts per ASTM F 567 and terminal pull posts at changes in horizontal or vertical alignment. F. Line Posts: Space line posts uniformly at 10 feet o.c., unless otherwise shown on Drawings. G. Post Bracing and Intermediate Rails: Install according to ASTM F 567. Install braces at end and gate posts and at both sides of corner and pull posts. H. Tension Wire: Install according to ASTM F 567, maintaining plumb position and alignment of fencing. I. Top Rail: When indicated on Drawings, install according to ASTM F 567. J. Bottom Rails: When indicated on Drawings, install, spanning between posts. K. Chain -Link Fabric: Apply fabric to outside of enclosing framework. Leave 2 inches between finish grade or surface and bottom selvage, unless otherwise indicated. L. Tie Wires: Attach wire per ASTM F 626. Bend ends of wire to minimize hazard to individuals and clothing. M. Fasteners: Install nuts for tension bands and carriage bolts on the side of the fence opposite the fabric side. Peen ends of bolts or score threads to prevent removal of nuts. N. Privacy Slats: When indicated on Drawings install slats in direction indicated, securely locked in place. O. Barbed Wire: When indicated on Drawings, installed barbed wire uniformly spaced, angled toward security side of fence. Pull wire taut and install securely to extension arms and secure to end post or terminal arms. P. Install gates according to manufacturer's written instructions, level, plumb, and secure for full opening without interference. Attach fabric as for fencing. Attach hardware using tamper -resistant or concealed means. Install ground -set items in concrete for anchorage. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and lubricate where necessary. APRIL 24, 2026 FENCES AND GATES COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER 3231 00- 15 MARY'S CREEK WRF END OF SECTION FENCES AND GATES APRIL 24, 2026 3231 00 - 16 © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRF SECTION 32 84 00 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE A. Furnish all work and materials, appliances, tools, equipment, facilities, transportation, and services necessary for and incidental to performing all operations in connection with the installation of underground sprinkler irrigation system complete, as shown on drawings and/or specified herein. When the term "Contractor" is used in this section, it shall refer to the irrigation Subcontractor. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The Contractor shall warranty material and workmanship for one (1) year after final acceptance including repair and replacement of defective materials, workmanship, and repair of backfill settlement. 1.3 WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE A. Maintenance during warranty shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following: 1. Adjustment of sprinkler height and plumb to compensate for settlement and/or plant growth. 2. Backfilling of all trenches. 3. Adjustment of head coverage (arc of spray) as necessary. 4. Unstopping heads plugged by foreign material. 5. Adjustment of controller as necessary to ensure proper sequence and watering time. 6. All maintenance necessary to keep the system in good operating order. Repair of damage caused by vandals, other contractors or weather conditions shall be considered extra to these specifications. B. Warranty and maintenance after final acceptance does not include alterations as necessitated by re -landscaping, re -grading, addition of trees or the addition and/or changes in sidewalks, walls, driveways, etc. C. Maintenance shall continue for one (1) month after final acceptance to allow for adjustments, repair and scheduling. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings or manufacturer's "cut sheet" for each type of sprinkler head, pipe, controller, valves, check valve assemblies, valve boxes, wire, conduit, fittings, and all other types of fixtures and equipment proposed to install on the job. The submittal shall include the manufacturer's name, model number, equipment capacity, and manufacturer's installation recommendation, if applicable, for each proposed item. March 29, 2026 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM ©COPYRIGHT 2026 CCA LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTS 32 84 00-1 MARYS CREEK WRF B. No partial submittal will be accepted, and submittals shall be neatly bound into a brochure and logically organized. After the submittal has been approved, substitutions will not be allowed except by written consent of the Owner's Authorized Representative. C. Shop drawings shall be provided, upon request, for any special custom fabrication or coordination with other trades. 1.5 "APPROVED EQUAL" SUBSTITUTIONS A. Where items on the plans are specified by a manufacturer's brand name and catalog number, followed by the phrase "or approved equal". This is not intended to unduly restrict competitive procurements or bidding but is done to assure a minimum standard of quality which is believed to be best for the item specified and to match existing equipment. 1.6 CODES/PERMITS A. All work under this section shall comply with the provisions of these Specifications, as illustrated on the accompanying drawings, or as directed by the Owner and shall satisfy all applicable local codes, ordinances, or regulations of the governing bodies and all authorities having jurisdiction over this Project. B. Installation of equipment and materials shall be done in accordance with requirements of the National Electrical Code, City Plumbing Code, and standard plumbing procedures. The drawings and these Specifications are intended to comply with all the necessary rules and regulations; however, some discrepancies may occur, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Owner's Authorized Representative in writing of the discrepancies and apply for an interpretation. Should the discovery and notification occur after the execution of a contract, any additional work required for compliance with the regulations shall be paid for as covered by these Contract documents. C. The Contractor shall give all necessary notices, obtain all permits, and pay all costs in connection with his work; file with all governmental departments having jurisdiction; obtain all required certificates of inspection for his work and deliver to the Owner. D. The Contractor shall include in the work any labor, materials, services, apparatus, or drawings in order to comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules, and regulations whether or not shown on the drawings and/or specified. E. The installation of the irrigation system shall be made by an individual or firm duly licensed under Article No. 8751 VTCS, Titled "Licensed Irrigators Act", S.B. No. 259 as passed by the 66th Texas Legislature. 1.7 EXISTING UTILITIES A. Locations and elevations of various utilities included with the scope of this work have been obtained from the most reliable sources available and should serve as a general guide without guarantee to accuracy. The Contractor shall examine the Site and verify to his own satisfaction the locations and elevation of all utilities and availability of utilities and services required. The Contractor shall inform himself as to their relation to the work and the submission of bids shall be deemed as evidence thereof. The Contractor shall repair at his own expense, and to the satisfaction of the Owner, for damage to any utility shown or not shown on the plans. LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM March 29, 2026 328400-2 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 CCA LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTS MARYS CREEK WRF B. Should utilities not shown on the plans be found during excavations, Contractor shall promptly notify the Owner for instructions as to further action. C. Contractor shall make necessary adjustments in the layout as may be required to connect to existing stub -outs, should such stub- outs not be located exactly as shown and as may be required to work around existing work, at no increase in cost to the Owner. All such work will be recorded on record drawings and turned over to the Owner prior to final acceptance. 1.8 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Record dimensioned locations and depths for each of the following: 1. Point of connection. 2. Sprinkler pressure line routing @rovide dimensions for each 100 lineal feet (maximum) along each routing, and for each change in directions). 3. Gate valves. 4. Sprinkler control valves (buried only). 5. Control wire routing. 6. Other related items as may be directed by the Owner's Authorized Representative. B. Locate all dimensions from two (2) permanent points (buildings, monuments, sidewalks, curbs, or pavements). C. Record all changes which are made from the Contract drawings, including changes in the pressure and non -pressure lines. D. Record all required information on a set of reproducible drawing files. E. Maintain information daily. Keep Contract drawings at the Worksite at all times and available for review by the Owner's representative. 1.9 CONTROLLER CHARTS A. Do not prepare charts until record drawings have been approved by the Owner's representative. B. Provide one (1) controller chart for each automatic controller installed. 1. Chart may be a reproduction of the record drawing, if the scale permits fitting within the controller door. If photo reduction prints are required, keep reduction to maximum size possible to retain full legibility. 2. Chart shall be blackline print of the actual system, showing the area covered by that controller. C. Identify the area of coverage of each remote control valve, using a distinctly different pastel color, drawn over the entire area of coverage. D. Following approval of charts by the Owner's representative, they shall be hermetically sealed between two (2) layers of 20 mil. thick plastic sheet (laminated). E. Charts must be completed and approved prior to final acceptance of the irrigation system. 1.10 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Provide individual bound manuals detailing operating and maintenance requirements for irrigation systems. March 29, 2026 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM ©COPYRIGHT 2026 CCA LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTS 32 84 00- 3 MARYS CREEK WRF B. Manuals shall be delivered to the Owner's representative for review and approval no later than ten (10) days prior to completion of work. Revise manual as required. C. Provide descriptions of all installed materials and systems in sufficient detail to permit maintenance personnel to understand, operate, and maintain the equipment. D. Provide the following in each manual: 1. Index sheet, stating Irrigation Contractor's name, address, telephone number, and name of person to contact. 2. Duration of guarantee period. 3. Equipment list providing the following for each item: a. Manufacturer's name. b. Make and model number. c. Name and address of local manufacturer's representative. d. Spare parts list in detail. e. Detailed operating and maintenance instructions of major equipment. 4. Recommended programs for watering by season. 1.11 CHECKLIST A. Provide a signed and dated checklist and deliver to the Owner's representative prior to final acceptance of the work. B. Use the following format: 1. Plumbing permits: if none required, so note. 2. Material approvals: approved by and date. 3. Pressure line tests: by whom and date. 4. Record Drawings: received by and date. 5. Controller charts: received by and date. 6. Materials furnished: received by and date. 7. Operation and maintenance manuals: received by and date. 8. System and equipment operation instructions: received by and date. 9. Manufacturer's warranties if required: received by and date. 10. Written guarantee: received by and date. 11. Lowering of heads in lawn areas: if incomplete, so state. 1.12 ELECTRICAL POWER A. Electric power shall be provided within five feet of each controller location by the G.C. The irrigation contractor shall provide final hardwire connection. 1.13 WATER FOR TESTING A. Unless noted otherwise on the plans or elsewhere, furnish all water necessary for testing, flushing, and jetting. LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM March 29, 2026 328400-4 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 CCA LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTS MARYS CREEK WRF 1.14 BORINGS, SLEEVES AND ELECTRICAL CONDUITS A. Sleeves and electrical conduits are the responsibility of the Irrigation Contractor to install prior to paving or related construction and should be installed as noted on the drawings and specifications. Contractors shall be responsible for locating all sleeves and conduits at no additional cost to the Authority. Borings under existing paving will be required where noted on the drawings and shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. Borings shall be a minimum of eighteen (18) inch depth and new pipes shall be incased in PVC sleeves as noted on the plans. 1.15 SPARE PARTS A. The Contractor shall supply the Owner with five (5) spray heads, one (1) for each head designated on the plan. The Contractor shall supply one (1) additional key and hose swivel for every six (6) quick couplers (one (1) minimum). PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Unless otherwise noted on the plans, all materials shall be new and unused. The irrigation equipment catalog numbers used for reference in these Specifications are to establish minimum quality standards and may be substituted with an "approved equal" as outlined in Paragraph 1.5 of this section. 2.2 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPE (PVC PIPE) PVC pipe manufactured in accordance with ASTM Standards noted herein. A. Marking and Identification: PVC pipe shall be continuously and permanently marked with following information: Manufacturer's name, size, type of pipe, and material, SDR number, Product Standard number, and the NSF (National Sanitation Foundation) Seal. B. PVC pipe fittings: Shall be of the same material as the PVC pipe specified and compatible with PVC pipe furnished. Solvent weld type fittings shall be Schedule 40. C. PVC Pipe: Shall be as noted on the plans. Sizes up to three (3) inch diameter shall be solvent weld type. Pipe sizes of four (4) inch diameter and larger shall be o -ring gasket type with ductile iron gasket fittings. D. Pipe sleeves: Shall be as noted on the plans. 2.3 SWING JOINTS A. Swing joints shall be O-ring seal type, Lasco or approved equal. 2.4 WIRE AND SPLICES A. Valve wire shall be as noted on the plans, minimum 14 gauge with type OF insulation which is Underwriters Laboratory approved for direct underground burial when used in a National Electrical Code Lass II Circuit (30 volts AC or less) as per Articles 725 and 300. Voltage drop shall be taken into consideration. March 29, 2026 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM ©COPYRIGHT 2026 CCA LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTS 32 84 00- 5 MARYS CREEK WRF B. All connectors shall be UL listed, rated 600 volt, for PVC insulated wire. No wire splices shall be buried. 2.5 QUICK COUPLING VALVES A. Quick coupling valves shall be composed of a bronze cast body with a purple, (NP) cover. B. The valve shall accept a single lug three-quarter (3/4) inch bronze valve key for operation unless noted otherwise. 2.6 MANUAL VALVES A. Unless noted otherwise, manual valves two and one-half (2-1/2) inches and smaller shall be all brass, globe type with composition disc rated at 150 pounds W.O.G. Manual valve size four (4) inches and larger shall be Kennedy cast iron type. B. All valves shall have wheel handles unless cross handles are called for on the plan. 2.7 VALVE BOXES A. A box shall be provided for all valves. B. Valve boxes shall be made of high -strength plastic suitable for turf irrigation purposes. C. Boxes shall be suitable in size and configuration for the operability and adjustment of the valve. D. Extension sections will be used as appropriate to the depth of piping. E. All valve box covers shall bolt down or have locking mechanisms and shall be colored green or black as selected by the Contracting Officer, or purple where required, as noted. 2.8 POP-UP SPRAY, BUBBLERS AND ROTARY HEADS A. Sprinkler heads are specified on the drawings. Spray heads shall have a minimum four (4) inch pop-up. B. The sprinkler body and all related parts shall be plastic cycolac or polycarbonate. They shall have a spring retraction for positive return action of the pop-up nozzle. C. The spring for retraction and the adjustable nozzle screw shall be made of corrosion resistant materials. 2.9 DRIP TUBE WITH PRESSURE COMPENSATING EMITTERS Drip tube shall be of the manufacturer and model as noted on the plans. Pressure compensating emitters with internal check valves are required unless noted otherwise. A. Barbed Insert Fittings: 1. All barbed insert fittings shall be constructed of molded, ultra -violet -resistant plastic having nominal inside dimension (I.D.) of 0.24 inch. 2. Each fitting shall have a minimum of two (2) ridges or barbs per outlet with a raised barb nearest the fitting outlet. All fittings shall be of one (1) manufacturer and shall be available in one (1) of the following end configurations: a. Barbed insert fittings, or b. Male pipe threads (MPT) with barbed insert fittings, or LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM March 29, 2026 328400-6 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 CCA LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTS MARYS CREEK WRF c. Female pipe threads (FPT) with barbed insert fittings. 2.10 ELECTRICAL CONTROLLER A. The electric irrigation controller shall be as noted on the plans. The system may be designed to operate multiple section valves at a time, per controller unless otherwise noted. B. Power source shall be 1 10v A.C. Output for operation of companion solenoid actuated valves shall be 24 volts 60 Cycle AC. 2.11 ELECTRIC REMOTE CONTROL VALVES A. Electric remote control valves shall have plastic bodies and covers and shall be globe -type diaphragm valves of normally closed design. The valves are specified on the drawings. B. Operation shall be accomplished by means of integrally mounted heavy-duty 24-V solenoid complying with National Electrical Code, Class II Circuit. Solenoid coil shall be potted in epoxy resin within a plastic coated stainless steel housing. Solenoids shall be completely waterproof, suitable for direct underground burial. C. A flow stem adjustment shall be included in each valve. 2.12 BACKFLOW PREVENTER A. An approved backflow prevention device is required, as noted on the plans. The device shall include all materials as required by the local municipality and shall be inspected accordingly. 2.13 TEMPERATURE SENSORS AND RAIN SENSORS A. Rain and freeze sensors shall be provided and installed as noted on the plans. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Design Pressure: This irrigation system has been designed to operate with a minimum static inlet water pressure as indicated on the drawings. The Contractor shall take a pressure reading prior to beginning construction. If the pressure reading is 5% less than above, the Contractor shall notify the Owner's Representative. B. Contractor Responsibility: The Contractor shall not willfully install the irrigation system as shown on the drawings when it is obvious in the field that obstructions, grade differences or discrepancies in equipment usage, area dimensions or water pressure exist that might not have been considered in the engineering. Such obstructions or differences shall be brought to the attention of the Owner's Representative in writing. In the event this notification is not performed, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any revision necessary. March 29, 2026 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM ©COPYRIGHT 2026 CCA LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTS 32 84 00- 7 MARYS CREEK WRF C. Staking: Before installation is started, place a stake or flag where each sprinkler and valve box is to be located, in accordance with drawing. Staking shall be approved by the Owner's Authorized Representative before proceeding. D. Piping Layout: Piping layout is diagrammatic. Route piping around existing trees and root zones in such a manner as to avoid damage to plantings. Do not dig within the ball of newly planted trees or shrubs. E. In areas where trees are present, trenches will be adjusted on site to provide a minimum clearance of four (4) times the trunk diameter of the tree (at its base) between any tree and any trench. F. All material and equipment shall be delivered to the Worksite in unbroken reels, cartons or other packaging to demonstrate that such material is new and of a quality and grade in keeping with the intent of these Specifications. 3.2 EXCAVATION AND TRENCHING A. The Contractor shall perform all excavation to the depth indicated in these Specifications and Contract drawings. The banks of trenches shall be kept as nearly vertical as practicable. Trenches shall be wide enough to allow a minimum of four (4) inches between parallel pipelines or electrical wiring. Where rock excavation is required, or where stones are encountered in the bottom of the trench that would create a concentrated pressure on the pipe, the rock or stones shall be removed to a depth of six (6) inches minimum below the trench depth indicated. The over depth rock excavation and all excess trench excavation shall be backfilled with loose, moist earth or sand, thoroughly tamped. Whenever wet or otherwise unstable soil that is incapable of properly supporting the pipe is encountered in the trench bottom, such shall be removed to a depth and length required, and the trench backfilled to trench bottom grade as hereinafter specified, with coarse sand, fine gravel or other suitable material. B. Bottom of trench grade shall be continued past ground surface deviations to avoid air pockets and low collection points in the line. The minimum cover specifications shall govern regardless of variations in ground surface profile and the occasional deeper excavation required at banks and other field conditions. Excavation shall be such that a uniform trench grade variation will occur in all cases where variations are necessary. C. Trench excavation shall comprise the satisfactory removal and disposition of all materials and shall include all shoring and sheeting required to protect the excavation and to safeguard employees. D. During excavation, material suitable for backfilling shall be stockpiled in an orderly manner a sufficient distance back from edge of trenches to avoid overloading and prevent slides or cave-ins. Material unsuitable for backfilling shall be wasted as directed by the Owner's Authorized Representative. When excavated material is of a rocky nature and the topsoil or any other layer of excavated material is suitable for pipe bedding and backfill in the vicinity of the pipe, such material shall be separately stockpiled for use in such bedding and pipe backfill operations, unless satisfactory imported material is used. E. All excavations and backfill shall be unclassified and covered in the basic bid. No additional compensation will be allowed for rock encountered. LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM March 29, 2026 328400-8 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 CCA LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTS MARYS CREEK WRF F. Restore all surfaces, existing underground installations, etc., damaged or cut as a result of the excavations to their original conditions in a manner acceptable to the Owner's Authorized Representative. 3.3 PIPE INSTALLATION A. Sprinkler Mains: Sprinkler mains are that portion of piping from water source to electric valves. This portion of piping is subject to surges since it is a closed portion of the sprinkler system. Sprinkler mains shall be installed in a trench with a minimum of eighteen (18) inches of cover. B. Lateral Piping: Lateral piping is that portion of piping from electrical valve to sprinkler heads. This portion of piping is not subject to surges since it is an "open end" portion of the sprinkler system. Lateral piping shall be installed in a trench with a minimum of twelve (12) inches of cover. 3.4 PVC PIPE AND FITTING ASSEMBLY A. Solvent: Use only solvent recommended by manufacturer to make solvent -welded joints following standards noted herein. Thoroughly clean pipe and fittings of dirt, dust, and moisture with an approved PVC primer before applying solvent. B. PVC to Metal Connection: Work metal connections first. Use a non -hardening pipe dope such as Permatex No. 2 or "Teflon" tape on threaded PVC to metal joints. Use only light wrench pressure. C. Threaded PVC Connections: Where required, use threaded PVC adapters into which pipe may be welded. D. Remove lumber, rubbish, and rocks from trenches. Provide firm, uniform bearing for entire length of each pipeline to prevent uneven settlement. Wedging or blocking of pipe will not be permitted. Remove foreign matter or dirt from inside of pipe before welding and keep piping clean during and after laying pipe. E. PVC pipe shall not be installed where there is water in the trench, nor shall PVC pipe be laid when temperature is 40 deg. F or below or when rain is imminent. PVC pipe will expand and contract as the temperature changes. Therefore, pipe shall be snaked from side to side of trench bottom to allow for expansion and contraction. 3.5 HYDROSTATIC TESTS A. Pressure Test: After the pipe is laid, the joints completed, and the trench partially backfilled, leaving the joints exposed for examination, the newly laid mainline pipe or any valved section of main pressure line piping shall, unless otherwise specified, be subjected for four (4) hours to a hydrostatic pressure test of normal city water pressure. Each valve shall be opened and closed during the test. Enclosed pipe, joints, fittings, and valves shall be carefully examined during the partially open trench test. Joints showing visible leakage shall be replaced or remade, as necessary. Cracked or defective pipe, joints, fittings, or valves discovered in consequence of this pressure test shall be repeated until the test results are satisfactory. All replacement and repair shall be at contractor's cost. Notify the Owner's Authorized Representative at least three (3) days before tests are scheduled to be conducted. March 29, 2026 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM ©COPYRIGHT 2026 CCA LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTS 32 84 00- 9 MARYS CREEK WRF 3.6 CONTROL WIRE INSTALLATION A. All control wire less than five hundred (500) feet in length shall be continuous without splices or joints from the controller to the valves. Connections to the electric valves shall be made within eighteen (18) inches of the valve using connectors specified in Paragraph 2.4 of this section, unless otherwise approved by the Owner's Authorized Representative in writing. B. All control wires shall be installed at least eighteen (18) inches deep. Contractor shall obtain the Owner's Representative's approval for wire routing when installed in a separate ditch. Control wires may be installed in a common ditch with piping, however wires must be installed a minimum of four (4) inches below or to one (1) side of piping. C. All wire passing under existing or future paving, sidewalk, construction, etc., shall be encased in PVC conduit extending at least two (2) feet beyond edges of paving, sidewalks, or construction. 3.7 POP-UP SPRAY BUBBLER HEADS A. Provide heads and nozzles as specified and install in locations as shown on the Contract Drawings. B. Pop-up spray heads shall be installed with connections to rigid PVC pipe as detailed on the Contract drawings. Rotary heads shall be installed on a double swing joint connected to the lateral pipe as detailed on the drawings. C. Heads shall be installed with underside of flange flush with the finished grade. D. Contractor will be required to adjust heads as necessary after establishment of grass or other plant material. 3.8 DRIP EQUIPMENT A. Drip tube can be installed in one (1) of the following methods: 1. Over -excavation: Over -excavate the entire area to a depth of two (2) inches to four (4) inches below finish grade. Plant all specimen trees and shrubs fifteen (15) gallon size and larger, then place drip tube at the row spacing interval indicated on the plans. 2. Pipe Pulling: Where ground disruption is to be minimized, pneumatic tire, pipe - pulling machinery shall be used. Potholes shall be used at the ends of each run for making connection to supply and exhaust headers of rigid PVC pipe or polyethylene pipe. 3. Trenching: Hand or mechanically trench to the pipe depth indicated on the plans or in these specifications and backfill flush with fmish grade. Avoid mechanically trenching within the dripline of existing trees. Hand -trench around existing tree roots when roots of two (2) inches and larger are encountered. Remove all rock one and one-half (1'/z) inch and larger when excavating and remove from site. Do not backfill trenches with rock that will come in direct contact with tubing or rigid PVC piping. LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM March 29, 2026 32 84 00 -10 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 CCA LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTS MARYS CREEK WRF B. Placement of Rigid PVC Piping: Install pipe in a serpentine (snaked) manner to allow for expansion and contraction in trench before backfilling. Install pipes at temperatures over 40°F. Pipe markings shall face upward out of the trench whenever possible. C. Drip tube: Drip tube can be installed with the water outlets facing up, down, or sideways. In irregular areas, some water outlets could end up too close to fixed improvements and may have to be capped off with a dripper plug ring. D. Cover: Install underground piping horizontally and as evenly as possible to a maximum depth of 4 inches, unless otherwise specified. (Typical pipe depth is two (2) inches in shrub beds, four (4) inches in turf unless periodic aeration is anticipated, and then pipe depth should be lowered to six (6) inches.) E. Barbed Insert Fittings: Connect drip tube to barbed insert fittings by pushing the tubing on and over both barbs of the fitting until the tubing has seated against another piece of tubing or has butted against another portion of the barbed fitting. For water pressures in excess of the 30 psi, or the maximum stated system pressure for the drip tube, whichever is less, use stainless steel clamps. F. Clamping: When design -operating pressure exceeds 30 psi, or maximum stated system pressure for the drip tube, whichever is less, stainless steel pipe clamps shall be used. Slip clamps over tubing before slipping tubing over barbed insert fitting. Place clamp between the first and second ridge of the barbed fittings and crimp the "ear" of the clamp tightly. Crimp the "ear" twice to ensure proper seating. 3.9 QUICK COUPLING VALVES A. Quick coupling valves shall be installed with the underside of flange flush with the finished grade. B. Quick coupling valves shall be installed on a swing joint assembly as detailed on the drawings. C. Under the warranty, the Contractor shall return after grass is established and adjust valves and valve boxes to proper grade. 3.10 MANUAL VALVES A. Manual valves shall be sized and located where shown on the Contract drawings. B. Valve boxes shall be adjusted to be flush with finished grade. The Contractor will be required to adjust after establishment of grass. C. Valve boxes shall be properly supported and of sufficient construction that tractors and mowers crossing over the boxes will not push boxes down and crush the pipe, valve, or box. 3.11 VALVE AND VALVE BOX PLACEMENT A. All manual, electric, and quick coupling valves shall be in boxes as specified in Paragraph 2.7 of this section and shall be set with a minimum of six (6) inches of space between their top surface and the bottom of the valve box. The base of the box shall be filled with pea gravel as shown on plan. B. Valves shall be fully opened and fully closed to ensure that all parts are in operating condition. March 29, 2026 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM ©COPYRIGHT 2026 CCA LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTS 32 84 00-11 MARYS CREEK WRF C. Valve boxes shall be set plumb, vertical, and concentric with the valve stem. D. Any valve box which has moved from this required position so as to prevent the use of the operating wheel of the valve shall be reset by the Contractor at his own expense. 3.12 ELECTRIC CONTROLLER A. Electric controller location shall be confirmed with the L.A. before installation, as shown on the plans. 3.13 ELECTRIC REMOTE CONTROL VALVES A. Remote control valves shall be located and sized as shown on the plans. All electrical connections shall be made when the weather is dry with connection kits as specified in Paragraph 2.4 of this section in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommended procedures. All remote control valves shall be installed in a horizontal position, in accordance to the manufacturer's published installation instructions. B. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to furnish and install the proper size wire on each of the low voltage circuits from the master control center to the various electric remote control valves. C. Consideration shall be given to each circuit for allowance of voltage drop and economy consistent with accepted practices of electrical installation. Under no circumstances shall the voltage of any branch circuit be reduced more than proper due to length of run exceeding the maximum allowable for the wire size used. 3.14 BACKFILL AND COMPACTION A. After system is operating and required tests and inspections have been made, the trenches shall be carefully backfilled with the excavated materials approved for backfilling, consisting of earth, loam, sandy clay, sand, gravel, soft shale, or other approved materials, free from large clods of earth or stone. Rock, broken concrete, or pavement, and large boulders shall not be used as backfill material. The backfill shall be thoroughly compacted and evened with the adjacent soil level. B. Compact trenches in areas to be planted by thoroughly flooding the backfill. Compact all other areas by flooding or hand tamping. The jetting process may be used in areas when flooding. C. Backfill for all trenches, regardless of the type of pipe covered, shall be compacted to a minimum of 90% density. D. Any trenches improperly backfilled, or where settlement occurs, shall be reopened to the depth required for compaction, then refilled and compacted with the surface restored to the required grade and left in a completed surface condition as described above. E. Specifically tamp backfill under heads and around the flange of heads for one (1) foot by a suitable means after trench backfill has dried from flooding to prevent heads loosening in the ground. 3.15 FINAL ADJUSTMENT A. After installation has been completed, make final adjustment of sprinkler system prior to Owner's Authorized Representative's final inspection. LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM March 29, 2026 32 84 00 -12 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 CCA LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTS MARYS CREEK WRF B. Completely flush system to remove debris from lines by removing nozzle from heads on ends of lines and turning on system. C. Check sprinklers for proper operation and proper alignment for direction of throw. D. Check each section for operating pressure and balance to other sections by use of flow adjustment on top of each valve. E. Check nozzles for proper coverage. Prevailing wind conditions may indicate that arc or angle of spray should be other than as shown on drawings. In this case, change nozzles to provide correct coverage and furnish record data to Owner's Authorized Representative with each change. F. After system is thoroughly flushed and ready for operation, each section of sprinklers shall be adjusted to control pressure at heads. Use the following method, one (1) section at a time: 1. Remove last head on section and install a temporary riser above grade. Install tee with pressure gauge attached on top of riser and re -install head with nipple onto tee. 2. Correct operating pressure at last head of each section as follows: Spray and rotor heads - 30-35 psi. 3. After replacing head, at grade, tamp thoroughly around head. 4. Drip zone valve pressure regulating devices shall be set at not to exceed 40 psi. 3.16 CLEAN-UP A. The Worksite shall be thoroughly cleaned of all waste materials and all unused or salvaged materials, equipment, tools, etc. B. After completion of the work, areas disturbed shall be leveled and the Worksite shall be raked clean and left in an orderly condition. END OF SECTION March 29, 2026 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM ©COPYRIGHT 2026 CCA LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTS 32 84 00-13 IW_telx1019210111to] ►r_1Iwa12102:3W:v1:1 MARYS CREEK WRY SECTION 32 92 00 TURF AND GRASSES PART 1— GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Divisions 00 and 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. Furnish all work and materials, appliances, tools, equipment, facilities, transportation, and services necessary for and incidental to performing all operations in connection with the installation of the sod and seed. 1.3 SUMMARY A. Work Includes: 1. Soils Test/Analysis Report of existing site soils. 2. Providing and installing manufactured topsoil. 3. Providing and installing organic compost. 4. Initial removal of weeds on site. 5. Tilling/spike harrowing/ripping/breaking-up/shattering of compacted site soils. 6. Soil preparation and tilling topsoil and compost into existing rough graded subbase soils. 7. Hand or deep -tine aerifier mixing organic compost into existing soil at root zone of existing trees to remain. 8. Fine grading and removal of debris. 9. Germinating weeds for second eradication prior to sodding. 10. Hand removal or raking away of dead weeds. 11. Sodding of grass as designated on landscape plans. 12. Hydroseeding of permanent or temporary grasses as designated on the landscape plans. 13. Applying bonded fiber matrix to hold seed in place. 14. Temporary grass. 15. Providing temporary irrigation (if necessary to establish). 16. Establishment of grass. 1.4 REFERENCES A. Codes and regulations of the jurisdictional authorities. B. Reference Codes and Standards (current standards): 1. AASHTO: M140. 2. ASTM: C33/C33M, C51. MARCH 29, 2026 TURF AND GRASSES ©COPYRIGHT 2026 CCA LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTS 32 92 00 - 1 MARYS CREEK WRF 3. ASTM: D6459, D6566, D6567, D7322, D7367. 4. U.S. Department of Agriculture and Texas Department of Agriculture 5. Federal Seed Act. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified with minimum seven (7) years documented experience. 2. Installer: Company specializing in performing the Work of this Section with minimum seven (7) years documented experience. B. Inspections: 1. Make written request for inspection after sodding operations have been completed. Such inspection is for the purpose of establishing the Maintenance Period. 2. Submit written requests for inspections to the Owner's Authorized Representative at least seven (7) days prior to anticipated inspection date. C. Mock -Ups 1. Contractor shall provide four (4) foot by four (4) foot representative mockups of each type of soil bed preparation installation for Owner's Authorized Representative to show compliance with Section 3 — Execution. 2. Mock-ups that do not conform to the drawings, specs, and manufacturer's recommendations will be rejected. An in -place mock-up sample may be acceptable. By installing an in -place mock-up, the Contractor accepts the risk and bears the cost of removing and replacing rejected samples. Contractor shall receive final approval from the Owner's Authorized Representative prior to commencing balance of work. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following for approval in accordance with contract related submittals in a single package to the Owner's Authorized Representative no less than sixty (60) days prior to installation. B. All delivery receipts and copies of invoices for materials used for this work shall be subject to checking by the Owner's Authorized Representative. The Contractor shall offer proof of materials' compliance to the specifications to the Owner's Authorized Representative prior to installation. Various samples, certificates, and specifications of seed, and other materials shall be submitted for approval as required by subsequent sections of this specification and Section 32 93 00. The Contractor should submit the following certification to the Owner's Authorized Representative prior to installation. 1. Sod: Certified, each delivery bearing a certification tag and label as required by law. 2. Seed: Submit source of grass seed with analysis and guarantee of seed purity. TURF AND GRASSES March 29, 2026 329200-2 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 CCA LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTS MARYS CREEK WRY 3. Sources: No less than sixty (60) days prior to installation, notify Owner and Owner's Authorized Representative in writing of source of seed required for the project. 4. Soil as used for Manufactured Topsoil: Submit a one (1) gallon sample along with documentation for Soil Test/ Analysis Report. 5. Manufactured Topsoil: Submit a one (1) gallon sample for spreading along with manufacturer's product data and laboratory analysis report with Solvita® Compost Maturity Test results for compost components of this manufacturer's mix. 6. Mature Organic Compost: Submit a one (1) gallon sample for spreading as specified in Section 2.6 along with Solvita® Compost Maturity Test results. 7. Bonded Fiber Matrix: Submit manufacturer's literature. 8. Organic Fertilizer: Copy of product information labeled with manufacturer's name and address and chemical analysis. 9. Organic Herbicide: Copy of product information labeled with manufacturer's name and address and chemical analysis. Submit manufacturer's information or cut sheets on products. 10. Organic Fungicide: Copy of product information labeled with manufacturer's name and address and chemical analysis. Submit manufacturer's information or cut sheets on products. 11. Organic Insecticide(s): Copy of product information labeled with manufacturer's name and address and chemical analysis. Submit manufacturer's information or cut sheets on products. C. Work Schedule: The sodding and seeding of grass must occur at stipulated times. Also, time periods are specified to achieve an acceptable stand. Therefore, the Contractor must submit a schedule for the work of this section so that the grass can achieve full coverage as specified by the contract completion date. The schedule must be submitted no less than sixty (60) days prior to installation for review and approval of the Owner's Authorized Representative, Architect and Owner's Authorized Representative. Refer to Subsection 1.12. D. Submit Maintenance Instructions upon final acceptance. Refer to Subsection 3.10, Paragraph L. E. Special Warranty: Submit written special warranty registered with manufacturer as specified in this Section. F. Provide documentation and testing of existing site soils and screened soil as used in the manufactured topsoil by means of a Chemical Soil Test/Analysis Report with recommendations for organic amendments (not chemical based) to soils for landscape turf grasses, aesthetic planting with ornamentals and native plants (not agricultural crops) for determination or adjustment of required amendments. G. Provide existing site soils testing, as noted above, at two (2) predetermined/approved locations on site per approval by Owner's Authorized Representative and Landscape Architect. Provide testing at least sixty (60) days prior to soil preparation. Approved Chemical Testing Laboratories: MARCH 29, 2026 TURF AND GRASSES ©COPYRIGHT 2026 CCA LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTS 329200-3 MARYS CREEK WRF a. Perry Agricultural Laboratory, mailing address: P.O. Box 418, or shipping address: 15241 Pike 138, Bowling Green, MO 63334, phone: (573-324- 2931), www.perryaglab.com. (Equivalent tests as noted above — minimum — Standard Albrecht Test.) b. Approved equivalent laboratory to match parameters and report recommendations as approved by Owner's Authorized Representative. H. Provide documentation and testing of compost materials as specified in Parts 2 and 3 of this section. 1.7 SELECTION AND ORDERING OF PLANTING MATERIALS A. Documentation: Submit documentation no less than sixty (60) days prior to installation that all materials have been ordered. B. Unavailable Materials: If proof is submitted that any of the materials specified is not obtainable, a proposal will be considered for use of the nearest equivalent variety with corresponding adjustment of Contract price. Substantiate such proof in writing no less than sixty (60) days prior to installation. C. Special Conditions: The above provisions shall not relieve Contractor of the responsibility for obtaining specified materials in advance if special growing conditions or other arrangements must be made in order to supply specified materials. 1.8 JOB CONDITIONS AND PROVISIONS A. Carefully maintain all site benchmarks, layout points and other points established by other contractors. If destroyed, replacement will be by this Contractor. B. Coordinate all work of this Section with other on -site contractors and the Owner. Give advance notice on sequencing of this work so not to affect the operations of other contractors. C. All turf grass work shall be performed under the direct supervision of a superintendent and laborers thoroughly experienced with the work of this Section and who shall be at the project site for the duration of the work. D. No turf grass work shall take place during inclement weather or when the ground conditions are, in the opinion of the Owner's Authorized Representative, not in a condition to be properly worked. E. No turf grass operations shall occur earlier than April 15th nor later than August 30th. If sod is to be installed from October 15th to March 15th, then provide temporary installation of annual rye grass for winter establishment. Remove annuall rye grass prior to April 15th and install sod. F. Erect barricades, snow fencing, hire temporary watchmen or whatever is deemed necessary by the Contractor to totally protect all turf grasses until one hundred (100%) percent established. TURF AND GRASSES March 29, 2026 329200-4 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 CCA LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTS MARYS CREEK WRY 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Materials and supplies are subject to inspection and sampling for testing. Allow no seed, fertilizer, straw, or other agronomic materials or supplies on Work site other than those for the Project. 1. Sod: a. Deliver sod to job within twelve (12) hours after being cut; place sod within twenty (20) hours after being cut. Allow sod only eight (8) hours maximum on site. b. Prior to and after delivery during wet weather, allow sod to dry to the extent that will prevent tearing during handling and laying. During dry weather, water sod to ensure its vitality and prevent dropping of the soil in handling. c. Analysis of purity and germination tag. d. Certification tag. 2. Seed: Deliver with labels and tags with seed bag bearing the following upon delivery: a. Source. b. Analysis of purity and germination tag. c. Certification tag. B. Bonded Fiber Matrix: Labeled with manufacturer's name and address, and guaranteed analysis. Store and handle in strict compliance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Protect from damage from weather, excessive temperatures, and construction operations. C. Organic Biological Fertilizer: Labeled with manufacturer's name and address, guaranteed analysis, including nutrient and its derived source, listing of potential acidity, and any toxic materials. D. Organic Biological Fungicide: Labeled with manufacturer's name and address and analysis, warnings, safety instructions, and application requirements. E. Organic Herbicide: Labeled with manufacturer's name and address and analysis, warnings, safety instructions, and application requirements. F. Organic Insecticide: Labeled with manufacturer's name and address and analysis, warnings, safety instructions, and application requirements. 1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS OR SITE CONDITIONS A. Verify and examine site conditions with the Owner's Authorized Representative. Proceed when official notice is given to the Contractor that the work site is ready. B. Proceed with tree protection prior to any mobilization, staging, site work, demolition, or grading. 1.11 SEQUENCING A. Coordinate grading, soil preparation and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that grass sod can be supported and installed as indicated. B. Coordinate with General Contractor for construction sequencing. MARCH 29, 2026 TURF AND GRASSES ©COPYRIGHT 2026 CCA LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTS 329200-5 MARYS CREEK WRF 1.12 SCHEDULING A. Submit a proposed work schedule to the Owner for approval no less than sixty (60) days prior to start of installation. After approval, no modification shall be made to this schedule without written authorization by the Owner or Owner's Authorized Representative. List anticipated start and stop dates for each segment of work up to and including final acceptance. B. In general, the work shall proceed as rapidly as the site becomes available, consistent with normal seasonal limitations for turf grass work. C. Establishment Period: The grass must be fully, one hundred (100%) percent established by the contract completion date. The Contractor shall allow for a minimum of one hundred (100) days to establish the grasses. PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.1 SOD FOR TURF A. Well -rooted certified sod, at least eighteen (18) months old. 1. Front Yard Areas and areas disturbed by proposed construction. `Tifway 419' Bermudagrass (Cynodon dactylon var.) Cultivar to be approved by Landscape Architect based on availability per submittal by Contractor. 2. `Cobalt' St. Augustinegrass (Stenotaphurm secundatum `Cobalt' — DALSA 1618) 3. `Raleigh' St. Augustinegrass (Stenotaphurm secundatum `Raleigh') 4. `Palisades' Zoysia grass (Zoysia japonica Steud. X Zoysia matrella) 5. Grassed football, soccer, baseball and softball fields (existing or proposed) Latitude 36® Bermudagrass (Cynodon dactylon var.) Cultivar to be approved by Landscape Architect based on availability per submittal by Contractor. B. Sod and attached soil free from any noxious weeds such as quack grass, garlic, Johnson grass, dallisgrass, nutsedge, Canada thistle, and other turf weeds. C. Mowed in production field to height of not more than two and one-half (2-1/2) inches within five (5) days prior to lifting. D. DO NOT use any sod grown with mesh netting due to tripper issues with children. Sod with netting will be rejected. E. Machine cut in sections not less than two and one-half (2-1/2) feet in length nor less than twelve (12) inches in width and to a depth equal to growth of fibrous roots, uniform soil thickness of three-quarter (3/4) inch, plus or minus one -quarter (1/4) inch. Measurement for thickness to exclude top growth and thatch. F. Cut in sections or strips for pallets strong enough to support its' own weight and retain size and shape when suspended vertically from firm grasp on upper ten (10) percent of section. Small, irregular or broken pieces of sod are prohibited. TURF AND GRASSES March 29, 2026 329200-6 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 CCA LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTS MARYS CREEK WRY 2.2 SEEDED AREAS A. Provide seed free of all weeds, including but not limited to quack grass, bentgrass, nut sedge, Johnson grass, clover, dock, cheat, chess, chickweed, dallisgrass, plantain, black medic, red fescue, and tall fescue. Seed shall have a germination and purity that will produce, after allowance for Federal Seed Act tolerances, a pure live seed content of not less than 90%. B. Provide seed as specified in Table 32 92 00-2, at the end of this section. All seed must be fresh, clean and new crop seed. Seed must be dated material from last available crop, with date of test not more than nine (9) months before date of sowing. Seed shall be labeled in accordance with U.S.D.A. and State Department of Agriculture requirements. C. Refer to plan for areas scheduled for seeding. D. Seeds and rate: 1. Common Bermudagrass (Cynodon dactylon) Rate: 2 pounds Pure Live Seed per 1000 square feet 2.3 SEED FOR TEMPORARY GRASS (If required - if the project schedule occurs such that the permanent seed for any seeded grass areas cannot be installed and established prior to October 15tH 1 A. Provide seed free of all weeds, including but not limited to quack grass, bentgrass, nut sedge, Johnson grass, clover, dock, cheat, chess, chickweed, dallisgrass, plantain, black medic, red fescue, and tall fescue. B. Seed shall have a germination and purity that will produce, after allowance for Federal Seed Act tolerances, a pure live seed content of not less than 90%. All seed must be fresh, clean and new crop seed. Seed must be dated material from last available crop, with date of test not more than nine (9) months before date of sowing. Seed shall be labeled in accordance with U.S.D.A. and State Department of Agriculture requirements. C. Refer to plan for areas scheduled for seeding. D. Temporary seed and rate for areas of bermudagrass sod and common bermudagrass seed: Annual Ryegrass (Lolium multiflorum) - cover crop Rate: 10.0 pounds Pure Live Seed per 1000 square feet 2.4 STOCKPILED TOPSOIL (if available on site) A. After being stockpiled, topsoil will be depleted of organics due to excessive heat within the core of the pile. Test and amend the topsoil to have between 5 and 15 percent of total dry weight. Topsoil may be amended with compost meeting requirements of 2.6 Compost to meet organic percent. 2.5 MANUFACTURED TOPSOIL A. Containing approximately twenty-five (25) percent organic matter as determined by the topsoil composition tests. B. Compost will meet all requirements of 2.3 and for Solvita® Compost Maturity value of 7 or higher. MARCH 29, 2026 TURF AND GRASSES ©COPYRIGHT 2026 CCA LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTS 329200-7 MARYS CREEK WRF C. Soil shall be very fine native silt screened to be free of sticks, stones, roots, and other debris and objectionable materials. Soil may be as from screened lake dredging. Screened soil shall be subject to the approval of the Owner's Authorized Representative based on visual and tactile inspection. D. Sand shall be a deep sand excavated from below fifteen (15) feet to ensure it is free of nutsedge, and screened or screened cushion (sharp) sand from sands available in this region. E. Manufactured topsoil as blended from soil, deep sand (screened cushion sand) and organic compost. Manufactured topsoil handled too wet or soggy is not acceptable. Soils supporting growth of noxious weeds, as defined by the Kansas Seed Law, or undesirable weeds, are not acceptable. Manufactured topsoil containing dallisgrass and nutgrass (nutsedge) will be rejected. F. Physical properties as follows: 1. Clay: between 0 and 10 percent 2. Screened Soil: between 13 to 17 percent 3. Sand: between 55 to 65 percent 4. Mature Compost (Organic matter): approximately 25 percent of total dry weight 5. pH: 7.2 to 8.7 G. Acceptable Manufactured Topsoil Mix: Enriched Top SoilTM — a precisely measured mixture of Professional Compost, screened native soil and screened sharp sand, pH from 7.5 to 8.7, as supplied by Soil Building Systems, 2101 Walnut Hill Lane, Dallas, Texas 75229, (972-831-8181), attention: Baron Ablon, or equivalent meeting all composition and compost maturity as determined by the Owner's Authorized Representative. 2.6 COMPOST - Professional Compost or Mature Organic Compost — 100% plant based A. Compost: shall be compost for mix above that is fully finished compost that has been produced by aerobic (biological) decomposition of organic matter and meets or exceeds the requirements set forth by the United States Department of Agriculture, the United States Composting Council (USCC), and State composting requirements. B. Compost feedstock shall include fully composted cotton burrs, local grass trimmings, leaves, brush and processed wood fiber and shall add an average of 1.1 lbs. N', 0.13 lbs. P1, and 0.8 lbs. K1 of pure consumable organic nutrients per one (100) square feet for each inch depth added plus minerals and trace elements. C. Compost shall not include food waste, stable waste, treated lumber, pallets, pine bark, raw manure or mushroom compost waste. Compost shall not include any man-made materials or chemicals. Do not use mixed municipal solid waste compost since it varies from season to season. Ensure compost does not contain any visible inorganic refuse, other physical contaminants, or any substance considered to be harmful to plant growth. D. The compost must be turned a minimum of five (5) times and not achieve a temperature greater than 160 degrees Fahrenheit. Each turning cycle should not be shorter than fourteen (14) days minimum. Compost shall be completely composted for a minimum of six to twelve (6 - 12) months. Particle Sizes 97% will pass through a one-half (1/2) inch screen, 99%+ will pass through a three-quarter (3/4) inch screen. TURF AND GRASSES March 29, 2026 329200-8 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 CCA LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTS MARYS CREEK WRY E. Compost material shall have no pungent smell, but rather an earthy smell. Supporting documentation should be made available upon request. The contractor is obligated to provide testing of the compost at the supplier's yard and at the job site for quality assurance. Acceptable Professional compost is as supplied by: Soil Building Systems, 2101 Walnut Hill Lane, Dallas, Texas 75229, (972-831-8181), attention: Baron Ablon, or equivalent as determined by the Owner's Authorized Representative. Table 1 Physical Requirements for Compost Maturity: germination and vigor greater than 90% in accordance with TMECC 05.05-A, "Germination and Vigor" Solvita® Compost Maturity Index: value of 7 or higher in accordance with TMECC 05.08-E F. The contractor is obligated to provide testing of the compost at the supplier's yard and at the job site for quality assurance. G. TESTING OF THE COMPOST AT THE JOB SITE NOTE: Contractor is advised to test the designated compost stockpile at the supplier's yard prior to loading to ensure the designated pile passes the compost maturity test. If the compost does not pass the test at the jobsite, it will be rejected. 1. Use Solvita® Compost Maturity Test Kit or approved equal. Solvita® test kit shall be recently purchased and shall be stored in a refrigerator protected from heat until use at the site. (The two parameters which Solvita® measures (CO2 / NH3) are the mostly frequently cited factors that correlate closely with maturity and potential phytotoxicity. Ammonia is also an odorous aerosol toxicant and is a potential worker hazard at agrocultural and compost facilities.) Provide Compost maturity test results to measure both carbon -dioxide (CO2) and ammonia (NH3) evolution and provide a Maturity Index value, useful or compost quality evaluation. Compost maturity test is TMECC Test #05-08A. 2. Provide results to Owner's Authorized Representative at the job site. 3. Physical inspection of the material shall be performed at the same time by the Owner's Authorized Representative. 4. Owner's Authorized Representative has the right to reject the material if it does not meet the above parameters. 2.7 ORGANIC BIOLOGICAL FERTILIZER: to build soil structure within urban environment. Synthetic fertilizers will not be used due to runoff issues and per iSWM (Integrated Storm Water Management) best practices. A. Homogenous, granulated all organic biological fertilizer containing soil microbes, endo & ecto mycorrhizal fungi, vitamins, minerals, plant hormones, stimulators, essential carbon and protein: MicroLife Multi -Purpose 6-2-4 All Organic Biological Fertilizer. B. Manufacturer/Supplier: San Jacinto Environmental Supplies, (713) 957-0909, local MARCH 29, 2026 TURF AND GRASSES ©COPYRIGHT 2026 CCA LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTS 329200-9 MARYS CREEK WRF representative: Lanse Fullinwider, cell: (214-534-2317), or equivalent product as approved by the Owner's Authorized Representative or Landscape Architect. C. See 3.4 for application rates of product to amended soils. 2.8 POST -EMERGENCE AND PRE -EMERGENCE - ORGANIC HERBICIDE — for initial weed eradication on site prior to sod installation. A. Chemical Herbicides will not be used due to detrimental effects on the soils and due to runoff effects to the site detention basin and into the storm system. B. Organic herbicide will be used to remove weeds prior to turf grass installation. C. Use of any herbicide is to be of limited nature because of the potential to damage the viability of the soil and therefore the retardation of future plant growth. D. Non -selective post emergence herbicide: Ammonium Nonanoate — 40%, AXXE® Broad Spectrum Herbicide, OMRI listed, as manufactured by BioSafe Systems, LLC, 22 Meadow Street, East Hartford, CT 06108, (888-273-3088). E. Supplier: San Jacinto Environmental Supplies, Houston, TX (713-957-0909), local representative: Lanse Fullinwider, cell: (214-534-2317), or other suppliers. F. Nonselective organic herbicide, such as Agricultural grade (20%) vinegar or 20% vinegar based product mixed with citrus oil. 2.9 BONDED FIBER MATRIX A. Erosion Control Product: 1. Hydraulically applied product of degradable wood fiber, providing one continuous layer of elongated fiber strands held together by water-resistant bonding agent. It eliminates direct rain drop impact on soil with no holes greater than one (1) millimeter in size, and allows no gaps between the product and the soil. Has a high water holding capacity, but will not form a water -insensitive crust that can inhibit plant growth. Biodegrades completely into materials known beneficial to plant growth. B. Composition: L All components of the bonded fiber matrix shall be pre-packages by the manufacturer to assure material performance and compliance with the following typical values. Under no circumstances will field mixing of additives or components be accepted. a. Thermally processed wood fibers (moisture content 12%±3%) ...............>88%±2% b. Proprietary crosslinked hydro -colloid tackifiers and activators ................ < 12%±2% C. Acceptable products: 1. Soil Guard® as manufactured by Weyehauser, Mat, Inc., 12402 Hwy 2, Floodwood, Minnesota 55736, (1-888-477-3028), or Mat-NuWood, LLC, 811 Price Place, Lenior, North Carolina 28645, (1-828758-4463), or equivalent product as approved by the Owner's Authorized Representative or Landscape Architect. TURF AND GRASSES March 29, 2026 32 92 00 - 10 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 CCA LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTS MARYS CREEK WRY 2.10 ORGANIC FUNGICIDES A. As needed for specific conditions. B. No chemical fungicides shall be used. C. MicroGro Bio Inoculant - Biological Fungicide as supplied by San Jacinto Environmental Supplies, Houston, TX (713) 957-0909, local representative: Lanse Fullinwider, cell: (214-534-2317), or available locally at Southwest Wholesale Nursery, Lewisville, TX, or equivalent product as approved by the Owner's Authorized Representative or Landscape Architect. D. Contractor shall recommend products for submittal and approval by the Owner's Authorized Representative or Landscape Architect depending on final plant selections and their susceptibility to certain fungi. 2.11 ORGANIC INSECTICIDE FIRE ANTS A. Fire Ant Bait: 1. PayBack® Fire Ant Bait with Conserve® Insecticide (spinosad 0.015%) granular form as manufactured by Southern Agricultural Insecticides, Inc., Palmetto, FL 34220, (941-722-3285). 2. Ferti-lome Come and Get It! Fire Ant Killer with Conserve® Insecticide (spinosad 0.015%) granular form as manufactured by Ferti-lome — Voluntary Purchasing Groups, Inc., 230 FM 87, Bonham, TX 75418. B. Dusting Powder: Perma-Guard® Commercial Insecticide D-20 (pyrethrins 0.02%, technical piperonyl butoxide 1.0%, silicon dioxide from diatomaceous earth 88.0%) as manufactured by Perma-Guard, Inc., Albuquerque, NM 87102, (505-243-1460), or equivalent product as approved by the Owner's Authorized Representative or Landscape Architect. 2.12 WATER A. Potable. Available on site. Applied and monitored by Contractor to establish seed and sod areas. B. Keep seed and sod moist with watering schedules to promote deep roots and to prevent runoff. Part of the site will be watered by permanent underground irrigation systems. Overwatering of planting areas should not occur. Refer to irrigation plans. PART 3— EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates and conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work. 1. Verify that all areas to receive turf grasses are clear of stones larger than one (1) inch diameter, weeds, debris and other extraneous materials. 2. Verify that rough grades are left below finish grades in order to accommodate the following work, the addition of stockpiled/manufactured topsoil, soil amendments MARCH 29, 2026 TURF AND GRASSES ©COPYRIGHT 2026 CCA LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTS 32 92 00 - 11 MARYS CREEK WRF and sod (if sod is shown on the plans). The top of sod with amended soil after settlement shall meet the finished grade as shown in the grading plans. Report all variations in writing. B. Soil Moisture: Inadequate Moisture: Do not commence work of this section when soil moisture content is so great that excessive compaction will occur, nor when it is so dry that dust will form in air or that clods will not break readily. Apply water, as necessary, to bring soil to an optimum moisture content for planting. C. By beginning Work, Contractor accepts conditions and assumes responsibility for correcting unsuitable conditions encountered at no additional cost to the owner. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Examine rough grade, verify elevations noted on the Drawings, observe the conditions under which work is to be performed, and notify Owner's Authorized Representative of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Owner's Authorized Representative. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing site conditions. B. Thoroughly rip/disrupt/break-up/shatter the soil to a minimum depth of eight (8) inches, preferably deeper due to typical construction site compaction areas of site and areas outside of existing tree drip line/critical root zone (CRZ). Only lghtly scarify the soils (about two (2) inches) where tree roots are present. Re -compact to industry standards using a standard gill or comparable piece of equipment. C. Remove non -soil materials and construction debris such as wood, rock, brick, cement, pipe, sheetrock, metal, paint, plastic, glass, etc. and unacceptable clays, then re -grade subsoil to established grades for proper drainage. D. Tilling/spike-harrowing/ripping/disrupting/breaking-up/shattering of the soils should occur prior to irrigation line installation. If the turf grass sprinkler system has already been installed, then it will be necessary to stake heads and to take necessary measures to prevent damage to the system. E. Remove foreign materials and undesirable plants and their roots. Do not bury foreign material beneath areas to be sodded. Remove contaminated subsoil. F. Ensure positive drainage away from building and all planting areas adjacent to the building. Ensure positive drainage at all turf grass areas. Maintain lines, levels, profiles and contours. Make changes in grade gradual. Blend slopes into level areas. G. Unless it has rained at least one (1) inch within twenty-four (24) hours prior to planting, water turf grass areas thoroughly to provide a moist, not wet, bed before planting. 3.3 AREAS OF APPROVAL A. Delineate the area scheduled for sodding on the site using the drawing to scale the shape and size of the planting area. B. The Owner's Authorized Representative shall approve the area delineated to receive sod prior to planting. TURF AND GRASSES March 29, 2026 32 92 00 - 12 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 CCA LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTS MARYS CREEK WRY 3.4 PREPARING SOIL & FINE GRADING A. Note: During hauling operations, keep walkway and roadway surfaces clean. Promptly remove compost or other material. B. Per the soil analysis report, determine if additional organic amendments are to be integrated into the soil preparation for plant health and horticultural suitability. Coordinate addition of amendments with the soil preparation as noted below. If no further soil amendments are required, then soil preparation shall be as noted below. C. Weed removal: 1. If site has been freshly graded, compacted or disturbed due to construction efforts and placement of stockpiled topsoil, or manufactured topsoil, water site for minimum two (2) weeks to encourage weed germination and growth. (If site was graded more than two (2) weeks prior, watering is not needed to encourage weed growth.) 2. Area scheduled for grass: Totally remove all grasses and weeds, unless directed otherwise by Owner's Authorized Representative. Apply organic herbicide to thoroughly exterminate existing grasses, weeds, or other vegetation (unless noted on the drawing or in the field by the Owner's Authorized Representative for protection) in area scheduled to receive turf grass for grasses. 3. Clear and remove these existing weeds upon organic herbicide's completed action by grubbing off all plant parts and roots to at least one and one-half (1.5) inch below the surface of the soil. 4. In area adjacent to existing trees to remain lightly scarify the soil to remove seedlings and other ground vegetation to a depth not to exceed one and one-half (1.5) inches. Keep all scarification a minimum of eight (8) feet from the base of all existing trees. If exposed roots are on the surface of the soil DO NOT SCARIFY. D. Remove branches, roots, weeds, rocks, trash and other material foreign in nature from the existing stockpiled topsoil prior to placing stockpiled topsoil or use manufactured topsoil if no suitable stockpiled topsoil material is available. If pulling from a stockpile, push weed growth off top and pull from the lower inside portion of the pile where weed seeds have been heated and are less likely to germinate. Amend stockpiled topsoil to provide organic matter as per 2.3. E. Once subsoil is lightly but firmly re -compacted, spread topsoil over areas to be sodded to a depth which will produce a two (2) inch depth minimum after natural settlement and will conform to finish lines, grades and elevations. Add this soil from the outside of the site in, so the subsoil and topsoil create an interface (mingled) layer instead of two (2) distinct layers with the possibility of a pan layer being generated. F. Do not drive over re-graded/scarified subsoil clays - dump topsoil on the outside of the site and with a tractor/dozer push topsoil onto scarified clays. Make equipment ride on top of topsoil as this will allow topsoil to partially mix with subsoil clays creating an interface layer instead of a compacted pan layer. G. Fine grade, level and scarify with a weighted spike harrow, spike float drag, or by hand raking. Leave no depressions, ruts, soft spots or humps. Finish to lines or elevations shown and parallel to proposed finished grade, as approved. Maintain positive drainage on site. Remove rocks, clods, weeds, trash or debris from area to be sodded. Remove MARCH 29, 2026 TURF AND GRASSES ©COPYRIGHT 2026 CCA LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTS 32 92 00 - 13 MARYS CREEK WRF rocks and other foreign materials one (1) inch or greater in any dimension. Legally dispose debris off site. H. Place and spread compost over topsoil to depth which will produce a one-half (1/2) inch depth after natural settlement and will conform to finish lines, grades and elevations. I. Spread organic biological fertilizer at rate of twenty (20) pounds per one thousand (1,000) square feet over top of spread compost. J. Till or disk topsoil and compost with organic biological fertilizer to five (5) inch minimum depth into existing subsoil to eliminate slip -plane between the three (3) materials and to prepare an acceptable bed for sod. Make a minimum of one (1) pass to break up clods and integrate compost evenly into the existing soil. Penetration of soil to a depth of five (5) inches is desired to encourage dormant seed grass and weed growth. Do not till if soil is wet. K. Under adjacent existing trees, place and spread compost over area to depth which will produce a one (1) inch depth after natural settlement and will conform to finish lines, grades and elevations. Hand rake mix compost into native soil to two (2) inch depth to eliminate slip -plane between the materials and to prepare an acceptable bed for sod. Make a minimum of one (1) pass to break up clods and integrate compost evenly into the existing soil. L. If soil or weather conditions are unsuitable, cease compost operations. Resume compost operations when proper conditions prevail. M. Compact amended soil with lawn roller to final compacted thickness as approved. N. Second (2nd) weed and grass removal in areas scheduled for turf grass: Water the tilled and fine graded areas to receive grass three (3) weeks prior to sodding and/Or seeding to encourage additional disturbed weed and native grass germination and growth. Apply an organic herbicide to thoroughly exterminate existing grasses, weeds, or other vegetation (unless noted on the drawing or in the field by the Owner's Authorized Representative for protection) in areas scheduled to receive sodded and/or seeded grasses. Totally remove all grasses and weeds, unless directed otherwise by Owner's Authorized Representative. O. If weeds should germinate prior to sodding and/or seeding, hand pull or re -apply organic herbicide by wick method to eradicate weeds, but do not injure grass. 3.5 SODDING A. After soil preparation (Section 3.4) is approved by the Owner's Authorized Representative, commence with sodding. B. Scope of work: 1. Refer to the plans for the location of areas to receive sod. 2. Prepare soils per 3.4 and install sod in areas disturbed by renovation construction. 3. Prepare soils per 3.4 and install sod on entire grounds of project with new construction. 4. Install a minimum of two (2) feet of new sod along each side of new or renovated walkways in sodded areas. Refer to plans for extents of sod if greater than two (2) feet. TURF AND GRASSES March 29, 2026 32 92 00 - 14 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 CCA LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTS MARYS CREEK WRY 5. Sod will also be required in areas designated for turf grass that exceed 4:1 slope, unless noted otherwise on the drawings. 6. Delineate areas to receive sod and receive approval for area by Owner's Authorized Representative prior to planting. C. Laying Sod: 1. Time frame for laying sod is from April 15 to October 15. 2. Extend or reduce specified period for laying sod as approved and as necessitated by weather and soil conditions. 3. Final selection of sod: As approved. 4. Do not lay sod when sodding area is muddy or frozen nor when sod is frozen. When soil surface is hot or dry, wet soil to a depth of two (2) inches, six (6) to eight (8) hours prior to sodding. 5. Lift sod from trucks or storage piles and place by hand with close joints and no overlapping. When Beck Roll of sod is used, lay as specified and in accordance with the supplier's instructions. 6. Lay first row of sod in straight line. Place subsequent rows parallel to and tightly against each other. Stagger lateral joints to promote more uniform growth and strength. Do not stretch sod. On slopes, lay sod parallel to contours of slope. 7. Peg sod placed on slopes 2:1 or greater. Peg each strip or section of sod with at least two stakes not more than two (2) feet apart. Use stakes one-half ('/z) inch by one (1) inch by twelve (12) inches driven flush with top of sod so that roots are in contact with topsoil. 8. Water sod immediately to prevent excessive drying during progress of work. Sod which dries out will be rejected. 9. Roll entire area as sodding is completed in one section so that sod is without surface irregularities, such as depressions and high spots. 10. Irrigate immediately after rolling to wet underside of sod and one (1) inch of soil immediately below. 11. For athletic fields (if applicable), the sod must be laid to be without bumps, dips or unlevel areas. Continue to level and proof roll field to meet Owner's or Owner's Authorized Representative's approval. 3.6 SUBSTRATE AND SEEDBED PROTECTION A. Examine substrates and conditions where seeding and bonded fiber matrix materials will be applied. B. Stabilize and protect area from runoff of surrounding plazas and pavements by diversion of runoff away from the face of the slope or into the slope. C. Do not proceed with installation until satisfactory conditions are established. 3.7 BONDED FIBER MATRIX APPLICATION A. Installation (over top of seeded areas): Strictly comply with manufacture's installation instructions and recommendations. MARCH 29, 2026 TURF AND GRASSES ©COPYRIGHT 2026 CCA LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTS 32 92 00 - 15 MARYS CREEK WRF 2. Erosion control and revegetation: a. Mix and apply bonded fiber matrix at a rate of fifty (50) pounds per one hundred (100) gallons of water over freshly prepared drill seeded surfaces. Confirm loading rates with equipment manufacturer. Do not leave seeded surfaces unprotected especially if precipitation is imminent. b. Do not apply on saturated soils or substrates. Do not apply if precipitation is anticipated within 24-48 hours. C. Minimum curing temperature is forty (40) degrees F. Best results and more rapid curing are achieved at temperatures exceeding sixty (60) degrees F. Curing times may be accelerated in high temperature, low humidity conditions with product applied on dry soils. 3. Mixing: A mechanically agitated hydraulic -application machine is recommended. 4. Application: Use a fan -type nozzle (50 -degree tip) whenever possible for best soil/seed bed surface coverage. Apply bonded fiber matrix from opposing directions, reducing the "shadow effect" and assuring a minimum of ninety-five (95) percent soil surface coverage. Increase application rates on highly erosive soils or chiseled disked, furrowed, or tracked slopes. Materials show not be applied in channels, swales or other areas where concentrated flows are anticipated. 5. Do not allow treated areas to be trafficked. 3.8 HYDROSEEDING (HYDROMULCHING) OF GRASS A. After soil preparation (Section 3.4) and weed removal is approved by the Owner's Representative or Landscape Architect, commence with seeding of grass. B. Timing: Preferred seeding dates: 1. Bermudagrass: May 1 — September 1 (or if soil temperature at 70 degrees) C. Hydroseeding (Hydromulching) 1. Hydroseed/hydomulch the seed with approved bonded fiber matrix per the manufacturer's directions and adjust coverage for slopes per manufacturer's recommendations. Apply seed and bonded fiber matrix for uniform coverage. 2. If soil or weather conditions are unsuitable, cease operations. Resume seeding operations when proper conditions prevail. 3. Do not apply immediately following rain, when ground is too dry, or during windy periods. 4. The grass seed mixes shall be uniformly and evenly distributed over the areas shown on the plans. 5. Roll surface with a light corrugated drum roller. 6. Seed Protection: Identify seeded areas with stakes and string around area periphery. Set string at minimum height of twelve (12) inches. Space stakes at maximum 20'-0" O.C. D. Finish as follows: 1. Turf grass area with slopes less than 3:1: Raked surface. TURF AND GRASSES March 29, 2026 32 92 00 - 16 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 CCA LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTS MARYS CREEK WRY 2. Slopes 3:1 or greater: Leave surface of prepared bed in irregular condition with ridges running parallel to contour of slope to prevent erosion. E. Reapply fertilizer at specified rate every three (3) to four (4) weeks for three (3) months in seeded turf areas. 3.9 SEEDING OF TEMPORARY TURF (if required) A. Depending on construction schedule, it may be necessary to establish temporary turf to prevent erosion and provide an acceptable appearance of areas scheduled to receive turf. A temporary turf will be required in those areas designated for turf grass for which installation must be delayed until the specified seeding dates. Turf must be accepted after June 1 and prior to November 15, otherwise a temporary turf must be installed. Perform seeding, fertilizing, watering, weeding and other maintenance to ensure full coverage of temporary turf. 1. Eliminate weeds from all areas to be seeded as specified in Section 3.4. 2. Application rate: Annual Ryegrass seed over entire area for Common Bermudagrass Seed or Bermudagrass Sod at the rate of ten (10) pounds P.L.S. per 1,000 square feet. 3. Apply with bonded fiber matrix at manufacturer's recommendation for slope and soil type OR equivalent as approved by Owner's representative. 4. Water all seeded areas to establish full stand within sixty (60) days. Do not allow areas to become dry, or water to the extent that seed will be lost by erosion. 5. When it is time to install the permanent turf grass or other planting in these areas, kill the temporary lawn with organic herbicide and scarify the soil to remove the temporary grass to depth of three-quarter (3/4) inch to receive permanent grass seeding or sodding. 6. Broadcast seed and apply Bonded Fiber Matrix for permanent turf grass seed over areas to be seeded as per requirements of 3.7. 3.10 ESTABLISHMENT PERIOD AND REPLACEMENT A. The establishment period for sodding of grasses shall commence at installation and continue throughout the construction period until final acceptance by the Owner's Authorized Representative. B. Maintain sodding and seeding and incidental work by performing the following and other operations of care necessary for promotion of growth so that work is in an approved condition throughout establishment period; uniform in color, quality, and coverage; and free of weeds, insects, diseases, surface damage, and other imperfections. 1. Watering: Provide labor and materials for establishment watering. a. First two (2) weeks: Perform watering daily to keep sod beds continuously moist and to maintain moist topsoil to a depth of at least four (4) inches. Water during heat of day to help prevent wilting. Water with frequent, light watering and avoid runoff or puddling. Water maybe needed more than once a day depending on weather conditions. Water to ensure germination and root growth for resodding or reseeding work. MARCH 29, 2026 TURF AND GRASSES ©COPYRIGHT 2026 CCA LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTS 32 92 00 - 17 MARYS CREEK WRF b. Remaining weeks: Perform watering weekly, decreasing frequency and increasing amount per application to encourage deep root growth. Recommended schedule: 1) Next four (4) weeks: Perform watering to provide two (2) soil -wetting events to a depth of four (4) inches per each week. 2) Remainder of growing season: March to November, water to provide two (2) soil -wetting events to a depth of six (6) inches per each month. 3) In prolonged drought, over six (6) weeks in summer with no rain, irrigate once every five (5) to six (6) weeks to keep the dormant turf alive, but not trigger "green -up", unless more regular watering is desired to keep the turf green. C. Eliminate weeds that emerge as soon as they appear, in a timely fashion mechanically and/or with an herbicide to prevent establishment and resodding. Use an herbicide that will not injure the newly sodded and seeded grass and apply according to manufacturer's recommendations. The Contractor should allow for a minimum of two (2) herbicide applications of areas scheduled for grasses during the establishment period. D. Mowing: Turf solid sod grass areas. 1. Mow grass when it reaches a height of four (4) inches. Do not mow until sod is firmly rooted and securely in place. Mow to height of two (2) inches at first cutting. Thereafter, do not remove more than one third (1/3) of grass leaf at any cutting and mow only to enhance root growth. E. Mowing: Seeded areas and temporary turf areas. 1. Provide a maximum of two (2) mowings per year for weed control. Mowings shall not prevent growth and propagation that is provided by yielding mature seed. F. Rolling and reshaping: Roll to maintain uniform surface. Roll to eliminate uneven places in sod. Reshape soil surface to maintain positive drainage. Resod to provide one hundred (100%) percent coverage. G. Applying organic biological fertilizer: 1. MicroLife Multi -Purpose 6-2-4 All Organic Biological Fertilizer, as supplied by San Jacinto Environmental Supplies, (713) 957-0909. 2. Rate: Twenty (20) pounds per one thousand (1,000) square feet of turf area. 3. Application: a. March b. June c. October H. For high -use turf grass areas with heavy foot traffic, additionally top dress with one-half (1/2) inch organic compost in the fall plus aeration to open the compacted soils. I. Applying organic herbicides, organic fungicides and/or organic insecticides: 1. Apply as needed to ensure one hundred (100%) percent coverage of turf grass that is weed, disease and pest free. 2. Apply in spray form by certified applicator. TURF AND GRASSES March 29, 2026 32 92 00 - 18 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 CCA LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTS MARYS CREEK WRY a. Do not apply when temperature exceeds 80 deg. F. or during periods of drought. 3. Treat fire ant mounds as they appear with approved organic materials. J. Replacing sodding and seeding: 1. Replace sodded and seeded areas that are dead or are in an unhealthy, unsightly, or badly impaired condition as soon as possible during specified planting seasons. 2. Replace sod or seed with same variety as noted for application per 2.1, 2.2 and 2.3. 3. Make such replacements in the same manner as specified for original sodding or seeding. K. Coordinate watering schedules with other plantings during installation and until final acceptance. DO NOT overwater as this will promote weeds. L. Maintenance Instructions: Submit one (1) electronic copy and two (2) copies of typewritten instructions recommending procedures to be established by the Owner for the maintenance of grasses for one (1) full year. Submit one (1) set of instructions to Owner's Authorized Representative for approval. Submit two (2) copies of revised instructions prior to expiration of Contractor's maintenance period(s) required under the contract. 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field inspections and tests and to prepare test reports. 1. Testing agency will conduct and interpret tests and state in each report whether tested Work complies with or deviates from requirements. B. Correct deficiencies in or remove and replace that inspections and test reports indicate do not comply with specified requirements. C. Additional testing, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected Work with specified requirements. 3.12 CLEANING A. Daily removal of rubbish and debris caused by this work from the site. B. Keep site clean during maintenance period. 3.13 PROTECTION A. Turf grass areas shall be protected against damage from the time work is started until the date of acceptance by the Owner's Authorized Representative. The moving of heavy equipment or materials over turf grass areas shall be done on planks if necessary. 3.14 INSPECTIONS A. Make written request for inspection after areas have been sodded. B. Submit request for inspection to Owner's Authorized Representative at least two (2) days prior to anticipated inspection date. MARCH 29, 2026 TURF AND GRASSES ©COPYRIGHT 2026 CCA LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTS 32 92 00 - 19 MARYS CREEK WRF 3.15 FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. Due to seasonal requirements, final acceptance of this section may not coincide with that of the remaining contract work. B. Request inspection for final acceptance at least ten (10) calendar days before the end of the establishment period. C. Final acceptance shall be considered the time at which warm season turf grass areas are 100% established, and weed, pest and disease free with complete lush cover and no exposed soil areas showing. Weeds shall not occupy more than 2% of any 40'x40' test area. D. Replace rejected sodded and or seeded areas as specified so that repair or replacement is rooted and established prior to approval. 3.16 WARRANTY A. In accordance with the General Provisions warranty for grasses shall be valid for one (1) year after final acceptance. Replace dead materials and materials not in vigorous, thriving condition as soon as weather permits. Re -sod and re -seed areas where grasses have not established. The opinion of the Owner's Authorized Representative as to what constitutes a dead stand of grass shall be final. B. Replace grasses with same kind as originally planted at no cost to the Owner. Provide one (1) year warranty on replacement plants. Plants should be replaced at start of next season. Protect irrigation system, other piping conduit, or other work during replacement. Repair any damage immediately. C. Warranty excludes replacement of plants after fmal acceptance because of injury by storm, drought, drowning, hail, freeze, insects, or diseases. Warranty excludes replacement of plants due to negligence, over watering, or improper maintenance by the Owner or Owner's maintenance contractor. D. Plants will be guaranteed to be true to species, variety or cultivar as specified. TABLE 32 92 00-1 This chart indicates minimum length of time by which material samples must be submitted for approval before intended use and minimum quantity of each. Usable samples will be returned. ITEM TIME QUANTITY COMMENT SOD 7 days 3 square feet Each variety specified SEED 10 days 1 lb. Each variety specified ORGANIC COMPOST 7 days 1 gallon bag Organic finished compost SCREENED SOIL 14 days 1 gallon bag MANUFACTURED TOPSOIL 14 days 1 gallon bag BONDED FIBER MATRIX 7 days 1 quart TURF AND GRASSES March 29, 2026 329200-20 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 CCA LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTS MARYS CREEK WRY ORGANIC FERTILIZER 14 days ORGANIC HERBICIDE 7 days ORGANIC FUNGICIDE 14 days OTHER MATERIAL 7 days END OF 1 quart Provide sample 1/2 pint Unopened container 1 quart Provide sample As directed or as approved. SECTION MARCH 29, 2026 TURF AND GRASSES ©COPYRIGHT 2026 CCA LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTS 329200-21 IW_telx1019210111to] ►r_1Iwa12102:3W:v1:1 MARYS CREEK WRY SECTION 32 93 00 LANDSCAPING PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Furnish all work and materials, appliances, tools, equipment, facilities, transportation, and services necessary for and incidental to performing all operations in connection with the installation of the landscape. B. Conform to the requirements of the general conditions of the contract. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Work included: 1. Providing complete landscaping as shown. 2. Excavation of plant pits. 3. Percolation test of tree pits in lawn. 4. Eliminating weeds — minimal two treatments. 5. Provide spike harrowing/ripping/tilling of compacted soils for beds. 6. Providing plant materials and related items. 7. Providing manufactured or stockpiled topsoil. 8. Providing expanded shale. 9. Providing organic professional compost. 10. Providing organic biological fertilizer. 11. Providing organic biological root stimulator. 12. Bed preparation and planting. 13. Bed preparation of existing planters under existing tree root systems. 14. Providing jute matting (mesh) with pins/stakes/staples for erosion control fabric. 15. Providing weed barrier under mulch topdressing. 16. Providing mulch topdressing. 17. Providing tree ground anchoring frame. 18. Providing edgings. 19. Providing filter fabric under aggregate areas. 20. Providing aggregates. 21. Providing boulders. 22. Providing organic herbicide and organic fungicide. 23. Providing organic insecticides. 24. Finished grading of planting areas. 25. Watering with water -wise practices to establish and not over -water plants. 26. Warranty and replacements. 1.3 REFERENCES A. The following Codes, Regulations, Reference Standards, and Specifications apply to work included in this Section and Section 32 93 00. LANDSCAPING March 30, 2026 3293 00- 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 CCA LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTS MARYS CREEK WRF 1. Codes and regulations of the jurisdictional authorities. 2. "REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS": a. AASHTO:M288. b. ASTM: A6, C33/C33M-18. c. American Standard for Nursery Stock, Edition approved April 14, 2014 by American Nursery and Landscape Association (ANSI 260.1- 2014) - plant materials. d. Hortus Third, 1976 - Cornell University - plant nomenclature. B. Observation at growing site does not preclude right of rejection at the Worksite. Plants damaged in transit or at the Worksite shall be rejected. C. Personnel: Perform work only with qualified personnel familiar with required landscaping methods and materials. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Weeds: Any plant not specified on the drawings or accepted as a substitute. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source quality control: Furnish certificates of inspection of landscape materials, to accompany shipments, as required by governmental authorities or as requested for inspection by Owner. Comply with applicable federal, state, county and local regulations governing landscape materials. B. Growing location: Furnish certificates showing where materials have been grown or balled and burlapped. C. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified with minimum seven (7) years documented experience. 2. Installer: Company specializing in performing the Work of this Section with minimum seven (7) years documented experience installing projects of similar size and scope. The Landscape Contractor shall furnish a list of references or previous work experience as requested by the Owner. The Landscape Contractor shall employ only skilled personnel and provide adequate supervision. D. Mockups: Contractor shall provide three (3) foot x three (3) foot representative mockups of each type of bed preparation and aggregate installation for approval by the Owner's Authorized Representative and the Landscape Architect to show compliance with Section 3 — Execution. Mock-ups that do not conform to the drawings, specs, and manufacturer's recommendations will be rejected. An in - place mock-up sample may be acceptable. By installing an in -place mock-up, the Contractor accepts the risk and bears the cost of removing and replacing rejected samples. Contractor shall receive final approval from the Owner's Authorized Representative prior to commencing balance of work. LANDSCAPING March 30, 2026 3293 00-2 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 CCA LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTS MARYS CREEK WRY 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Provide representative quantities (1 gallon plastic bag or container) of manufactured topsoil, expanded shale, organic professional compost, rustic cut mulch, and each type of aggregate. Samples shall be approved by Owner's Authorized Representative prior to installation. Attach product name, address of manufacturer and/or supplier and appropriate literature and composition of material or gradation for each sample. Literature or Product Data shall consist of manufacturer's current specifications, with catalog cuts, data sheets and installation instructions. Samples shall be submitted no less than sixty (60) days prior to installation. 1. Organic Biological Fertilizers: Copy of each products information labeled with manufacturer's name and address and analysis. Submit manufacturer's information or cut sheets on products. 2. Organic Biological Root Stimulator: Copy of product information labeled with manufacturer's name and address and analysis. Submit manufacturer's information or cut sheets on products. 3. Organic Herbicide: Copy of product information labeled with manufacturer's name and address and analysis. Submit manufacturer's information or cut sheets on products. 4. Organic Fungicide: Copy of product information labeled with manufacturer's name and address and analysis. Submit manufacturer's information or cut sheets on products. 5. Organic Insecticide(s): Copy of each products information labeled with manufacturer's name and address and analysis. Submit manufacturer's information or cut sheets on products. 6. Jute Matting (Mesh): Submit manufacturer's information or cut sheets and 12" square sample. 7. Staples (Stakes): Submit manufacturer's information or cut sheets and sample. 8. Weed Barrier - Recycled Newsprint Roll Stock Paper: Manufacturer's literature and 12" square sample. 9. Tree Anchoring System: Copy of product information labeled with manufacturer's name and address. Submit manufacturer's information or cut sheets on products. 10. Aluminum and/or Steel Edging: Manufacturer's literature and 12" long sample. 11. Filter Fabric: Copy of product information labeled with manufacturer's name and address and analysis. Submit manufacturer's information or cut sheets and 12" square sample. 12. Boulders: Submit photos from two (2) angles of each boulder with measuring stick. B. Plant Material Samples: Submit documentation no less than sixty (60) days prior to installation that all plant materials have been located and are ready to be secured. Arrange specific review procedure of plant materials at time of submission. Submittals and review shall be organized as follows: LANDSCAPING March 30, 2026 3293 00-3 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 CCA LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTS MARYS CREEK WRF 1. Preliminary Review: Submit representative photographs for review of all plant materials in the required sizes and in available quantity at no less than sixty (60) working days prior to shipment to the site. 2. Submittal shall include each of these items per plant: 1) a minimum of one (1) high quality color bond image or 2) one (1) color digital image. Include one (1) set for each plant type and size required for the project. The 8-1/2" x 11" sheet/image is to include the name and address of the supplier, size of the plant in the picture and Botanical and English name of the plant and variety/cultivar name. Digital submittals are preferred due to expediting time and for reduction in the carbon footprint. 3. Tree photographs shall include a person or device to determine scale, and shall include two (2) photographs of each tree type or group. The two (2) photographs shall be taken at approximately 90 degrees from each other. One (1) additional photograph shall be taken at the base of each tree to show root flare and root conditions at the soil surrounding the roof flare. 4. Provide any additional tree groups and specimen photographs as required to illustrate the quality and/or quantity of material. 5. Poor quality photographs, photographs that are not in color, not labeled, or photographs which do not adequately represent the plant material will be rejected. 6. Photograph Acceptance and Nursery Review: Acceptance of material through photographs/digital images does not preclude rejection of unsatisfactory material upon delivery. The Owner's Authorized Representative reserves the right to refuse review from photographs or at the grower if, in his judgment suitable material or sufficient quantities are not available. Contractor shall ensure a sufficient quantity of plants will be available whenever trips are arranged to a nursery for the purposes of tagging material for the project. 7. Specific sources of materials may be listed in the plant schedule for availability, size, quality control of plant character and for matching of specific plant growing conditions. 8. Unavailable Material: If proof is submitted that any plant specified is not obtainable, a proposal will be considered for use of the nearest equivalent size or variety with corresponding adjustment of Contract price. Substantiate such proof in writing no less than sixty (60) days prior to installation. C. Sources: Within at least sixty (60) days prior to delivery to site, notify Owner and Owner's Authorized Representative in writing of source of plant material and bed preparation materials required for the project. This data is to be furnished in addition to representative samples. D. Special Warranty: Submit written special warranty registered with manufacturer as specified in this Section. E. Provide documentation and testing of compost materials as specified in Parts 2 and 3 of this Section. F. Maintenance Instructions: Submit two (2) copies of typewritten and one (1) electronic copy of instructions for one (1) full year. Submit to Owner's Authorized Representative for approval. Submit two (2) copies and one (1) electronic copy of LANDSCAPING March 30, 2026 3293 00-4 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 CCA LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTS MARYS CREEK WRF revised instructions prior to expiration of Contractor's maintenance period(s) required under the contract. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS OR SITE CONDITIONS A. Verify and examine site conditions with the Owner's Authorized Representative. Proceed when official notice is given to the Contractor that the Work site is ready. Proceed with and complete the landscape work as rapidly as portions of the site become available. B. Planting Restrictions: Perform actual planting only when weather and soil conditions are suitable in accordance with locally accepted practice. Do not install plant life when ambient temperatures may drop below 35 degrees F or above 100 degrees F. Commence landscaping work when the Site is free of rocks and debris. All planting areas to be left at depth per drawing details/sections from finished grade by others for landscape contractor to add soil amendments. C. Protection: 1. Do not move equipment over existing or newly placed paving without approval of Owner's Authorized Representative. 2. Provide road -boarding to protect paving. 3. Protect paving, structures and any other site improvement from damage, with protection boards, ramps, and protective sheeting. D. Utilities: 1. Determine locations of underground utilities and perform work in a manner which is intended to avoid possible damage. Hand excavate, where required, to minimize possibility of damage to underground utilities. 2. Coordinate work with Owner's Authorized Representative to prevent damage to existing underground sprinkler (irrigation) system at trees. 3. Water is available on site. Refer to irrigation system drawings for proposed underground irrigation system. 1.8 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver packaged materials in sealed containers showing weight, analysis and name of manufacturer, supplier or grower. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery and while stored at the site. B. Storage: Store products with protection from weather or other conditions which would damage or impair the effectiveness of the product. Protect metal containers from sun during summer months with temperatures above 80 degrees F. C. Preparation of Plant Materials: 1. Balled and Burlapped (B&B) Plants: Dig and prepare shipment in a manner intended to protect roots. foliage and branches from damage and protect the shape, and future development. 2. Plants should bear label from the grower certifying genus and species. Labels should be securely attached and waterproof bearing legible designation of botanical and common name. Plants not labeled may be rejected. LANDSCAPING March 30, 2026 3293 00-5 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 CCA LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTS MARYS CREEK WRF D. Deliver trees, shrubs and other plants after preparation for planting have been completed and plant immediately. E. Damage: Protect plant material in transit and at the site. Material not properly protected and which is damaged will be rejected. F. Unloading, Handling and Staging of Trees: 1. Staging systems shall be prepared in advance to adequately hold trees above ground for optimum tree health prior to planting. Many times, even with the best planning and coordination, trees cannot be planted when they are delivered. 2. Use extreme caution when handling trees. Use a strap cradle, adequate for weight and size of tree and root ball, attached to the root ball to unload and move trees. Strapping and wire baskets can break or loosen. Never move, lift, or handle by attaching to or by putting pressure on the trunk. Be very careful not to damage or scar trunks and branches. 3. Prior to unloading, proper moisture shall be maintained in root balls. Trucks shall be staged in the shade prior to unloading. Unloading time shall be no more than two (2) hours per trunk. 4. Immediately after unloading, no more than one hour after unloading, stand the trees up to reduce risk of sun scald. Properly staged trees shall be standing, untied and spaced. 5. Remove cardboard trunk protector within forty-eight (48) hours of trees being stood upright to reduce the risk of damage. 6. Monitor moisture in the root ball by probing the soil with a soil probe and manage supplemental irrigation accordingly. Be careful not to over or under irrigate. 7. During cold weather periods, root balls must be protected from freezing temperatures. 8. Storage is at Contractor's own risk. G. Handling of Plant Materials: 1. Do not deliver plants until the site conditions are ready for planting. If planting is delayed, heel -in bare rooted or freshly dug plants in a bed containing adequate mulch to keep roots moist. Separate bundles and trim roots, if long or damaged, using sharp pruning shears. Place plants in flats, pots, or other containers in a sheltered spot protected from sun, wind and mechanical damage and keep roots moist. Storage is at Contractor's own risk. 2. Do not lift or handle any plants by tops, stems or trunks at any time. Do not bind or handle plants with wire or rope at any time. 1.9 MOCK-UPS A. Mockups of bed preparation shall be provided on site in two (2) locations with Owner and Owner's Authorized Representatives to show compliance with Section 3 — Execution. LANDSCAPING March 30, 2026 3293 00-6 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 CCA LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTS MARYS CREEK WRY B. Coordinate with General Contractor for sequencing of mock-ups to demonstrate soil preparation for planting beds. Mockup may be part of installed area if it shows compliance with Section 3 — Execution. C. Contractor shall demonstrate installation of the weed barrier with mulch topdressing prior to planting. D. Mockup(s) of each type of aggregate for installation shall be provided on site applied to depth over two (2) layers of filter fabric, unless noted otherwise, and reviewed by Owner and Owner's Authorized Representative. Mockup may be part of installed area if it shows compliance with Section 3 — Execution. E. Refer to Section 3.2 Site Preparation. 1.10 SEQUENCING A. Coordinate rough and landscape grading, soil preparation, irrigation, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that plant material can be supported and installed as indicated. B. Coordinate with General Contractor for sequencing of decomposed granite aggregate installation. Must occur after all other site work disturbance is complete. 1.11 SCHEDULING A. Submit a proposed work schedule to the Owner's Authorized Representative for approval at least sixty (60) days prior to start of work under this Section. After approval, no modification shall be made to this schedule without written authorization by the Owner. B. In general, the work shall proceed as rapidly as the site becomes available, consistent with normal seasonal limitations for planting work. 1.12 WARRANTY A. General: Warranties specified in this Section shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. In accordance with the General Provisions, warranty for plants and trees shall be valid for one (1) year after final acceptance. Replace dead materials and materials not in vigorous, thriving condition as soon as weather permits. The opinion of the Owner's Authorized Representative as to what constitutes a dead plant shall be final. C. Replace dead trees or trees not in vigorous, thriving condition as soon as weather permits. Replace trees, which have partially died thereby damaging shape, size, or symmetry. The opinion of the Owner's Authorized Representative as to what constitutes a dead plant shall be final. D. Replace plants and trees with same kind and size as originally planted at no cost to the Owner. Provide one (1) year warranty on replacement plants. Trees should be replaced at start of next planting or digging season. In such cases, remove dead trees immediately. Protect irrigation system, other piping conduit, or other work during replacement. Repair any damage immediately. LANDSCAPING March 30, 2026 3293 00-7 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 CCA LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTS MARYS CREEK WRF E. Warranty excludes replacement of plants after final acceptance because of injury by storm, drought, drowning, hail, freeze, insects, or diseases. F. Plants will be guaranteed to be true to species, variety or cultivar as specified. G. Warranty: Warrant that all shrubs and groundcover planted under this Contract will be healthy and in flourishing condition of active growth one (1) year from date of Final Acceptance. 1.13 REPLACEMENTS A. As soon as weather conditions permit, replace, without cost to Owner all dead plants and all plants not in a vigorous, thriving condition, as determined by Owner's Authorized Representative during and at the end of Warranty Period. B. General: 1. Plant materials exhibiting conditions which are determined as being unacceptable due to workmanship by the Contractor shall be repaired and/or replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. 2. Closely match replacements to adjacent specimens of the same species. Apply all requirements of this Specification to all replacements. C. Replacement Quantities: Contractor shall be held responsible for a maximum of two (2) replacements for each failed tree and shrub, and same area of ornamental grasses, yucca/hesperaloe, groundcover and perennial planting after final acceptance during the Warranty Period. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PLANTS A. General: Provide healthy, field -grown ball and burlapped plants or nursery -grown container and boxed plants, well -formed No. 1 grade from a recognized, local nursery, and of the species and variety shown on the drawings, well -developed branches conforming to and complying with the last edition of American Standard for Nursery Stock, Edition approved May 12, 2004 by American Nursery and Landscape Association (ANSI Z60.1-2004). Listed plant heights are from tops of root balls to nominal tops of plants. B. Provide only healthy, vigorous stock, grown under climatic conditions similar to conditions in the locality of the project and free of disease, insects, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots, sun -scald, injuries, abrasions, or disfigurement. Plants will have been grown within a two hundred and fifty (250) mile radius of the site. C. Vigor: Plants shall be sound, healthy and vigorous, well branched and densely foliated when in leaf. They shall be free of disease, insect pests, eggs, or larvae. They shall have healthy, well -developed, vigorous and fibrous root systems. Plants shall be free from physical damage or adverse conditions which would prevent thriving growth. D. Container and Boxed Stock material: 1. Verify that all container stock has been grown in the containers in which delivered for at least six (6) months, but not over two (2) years. LANDSCAPING March 30, 2026 3293 00-8 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 CCA LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTS MARYS CREEK WRF 2. Plants shall have a root ball size of minimum of ten (10) inches in diameter for each one (1) inch caliper, measured six (6) inches above root ball. 3. Root system development: a. Samples must prove to be free of kinked, circling or girdling roots and with no evidence of a pot-bound condition. b. Trees shall have been grown in heavy or heavy clay soil and irrigated with drip irrigation. Loose potting soils are not acceptable since root mass will flex with trunk sway and allow potential overturn of tree. c. Field grown plants recently planted into containers will be accepted if roots have developed into new heavy soils. d. A root system beginning with an exposed root collar and roots showing growing straight out from the trunk and uniformly spaced to create a firm and tight root ball that does not move or break when the tree trunk is firmly pushed. 4. Root flare of plant material shall be visible at nursery prior to delivery, and after transplanting into the landscape. 5. Root balls shall not be cracked or broken prior to shipment. 6. Do not remove self-locking tags prior to delivery to site. 7. Remove all weeds and other invasive plants from the base of the nursery plant's root container prior to delivery to site. E. Nursery grown B&B material: 1. Plants shall have a root ball size of minimum of ten (10) inches in diameter for each one (1) inch caliper, measured six (6) inches above root ball. 2. Root system development: a. All named cultivars shall be own root clones; no grafted or bud -grafted trees will be accepted. b. 100% mechanically root -pruned at least once and transplanted a minimum of three (3) times during the first three (3) years of the tree's life. c. Trees shall have been grown in heavy clay soil and irrigated with drip irrigation. d. Plants shall be well healed in for a minimum of thirty (30) days with a flush of new roots at the edge of the burlap prior to shipping. Recently dug plants will not be accepted. e. Trees root flare shall be visible with balanced structural roots and free of girdling roots and "J" shaped roots. f. Trees shall be well -supported within the root ball without any means of supplemental staking or support. 3. Ensure balls are firm, neat, slightly tapered, and well burlapped. 4. Root balls shall not be cracked or broken prior to shipment. 5. Root flare of plant material must be above ground and visible at nursery before harvest, prior to delivery, and after transplanting into the landscape. LANDSCAPING March 30, 2026 3293 00-9 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 CCA LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTS MARYS CREEK WRF 6. Root liner grown trees shall have been planted such that their root flare is visible above the finished grade of the liner. No buried tree flares will be submitted or accepted. 7. Do not remove self-locking tags prior to delivery to site. 8. Remove all weeds and other invasive plants from the base of the nursery plant's root ball prior to delivery to site. F. Shade and Ornamental Trees - Canopy development: 1. No. 1 grade nursery stock healthy, vigorous, full -branched, well -shaped, trunk diameter, and height requirements as specified. 2. Tree shall not show signs of prolonged moisture stress or over watering as indicated by wilted, shriveled, or dead leaves. 3. There shall be a strong central straight leader to the top of the canopy. The tip of the leader on the main trunk must be intact and it's terminal bud must be the highest part of the tree. If the leader was headed, a new leader (with a live terminal bud) at least one-half the diameter of the pruning cut shall be present. 4. Trunk shall be free from wounds, sunburned areas, conks, wood cracks, sap leakage, signs of boring insects, galls, cankers, girdling ties or lesions. 5. No branch can have a diameter greater than 2/3 the trunk diameter measured directly above the branch crotch. The tree will have no inclusions or co - dominant branches. 6. The tree crown shall be structurally uniform. Branches shall be evenly distributed around the trunk and no branches clustered together. The crown shall be full of foliage which is evenly distributed around the tree. 7. Trees shall not have dead, diseased, broken, distorted, or otherwise injured branches. 8. Trees that have had branches tipped or cropped will not be accepted. 9. Provide trees with full rounded crowns, meeting height and spread standards after pruning. No flat sided trees or trees with open areas on any side will be acceptable. Trees shall be consistently superior in form and branching, and typical of the growth habit of their species unless otherwise specified. G. Tree Caliper Measurement Requirements: for a single stem tree, the diameter (caliper) of the trunk shall be measured twelve (12) inches above the top of the root ball for a tree having a diameter up to and including eight (8) inches, and measured at four and one-half feet above the top of the root ball for a tree having a diameter of more than eight (8) inches. For multi -stem trees, the diameter of the trunk measured at the narrowest point below branching when branching occurs higher than twelve (12) inches above the top of the root ball. When branching occurs at or lower than twelve (12) inches above the top of the root ball, caliper means the diameter of the largest stem plus the average diameter of the remaining stems, measured at four and one-half (4.5) feet above the top of the root ball. H. Shrubs, ornamental grasses, yuccas, hesperaloe, opuntia, groundcovers and perennials: Nursery grown, healthy, vigorous, of normal habit of growth for species, free from disease, insect eggs, and larvae. Specified sizes are before pruning and measured with branches in normal position. Plants to be well rooted and established in the container. LANDSCAPING March 30, 2026 329300-10 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 CCA LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTS MARYS CREEK WRY I. Plants shall conform to the sizes and quality notes in the plant list and/or as indicated, with the exception of that larger plants than those specified may be used if approved by the Owner's Authorized Representative. Use of larger plants shall not increase the contract price. Specified sizes shall be after pruning, and plants shall be measured with their branches in normal position. J. Pruning: Do not prune plants before delivery. If pruning is necessary, prune with direction from Owner's Authorized Representative (Landscape Architect). K. Plant protection during shipping: Wrap canopy of plants prior to loading to ensure that branch structures are protected, and that wind damage is minimized. Shrubs and smaller plant material will be handled and loaded to protect character and form of each plant. Removal of protection strapping and wrapping shall be handled with care to prevent damage to the plant material once it is delivered to the site. Damaged materials will be subject to rejection. L. Upon delivery to site: 1. Reject trees with cracked, lose or broken balls when frame or burlap is removed at time of planting. 2. Trees will be individually approved or rejected by the Owner's Authorized Representative on site. 3. Trees: Free of physical damage such as scrapes, bark abrasions, or split branches. 4. Trees for planting adjacent to sidewalk shall be pruned and branched up to seven (7) foot height above the finished grade of the sidewalk or accessible surface for pedestrian clearances as directed by the Owner's Authorized Representative. 2.2 STOCKPILED TOPSOIL — Refer to Section 32 9200 - 2.4. 2.3 MANUFACTURED TOPSOIL — Refer to Section 32 9200 2.5. 2.4 EXPANDED SHALE A. Expanded Shale: shall be rotary kiln expanded shale and clay lightweight aggregate as manufactured and supplied by Trinity Expanded Shale and Clay, Arlington, TX (817-635-8500), local representative: Eric Nelson, cell (817-635-8541) or equivalent as determined by the Owner's Authorized Representative. 2.5 COMPOST - Professional Compost - 100% plant based - Refer to Section 32 9200 -2.6. 2.6 ORGANIC BIOLOGICAL FERTILIZER — Refer to Section 32 9200 - 2.7. 2.7 ORGANIC BIOLOGIAL ROOT STIMULATOR A. Homogenous, liquid concentrated all organic fertilizer containing: kelp, fish hydrolysate, blackstrap molasses, humic acid, fulvic acid, select amino acids profile, select natural plan hormone/stimulator/vitamin profile, calcium phosphate, arcanite, selected sugars, tryptic soy agar; no heat used in the manufacturing process to ensure purity of ingredients: MicroLife Super Seaweed 0-0-0.03. LANDSCAPING March 30, 2026 3293 00- 11 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 CCA LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTS MARYS CREEK WRF B. Manufacturer/Supplier: San Jacinto Environmental Supplies, (713) 957-0909, local representative: Lanse Fullinwider, cell: (214-534-2317), or equivalent product as approved by the Owner's Authorized Representative or Landscape Architect. C. See 3.10 for application rates of product to trees. 2.8 POST -EMERGENCE FOR WEED REMOVAL - ORGANIC HERBICIDE AND HAND PULLING - Refer to 32 9200 - 2.8. 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS PLANTING MATERIALS A. Wrapping Material: Do not use! B. Tree Paint: Do not use! 2.10 WEED BARRIER AND TOPDRESSING A. Weed Barrier for Planting Areas: Recycled roll stock newsprint paper as manufactured in the U.S. Available: Global Industrial at (1-888-978-7759), www.globalindustrial.com; or Uline (1-800-958-5463) / (1-800-295-5510), www.uline.com; or Pack Secure at (1-888-511-7225), www.packsecure.com, or equivalent product as determined by the Owner's Authorized Representative. B. Mulch for Planting Beds and Tree Watering Wells at Turf — material screened to not exceed eight (8) inches: 1. Rustic Cut Hardwood — native hardwoods; free of: man-made foreign material, lumber, treated materials, woodmill sawdust or pine bark; hammer mill processed, decomposed - heat sterilized two (2) times to remove latent weed seeds, aged for minimum two (2) to four (4) months, screened to remove fines. No soft green or unprocessed materials allowed. 96% of material will pass through a one (1) inch screen with additional screening down to three - eighths (3/8) inch, 98% of material will not exceed eight (8) inches in length. Material shall have no pungent odors, but will have an earthy smell. As processed and supplied by Soil Building Systems, 2101 Walnut Hill Lane, Dallas, TX 75229 (972-831-8181), attention: Baron Ablon. 2. Tree Mulch (hammer mill processed native hardwood mulch) custom screened and composted material to match properties of mulch noted above and to not exceed eight (8) inches in length. a. Product must have been heat sterilized (2) times to remove latent weed seeds. b. Aged for minimum two (2) months. c. No soft green or unprocessed materials allowed. d. As custom processed and supplied by Living Earth (LETCO), Dallas, TX, if determined to be an equivalent by the Owner's Authorized Representative. 2.11 EROSION CONTROL FABRIC - JUTE MATTING (MESH) A. Provide fire retardant jute matting of a uniform, plain weave with warp, and woof yams of approximately the same size. B. The physical requirements shall be: LANDSCAPING March 30, 2026 329300-12 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 CCA LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTS MARYS CREEK WRY 1. Width: 45 inches to 48 inches, (±) 1 inch. 2. 78 warp ends per width. 3. 41 weft ends per yard. 4. Weight - 1.80 lbs. (average) per running yard. C. Provide biodegradable stakes: Six (6) inch Ecoduty stakes as manufactured by Ecoturf Midwest, Inc. 950 N. Oaklawn Avenue, Elmhurst, IL 60126, www.ecoturfmidwest.com, (630-350-9518 or equivalent as approved by the Owner's Authorized Representative. D. Provide staples or pins: Twelve (12) inch high -carbon steel pins to secure fabric to slope per manufacturer's recommendations. 2.12 ANCHORING FRAME FOR ORNAMENTAL AND SHADE TREES A. For anchoring of tree root balls in planting bed areas and native grass areas. B. Re -bar anchoring ring with three (3) six (6) inch U brackets, color: natural metal or painted, and three (3) separate anchors with S -hook and tightening strap. C. Anchoring rings to have two (2) cuts per ring, four (4) total, for fail -points. D. Below Grade Safety Stakes (ground anchors) as manufactured by Tree Stake Solutions, local representative: Jeff Tuley, (903-676-6143), www.treestakesolutions.com, or equivalent as approved by the Owner's Authorized Representative. Item # Description 15-BG 10-15 gal. or 17" root ball with 3 — V68 Anchors 30-BG 20-30 gal. or 22" root ball with 3 — V68 Anchors 45/65BG 45-65 gal. or 27-30" root ball with 3 — V68 Anchors 100-BG 95-100 gal. or 36" root ball with 3 — V68 Anchors 150-BG 150 gal. or 42" root ball with 3 — V68 Anchors 2.13 EDGING (refer to plans for type and application) A. Steel Edging: 3/16" x 4" heavy duty steel edging, color: black; Ryerson or equivalent as approved by the Owner's Authorized Representative. B. Aluminum Edging: PermaStripTM FLO Series — L-shaped Aluminum Edging with drain port slots at 12" o.c., eight (8) foot sections with notches for bending, 3/16 inch x 3.5 inch, mill finish, heavy duty as supplied by Permaloc, 1(800)358-9660, www.permaloc.com, or equivalent as approved by the Owner's Authorized Representative. 2.14 FILTER FABRIC A. In accordance with ASTM D5261 and ASTMD 5199. B. In accordance with the following additional requirements: 1. Non -woven pervious filter fabric weighing approximately 7.2 ounces per square yard; free of defects. LANDSCAPING March 30, 2026 3293 00- 13 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 CCA LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTS MARYS CREEK WRF 2. Fabric: Long chain synthetic polymer composed of at least 85 percent by weight of propylene, ethylene, ester, amide or vinyl -chloride, and with stabilizers or inhibitors to make fabric resistant to deterioration due to ultra violet and heat exposure. 3. Fabric formed or treated so that filaments retain their positions relative to each other. 4. Edges selvaged. 5. Physical strength: a. Grab Tensile: 205 -pound minimum in each direction, ASTM D4632. b. Grab Elongation: 50 percent, ASTM D4632. c. Trapezoid Tear: 85 -pound minimum, ASTM D4533. d. CBR Puncture: 535 -pound minimum, ASTM D6241. e. Water Flow Rate: 90-gpm/ft2, ASTM D449 1. 6. Percent of open area: Not less than five percent nor more than six percent. 7. Apparent opening size (A.O.S.): 70 - 100 US Standard Sieve, ASTM D4751. 8. Securing Pins: As recommended by manufacturer of filter fabric. 9. Filter Fabric to be TerraTex® N08 as manufactured by Hanes Geo Components, 815 Buxton Street, Winston-Salem, NC 27101, 1(888)239-4539, (336)747-1600, or equivalent as approved by the Owner's Authorized Representative. 2.15 AGGREGATE — ref. plans for type and where shown in plans and per details A. Small Native Aggregate — size: small, graded mixed sizes, washed prior to delivery, as supplied by Jewell Old Castle, Dallas, TX, or equivalent source from same quarry (color, gradation mix, texture) as approved by the Owner's Authorized Representative. 2.16 BOULDERS — where shown on plans (if used) A. Moss Boulders — shape: natural without fresh chips or fractures, sized: 24" x 36" approximately, washed prior to delivery to remove loose dirt, do not remove moss or vegetation, as supplied by Jewell Old Castle, Dallas, TX, or as supplied by Vaquero Stone Supply, Dallas, TX, or Chesshir Stone & Rock Supply, Dallas, TX as approved by the Owner's Authorized Representative. 2.17 ORGANIC FUNGICIDES — Refer to Section 32 9200-2.10. 2.18 ORGANIC INSECTICIDES A. Soft Bodied Insects (aphids, mites, thrips, white flies, lace bugs, etc.): 1. EcoSMART® Organic Insecticides as manufactured by a division of the Kittrich® Corporation, Atlanta, GA 30336, (714-736-1011). 2. Neem Oil. B. Scale: Use 2 ounces of Orange Oil mixed with 1 ounce of Neem Oil to a gallon of water. Spray weekly for 3 weeks. LANDSCAPING March 30, 2026 329300-14 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 CCA LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTS MARYS CREEK WRY C. Caterpillars, Army Worms, Sod Webworms: Use Bacillus Thuringiensis (BT) biological agent. D. Chinch Bugs: 1. EcoSMART® Granular, as manufactured by a division of the Kittrich® Corporation, Atlanta, GA 30336, (714-736-1011). 2.19 ORGANIC INSECTICIDE - FIRE ANTS — Refer to Section 32 9200-2.11. 2.20 WATER A. Potable. Available on site. Refer to the irrigation specifications and plans. Truck or other means of watering shall be required to establish native grass areas behind the sidewalks where no existing or temporary irrigation system exists. 2.21 MACHINERY AND EQUIPMENT A. Machinery requirements listed under this Section are NOT intended to be restrictive of specific manufacturers or models, unless so stated. Specific mention of the manufacturers is intended as a guide to illustrate the final product of the maintenance operations desired. All equipment used shall be and maintained in top working condition at all times. B. Pruning and grinding tools shall be maintained in safe, working condition, cutting edges shall be sharp at all times. C. Fertilizer and insecticide spreaders (for organic products) shall be of the hand-held or cyclone type. Vehicle -mounted or push cyclone spreaders shall be allowed. Spreaders shall be in a safe working condition at all times. D. Insecticide and fungicide sprayers (for organic products) shall be of the hand-held, backpack, or vehicle -mounted type. Sprayers shall be in a safe working condition at all times. E. The Contractor shall be responsible for any grade, plant material (native grass, trees, shrubs, etc.), or hardscape amenity (fence, pavement, arbor, steel edging, stone wall, etc.) damage caused by the spreader or sprayer and the application process. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Verify locations of new and existing underground utilities, field measurements, surfaces, substrates and conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work. 1. Verify that all planting areas are clear of stones larger than one (1) inch diameter, weeds, debris and other extraneous materials. 2. Verify that grades are within one (1) inch plus or minus of the required finished grades. Report all variations in writing. B. Soil Moisture: LANDSCAPING March 30, 2026 3293 00- 15 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 CCA LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTS MARYS CREEK WRF Inadequate Moisture: Do not commence work of this section when soil moisture content is so great that excessive compaction will occur, nor when it is so dry that dust will form in air or that clods will not break readily. Apply water, as necessary, to bring soil to an optimum moisture content for planting. C. By beginning Work, Contractor accepts conditions and assumes responsibility for correcting unsuitable conditions encountered at no additional cost to the owner. 3.2 SITE PREPARATION A. Coordinate with General Contractor for scheduling and sequencing of installation of planting bed areas to ensure that the areas are protected from construction sediment runoff. B. Examine rough excavated grade/subgrade for planting areas and verify conditions under which work is to be performed. Do not proceed with work until all grading and related work is completed in a satisfactory manner so that the landscape installation can proceed. All lumps, clods, and debris over two (2) inches in diameter shall be removed from the Worksite. C. Delineate bed areas and receive approval from Owner's Authorized Representative prior to starting work. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing site conditions. 3.3 BED PREPARATION AT PLANTING BED AREAS A. Ensure rough grading of planting beds is provided to grade elevation to allow for amendment installation and drainage for positive surface flow for runoff. B. Coordinate for irrigation installation to allow for plant placement and for height of heads relative to fmished topdressed beds. C. Weed and invasive vegetation removal: 1. Organic Herbicide: Treat weeds and invasive vegetation with organic herbicide to eradicate any material growing after rough grading for beds. D. Thoroughly clear and remove the existing weeds and grass roots upon organic herbicide's completed action by grubbing off all plant parts and root systems to depth to allow for proposed planting bed soil amendments and topdressing, and to prevent re -growth of removed plant. E. Thoroughly rip/disrupt/break-up/shatter the soil to a minimum depth of fourteen (14) inches due to typical construction site compaction. Re -compact to industry standards using a standard gill or comparable piece of equipment. Remove non -soil materials and construction debris such as wood, rock, brick, cement, pipe, sheetrock, metal, paint, plastic, glass, etc. and unacceptable clays, then re -grade subsoil to established grades for proper drainage of planting beds. F. Ripping/disrupting/breaking-up/shattering of the soils should occur prior to irrigation line installation. If the native grass sprinkler system has already been installed, then it will be necessary to stake heads and to take necessary measures to prevent damage to the system. G. Upon delivery of topsoil and planting amendments, ensure that the material is protected and is not contaminated with any materials or soils on the site prior to installation. LANDSCAPING March 30, 2026 329300-16 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 CCA LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTS MARYS CREEK WRY H. Delineate bed areas and receive approval from Owner's Authorized Representative prior to starting work. I. Open bed areas to receive shrubs, groundcover, ornamental grass and perennials to be prepared as follows to provide a stratified bed mix: 1. Install two (2) inches (settled depth) of topsoil. 2. Till to depth of ten (10) inches to mix topsoil thoroughly with native disrupted soil. 3. Install three (3) inches (settled depth) of expanded shale. 4. Till to a depth of ten (10) inches to mix additives thoroughly with topsoil/native soil. 5. Install three (3) inches (settled depth) of organic compost. 6. Apply organic biological fertilizer at rate per manufacturer's recommendations for bed preparation at forty (40) lbs. per one thousand (1,000) square feet. 7. Till compost and organic biological fertilizer to a depth of ten (10) inches to stratify into shale/soil mix. J. Set beds to finished grade of media to allow for topdressing installation depth. K. Coordinate installation and placement of irrigation mainline at edge of bed to ensure that they are clear of tree root ball installation and do not impede planting. Lateral irrigation lines for bubblers, drip irrigation and spray heads shall be provided per irrigation plans. L. Coordinate installation of plants in existing beds under existing trees to ensure full 100% irrigation coverage from existing irrigation system. Modify heads accordingly for throw pattern if necessary. M. Water beds to promote germination of dormant weeds and grasses, if media has been contaminated or mixed with soils containing native weed seeds prior to installation in planter beds. N. Treat weeds in bed with application of organic herbicide. O. Remove weeds after organic herbicide treatment period by hand digging. 3.4 BED PREPARATION AT BEDS UNDER EXISTING TREES TO REMAIN (if applicable) A. Bed areas to be prepared for pocket planting as follows: 1. Hand rake surface of area under tree canopy to remove debris and trash. 2. Remove all weeds by hand. 3. Carefully hand dig planting holes at 1.5 to 2 times the diameter of the plants container at spacing shown for plant material where root gaps allow. 4. Hand mix organic compost with excavated soil. 5. Plant such that top of root flare is at least one-half (1/2) inch to one (1) inch above the finished grade. 6. Backfill around based of plant and water in to settle and compact soils. 7. Topdress area under tree with two (2) to three (3) inches of rustic cut hardwood mulch depending on the size of the container installed. Hold mulch away from root flare of plants, and DO NOT cover the crown roots of any plant material. LANDSCAPING March 30, 2026 3293 00- 17 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 CCA LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTS MARYS CREEK WRF 3.5 PLANT PREPARATION AT HOLDING AREA PRIOR TO INSTALLATION AT BED AREAS A. Contractor shall completely remove all weeds, vines or plant seedlings, including their root system, growing at top of container or on top of the root ball to ensure that these invasive non -specified plants do not gain foothold to establish in the planting beds and cause additional maintenance to remove. B. Removal and disposal of all weeds, vines or plant seedlings shall occur prior to any plant moving for installation or placement in the planting beds. 3.6 TOP DRESSING PLANTING BEDS (WEED BARRIER) A. After finished grade has been approved, top dress planting bed areas first with eight (8) rolled layers of recycled roll -stock newsprint paper, as specified in 2.9 A., to provide a weed barrier. B. Then top dress bed areas with rustic cut hardwood mulch to a depth of three (3) inches compacted depth. C. In planting beds, this top dressing occurs prior to plant installation. Delay this operation until near final acceptance. D. Top dressing must achieve specified depth to attain final acceptance. E. Hold mulches back to expose the flare of the plant, once the plant is installed, or tree trunk at the root ball if in planting bed. F. DO NOT cover the crown root of any plant material. 3.7 PLANTING OF PLANTING BEDS A. After topdressing has been installed Contractor shall mark proposed locations for plants with contractor spray paint or lay out plants over top of topdressing at required spacing. Obtain approval from Owner's Authorized Representative. B. The Owner's Authorized Representative reserves right to interchange or shift locations of plants prior to planting. C. Once sprayed locations have been approved by Owner's Authorized Representative, pull back topdressing layer of mulch to expose the area of newsprint where the plant will be located. D. Carefully cut cross -shaped slits to provide an opening for the plant. Roll/pull back the cut paper for plant installation. E. Plant in pits two (2) times greater in diameter than root balls or container diameter. Remove all burlap, ropes, wires and strings from the rootball prior to planting. F. Remove the container from the prepared plant. G. Score the root ball vertically at four (4) equal points around the edge prior to planting. H. Plant the noted sized plants such that top of the root ball at the flare of the plant is: 1. One and one half (1 1/2) inch above finished grade of the weed barrier for plants in two (2) gallon or larger sized containers. 2. One (1) inch above the top of the weed barrier for plants in containers at one (1) gallon or five (5) inch pots. LANDSCAPING March 30, 2026 329300-18 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 CCA LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTS MARYS CREEK WRY 3. One-half (1/2) above the top of the weed barrier for smaller plant containers and plugs. I. Backfill to depths of root balls with planting media. Carefully settle by watering to prevent air pockets. Water in thoroughly. J. Fold the cut back sections up to the root flare of the plant and pull compost/mulch topdressing back to cover the newsprint. K. Hold mulch back to keep the root flare exposed and to keep moisture away from foliage base and prevent yellowing. L. Option for plants with aggregate topdressing (in lieu of mulch): 1. Install three (3) settled inches of pre -washed aggregate topdressing at planter bed area over top of weed barrier or filter fabric (refer to details) and to adjacent atrium drains if in bed area. 2. Aggregate top dressing must achieve specified depth to attain final acceptance and taper to base of plant without covering crown root. M. Carefully prune plants to remove dead or broken branches and hand -rake bed areas to smooth even surfaces. 3.8 PLANTING OF PLANTING BEDS WITH AGGREGATE A. After finished grade elevation has been established, minus aggregate topdressing thickness, and irrigation has been installed, top dress bed areas first with two (2) layers of filter fabric per 3.17 with two (2) inch lap up sides of bed at walk, curb and/or edging. B. Contractor shall mark proposed locations for plants with contractor spray paint. Obtain approval from Owner's Authorized Representative. C. The Owner's Authorized Representative reserves right to interchange or shift locations of plants prior to planting. D. Once sprayed locations have been approved by Owner's Authorized Representative, then carefully cut cross -shaped opening slits to provide an opening for the plants without damage to the irrigation (drip) system and per location of the drip emitters. E. Plant in pits two (2) times greater in diameter than root balls or container diameter. F. Remove the container from the prepared plant. G. Score the root ball vertically at four (4) equal points around the edge prior to planting. H. Plant hesperaloe (shrub) such that top of the root ball at the flare of the plant is: 1. One and one half (1 1/2) inch above finished grade of the filter fabric for plants in two (2) gallon or larger sized containers. I. Backfill to depths of root balls with planting media. Carefully settle by watering to prevent air pockets. Water in thoroughly. J. Fold the cut back sections up to the root flare of the plant and pull aggregate topdressing back to cover the filter fabric K. Install three (3) settled inches of pre -washed aggregate topdressing over planter bed area per details. Refer to 3.16 for additional requirements of aggregate installation. LANDSCAPING March 30, 2026 3293 00- 19 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 CCA LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTS MARYS CREEK WRF L. Aggregate top dressing must achieve specified depth to attain final acceptance and taper to base of plant without covering crown root. M. Carefully prune plants to remove dead or broken branches and hand -rake areas to smooth even surfaces. 3.9 TREE PIT PERCOLATION TESTING A. For all Canopy Shade and Ornamental Trees locations: 1. Stake locations for approval by Owner's Authorized Representative prior to excavation. 2. Percolation test for trees in turf or planting beds, aggregate beds (if applicable), and turf beds: After approval of tree locations, excavate pit and perform percolation test. The pit shall be the same depth as the height of the root ball or slightly less so that the root ball sits approximately two (2) inches above surrounding grade. The pit shall be dug square so that the pits are twelve (12) inches or more greater in diameter than root balls for trees in planter beds or two (2) times the diameter of the root ball for trees in turf areas. Fill excavated pits with water and wait until next day. If the water level has not dropped at least six (6) inches within twelve (12) to twenty-four (24) hours, then notify the Owner's Authorized Representative. An Owner's Authorized Representative must be present to monitor and record the results of the percolation test. 3. Option: If shallow rock layers are encountered, the bottom of the tree pit may need to be fractured up with a jack hammer to allow drainage. Provide testing as noted in 2 above for determination. 4. Option: If there is a high water table in the area, then a tree drainage system may be required. Provide testing as noted in 2 above for determination. 5. Option: Auger a subdrain sump. Provide testing as noted in 2 above for determination. 6. Option: Install tree root flare elevation at six (6) inches higher than finished grade if the above conditions fail. 7. Install the tree drainage system as approved if needed and mark to prevent damage during tree anchoring. 3.10 CANOPY AND ORNAMENTAL TREE PLANTING A. General Planting Requirements for all Canopy Shade and Ornamental Trees: 1. Prepare trees: Remove all girdling roots, circling roots, spider roots, excess soil and other vegetative weeds or vines completely from the top of the root ball to expose the tree's natural root flare top of the root ball for installation. 2. Handling trees: Use extreme caution. Use a strap cradle (adequate for weight and size of root ball) attached to root ball to unload and move trees. Strapping and wire basket can break or loosen. 3. Never move, lift or handle by attaching to or by putting pressure on the trunk. Be certain that equipment, including straps, chains, and cradles, are rated for the weights of the trees being lifted. LANDSCAPING March 30, 2026 329300-20 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 CCA LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTS MARYS CREEK WRY 4. Face tree to give best appearance and to allow for required branching height clearance above walks and streets. Provide branching orientation turned to provide for best growth pattern to prevent conflict with vehicles or adjacent structures. Receive approval from the Owner's Authorized Representative or Landscape Architect prior to final installation to prevent further handling or damage to the root system. 5. Handle tree only by root ball. 6. Maintain tree in a straight and plumb position. 7. After above items have been completed, remove synthetic wrap, cardboard packaging, and cut/remove the wire basket down to the bottom of the tree pit. Remove the burlap from the top portions of the root ball. 8. Position tree anchoring frame over top of root ball and install ground anchors to align to frame above. Connect anchoring hooks and adjust tree to ensure it is plumb and anchored securely to the subgrade per manufacturer's directions prior to starting backfill. Refer to tree anchoring details for further information. 9. Backfill the lower portion against the root ball as noted per specific requirements of B. and C. below. 10. Saturate the planting hole with water after backfilling is one half (1/z) complete to aid removal of air from the backfill. 11. After initial backfill, watering, and the tree is plumb, then add backfill to nine (9) inches below finished grade, saturate planting hole and adjust root ball, if necessary, to make tree straight and plumb. 12. Backfill remaining balance of fill at top of root ball as noted per B. and C. below. 13. Remove all remaining shipping straps, tags, tapes, ties, stakes and other items from the trunk and canopy of the tree. 14. Provide watering dam at the edge of the tree's drip line/canopy edge to keep the tree's root flare fully exposed. 15. Provide and apply organic root simulator at one (1) to two (2) ounces per gallon of water. Soak roots well. 16. If rock is encountered: a. Owner's Representative may select alternative location. Location shall not impede visibility triangles. b. Rock shall be jack -hammered and removed to a minimum of six (6) inches below the plant if an alternative location cannot be selected and tree drainage pits shall be installed. B. Canopy Shade and Ornamental Trees in Planting Beds: 1. Excavate square tree pits twelve (12) inches greater in diameter than root balls or container diameter. 2. Rip bottom and sides of pit to break up construction compaction, and then recompact bottom only by hand. LANDSCAPING March 30, 2026 3293 00-21 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 CCA LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTS MARYS CREEK WRF 3. Place tree directly into excavated pit such that the trunk flare will be two (2) inches above surrounding finished grade in planter bed. Refer to planting details for cross-section of tree planters. 4. Backfill the lower portion of tree pit to not more than one half (1/z) the depth of the root ball with excavated native soils. 5. After initial backfill, watering, and the tree is plumb, then add backfill to nine (9) inches below finished grade, saturate planting hole and adjust root ball, if necessary, to make tree straight and plumb. 6. Backfill the top nine (9) inches with adjacent amended planting media blended with two (2) ounces of organic biological fertilizer per each five (5) gallon increment in tree root ball size and thoroughly saturate top backfill layer with water to aid removal of air pockets. 7. Provide top dressing per 3.6 for planting beds. C. Canopy Shade and Ornamental Trees in Turf Areas: 1. Till soil to ten (10) inch depth within ten (10) foot radius of tree for trees in native grass or turf areas. 2. Excavate and plant tree in square pits two (2) times greater in diameter than root balls or container diameter. 3. Rip bottom and sides of pit to break up construction compaction, and then recompact bottom only by hand. 4. Place tree directly into excavated pit such that the trunk flare will be two (2) inches above surrounding finished grade in turf area. Refer to planting details for cross-section of tree planters. 5. Backfill the lower portion of tree pit to not more than one half (1/2) the depth of the root ball with excavated native soils. 6. Saturate the planting hole with water after backfilling is one half (1/2) complete to aid removal of air from the backfill. 7. After initial backfill, watering, and the tree is plumb, then add backfill to nine (9) inches below finished grade, saturate planting hole and adjust root ball, if necessary, to make tree straight and plumb. 8. Backfill the top nine (9) inches with mix of one (1) part compost to one (1) part native stockpiled/manufactured topsoil blended with two (2) ounces of organic biological fertilizer per each five (5) gallon increment in tree root ball size and thoroughly saturate top backfill layer with water to aid removal of air pockets. 9. Topdressing — See 3.13 below, similar. 3.11 TREE SAUCERS A. Form a watering saucer around each new tree per construction drawings. Keep root flare exposed and keep watering saucer at edges of tree root ball. Saucer shall be no higher than three (3) inches. B. Contractor is responsible for deep watering trees a minimum of once (1) per week until final acceptance and as needed to promote growth. LANDSCAPING March 30, 2026 329300-22 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 CCA LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTS MARYS CREEK WRF 3.12 TREE ROOT BALL ANCHORING A. Anchor trees prior to backfilling to ensure ground anchors are firmly into existing subbase. B. Anchor all trees as detailed and per manufacturer's requirements. C. Take precautions during staking operation to prevent damage or injury to roots and irrigation or other underground utility lines. 3.13 TOPDRESSING TREES IN TURF AREAS A. After watering dam has been approved, top dress root zone area first with eight (8) rolled layers of recycled roll -stock newsprint paper, as specified in 2.8 A., to provide a weed barrier. B. Then top dress tree root balls with rustic cut mulch to a depth of three (3) inches. C. Top dressing must achieve specified depth to attain final acceptance. D. Hold mulches back to expose the flare of the tree trunk at the root ball. 3.14 PRUNING OF NEW TREES A. Prune trees to preserve natural character of plant. Remove sucker growth, broken or badly bruised branches, and crossed branches. B. Thin native trees heavier than nursery grown plants. C. When directed by the Owner's Authorized Representative, remove approximately one-third of wood by thinning. Do not cut back terminal branches. 3.15 EDGING A. Refer to the drawings for type of edging specified at specific locations. B. Provide edging where noted on Drawings on -grade at interface of turf bed to planting bed. C. On -grade: Set edging as indicated in true lines as designed with top of edging two (2) to three (3) inches above finish grade. Receive approval from Owner's Authorized Representative for layout of edging prior to installation. Refer to details for additional requirements. 3.16 AGGREGATE AND BOULDERS (if applicable) — Refer to plans and details for specific conditions A. Verify location and layout of aggregate with Owner's Authorized Representative prior to commencing work. B. Protect and cover surrounding surfaces prior to application. C. Subgrade Preparation: per manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Excavate and shape foundation soils to provide for full depth and coverage of aggregate/river rock as indicated on the details and relative to the adjacent top of pavement. 2. Confirm foundation soil meets specified compaction through proof rolling or other conventional method and is examined by the Owner's Authorized Representative. If unacceptable foundation soils are encountered, excavate LANDSCAPING March 30, 2026 3293 00-23 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 CCA LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTS MARYS CREEK WRF affected areas and replace these areas with suitable quality material as approved by the Owner's Authorized Representative. D. Edge aggregate beds with edging per details and where indicated on plans. E. Filter fabric installation under aggregate: 1. Underlay area to receive aggregate with two (2) layers of filter fabric with each layer laid perpendicular to the other with six (6) inch overlaps. 2. Apply filter fabric on bottoms and sides of bed to lap up back of pavements or edging a minimum of two (2) inches and secure for aggregate installation. F. Boulders (if applicable): Place and install boulders over top of filter fabric under direction of Owner's Authorized Representative. G. Decomposed Granite (if applicable): Install three and one-half (3.5) to four (4) inch thick layer of natural decomposed granite in two (2) equal thickness compacted layers drum rolled to level and compacted and sloped with grade of adjacent surfaces to allow site drainage. H. Aggregate: 1. Install three and one-half (3 1/z) inch thick layer of pre -washed aggregate in two (2) compacted layers to fill gaps between the stones. 2. Washed River Rock (if applicable): Install four (4) inch thick layer of pre - washed river rock in two (2) layers to fill gaps between the lower stones such that no filter fabric is visible. 3. Fines of aggregates shall not be dumped on top of the graded aggregates, but shall be buried under the aggregates or hauled away. 4. Areas with excessive fines on top will be reworked as needed, or additional aggregate added to provide consistent appearance of graded aggregate size over surface of beds. I. Fill to minus one quarter (1/4) inch from top of pavement and edging elevation, where applicable, and provide positive grade to ensure water does not pond or sit flat and settle. J. Trim any exposed filter fabric so that it is not visible. K. Remove any debris from other trades, wrong type/color aggregates, and trash so aggregate surface is uniform in appearance. L. Wash larger aggregates once (1) after placing. Wash or sweep aggregate as needed after installation so that it is clean and without debris. M. Rake aggregate or decomposed granite surface as needed after installation so aggregate is clean, level and without any debris at final acceptance. N. Keep root flare of plants exposed and irrigation head flush with top of decomposed granite, aggregate or river rock, if applicable. 3.17 JUTE MATTING (MESH) A. Install jute matting in overlapping linear patterns with the direction of slope. Secure into grade and along slope per details and manufacturer's instructions with ground pins/stakes/staples at spacing recommended and as shown. LANDSCAPING March 30, 2026 329300-24 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 CCA LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTS MARYS CREEK WRY 3.18 NEW TREES A. Trees shall be continuously and routinely inspected for distress caused by construction activities. Notify Owner's Authorized Representative at first sign of distress. B. Any Fire Ant mounds around or on top of a new or protected tree root zone shall be treated immediately and the mound removed physically. Do not allow the mound to build on the tree trunk as this will cover the tree root flare and possibly cause injury or death. Ensure that any chemical application to the Fire Ant mound is safe for application atop tree root zones. C. Trees: Pruning will be carried out by experienced pruning personnel. 1. Receive approval in the field for extent of pruning from Owner's Authorized Representative. 2. Sterilize pruning tools between individual plants, especially in the genus Quercus. 3. Raise limbs to an acceptable height as approved by the Owner's Authorized Representative. Raise limbs to seven (7) foot height for trees within ten (10) feet of sidewalk. 4. No weed -eaters or edgers are to be used within fifteen (15) inches of any tree. Should the need for trimming be necessary within fifteen (15) inches of any tree, it shall be done so by hand trimming only. D. Remove dead wood, broken branches, mistletoe and suckers from trees as needed. Thin prune by removing no more than twenty (20) percent of growth. Sterilize pruning tools between individual plants to keep down spread of disease. E. Spray paint all wounds of plants of the genus Quercus as soon as possible. Spray paint deliberate wounds on genus Quercus within one (1) hour and accidental wounds due to storms, etc. as soon as possible. Wounds on other species shall be allowed to compartmentalize naturally, unless determined otherwise by Owner's Authorized Representative or Arborist. Refer to Section 01 56 39 — 2.1 for acceptable wound paint. F. Dispose of all waste and removed material off site per requirements of local codes. 3.19 WEED REMOVAL A. Contractor shall hand -remove foreign grass, weeds and immature weeds prior to formation of seed heads. B. Contractor shall monitor and remove weeds from top of nursery grown plants to prevent competition for plant growth. C. Remove all poison ivy or other native vines from bases of tree's root balls. D. Contractor shall obtain prior approval from the Owner's Authorized Representative before applying the approved organic herbicides. Read and follow all label directions. E. The Contractor shall be held solely responsible for plant loss due to the application of organic herbicides. Any loss of plant material shall be replaced at Contractor's sole expense and all plant replacements shall be of the same species and size of the existing plant materials. LANDSCAPING March 30, 2026 3293 00-25 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 CCA LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTS MARYS CREEK WRF F. Hand weeding or plant specific application of organic herbicide shall be used during plant establishment. 3.20 DEEP ROOT WATERING A. Deep root water all existing trees to remain within the construction limits of the project once every two (2) weeks during the summer and once (1) a month during the winter, during the duration of the project and until final acceptance. This should be adjusted to the amount of rain. However, unless it has rained at least one-half (1/2) inch since the last watering, continue to deep root water. Complete deep root watering by filling each tree saucer three (3) times and letting it percolate dry. B. Water new plantings to provide optimum soil moisture level for plant germination and root development and not to exceed watering requirements. 3.21 PLANT CARE UNTIL FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. Water: When irrigation system is not operational, provide necessary hoses and other watering equipment required to complete landscaping. B. Maintain plantings and trees by watering, cultivating, weeding, raking, fertilizing, controlling diseases and pests, cleaning, and replacing plants as necessary to keep landscape in a vigorous, healthy condition as needed until final acceptance. Maintenance until final acceptance includes but is not limited to the following: 1. Watering Trees: Tree balls to be kept moistened to the depth of the tree ball. 2. Weeding: Remove weeds and foreign grass over plant areas at least once (1) a week. 3. Cultivating: Gently cultivate bed areas to a depth of approximately three (3) inches once (1) a month. Care should be taken not to damage plant roots. 4. Mowing and Edging; Refer to Section 32 9200. 5. Application of approved organic insecticides, organic herbicides and organic fungicides shall be in accordance with manufacturer's instructions per Owner and Owner's Authorized Representative approval. Remedy damage from use of insecticides. 6. Trimming and pruning includes only removal of dead or broken branches, and treatment of pruned areas and other wounds. Do not shear any plants. 7. Disease control. 8. Maintenance of temporary BMP's to prevent washout, siltation, or damage to planting beds and decomposed granite aggregate beds. 9. Tree straightening: Best for the health of the trees to wait until dormancy to straighten or reset the trees that have started to root into the backfill. Straighten by carefully digging out around the root ball, attaching seat belt strap to the part of the wire basket that is still intact around the root ball, and lifting with appropriate equipment, or adjusting the anchoring straps for the tree anchoring frame. Never pull, push or put pressure on the trunk. Then repeat applicable planting instructions 3.9. C. Coordinate watering schedules during installation and until final acceptance. Provide deep root watering to keep root balls moist on newly installed trees at a LANDSCAPING March 30, 2026 329300-26 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 CCA LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTS MARYS CREEK WRF minimum of once (1) every two (2) weeks during summer months or as weather conditions indicate. D. Maintenance Instructions: Submit two (2) hard copies and one (1) electronic copy of typewritten instructions recommending procedures to be established by the Owner for the maintenance of landscape prior to expiration of Contractor's maintenance period(s) required under the contract. Submit to Owner's Authorized Representative for approval. 3.22 CLEAN-UP A. Keep premises neat and orderly including organization of storage areas. B. Remove trash and debris from excavated planting areas, preparing beds, or planting plants from Work site daily as work progresses. C. Clean faces of building, walls, and other architectural features to remove sediments. D. Keep paved areas clean by sweeping or hosing. 3.23 SITE ENVIRONMENTAL PROCEDURES A. Waste Management: Comply with requirements of local codes for recycling and reusing waste. B. Waste Disposal: Disposal of waste, including accessories and used items, by recycling or reusing waste to the extent practical. When washing containers for recycling, do not permit runoff to enter storm drains or sewer systems or penetrate soils. 3.24 FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. Due to seasonal requirements, final acceptance of this section may not coincide with that of the remaining contract work. B. Request inspection for final acceptance at least ten (10) calendar days before the end of the plant care and maintenance as described in 3.21. C. Final acceptance shall be considered the time at which planting, related work and clean-up are one hundred (100%) percent completed. END OF SECTION LANDSCAPING March 30, 2026 3293 00-27 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 CCA LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTS IW_telx1019210111to] ►r_1Iwa12102:3W:v1:1 MARYS CREEK WRF SECTION 33 01 10.58 DISINFECTION OF POTABLE WATER PIPING AND TANKS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Disinfection of water piping for potable water. 2. Testing. 3. Bacteriological and Disinfection Reports. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.03 REFERENCES A. American Water Works Association (AWWA): 1. C651 — Standard for Disinfecting Water Mains. 2. C652 — Standard for Disinfection of Water Storage Facilities. 3. C653 — Standard for Disinfection of Water Treatment Plants. 1.04 CHAPTER 217 —QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Laboratory: State Health Department certified approved for examination of drinking water in compliance with applicable legislation of the State of Texas. B. Piping, tanks, and equipment to be cleaned and disinfected shall be isolated from the finished water (potable water) at all times and shall be placed into service by the OWNER following receipt of acceptable test reports. C. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to applicable Texas Department of Health Rules and Regulations for Public Water Systems for work of this section. D. The OWNER will collect the sample and have it tested. Results of tests may take up to 48 hours. Samples may not be collected on Friday or the day before a holiday without prior approval from the OWNER. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit a schedule of the proposed sequence for cleaning and method of sterilization to be used or list of the equipment to be used, and the sterilizing agent and quantities to be used, location and/or sizes of fill, blown down connections, sources of test water, and proposed plan to dispose of test water. APRIL 6, 2026 DISINFECTION OF POTABLE WATER PIPING AND TANKS ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER 33 01 10.58 - 1 MARYS CREEK WRF B. Disinfection Report: Accurately record the items listed below and submit five (5) copies of the report. 1. Type and form of disinfection used. 2. Date and time of disinfectant injection start and time of completion. 3. Test locations. 4. Initial and 24 -hour disinfectant residuals (quantity in treated water) in ppm for each outlet tested. 5. Date and time of flushing in ppm for each outlet tested. C. Bacteriological Report: Accurately record the items listed below and submit five (5) copies of the report. 1. Data issued, project name, and testing laboratory name, address, and telephone number. 2. Time and date of water sample collection. 3. Name of person collecting samples. 4. Test locations. 5. Initial and 24 -hour disinfectant residuals in ppm for each outlet tested. 6. Coliform bacteria test results for each outlet tested. 7. Certification that water conforms, or fails to conform, to bacterial standards of Texas Department of Health. 8. Bacteriologist's signature. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 REQUIREMENTS A. Provide all equipment, temporary connections, taps, valves, piping, pumps, hoses, chemicals, and test equipment to accomplish the work, including taps to line. Provide adequate provisions to the line for sampling. B. Disinfection agents shall be chlorine solution prepared from sodium hypochlorite, or calcium hypochlorite. C. After completion of purging and disinfection, remove surplus pipe at the chlorination and sampling locations, plug the remaining pipe, back, and complete all appurtenant work required to secure the pipeline. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. CONTRACTOR shall exercise care at all times during construction to prevent contaminated material from entering the structures and pipelines in the raw, settled, filtered, finished, and potable water system. B. All facilities and piping designed to hold or transport process water shall be cleaned, including piping, basins, and channels, prior to disinfection. DISINFECTION OF POTABLE WATER PIPING AND TANKS APRIL 6, 2026 33 0110.58-2 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRF C. The finished water storage tank, pump column, finished water piping, together with valves and meters, all potable water, service water, and chemical piping shall be disinfected with chlorine solution as specified herein following cleaning and testing. Vertical pumps may be disinfected immediately prior to installation. All surfaces shall be cleaned or washed and disinfected, even though there is no visible evidence of necessity thereof. D. Disinfection shall be in accordance with the applicable disinfection procedure described in AWWA C651, AWWA C652, AWWA C653, and AWWA C654, as well as in accordance with the Rules and Regulations for Public Water Systems of the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality and the requirements of this section. Where conflicts exist, the ENGINEER shall determine the appropriate procedures. 3.02 PIPELINE DISINFECTION A. Preparation: Verify that piping system has been cleaned, inspected, and pressure tested. Flush out line, completely replacing its entire volume with potable water. B. Purging: Purging may be accomplished by flushing. 1. Flushing Method: If the "flushing" method of purging is used, the CONTRACTOR shall be required to prepare the main by installing blow -offs at locations and sized as directed by the R Project Representative. a. In general, this shall consist of furnishing all equipment, material and labor to satisfactorily install blow -offs of sizes shown in Table 1: Table 1 Flushing Method Blow -Off Requirements Size Main Size Blow -Off 2 to 8 inches 1-1/2 inches 10 to 12 inches 4 inches 16 inches to 24 inches 6 inches 30 inches and greater 10 inches b. Before disinfection, flush all foreign matter from the pipeline. Provide hoses, temporary pipes, ditches, etc., as required to dispose of flushing water without damage to adjacent properties. Flushing velocities shall be at least 2.5 fps. For large diameter pipe where it is impractical or impossible to flush the pipe at 2.5 fps velocity, clean the pipeline in -place from the inside by brushing and sweeping, then flush the line at a lower velocity. c. After flushing is complete and satisfactory test results are received at the direction of the Resident Project Representative, the CONTRACTOR shall proceed with disinfection. APRIL 6, 2026 DISINFECTION OF POTABLE WATER PIPING AND TANKS ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER 33 01 10.58-3 MARYS CREEK WRF C. Disinfection: Disinfection of the pipeline shall be accomplished by the "continuous feed" method of the "slug" method in accordance with the OWNER or regulatory agency requirements. The free chlorine amounts shown are the minimum and calcium hypochlorite granulated shall be used as the source of chlorine. Continuous Feed Method: a. Water from the existing disinfection system or other approved source shall be controlled to flow into the section to be sterilized at a constant rate. b. Inject treatment disinfectant at a point not more than 10 -feet downstream from the beginning of the new conduit through a corporation stop or other approved connection inserted in the horizontal axis of the newly laid pipe. c. The water being used to fill the line shall be controlled to flow into the section to be sterilized very slowly, and the rate of application of the chlorinating agent shall be in such proportion of the rate of water entering the line that the chlorine dose applied to the water entering the line and released at the opposite end shall have a minimum chlorine concentration of 100-mg/L or a level determined by TECQ. d. Valves shall be manipulated so that the strong chlorine solution in the line being treated will not flow back into the line supplying the water. Use check valves if necessary. e. All valves shall then be closed and the chlorine solution shall remain in the line for a minimum of 24 hours. f. Operate all valves, hydrants, and other appurtenances during disinfection to assure that the disinfecting mixture is dispersed into all parts of the line, including dead ends, and similar areas that otherwise may not receive the disinfecting solution. g. Do not allow the chlorinated water to flow into conduits in `active' services. h. A minimum residual of 25-mg/L free chlorine shall be present in the main following the 24 -hour holding period. i. The water shall remain in the conduit until the chlorine residual is less than 4 mg/L. after this residual is achieved the water may be discharged into the drainage system. j. Remove the chlorine solution and flush the line with potable water. Comply with regulations and obtain necessary approvals for disposal or discharge of chlorine solution and flushing water. 2. Slug Method: a. Water from the existing disinfection system or other approved source shall be controlled to flow into the section to be sterilized at a constant rate. b. Inject treatment disinfectant at a point not more than 10 -feet downstream from the beginning of the new conduit through a corporation stop or other approved connection inserted in the horizontal axis of the newly laid pipe. DISINFECTION OF POTABLE WATER PIPING AND TANKS APRIL 6, 2026 33 0110.58-4 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRF c. Water entering the conduit shall receive a dose of chlorine such that the water shall have not less than 100-mg/L free chlorine. The chlorine shall be applied continuously and for a sufficient time to develop a solid column or "slug" of chlorinated water that shall expose all interior surfaces to the "slug" for at least 3 -hours. d. Operate all valves, hydrants, and other appurtenances during disinfection to assure that the disinfecting mixture is dispersed into all parts of the line, including dead ends, and similar areas that otherwise may not receive the disinfecting solution. e. Do not allow the chlorinated water to flow into conduits in `active' services. f. The heavy chlorinated water shall be flushed from the system and disposed of in an approved manner. D. Sampling: 1. The OWNER will take samples from the sterilized line through a suitable point in accordance with AWWA C651 (not at a fire hydrant) and submit to the testing laboratory. 2. Provide analysis and testing of treated water for bacteriological quality in accordance with AWWA C65 1. 3. Two (2) consecutive set of acceptable samples shall be, taken at least 24 hours apart, shall be collected from the new conduit. 4. At least one (1) set of samples shall be collected from every 1000 linear - feet of new conduit, plus one (1) set from the end of the line and at least one (1) set from each branch. 5. The sterilized portion of the line shall be placed in service, if the results of two consecutive tests conform to the bacterial standards. 6. If the samples show unsatisfactory quality, the sterilization process shall be repeated until satisfactory results are obtained. E. Replace permanent system devices removed for disinfection. F. Scheduling: Perform scheduling and disinfection activity with startup, testing, adjusting, and balancing, and demonstration procedures, including coordination with related systems. 3.03 DISPOSAL OF DISINFECTING WATER A. The disinfecting water shall be dechlorinated before being released to natural drainage ways in accordance with AWWA C652. Release neutralized disinfecting water at a controlled rate so as not to damage downstream facilities. B. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with OWNER to dispose of disinfecting water to the sewer. END OF SECTION APRIL 6, 2026 DISINFECTION OF POTABLE WATER PIPING AND TANKS ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER 33 0110.58-5 MARYS CREEK WRF PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK DISINFECTION OF POTABLE WATER PIPING AND TANKS APRIL 6, 2026 33 01 10.58 -6 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRF SECTION 33 0513 MANHOLES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards that may be referenced in this section: 1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO): M198, Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe, Manholes, and Precast Box Sections Using Preformed Flexible Joint Sealants. 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A36/A36M, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. b. A48/A48M, Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings. c. A123/A123M, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. d. A536, Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. e. A615/A615M, Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon -Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. f. B 139/B 139M, Standard Specification for Phosphor Bronze Rod, Bar, and Shapes. g. C14, Standard Specification for Nonreinforced Concrete Sewer, Storm Drain, and Culvert Pipe. h. C31/C31M, Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field. i. C39/C39M, Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. j. C 150/C 150M, Standard Specification for Portland Cement. k. C 192/Cl 92M, Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Laboratory. 1. C387/C387M, Standard Specification for Packaged, Dry, Combined Materials for Mortar and Concrete. m. C443, Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe and Manholes Using Rubber Gaskets. n. C478, Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections. o. C923, Standard Specification for Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced Concrete Manhole Structures, Pipes, and Laterals. p. C990, Standard Specification for Joints in Concrete Pipe, Manholes, and Precast Box Sections using Preformed Flexible Joint Sealants. q. C131 1, Standard Specification for Solvent Release Sealants. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 MANHOLES APRIL 6, 2026 33 05 13 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRY r. C 1244, Standard Test Method for Concrete Sewer Manholes by the Negative Air Pressure (Vacuum) Test Prior to Backfill. s. D698, Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)). t. D4101, Standard Specification for Propylene Injection and Extrusion Materials. u. F593, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs. v. F594, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings including details of construction, reinforcing and joints, anchors, lifting, , erection inserts, and other items cast into members. 2. Product Data: a. Concrete mix design. b. Manhole frame to structure seals. c. Manhole frame to structure anchor bolt. d. Rubber gaskets and sealants. e. External joint wrap. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Experience Record: a. Precast concrete production capabilities. b. Evidence of current PCI plant certification. 2. Calculations: Proposed details and design calculations for stresses in precast concrete members for loading conditions including earth pressures and transportation, handling, and erection. Calculations shall be stamped by engineer registered in Texas. 3. Certificate of Compliance: Certify admixtures and concrete do not contain calcium chloride. 4. Test Reports: a. Precast manufacturer's concrete test cylinders. 5. Manufacturer's recommended installation instructions. 6. Field quality control report. MANHOLES PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 33 05 13 - 2 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: 1. Precast Concrete and Precast Prestressed Concrete: Product of manufacturer with 3 years' experience producing precast concrete products of quality specified. 2. Precast Plant: PCI certified plant with current certification. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Materials of Construction and Service Conditions: 1. Screws, Bolts, or Nuts: Type 304 stainless steel conforming to ASTM F593 and ASTM F594. 2. Gaskets: Internal and external seals shall be made of materials that have been proven to be resistant to the following exposures and conditions: a. Sanitary sewage. b. Corrosion or rotting under wet or dry conditions. c. Gaseous environment in sanitary sewers and at road surfaces including common levels of ozone, carbon monoxide, and other trace gases at installation site. d. Biological environment in soils and sanitary sewers. e. Chemical attack by road salts, road oil, and common street spillages or solvents used in street construction or maintenance. f. Temperature ranges, variations, and gradients in construction area. g. Variations in moisture conditions and humidity. h. Fatigue failure caused by a minimum of 30 freeze -thaw cycles per year. i. Vibrations because of traffic loading. j. Fatigue failure because of repeated variations of tensile, compressive and shear stresses, and repeated elongation and compression. Material shall remain flexible allowing repeated movement. 3. Materials shall be compatible with each other and manhole materials. 4. Designed to provide a 20 -year service life. 5. When designated on the Drawings, apply a corrosion resistant material to the interior surfaces of the manhole. A corrosion resistant material meeting the requirements of Section 09 96 35 "Chemical Resistant Coatings" shall be applied to the manhole from 1 foot above the entry point for any line containing a condensate drain down to the manhole invert. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 MANHOLES APRIL 6, 2026 33 05 13 - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF B. Structures shall meet requirements of ASTM C478, this specification and the following: 1. Concrete: a. Cement: Meet requirements of ASTM C150/C150M. 150M. b. Compressive Strength: 1) Minimum 4,000 psi. 2) Minimum strength shall be confirmed at 7 days by making two standard cylinders per manhole for testing. 2. Reinforcement: Grade 60, unless otherwise specified. 3. Ring: Custom made with openings to meet indicated pipe alignment conditions and invert elevations. 4. Floor: Minimum 6 inches below pipe to provide clearance for grouting channels. 5. Joint: a. Form joint contact services with machined castings. b. Surfaces shall be parallel with nominal 1/16 -inch clearing and tongue equipped with recess for installation of O-ring rubber gasket. 6. Gasket: Meet requirements of ASTM C443. 2.02 PRECAST MANHOLES A. Riser Sections: 1. Fabricate in accordance with ASTM C478. 2. Diameter: Minimum 48 inches. 3. Wall Thickness: Minimum 4 inches or 1/12 times inside diameter, whichever is greater. 4. Top and bottom surfaces shall be parallel. 5. Joints: Tongue -and -groove and confined O-ring with rubber gaskets meeting ASTM C443. B. Cone Sections: 1. Eccentric. 2. Same wall thickness and reinforcement as riser section. 3. Top and bottom surfaces shall be parallel. C. Base Sections and Base Slab: 1. Base slab integral with sidewalls. 2. Fabricate in accordance with ASTM C478. MANHOLES PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 33 05 13 - 4 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF D. Manhole Extensions: 1. Concrete grade rings; maximum 6 inches high. 2. Fabricate in accordance with ASTM C478. E. Joint Seal Manufacturers and Products: 1. Butyl Gaskets: a. Hamilton Kent, Sparks, NV; Kent -Seal No. 2. b. Henry Company, Houston, TX; Ram-Nek. c. Trelleborg Engineered Solutions, Park Hills, MO; NPC Bidco C-56. 2. Confined Plastic or Rubber O -Ring: a. As recommended by precasting manufacturer. b. Meet requirements of ASTM C443. 3. External Wrap: a. Sealing Systems, Inc., Loretto, MN; Gator Wrap. b. Henry Company, Houston, TX; RU1 16 Rubr-Nek External Joint Wrap. c. Trelleborg Engineered Solutions, Park Hills, MO; NPC External Joint Wrap. d. Cretex Specialty Products, Waukesha, WI; Cretex Wrap. 2.03 CAST -IN -PLACE MANHOLES A. Concrete: As specified in Section 03 30 00, Cast -in -Place Concrete. B. Reinforcing Steel: As specified in Section 03 21 00, Reinforcing Steel. 2.04 MANHOLE FRAMES AND COVER A. Castings: 1. Tough, close -grained gray iron, sound, smooth, clean, free from blisters, blowholes, shrinkage, cold shuts, and defects. 2. Cast Iron: ASTM A48/A48M Class 35B. 3. Ductile Iron: ASTM A536, Grade 60-40-12. 4. Plane or grind bearing surfaces to ensure flat, true surfaces. B. Cover: Owner's Standard C. Capscrews for Watertight Covers: High temper phosphor bronze with 60,000 psi minimum tensile strength meeting ASTM B 139/B 139M. D. Watertight Cover Gasket: Molded from high -quality rubber such as nitrile or EPDM. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 MANHOLES APRIL 6, 2026 33 05 13 - 5 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF 2.05 MANHOLE FRAME CONNECTION TO STRUCTURE A. Butyl Sealant: 1. Conform to ASTM C1311, or AASHTO M198 and ASTM C990. 2. Trowelable or cartridge applied. 3. Manufacturers and Products: a. Tremco Commercial Sealants and Waterproofing, Beachwood, OH; Tremco Butyl Sealant. b. Bostik, Middleton, MA; Chem -Calk 300. c. Press -Seal Gasket Company, Fort Wayne, IN; EZ-Stik #3. B. External Wrap: 1. Meet requirements of ASTM C923. 2. Construct of high quality rubber that will provide flexible watertight seal around joint. 3. Thickness: Minimum 60 mils. 4. Consist of a top and bottom section and be sealed to structure, frame top, and bottom with mastic as applicable. 5. Length: Extend from manhole frame and extension ring to cone section. 6. Bands: If required, constructed of minimum 16 -gauge sheet if channeled, or 5/16 -inch diameter if round. 7. Manufacturers and Products: a. Sealing Systems, Inc., Loretto, MN; Infi-Shield. b. Trelleborg Engineered Systems, Milford, NH; NPC Flexrib Frame -Chimney Seals. c. Cretex Specialty Products, Waukesha, WI; X-85 Seal. C. Internal Wrap or Sealing Membrane: 1. Meet requirements of ASTM C923. 2. Minimum internal thickness of 3/16 inch or as recommended by manufacturer for installation climate. 3. Designed for application and have a demonstrated history of accommodating differential expansion between frame and concrete. 4. Width: Minimum 8 inches. 5. Expansive type wraps shall be fabricated of high quality rubber or urethane. 6. Bands: If required, constructed of minimum 16 -gauge sheet if channeled, or 5/16 -inch diameter if round. 7. Wrap shall not restrict access to manhole. 8. Manufacturers and Products: a. Sealing Systems, Inc., Loretto, MN; Flex -Seal Utility Sealant. MANHOLES PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 33 05 13 - 6 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF b. Trelleborg Engineered Systems, Milford, NH; NPC Flexrib Frame -Chimney Seals. c. Cretex Specialty Products, Waukesha, WI; Internal Manhole Chimney Seal. D. Frame to Structure Anchor Bolts: 1. 3/4 -inch -diameter HAS stainless steel bolts; minimum 6 -5/8 -inch embedment. 2. Manufacturer and Product: Hilti; HVA Capsules Adhesive Anchoring System. 2.06 MORTAR A. Standard premixed in accordance with ASTM C387/C387M, or proportion one part Portland cement to two parts clean, well -graded sand that will pass a 1/8 -inch screen. B. Admixtures: May be included; do not exceed the following percentages of weight of cement: 1. Hydrated Lime: 10 percent. 2. Diatomaceous Earth or Other Inert Material: 5 percent. C. Mix Consistency: 1. Tongue -and -Groove Type Joint: Such that mortar will readily adhere to pipe. 2. Confined Groove (Keylock) Joint: Such that excess mortar will be forced out of groove and support is not provided for section being placed. 2.07 BACKFILL AROUND AND UNDER MANHOLE A. Structural fill as specified in Section 31 23 23, Fill and Backfill. 2.08 MANHOLE MARKER POSTS A. Size and Type: 4 inches by 4 inches by 8 feet, pressure -treated construction Grade or better rated for direct burial. B. Prime top (exposed) 3 feet 8 inches, followed by two coats of safety orange enamel. 1. Primer: Tnemec; Series 36 Undercoater. 2. Enamel: Tnemec; Series 2H Tnemec Gloss. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 MANHOLES APRIL 6,2026 330513-7 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF C. Lettering: 1. Stencil letters SEWER on all sides of each post. 2. Letters: Black enamel, 2 inches high. 2.09 FLEXIBLE JOINTS FOR SEALING PIPES IN MANHOLE A. Manufacturers and Products: 1. NPC, Inc., Milford, New Hampshire; Kor-N-Seal flexible rubber boot with stainless steel accessories. 2. A-LOK Products, Inc., Tullytown, PA; Z-LOK XP or A-LOK flexible connectors. B. Doghouse Manhole/Manhole Over Existing Pipe (where use of a boot is not possible): 1. Green Streak; hydrophilic waterstop CJ -0725-3k. 2.10 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Concrete Testing: Test two concrete test cylinders for each manhole. Compressive strength shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C31/C31M, ASTM C39/C39M, and ASTM C192/C 192M. IC MANHOLES 33 05 13 -8 Inspection: Material Quality: a. Manufacturing process and finished sections shall be subject to inspection and approval by Owner and Engineer. 1) Inspections may take place at manufacturer's plant, at Site after delivery, or at both. 2) Sections not meeting requirements of this Specification or that are determined to have defects which may affect durability of structure are subject to rejection. 3) Sections rejected after delivery shall be removed and replaced. 4) Sections damaged after delivery will be rejected and if already installed shall be repaired to satisfaction of Owner and Engineer. 5) If structure cannot be repaired it shall be removed and replaced entirely at Contractor's expense. 2. At the time of inspection the sections will be carefully examined for compliance with ASTM C478 and with manufacturer's drawings. Sections will be inspected for general appearance, dimensions, scratch PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF strength, blisters, cracks, roughness, and soundness. Surface shall be dense and close textured. 3. Imperfections may be repaired, subject to approval of Engineer, after demonstration by manufacturer that strong and permanent repairs result. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Prior to installation inspect materials: 1. Sections not meeting requirements of this specification or that are determined to have defects which may affect durability of structure are subject to rejection. 2. Sections damaged after delivery will be rejected and if already installed shall be repaired to satisfaction of Owner and Engineer. 3. Remove and replace structure that cannot be repaired. 3.02 3.03 B. If needed, dewater excavation during construction and testing operations. EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL A. Excavation: As specified in Section 31 23 16, Excavation. B. Backfill: 1. As specified in Section 31 23 23, Fill and Backfill. 2. Place structural fill under manhole in 6 -inch maximum lifts; minimum of 12 inches unless otherwise specified on Drawings. Compact each lift to 98 percent relative compaction as determined in accordance with ASTM D698. 3. Backfill around structure with earth fill to lines and grades shown; allow for topsoil thickness where shown. Place in 8 -inch thick maximum lifts. Compact each lift to 92 percent relative compaction as determined in accordance with ASTM D698. INSTALLATION OF PRECAST MANHOLES A. Concrete Base: 1. Precast: a. Place on compacted structural fill. b. Properly locate, ensure firm bearing throughout, and plumb first section. 2. Cast -in -Place: a. Invert: Minimum 8 inches below lowest connecting pipe. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 MANHOLES APRIL 6, 2026 33 05 13 - 9 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRY b. First section of manhole shall be cast in concrete base. B. Sections: 1. Inspect precast manhole sections to be joined. 2. Clean ends of sections to be joined. 3. Do not use sections with chips or cracks in tongue. C. Preformed Plastic Gaskets or Rubber O -Ring: 1. Use only pipe primer furnished by gasket manufacturer. 2. Install gasket material in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3. Completed Manhole: Rigid and watertight. D. External Joint Wraps: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. E. Extensions: 1. Provide on manholes in streets or other locations where change in existing grade may be likely. 2. Install to height not exceeding 12 inches. 3. Lay grade rings in mortar with sides plumb and tops level. 4. Seal joints with mortar as specified for sections and make watertight. F. When indicated on the Drawings, provide bituminous water proofing to exterior surfaces and/or corrosion resistance coating on interior surfaces. 3.04 MANHOLE INVERT A. Construct with smooth transitions to ensure unobstructed flow through manhole. Remove sharp edges or rough sections that tend to obstruct flow. B. Where full section of pipe is laid through manhole, break out top section and cover exposed edge of pipe completely with mortar. Trowel mortar surfaces smooth. 3.05 MANHOLE FRAMES AND COVERS A. Install concrete grade rings as required to set covers flush with surface of adjoining pavement or ground surface, unless otherwise shown or directed. B. Set frames in three equally spaced beads of butyl sealant that run full circumference of frame. C. Anchor frame to manhole with specified bolts. MANHOLES PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 33 05 13 - 10 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF D. Install interior manhole frame to structure seals in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Seal shall cover grade rings. 3.06 WATERTIGHT MANHOLES A. Unless otherwise noted, manholes covers shall be bolted down with sealing gasket. 3.07 CAST -IN -PLACE MANHOLE A. Concrete: As specified in Section 03 30 00, Cast -in -Place Concrete. B. Reinforcing Steel: As specified in Section 03 21 00, Reinforcing Steel. 3.08 MANHOLE PIPING A. Drop Assembly: See Drawings for detail of installation requirements. B. Flexible Joints: 1. Provide in pipe not more than 1-1/2 feet from manhole walls. 2. Where last joint of pipe is between 1-1/2 feet and 6 feet from manhole wall, provide flexible joint in manhole wall. C. Stubouts for Future Connections: 1. Provide same type and class of pipe as specified for use in service connection, lateral, main, or trunk sewer construction. Where there are two different classes of pipe at manhole use higher strength pipe. 2. Grout pipe in precast walls or manhole base to provide watertight seal or use flexible joints as specified herein. 3. Maximum Length: 1-1/2 feet outside manhole wall. 4. Construct invert channels as shown. 5. Test Plugs: a. Install rubber-gasketed plugs in end of stubouts with gasket joints similar to sewer pipe being used. b. Plugs shall withstand internal or external pressures without leakage. c. Adequately brace plugs against hydrostatic or air test pressures. D. Permanent Plugs: Clean interior contact surfaces of pipes to be cut off or abandoned as shown, and construct plug as follows: 1. Pipe 18 Inches or Less in Diameter: Concrete plug in end, minimum 2 feet long. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 MANHOLES APRIL 6, 2026 330513-11 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF 2. Pipe 20 Inches and Larger: Concrete plug in end, minimum 4 feet long. 3. Plugs shall be watertight and capable of withstanding internal and external pressures without leakage. 3.09 MANHOLES OVER EXISTING PIPING A. Maintain flow through existing pipelines at all times. B. Concrete Pipe: Apply bonding agent on surfaces in contact with concrete. C. Construct base under existing piping. D. Construct manhole as detailed in Drawings. E. Apply minimum of two complete wraps of hydrophilic waterstop centered on pipe in wall. F. Place a minimum of 24 inches of concrete around each pipe penetration outside manhole against undisturbed soil or compacted aggregate unless otherwise detailed. G. Grout channel through manhole. H. Saw cut out or demolish existing pipe within new manhole using method approved by Engineer. I. Protect new concrete or grout for 7 days after placing concrete. 3.10 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING MANHOLES A. Core manhole bases and grouting as necessary. B. Seal pipe in manhole using flexible connector. C. Regrout to provide smooth flow into and through manholes. D. Provide diversion facilities and perform work necessary to maintain flow during connection. 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Conduct negative air pressure (vacuum) test on all manholes in accordance with ASTM C 1244. B. Hydrostatic Testing: MANHOLES PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 33 05 13 - 12 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF 1. When, in Engineer's opinion, groundwater table is too low to permit visual detection of infiltration leaks, hydrostatically test up to 20 percent but in no case less than 10 percent of the total manholes. 2. Procedure: Plug inlets and outlets and fill manhole with water to height determined by Engineer. 3. Manhole may be filled 24 hours prior to time of testing, if desired, to permit normal absorption into pipe walls to take place. 4. Leakage in each manhole shall not exceed 0.1 gallon per hour per foot of head above invert. 5. Repair manholes that do not meet leakage test, or do not meet specified requirements from visual inspection. 6. If more than 25 percent of manholes tested fail the hydrostatic test, test all or as many manholes as Engineer deems necessary. END OF SECTION PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 MANHOLES APRIL 6, 2026 330513-13 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK MANHOLES 33 05 13-14 PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF SECTION 33 05 39.41 PIPING SYSTEM, REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This specification designates the manufacturing, design and installation requirements of reinforced concrete pipe for sewer and water systems. Requirements for installation and testing of reinforced concrete pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM C76 (latest edition). B. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0— Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract 2. Division 1 — General Requirements 3. Division 31, 33, and 40 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. Measurement a. Measured horizontally along the surface from centerline to centerline of the fittings, manhole, or appurtenance. 2. Payment a. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under "Measurement" will be paid for at the unit price bid per linear foot for "Reinforced Concrete Pipe" installed for: 1) Various sizes 2) Various backfills 3. The price bid shall include: a. Furnishing and installing Reinforced Concrete Pipe as specified by the Drawings b. Mobilization c. Pavement removal d. Excavation e. Hauling f. Disposal of excess material g. Gaskets h. Couplings and Fittings i. Restraint system(s) design and placement/installation j. Furnishing, placement and compaction of embedment k. Furnishing, placement and compaction of backfill 1. Trench water stops m. Clean-up n. Cleaning o. Testing FEBRUARY 23, 2026 PIPING SYSTEM, REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER 33 21 00 - 1 MARYS CREEK WRF 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM A82: Cold Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement. B. ASTM C150: Portland Cement. C. ASTM C33: Aggregates for Concrete Work. D. ASTM A185: Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement. E. ASTM A496: Deformed Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement. F. ASTM A497: Welded Deformed Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement. G. ASTM A615: Deformed and Plain Billet Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. H. ASTM C76: Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe. I. ASTM C443: Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert Pipe Using Rubber Gaskets. J. ASTM C497: Testing Concrete Pipe or Tile. K. ASTM C655: Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete D -Load Culvert, Storm Drainage and Sewer Pipe. L. ASTM C882: Definitions of Concrete Pipe and Related Products. M. ASTM D471: Test Method for Rubber Property - Effect of Liquids. 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED] 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be prepared in accordance with Section 01 33 00 — Submittal Procedures, Section 40 05 05, and this document. B. All unit measurements shall be in accordance with the U.S. customary system. C. All submittals shall be approved by the City prior to delivery. 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following information in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents setting forth the manufacturer's design data and record drawings to the ENGINEER before fabrication or shipment to the job site: 1. Record Data for the following: a. Pipe material b. Fittings c. Appurtenances: The Manufacturer shall review the drawings, provide additional construction details and all materials necessary to support the installation depicted utilizing reinforced concrete pipe. d. Pipe layout schedule/drawings including pipeline stationing and elevations e. All other material furnished f. Deflection and pressure test procedures recommended by the manufacturer. B. Prior to delivery of the pipe to the project site, the manufacturer shall furnish an affidavit certifying that all pipe, fittings, and specials, and other products and materials furnished, comply with the applicable provisions of this Specification. FEBRUARY 23, 2026 PIPING SYSTEM, REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER 33 21 00 -2 MARYS CREEK WRF C. CONTRACTOR shall also submit a certificate of adequacy of design showing the necessary provisions required in the design of the pipe to comply with the applicable sections of this Specification. The pipe layout drawings and data shall clearly indicate where pipe requiring special provisions are required. The certificate of adequacy of design shall be sealed by CONTRACTOR's Texas Registered Professional Engineer. Special provisions shall include, but not be limited to, closure pieces, beveled pipe, manhole pipe sections, special modified designs for special D -loads, adaptor pieces, etc. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Quality: 1. Obtain each type of pipe and fittings from only one manufacturer. 2. Pipe shall be steam cured in accordance with ASTM C 76 except that steam curing time shall not be less than eight continuous hours. Pipe meeting the physical load test requirements may be transported to the job site 3 days after the steam curing period. 3. Special fittings shall be produced by the pipe manufacturer to comply with all respects to the applicable requirements of the specifications. 4. The interior of all pipe shall have true section complying with the internal size(s) specified. All pipe shall be free from fins, bulges, ridges, offsets, projections, defects or roughness of any kind, as set forth in ASTM C-76. 5. Reinforced concrete pipe may be rejected for failure to meet any of the requirements of this specification. Pipe rejected by the ENGINEER shall be removed from the site. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: 1. Pipe manufacturing operations shall be performed under the control of the manufacturer. 2. The pipe manufacturer shall not have less than 5 years successful experience manufacturing pipe, to applicable standards of the type and size indicated or demonstrate an experience record that is satisfactory to the ENGINEER and OWNER. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Pipe shall be stored and handled in accordance with the manufacturer's guidelines. B. All pipe ends shall be covered with a weather resistant cap, plug, or blind flange prior to shipment, which shall remain in place until installation of the pipe. C. All pipe and fittings shall be stored on blocking, at least 4 inches off the ground and shall be kept free of debris and dirt until installation. D. Secure and maintain a location to store the material in accordance with Section 01 61 00 — Common Product Requirements. FEBRUARY 23, 2026 PIPING SYSTEM, REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER 33 21 00 -3 MARYS CREEK WRF 1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] PART2-PRODUCT 2.1 OWNER -FURNISHED [OR] OWNER -SUPPLIED PRODUCTS [NOT USED] 2.2 SERVICE CONDITIONS A. Provide reinforced concrete pipe as shown on the Drawings and as herein specified. This pipe will be installed under conditions for wastewater effluent. The pipe will normally be in a `full pipe' condition. The pipe will have less than 1 feet of cover at portions of the alignment on the site. The concrete mix and wall thickness shall be provided to resist corrosion due to these conditions to the maximum extent possible. 2.3 PRODUCT TYPES AND MATERIALS A. General: 1. All reinforced concrete sewer pipe shall be of Class as shown on the Plans, with Wall "B" (Class III, Wall "B" if not shown) in accordance with the Drawings and ASTM C76, with joints per ASTM C443 and designed to withstand 30 feet of hydrostatic head. 2. All pipe furnished under this section of the Specifications shall be furnished and installed using confined "O -Ring" rubber gasket joints per ASTM C443. 3. Lifting holes shall not be permitted. 4. Pipe furnished shall be free of fractures and surface roughness. Except when beveled end pipe for laying on curves is provided, the ends shall be normal to the walls and center of the pipe in accordance with ASTM C76 requirements. 5. Joints: a. Joints shall meet the requirements of ASTM C443 specifications. b. Connecting joints shall be made using a flexible watertight rubber compression gasket, of the round "O Ring" design. It shall be molded or extruded and cured in a manner to produce a continuous, dense, homogeneous cross section free of porosity, blisters, and other imperfections. c. The rubber gaskets and joints shall be fabricated and tested in accordance with ASTM C443. d. The joints shall consist of a bell on one end of a pipe length and a spigot on the adjacent end of the joining pipe. The spigot shall be shaped to provide a groove to confine the gasket. The pipe shall be designed to withstand the forces caused by the compression of the gasket when joined. e. The annular space between the gasket bearing surfaces of the assembled joint shall not be more than 75 percent of the uncompressed gasket thickness. f. The gasket shall be the sole element depended on to make the joint flexible and watertight. g. The gasket shall not be stretched more than 30 percent of its original circumference when seated on the spigot end of the pipe. h. The joint shall be designed for not less than a 15 percent or more than 50 percent deformation, of the gasket, when the pipe is jointed off center with all manufacturing tolerances considered. FEBRUARY 23, 2026 PIPING SYSTEM, REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER 33 21 00 -4 MARYS CREEK WRF i. Minimum manufacturing tolerances shall be assumed to result in a centered annular space of 1.75 times the nominal design annular space. j. Joint mating surfaces shall be parallel and not be greater than 2.0o slopes. k. The joint design shall provide for the deflection of a pipe unit by opening one side of the outside perimeter of the joint wider than the assembled position without reducing its watertightness. Maximum joint pull shall not exceed 1/2 the manufacturer's recommended maximum. 1. Joints requiring deflections greater than 1/2 shall utilize elbows or beveled joints. 6. Joints shall be designed such that when sections are laid together they will make a continuous line of pipe with a smooth interior free from irregularities in the flow line. 7. Pipe shall be manufactured to ASTM C76 Wall "B". Quality of materials, process of manufacture and finished pipe shall be subject to inspection and approval by the ENGINEER as conforming to the Contract specifications. 8. Proof of Design: a. Plant hydrostatic tests on pipe shall be made in accordance with the provisions of Methods C497. Before the test pressure is applied, the pipe shall be allowed to stand under a pressure of at least 10 psi for at least 3 hours. b. Acceptance hydrostatic tests shall be made to 13 psi. The pipe shall withstand the working pressure prescribed above for at least 20 minutes without cracking and with no leakage appearing on the exterior surface. c. Moisture appearing on the surface of the pipe in the form of patches or beads adhering to the surface will not be considered as leakage. d. Slow -forming beads of water that result in minor dripping which can be proven to seal and dry up upon retesting under the prescribed test pressure will be considered acceptable. e. One joint, consisting of a bell and spigot, shall be joint shear tested to a differential load of 4000 (pounds) times the pipe diameter (feet) without any signs of distress. 9. Other products: a. Only the manufacturers as listed in the City's Standard Products List will be considered. b. Any product that is not listed on the Standard Products List is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00 — Substitution Procedures. B. Materials 1. Cement: a. Shall be Portland cement conforming to ASTM C150, Type II. b. Use Portland cement made by a well known acceptable manufacturer which was produced by not more than one plant. c. Do not use cement which has deteriorated because of improper storage or handling. 2. Aggregates: conforming to ASTM C33, except that gradation requirements shall not apply. a. Aggregates shall not contain deleterious amounts of soluble salts or other substances such as Iron sulfides, pyrite, marcasite, ochre, loam, clay or other deleterious substances. b. Fine aggregate shall be clean, washed, sharp sand. FEBRUARY 23, 2026 PIPING SYSTEM, REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER 33 21 00 -5 MARYS CREEK WRF c. Coarse aggregate shall be crushed limestone. d. A resulting minimum concrete alkalinity in the final pipe product of 80 percent calcium carbonate equivalency (CCE) is required. The minimum concrete alkalinity of 80 percent CCE shall be understood to be the minimum alkalinity of the concrete in the final (finished) pipe product. 3. Water shall be potable, non -recycled, free from acids, alkalis and other deleterious substances. 4. Chemical admixtures, if used, shall meet ASTM C494, admixtures shall not contain calcium chloride. 5. Steel reinforcement shall be in accordance with ASTM C76, circular in shape. C. Mix Design: In accordance with ASTM C76 and the following: 1. Minimum cement content of 564 pounds per cubic yard with an allowance for a combination of Portland cement and fly ash wherein the proportion of fly ash is not greater than 10 percent by weight of total cementitious material (Portland cement plus fly ash). Fly ash shall conform to the requirements of Class F or Class C of ASTM C618. 2. Maximum water/cement Ratio of 0.35. D. Testing 1. Test report showing compliance to the Contract requirements shall be submitted prior to supply of pipe to the site. E. Customer Inspection 1. The Owner or other designated Representative shall be entitled to inspect pipes and witness the manufacturing process. F. Packaging, Handling and Shipping 1. Packaging, handling and shipping shall be performed in accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions. 2. All damaged or defective pipe, specials or fittings shall be removed from the site and replaced with new materials unless manufacturer recommended repairs are approved in writing by the ENGINEER. 2.4 MARKING FOR IDENTIFICATION A. All items furnished under this section shall be clearly marked by waterproof paint, indentation, or as approved by the ENGINEER, with the following information: 1. Name or trademark of the manufacturer. 2. Pipe class and specification designation with size and length dimensions. 3. Date and place of manufacture. 4. Pipe 24 inches and larger shall also be marked on its interior as above. FEBRUARY 23, 2026 PIPING SYSTEM, REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER 33 21 00 -6 MARYS CREEK WRF PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED] 3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED] 3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED] 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Install piping as shown in the Plans per Division 15 and as recommended by the manufacturer. B. Request instructions from ENGINEER before proceeding if there is a conflict between Drawings or Specifications and manufacturer's recommendations. C. Pipe, fittings and accessories that are cracked, damaged, or not identified will be rejected for installation. D. Bell -and -spigot pipe shall be laid with the bell end pointing in the direction of laying. Pipe shall be graded in straight lines, taking care to avoid the formation of any dips or low points. Pipe shall not be laid when the conditions of trench or weather are unsuitable. At the end of each day's work, open ends of pipe shall be closed temporarily with wood blocks or bulkheads. E. Pipe shall be supported at its proper elevation and grade, care being taken to secure firm and uniform support. Wood support blocking will not be permitted. The full length of each section of pipe and fittings shall rest solidly on the pipe bed, with recessed excavation to accommodate bells, joints and couplings. Anchors and supports shall be provided where indicated and where necessary for fastening work into place. Fittings shall be independently supported. F. Handling: 1. Pipe, fittings, and accessories shall be carefully inspected before and after installation in accordance with Section 01 66 00 Product Storage and Handling Requirements. Materials found defective shall be rejected. Pipe and fittings shall be free from fins and burrs. Before being placed in position, pipe, fittings, and accessories shall be cleaned, and shall be maintained in a clean condition. Proper facilities shall be provided for lowering sections of pipe into trenches. Under no circumstances shall pipe, fittings, or any other pipe -related material be dropped or dumped into trenches. 2. Textile slings, union anchor lifting devices or other suitable materials shall be used to handle all pipes. Single or dual sling lifts are acceptable. The use of chains, hooks at inserted at pipe ends or any lifting means inserted through the pipe is prohibited. G. Storage: Pipe should be stored in accordance with Section 01 61 00 Common Product Requirements and this section. H. Jointing: 1. Joints shall be installed according to manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Test joints in place following backfilling to not disturb joints after assembly. FEBRUARY 23, 2026 PIPING SYSTEM, REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER 33 21 00 -7 MARYS CREEK WRF I. Concrete or Flowable Fill (CLSM) Encasement: The CONTRACTOR shall fully comply with all manufacturer's recommendations for installation in concrete backfill and grouting. J. Lay pipe to the lines and grades as indicated in the Drawings. K. Excavate and backfill trenches in accordance with Section 31 23 23.15. L. Embed pipe in accordance with Section 31 23 23.15. M. Detectable Metallic Tape Installation 1. See Section 31 23 23.15 Trench Backfill. 3.5 REPAIR [NOT USED] 3.6 RE -INSTALLATION [NOT USED] 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests and Inspections 1. Comply with requirements of Section 40 01 05 — Field Testing of Piping Systems. 2. Pipe shall be tested at joints for infiltration/exfiltration or low-pressure air joint test. 3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED] 3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED] 3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED] 3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED] 3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED] 3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED] 3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED] END OF SECTION FEBRUARY 23, 2026 PIPING SYSTEM, REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER 33 21 00 -8 MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 33 1613.15 PRESTRESSED CONCRETE TANK WITH STEEL DIAPHRAGM PART1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Description of System and Work Included: 1. This section specifies the qualifications and requirements for the construction of an AWWA D110 Type III wire wound, prestressed, concrete circular tank with a flexible base. This includes all reinforcing, concrete work, prestressing, appurtenances, subgrade preparation, backfilling, disinfection and testing directly related to the tank; unless otherwise specified. 2. In the event of a discrepancy between this section of the Specifications and any other section of the Specifications, this section shall govern. B. Related Work Described Elsewhere: 1. Excavation. 2. Piping. 1.02 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: American Concrete Institute (ACI): a. 301, Specifications for Structural Concrete. b. 305, Hot Weather Concreting. c. 306, Cold Weather Concreting. d. 309R, Guide for Consolidation of Concrete. e. 318, Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete and Commentary. f. 350, Code Requirements for Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures and Commentary. g. 350.1, Specification for Tightness Testing of Environmental Engineering Concrete Containment Structures. h. 350.3, Seismic Design of Liquid Containing Concrete Structures and Commentary. i. 372R, Design and Construction of Circular Wire- and Strand Wrapped Prestressed Concrete Structures. j. 506R, Guide to Shotcrete. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 PRESTRESSED CONCRETE TANK JULY 29, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS WITH STEEL DIAPHRAGM 33 16 13.15 - 1 MARY'S CREEK WRF 2. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE): 7, Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures. 3. American Water Works Association (AWWA): a. AWWA C652 Standard for Disinfection of Water -Storage Facilities. b. AWWA Dl 10 Wire and Strand Wound, Circular, Prestressed Concrete Water Tanks. 4. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A123/A123M, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. b. A416, Standard Specification for Steel Strand, Uncoated Seven -Wire for Prestressed Concrete. c. A475, Standard Specification for Zinc -Coated Steel Wire Strand. d. A615/A615M, Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon -Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. e. A706/A706M, Standard Specification for Low -Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. f. A722/A722M, Standard Specification for Uncoated High -Strength Steel Bar for Prestressing Concrete. g. A1064/A1064M, Standard Specification for Carbon -Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete. h. C3 1, Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field. i. C33, Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. j. C39, Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. k. C23 1, Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method. 1. C618, Type F Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete. m. D698, Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 feet — lbf/feet3) 600 kN-m/m3). n. C920, Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. o. D 1056, Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials — Sponge or Expanded Rubber. p. C 1116/Cl 116M, Standard Specification for Fiber -Reinforced Concrete and Shotcrete. q. D 1556, Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand -Cone Method. PRESTRESSED CONCRETE TANK PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 WITH STEEL DIAPHRAGM JULY 29, 2026 33 16 13.15 -2 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF r. D 1557, Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 feet. — lbf/feet3) 2700 kN-m/m3). s. D2000, Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive Applications. 5. TID-7024, Dynamic Pressure on Fluid Containers of Nuclear Reactors and Earthquakes. 6. US Army Corps of Engineers Specification CRD-C-572, Specification for PVC Waterstop. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications and Experience: 1. Singular Responsibility: It is the intent of this specification to require single party responsibility for the design and the construction of the tank. The tank design and construction shall be performed by an established Tank Contractor of recognized ability, having in its own name at least 10 years of experience and a minimum of at least twenty AWWA D110 Type III wire wound prestressed concrete core wall as specified herein. The design and construction of all aspects of the foundation, floor slab, wall, prestressing, shotcrete, and dome roof along with the wire wound circular prestressed tank shall be performed by the Tank Contractor. The Tank Contractor may subcontract labor for reinforcing steel installation and for concrete slab placement under the Tank Contractor's direct supervision. 2. All tank work shall be performed by a company that specializes in the design and construction of wire wound prestressed concrete tanks using the method of circumferential prestress reinforcing and with proven capability of meeting all the requirements of these specifications and AWWA Dl 10. No company is considered qualified unless it has designed and built in its own name at least twenty AWWA D110 prestressed concrete tanks with a Type III core wall in the last 10 years which have been in successful service for at least 5 years. Experience in the design and construction of tanks with a Type I, Type II or Type IV core wall is not acceptable. 3. The Tank Contractor shall have in its employ a design professional engineer with a minimum of 10 years of experience in the design of AWWA D110 Type III core wall tanks, registered in the state the tank is to be constructed. The Tank Contractor shall have in its employ a design professional engineer with a minimum of ten tanks with an AWWA D 110 Type III core wall in the past 5 years. The design engineer shall have been the engineer of record for a minimum of ten tanks with an AWWA D 110 Type III core wall. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 JULY 29, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS PRESTRESSED CONCRETE TANK WITH STEEL DIAPHRAGM 33 16 13.15 -3 MARY'S CREEK WRF 4. The Tank Contractor shall have in its employ for this project a team consisting of a tank superintendent, project manager, certified shotcrete foreman, prestressing foreman, and precast erection foreman, each of whom shall have constructed a minimum of five tanks with an AWWA D 110 Type III core wall and a capacity of 1.0 MG or greater in the past 5 years. Experience of personnel hired by the Tank Contractor will not be considered unless it can be demonstrated that the work was contracted and performed in the Contractor's business name. 5. Experience in the design and construction of tanks with an AWWA D110 Type I, Type II or Type IV core wall, tanks having a fixed wall base, mild -steel reinforced core wall or tanks having a core wall incorporating internal stressing systems is not acceptable. B. Prequalification: 1. All Tank Contractors are required to be prequalified. The Bidder is required to state on the face of his sealed proposal the name of the prequalified Tank Contractor. Sealed proposals which do not state the name of the prequalified Tank Contractor will be returned to the bidder unopened. 2. DN Tanks, LLC and Preload, Inc are prequalified for the design and construction of wire wound precast prestressed concrete tanks. Additional Tank Contractors seeking prequalification shall make a complete submittal to the Engineer for review and approval no later than 10 days prior to the date set for receipt of Bid, in accordance with Article Qualifications and Experience. The submittal shall include detailed design drawings and calculations meeting the requirements of these specifications, the company's record of previous experience in the design and construction of AWWA Dl 10 circular, wire wound prestressed concrete tanks constructed in their own name, with a Type III core wall, including the experience of the design engineer and a project team meeting the requirements of Article Qualifications and Experience. Within 5 days prior to the date of receiving prequalification submittal, the Engineer will publish a list of additional prequalified Tank Contractors. 3. Experience in the design and construction of tanks with an AWWA Dl 10 Type I, Type II or Type IV core wall, tanks having a fixed wall base, mild -steel reinforced tank core wall or tank core walls incorporating internal stressing systems is not acceptable. 4. All Tank Contractors not prequalified in accordance with Article Qualifications and Experience will be rejected. PRESTRESSED CONCRETE TANK PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 WITH STEEL DIAPHRAGM JULY 29, 2026 33 16 13.15 -4 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF C. Design Criteria: 1. The prestressed concrete tank shall be designed and constructed in accordance with the provisions of AWWA D 110 Standard for Wire Wound Circular Prestressed -Concrete Water Tanks: Type III; ACI 350, ACI 350.3, ASCE 7 and IBC. 2. Requirements and Loadings: a. Working Capacity: 1) EQ Tank: 6.3 -million gallons. 2) Peak Storage Tank: 6.3 -million gallons. b. Dimensions: 1) Refer to the Drawings. c. Dead Load: Shall be the estimated weight of all permanent imposed loads. Unit weight of concrete: 150 pcf; steel: 490 pcf. d. Liquid Load: 1) Unit Weight of Liquid: 62.4 pcf. e. Roof Live Load: 20 per square feet. f. Staircase Live Load: 100 per square feet. g. Wind Loads: Refer to the Drawings of General Structural Notes. h. Geotechnical information: Lateral earth pressure, backfill density, bearing pressures, anticipated settlements, subbase coefficient of friction, ground water elevation and seismic site class as shown on the Drawings. 1) Limit tank footing bearing pressure to 2,500 per square feet. i. Seismic Criteria: 6 1) Seismic design criteria: Refer to the Drawings of General Structural Notes. 2) Sloshing: The sloshing height shall be calculated using AWWA D110 and ASCE 7. If sloshing wave interacts with the roof of the structure, the roof must be designed for the uplift pressures and the confined portion of the convective (sloshing) mass of water must be added to the impulsive force. Vent Capacity Requirements (considering 50 percent blockage): 1) Maximum Fill Rate: '11,140 cubic feet per minute. 2) Maximum Draw Down Rate: a) EQ Tank: 1,8 11,140 cubic feet per minute. 8 b) Peak Flow Storage Tanks: 1,875 cubic feet per minute. 3) Aluminum or 316 stainless steel insect screen. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 JULY 29, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS PRESTRESSED CONCRETE TANK WITH STEEL DIAPHRAGM 33 16 13.15 -5 MARY'S CREEK WRF k. Overflow Design Capacity: 5,570 cubic feet per minute for the Equalization Basin. 4,456 cubic feet per minutes for the Peak 6 Flow Storage Basin. 1. Temperature Constraints: 1) Winter Temperature: Water 32 degrees F, and outside air negative 10 degrees F. 2) Summer Temperature: Water 100vvv degrees F, and outside air 100degrees F (continuous) and 115 degrees F (intermittent). 3) Differential Drying Allowance: 15 degrees F shall be additive to temperature differential during winter. m. Maximum Fill (for 30 MGD phase): 11,140 cfm for the Equalization Basin and 11,140 cfm for the Peak Flow Storage s Basin. n. Draw Down Rate (for 30 MGD phase): 11,140 cfm for the Equalization Basin and 11,140 cfm for the Peak Flow Storage Basin." 3. The Type III tank core wall is based on the following design criteria and requirements: a. The prestressed tank wall shall be considered as a cylindrical shell with partial edge restraint and rest on a rubber bearing pad allowing free radial movement. A fixed base wall will not be allowed. b. Core wall to be composite precast concrete with steel diaphragm and vertical mild steel reinforcement. Steel wall slot plates shall be utilized between precast panels on the exterior face of the wall along with a 1/2 -inch thick shotcrete cover over the diaphragm and plates. c. Minimum precast wall panel thickness shall be 4 inches. d. Circumferential prestressing to be continuous except at wall penetrations. e. Diaphragm steel may be considered as contributing to the vertical reinforcement of the wall. f. The core wall is that area of the wall interior to all circumferential prestressing. g. Shotcrete thickness shall provide a clear cover over the circumferential prestressing of at least 1/4 -inch on intermediate layers. The minimum final shotcrete cover over the circumferential prestressing wire shall be 1 -inch. h. For wire wound tanks, a stress plate shall be required at all above grade locations where prestress wires are displaced 24 inches or greater. The stress plate shall be designed to transfer stress across the opening. PRESTRESSED CONCRETE TANK PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 WITH STEEL DIAPHRAGM JULY 29, 2026 33 16 13.15 -6 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF i. No reduction in ring compression or tension in the tank core wall will be taken due to restraint at the bottom. j. Tank wall systems based on jack -operated cable or rod type tendons, involving the circumferential movement of prestressing steel relative to the wall surface shall not be considered. Circumferential systems relying on strand cables placed inside of ducts (cast in the core wall or manually around the exterior) will not be accepted. k. Shotcrete, cast in place or other alternative core walls are not permitted. 4. Floor Slab: a. The floor slab shall be designed as a membrane floor not less than 4 inches thick. Construction joints will only be allowed as shown on the Shop Drawings and as approved by the Engineer. Construction joints shall incorporate a continuous 6 -inch horizontal PVC ribbed flatstrip waterstop with a floor thickened section as necessary for proper placement. b. Membrane slab to have a minimum cross-sectional area ratio of reinforcement to concrete in accordance with the following when no SRA (shrinkage -reducing admixture) is utilized: provide 0.8 percent. c. Polypropylene or cellulose fibers may be used at the Tank Contractor's discretion. 5. Wall Base: Wall to foundation connection to utilize a continuous 9 -inch minimum vertical PVC ribbed centerbulb waterstop. 6. Roof System: Roof to be a concrete dome. Dome to have a rise to span ratio within the range of 1:8 to 1:16. The dome shall be fixed to the tank wall. Columns or interior supports will not be allowed. Dome design shall be based on elastic spherical shell analysis. The dome thickness shall be no less than 4 inches. The minimum cross sectional area ratio of dome reinforcement to concrete shall be 0.25 percent in both the circumferential and radial directions. If additional edge bending moments warrant, two layers of non -prestressed reinforcing shall be provided in the meridional direction at the edge region. 7. Design and test tank to the no measurable loss criteria per ACT 350.1. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Prequalification Submittals 10 Days Prior to Bid Date: 1. Tank Contractors not previously prequalified shall submit preliminary design drawings and calculations showing the dimensions of the tank, details of the type of construction, wire wound prestressing methods, and sizes of principal members. The Drawings and calculations shall be of sufficient detail to show compliance with the specification and all PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 JULY 29, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS PRESTRESSED CONCRETE TANK WITH STEEL DIAPHRAGM 33 16 13.15 -7 MARY'S CREEK WRF required standards and shall be signed and sealed by an Engineer registered in the state the tank is to be constructed. The registered Engineer shall certify the design is in conformance with an AWWA Dl 10 Type III core wall. 2. Tank Contractors not previously prequalified shall submit a complete experience record for the tanks they have designed and built in their own name. The record shall include the Tank Contractor's experience in the design and construction of wire wound prestressed concrete tanks conforming to AWWA D110, having a Type III core wall and meeting the requirements of Article Qualifications and Experience. The experience record shall also indicate the size of the tank, the name, address, phone number, and email address of the Owner, the year of construction, and the name of the Engineer for each project. 3. Tank Contractors not previously prequalified shall submit the name of the tank designer, currently in its employ, and his/her experience as the designer of record for tanks with an AWWA D 110 Type III core wall meeting the requirements of Article Qualifications and Experience. The designers' experience record shall also indicate the size of the tank, the name, address, phone number, and email address of the Owner, the year of construction and the name of the Engineer for each project. 4. Tank Contractors not previously prequalified shall submit the resumes for each member of the project team including the tank superintendent, project manager, shotcrete foreman, wire winding foreman and precast erection foreman that will be used for this project meeting the requirements of Article Qualifications and Experience. The project teams' experience record shall also indicate the size of the tank, the name, address, phone number, and email address of the Owner, the year of construction and the name of the Engineer for each project. 5. Experience in the design and construction of tanks with an AWWA D110 Type I, Type II, or Type IV core wall, tanks having a fixed wall base, mild -steel reinforced tank core wall or tank core wall incorporating internal stressing systems is not acceptable. B. Design Submittals after Execution of Contract: 1. Design calculations and drawings showing details and procedures of construction shall be sealed by a Professional Engineer licensed in the state of construction and electronically submitted to the Engineer for approval. 2. Approval by the Engineer of the drawings and calculations submitted by the Tank Designer will not in any way relieve the Tank Designer of full responsibility for the accuracy and completeness of the drawings and calculations. PRESTRESSED CONCRETE TANK PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 WITH STEEL DIAPHRAGM JULY 29, 2026 33 16 13.15 - 8 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF C. Construction Submittals for Review Prior to Use: 1. Design proportions for all concrete and shotcrete. Strengths of trial mixes. Admixtures to be used in the concrete or shotcrete and their purpose. 2. Catalog cuts or Shop Drawings of all materials and appurtenances. 1.05 GUARANTEE A. Warranty: The Tank Contractor shall guarantee the structure against defective materials or workmanship for a period of 1 year from the date of completion. If any materials or workmanship prove to be defective within 1 -year, they shall be replaced or repaired by the Tank Contractor at the Tank Contractor's expense. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SUPPLIED BY TANK CONTRACTOR A. Concrete and Shotcrete: 1. Concrete and shotcrete shall conform to and be proportioned in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 506 respectively, except as modified herein. 2. Cement shall be portland cement Type IL (MS), Type II or Type I/II. 3. Admixtures, other than air -entraining, superplasticizers, hydration stabilizers, shrinkage reducing and water reducing admixtures will not be permitted unless approved by the Engineer. 4. If air entrainment is utilized, the total volumetric air content of the concrete or shotcrete before placement shall not exceed 8 percent (plus or minus 1.5 percent) as determined by ASTM C 173 or ASTM C231. 5. Curing compound to be membrane forming and in accordance with ASTM C309. 6. Concrete for tank wall and roof construction shall have a minimum compressive strength of 4,500 pounds per square inch at 28 days, 5,000 pounds per square inch at 56 days and a maximum water to cementitious ratio of 0.42. 7. Concrete for the tank floor, footings, pipe encasement and all other work shall have a minimum compressive strength of 4,500 pounds per square inch at 28 days and 5,000 pounds per square inch at 56 days, does not require air -entrainment and shall have a maximum water to cementitious ratio of 0.42. The coarse and fine aggregate shall meet the requirements of ASTM C33. Superplasticizers, water -reducing, and shrinkage reducing (if applicable) admixtures shall be incorporated into the floor concrete. If fibers are used, they shall be virgin polypropylene PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 JULY 29, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS PRESTRESSED CONCRETE TANK WITH STEEL DIAPHRAGM 33 16 13.15 -9 MARY'S CREEK WRF or cellulose fibers, Microfiber by Grace, Fibermesh 150-e3 by Propex, UltraFiber 500 by Buckeye, "or -equal." Fiber lengths shall be a maximum of 3/4 inches. The amount of fibers added to the concrete mix shall conform to the Manufacturer's recommendations. 8. Shotcrete used for core wall and prestressing wire cover shall consist of not more than three parts sand to one part Portland cement by weight. Final covercoat of shotcrete shall consist of not more than four parts sand to one part Portland cement by weight. Polypropylene fibers shall be included in the shotcrete used for the finish cover coat. Fibers shall be Fibercast 500 by Propex, Fibermesh "or -equal." Fibers shall be virgin polypropylene and comply with ASTM C1116 Performance Level I. Fiber length shall be 1/4 -inch. The amount of the fibers added to the shotcrete used for the finish cover coat shall conform to the Manufacturer's recommendations. Fly ash may be incorporated into the fmish cover coat. If Fly ash is used, it shall conform to ASTM C618, Type F (or Type C). Shotcrete shall have a minimum strength of 4,500 pounds per square inch at 28 days and have a maximum water to cementitious ratio of 0.42. 9. Shotcrete Fine Aggregates: a. The fineness modulus shall be between 2.7 and 3.4. A well -graded coarse sand shall be used for all shotcrete applications. b. The gradation for the fine aggregates shall adhere to the "Grading No. 1" requirements listed in "Table 1.1 — Grading Limits for Combined Aggregates" of ACT 506. 10. All concrete and shotcrete for the tank wall and dome ring shall have a maximum water soluble chloride ion concentration of 0.06 percent by weight of cementitious. All other concrete which has encased uncoated steel shall have a maximum water soluble chloride ion concentration of 0.1 percent by weight of cementitious. 11. If utilizing hydration stabilizing admixture, the admixture may be applied after 90 minutes provided the w/c ratio is not exceeded and the slump and temperature remain consistent. 12. The wet mix process shall be utilized for shotcreting. 13. Rebound material shall not be reused in any form for shotcrete. B. Reinforcing Steel: 1. Reinforcing steel shall be new billet steel Grade 60, as shown on the Drawings, meeting the requirements of ASTM A615. Welded wire fabric and weldable reinforcing steel shall conform to ASTM A1064 and ASTM A706, respectively. 2. Reinforcing steel shall be accurately fabricated and shall be free from loose rust, scale, and contaminants, which reduce bond. PRESTRESSED CONCRETE TANK PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 WITH STEEL DIAPHRAGM JULY 29, 2026 33 16 13.15 - 10 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 3. Rebar chair supports may be either steel with plastic tips, turned up legs, concrete dobies or plastic. 4. Galvanized rebar to be Class 1 coating in accordance with ASTM A767 without chromate. C. Strand for Base Restraint Cables: Base restraint cables shall be hot -dip galvanized seven -wire strand and shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM A416 prior to galvanizing, and ASTM A475 after galvanizing. Only seven -wire strand will be allowed. All strands shall have a minimum weight of zinc coating of 0.85 ounces per square foot. D. Mortar Fill and Non -Shrink Grout: Mortar fill and non -shrink grout shall have a minimum compressive strength of 4,000 pounds per square inch at 28 days, have a maximum water to cementitious ratio of 0.42 and meet all requirements for concrete contained in this specification. E. Steel Diaphragm and Wall Slot Steel: 1. The steel diaphragm shall conform to ASTM A1008 and shall be a minimum thickness of 0.017 -inch. It shall be vertically ribbed with reentrant angles. The back of the channels shall be wider than the front, providing a mechanical keyway anchorage with the concrete and shotcrete encasement. 2. Wall slot steel to be 10 -gauge low carbon steel conforming to ASTM A569. Plate shall not be pickled or oiled. F. Circumferential Prestressing Steel: 1. Steel for prestressing shall be cold drawn, high carbon wire. 2. The wire shall meet the requirements of ASTM A821 and have a minimum ultimate tensile strength of 210,000 pounds per square inch. 3. Splices for horizontal prestressing shall be ferrous material compatible with the reinforcement and shall develop the full strength of the wire. Wire splice and anchorage accessories shall not nick or otherwise damage the prestressing. G. Elastomeric Materials: 1. Floor to wall connection shall utilize a ribbed waterstop with centerbulb. Construction joints to utilize ribbed flat strip waterstops. Waterstops shall be polyvinyl chloride meeting the requirements of the Corps of Engineers Specification CRD-C 572. 2. Bearing pads shall be neoprene or rubber. a. Neoprene pads shall have a hardness of 40 durometer and shall meet the requirements of ASTM D2000 Line Call -Out M 2 BC 410 Al 4 B14 or M 2 BC 414 A14 C12 F17 for 40 durometer material. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 JULY 29, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS PRESTRESSED CONCRETE TANK WITH STEEL DIAPHRAGM 33 16 13.15 - 11 MARY'S CREEK WRF b. Natural rubber bearing pads shall contain only virgin natural polyisoprene as the raw polymer and the physical properties shall comply with ASTM D2000 Line Call -Out M 4 AA 414 Al 3. 3. Neoprene Sponge filler shall be closed -cell neoprene rubber conforming to ASTM D1056, Type 2, Class A, and Grade 1 or Grade 3. H. Sealants: 1. Polyurethane filler and sealant shall conform to ASTM C290 Type S. 2. Polysulfide sealant will be a two or three component elastomeric compound meeting the requirements of ASTM C920 Type M. Sealants shall have permanent characteristics of bond to metal surfaces, flexibility, and resistance to extrusion due to hydrostatic pressure. Air cured sealants shall not be used. I. Exterior Coatings: Exterior dome surface shall receive one coat of a cementitious based damp -proofing product such as "Tamoseal" "or -equal," and one coat of a non-cementitious, high build, 100 percent acrylic resin polymer such as "Tammscoat Smooth" textured protective coating, "Tnemec Envirocrete 156," "Sherwin Williams Loxon XP WP" "or -equal." 2. Above grade exterior wall surfaces shall receive two coats of a non- cementitious, high build, 100 percent acrylic resin polymer such as "Tammscoat Smooth" textured protective coating, "Tnemec Envirocrete 156," "Sherwin Williams Loxon XP WP," "or -equal." 3. Decorative Wall Coating a. Provide City logo on exterior of tank wall in accordance with 8 Standard Details. City shall select orientation and location of logo during submittal phase. J. Appurtenances: 1. Overflow Piping and Weir to be sized per overflow rate. a. As shown on Pipe Schedule, as shown on the Drawings. b. In accordance with Section 40 27 00, Process Piping —General. 2. Pipe Supports: In accordance with Section 40 05 15, Piping Support Systems and as shown on the Drawings for internal and external piping. 3. Conduit Supports: In accordance with Section 40 05 15, Piping Support Systems and as shown on the Drawings. 4. External Roof Access Stairs: a. In accordance with Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing, and Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications. b. Material: Aluminum. c. Limit deflection to L/240 per span. PRESTRESSED CONCRETE TANK PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 WITH STEEL DIAPHRAGM JULY 29, 2026 33 16 13.15 - 12 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF d. Exterior Stairs to provide access from finish grade to top of roof. Stairs to be 30 -inches wide and at a 45 -degree angle. Stairs to be straight run chords. Stairs shall not be curved with the tank wall. Intermediate platforms should be located if necessary due to the curvature of the tank. Stairs to be fabricated of aluminum 6061-T6. e. Include supports for site lighting as shown on the Drawings. 5. Railing: In accordance with Section 05 52 16, Aluminum Guardrails (Railings). 6. Roof Vent: a. Material: Aluminum or Type 316 stainless steel. b. Includes bird and insect screens. 7. Access Hatches: a. 30 -inch diameter clear opening access hatch, as shown on the Drawings. 1) Access hatch shall be quick -opening out -swing, hinged, ASME flanged and dished head against a liquid tight, replaceable gasket. 2) Access hatch shall conform with OSHA Permit Requirement Confined Space Rules. 3) Materials of Construction: Type 316L stainless steel. 4) Access hatch shall have integral seep ring for casting into concrete wall. 5) Gasket shall be flat faced, EDPM material. 6) Minimum Pressure Rating 40 feet of water column. 7) Manufacturer and Product: a) Chase; CM 1. b) "Or -equal." 8. Floor piping as shown on the Drawings. 9. Instrument nozzles as shown on the Drawings. 10. Roof safety tie offs per OSHA to be provided at exterior ladders and hatches. 11. Provide drip notch near edge of dome ring to prevent rainwater from flowing down wall. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Safety: Tank Contractor to conform to and enforce all Local and Federal OSHA safety rules and regulations. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 PRESTRESSED CONCRETE TANK JULY 29, 2026 WITH STEEL DIAPHRAGM ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS 33 16 13.15 - 13 MARY'S CREEK WRF B. Constructability: 1. The Site Work Contractor shall excavate to such depths and widths to provide adequate room for tank construction and as required in the geotechnical report. All trees, shrubs, brush, stumps, roots, and other unsuitable material shall be removed to a minimum distance of 12 feet outside the edge of the tank foundation, plus additional areas necessary for the tank construction. The working area surface shall be at an elevation of 12 inches below the top of foundation. 2. Total overexcavation of native soils under tank shall be -34 feet minimum. Overexcavation shall extend 34 feet minimum beyond edge of tank footing. 3. In the event the subgrade material is disturbed or over excavated by the Site Work Contractor during excavation, at the direction of the Engineer, it shall be removed and replaced with compacted select fill at the Site Work Contractor's expense. 4. Subbase to be prepared per geotechnical report. 5. For fill materials, see the Drawings. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Floor: 1. Prior to placement of the floor concrete, all piping that penetrates the floor shall be set and encased in concrete. 2. The vertical waterstop shall be placed and supported so that the bottom of the center bulb is at the elevation of the top of the footing. The waterstop shall be supported without puncturing any portion of the waterstop other than pre -manufactured holes, grommets or hog rings for tying at 12 inches o.c. The waterstop shall be spliced using a thermostatically controlled sealing iron and each splice shall be inspected using a penknife prior to encasement in concrete. Spark testing of the welded joint shall be permitted. 3. The floor shall be cured using blankets, flooding with water, or curing compound. The floor shall remain saturated for a minimum of 7 days if curing compound is not utilized. 1. The precast wall panel shall be constructed with a continuous waterproof steel diaphragm embedded in the exterior of the precast panel. Horizontal joints in the diaphragm will not be allowed. 2. No holes for form ties, nails, or other punctures will be permitted in the wall. 3. Temporary wall openings may be provided for access and removal of construction materials from the tank interior. PRESTRESSED CONCRETE TANK PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 WITH STEEL DIAPHRAGM JULY 29, 2026 33 16 13.15 - 14 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS 0 MARY'S CREEK WRF 4. Polyethylene sheeting shall be placed between successive pours to provide a high moisture environment and a long slow cure for the concrete. 5. Joints between precast wall panels shall be bridged with a steel plate edge sealed with polysulfide or polyurethane and filled with mortar. No through -wall ties will be permitted. 6. The steel diaphragm shall extend to within 1 -inch of the full height of the wall panel with no horizontal joints. Vertical joints within a wall panel shall be roll seamed or otherwise fastened in a fashion that results in a firm mechanical lock. C. Roof: Removal of roof shoring shall be done at the direction of the Tank Design Engineer. D. Concrete and Shotcrete: 1. All concrete and shotcrete shall be conveyed, placed, finished, and cured as required by pertinent ACI standards. 2. Reinforcing steel shall be accurately positioned on supports, spacers, hangers, or other reinforcements and shall be secured in place with wire ties or suitable clips. 3. Weather Limitations: a. Unless specifically authorized in writing by the Engineer, concrete and shotcrete shall not be placed without special protection during cold weather when the ambient temperature is below 35 degrees F, or when the concrete is likely to be subjected to freezing temperatures before initial set has occurred and the concrete strength has reached 500 pounds per square inch. The temperature of the concrete shall be maintained in accordance with the requirements of ACI 301 and ACI 306. All methods and equipment for heating and for protecting concrete in place shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. b. During hot weather, concreting and shotcreting shall be in accordance with the requirements of ACI 301, ACI 305 and ACI 506. 4. Finishes: a. The floor slab shall receive a fresno or bullfloat at the option of the Contractor. The top of the wall footing, exterior to the waterstop, shall receive a steel trowel or magnesium trowel finish. b. The interior surface of the tank wall shall receive a horizonal light broom finish. c. The top surface of the roof shall receive a light broom finish and a form finish on the bottom and edge surfaces. d. Exterior shotcrete shall receive a natural gun or nozzle finish. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 JULY 29, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS PRESTRESSED CONCRETE TANK WITH STEEL DIAPHRAGM 33 16 13.15 - 15 MARY'S CREEK WRF e. For all formed concrete surfaces, all irregularities that project greater than 1/4 -inch from the surface shall be ground off. All holes greater than 3/4 -inch wide or 1/2 -inch deep should be patched. 5. Concrete shall be cured using water methods, sealing materials, or curing compounds. Curing compounds shall not be used on surfaces to which coatings, mortar, or shotcrete is to be applied. 6. Each prestress wire shall be individually encased in shotcrete. 7. Finish cover coat shotcrete shall be applied as soon as practical after the last application of wire coat. 8. Shotcrete shall be applied by, or under the supervision of, an ACI 506 certified nozzleman. 9. Total cover coat thickness shall be controlled by shooting guide wires. Vertical wires shall be installed under tension and spaced no more than 2 feet apart to establish uniform and correct coating thickness. Monofilament line (100 -pound test) or 18 -gauge or 20 -gauge high tensile strength steel wire shall be used. Guide wires shall be removed after placement of the cover coat. 10. Testing: a. For concrete placed in the precast panels or wall slots, a set of three cylinders shall be made for each truck load of concrete placed. For concrete placed in the floor, dome ring or dome slots, two sets of five cylinders for the first 50 cubic yards, and one set of five cylinders for every 100 cubic yards thereafter placed in the same day. Two cylinders shall be tested at 7 days, two at 28 days, and one held as a spare. b. Slump, air content and temperature testing shall be performed on each truck where cylinders are taken. c. Testing of shotcrete shall be in accordance with ACI 506, except as specified herein. One test panel shall be made for each of the following operations: 1) Core wall, wire cover, and cover coat. Test panels shall be made from the shotcrete as it is being placed. The method of making a test sample shall be as follows: A frame of wire fabric (1 -foot square, 3 inches in depth) shall be secured to a plywood panel and hung in the location where shotcrete is being placed. This vertical form shall be filled in layers. After 24 hours, the fabric and plywood backup shall be removed, and the sample slab placed in a safe location at the Site. PRESTRESSED CONCRETE TANK PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 WITH STEEL DIAPHRAGM JULY 29, 2026 33 16 13.15 - 16 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF d. The shotcrete sample slab shall be cured in a manner identical with the regular surface application. The sample slab shall be sent to the testing laboratory. Nine 3 -inch cubes shall be cut from the sample slab and subjected to compression tests in accordance with current ASTM Standards. Three cubes shall be tested at the age of 7 days, three shall be tested at the age of 28 days, and three shall be retained as spares. e. All testing shall be in accordance with ASTM C31 and ASTM C39 at the expense of the Owner Contractor and shall be conducted by an independent testing agency approved by the Engineer. E. Circumferential Prestressing: 1. Prestressing wire shall be placed on the wall with a machine capable of consistently producing a stress in the wire within a range of minus 7 percent to plus 7 percent of the stress required by the design. No circumferential movement of the prestressing along the tank wall will be permitted during or after stressing. Stressing may be accomplished by drawing the wire through a die or by another process that results in uniform stress throughout its length. 2. Ends of individual coils shall be joined by suitable steel splicing devices capable of developing the full strength of the prestressing wire. 3. Circumferential stressing systems based on jack -operated cable or rod -type tendons will not be allowed. 4. Minimum clear distance between prestressing wire is 5/16 -inch or 1.5 wire diameters, whichever is greater. 5. The Tank Contractor shall furnish a calibrated stress recording device, which can be recalibrated, to be used in determining the wire stress on the wall during and after the prestressing process. At least one stress reading per vertical foot or one stress reading for every roll of prestressing, whichever is greater, shall be taken after the wire has been applied on the wall. The Tank Contractor shall keep a written record of stress readings. All stress readings shall be made on straight lengths of wire. If applied stresses fall below the design stress in the steel, additional wire will be provided to bring the force on the core wall up to the required design force. If the stress in the steel is more than 7 percent over the required design stress, the wrapping operation should be discontinued, and satisfactory adjustment made to the stressing equipment before proceeding. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 JULY 29, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS PRESTRESSED CONCRETE TANK WITH STEEL DIAPHRAGM 33 16 13.15 - 17 MARY'S CREEK WRF F. Exterior Coatings: 1. All Work shall be performed by workmen skilled in the application of these types of products. The Manufacturer's application instructions shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. The Contractor shall confer with the Manufacturer's representatives regarding application techniques and shall follow the Manufacturer's instructions implicitly. 2. The concrete surface to be coated shall be clean, free of all laitance, dirt, grease, or other foreign materials. All defective surfaces shall be filled and/or repaired. Application shall be in full accordance with the manufacturer's instructions or as amended by the Engineer. 3.03 CLOSEOUT 3. Prior to placing the tank in service, bacteriological test(s) shall be taken, and successful results received. Testing shall be by an independent testing laboratory at the expense of the Owner. A. Watertightness: 6 1. Upon completion, the tank shall be tested to determine watertightness. The tank shall be filled with potable water to the maximum level. Water will be furnished to the tank by the Owner. The test shall consist of measuring the liquid level over the next 24 hours to determine if any change has occurred. If a change is observed and exceeds the maximum allowance, the test shall be extended to a total of 5 days. If at the end of 5 days the average daily change has not exceeded the maximum allowance, the test shall be considered satisfactory. 2. The liquid volume loss for a period of 24 hours shall not exceed 1/20th of 1 percent of the tank capacity, 0.0005 x tank volume. If the liquid volume loss exceeds this amount, it shall be considered excessive, and the tank shall be repaired and retested. 3. Damp spots will not be permitted at any location on the tank wall. Damp spots are defined as spots where moisture can be picked up on a dry hand. 4. Damp spots on the footing are permissible so long as measurable flow or standing water on the wall footing are not observed. END OF SECTION PRESTRESSED CONCRETE TANK PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 WITH STEEL DIAPHRAGM JULY 29, 2026 33 16 13.15 - 18 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF SECTION 33 21 00 NON -CHLORINATED, NON -POTABLE PLANT WATER SYSTEM PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Submersible well pump 2. Pressure tank Controls and instrumentation 4. Appurtenances 5. All equipment and controls described in this Section shall be supplied as a packaged, complete, and working system. II) imiuiIi A. The non -chlorinated, non -potable plant water system shall be capable of delivering non -chlorinated plant water to the three (3) biological odor control system water panels and spray nozzles B. Furnish one (1) submersible plant water pump and one (1) pressure tank at the rate(s) of flow specified herein to be installed at the UV Basin. C. The equipment, sizes, materials, and arrangements described in this specification section are based on recommendations by equipment manufacturers and shall be considered minimum limits of acceptability. The equipment manufacturers shall be responsible for the design, arrangement, and performance of all equipment supplied under this Section. Arrangements other than those shown on the Drawings shall be subject to the Engineer's approval. D. The dimensions and orientation of the equipment are shown on the Drawings. E. Outside environment, air temperature range of 10°F to 110°F. F. All equipment specified in this Section shall be new and unused and shall be the standard product of the manufacturer. All equipment shall be supplied by and the responsibility of a single supplier as a complete working system. G. Manufacturer shall maintain a complete stock of spare parts commonly needed for the equipment specified at a location within the State of Texas PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 NC NPW PLANT WATER SYSTEM APRIL 6, 2026 33 21 00 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOB MARYS CREEK WRY or shall have next business day delivery of spare parts not exceeding 50 pounds in weight. H. All parts exceeding 50 pounds in weight shall be available within 500 miles or able to be delivered within 48 hours of parts request. I. Electrical Coordination 1. Contractor shall provide and install all conduits and conductors as necessary to provide power and control to the non -chlorinated, non - potable plant water system. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating with Manufacturer to determine size and location of all conduits and conductors required to provide all power and controls to proposed system. 2. Electrical products and execution required to complete the Work under this section shall conform to the applicable requirements of Division 26, Electrical. Delivery, storage and handling shall be in full accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Related Sections: 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 2. Division 26 3. Section 40 67 00 — Control Panels and Components 4. Section 40 42 13 — Process Piping Insulation 5. Section 44 31 11, "Biological Tower Type Odor Control System" B. Reference Standards: 1. AWWA Dl 00 — Welded Steel Tanks for Water Storage. 2. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. 3. National Electric Code, 2017. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Copies of materials required to establish compliance with the specification shall be submitted in accordance with the provisions of Section 01 33 00, "Submittal Procedures." Submittals shall include at least the following: NC NPW PLANT WATER SYSTEM PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 33 21 00 - 2 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF a. Manufacturer and model number of all equipment. b. Certified shop and erection drawings showing all important details of construction, dimensions, anchor bolt size and locations, and field connections. c. Descriptive literature, bulletins, and catalogs of the equipment. d. Materials of construction and detailed specifications and data. e. Total weight of the equipment including the weight of the single largest item. f. A complete bill of materials for all equipment. g. Complete information on electric motors furnished, including make and type of motor, brake horsepower, and locked rotor current at full voltage. h. Complete electrical wiring diagrams and data on equipment devices to be furnished, including control panel arrangement and cables for power and controls. i. Auxiliary Instrumentation and Devices: Datasheets and mounting locations/details for auxiliary instrumentation and devices furnished with equipment. The information shall include associated mounting brackets and hardware. j. Complete performance curves showing head, capacity, net positive suction head (NPSH) required, minimum submergence over the entire operating ranges of the pump from shutoff to maximum capacity, efficiency, brake horsepower, and submergence requirements for all pumps over the full operating range. k. Provide the speed -torque curve of pump load and motor. 1. Wiring Diagrams: If applicable, for power, signal, and control wiring diagrams, including terminals and numbers. m. Equipment weights and lifting points. 2. Location and contact information for nearest factory maintenance and service facilities that will be available to service the equipment offered. Location and contact information for nearest stocking distributor of spare parts. 3. Complete operation and maintenance data for all equipment and controls in accordance with Section 01 33 00, "Submittal Procedures" and Section 01 78 23, "Operation and Maintenance Data." Operation and maintenance data shall include a description of the modes of operation and limits of operation for each component. 4. Startup and test schedule with test procedures in accordance with Section 01 9114, "Equipment Testing and Facility Startup." 5. Equipment Installation Report with field test data and test records in accordance with Section 01 33 00, "Submittal Procedures" and Section 01 78 23, "Operation and Maintenance Data." PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOB NC NPW PLANT WATER SYSTEM 332100-3 MARYS CREEK WRY 6. Complete warranty information and service agreements. 7. Test Reports: Supplied per this specification. B. Informational Submittals 1. Field Representative Resume 2. Qualifications Statement 3. Previous Installations List 4. Pre -Installation Delivery, Storage, and Handling Instructions 5. Installation Instructions 6. Fastener and Support Sizing Calculations C. Closeout Submittals 1. Paint 2. Spare Parts 3. Operation and Maintenance Data a. Refer to Section 40 61 00, for control system O&M manual requirements b. Maintenance Summary Forms: As specified in Division 01. 4. Warranty Documentation. 5. Testing Data D. Partial or incomplete submittals will not be reviewed by Engineer. E. All deviations from contract documents shall be clearly identified and approved in writing by Engineer. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The manufacturer must have a minimum of five (5) installations of similar design and have been in operation a minimum of 5 years. An installation list, including names and telephone numbers of contact persons for each installation, must be furnished to the Engineer upon request. B. The manufacturer shall furnish a qualified field representative for a minimum of two (2) working days to inspect all equipment described herein after installation, to advise Contractor and Owner during startup and testing, and to instruct Owner's personnel in routine maintenance and trouble -shooting procedures. The Contractor shall coordinate the scheduling of such training and startup assistance with Owner's personnel. C. Manufacturer's installation report is required prior to substantial completion. NC NPW PLANT WATER SYSTEM PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 33 21 00 - 4 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF D. All equipment and controls described in this section shall be provided by a single supplier as a complete system. E. Equipment shall be the standard product of the manufacturer. F. Certified factory test results shall be submitted along with operation and maintenance data. G. Provide equipment per the new 2017 National Electric Code. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Extended Equipment Warranty: Refer to Section 01 78 36 "Warranties" for extended equipment warranty. B. All equipment furnished under this Section shall have a special equipment warranty, in accordance with the Contract Documents, for a period of two (2) years after date of fmal project completion. The cost of removal, shipment, repair, and installation by Contractor shall be included in the warranty and correction of defective work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All components subject to service interruption during sub -freezing weather shall be insulated, heat -traced or otherwise protected, such that service can continue during cold -weather conditions. B. All equipment, including controls, valves and actuators, and drives specified herein shall be specifically designed for this service and the environment encountered in this installation. The environment will be moist, and corrosive, exhibiting hydrogen sulfide and other corrosive gases encountered in municipal wastewater treatment plants. C. Equipment shall be designed and capable of both continuous and intermittent operation. D. The equipment shall be capable of continuous exposure to direct sunlight. E. All pieces of equipment shall have a Type 316 SS nameplate affixed to the equipment showing ratings, serial number, model number and manufacturers and other pertinent nameplate data. F. System Components: At a minimum, the system shall include components, as indicated herein and as recommended by the manufacturer. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOB NC NPW PLANT WATER SYSTEM 332100-5 MARYS CREEK WRY 1. By NC-NPW Plant Water Package Manufacturer: a. 6 -inch Submersible well pump b. Submersible motor c. Drive d. Cable e. Splice kit f. Transducer cable g. 900 -gal pressure tank h. Tank fittings kit, including but not limited to: 1) Tank tee 2) Hose bibb i. Check valve j. Manual isolation valves k. Startup and testing, site assistance, inspection 1. Pressure transmitter 1) The pressure transmitter shall meet the following conditions: a) 4-20 mA output b) 12-30 VDC 2. By Contractor: a. Piping connections, supports, and fittings b. Installation 2.02 SUBMERSIBLE PUMP(S) AND MOTOR(S) A. Quantity: One (1). B. Control: Variable frequency drive. C. Manufacturers: The following manufacturers are listed as "acceptable" in order to set a definite standard of quality and performance. Listed manufacturers and products are expected to fully comply with the Specification. 1. Goulds 2. Grundfos D. Plant water pumps shall meet the following criteria: 1. Be submersible well -type pump. 2. Each shall have a capacity of 200 GPM at 117 psi. 3. Pump body, impellers, check valves, and strainers shall be stainless steel. 4. Pump shall be Goulds Model 250L25, or approved equal. 5. Maximum horsepower shall be 25 HP. NC NPW PLANT WATER SYSTEM PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 33 21 00 - 6 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF 6. Pump shall be a 6 -inch pump. 7. Pump curves shall extend to 150 psi. 8. Outlet size shall be 3 -inch NPT. 9. Furnish maximum 6.5 -inch stainless steel casing pipe with top at or above the top of wall, as per manufacturer's recommendations and as shown on the Drawings. 10. Install pump(s) as shown on the Drawings and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 11. Electric cables shall be sized per codes and shall have 600 -volt insulation. 12. Pumps shall be part of the hydropneumatic pressure system as specified herein. 13. Controls for these pumps shall be contained in the local control panel. 14. Tag number for the pump(s) shall be as indicated on the Drawings. 2.03 PRESSURE TANK A. Quantity: One (1). B. Capacity: 900 gallons (minimum). C. Manufacturers: 1. Well XTrol 2. Amtrol 3. Equivalent D. Tank shall meet the following criteria: 1. Steel shell with inner shell. 2. Operating pressure range: 90 to 140 psi. 3. Diaphragm: a. Butyl rubber. b. NSF 61 compatible. 4. Capable of outdoor installation, with exposure to wastewater treatment plant environment and other exposures indicated herein. E. 316SS Anchor bolts per manufacturer's recommendation. F. Factory coat color - purple 2.04 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS A. Control Panel 1. General Requirements PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 NC NPW PLANT WATER SYSTEM APRIL 6,2026 332100-7 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOB MARYS CREEK WRY a. Refer to Section 40 67 00 "Control Panels and Components" for general requirements of control panels requirements. Control panel shall be provided with main circuit breaker, starters, VFDs, control power transformer, lights, switches, relays, terminal strips, etc. for a complete and operational system. b. All instrumentation, control and electrical components provided under this section shall comply with the requirements on the Drawings and Divisions 26 and 40. c. All internal components shall be mounted and secured to the removable back plane assembly. d. The entire Plant Water Pump Control System shall be furnished, configured and completely commissioned by the SUPPLIER. e. Furnish one (1) Plant Water Control Panel. This panel shall be wall mounted, NEMA 12 Enclosure with three-point latching handle. f. Incoming power source shall be 480 V, 3 -Phase, 60 hz. 2. Non -Chlorinated, Non -Potable Plant Water Control Panel a. The control panel shall be provided with one (1) VFD capable of PID control loop based upon header pressure by the EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER. b. Communications to the Non -Chlorinated, Non -Potable Plant Water Control System shall be Ethernet TCP over CAT6 cable. Ethernet networking equipment shall be provided in the control panel. c. All system PLC registers shall be made available to the plant control system integrator. d. The minimum shall be provided with the panel. 1) Main circuit protective device 2) Variable Frequency 3) Provide terminal strips in enclosure for termination of device, no direct termination to relays, VFDs, starters, etc. allowed. e. The Non -chlorinated, Non -Potable Plant Water Panel shall include automatic start-up and shut -down controls and speed controls to maintain header pressure. B. Field Instrumentation: 1. Non -chlorinated, Non -Potable Plant Water Header Pressure: a. A pressure indicating transmitter shall be mounted on the discharge header of the pump, to monitor and control the pump. Provide stainless steel isolation valve. NC NPW PLANT WATER SYSTEM PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 33 21 00 - 8 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF b. The pressure indicating transmitter shall be the Endress and Hauser, model PMC71. 2.05 PAINTING A. Paint all components in accordance with Section 09 90 00, "Painting and Coating." Supports, piping, and other metallic components shall be primed and finish painted in strict accordance with Section 09 90 00, "Painting and Coating." 2.06 SPARE PARTS A. Furnish one (1) set of spare parts for all components exposed to operational wear during normal equipment service and as recommended by the manufacturer. B. Equipment Lubricants: Indicate and verify types, brands, and quantities of initial lubricants necessary to startup equipment. C. One (1) quart of touch-up paint for tank. D. Spare parts shall be packed in sturdy containers with clear, indelible identification markings, and shall be stored in a dry, warm location until transferred to the Owner at the conclusion of the Project. Each part shall be labeled with part numbers which correspond to the Operation and Maintenance Data submitted in accordance with Section 01 78 23, "Operation and Maintenance Data." 2.07 TESTING A. The system shall be field tested with the Owner present, and the pressure settings shall be adjusted as necessary to provide the required flow and pressure for the Bioscrubber Systems. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and specifications, as shown on the Plans. B. All piping and required freeze protection shall conform to other Sections of these Specifications. Piping shall be freeze protected, per Section 40 42 13 "Process Piping Insulation." 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test pump controls to demonstrate operation per Item 2.02 above. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 NC NPW PLANT WATER SYSTEM APRIL 6, 2026 33 21 00 - 9 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOB MARYS CREEK WRY 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Equipment shall be installed as shown on the Plans and in full accordance with manufacturer's instructions. All grout used shall be nonmetallic nonshrink. Pumps shall be anchored to the concrete with 316 stainless steel anchor hardware. END OF SECTION NC NPW PLANT WATER SYSTEM PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 33 21 00 - 10 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 33 32 26 EJECTOR PUMPS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Furnish, install, test, and place in operation packaged pump station at the location shown on the Drawings. This section includes: 1. Sewage ejector pumps. 2. Discharge base elbow, discharge pipe, guide rails, brackets, lifting cable, anchor bolts, and accessories. 3. Discharge piping manifold including swing arm check and plug valves. 4. Control and power cables, cable holder, and accessories. 5. Liquid level control system. 6. Control panel and instrumentation. 7. Installation, startup, testing, and placing in service assistance. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Description: One (1) submersible ejector pump per anaerobic zone per bioreactor basin shall be installed as shown on the drawings. Provide an on -the -shelf spare for a total of five (5) submersible ejector pumps. 1.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Each pump shall be capable of pumping sewage containing solids and stringy materials with a minimum of clogging. B. The driver horsepower for the pumps described herein shall be designed to be non -overloading at all points along the pump performance curve. C. All submersible pumps shall be of heavy-duty construction and shall be capable of dry operation without damage to motor or seals. D. Each pump shall be capable of passing 2 -inch spherical solids. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All pumps specified in this section shall be supplied by a single manufacturer. B. Manufacturer shall show evidence of facilities, within the continental United States, which have a spare parts inventory and the capability for providing repair services and parts for the equipment systems or units within forty-eight (48) hours. JULY 30, 2026 EJECTOR PUMPS COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 33 32 26 - 1 MARY'S CREEK WRF 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be prepared and submitted in accordance with the Contract Documents. All deviations from the Contract Documents shall be clearly identified and submitted to the ENGINEER through the CONTRACTOR as a Contract Modification Request. B. B. The following submittals are required, at a minimum, in addition to other applicable requirements. Shop drawings and product data, including the following minimum information, bound neatly in a single package. a. Complete performance curves and data for each item furnished. b. Dimensions and clearances required. c. Listing of materials of construction. d. Complete wiring diagrams and data on controls to be furnished. e. Location of nearest stocking distributor of spare parts. f. Any other information necessary for ENGINEER to determine whether or not the equipment complies with these specifications. 2. Complete operation and maintenance data for all pumps and controls. 3. Startup and test schedule. 4. Field test data and test records. 5. Warranties and service agreements. C. Partial or incomplete submittals will not be reviewed by ENGINEER. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery, storage and handling shall be in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Refer to Division 1 Section 01 78 36 "Warranties" for Warranty requirements. Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of the pumping unit that fail(s) in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. EJECTOR PUMPS JULY 30, 2026 33 3226-2 © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARY'S CREEK WRF PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PUMPS IN THE WETWELL A. Pump Design Criteria: Pump Tags # of Pumps Operating Point Motor Location HP BRB0 1_AN0 1_PMP0 1 Anaerobic BRB02_AN01_PMP01 4 + 1 shelf 100 gpm at 5.17 ft Zone BRB03_AN01_PMP01 spare 66 gpm at 2.05 ft (turndown) 0.5 BRB04 AN01 PMP01 B. Pump: 1. Size: 2 -inch NPT vertical discharge. 2. Impeller: a. Two vane. b. Pressure vanes on back side. 3. Body: Cast iron, ASTM A48 Class 30. 4. Seal: a. Mechanical. b. In oil -filled chamber. c. Ceramic and carbon faces. 5. Hardware: Corrosion resistant Type 316 stainless steel. 6. Motor housing: ASTM A 48 cast iron, Class 30. 7. Temperature: Less than 140°F fluids. C. Motor: 1. Type: 0.5 hp nominal, 115 -volts, single phase. 2. Permanent split capacitor. 3. Completely oil -filled. 4. Overload protection required in magnetic starter. 5. Speed: 1750 rpm. 6. Lower bearing: Single Row, Ball. 7. Upper bearing: Single Row, Ball. 8. Submersible on -off switch: Wide-angle float switch. 9. Power cord: 115V 20 -foot long cord with three -pronged plug. D. Provide a minimum of 25 feet of 316 stainless steel lifting cable securely attached to the pump for removal. 2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Hydromatic Model SKV40. B. Barnes Series 35E -L. C. Or approved equivalent. JULY 30, 2026 EJECTOR PUMPS COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 33 3226-3 MARY'S CREEK WRF 2.03 GUIDE RAIL SYSTEM A. A guide rail system shall be used to support each pump during operation and to guide the unit during installation and lubrication/preventative maintenance inspection. The system shall consist of a stop console, guide pipe, fixing brackets, and guide holder assembly. All components shall be fabricated of 316 stainless steel (mast bearings may be constructed of Hostaform (POM)). They shall be used in connection with a minimum 2.5 -inch square (80 x 80 mm) guide pipe. Power/control cable holders shall be provided every 5 feet. B. The guiderail system shall be supplied with factory welded mounting brackets at the top, bottom, and intermediate levels as needed to provide support at a maximum of 10 foot intervals. C. The guide pipe shall be designed to absorb the pump thrust. D. A pump mounting tube shall be provided by the MANUFACTURER. The tube shall be a minimum 12 -inch in length with one end designed to support the pump and the other end terminating in a standard ANSI flange. E. A fabricated support frame shall support the entire weight of the pump at its horizontal center of gravity. F. The pump shall be furnished with a suspension bracket suitable for fixed or removable lifting wire installation. G. Provide Type 316 stainless steel cable grips for supporting cable at the top brackets without damage to the cable insulation or lowering the cables electrical resistance. H. The upper fixing bracket shall secure the system to the basin wall. The system shall provide lateral support for the guide pipe. The upper guide holder assembly shall be fabricated of 316 stainless steel. The upper guide holder shall surround the guide pipe to effectively support the guide pipe in all directions in the horizontal plane. Support brackets that are only attached to the guide pipe on one side of the pipe shall not be accepted. The guide rail assembly shall contain a 316 stainless steel hook for the cable mesh and a self -tightening polypropylene cable mesh to secure the pump lower cable. EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install all pumps in complete accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. B. Piping: EJECTOR PUMPS JULY 30, 2026 33 3226-4 © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARY'S CREEK WRF 1. Provide one (1) 25 -foot long 2" flexible hose with NPT connections. 3.02 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATES A. Provide equipment manufacturer's Certificate of Installation stating that the equipment is installed per the manufacturer's recommendations and in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications. B. Provide equipment manufacturer's Certificate of Performance stating that the equipment meets or exceeds the performance requirements as defined hereinbefore. 3.03 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES A. Manufacturer services shall comply with the requirements of Section 01 75 25 "Startup, Testing, Commissioning, and Training." B. Manufacturer's Representative for the Installation: Present at Project Site or classroom designated by OWNER, for minimum person -days listed below, travel time excluded: No. Person Days Work Description 1 Installation Assistance and Inspection 0 Functional and perofrmance testing. 1/2 Facility Startup 1/4 Startup Training of Owner's Personnel C. Services Provided: 1. Furnish test forms and procedures for field testing. 2. Furnish startup services. 3. Furnish training of OWNER'S personnel at such times requested by OWNER. END OF SECTION JULY 30, 2026 EJECTOR PUMPS COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 33 3226-5 PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 33 41 10 - 1 REINFORCED CONCRETE STORM DRAIN PIPE/CULVERTS Page 1 of 12 SECTION 33 41 10 REINFORCED CONCRETE STORM DRAIN PIPE/CULVERTS PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Furnishing and installing reinforced concrete storm drain pipe and culverts, including: a. Pipe or box fittings b. Connection of drain lines to curb inlets c. All joints d. All connections to new or existing pipe or headwalls, manholes, etc., to the lines and grades shown on the Drawings B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification 1. None. C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 — Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract 2. Division 1 — General Requirements 3. Section 33 01 31— Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) Inspection 4. Section 03 30 00 — Cast -in -Place Concrete 5. Section 33 05 10 —Utility Trench Excavation, Embedment and Backfill 6. Section 33 05 23 — Hand Tunneling 7. Section 03 34 13 - Controlled Low Strength Material (CLSM) 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. Reinforced Concrete Storm Drain Pipe a. Measurement 1) Measured along the longitudinal centerline of the pipe from the initial beginning point as shown on Drawings to the end of construction as shown on Drawings, excluding inside diameters of any manholes encountered b. Payment 1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under "Measurement" will be paid for at the unit price bid per linear foot of "RCP" installed for: a) Various sizes b) Various classes c. The price bid shall include: 1) Furnishing and installing the specified diameter pipe and appurtenant fittings 2) Mobilization 3) Pavement removal 4) Excavation CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised July 1, 2011 3341 10-2 REINFORCED CONCRETE STORM DRAIN PIPE/CULVERTS Page 2 of 12 5) Hauling 6) Disposal of excess material 7) Furnishing, placement and compaction of embedment 8) Furnishing, placement and compaction of backfill 9) Gaskets 10) Clean-up 11) Cleaning 12) Jointing 13) Connections to all drainage structures Reinforced Concrete Storm Drain Culverts a. Measurement 1) Measured along the longitudinal centerline of the pipe from the initial beginning point as shown on Drawings to the end of construction as shown on Drawings, excluding inside diameters of any manholes encountered b. Payment 1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under "Measurement" will be paid for at the unit price bid per linear foot of "Box Culvert" installed for: a) Various sizes c. The price bid shall include: 1) Furnishing and installing the specified diameter pipe and appurtenant fittings 2) Mobilization 3) Pavement removal 4) Excavation 5) Hauling 6) Disposal of excess material 7) Furnishing, placement and compaction of embedment 8) Furnishing, placement and compaction of backfill 9) Gaskets 10) Clean-up 11) Cleaning 12) Jointing 13) Connections to all drainage structures 1.3 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards 1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this Specification, unless a date is specifically cited. 2. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO): a. T111, Inorganic Matter or Ash in Bituminous Materials. 3. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A185, Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete. b. A497, Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Deformed, for Concrete. c. C76, Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe. CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised July 1, 2011 33 4110-3 REINFORCED CONCRETE STORM DRAIN PIPE/CULVERTS Page 3 of 12 d. C361, Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Low -Head Pressure Pipe. e. C443, Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe and Manholes, Using Rubber Gaskets. f. C497, Standard Test Methods for Concrete Pipe, Manhole Sections, or Tile. g. C506, Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Arch Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe. h. C507, Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Elliptical Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe. i. C990, Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe, Manholes, and Precast Box Sections Using Preformed Flexible Joint Sealants. j. C1433, Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Monolithic Box Sections for Culverts, Storm Drains, and Sewers. k. D4, Standard Test Method for Bitumen Content. 1. D6, Standard Test Method for Loss on Heating of Oil and Asphaltic Compounds. m. D36, Standard Test Method for Softening Point of Bitumen (Ring -and -Ball Apparatus). n. D7 1, Standard Test Method for Relative Density of Solid Pitch and Asphalt (Displacement Method). o. D92, Standard Test Method for Flash and Fire Points by Cleveland Open Cup Tester. p. D 113, Standard Test Method for Ductility of Bituminous Materials. q. D217, Standard Test Methods for Cone Penetration of Lubricating Grease. 4. TxDOT Test Procedures (Tex): a. Tex -704-I, Making, Curing, and Testing Compression Test Specimens for Precast Concrete 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED] 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00. B. All submittals shall be approved by the City prior to delivery. 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATION SUBMITTALS A. Certificates Furnish manufacturer's certificate of compliance that their product meets the physical testing requirements of this Specification for the materials referenced including, but not limited to: a. Reinforced concrete pipe b. Concrete box culvert c. Jointing materials CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised July 1, 2011 3341 10-4 REINFORCED CONCRETE STORM DRAIN PIPE/CULVERTS Page 4 of 12 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED] 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Storage and Handling Requirements 1. Secure and maintain a location to store the material in accordance with Section 01 66 00. 2. Keep pipe clean and fully drained during storage. 3. Transport, handle and store pipe and fittings as recommended by manufacturer. 4. Repair or replace any damaged pipe before installation per the manufacturer's recommendation. 1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 OWNER -FURNISHED [OR] OWNER-SUPPLIEDPRODUCTS [NOT USED] 2.2 EQUIPMENT, PRODUCT TYPES AND MATERIALS A. Fabrication Precast Reinforced Concrete Pipe a. Provide precast storm sewer pipe that conforms to ASTM C76, ASTM C506 or ASTM C507 for circular, arch or elliptical pipe respectively. b. Utilize a machine made process or cast by a process that will provide uniform placement of a mixture of cement, aggregate and water proportional to provide a homogeneous concrete meeting the specified strength requirements. c. Mix concrete in a central batch plant or other approved batching facility where the quality and uniformity of the concrete is assured. d. Do not use transit mixed concrete to manufacture precast concrete pipe. Concrete Box Culvert a. Cast -in -Place 1) Conform to Section 03 30 00. b. Precast 1) Furnish machine made precast boxes in accordance with ASTM C 1433. 2) Utilize a machine made process or cast by a process that will provide uniform placement of a mixture of cement, aggregate, and water proportional to provide a homogeneous concrete meeting the specified strength requirements. 3) Concrete water to cement ratio not to exceed 0.53 by weight 4) Utilize minimum 470 pounds of cement per cubic yard of concrete unless mix designs with lower cement content demonstrate that the quality and performance of the sections meet the requirements of this Specification. CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised July 1, 2011 33 4110-5 REINFORCED CONCRETE STORM DRAIN PIPE/CULVERTS Page 5 of 12 5) Mix concrete in a central batch plant or other approved batching facility where the quality and uniformity of the concrete is assured. 6) Do not use transit mixed concrete to manufacture precast concrete box culvert. 7) Utilize welded wire fabric steel reinforcement conforming to ASTM A185 or ASTM A497. Jointing Materials a. Use any of the materials described in this Section for the making of joints. 1) Furnish a manufacturer's certificate of compliance for all jointing materials. 2) Cold Applied Preformed Plastic Gaskets/Flexible Joint Sealants a) Provide flexible joint sealants that meet the requirements of ASTM C990. b) Utilize 1 continuous gasket conforming to the joint shape for each joint. c) Plastic gasket shall be produced from blends of refined hydrocarbon resins and plasticizing compounds reinforced with inert mineral filler and shall contain no solvents, irritating fumes or obnoxious odors. d) Use flexible joint sealants that do not depend on oxidizing, evaporating or chemical action for its adhesive or cohesive strength. e) Supply in extruded rope form of suitable cross section and size as to fill the joint space when the pipes are joined. f) Provide a size of the pre -formed flexible joint sealant in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and large enough to properly seal the joint and obtain the squeeze out as described under construction methods. g) The gasket joint sealer shall be protected by a suitable removable 2 - piece wrapper, and the 2 -piece wrapper shall be so designed that Y2 may be removed longitudinally without disturbing the other Y2 to facilitate application as noted below. h) The chemical composition of the gasket joint sealing compound as shipped shall meet the requirements of Table 1 when tested in accordance with the test methods shown. Table 1. Sealing Compound Chemical Composition Composition Test Method Percent by Weight Bitumen ASTM D4 Bitumen Content 50-70 Ash -Inert Mineral Matter AASHTO T111 30-50 Volatile Matter at 325 degrees F ASTM D6 Loss on Heating of Oil and Asphaltic Compounds 2.0 Max i) Gasket joint sealing compound when immersed for 30 days at ambient room temperature separately in 5 percent solution of caustic potash, a mixture of 5 percent hydrochloric acid, a 5 percent solution of sulfuric acid and a saturated hydrogen sulfide (H2S) solution shall show no visible deterioration. j) The physical properties of the gasket joint sealing compound as shipped shall meet the requirements in Table 2 when tested in accordance with the test methods shown. CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised July 1, 2011 33 4110-6 REINFORCED CONCRETE STORM DRAIN PIPE/CULVERTS Page 6 of 12 Table 2. Sealing Compound Physical Properties Property Test Method Typical Analysis Specific Gravity at 77 degrees F ASTM D71 1.20 to 1.35 Ductility at 77 degrees F ASTM D113 5.0 centimeters minimum Softening Point at 77 degrees F ASTM D36 320 degrees F minimum Penetration 32 degrees F (300-gms) 60 -seconds ASTM D217 75 minimum 77 degrees F (150-gms) 5 -seconds 50 to 120 115 degrees F (150-gms) 5 -seconds 150 max Flash Point C.O.C. ASTM D92 600 degrees F Fire Point C.O.C 625 degrees F 3) Rubber Gaskets a) Provide gaskets that conform to ASTM C361 or ASTM C443. b) Meet the requirements of ASTM C443 for design of the joints and permissible variations in dimensions. B. Design Criteria Reinforced Concrete Pipe a. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, furnish Class III concrete pipe with shell thickness, circumferential reinforcement and strength conforming to the requirements of ASTM C76, ASTM C506 or ASTM C507 for circular, arch or elliptical pipe respectively, except as modified below: 1) Manufacture pipes larger than 60 -inch diameter by using 2 lines of circular reinforcement. 2) For Class III pipes larger than 60 -inch diameter, manufacturer may, at its option, furnish pipe manufactured with either Wall "B" or Wall "C" minimum thicknesses and the applicable minimum steel area as listed for circular cages in Table II of ASTM C76, provided test strength requirements for Class III pipe are satisfactorily met. b. Jacking, Boring, or Tunneling 1) Design pipe for jacking, boring or tunneling conforming to the requirements of Section 33 05 23. 2) When requested, provide design notes and drawings signed and sealed by a Texas licensed professional engineer. 2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED] 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests and Inspections Reinforced Concrete Pipe a. Acceptance of pipe will be determined by the results of the following tests: 1) Material tests required in ASTM C76, ASTM C506 or ASTM C507. 2) Absorption tests in accordance with ASTM C497. 3) 3 -edge bearing tests in accordance with ASTM C497. a) Testing Rate (1) If tested for 0.01 -inch crack only: (a) Test 0.8 percent of pipe sections for each size included in order (2) If tested for 0.01 -inch crack and ultimate load: CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised July 1, 2011 33 4110-7 REINFORCED CONCRETE STORM DRAIN PIPE/CULVERTS Page 7 of 12 (a) Test 0.2 percent of pipe sections for each size included in order b) Pipes that have been tested only to the formation of a 0.01 inch crack and that meet the 0.01 inch test load requirements shall be accepted for use. c) Failed Pipe (1) Test 2 consecutive joints in the same mix series if a specimen fails to meet test requirements. (2) Entire pipe series will be rejected if 1 of the consecutive joints fails to meet test requirements. d) Pipes larger than 1 inch in diameter may be accepted on the basis of material tests and inspection of completed product as an alternate to 3 - edge bearing test, at the option of the manufacturer. (1) Acceptance of pipe will be determined by the results of the material tests as required in ASTM C76, ASTM C506 or ASTM C507. (a) Perform crushing tests on cores taken from barrel of completed and cured pipe. (b) Perform absorption tests on samples from pipe wall. (c) Inspect finished pipe including amount and placement of reinforcement. (2) Manufacturer will furnish facilities and personnel for taking core samples from pipe barrel and for determining compressive strength of samples. (3) Manufacturer will plug and seal core holes if samples meet strength requirements. (a) Plug and seal sections in a manner that the pipe section will meet all test requirements of ASTM C76, ASTM C506 or ASTM C507. (b) Pipe sections plugged and sealed as described above will be accepted for use. 4) Inspect the finished pipe to determine its conformance with the required design. 2. Cast -in -Place Concrete Box Culvert a. Provide test specimens that meet the requirements of Division 03. 3. Precast Box Culvert a. Make test specimens in test cylinders at the same time and in the same manner as the box sections they represent. b. Make a minimum of 4 test cylinders for each day's production run and each mix design. c. Cure test cylinders in the same manner and for the same times as the boxes they represent. d. Test the specimens in accordance with Tex -704-I. B. Sizes and Permissible Variations 1. Reinforced Concrete Pipe a. Ensure that variations in diameter, size, shape, wall thickness, reinforcement, placement of reinforcement, laying length and the permissible under run of length are in accordance with the applicable ASTM Specification for each type of pipe as referred to previously. CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised July 1, 2011 334110-8 REINFORCED CONCRETE STORM DRAIN PIPE/CULVERTS Page 8 of 12 b. Where rubber gasket pipe joints are to be used, the design of joints and permissible variations in dimensions shall be in accordance with ASTM C443, Sections 7 and 8. Cast -in -Place or Precast Box Culvert a. Ensure that precast sections of either type meet the following requirements: 1) The inside vertical and horizontal dimensions do not vary from Drawing requirements by more than 1/2 inch or 1 percent, whichever is greater. 2) The horizontal or vertical plane at each end of the box section does not vary from perpendicular by more than 1/2 inch or 1 percent, whichever is greater, measured on the inside faces of the section. 3) The sides of a section at each end do not vary from being perpendicular to the top and bottom by more than 1/2 inch or 1 percent, whichever is greater, when measured diagonally between opposite interior corners. b. Ensure that wall and slab thicknesses are not less than shown on the Drawings except for occasional deficiencies not greater than 1/4 inch or 5 percent, whichever is greater. 1) If proper jointing is not affected, thicknesses in excess of Drawing requirements are acceptable. c. Deviations from the above tolerances will be acceptable if the sections can be fitted at the plant or job site and the joint opening at any point does not exceed 1 inch. 1) Use match marks for proper installation on sections that have been accepted in this manner. C. Workmanship and Finish 1. Reinforced Concrete Pipe a. Ensure that pipe is substantially free from fractures, large or deep cracks and surface roughness. b. Ensure that ends of pipe are normal to the walls and centerline of the pipe within the limits of variations allowed as stated previously. 2. Cast -in -Place or Precast Box Culvert a. Fine cracks on the surface of the member that do not extend to the plane of the nearest reinforcement are acceptable unless the cracks are numerous and extensive. b. Repair cracks that extend into the plane of the reinforcing steel in an approved manner. c. Excessive damage, honeycomb or cracking will be subject to structural review. d. The City may accept boxes with repairs that are sound, properly finished and cured in conformance with pertinent Specifications. e. When fine cracks on the surface indicate poor curing practices, discontinue further production of precast sections until corrections are made and proper curing is provided. D. Curing 1. Cure pipe/box in accordance with the applicable ASTM Specification for each type of pipe as referred to above. E. Marking 1. Reinforced Concrete Pipe a. Clearly mark the following information on each section of pipe: CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised July 1, 2011 33 4110-9 REINFORCED CONCRETE STORM DRAIN PIPE/CULVERTS Page 9 of 12 1) Class of pipe 2) ASTM designation 3) Date of manufacture 4) Identification of plant 5) Name or trademark of the manufacturer 6) Pipe to be used for jacking and boring b. For pipe with elliptical reinforcement, in addition to above, clearly mark 1 end of each section during the process of manufacture or immediately after with the following: 1) The location of the top or bottom of the pipe as it should be installed, unless the external shape of the pipe is such that the correct position of the top and bottom is obvious 2) Mark the pipe section by indenting or painting with waterproof paint. 2. Cast -in -Place or Precast Box Culvert a. Mark precast boxes with the following: 1) Name or trademark of the producer 2) Date of manufacture 3) Box size 4) Minimum and maximum fill heights b. For boxes without lifting holes, mark 1 end of each box section on the inside and outside walls to indicate the top or bottom as it will be installed. c. Indent markings into the box section or paint them on each box with waterproof paint. F. Pipe/Box Rejection Individual sections of pipe/box may be rejected if any of the Specification requirements are not met or if any of the following exist: a. Fractures or cracks passing through the shell, with the exception of a single end crack that does not exceed the depth of the joint b. Defects that indicate imperfect proportioning, mixing and molding c. Surface defects indicating honeycombed or open texture d. Damaged ends which would prevent making a satisfactory joint e. Any continuous crack having a surface width of 0.01 inch or more and extending for a length of 12 inch or more 2. Mark rejected pipe/box with painted "REJECTED". 3. Remove rejected pipe/box immediately from job site and replace with pipe/box meeting the requirements of this Specification. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED] 3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED] 3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED] 3.4 INSTALLATION A. General CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised July 1, 2011 33 41 10 - 10 REINFORCED CONCRETE STORM DRAIN PIPE/CULVERTS Page 10 of 12 Conform to the requirements of Section 33 05 10 for excavation and embedment for open -cut type installation. 2. Conform to the requirements of Section 33 05 23 when jacking, boring or tunneling methods are specified on Drawings. 3. Establish and maintain lines and grades. B. Pipe/Box Laying — Trench Installation 1. Ensure that pipe/box and fittings are laid and jointed in firm trench bottom conditions. 2. Start laying pipe/box on the bedding at the outlet or downstream end with the spigot or tongue end of the pipe joint pointing downstream, and proceed toward the inlet or upstream end with the abutting sections properly matched, true to the established lines and grades. 3. Provide appropriate facilities for hoisting and lowering the sections of pipe/box according to manufacturer's recommendation. 4. Lift and lower sections of pipe/box into trench without damaging pipe or disturbing the prepared bedding or sides of trench. 5. Carefully clean pipe/box ends before pipe is placed in trench. 6. Protect pipe/box open end to prevent entrance of earth or bedding material as each length of pipe/box is laid. 7. Fit, match and lay pipe/box to form a smooth, uniform conduit. 8. When elliptical pipe with circular reinforcing or circular pipe with elliptical reinforcing is used, lay the pipe in trench so that the markings for top or bottom are not more than 5 degrees from the vertical plane through the longitudinal axis of the pipe 9. Remove and re-lay, without extra compensation, pipe/box that is not in alignment or that shows excessive settlement after laying. C. Multiple Barrel Box Culvert Placement 1. Fill the annular space between multiple boxes with crushed rock or CLSM according to 03 34 13. a. Water jetting will not be allowed between parallel boxes. 2. Start the laying of boxes on the bedding at the outlet end and proceed toward the inlet end with the abutting sections properly matched. 3. Fit, match and lay boxes to form a smooth, uniform conduit true to the established lines and grades. D. Jointing Cold Applied Preformed Plastic Gaskets/Flexible Joint Sealants a. Brush -apply a suitable primer, recommended by the manufacturer of the gasket joint sealer, to tongue and groove joint surfaces and end surfaces. 1) Ensure that surface to be primed is clean and dry when primer is applied. 2) Ensure that primer is not applied over mud, sand, dirt or sharp cement protrusions. 3) Allow primer to dry and harden. b. Attach plastic gasket sealer around tapered tongue or tapered groove near the pipe joint hub or shoulder, before laying pipe in trench. CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised July 1, 2011 3341 10-11 REINFORCED CONCRETE STORM DRAIN PIPE/CULVERTS Page 11 of 12 c. Remove paper wrapper from 1 side only of the 2 -piece wrapper on gasket and press it firmly to the clean, dry pipe joint surface. 1) Do not remove the outside wrapper until immediately before pushing pipe into its final position. d. Align the tongue correctly with the flare of the groove. e. Remove outside wrapper on the gasket and pull or push pipe home with sufficient force (back hoe shovel, chain hoist, ratchet hoist or winch) to cause evidence of gasket material squeeze -out on inside or outside around complete pipe joint circumference. 1) Remove any joint material that pushed out into the interior of pipe. 2) Ensure that pipe is pulled home in a straight line with all parts of pipe on line and grade at all times. f. Proceed with backfilling of pipe laid with plastic gasket joints as soon as joint has been inspected and approved by the Engineer or Inspector. 1) Take special precautions in placing and compacting backfill to avoid damage to joints. g. When the atmospheric temperature is below 60 degrees F, store pre -formed flexible joint sealants in an area warmed to above 70° degrees F or artificially warmed to this temperature in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. 1) Apply gaskets to pipe joints immediately prior to placing pipe in trench, followed by connection to previously laid pipe. 2. Rubber Gaskets a. Make the joint assembly according to the recommendations of the gasket manufacturer. b. When using rubber gaskets, make joints watertight. c. Backfill after the joint has been inspected and approved. E. Backfill 1. Conform to the requirements of Section 33 05 10 for backfilling pipe/box trenches. F. Pipe fittings 1. Poured Concrete Pipe Collars a. Provide collars for locations shown on Drawings. b. Collar cost is considered subsidiary to bid price for furnishing and installing reinforced concrete pipe. No extra payment will be made for installation of concrete pipe collars shown on the Drawings. 2. Shop and Field -Fabricated Wyes, Tees, Crosses and Bends a. Furnish and install shop or field -fabricated wyes, tees, crosses or bends as indicated on Drawings or required by the Engineer. b. Shop -fabricate fittings for maximum pipe size less than 24 -inches in diameter for the larger pipe. c. Field -fabricate fittings with 24 -inch or greater diameter for the larger pipe. d. Field -fabricate fittings for box culverts. e. Take care in fabrication that concrete walls of pipe are broken back only enough to provide the required finished opening. f. Join reinforcing mesh or bars by bending, twisting or spot welding to provide a rigid connection. CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised July 1, 2011 33 41 10 - 12 REINFORCED CONCRETE STORM DRAIN PIPE/CULVERTS Page 12 of 12 g. Concrete or mortar (as specified in this segment) shall be wiped over the reinforcing wires connecting the 2 pipe joints, compacted by light blows, shaped to the contour of the pipe barrels, lightly brushed for finish and cured under wet burlap. Poured Concrete Pipe Plugs a. Plug pipe ends with a fabricated unit as shown on Drawings, when conduit lines terminate at locations with no connection to drainage structures. b. Concrete pipe plug cost is considered subsidiary to bid price for furnishing and installing reinforced concrete pipe. No extra payment will be made for installation of concrete pipe plugs shown on the Drawings. 3.5 REPAIR / RESTORATION [NOT USED] 3.6 RE -INSTALLATION [NOT USED] 3.7 FIELD [oR] SITE QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests and Inspections 1. Video Inspection a. Perform post -construction TV inspection of all installed reinforced concrete pipes/boxes conforming to the requirements of Section 33 01 31. 2. Ensure that pipes/boxes are installed correctly and are free of significant debris. a. At the City's discretion, replace any pipe/box that is determined to have jointing problems, cracking or significant debris. 3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED] 3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED] 3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED] 3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED] 3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED] 3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED] 3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED] END OF SECTION Revision Log DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised July 1, 2011 3349 10- 1 STORM DRAIN MANHOLES AND JUNCTION BOXES Page 1 of8 SECTION 33 49 10 STORM DRAIN MANHOLES AND JUNCTION BOXES PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Storm drain cast -in -place concrete manholes and junction boxes B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification 1. None. C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0— Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract 2. Division 1 — General Requirements 3. Division 3 — Concrete 4. Section 03 30 00 — Cast -In -Place Concrete 5. Section 31 23 16 —Excavation 6. Section 31 50 00 — Excavation Support and Protection 7. Section 33 05 10 —Utility Trench Excavation, Embedment and Backfill 8. Section 33 05 13 — Frame, Cover and Grade Rings 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A.Measurement and Payment 1. Storm Drain Manhole Risers a. Measurement 1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each Manhole Riser complete, or completed to the stage of construction required by Drawings. b. Payment 1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and will be paid for at the unit price bid per each "Manhole Riser" installed for: a) Various Sizes c. The price bid shall include: 1) Mobilization 2) Excavation 3) Hauling 4) Disposal of excess materials 5) Furnishing, placement and compaction of embedment 6) Furnishing, placement and compaction of backfill 7) Manhole construction 8) Manhole frames 9) Steps 10) Ring and Cover 11) Clean-up CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised December 13, 2024 334910-2 STORM DRAIN MANHOLES AND JUNCTION BOXES Page 2 of 8 2. Storm Junction Boxes a. Measurement 1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each Junction Box complete, or completed to the stage of construction required by Drawings. b. Payment 1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item will be paid for at the unit price bid per each "Storm Junction Box" installed for: a) Various sizes c. The price bid shall include: 1) Mobilization 2) Excavation 3) Hauling 4) Disposal of excess materials 5) Furnishing, placing and compaction of embedment and backfill (except where CSS/CLSM is required around manhole/junction box in construction drawings) 6) Junction Box construction 7) Junction Box frames 8) Steps 9) Ring and Cover 10) Clean-up 3. Storm Junction Structure a. Measurement 1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each Junction Structure complete, or completed to the stage of construction required by Drawings. b. Payment 1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item will be paid for at the lump sum price bid per each "Storm Junction Structure" location. c. The price bid shall include: 1) Mobilization 2) Excavation 3) Hauling 4) Disposal of excess materials 5) Furnishing, placement and compaction of embedment 6) Furnishing, placement and compaction of backfill 7) Junction Box construction 8) Junction Box frames 9) Steps 10) Ring and Cover 11) Clean-up 4. Imported Embedment/Backfill - CSS/CLSM a. Measurement 1) Measured by the cubic yard as delivered to the site and recorded by truck ticket provided to the City b. Payment 1) Imported CSS/CLSM backfill around manholes/junction boxes shall be paid when the following conditions exist: CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised December 13, 2024 334910-3 STORM DRAIN MANHOLES AND JUNCTION BOXES Page 3 of 8 a) When depths are 15 feet and greater/under existing or future pavement b) When working in redevelopment areas where work is required in constrained spaces c) When required in the Construction Drawings The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under "Measurement" will be paid for at the unit price bid per cubic yard of "Imported Embedment/Backfill, CSS" or "Imported Embedment/Backfill, CLSM" for material placed in areas around manholes/junction boxes. 1.3 REFERENCES A.Reference Standards 1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this Specification, unless a date is specifically cited. 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. C478, Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections. b. D4101, Standard Specification for Polypropylene Injection and Extrusion Materials. 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED] 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00. B. All submittals shall be approved by the City prior to delivery. 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATION SUBMITTALS A. Certificates 1. Furnish manufacturer's certificate of compliance that their product meets the physical testing requirements of this Specification for the materials referenced. CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised December 13, 2024 334910-4 STORM DRAIN MANHOLES AND JUNCTION BOXES Page 4 of 8 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED] 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED] 1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 OWNER -FURNISHED [oR] OWNER-SUPPLIEDPRODUCTS [NOT USED] 2.2 EQUIPMENT, PRODUCT TYPES AND MATERIALS — CAST IN PLACE A.Concrete 1. Furnish concrete that conforms to the provisions of Section 03 30 00. B. Reinforcing Steel 1. Furnish reinforcing steel that conforms to the requirements of Section 03 30 00. C. Frames, Grates, Rings, and Covers 1. Provide frames, grates, rings and covers that conform to dimensions and materials shown on Drawings and Section 33 05 13. 2. Ensure that covers and grates fit properly into frames and seat uniformly and solidly. D.Backfill — CSS/CLSM (when required in construction Drawings) — Conform to Section 33 05 10. E. Steps Provide polypropylene supports and steps to the shape and dimensions shown on Drawings that meet the requirements of ASTM D4101 and ASTM C478, Section 16, "Steps and Ladders." 2.3 EQUIPMENT, PRODUCT TYPES AND MATERIALS — PRECAST A. Manufacturers 1. Only the manufacturers as listed on the City's Standard Products List will be considered as shown in Section 0160 00 01 61 00. 6 a. The manufacturer must comply with this Specification and related Sections. 2. Any product that is not listed on the Standard Products List is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00. B. Materials 1. Precast Reinforced Concrete Sections — Conform to ASTM C478. 2. Precast Joints a. Provide gasketed joints in accordance with ASTM C443. b. Minimize number of segments. c. Use long joints at the bottom and shorter joints toward the top. CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised December 13, 2024 334910-5 STORM DRAIN MANHOLES AND JUNCTION BOXES Page 5 of 8 d. Include manufacturer's stamp on each section. 3. Lifting Devices a. Manhole sections and cones may be furnished with lift lugs or lift holes. 1) If lift lugs are provided, place 180 degrees apart. 2) If lift holes are provided, place 180 degrees apart and grout during manhole installation. 4. Frame and Cover — Conform to Section 33 05 13. 5. Backfill — CSS/CLSM (when required in construction Drawings) — Conform to Section 33 05 10. 6. Grade Ring — Conform to Section 33 05 13 and ASTM C478. 7. Pipe Connections a. Utilize either an integrally cast embedded pipe connector or a boot -type connector installed in a circular block out opening conforming to ASTM C923. 2.4 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED] 2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED] 3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED] 3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED] 3.4 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Perform all concrete work in accordance with Division 3. 2. Use of forms is required for all concrete walls, except where the nature of the surrounding material is such that it can be trimmed to a smooth vertical face a. Outside form for concrete bases supporting brick walls may be omitted with approval from the Engineer. 3. Cast polypropylene supports and steps into concrete walls when concrete is placed or drill and grout steps in place after concrete placement. B. Excavation and Embedment 1. Conform to the requirements of Section 31 23 16, Section 31 50 00 and Section 33 05 10, where applicable. C.Manholes for Precast Concrete Drain Pipes 1. Construct manholes for precast concrete pipe drains as soon as is practicable after drain lines into or through the manhole locations are completed. 2. Neatly cut all drain pipes at the inside face of the walls of the manhole and point up with mortar. D.Manholes for Monolithic Drain Pipes 1. Construct bases for manholes on monolithic drain pipes either monolithically with the drain pipe or after the pipe is constructed. CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised December 13, 2024 334910-6 STORM DRAIN MANHOLES AND JUNCTION BOXES Page 6 of 8 E. Manholes for Box Drains 1. Cast bases for manholes for box drains as an integral part of the drainage system. 2. Manholes may be constructed prior to backfilling or, if the Contractor so elects, manhole opening may be temporarily covered with timber to facilitate compaction of backfill for the pipe system as a whole with tractor equipment. a. Perform required excavation for manhole, construct manhole and backfill in accordance with Drawings. 3. For manholes that are over 5 -feet deep, include all manhole steps required in the wall of the box drain. F. Junction Structures 1. All structures shall be installed as specified in Drawings. G.Inverts 1. Shape and route floor inverts passing out or through the manhole as shown on the Drawings. 2. Shape by adding and shaping mortar or concrete after the base is cast or by placing the required additional material with the base. H.Curing 1. Cure all exposed concrete as required in Division 3. I. Finishing 1. Finish all concrete as required in Division 3 J. Form Removal 1. Remove concrete form as required in Division 3. K.Placement and Treatment of Castings, Frames, and Fittings 1. Place castings, frames and fittings in positions indicated on Drawings or as directed by Engineer, true to line and correct elevation. 2. Frames or fittings set in new concrete or mortar a. Place and position anchors or bolts before concrete mortar is placed. b. Do not disturb unit until mortar or concrete has set. Frames or fittings placed upon previously constructed masonry a. Bring bearing surface or masonry true to line and grade, and present an even bearing surface, so that entire face or back of unit will come in contact with masonry. b. Set unit in mortar beds or anchor to masonry, as indicated on Drawings or as directed and approved by the Engineer. 4. Ensure that units are set firm and secure. 5. Allow concrete or mortar to harden for a minimum 7 days. 6. Replace and fasten down grates or covers. CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised December 13, 2024 334910-7 STORM DRAIN MANHOLES AND JUNCTION BOXES Page 7 of 8 3.5 REPAIR / RESTORATION [NOT USED] 3.6 RE -INSTALLATION [NOT USED] 3.7 FIELD [OR] SITE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] 3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED] 3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED] 3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED] 3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED] 3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED] 3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED] 3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED] END OF SECTION Revision Log DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE Renamed specification 1.1 C. — Referenced 33 05 10 1.2 A. Revised to add pay item when imported CSS/LSM is required in Construction 12/13/24 M Owen Drawings 2.2 B. — Referenced 33 05 10 for import CSS/CLSM material if required in Construction Drawings 2.3 — Added Precast requirements CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised December 13, 2024 334910-8 STORM DRAIN MANHOLES AND JUNCTION BOXES Page 8 of 8 PAGE INTENTIONALY LEFT BLANK CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised December 13, 2024 33 49 20 -1 CURB AND DROP INLETS Page 1 of 6 SECTION 33 49 20 CURB AND DROP INLETS PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Construction of inlets, complete in place or to the stage detailed a. Including furnishing and installing frames, grates, rings and covers B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification 1. None. C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 —Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract 2. Division 1— General Requirements 3. Division 3 — Concrete 4. Section 02 41 13 — Selective Site Demolition 5. Section 03 30 00 — Cast -In -Place Concrete 6. Section 03 80 00 — Modifications to Existing Concrete Structures 7. Section 33 05 10 — Utility Trench Excavation, Embedment and Backfill 8. Section 33 05 13 — Frame, Cover and Grade Rings 9. Section 33 05 14 — Adjusting Manholes, Inlets, Valve Boxes and Other Structures to Grade 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. Measurement a. Measurement for this Item shall be per each inlet complete in place. 2. Payment a. The work performed and the materials furnished in accordance with this Item shall be paid for at the unit price bid per each "Inlet" installed for or per "Remove and Replace Inlet Top": 1) Various types 2) Various sizes 3. The price bid shall include: a. Furnishing and installing the specified Inlet b. Mobilization c. Excavation d. Hauling e. Disposal of excess materials f. Furnishing, placement and compaction of embedment g. Furnishing, placement and compaction of backfill h. Concrete i. Reinforcing steel CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised March 11, 2022 334920-2 CURB AND DROP INLETS Page 2 of 6 j. Mortar k. Aluminum and castings 1. Frames m. Grates n. Rings and covers o. Clean-up 1.3 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards 1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this Specification, unless a date is specifically cited. 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. C478, Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole and Inlet Sections. b. D4101, Standard Specification for Polypropylene Injection and Extrusion Materials. c. C309, Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane -Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete. 3. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT). a. Departmental Materials Specification (DMS): 1) 7340, Qualification Procedure for Multi -Project Fabrication Plants of Precast Concrete Manholes and Inlets. 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENT [NOT USED] 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00. B. All submittals shall be approved by the City prior to delivery. fic [ [IR 111,3►/IYWV.1CIUMM1CY]:7►I/r Y[IiI<.Yil'D1►I1YYII\If i A. Product Data 1. Precast Concrete Inlet 2. Pipe connections at inlet walls 3. Stubs and stub plugs 4. Admixtures 5. Concrete Mix Design 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED] 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED] 1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised March 11, 2022 334920-3 CURB AND DROP INLETS Page 3 of 6 PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 OWNER -FURNISHED [oR] OWNER-SUPPLIEDPRODUCTS [NOT USED] 2.2 EQUIPMENT, PRODUCT TYPES AND MATERIALS A. Materials 1. Concrete a. Furnish concrete that conforms to the provisions of Section 03 30 00. 2. Reinforcing Steel a. Furnish reinforcing steel that conforms to the requirements of Section 03 30 00. 3. Mortar a. Furnish mortar per Section 03 80 00. 4. Steps a. Provide polypropylene supports and steps conforming to the shape and dimensions shown on the Drawings that meet the requirements of ASTM D4101 and ASTM C478, Section 16, "Steps and Ladders." 5. Curing Materials a. Curing materials shall conform to the provisions of Division 3. 6. Frames, Grates, Rings and Covers a. Provide frames, grates, rings and covers that conform to dimensions and materials shown on Drawings and Section 33 05 13. b. Ensure that covers and grates fit properly into frames and seat uniformly and solidly. 2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED] 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED] 3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED] 3.3 PREPARATION A. Removal 1. Remove all or portions of existing structures in accordance with Section 02 41 13. 2. Drill, dowel, and grout in accordance with Section 03 30 00. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Interface with Other Work 1. All types of inlets may be built either in 1 stage or in 2 stages, described as Stage I and Stage II. a. Build inlets designed to match the final roadway surface in stages. 2. Construct the Stage I portion of inlets as shown on the Drawings or as specified in this Section. a. Furnish and install a temporary cover as approved by the Engineer. CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised March 11, 2022 33 49 20 -4 CURB AND DROP INLETS Page 4 of 6 3. Construct Stage II after the pavement structure is substantially complete unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. a. For Stage II, construct the remaining wall height and top of inlet and furnish and install any frames, grates, rings and covers, manhole steps, curb beams or collecting basins required. B. Cast -In -Place Inlets 1. Construct cast -in -place inlets in accordance with Section 03 30 00. a. Forms will be required for all concrete walls. b. Outside wall forms for cast -in -place concrete may be omitted with the approval of the Engineer if the surrounding material can be trimmed to a smooth vertical face. 2. Cast polypropylene steps into the concrete walls when the concrete is placed, or drill and grout steps in place after concrete placement. C. Inlets for Precast Concrete Drain Pipes 1. Construct inlets for precast concrete drain pipes as soon as is practicable after storm drain lines into or through the inlet locations are completed. a. Neatly cut all pipes at the inside face of the walls of the inlet and point up with mortar. D. Inlets for Monolithic Drain Pipes 1. Construct bases for inlets on monolithic drain pipes either monolithically with the storm drain or after the storm drain is constructed. E. Inverts 1. Shape and route floor inverts passing out or through the inlet as shown on the Drawings. 2. Shape by adding and shaping mortar or concrete after the base is cast or by placing the required additional material with the base. F. Finishing Complete Inlets 1. Complete inlets in accordance with the Drawings. 2. Backfill to original ground elevation in accordance with Section 33 05 10. G. Finishing Stage I Construction 1. Complete Stage I construction by constructing the walls to the elevations shown on the Drawings and backfilling to required elevations in accordance with Section 33 05 10. H. Stage II Construction 1. Construct subgrade and base course or concrete pavement construction over Stage I inlet construction, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. 2. Excavate to expose the top of Stage I construction and complete the inlet in accordance with the Drawings and these Specifications, including backfill and cleaning of all debris from the bottom of the manhole or inlet. I. Form Removal 1. Forms used in the construction of "Inlets" which support vertical loads will remain in place at least 24 hours after the concrete is placed. CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised March 11, 2022 334920-5 CURB AND DROP INLETS Page 5 of 6 2. Other forms shall remain in place for a minimum time 24 hours after concrete is placed, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. J. Curing 1. Cure all exposed concrete as required in Section 03 30 00. K. Finishing 1. Conform to Section 03 30 00. 3.5 REPAIR [NOT USED] 3.6 RE -INSTALLATION [NOT USED] 3.7 FIELD [OR] SITE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] 3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED] 3.9 ADJUSTING A. Refer to Section 33 05 14. 3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED] 3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED] 3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED] 3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED] 3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED] END OF SECTION Revision Log DATE NAME SUMMARYOF CHANGE 3/11/2022 M Owen Revised measurement and payment section to include bid item for "Remove and Replace Inlet Top" CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised March 11, 2022 33 49 20 - 6 CURB AND DROP INLETS Page 6 of 6 PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK CITY OF FORT WORTH Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS C01239 Revised March 11, 2022 MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 35 20 16.25 FABRICATED SLIDE GATES AND STOP LOGS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. American Water Works Association (AWWA): C561, Fabricated Stainless Steel Slide Gates. 2. American Water Works Association (AWWA): C562, Fabricated Aluminum Slide Gates. 3. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A193/A193M, Alloy -Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High Temperature or High Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose Applications. b. A240/A240M, Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium -Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and General Applications. c. A276, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes. d. A380, Standard Practice for Cleaning, Descaling, and Passivation of Stainless Steel Parts, Equipment, and Systems. e. B209, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate. f. B308/B308M, Standard Specification for Aluminum -Alloy 6061-T6 Standard Structural Profiles. 4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum). 5. NSF International (NSF): a. NSF/ANSI 61, Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects. b. NSF/ANSI 372, Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Self -Contained: The arrangement of gate operator, supported by gate frame, such that operating thrust loads are not applied external to the assembly. B. Slenderness Ratio: The ratio of the maximum unsupported stem length to the stem cross- section radius of gyration. C. Submersible: The ability to exclude water when submerged under a 20 -foot head of fresh water for 24 hours and still maintain electrical integrity. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: JULY 30, 2026 FABRICATED SLIDE GATES AND STOP LOGS (C) COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 3520 16.25 MARY'S CREEK WRF Shop Drawings: a. Make, model, weight, and horsepower of each equipment assembly. b. Manufacturer's catalog information, descriptive literature, specifications, and identification of materials of construction. c. Detailed structural, and electrical drawings showing the equipment fabrications and interface with other items. Include dimensions, size, and locations of connections to other work, and weights of associated equipment associated therewith. d. Gate operator and stem calculations for each gate and service condition. e. Gate opening and closing thrust forces that will be transmitted to the support structure with operator at extreme positions and load. f. Power and control wiring diagrams, including terminals and numbers. g. Anchorage and bracing drawings and cut sheets, as required by Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Anchorage and bracing calculations as required by Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing. 2. Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance, in accordance with Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements. 3. Special shipping, storage and protection, and handling instructions. 4. Manufacturer's written/printed installation instructions. 5. Routine maintenance requirements prior to plant startup. 6. Operation and Maintenance Data: As specified in Section 01 78 23, Operation and Maintenance Data. 7. Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation, in accordance with Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers' Field Services. 1.04 1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Coordinate such that electric motor operators are fully assembled and tested, including motor, at the factory. EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish, tag, and box for shipment and storage the following spare parts and special tools: Item Quantity Stem collars for all gate stems One of each different size Bronze lift nuts One of each different size Indicator lights One dozen Special tools required to maintain or dismantle One complete set JULY 30, 2026 FABRICATED SLIDE GATES AND STOP LOGS (C) COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 3520 16.25 MARY'S CREEK WRF B. Delivery: In accordance with Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Components and Materials in Contact with Water for Human Consumption: Comply with the requirements of the Safe Drinking Water Act and other applicable federal, state, and local requirements. Provide certification by manufacturer or an accredited certification organization recognized by the Authority Having Jurisdiction that components and materials comply with the maximum lead content standard in accordance with NSF/ANSI 61 and NSF/ANSI 372. 1. Use or reuse of components and materials without a traceable certification is prohibited. 2.02 SUPPLEMENTS A. See supplements to this section for additional product information. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Plate and Shapes: ASTM B209 and ASTM B308/B308M, Alloy 6061-T6. B. Stainless Steel: 1. Plate, Sheet, and Strip: ASTM A240/A240M, Type 316L. 2. Bars and Shapes: ASTM A276, Type 316L. 2.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Leakage shall not exceed 0.1 gallon per minute per foot of gate periphery under either seating or unseating head conditions. 2.05 SLIDE GATES A. Rising stem type, with assembly styles designated as follows: 1. Style A: Upward acting type for wall surface mounting on the concrete structures. 2. Style B: Upward acting type for mounting in channels with concrete embedded frame and invert. 3. Style C: Downward acting weir gate type with invert seal for wall surface mounting on the concrete structures. 4. Style D: Downward acting weir gate type with invert "P" seal for embedded side frame mounting in concrete structures. B. Guide Frames: 1. Stainless steel. JULY 30, 2026 FABRICATED SLIDE GATES AND STOP LOGS (C) COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 3520 16.25 MARY'S CREEK WRF 2. Vertical Guides: Design for maximum rigidity, and extend in one continuous piece from the gate invert to form posts for support of gate operators of self-contained gates. When guides extended above the operating floor, they shall be sufficiently strong so that no further reinforcements are required. a. Weight: Not less than 9 pounds per linear foot for stainless steel. b. Incorporate a replaceable UHMW polyethylene bearing strip in a retainer slot on the downstream side (unseating head side) of the gate. 3. Frame Invert: For flush bottom gate, furnish a neoprene insert to function as a seating surface for the gate disc. a. Weight: Not less than 9 pounds per linear foot for stainless steel. 4. Join vertical guide frames and invert with factory welded corners. 5. Size guided slot to provide a minimum disc engagement of 1 inch on each side. C. Disc: 1. Disc Plate (Sliding Member): One-piece stainless steel plate. Reinforce as required so that the disc will not deflect more than 1/720 of the gate span, when the upstream liquid depth (seating head side) is as shown on the schedule and the downstream liquid depth is less than 1/2 inch. 2. Reinforce gate disc with one-piece stainless steel angles or channels welded to the disc plate. Bolted reinforcements will not be permitted. D. Operator Support Yoke: 1. For self-contained gate operators, attached to the vertical extensions of the guide frames. 2. Constructed from at least two stainless steel angles, or two other suitable shapes, and bolt in place to provide a rigid assembly. 3. Maximum Deflection: Not to exceed 1/4 inch under full operator applied loading. E. Stems: 1. 1 -inch minimum diameter, ASTM A276, Type 316 stainless steel. 2. Threads: Acme type with RMS surface roughness of 63 microinches or less on the flanks for manually operated gates and 32 microinches or less on the flanks for electrically operated gates. Extend threaded portion of stem 2 inches above operator when gate is in CLOSED position. 3. Ratio of the unsupported stem length to the radius of gyration, both in inches, shall not exceed 200. 4. Stems to withstand in compression, without damage, the thrust equal to at least 2-1/2 times the rated output of the hoisting mechanism, with a 40 -pound effort applied to the handwheel or crank. 5. Design electric motor -driven floor stands to withstand at least 1.25 times the output thrust of the motor in the stalled condition. JULY 30, 2026 FABRICATED SLIDE GATES AND STOP LOGS (C) COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 3520 16.25 MARY'S CREEK WRF 6. Equip operating stems with cast iron, bushed stem guides, mounted on cast iron brackets; adjustable in two directions and spaced so that the L/r ratio does not exceed 200. 7. Adjustable stop collar for the CLOSED position. 8. Connect the stems to the disc plate with a yoke, bolted to the stem and welded to the disc. 9. Slide gates having a width greater than twice the height shall have dual stems. For downward opening weir type gates, locate stems near outside edges of gate. F. Stem Covers: 1. Transparent plastic, vented pipe stem cover and cap. 2. Provide with OPEN/CLOSED designators with 1 -inch graduations on clear mylar pressure sensitive, adhesive tape, suitable for outdoor application. G. Manufacturers: Stainless Steel: a. Rodney Hunt Co. b. H. Fontaine, Ltd. c. Whipps, Inc. d. Hydro Gate Corp. e. Waterman f. RW Gates 2.06 GATE OPERATORS A. General: 1. Components: Withstand a minimum of 250 percent of design torque or thrust at extreme operator positions without damage. 2. Mount at walkway level, 36 inches above floor, unless otherwise indicated or required. 3. Gear train and gate stem sections shall produce a self-locking drive train. 4. Lift Nuts: Internally threaded with cut or cold -rolled Acme threads corresponding to stem threading. 5. Roller Bearings: Ball -thrust or tapered above and below lift nut to support both opening and closing thrusts. a. Grease lubrication fittings for bearings. b. Input pinions with needle or ball bearings. 6. Lubrication: Furnish rising stem gates with an insert lubricator flange in lift, with grease fitting for greasing stem threads below stem nut. 7. Manual Operator Limit Switches: a. Mounted on an angle adjacent to stem and actuated through limit switch wands by stop collar. b. Single -pole, double -throw type, with contacts rated 5 amps at 120V ac. JULY 30, 2026 FABRICATED SLIDE GATES AND STOP LOGS (C) COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 3520 16.25 MARY'S CREEK WRF c. Provide two switches, one for gate full OPEN, and one for gate full CLOSED, where indicated. B. Dual -Stem Gate Operators: 1. Enclosed, geared floor stands. 2. Interconnect so operators will work as a unit from single point with interconnecting electric operator. 3. Interconnecting Shafts: a. Stainless steel with flexible couplings at ends. b. Diameter sufficient to prevent sagging. c. Include flanged coupling to allow precision weir leveling. C. Type 1, Handwheel-Operated Bench Stands: 1. Direct drive. 2. Sealed, ball thrust, roller or needle bearing type and equipped with bronze lift nut, internally threaded with Acme threads. 3. Furnish mechanical seals at housing penetrations. 4. Handwheel and Baseplate: Cast iron. 5. Manual Effort: Not to exceed 40 pounds. D. Type 2, Crank -Operated Bench Stands: 1. Weatherproof housings, mounted to the top horizontal member of the slide gate frame as described under paragraph Operator Support Yoke. 2. Solid Bronze Lift Nut: Integrally threaded with Acme threads. 3. Ball Thrust or Tapered Roller Bearings: a. Locate above and below operating nut flange to support opening and closing thrusts. b. Include grease lubrication fittings and input pinions. 4. Manual Crank Effort: Not to exceed 40 pounds. 5. Suitable for portable electric drill operation after removal of handcrank. E. Type 3, Geared Floor Stands: 1. Crank -operated, with weatherproof housings with solid bronze lift nut. 2. Mount on high -strength cast-iron pedestal or base. 3. Maximum manual crank effort to operate gate shall not exceed 40 pounds. 4. Lift Nut: Internally threaded with Acme threads. 5. Furnish ball thrust or tapered roller bearings above and below the lift nut to support both opening and closing thrusts. a. Grease lubrication fittings for bearings. b. Input pinions with needle or ball bearings. c. Mechanical seals at housing penetrations. 6. Suitable for portable electric drill operation after removal of handcrank. F. Type 4, Electric Motor Operators: JULY 30, 2026 FABRICATED SLIDE GATES AND STOP LOGS (C) COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 3520 16.25 MARY'S CREEK WRF 1. 28 -inch -high steel pedestal or direct yoke -mounted, totally enclosed weatherproof electric drive unit, and a totally enclosed gear box that operates a two-piece, bronze stem nut, which lifts the gate stem. 2. Gears: Heat treated alloy steel, supported throughout by antifriction ball or roller bearings and grease lubricated. 3. Automatic double-acting geared limit switches and double-acting torque switches. a. Gear directly to the operating gear train and shall be "in step" at all times, whether in motor or manual operation. b. Wire geared limit switches internally to stop the motor at the fully OPEN and fully CLOSED positions. c. Wire torque switches internally so that, in the event of a mechanical overload in either direction, the motor will be stopped. 4. Equip with side mounted handwheel for manual operation. a. Include an automatic clutch to positively disengage the handwheel at any time the drive motor control is energized. b. Design handwheel operator so that failure of the motorized gearing will not prevent hand operation of the gate. 5. Drive Unit: a. TENV, 480 -volt, three-phase electric motor as specified in Section 26 20 00, Low -Voltage AC Induction Motors, with integral OPEN/STOP/CLOSE weatherproof pushbuttons, reversing controller, 480/120 -volt control power transformer, space heaters in the limit switches and in the control compartments, mechanical dial type position indicator, and transparent plastic pipe stem cover and cap. b. Furnish motor enclosure with drainage and breathing holes. c. Self-locking, with approximately 12 inches per minute gate travel speed, and a rated running torque equal to 20 percent of the motor starting torque at a rated running time of 15 minutes, without exceeding the allowable NEMA temperature rise for the insulation class used. 6. Operation: Drive the gate to its fully OPEN or CLOSED position when the OPEN or CLOSED pushbutton is depressed momentarily. Motor shall stop in mid -travel when the STOP button is depressed. 7. Controls: Furnish the following in accordance with operator control styles listed below and specified in Slide Gate Schedule: Feature Description A Local OPEN/STOP/CLOSE pushbutton station B End position limit switches; OPEN and CLOSED position switches shall be normally open contacts that close at the end position; contacts shall be dry and rated for 5 amps, 120V ac. JULY 30, 2026 FABRICATED SLIDE GATES AND STOP LOGS (C) COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 3520 16.25 MARY'S CREEK WRY Feature Description C Continuous position output; provide transmitter to generate a 4 mA to 20 mA dc signal to an external loop in direct proportion to gate position; the transmitter shall be factory mounted in a NEMA 250, Type 4 enclosure. Transmitter shall be capable of driving an external load impedance of 350 ohms minimum. D LOCAL/REMOTE weatherproof selector switch and provisions for remote OPEN/STOP/CLOSE operation; remote commands will be by way of a four -wire circuit, as shown; motor operator shall impress the voltage required to read these contacts and shall go to the commanded position or stop when in the REMOTE mode. Provide auxiliary contact which closes when LOCAL/REMOTE switch is in REMOTE position. E3 a. Operator Control Styles: 1) Style 1: Includes control feature A only. 2) Style 2: Includes control features A and B. 3) Style 3: Includes control features A, B, and D. 4) Style 4: Includes control features A, B, C, and D Manufacturers and Products: a. Rotork Controls;. b. Flowserve Limitorque;. C. AUMA;. G. Identification Tagging Requirements: 1. For each gate operator, 1 -1/2 -inch minimum diameter heavy brass tag, bearing the gate tag number shown in the schedule. 2. Attach the tags to the operator by soldered split key rings to that ring and tag cannot be removed. Use block type numbers and letters with 1/4 -inch minimum high numbers and letters stamped on and filled with black enamel. EkA I1lI r,n,. fl iiiuiii JULY 30, 2026 FABRICATED SLIDE GATES AND STOP LOGS (C) COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 3520 16.25 MARY'S CREEK WRF !ins ■ s I! EI U.s.a• !lT.'1:Ilt....af�SlS!llis:'fFl:7Si!T7:llisT..f1}'.flF:�lT.Sr. .... fElTS!!F . JULY 30, 2026 (C) COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER FABRICATED SLIDE GATES AND STOP LOGS 35 20 16.25 MARY'S CREEK WRF 2.07 STOP LOGS A. MANUFACTURERS 1. Manufacturers: a. RW Gate Company. b. Waterman. c. Hydro Gate. d. H. Fontaine, Ltd. e. Whipps. f. Rodney Hunt, Co. B. General 1. Each stoplog shall have two slots on the top surface for the purpose of engaging the stoplog lifting device hooks. The stoplogs shall allow for rapid drainage of all water and under no circumstances shall the log be buoyant. 2. The stop log assemblies shall be provided as specified herein and as shown in the Contract Documents. Individual stop logs shall be lowered into place with a lifting device and shall be used to control the flow or water level as required for the application. 3. Obtain all stoplogs and frames from a single manufacturer. C. Performance requirements 1. Leakage for the stop logs shall be restricted to 0.10 gpm/ft or less of the seal perimeter at the design seating head. 2. Leakage from bulkheads shall be restricted to 0.10 gpm/ft for each leaf section. 3. All of the seals shall be mounted on the log or bulkhead to facilitate seal replacement. D. Materials of Construction 1. Stoplogs shall be constructed of either aluminum or stainless steel as specified in the construction drawings and the Schedule in the drawings. 2. Bulkheads shall be constructed of stainless steel. 3. All aluminum shall be allow 6061-T6, ASTM B308/308M. Aluminum stoplogs shall be constructed of aluminum extrusions. 4. All stainless steel referenced in this specification shall be Type 304 or Type 304L, ASTM A240 or ASTM A276 unless otherwise indicated herein. a. All welded stainless steel components shall be constructed of Type 304L stainless steel. JULY 30, 2026 FABRICATED SLIDE GATES AND STOP LOGS (C) COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 3520 16.25 MARY'S CREEK WRF b. All structural stainless steel used in the construction of stoplogs, frames, and storage racks (if applicable) shall have a minimum material thickness of 1/4 - inch. c. All non -welded stainless steel components, excluding anchor bolts and assembly bolts, shall be Type 304 stainless steel. d. Anchor bolts and assembly bolts shall be Type 316 stainless steel. E. Stoplogs The stoplogs shall be constructed of extruded aluminum or formed stainless steel plate reinforced with stiffeners, as needed, to withstand the specified head conditions. The log shall engage the frame a minimum of 1 -1/2 -inches on each side. a. The stoplog shall be reinforced with plates or channel shaped members to restrict deflection to less than L/360 of the span or 1/8 -inch, whichever is less, at the design head. b. Stoplogs shall be designed to ensure that they will not float and they will lower into place through gravity. c. The top of each stoplog shall be provided with two slots to receive the lifting device. Lifting hooks and/or pins extending from the stop log are not acceptable. d. All seals shall be mounted on the stop logs. e. No individual stainless steel stop log with a width of 60" or less and height of 12" or less; shall weigh more than 135 pounds. Individual Aluminum stoplogs should weigh no greater than a maximum of 100 pounds. f. Stoplogs shall be identical and designed to stack in any sequence (per each specified channel location). g. Each stoplog shall have a tag, constructed of stainless steel, attached via welding or rivets, to indicate the manufacturer's name, opening width, and maximum head rating as a minimum. F. Bulkheads 1. The leaf shall be of horizontal and vertical structural reinforcing members and a smooth faceplate, and shall be assembled and securely welded to provide a flat, box -shaped gate leaf. The structural members shall be of the proper size, dimension, and placement to safely withstand the maximum unbalanced head designated as the maximum height in the Schedule. The faceplate shall be of sufficient thickness to safely withstand the maximum unbalanced head and shall be attached to structural members by welding. 2. The leaf shall be designed to limit deflection to L/360 for overflow -type gates and to a maximum 3/16 in. for breastwall-type gates at upper reinforcing members. 3. The gate shall be fabricated of no greater than 3 separate pieces, joints shall include a rubber gasket to minimize leakage. 4. Each section cannot weigh more than 500 lbs maximum to allow for lowering into place by a jib hoist. Each section must have slots at the top surface for the purpose of engaging lifting device hooks for safe lowering and lifting. 5. Sill Plate: The bottom sill plate shall provide a smooth, level, and corrosion - resistant contact surface for the bottom seat for the full width of the invert of the JULY 30, 2026 FABRICATED SLIDE GATES AND STOP LOGS (C) COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 3520 16.25 MARY'S CREEK WRF gate. The sill plate shall be adjustable on anchor to permit leveling and alignment with the gate bottom. After the gate has been installed and the sill plate adjusted, it shall be grouted in place. G. Seals 1. The seal system shall consist of a set of resilient lip seals made of neoprene rubber or EPDM sides and across the bottom of each log and a UHMWPE wear bar on the side opposite where the lip seal is mounted. 2. The seals and wear bar shall be mounted on the stop logs. No seats, seals, or wear bars shall be mounted in or on the frame. 3. The seals and wear bars shall be secured with stainless steel assembly bolts. All seals shall be field removable and field replaceable. 4. The seals shall be located along the bottom of the log section and along both ends of each log and shall be mechanically attached to the log. Adhesives alone are not an acceptable mounting method. Seals shall be mounted in a manner that allows for easy replacement in the event of damage. 5. For bulkheads, J -seals shall be provided, they shall be securely fastened to the frame with two formed stainless steel retainers and shall be replaceable and adjustable. The corners of the J -seals shall be vulcanized. The bottom seal shall be a flat faced rubber hollow or solid shape. Seals and retainer flats shall be provided with holes to match. H. Frame 1. The frame shall be constructed of stainless steel plate, formed into "C" shaped channels for rigidity, and shall be reinforced to withstand the specified operating conditions. 2. The frame shall be a rigid, one-piece assembly as configured on the Contract Drawings. Frames can be provided in three sections, with bolted corner sections, when shipping restrictions prevent shipping a frame intact. 3. The frame shall not contain any rubber or plastic seals or seats for the stoplogs. 4. Wall mounted frames shall be reinforced with gussets to minimize frame deflection in the unseating head condition. Lifting Device 1. A lifting device shall be provided to install and remove the stop logs from the frame. 2. The lifting device shall automatically engage each stop log individually for installation or removal. 3. The portion of the lifting device that engages the frame shall be outfitted with UHMWPE bearing strips to ensure no metal -to -metal contact occurs between the lifting device and the inside of the frame. 4. The lifting device shall be provided with a lifting lug on the top and utilized in conjunction with a hoist, crane or manual lowering. Anchorage 1. Anchor bolts shall be 316 stainless steel, fully threaded, and sized by the MANUFACTURER with a minimum diameter of 1/2 -inch. JULY 30, 2026 FABRICATED SLIDE GATES AND STOP LOGS (C) COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 3520 16.25 MARY'S CREEK WRF 2. Anchor bolts shall be of the epoxy type. K. Finish 1. Stainless Steel a. All heat tint and slag from the welding process shall be passivated in accordance with ASTM A380. If bead blasting is utilized, the entire frame and the entire stoplog shall be bead blasted for a uniform finish. 2. Aluminum a. All aluminum shall be mill finish. b. Aluminum in contact with concrete shall be field coated with a heavy coat of bitumastic paint field applied by the CONTRACTOR. c. All heat tint and slag from the stainless steel welding process shall be passivated in accordance with ASTM A380. 2.08 APPURTENANCES A. Lifting Lugs: Furnish suitably attached for equipment assemblies and components weighing over 100 pounds. B. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A193/A193M, Type 316 stainless steel sized by equipment manufacturer at least 1/2 inch in diameter, or as shown, and as specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications. C. Staff Gauges: For stainless steel, downward acting weir gates. Graduated in 1/4 inches and marked every inch and foot. 1. Manufacturer and Product: Stevens Water Monitoring Equipment; Porcelain Enameled Style C. 2.09 SHOP/FACTORY FINISHING A. Mechanically descale and passivate all weld burn and weld slag in accordance with ASTM A380 to provide uniform finish. B. Coat all aluminum surfaces in contact with concrete with unthinned bitumastic paint in accordance with Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating, or insulate with suitable protective neoprene gasket material. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. In accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions. B. Disassemble factory assembled gate components before installation. C. Field mount operators after installing gates. JULY 30, 2026 FABRICATED SLIDE GATES AND STOP LOGS (C) COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 3520 16.25 MARY'S CREEK WRF D. Brace thimbles internally during concrete placement. E. Accurately place anchor bolts using templates furnished by the manufacturer and as specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications. F. Lubricate stems before operating. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Functional Tests: Conduct on each slide gate. B. Performance Test: 1. Conduct on each slide gate. 2. Perform under actual or approved simulated operating conditions. 3. Fully open and close each slide/weir gate 5 times to verify gate moves smoothly during full range of operation. 4. Test for a continuous 3-hourperiod without malfunction. 5. Adjust, realign, or modify units and retest if necessary. 3.03 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES A. Manufacturer's Representative: Present at Site or classroom designated by Owner, for minimum person -days listed below, travel time excluded: 1. 4 person -days for installation assistance and inspection. 2. 2 person -days for functional and performance testing and completion of Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation. 3. 1 person -days for prestartup classroom or Site training. 4. 2 person -days for facility startup. 1person-days for post -startup training of Owner's personnel. Training shall not commence until an accepted detailed lesson plan for each training activity has been reviewed by Owner. B. See Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers' Field Services and Section 01 9114, Equipment Testing and Facility Startup. C. Provide manufacturer's representative at Site in accordance with Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers' Field Services, for installation assistance, inspection and certification of proper installation, equipment testing, startup assistance, and training of Owner's personnel for specified component, subsystem, equipment, or system. 3.04 SUPPLEMENTS A. See drawings for slide gate and stop log schedules. Slide Gate Schedule. END OF SECTION JULY 30, 2026 FABRICATED SLIDE GATES AND STOP LOGS (C) COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 3520 16.25